BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME FROM THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF Mtnvu 13« Sage 1891 Cornell University Library PA 161.S65 The theory of conditional sentences in G 3 1924 021 599 752 '^^. Cornell University Library The original of tiiis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924021599752 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN GEEEK AND LATIN THE THEOEY OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN GEEEK & LATIN FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS BY EICHAED HOETON- SMITH, M.A. OSE OP IlEE majesty's CODNBEL FORMEBLT FELLOW OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, OAMBRIDOE, AND SOMETIME CLASSICAL LECTDBEK OF KINO'S COLLEGE, LONDON "Des achten Mannes wahre Feier ist die That." — Goethe Pcmdora ad fin. KpeiTTov ydp irov (r/UKpii/ eS ■^ TroXi ixti UavSis vepavai.. — Plat. ThecKt. p. 187 E. ILonlioiT MACMILLAN AND CO. AND NEW YOBK 1894 All rights reserved TO THE DEAE MEMORIES OP THOMAS HEWITT KEY, HENKY MALDEN, AND THE Rev. RICHARD SHILLETO : TO WHOM, IN THEIR LIVES, THIS BOOK, IN ITS FIRST PUBLISHED FORM, WAS, BY PERMISSION, GRATEFULLY INSCRIBED. PKEFACE This book is the fruit of nearly half a century's study of the subject of which it treats on the part of the writer ; and if he thought that, notwithstanding that the nonus annus of the poet-^ has long since come and gone, yet further delay would add substantial value to his work, he would not scruple to impose it upon himself. But he doubts any such policy of further hesitation. There is such a thing, as the Preacher warns us,^ as the " loosing of the silver cord " and the " breaking of the golden bowl." It has been remarked * as a common " incident in artificers to be enamoured of their own works," which they are ever " stiU mending, never ending." It can be said of a writer, as Carlyle * said of SchiUer, that he " konnte nie fertig iverden, never could get done." And if to get done is at the same time to expose the doer to the gaze of all as also the maker of mistakes, his consolation must be found in the wise reflection of the late American Minister Mr. Phelps,^ that " the man who makes no mistakes does not usually make anything " ; and in the consciousness that, whatever may have been his own mistakes, there are always 1 Hor. A. p. 388. ^ Ecples. xii. 6. ^ Lyly Alexander and Cam^aspe act v. so. 4. ' Carlyle Critical and Miscellaneous Essays "Sir Walter Scott," ed. 1872, vol. Ti. p. 73. ^ Speech at the Mansion House, Farewell Banquet to him, 24th January 1889, reported in the Tiines of the next day. viii GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES at hand persons wiser than himself to supply the necessary antidote. " With all its imperfections on its head," " therefore, of which no one is more sincerely conscious than the writer himself, this volume at length sees the light. Composed, as it has been, in hours snatched from the avocations of an engrossing profession, hours often in that profession legitimately given up to recreation of a lighter kind, but seldom — to its honour be it said — wasted in that " somno do ocio ignavo, que o animo de livre faz escravo," ^ the writer has yet spared no pains to render the result of his labours at once worthy of the dear memories to which he consecrates it, and acceptable to those who yet live to hand on in their turn the lamp of classical learning. ^ Shaksp. Hamlet act i. so. 5. ' Camoens Os Lusiadas ix. 92. 7. Whatever his defects in some other respects, Cicero was no idle lawyer as touching the off-hours of his profession. See his description of his mode of putting into practice Cato's maxim — "olarorum virorum atque magnorum non minus otii quam negotii rationem exstare oportere " — in pro Plane. 27. 66 ; jpro Archia 6. 12 sqq. In our own country Lord Coke preserves to us (Co. Litt. p. 64 6) certain "advice" to the student of law, "given in these ancient verses, for the good spending of the day," in the lines — " sex horas somno, totidem des legihus acquis ; I quattuor orabis, des epulisque duas ; | quod superest ultra sacris largire Camenis " ; advice fully acted up to in its last particular by Sir Samuel Romilly, whose travelling carriage was " filled with the best books of the general literature of the day," and whose answer to his astonished friend was (see Lord Campbell's Lives of the Lord ChoMcellors iv. p. 174 note t) "As soon as I found I was to be a busy lawyer for life, I strenuously resolved to keep up my habit of non-pro- fessional reading ; for I had witnessed so much misery in the last years of many great lawyers whom I had known, from their loss of all taste for books, that I regarded their fate as my warning." According to the Corinthians at the Spartan Congress in B.O. 432 (Thuc. i. 70. 9) mere idleness was a thing abhorrent to the very genius of the whole Athenian people : i.wo'Kaiomi.v iMxta-ra tup inrapxtvTwv Sia rb del KTaadai. ral /iii}Te iopriiii &\Ko Ti rjyeia-dat f/ t6 to Siovra irpd^ai, ^viialii veipvKivai. iirl tQ /i-fp-e aiiTois ^x"" ^o-vxiav ij.iyrc Tois dXKovs AvOpiiTovs i&v ipBui hi diroi. PKEFACE ix It would be tedious, without at the same time serving any useful purpose, to advert in any detail to the process of evolution of the present essay from its embryonic form, in the writer's yet undergraduate days, or even from the form of its first public appearance in 1859.^ Many things have happened in the domain of scholar- ship since those days. Madvig, illustrious alike in the worlds of statesmanship and of letters, to whom his countrymen may with pride and with justice apply the eulogium of Cato ® — " Clarum et venerabile nomen Gentibus, et multum nostrae quod proderat urbi " — has sunk full of years and of honours to his rest at Copen- hagen. Holland laments her brilliant, if withal eccentric and headstrong, Cobet. Germany is the poorer in the absence of its Dindorfs, its Eitschls, its Bergks. In our own country the places of the writer's fondly remembered instructors. Professors Key and Maiden and Mr. Shilleto, know them no more. Cambridge scholars look round, too, in vain for their Kennedys, their Thompsons, their Munros ; whilst at Oxford gaps difficult to supply have been made by the disappearance /rom the scene of scholars like Dr. Scott of BalUol, and Mr. W. E. Jelf of Christ Church. Alike on the banks of the Cam and of the Isis have new generations arisen to carry on the traditions of Porson, Monk, Dobree, John Wordsworth; of Elmsley, Arnold, Gaisford ; to bear aloft the flag of classical culture and carry the cause to victory against the indifference, if not even the hostility, of modern sciolism. Nor have our ' An Outline of the Theory of Conditional Sentences in Oreeh and Latin. For the Use of Students. By E. Horton Smith, M.A., Fellow of St. John's College, Camhridge, and Classical Lecturer of King's College, London. Cam- bridge : Macmillan and Co. 1859. » Lucan ix. 202. X GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Transatlantic brethren been behind, and the publication in 1860 of Professor Goodwin's Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Gi'eeh Verb marked a distinct epoch in the forward march of modern American classical scholarship. This last mentioned work contains matter germane to the Greek part of the subject of this present essay. PubHshed, however, as the Professor's book was, after the present writer's former publication, and after the cessation of his official connection with the teaching of classics, an acquaintance on his part with the results of the American scholar's labours was unnecessary. And, in point of fact, they remained wholly unknown to him, except by reputa- tion, until after the completion of this present work. Indeed, when the comparative leisure, which usually falls to the lot of a young "silk," enabled him, in 1879, to resume with something like seriousness his interrupted labours on Conditional Sentences in Greek and Latin, he preferred — nullius addiotus jurare in verba magistri i" — to do so with absolute independence, and to leave the issues to the arbitrament of an unbiassed investigation. Nor does he regret his determination. If, on the one hand, such knowledge as he has, since the completion of his own work, gained of that of Professor. Goodwin has shown him that in more than one important point in the Greek part of his subject, even in matters of principle, his own views and those of the learned Professor are not always in accord, he is free to confess, on the other hand, that he has himself had very considerably — and that not in connection with Greek only — to modify his own preconceived ideas ; to lay aside as destitute of adequate foundation many matters which in his own early training i» Hor. Ilpp. i. 1. 14. PREFACE xi had been placed before him as axiomatic truths ; to accept conclusions against the truth of which, in some cases, he had himself in earlier days even pubhcly protested. It could not have been otherwise. It was not for him to controvert the thoughtful wisdom of Aristotle, when he af&rmed ^^ — Sofete S' av ifo-a)? ^iXriov elvat koX Eeiv iirl (TWTrjpia ye rrj's aXTjOebw; koI to, oiKela avaipelv, aWo)? re Kol ^CKoa-6ri I th t 1 imperfect ysuojwncfives, "^ ,7 I tiie present . j / ., ypa.\pri ) ^ \inaefinite] so ^^^/'"^'"^ ^'■'^ respectively represent K "^ ,. , ,. ,. ± ypa<^oi f fi, / ■ItmperfectVmbjimctwes.* ypdij/eie J -^ [indefinite) Here again, and for like purposes of clearness, the proper phraseology will be adhered to in the following 9. The tenses of the Indicative Mood denote actual facts. 10. The tenses of the Subjunctive Mood denote possible, as opposed to actual, facts.^ 11. If we give a concrete form to these general remarks, we shall arrive at the following results ® ; — GREEK AND LATIN §11 (A) Tenses of the Indicative Mood, whicli denote actual facts. '(a) Perfect eo-TijKci'' posuerat(se) (a) Past time (/3) Imperfect MTTi; ponebat ^(y) Indefinite e(TTr]a-e posuit ■(a) Perfect ecTTij/ce posuit (se) (b) Present time- (fi) Imperfect io-rrjcn ponit (y) Indefinite i(TTrjcn ^ ponit ^ (c) Future time ■ (a) Perfect OTT^^et posuerit (i (J3) Imperfect o-Tijo-ei ponet 1" _(y) Indefinite o-T^crei ponet (B) Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood, which denote possible, af ' (a) Perfect lo-TTjKws eirj posuisset (a) Past time ■ (/8) Imperfect la-TaiT] poneret (y) Indefinite crTijo-£te posuisset §n CONDITIONAL SENTENCES He- He- (shall He^ or [mll^ ■had placed himself : the effects remaining, viz. that he was standing when you came in. had been pladnq) , was placing ^^hen you came in. hod-placed) . , . ., vlaced pingle acts : the matter was at an end (x) when you came in. (y) I do not say when. 'has placed himself : the effects remaining, viz. that he is standing, when you come in. has been placinq) , ispla^i4 ^jwhen you come in. , -^ [-single acts : the matter is at an end (k) when you come in. [y) I do not say when. 'home placed himself : the effects remaining, viz. that he will be standing, when you come in. have been placingX"' , be placing j , ^ Vsinele acts : the matter vntl be at an end place j ° (x) when you come in. (y) I do not say when. you come m. 3d to actual, facts. r (i.) ever and anon ?A' ■place j '^placed j ecrrrjcrev av lshould\ (placed himself: the effects remaining (ii.)-j or J-^ve^*-! been placing \wouldj [jjJaceti ; single act ^have placed [has placed himself himself r shall have been "j has been "i fi . ij,. {i.)\ or - placing - = in cases where he- placing - TT'^f.i wTi\K£V av ( will be placing j is placing '^r. iJtv (.'(TTijtrtv av If he-( have-placed\ ^place J has-placed\ ^places ) rr ir has placed himself : the effects remaining 'w la-TTTfcrLV av has been placing\ is placing J (ii.) truly- has-placed\ . places 1 gTffa (kcrrri^ii av {shall or will ^.jsi (^o-T^(r6i av 'have placed himself : the effects remaining have been placing\ be placing j have-placed^..^^ , jilace ) : acts , .jj^noting contingencies, on their way from possibilities to actual facts. ]pfk^ po-n/Kws av ei'ij f should If he J. or would ^* '' I have placed himself : the effects remaining place Vsingle acts 22 GREEK AND LATIN i30 (6) Present time '(a) Perfect (y8) Imperfect ei (■y) Indefinite ei(rBo) have happened : the effects remaining have been happening 1 be happening have-happened \ ^^-^^ ^happen f ° act 21 GREEK AND LATIN §31 Or the apodosis might in any of these three sets of cases take the form of a subjunctive used for an imperative ; or of a past subjunctive, as expressive of a wish; or of a (B) fl with the past sub- junctive — (i.) Expressive of indefinite frequency, recurrence ; fol- lowed by the past indicative with ILv expressive of inde- finite frequency, recurrence ; or the past or present indic- ative. If soever — did, then as often would (solebat) — Or, then — did. does. (ii. ) Followed by the past subjunctive with &f ; or the past subjunctive expressive of possibility or a wish ; or (the verb in the protasis expressing perfectness or indefiniteness) the past in- dicative with dv. If — were, would — would possibly — might — may — ! Or, If — were to have -ed, would have -ed. - (B) Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood, which denote possible, (a) Past time — f{a) Perfect reo-TiyKws eUt) (;8) Imperfect dJ. t(TTairj If. [(7) Indefinite {a-rrja-eie (i. ) soever he- (ii. ) he were- 'Tmd placed himself: the effects remaining had been placing 1 was placing f S'^l-gleact. to have placed himself: the effects remaining to be placing 1 placing J to have-placed 1 single I to place acts Sometimes, and in certain cases in class ii. — viz. those in which the verb in the protasis expresses perfectness or el with the present sub-" junotive — (i. ) Expressive of indefinite frequency, recurrence ; fol- lowed by the present in- dicative (or its equivalent). If soever — does, then as often will (solet) — Or, then — does. (ii.) Followed by the present or future indicative (or their equivalents) ; or the past subjunctive expressive of possibility or a wish ; or the imperative. If haply — shall, — does, shall may! let— (J) Present time — 1(a) Perfect (|8) Imperfect el (7) Indefinite 'iaT-qKoys y IcTTrj CTTTJO-g (i. ) soever he- 'has placed himself: the effects remaining has been placing 1 * is placing J If-^ ^-^^"'=^'^1 single acts places j ° have vlaeed himself: the have placed himself effects remaining Jiave been placing ^ be placing f !>-fve-placed\..^^^ place f ° §31 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 25 past or present subjunctive, as expressive of a possibility ; or of the past indefinite Indicative as used to denote a general fact; or as the case may be. )sed to actual, facts. eytyv€TO av eylvero av fyeyevYjfiivov av eir] [iiMylyvoiTO av this \yivoiTO av fthen as often rf"^ ^-^'^^"^ . / . I should \^^^ieenhappemng] isJ. -< ie happening j would \h«.^^-^mned\ \ yhappen J should or would ^ I haiie happened } (, / rhad happened C / fyeyev^TO \ kad be fn happening I 7^7^'"?™' eyiyvero J. was happening j or-] yiyverat Jy^rero \had-happened ] yi'yverat ' Khappenea j V ' [yeyevrj/Mvov eiri should or r \ have happened I / would possibly I be happening or-^ytyvotTO OT might \ \ hayoe-happened\ \ykvoiTO ox may ! [ happen J (has happened has been happening \ is happening f has-happened \ happens j indefiniteness — the apodosis takes the form of a past tense Indicative with dv.^^ (i.). ii.) rytyevijrat ytyverat [ytyverai (yeyevr/Tai , yiyverai Vyiyverai (then as (have happened often I have been happening \ shall \ be happening j or I have-happened 1 mil Khappen ) (has happened (yiyevna-eTai , ,, [have happened has been happening 1 ' ' , ' shall j^ j^appening is happening I or-^ ycv^a-erai %,\ha^eZppened\ has-happened\ Utv^o-erat *"*" [ha^en f (has happened has been happening \ is happening ) has-happened \ < (yeyevrjiJ,evov etij / Chave happened rycyevi^crOia y.>o.xo LJt^z^Zdx-Wy:%''^ yevoiTO '^2/- [happen ) {yfv&rO(o (ha/oe happened be happening have-happened \ happen j 26 GREEK AND LATIN §31 (A') ei witli the (A.') Tenses of the Indicative Mood with av : a construction denoting past indicative ° with &v ; or idv with the past in- dicative ; or idv r(a) Perfect (ktrT-qKei av (ea-rqKei with the past in- I I dicative with &" •■ , ^ -a 4. j.' /on t r x > " » j\ » as a protasis W " ^^'' tmie-j (p) Imperieot ei-j itrrij av or eav-^ kj-tyj (i.) In cases where — did. I (y) Indefinite (ii.)If— should ^ or would have -ed. ccTTijo-ev av ep^"o. a this, etc. g {shall or will 'have placed himself : the effects remaining have heen placing) he placing ) hme-plaoed).^^^ acts TOVTO K.T.k. I. CD M f-i :; .5° & -^ .2 « el's so g i S a gix,ri or the past sub- ToiavTTj TrapeixTT-JKei irporepov Trepl kfxov, m apa lyw eyUijvucra jxmctive, as ex- Kara. TO))' eraipmv rmv ifiavTov, . . . a-KOTrua-Oe e^ avTWV ^^ ^f possibility, Twv yeyevrjixivuv = " if then any one of you had pre- etc. viously entertained some such notion as this about me, ^^"^jj ^^ as that, after all, I denounced my own friends, consider {*2|^}'"{^^ the matter from the point of view of what has actually i-ao- happened." "j may— ! IsaeUS, de Pyrrh. Eaered. p. 42. 6 ei ^o-^a iyyeyvrjKij^ ri^ t-posaiMymay, IL-ippo) rrjv dSeXtfyriv, Kai el ySus e^ avrrj^ dvyaripa yvrja-iav 43. (a) Past time. D 34 GREEK AND LATIN § 43 43. (a) Past time. KaTaAetTroynei/TjVj Trios CT-erpei/'as ...;=" if yOU had engaged your sister to Pyrrhus, and if you knew that a legitimate daughter of hers was surviving, why did you allow . .1" Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 411. 9 et n o-wottSv eyvuiKeiv, Aeyctv i^a.yofx.aL = " if I had learnt to exercise to some extent the gift of silence, I am yet being driven to speech." (/3) Imperfect : Aesch. Ag. 866 koI Tpavfidroiv fiev et Tocruiv iTvy)(avev \ av'qp o6 , (OS TT/jos oTkov (L^ereveTO | dTLs, Terpwrat Siktvov TrXeov Aeyetv = " and as to wounds indeed if my lord here was coming in for as many, as report of them was being brought by different channels to us at home, he has been wounded in more places than a net, so to speak." Thuc. vi. 89. 3 Kal vvv, e! rts Kal to't€** iv T(j) 7ra.cr)(ii.v OVK eJ/coTcos wpyL^ero fj.oi,, /xera toC dX-rjdovs dvaTrndeo'Oo) = " and now, if any one then, during the actual suffering, was angry with me — unjustly — let him recognise the truth and change his opinion of me." Plat. Apol. p. 20 C TTo^ev a J Smfiokai croi avral yeyovacnv ; ov yap Si^TTov, crov ye ov6ev tmv aXAiov TrepiTTOTepov Trpayfiarevop-evov, eVetTa rorravrrj '^'ij/i'»J TC kol Xdyos •yeyoi/6v, 66 /lij tl eVparTts dWoiov rj ot ■jroAAot = "whence have come these misconceptions of you ? For never, surely, if you have been acting in no way differently from other people, have, under those conditions, so much gossip and talk arisen about you — I mean, unless you were acting in some way otherwise than the mass of people act." ^^ Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 351. 6 el p.lv tolvw Tavra Travres e7rpea/3evofJi,ev, StKatcos ovSeva, eirrjvecrev = " if then SUch and the same was the way, in which we were all behaving ourselves on our embassy, he rightly awarded praise to "none." See also Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 408 C. (7) Indefinite : Horn. II. i. 39 e't irore rot ^apUvT cttI vijbv epeipa, | • . • ToSe /xot KjOTjijvov eeXSiap ^^^ = " ii ever for thee I have- completed a beauteous fane, this wish accomplish for me." 5 44 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 35 Em-. Iph. Tawr. 447 ^Sto-r av t^vS' ayyeXtW I Be^atiieo-e', 43. (a) Past time. EAAaSos EK I yas xAtoT^puv et rts eySa, | SouXetas efieOev I SeiAatas TraDcrtVovos = " most gladly should ( = practically, "shall") I receive this troop, if from the land of Hellas any voyager is-come, to put an end to the pains of the slavery of me, the -woeful one." Thuc. i. 86. 1 el TTjOos roiis M'^Sous eyevovro dyadol totCj ?rp6s Se ij/tas KaKol vvv, Sarkaa-tas ^"qfj-Laq a^ioi dv(Tiv = " for if I have been born skilled in such doings as these, it would almost seem that I am not disgracing your breeding." 36 GREEK AND LATIN § 44 44. (i) Present Eur. Iph. Aul. 1207 et S «5 AeAc/crat vwi', /U.?) S^ yc Kravgg | *™^- TTjv cnjv re Ka/xiji/ vratSa = " if we have well spoken, do not then indeed slay your child and mine." Hippocr. de capit. vulner. i. p. 899. ed. Foes = iii. p. 353. 1, ed. Kiihn, oiSi yap tl ■ireXa(TTai, . . . ylvcrai Toitriv 69aX.iioii KaTatJMvh ISetv avTiKo, fiera rrjv TpSmv = " for not even if the parts have been bruised to pieces, is the matter apparent to the eyes to see immediately after the injury." Plat. Onto, p. 49 E crol S e'i Try aXXy SeSoKrai, Acye Kal SiSaa-Ke = " but if an opinion in any other direction has been formed by you, speak and teach us." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 404. 17 et Ta{JTa irewoirjKa, (^aCXds et/xt a.vdpmro's = " if I have acted thus, I am a good-for- nothing creature." See also Plat, de Bep. ii. p. 368 A; Dem. c. Philipp. Epist. p. 15.7. 13. (;8) Imperfect : Hom. II. i. 573 ^ Si) Xoiyia tpya Ta8 €(Tovevcrei. rovfiov ovop.a, = " I turn out indeed to be the worst of the Argives, if my name shall be the murderer." Eur. Med. 78 dirwAo/teo-^' ap'/" el KaKov ■irpoa-oiarop.ev | veov TraXauij irplv t68 e^vrXrjKevai = " our last hour is come, then, if we shall be for adding a new evil to the old one before we have exhausted this." Eur. Med. 352 et o-' rj VioCo-a Aa/*7ras oxpeTai deov \ Kal iratSas cvTos rrjarSe Tepp,6voiv x^o^oSj | daveX - " if the succeed- ing sun shall be looking upon you and your children within the boundaries of this land, you will die." ^^ Thuc. i. 80. 3 el Se p.eXeTr)a-ofj.ev Kal dvTnrapaa-Keva(r6- p.eda, x/ooVos evea-Tai = " but if we shall be for practis- § 45 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 39 ing and making counter - preparations', time will be 45. (c) Future involved." time. Xen. Jnab. iii. 1. 17 Kal ^i^v d i(jyr,(T6iJi.eda Kal IttJ f3(wiXd yevT]a-6iJ.e6a, t'i oi6iJie6a Treia-ecrdai ; ~ " and yet if we shall be for hauling down our ilag and submitting to the king, what do we suppose will be our fate ? " Plat. Crit. Tp. 47 D ^ d /ji.rj aKokovO-qa-oiJ.a', 8ta05epou/iev €Ketvo KoX ktofirjo-OfieOa, o T(j) jiiv SiKait^ jiiXriov kyiyvero, T(ff Si dSiKi^ dTrdXXvTo = " whom if we shall not be for following, we shall be destroying and damaging that which with the just man was on the way (as we said) to become better, and with the unjust man was on the way to be destroyed." ^^ Theophrast. irepl KoAaKetas : Kal Jiricrij/iijvacr^at Se, d Trava-erai = " and to make a sign, if my lord shall be for making a pause." (7) Indefinite : Pmd. Nem. xi. 13 d Se ns 6k/3ov c^wv f^p^jx} Trapaneuimai aAAuv, I eV T diOXom-iv dpia-revoiv CTriSei^ev ^lav, \ 'Ovara fiep,vaa-06rj(reTat, | o^K ecTTi irepcrai, iroi to AapSavov TriSov = " but if you shall do anything else than this, you will inflict trouble upon all the Greeks. For if his bow shall not be taken, there are no means by which you may take the Dardan territory." Eur. Suppl. 454 prj ^ojtjv en, | el rdpa TeKva Trpos /Slav vvpiptvcreTai ^^ = " may I live no longer, if my children shall be forcibly given in marriage." Thuc. i. 81. 3 et S aS rov^ ^vppd\ovs d(l)UTTdvanreipa(T6pe0a, Serjaei Kal tovtoi? vavcri j3orj9eiv . . . r'l's oSv einai, "qpuiv 6 TToAe/ios ; £1 prj yap r) vavcrt KpaTiqa'opev rj ras irpofroSows dv pXaKemiv, eKkeyofievo^ tov eTriTirjSeiov iTraurtv av = " if soever any one of those who were told off for this service was seeming to him to be sluggish, then as often would he pick out the likely man and strike him." Herod, ix. 13 oiiVe iTnraa-ifiri ij X'^'PV '7" ^7 'Attikt^, e? te viKi^o crvfi/iaXdv, axaAAa^is ovk rjv = " not only was Attica unfitted for cavalry, but if soever he was getting worsted in an engagement, there was no means of getting away." Eur. Mec. 1165 el /Jiev irpoo-WTrov e^aviXTTairjv i[wv, \ KOfirjv Karet^oi', et Se Kivoir/v )(^ipas, \ irXr^Oei yvvaiKiov ovSev '>]vvov T-aAas = " if soever I was raising my face, they kept holding me down by the hair; and if soever I was moving my hands, by reason of the press of women I was able, luckless one, to do nothing." Plato (Comicus) 2kcv. Fr. 1 ei ns opxotr t®, Oeafi ^v = "if soever any one was dancing well, it was a sight to see." Thuc. vii. 44. 5 et iXiov eirj . . . , TToAe/tiov aiofii^ov . . . et fiev evTu^otev tuti . . . , Siecfievyov avrov'S . . . et S avTol /iTj [viroKpivoiVTo, SiecjiOeipovTo = " if soever a party was one of friends, they kept deeming it one of foes : if soever there came together . . . , an escape of the foe was ensuing ; whilst if they themselves were backward in answering to the pass-word, they were being put to the sword." Xen. Cl/r. i. 3. 3 ei ttov e^ekavvoi, €v evSodev, ■>] et Tts e^iot^ ^/i^tecr- /ieviDV re 6aviw.trra 8rj ocra Kal iiroSeSe/xevcov . . . , oBtos S' iv TouTois e^2?'t exoiv . . . = " and during one season when there was a most terrible frost, and every one either did not go out of doors at all, or if soever they did, then only wrapped up in an astonishing amount of clothes and well shod, Socrates in the midst of all this used to go out, having on . . ." 47. (a) Past time. with dv, expres- sive of indefinite frequency, recur- rence ; or the past or present indica- tive. If soever — did, then as often would (sole- bat)— Or, then — did. does. 42 GREEK AND LATIN § 47 47. (as) Past time. Aristot. 'A6r]V. n-oX. c. 4 el 8e tk tZv ^ouXeurtov . . . eKkeiwoi [rrjv o-6v]o8ov, direrivov . . . Spax/xas = " if soever any- one of the councillors failed to attend the meeting, they paid so many drachmae as a fine." See also Xen. Jnab. i. 5. 2 ; Ages. xi. 3 ; Aristot. 'A9. TTOX. c. 22. Soph. Ant. 1031 to fjtavOdveiv 8' I -qSwTov eS XeyovTos, d /c€/oSos Xeyot = " to learn is the sweetest of things from one who speaks well, if soever he speaks usefully." Hippocr. Praenotim. i. p. 40. F. =i. p. 100. 12. K. d Se ScaXuTroi,, Kal Trore //.ev KaOapbv ovpioiTO, Trore Se v^icrraTai to XevKov /cat Xeiov, )(fioviTepa yiverai, ■>) vovcro'S . . . el Se ei-q to T£ oSpov inrepvBpov Koi r/ OTOO-Tao-is avreov 6p,oi7] Kal Xeirj, TroXv)(povi(!yrepov p^ev toCto tov TrpuiTov jLveTai, (TiiiTr)piov Se Kapra = " but if soever there was an intermission, and at times the water passed was clear, whilst at other times the white and smooth sediment is deposited, the disease is on the way to being a somewhat long one. But if soever both the water was reddish, and its sediment similar and smooth, this is on the way to being a much lengthier matter than the former, but the state of things is very satisfactory." Thuc. i. 120. 5 avSpoyv yap crw(f>p6vtav etniv, el jx-q dSiKoivTo, rjcrvxdiew . . . = " for it is the part of prudent men, if soever they were not suffering injury, to keep quiet . . ."56" (7) Indefinite : Ar. Plut. 1010 el Xvirovp-ev-qv aurOoiro p,e | vrjTrdpiov av Kal cfxiTTiov vireKopi^ero = " if soever he perceived me out of spirits, then as often would he endearingly call me his little duck and his little dove." Ar. Ach. 639 el 8e tjs vp.a^ vTToQmTrevtj-a's Xnrapa^ KaXecreiev 'Adrjva^, I eiipeTO Trav av Sia Tois Xiirapd^,^'' dvoJv ^ Tt/itts mpidfa's = " but if soever any one paying you a covert compliment called you the 'shining' Athens, then as often would he get all he wanted, — for giving to you an epithet fitted for anchovies ! " Thuc. vii. 71. 3 el pAv rive's i8otev . . . , dveddpa-qa-dv re av . . . = "it soever any caught sight of . . , they would both pluck up their spirits and ..." CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 43 Xen. Mem. i. 3. 4 d §€ n Sd^etev avri^ crrjixaiveo-dai Trapa «. (a) Past time. rSv OeSiv, fJTTOV av iTreia-Orj Trapa Tci (Trifia,iv6iJ.fya, irouqarai, f) et Tis avrhv eireiOev oSov Xa^eiv r^yifiova TV\ov Kal jxtj ilSora Trjv oSov avTi fSXeirovTOi koI ttSdros = " and if soever it struck Mm that there existed any intimation from the gods, then as often would he be less persuaded to act in contravention to it, than if one was seeking to persuade him to take a blind and ignorant guide for his way instead of one who could see and knew." See also Ar. Nub. 1382. Hom. H. iii. 453 ou [tev yap tjuXoTTfTL y iKevOavov, e'i tis tSoiTo = "for certainly not out of any love, forsooth, were they concealing him, if soever any one caught sight of him." Soph. Track. 908 e? tod iXwv jiXk-^euv oiKeriav Sc/ias, | EKAatev = " if soever she caught sight of the figure of one of her dear servants, she wept." Eur. Bacch. 612 Tts fiot <^vXaf ^v, d o-v (rvfi4>opa'S TUXO'S j = " who was there to be a guardian to me, if soever you fell into trouble? "59 Lysias c. Agoraf. p. 137. 11 o^irep Kal tods aXA,ovs aTreo-- tf« = " and if soever any one did speak in opposition, straightway after some con- venient fashion he vanished from public view ; and for those, who had-done the deed, there was no search nor, even if soever they were suspected, any punishment : 44 GREEK AND LATIN § ^7 47. (a) Past time. but the people kept still, and experienced such con- sternation, that he who was being spared from forceful behaviour, even if soever he held his peace, esteemed it so much gain." Xen. Cyr. v. 5. 21 ovkovv tovtov tuxwi' """P" '^°^> °y^^^ y]vvov, ei /ii) tovtov? Trdo-aifii = " however not, even if I had-obtained this request at your hands, was I advan- cing my position, if soever I failed to persuade these persons." Alexis Arifj.'^TpiO'S Fr. i. 1 ivpoTepov fi.lv d Trveva-ete poppa's r) voTos I ev TYj BaXaTTy Xafiirpo'S, IxOvs ovk Ivrjv ®^ | ovSevl (jiayeTv = " if soever erst there blew a north or a south wind upon the sea with force, never a fish was there in it for any one to eat." Aristot. 'hjd-rjv. TToAiT. C. 60 d tls i^opv^eiev eXaiav fiopiav rj KaTa^uev, eKpivev rj e^ 'Apdov Trdyov fiovX-fj, Kat ei KaTayvoLTj, 6avaT(^ tovtov k^Tjixlovv = " if soever any one dug up a sacred olive tree or cut one down, judgment upon him lay with the Council of the Areopagus : and if soever it decided against him, they punished him with death." See too Ar. Thesm. 832 ; Thuc. vii. 70. 8. We have a mixture of constructions in Ar. .Av. 505 )((o7ro^' 6 kokkv^ eiVot KOKKv, TOT av 01 ^oiVt/ces ttTravTes | tous irvpovs av . . . lOepi^ov. \ . . . ei Tts Kol /3a(Tt,XevoL, I ■ . . eirl twv (j-KrjTTTpSiv kKaOrjT opvi's = " and whensoever the cuckoo uttered his cry, then as often would the Phoenicians in a body get in their barley ... If soever any person was even a king, on the sceptres sat a bird." Xen. Anab. i. 9. 18 ti tis ye ti airn ■Kpocna^avTi, KaAws vTT'qper'qa'eitv, ouScvt TrwTroTe a-^apuTTOV iiacn t^v irpoOvp-lav . . . ei St Tiva opbnj . . . irpoo'oSovs JrotowTa, ovSeva av TTonroTe ddXeTo = "ii soever any one at his bidding did him good service, in no one's case ever did he suffer the goodwill to remain without reward.- And if soever he saw any one making an income, then as often he would never deprive any man of it." Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 40 lirci eupeOety, dXXa? Kvva's etx'* eTriTerrj- Sevftevas irphs to /caTO. TrdSag atpav. d 6e Kal Tavras dTrovyoi, . . . StKTva SvcropaTa eTreTavvucs av = " when- soever the hare was found, you had other dogs trained 47 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 45 for catching him by speed of foot. But if soever he escaped from them also, then as often would you spread nets difficult to be seen." 47. (a) Past time. Euenus Fr. ii. 5 el Se ttoXiis irveuo-etci/, airia-rpaiTTaL fikv epiiiTavyotfj,ev et /SovXoifieOa | [Atp/cjr^s veuiph olfjLa fjirj Sovvai SiKYjv = " not even could we escape, if we desired, from paying the penalty for Dirce's newly spilled blood." Eur. Fr. Incert. 152 Dind. = 895 Nauck : acfipmv av eirjv, d rpk^oiv *' TO. TMv TTcAas = " I should be mad, if I were for bringing up the offspring of my neighbours." Lysias Eratosth. p. 91. 4 tl ttjv avrrjv yvw/iT^i/ irepl Ttov aXXmv 'i-xpire r^vTrep irepl vp.(av avTwv, ovk av e'ir] oo-tjs ovk 67ri Tots ■yeyevrjiJievoL's dyavaKToi-q, dWa ttcivtcs av rrepl tZv TO, TOiavra eTnTrjSevovTUiv rag f?;/itas puKpas ■^yoicrde. Kal ravra ovk av ei'ij pAvov ■Trap vptv oiVus eyvoicrp,eva, aAA' 61/ dirda-rj ry EXAaSt = "but if you were entertaining the same opinion about others, as you are about yourselves, there would not be a man of you who was not feeling indignation at what has happened. On the contrary, every one of you would be holding the opinion, that, for persons whose manners and customs were such as these, the penalties are trifling. And this would not I have been the conclusion come to amongst yourselves only, but throughout the whole of Greece." Xen. Mem. iii. 5. 7 dWd p,rjv . . . dye vvv pdXuTra TTeuOoiVTO, &pa dv dri Xeyuv, ;r(os av aijToiis ivpOTpe\paip.e6a k.t.X. = " well, but if indeed at the present of all times they were in the humour to listen to us, it would be the season to tell them, how we would incite them, etc." Plat. Phileb.p. 21 A dp' oSv «ti tivos av (roi TrpoaSeiv rjyolo, el TovT exoii TravreAws .; = " pray then would you be thinking that there was yet need of something more to § 47 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 47 you in addition, if you were fully in possession of 47. (a) Past time, this ? " Dem. Mid. p. 577. 23 ixt'ydkrjv juevr av dp)(yjv, fiaWov Se Ti)(yriv, eirji av evprjKias, il Svo TdvavTidrara kavToti Iv ovTi^ /8pa)(et j(pov(j) vrepl cravTOV Swaio TrotCMrSat = "great nevertheless would | have been the power, or rather the trick, of your invention, if two results most opposed to each other in so short a time you were able to achieve." Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morb. acut. i. p. 395. F. =ii. p. 64. 8. K. ToiJS 8e L\o\ovTpeovTai Kot Sis T^S rj[J,epr]i el Xoioi's, ovSev d/xa/)T06s = " and — in those who are fond of bath- ing — even if twice in the day you were to bathe them, you might possibly not go at all wrong." (7) Indefinite : Aesch. Ag. 345 Oeois 8' dvajjm-XdKriTOS ^^ el p,6\oi CTT/oaTOS, | eypTjyopbs to irrjp.a ToSv oXtiiXoriav | yevOLT dv, el Trpocnraia /i^ Tvxoi KaKa = " but if without having strayed from the gods the army were to return, still the calamity of those who have perished would become aroused, unless some accidental evils were to overtake it (sc. the army)." Soph. El. 548 (fiaiT] S' av 7j davova-d y, el oivrjv XdjBoi = "but the dead one indeed would proclaim it, if she were to retake voice." Thuc. vi. 11. 4 17/ias 8' dv ol l/cet ' EAA,ijv€S p,dX.urra p,ev eKTreirX.Tjyp.evoL dv eiev, el p/q dcl>iK0i,p,e9a' eireira Se . . . = "as to ourselves the Greeks over there would most of all I have been thoroughly alarmed at us, if we were to refrain from going near them at all. Failing that, ..." Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 36 el ovv vvv diroSeixOeiv '^'•^'^ XPV ■fjyeurda.L . . ., ovk dv oiroTe ot TroXep,ioi eXOoiev ^ovXev- ea-dai i^/iSs Seoi, dXXd XPVI^^' °^^ evOw rois rera.ypevoi'i - " if then it were now settled who ought to take the command, it would not be necessary for us to deliberate upon that point, whensoever the enemy came down upon us, but we should immediately betake ourselves to our arranged positions." Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 22 el Srj irela-aK eiraiveiv . . . ere iroXAow, . . . dpTi re e^ijTraTTjKois ei'ijs dv, Kal oXiyiiy vcrrepov . . . e^eXrjXeypivo'S ei7)i Koi irpocr'eTL Kal dXa^wv (fiatvoio = " if 48 GREEK AND LATIN § 47 47. (as) Past time. you see, you were to have-persuaded many to praise you, you would both straightway | have acted the deceiver, and would a short while later | have been refuted, and moreover would be being shown up as a cheat into the bargain." Plat. Apol. p. 28 D kyia oSv Stiva av ti-qv dpyaxrii.ivo'i . . ., £6 XiTToi/jLi Trjv Ttt^tv = " I thcH shouM | havB acted monstrously, if I were to leave my appointed place." Isocr. Bmir. p. 225. b. et . . . /it/iijo-at/xe^a T-qv AaKeSaifiovioiv dpyiav . . ., evOv? av dTro\oijJ,e6a. . . . ' ei oe rots AlyvTTTOuiv vo/j.oi'S ^prjcrdai PovXrj6eLr]iJ,ev ....... evoai- /xdvcos dv rhv /3tov SiaTeXoTfji.ev = " if we were to imitate the supineness of the Lacedaemonians, it would straight- way be all up with us : but if we were to consent to use the customs of the Egyptians, we should be passing our time in quietness." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 363. 19 ttws oSv ovk droTrov koI V7rep(j)ves av ireTrofqKOTis v/j^is e'irjTe, el dp, a TrpocrraTTeTe, jxSXXov S d^Lovre Troielv vwep vjxuiv tov's Oeovs, TavT avrol Kvpioi yeyivqjxtvoi Ti^p^pov prj irofjiraLTe, dXX bv eKetvots ev)(ecr6 e^dXr] Troieiv avrbv kol yevos /cat oiKiav, rovTov d<^6HjT£ avTOi; = "how then would you not | have done a thing strange and monstrous, if, should it so happen, that which you enjoin, or rather insist upon the gods doing for you, you yourselves when you have this day become the masters of the situation were to abstain from doing ; and, on the contrary, him whom you pray to them to root out — self, race, and house — that very man, I say, you were yourselves to allow to go scot- free ? " Theognis 343 redvairjv S', el prfj ti KaKwv ayu.7rat)/xa iJ.epip,ve(iyv I evpoijxrjv = " would I might die if I were not to find out some alleviation of miserable cares." Ar. Ia/S. 235 el Se Trapaj3airiv, {JSaros ep,TrXrj6' 17 KvXi^ = " and were I to transgress, may the cup be filled with water." See also Theognis 927 : 1089. Hippocr. (1) de Prise. Medicin. i. p. 8. F. = i. p. 23. K. oVep, el p.fi fjv l-qrpLKrj oXm, /X178' h airy ea-KewTO fiTjS' evpoiTO firji^ev, OVK dv fjv = "but this, if the art of medicine had not existed at all, and nothing had been observed, or CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 49 were to have-been discovered, in it, would not have 47. (a) Past time. been the case." Eur. Orest. 1132 el /jtlv yap cts ywaiKa a-povea-T€pav I ^i(f>o's /JxdeL/iiv, SvcTKXerji av ^v <^dvos ' vvv S' k.t.X.. = "for if indeed against a woman, more self -restrained than she, we were to have-let slip the sword, of ill repute would the slaughter have been. But as it is, etc." Lysias c. Theomnest. i. p. 116. 42 0^ yap S-^irov, . . . d fjAv Tts \eiv darKrj diro/3€|SA?jK€vat, vttoSlkov eTvai," ovk av eSLKa^ov avTia, dW e^r^pKei av croi eppK^kvai rijv acnriSa, XkyovTL ovSev o-oi fikXei ; = " for never certainly can it be that matters stand thus, that while if a man were to have-called you a ' father-slayer ' or ' mother-slayer ' you would have been justly regarding him as responsible to you at law, yet — if he were to have-spoken of you as ' having struck her who bore you ' or ' him who begot you,' you would have been thinking that he ought to be without penalty, as not having used one of the forbidden expressions. For I would gladly learn from you, — if one were to have-said that you had ' dropped your shield ' and the expression used in the statute had been ' If truly a man shall say that another has thrown it away, he is to be liable to a penalty,' would you have been for not prosecuting him — the expression ' dropped your shield ' being satisfactory to you, and you saying it was no affair of yours ? " Plat. Ale. Pr. p. Ill E tI S el PovX-qOeirifi.ev elSevai fxrj aovov irotoi dvdpwiroi elcnv, dX\ ottoloi vyieivoL r) vocrajSeis, dp' iKavol av rjiuv ^crav StSatrKaAot 01 iroAAot ; = " Well, and if we were to have -conceived the wish to know not only what sort of creatures men are, but what sort of them are of sound or of unsound constitutions, pray would the multitude have been a competent teacher for us?" Plat. Theaet. p. 147 A ei tis rjp.d's tZv (j>avX(i}v re Kal 7rpoxeip(i>v epouTO, oiov Trepl tttjXov, ti ttot ea-riv, ei dTroKpt.vaifj.eOa airrcj) iT'iJAos o Twv x^''''/'^"'' ''"' • • •' °'"'^ dv yeXoLOL ^fjiev ; ^* = " if a man were to have-asked us E 50 GREEK AND LATIN § 47 47. (a) Past time. some obvious and easy question, such as, about clay, what it is ; — if we were to have-made him answer, the clay of the potters and . . ., should we not have been ridiculous ? " 48. (6) Present i. *T with the («) Perfe'^t: present subjunc- Theognis 121 €t' Sk 4,'iXov voos av^phs kvl a-T-f,e^acn Xeki^Oy \ (i.) Expressive tpvSph'i luv, . . . | tovto deos /ct/JSiyXdraTOV iroirjcre of indefinite fre- ^poroto-tv = " but if soever the disposition of a friend quency, recur- j^^^g jg^jjj concealed in his breast, being of a false type, panied by the — this the deity makes the most debased thing for present indica- mortals." live (or its equiv- alent). /Q\ Imperfect: If soever —• does, ^'^' ^ then as often Callinus, Fr. i. 12 oi5 yap kios Odvarov ye vyuv eliiapiJ,evov will (solet) — s\:.fc,> jojs / T/ j/i/ » r-^„ Or then does. ccmv | avop , ouo ei irpoyovtav y yevos aUavaruiv = lOr not in any way has it been ordained that a man shall escape death, not even if soever he draws his race from immortal ancestors. ' Aesch. ^g. 1327 lo) (SpOTeia irpayfjiaT ' evTVXovvra fj.ev \ (TKid Tts dvTpe\j/€iev ' ei Se SvcTTVxy, \ /SoA-ais vypuKTcroiv o-TToyyos wAeo-ev ypacjirjv = " Alas for the state of man ! On the one hand, prospering ( = if it prospers), a shadow might possibly overturn it : while on the other hand, if soever it is the reverse of prosperous, a wet sponge by its application will eiface the impression." ''" Hippocr. de ration, vict. in morb. acut. i. p. 389. F. =ii. p. 44. 3. K. eijc^opms /J^v i^kpovtTi to, j3pp,ara a, /irj elOitrfievoi eltrtv, el ^ Kal Ka\d y = " the inward parts will readily accept articles of food to which they are accustomed, even if soever they are by nature not good. And so likewise with regard to articles of drink. But they will with difficulty accept articles of food, to which they are not accustomed, even if soever they are excellent." Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 22 Travres piv ydp ol Trora/xoi, el kol TrpocTd) Twv Trrjywv airopoi Sxri, Trpo'Coikri ;rpbs Tots Trrjyas Sta/3aToi ytyvovrat = " for in the case of all rivers, even if soever away from the fountain head they are unford- able, yet to people who advance towards the fountain heads they will become fordable." i 48 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES ' 51 Aristot. m JSudem. ii. 1. 17 Set ydp, el y av^puTros, 48. (6) Present Xoy«r/i&v lvervat="for it must needs be, if soever he ti™^- is a man, that the reasoning power will be in him." ^7) Indefinite : TjrrtaeuS Jv'. 12. 35 el Se vyri fiev Krjpa TavrjXeyeos davaTOio, I vtKijcras S* aixjuijs dyXahv eS^os eXri, [ ttovtcs [iiv Tifjibxriv = " but if soever he has-escaped the doom of levelling death, and — victorious in the strife — has-won the glorious yearned-for glory of the spear, all will pay honour to him." Theogrds 321 el Se 6ehs KaKt^ dvSpl j3 tov Koi ttAouto V oirdcra-rj, I d^paivinv KaKii]v ov SvvaTai Kare^^eiv = " but if soever the divinity has-given to a bad man life and wealth, in his madness he cannot keep down his want of worth." Pind. Pyth. iv. 265 (fidivoKapTros eoi^ At&s el Kpavd-g irpayp.a reXeiov = " it will fall safe and not on its back, if soever by the supreme power of Zeus anything has-been accomplished completely." ''■ Soph. Oed. Tyr. 874 ii/Spis, el TroXXSiv VKepTrXy^a-Orj fjidrav, | . . . diroTOfJiov wpovcrev eli dvdyKav = " over-weeningness, if soever it has-been over-filled vainly with many things, wiU rush into sheer fate." Herod, ii. 1 3 vvv Se, el ^^ p,fi ot' iK/catSe/ca rj irevTeKaiSeKo. irrj-j^eais dvaj^rj rh eXd-)(U7T0V o iroTafws, ovx vrep^aivei es rijv x'^P'^'" ~ " ^^* ^^ i* ^^1 ^^ soever the rjver has-failed to rise to sixteen or fifteen cubits at the least, it does not overflow on to the land." Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morb. acut. i. p. 400. F. = ii. p. 79. 2. K. el Se ev irvperc^ \eifiepw(i^ ij yXaa-cra. Tp7])(eir) ykvqrai Kol d\jn)-)(io.i evetaiTL, i,Xeei t(^ roiCfSe Kal eTrdvecK eivai tov TTvperov '^ = " but if soever, in a winter fever, the tongue has-become rough and fainting fits set in, it will be usual with such a patient to find also a relaxation of the fever." Aristot.' Analyt. Prior. 10 uxravTOi^ Se koI el irphs tij) T TeOy TO a-TepriTiKov = " SO also if soever to the G- the negative has-been added." See also Pind. Isthm. v. (iv.) 12. 52 GREEK AND LATIN § 48 48. {b) Present time. (ii. ) Accom- panied by the present or future indicative (or their equiva- lents) ; or the past subjunctive expressive of possibility or a wish ; or the imperative. If haply — shall, — does. shall. may! let. (a) Perfect : (^) Imperfect : Aristot. Analyt. Prior. 20. init. &crT d to Kcifievov y evavTtov Ti^ (ruyiiTrcpacrfiaTij dvdyKr] ylvecrdai eXeyxov = " SO that if haply the proposition shall be lying before us contrary to the conclusion, there must of necessity be an elenchus." Horn. Od. V. 221 el S aS ns paiycri deZv eirl olvotti irovTif, I rXijo-o/iai = " but if haply, on the other hand, some one of the gods shall be for dashing me to pieces on the purple sea, I will endure it." Theocr. v. 63 dA,A,a tov avSpa, | al Xys, Tov SpvTOfiov ^(oo-r/jTjo-o/ues = " but if haply you shall be so desiring, we will call the oak-cutter." Theocr. (f) xxix. 2 1 a! yap ffiSe iroiys, dyaBos p-ev dKovcreai I If ao-Twi/'s . . . ="for if haply you shall be acting thus, you will be hearing your praises from the side of the citizens." Aesch. Pers. 788 ttws civ Ik tovtoiv eri I 7rpd(r(j-oip,£v cis dpuTTa JIcpcriKos Aecos i | A. el p,rj crrpaTevourO Is tov EAA,7jv(ov TOTTov, \ p.rjS el (TTpdrevp,a TrAetov y to MijSikov ^^* = " how after this should ( = shall) we, the Persian folk, be still in the way of faring best? D. If you were not for making any expedition into the quarter of the Greeks, not even if haply the Median army shall be the more numerous." Carmen Populare xvii. 2 (in Bergk's Poet. Lyr. 6r.) al Se Xys, avydaSeo = "ii haply you shall be so desiring, look* for yourself." Theocr. (?) XXV. 45 el 8' 6 p.ev dp Kara da-TV p,evei irapd omi TTokirais, \ . . . 8id Te Kpivya-i 6ep.urTa^, | S/iuwv S'^ Tiva, Trpecrftv, av p.oi ^pdxrov yyep.ovevavXov cTTpaTiois fxovov Sei, dXXa koa ir^Qiv ttoXvv ^vfnrXeTv, eurep ^ovX6p,eda a^iov ti rrji Stavoias SjOav, /cai fiij virh wnrecov ttoXX&v eipyea-dai t^s yrj^, aAAeos re Kal el ^vo-raa-iv at TToXeis cj^o^rjOeta-ai, Kal fx.fj dvTnrapa(rxcriv rffuv 0) dtf>' ■^/j.eiuiv, et y' ovv erepo's ye ^vyrjtTiv ^® = "but these two not again shall two swift horses bear away from us — ^at least not both of them, even if haply one of them shall have-escaped." Soph. Oed. Col. 1441 el XPV^ OavovjjMi,. A. /iij (tv y, dXX' €/j,ol ttlOov. I II. [i/q TreW a jj/rj Sei. A. ^vardXaiva rap' eyui, I el crov (neprfOZ ''' = " if it must be SO, I will die. A. Say you not so, but give ear to me. P. Seek not to persuade me to what is not right. A. Wretched indeed shall I be, if haply I shall have-been deprived of you."_ Soph. Aj. 496 £i'^ yap OdvrjS crv Kal TeAfVTTjcras d(f>ris, | ravTQ v6fi,i^e Kapte ttj toO ■q/j^pif, | • • ■ ^vv iraiSl t^ o"(^ SovXiav e^eiv rpo(f>-^v = " for if haply you shall have-died and have-vanished from the scene, reflect that on that self-same day both I and your child will be relegated to the nurture of slaves." 54 GREEK AND LATIN S48 48. (b) Present Ar. Uqq. 698 oi! toi /ia rrjv Arjix-qTpd y, d lirj cr eK(j)dy(0 \ ^'■"^^- iK T'^crSe T^s yijS) oiuSen-ore ySicocro/iat. | A. £t /tij Kcjtayrjs ; eyo) Se y', et jlmj o"' eKirid), | k^t' eKpo(j>-jcrai avrhs eiriSiap- payw = " never in truth, by Demeter, unless haply I shall have-eaten you out of this land, will I consent to live longer. S.S. Unless haply you shall have-eaten me out, say you ? Well but I the same — unless haply I shall have-drunk you out and then gulping you down shall have-burst with the effort." Ar. Eqq. 805 el Se ttot ets dyphv ovtos p.Trek6iiV elprjvaio'i StaTpixpr) I Kol )(tSpa (jyayoiv dva6apprj(TiQ Kol crrefi^vXia es \6yov ekOy, yviMrerat oteov dyadZv avrhv tq iJ,wrdo^paXrjv aS^ts, (jxipfj-aKov Karo) fieraTTurai, = " and if, as you act in this way, the disease on the one hand should have gone out from the rest of the body, but truly ulcers shall be still forming in the patient's head, clear out the head again, and let him now have a downward-acting purge to drink." Auctor de loc. in homin. in Hippocr. i. p. 423. F. =ii. p. 151. 4. K. fjv 8' a,vaKe)(' vfxeas = " for I had come, even .1 . . . And if, under those circumstances, you would have received me, this had been acceptable . . . and I had been sleeping if only I should have kissed your dear lips. But if you had repulsed me elsewhither, and the door had been held by a bar, without a doubt both axes and torches had come upon you." Ar. Lys. 1025 Kav /le /ii) 'Xv-jrets^" iym crov Kav ToSe t6 diqpLOV, I T0V7r\ T(u<^0aA/xnpuj-TOV e9r]Kev = " and if for yet a fiu-ther space the course should have been for the two, then he would have passed him upon it and not made the race a drawn 51 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 57 Erinna Fr. iv. 3 Tavrav yovv CTV/Juas Tciv TcapOevov octtii 50. (a) Past time. 'iypaxj/iv, \ al K aiuSotv TroTcdrjK, ^s K 'AyaOapx^S oX.a = "this maiden, at any rate, in very truth, whoever painted, if he should have given her speech in addition, would have been the very Agatharchis herself." Comicus Anonymus, Fr. 287 el 8' r/vcy/cev av \ oCtos o ptos Ti T(3i' d.vr]Kev, tcrcos | o OdvaTOS aiJTCls (rov yeyovev evvovo-repos = "but if this life would have brought some- what of the grievous with it, perhaps death itself was better disposed than you." Aristot. Rhet. ii. 25. 10 6 Se Kptriys oiWat, av oiVibs eXvdrj,^^ ■q oTt OVK eiKOS, ri ovx avTM Kpnkov = " and the judge thinks, if the matter should have been solved in this manner, either that probability is out of the question, or that it is not for him to decide." a) Perfect : Hippocr. (?) de Fractis i. p. 761. F. = iii. p. 88. 6. K. tovto Se, r)V Trepl ras fjuxcrx'oi^o.s (vOev /cat evOev to, ^vXa irapa,- Treirrjyev = " and this, in cases where the pieces of wood have been fixed about the armpits from either side." Aristot. de Poet. 25 irpunov pAv av to, Trph^ avTTjv T^v Texvrjv dSvvara TreTro irjTai, rjp.dpTrjTai = " in the first place, in cases where those things, which are contrary to art itself, have been produced by the writer, an error has been committed." Auctor de vict. rat. i. in Hippocr. i. p. 348. F. =i. p. 652. 1 3. K. rjv yap o/iOi(i)s a^^orepwcre TrevKa(Ti Kara rh cnopa, Ka\ fjv dvdcT\w(riv oyttotcus . . ., Svvavrai Tpe(f>eiv . . . = "for in cases where the parts have been similarly formed towards either side about the opening, and if they shall have-projected in like manner, nourishment is capable of being given ..." fi) Imperfect : Hippocr. Praenotion. i. p. 42. F. =i. p. 107. 8. K. ■^v fih 6 TTOvos ev apXyo-L yCverai, /cat rj dvcnrvoia /cat ■^ prj^ /cat o TrTvaXurp,h^ Sbaretvy, es ras etKOo-iv rjp.epa'S ex'^^' ""P""'' Sex^crdai t^v pr]^iv = " in cases where the pain comes on at the beginning of the illness, if truly the difficulty of 51. (6) Present time. el with the present indica- tive with &v ; or idv with the present indica- tive ; or idv with the present in- dicative with ILv : as a protasis — (i. ) In cases •where — does. 58 GREEK AND LATIN § 61 51. (J) Present breathing and the cough and the expectoration shall time. continue, wait for the twenty days and then look out for the breaking of the abscess." Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morb. acut. i. p. 391. F. =ii. P-_ 50. 8. K. fjv oA,ov rh a-ot/jM dvaTravcrrp-ai irovXv Trapa rb eOos, ovK avTiKa €ppo)Tai p^XXov. ■ijl/ Sc 6a Kal TrXeioj j(p6vov SteAivuo-as k^air'ivrj's h TOVXavp6v Tt Trpi^^etev £irt8)jA.o)5 = " if truly the whole body shall have- taken a long unwonted rest, it is not straightway all the stronger for it. But in cases where it is necessary, and if truly, after a considerable holiday, a man shall have-come suddenly to exertion, he clearly might fare somewhat indifferently." Hippocr. de rat. vict. in mwb. acut. i. p. 406. F. = ii. p. 95. 16. K. •^v 86 aTpd Ttvt ^vpcfiepei dtJMipeeiv, . . . TTOieeLV K.T.X. = "but in cases where it is necessary to bleed a patient, make, etc." Hippocr. de Capit. miner, i. p. 900. F. =iii. p. 354. 13. K. SiaKOTTv) S' . . . eSpr] ia-Tiv, ^v TaXX' oarea . . . pkvei kv Trj (pvcrei Ty ewvriov koi py} (rvvicr! with the future ea-o-erai, ei k AxiAtjoi ayavov TricrTdv eraipoy | rctxet vTTd judicative with 4i': Tpiioiv raxee? Kvves eXKrjirovcnv = " for you indeed there as a protasis^ will be shame and disgrace, if truly the illustrious If truly — shall. 60 GREEK AND LATIN § 52 52. (c) Future Achilles' faithful companion under the wall of the *™^- Trojans by swift dogs shall be dragged." Lysias Alcib. i. p. 140. 33 riyovixai SiKa^eiv v/iS,^ ov iJ,6vov tSv e^ajj,apTav6vTiDv eveKa, aAA' ?va koi tous aXXovs tcuv a.Korrft.O'uvriiiv croxjipovca'Tipov's irof^TC. eav /xev toivvv TOtis ayvQ)Tas KoAafjjre, o^Seis emaL tcov cJAAcov peArtcov. oijSets yap ei'creTat rbv tl)' v/;iii)V Kara^'qi^ixrOivra. eav Se Toiis eiri^avetrTciTOiis rmv J^a/^a/OTavovTuiv np-aprja-de, TrdvTes TrevtTOVTat, wtrre totjtij) irapaS€iyp.a.rt ' ^ptiipevOL /^eXriovs eo-ovrai ol iroXtrat. eav toivvv tovtov Kara- \f/rji€T ■fjp.wv TrpSnov KaraSeLxdy ^^ rotovrov epyov ; = " but if not even any one in the whole time would be able to show that this had happened, why in our time first is this action to be exhibited ? " Dem. Timocr. p. 748. 15 oiSe a-7repp.a 8ei Kara^d^Xeiv ev ry TToXei ov8eva . . . roLovrmv Trpay/j^draiv, ov8' el fi,r) iroy dv eK(j>vo(, = " not even a seed of such things ought any one to sow in the state, no, not even if it should riot yet spring up." CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 63 Aeschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 39. 41 el yap /iTjSeis av vfJ-Zv 54. (a) Past time. Jatirbv d.vaTr\rj(Tai (jiovov SiKaiov ^ovXolto, rjirov dStKOV ye vXa^ai,T av Tt/v >pv')(r]V ■>) t^v ovcriav y] TrjV kTrLTifiiav Tivbs d^eXd/i€vos = " for if no one of you ■would be desirous of defiling himself with blood even righteously shed, surely he would guard himself from unrighteous bloodshed, by taking away any one's life or property or civil rights." Hyperid. Orat. Funebr. col. 11. 1. 8 (ed. Babington) el yap S-q Tts a/iot/Swv av eirj tottos, Odvaro'S tovtols dp)(7]yb'; p^yaXZv dyadmv -ycyove =" for certainly if there should be any place for changes {i.e. another life for man after the present one), death to these men has become the herald of great blessings." Hippocr. Praenotion. i. p. 38. F. =i. p. 95. 11. K. rji/ ydp n TOiovTov ecrj, evravOa peiroi = " for if there should be any such symptom as that, matters might possibly be tending in those directions." Hippocr. Praenotion. i. p. 41. F. = i. p. 104. 16. K. ^v Se to, p,ev TOi avTewv eTriylvono, xa Se pjj, . . . aTroAoiT av o av^/jtoTTos = " but if some of these symptoms should be coming on, and others not, the man would die." Hippocr. de- rat. vid. in morb. acut. i. p. 388. F. = ii. p. 40. 9. K. pLoXuTTa pev ovv pXairroLVTO av, TJv prj opOio's pera- /3aXA.otev, ot oAiytrt rgcrt TTTurdvycn, xpeo/*£voi = " most of all then would they be suflfering injury, unless they should be making a right change, who use the whole ptisans." Thuc. iii. 44. 3 t/v re yotjO airo^'^vo) Trdvv dStKowras avrovs, ov 8ta TOVTO Kal aTroKTetuai KeXeva-u), el pr] ^vpepov' rjv re /cat e^ovTes Tt ^vyyviiprjs eiev,^^ el rr) iroAct pr) dyadov 4>alvoiTo = " for if truly, on the one hand, I shall have- shown them to be altogether in the wrong, not on that account shall I advise you to put them to death, if it is not expedient ; and if, on the other hand, they should be in the position of having some sort of a ground for excuse, [not on that account should I advise you to let them go scot-free,] if it did not appear advantageous to the state so to do." Auctor de Insomn. in Hippocr. i. p. 379. F. =ii. p. 14. 9. K. T^v Se TOvvavTwv Tts opcirj yvpvov? . . ., ovK eTriTTjSecov = " but if on the contrary the patient should be seeing naked figures, it is not a good sign." 64 GREEK AND LATIN § 54 B4. (a) Past time, Auctor de dieb. judicat. in Hippocr. i. p. 57. F. =i. p. 151. 15. K. aTTukei, 1JV /xij Til avrhv e(^7j Si€^tevai= "he uses threats, if any one should be essaying to prevent his passage through." (7) Indefinite : Epicharmus Busir. (ap. Athen. x. p. 411. A) Trpwrov /iev, at K ea-OovT i'Sois vtv, aTro^avois = " for first of all, if you should see him eating, the sight might possibly do for you." Horn. II. V. 273 d tovtw k6 Xdfioifiiv, dpoiixcOd Ke nXeoi kadXov = " if we should capture these two steeds, we should reap a good renown." Horn. Od. ii. 76 d x vfieii ye cfxiyoiTe, Ta^ av ttote koI Ticrts eirj. TOf^pa yo.p av Kara ao'TV TroTnrTva'croip.e6(i pjVuoi, | X/OJj/xaT d7raiTifovT€S, ems k aire* Travra So9eir] *^ = " if yOU indeed — instead of my mother's suitors — should | have- been the devourers (of our goods and live stock), perhaps at some time there would even be a recom- pense. For in that case we should ( = shall) be warmly entreating you up and down the city, asking restoration, until everything should have-been given back." Hesiod Fr. 217 (ed. Gottling: cited Arist. (?) ML Nic. v. 8. 3) et K6 irddoi TO. k epe^e, SiKrj k Wda ykvono = " if a man should | have-suffered according to what he had also done, justice would become straight." Pind. Pyth. iv. 263 d yap ns o^ovs o^vTOfu^ TreAe/cet | k^epdipai Kev fj,cyd\as Spvo's, alcr)(yvoi 8e ol darjrhv eiSos, I Kal (pOivoKapiro'S eoicra SiSot ^a0ov Trep avrds = " for if any one should the branches of a great oak with sharp- cutting axe I have-stripped off, and, be defacing its beautiful appearance, yet leafless it gives a verdict about itself." Ar. Nub. 1183 ovk av yevoiro ; $. ircSs yap; d p,rj irip y dfxa I aiir^ ykvoiT av ypavi re Kal vea yvvq = " the thing would not happen? Ph. No. For how should it? Unless, indeed, at one and the same time the same woman should | have-become at once old and young." Xen. Mem. i. 5. 2 d\Xd p.rjv d! ye yu,i;8e SovX.ov aKpaTrj Se^at/ie^ av, ttcDs ovk a^tov avrov ye Zv' o/toius yap evia 64. (a) Past time. iXtyev Koi d EtVetcv av " Trorvta (rvKrj" = "and this is like what Cleophon does. For some of his sayings are as if he should | have-said, 'Revered fig-tree.'" Aristot. Eth. Nic. X. 10. 17 vofiodenKw jreipaTcov yevecrOai,, el Slo. vdjU.wi' dyadol yevolft,i6 av = " he Ought to try to fit himself for legislating, if we should be made good by means of laws." Dem. JPhil. i. p. 44. 29 ovtoi TravreAws, oi58 el /xTj TTotijcratT av TOVTO . . ., evKaTap6vir]T6v Ictth/, . . . = " by no manner of means, not even if you should | have-failed to act thus, is it to be thought lightly of . . ." Dem. Euhllid. p. 1300. 1 lyo) yap otofiai Seiv visa's . ^aXeTTaiveiv . . ., evdv/MV/JLevovs on iravrtav olKTpoTaTov TrdOoi rjjuv dv (rvji/SaiTj tois ■qhiKT^p.evoi^, el T(av Aa/i- /3av6vTU)V 8t,Krjv oVtes dv SiKaiois p.ed vp,Qiv ev TOis StSoCcri yevoip,eda, koI a-vvaSLKrj6ei7jiJ,ev Sta rrjv Tov irpdyp.aTOi opyrpi = " of all the greatest calamity would come upon us, if being of the number of the punishers we should justly in your company join the company of the punished and suffer injury, etc." Theophrastus -Kepi XaXias : Kal ovk av criOiin^a-eLev, ovS el Twv ^eAiSovwv So^eiev dv eivai, XaXurrepos = " and he would not be silent, no, not even if he should be con- sidered a greater chatterbox than the swallows." See also Horn. II. xxii. 220 ; Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 55 ; Ar. RJiet. ii. 23. 20. Hippocr. Fraenotion. i. p. 45. F. =i. p. 115. 8. K. ijv Se Is Thv TTvevpiOva TpaireiT), Trapavoiav re Troieec Kal epjirvoi e^ avreatv rive's cos rd TToAAa yivovrai = " but if they should I have-turned on to the lung, they both cause loss of mind and suppurations are for the most part the results of them." Hippocr. de rat. met. in rrurrh. acut. i. p. 392. F. =--ii. p. 51. 17. K. drdp Kal Kara rh aAAo vr]'S h ttAeio) ttovov eXOoi, ttovXv wXeLiu fiXa/Seir] rj el eK TToAA'^s eSioSrjs ei KeveayyeirjV /terajSaAAot = " but with reference to the rest of the body also, if it should after long repose suddenly come to an excess of labour, it might possibly be much more injured than if after much feasting it were to turn to fasting." Euryphon (?) de Morb. iii. in Hippocr. i. p. 448. F. = ii. p. 293. 12. K. OVK dv eKcjivyoi, rjv p,rj paye'ir] rb vypov F 66 GREEK AND LATIN § 54 B4. {a) Past time. ejiSofJiaicff Kara ra ovara = " he WOuld not escape with his life, unless the humour should, when his seventh day- comes, burst forth down his ears." Ar. Thesm. 839 tm yap ei/cds, & ttoXk, I TTjv 'Yirepl36\ov KaOrja-Oai /u.Tjre/)' rifi.i^it(rpivqv | XtvKa koI K6lJ,as Ka^eicrav ttXtjo-lov Tyj<3 Aafidxov, \ Kal SaveiC^iv XPVf^^' > W^^ XPl^'^ rjv^^^ Soiveureiev Tivi \ koI tokov TrpdrroiTO, SbSovai jirfSiv dvdpanrwv tokov, j dAA' dijiaipeicrOai ^t'^ to, ^p^/^ai" = " for how is it seemly, I would ask the state, that the mother of Hyperbolus should have taken her seat, clad in white robes and with flowing hair, near to the mother of Lamachus, and should be the lender of money. A woman, in whose case it had been right, that, if she should lend to any one, and, having done so, should be asking for interest, no one should give it to her, but every one should take away by force her very capital." Xen. Hipparch. 1 . 4 ■^v 8c 17 filv ttoAis TpeTnjTai irrl TO, vavTiKa, Koi dpKy avry to. reixV Stao-wfetv . . ., Toiis Se tTTTreas aftaJtrete rd re eKrbs rov Tti)(Ovs Siacriufetv, kol avTovi fiovovs 8iaKiv8vvevei,v Trpbs Travras tovs evavTiovs' ivTavOa Brj Oewv p,€V offxai, Trpwrov (Tvp,p,d-xu>v ttr)(vpwv Set, eireira Se koi rhv iinrapxov TrpoarjKeL avroTeTeXeo-ixevov avSpa sTvaL = " but if truly the state shall betake itself to its navy, and shall deem it sufficient to provide for the safety of the walls ; and if it should expect its cavalry both to look after the safety of what lies outside the wall, and themselves aloneto bear the brunt of the danger against the whole body of the enemy ; in such a case, in good truth, I take it that, in the first place, one wants powerful deities as allies, and, in the next place, the commander also must be a man of the most perfect type." Auctor de Flatih. in Hippocr. i. p. 296. F. =i. p. 573. 3. K. 7)1/ 8e Tis kiriXdjioi ras Tou 5rvei5/xaTOS cts rh (Tiafj,a 8t6^d8oiis Iv Ppaxel p.ipii rj/jLeprj?, dTToXXoiro civ, (os p^yicr- T-ijs XP^^V^ eouo-ijs TU) crw/uaTJ toC 7rvei!/iaT0S = " but if - any one should intercept the passages of the air into the body for a short period of a single day, the man would be in a dying condition, so very great is the necessity of air to the body." Auctor de Mul. Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 664. F. =ii. p. 846. 6. K. dXyeei, rjv Tts avTr/v \pavcreLe = " she feels pain, , ' if any one should touch her." ^ ; 55 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 67 a) Perfect : Plato Gorg. p. 480 C lav fiev ye xAijywv ci^to -ij&iKTjKta's 17, TWTTeiv TrapexovTo, lav Se Secr[wv, Setv . . . = "if truly, on the one hand, his wrongdoing shall have been one worthy of stripes, offering (sc. himself) for smiting, if on the other for imprisonment, for imprisonment ..." Aristot. Shet. ii. 5. 18 aiJTOt S' oiVws e'xovTes dappaXeoi €uriv . . . eav TToWaKis eXrjXvOoTes ets to, Setva, /cat StaTrec^exjyoTes &(tlv . . . koI lav jxrj ■qSLKrjKOTiS Scrtv fj jxrfikva ^ fir^ ttoXXov-s = " but people are bold in them- selves under such circumstances as these, viz. — if truly having oftentimes entered into dangers, they have also got safely through them . . . and, if truly they have injured no one or not many people." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 341. 14 rovs fuv ovv aXXov^ . . . Kav SeSojKOTes Scrtv evOvvai, ty/v dciXoytav del trpoTeivo- fjuevovs = " the others, even if truly they shall have paid their penalties, courting continual inquiry into their conduct." Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morh. acut. i. p. 387. F. = ii. p. 39. 6. K. ^€Ta Se TOVTO dvayeru) aUi hrl rb irXeiOV, rjv ■^ re oSvvT] ireiravjj,kv7j y, Koi /*?^8ev aXXo ivavTiwTai = " and after this let him gradually bring up the amount to more, if truly both the pain shall have ceased and nothing else shall oppose." Hippocr. de Capit. milner. i. p. 911. F. = iii. p. 371. 3. K. dAAa ^pij . . .,f)v Ti TovTiiiv ■Keirovdy rb do"Teov, dtjxTvai Tov at)uaT05 = " but it is necessary, if truly the bone shall have sustained any such injury, to let some blood." Euryphon (?) de Morh. iii. in Hippocr. i. p. 494. F. = ii. p. 313. 16. K. Yjv ph/ vireX7)Xv6rj rj KOirpo'5 Kadaprj . . ., vTTOKXva-ai, da^iy = " if truly the faeces shall have come away clear . . ., wash out below with thapsia." Euryphon (?) de nat. mul. in Hippocr. i. p. 570. F. =ii. p. 550. 13. K. yv Se ireTrriywa-L, . . . 'iXKeiv rrjv OT/itSa I5 t& o-To/ta = " but if truly the parts shall have stiffened, let the patient draw up the vapour into her mouth." Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 50 ovSep,[a yap Jo-tiv oiiro) KaXfj Trapalvecri.'S i}T6s TO-us p,fi ovTas dyaOovs avdyp^phv dKova-avra'S dyaOov^ TTOtijcret' OVK av oSv To^oras ye, et p,rj ip.irpou-Oiv tovto p^p^XeT-rjKOTes eiev, ovSe p/qv dKovTunds, ovSe p,t]v ra ye a-wfiara iKavovs Trovetv, r]V "' p-y irpocraev rjo-KyKom ucrt = " for there is no manner of exhortation so good as to 65. (6) Present time. u with the present subjunc- tive with &v ; or i&v with the present subjunc- tive ; or i&v with the present sub- junctive with &v : as a protasis — If truly — shall. 68 GREEK AND LATIN § 55 55. (6) Present have the power of making men, who are not brave, time. brave the very day they listen to it. It certainly would not make men good archers, unless they before- times were to have practised that art, nor again good spearmen ; nor again apt even for bodily toil, if truly they shall not have trained themselves previously." Auctor de he. in homin. in Hippocr. i. p. 423. F. =ii. p. 151. i. K. rjv Sc . . . iXTJ dTrea-Tpafifievri y, . . . XP*^ • ■ ■ = "but if truly the part shall not have been twisted, use . . ." See also Xen. Symp. i. 8 ; Plat. Mem p. 97 D. (/3) Imperfect : Hom. II. V. 231 fiSiXXov V(^' rjvi6-)(}f eliaOori, Ka/jjirvXov ap/ia I oicrtTOV, e'i wep av a^e Zs opwv = " every man, even if truly he shall be a slave, rejoices in seeing the light of day." Ar. Vesp. 581 Kav avA.?jT)js ye Siktjv vik^, Tavrrj? -qfjuv iiriy(£ipa | iv (pop^eiiji, roiai StKao-rafs e^oSov rjvXyjcr (xttlov- a-iv = " ay, and if truly a flute-player shall win his law- suit, as a wage for this he pipes for us in his mouth- band a retiring march for the jury as they leave the box." Theocr. xxiii. 44 kSv airnys, ToSe fWL rpls iirdva-ov, 'il (j>iXe, KeTcrai' | ^v Se ye Aijs,^""* Kal tovto, KaAbs Se fioi &Xe6' erat/oos = " and if truly you shall depart, utter this over me three times — ' Friend, thou liest at rest ' : nay, if truly you shall list, this also — ' And a fair companion of mine is-departed.' " Hesiod Op. 401 rjv S' en Aiwgs, | xPVf'°- Z*^" °'" "'/O'j^ets, (TV S' hwa-ia TToAA' dyopevo-eK = " but if truly you shall be giving them further trouble, you will get no money from them and will do a good deal of talking to no purpose." Theognis 35 tjv Se KaKouriv I a-vfifiia-yrii, diroXets Kal rhv eovra voov = " if truly you shall be mixing vrith the worthless, you will destroy even your existing in- telligence." Soph. Fhil. 50 Sei a-' . . . \ . . ., rjv Tt Kaivhv ■ . • | KXvys, vTTovpyelv = " it is your duty, if truly you shall be hearing any news, to give your help." 70 GREEK AND LATIN § 55 65. (6) Present Herod, vii. 235 i)v 8e Tavra fiiq iroigs, raSe rot ■irpoarSoKa time. e'o-£cr0at = " if truly you shall not be for so doing, look out for this to happen to you." Hippocr. de rat. vid. m morh. acut. i. p. 399. F. = ii. p. 74. 1. K. 00-0)1' TOiuvSe i6vT(ov, ^jv ij KOtXwj -iiypi) r/ /cat o-uvTaKTj,-'^*'^ So/cei; /iO( to. po<^ij/iaTa tf/vxponpa koi Taxvrepa Trpo(T(f>epeLv = " snch symptoms being present in such ai)undance, if truly the internal organs shall be wet and melting away, I may possibly think it advisable to administer the gruels colder and thicker." Ar. Flut. 405 d\X' rjv Oeol OkXtocri, vvv d4>o$eTai = " but if truly the gods shall be willing, he will now come." Ar. Eccl. 254 ri 8' rjv NeoKA.et8i;s o yXap^iav ere XoiSoprj ; \ n. TovTo kol TpiQv apuvov rjSri rjv SoKy irecfipaypevoi ipev trr aurovs = " and if truly on the one hand they shall give any heed to us when we send our embassy to them, this will be best; but if truly, on the other hand, they shall give none, then if two or three years roll over, we shall at length go against them better prepared, if in very truth we shall think fit to do so." Thuc. i. 84. 4 r/v rts apa ^vv Karrfyopiq. rrapo^vvy, ov&ev ^SAXov dxOea-OevTes dviwiurOrfpAV = " if truly any one shall goad us on by taunts, not a whit the more do we in anger forego our better judgment." Carmen Populare Fr. 29. 17 dv 8e epri's n, ^eya Stj n 4>epoio = " if truly you shall be carrying off anything, ^ you might be carrying off for yourself something worth having." Plat. Protag. p. 310 D dv avnji 8iS(^s dpyvpiov Kol TreiOyi Ikeivov,^"^ Trobrjcrei Ka'i ere. (ro6v - " if truly you shall ofi"er him money and persuade him so to do, he will make you wise also." Dem. de Pais. Leg. p. 342. 21 ai- pev oSv So-tv dXrjOek, ra SUaia eyvwTe = " if then truly the reports shall be true, you form a correct opinion." Bern, de Pals. Leg. p. 449. 12 av ootm (jivXdrTrjTe avrov, ovx e'^et Ti Aeyr;, dXXa ttjv aXXtos ivravO' kirapu Tr]v (jioivrjv Koi Tre(f)iova(rKrjip.ai I kXdtiiv crvv TrAedvecro-tv = " but if truly he shall not have-given her up, I myself will come with more and take her away." Hom. II. V. 260 at Kev /tot iroXv^ovXos ' kdrjvrf kCSos opi^j I aiK^orepft) /cretvat, av 8e Toi!o-8e plv oiKeas iTrirovs \ avTov epvKaKeeiv = " if truly much - counselling Athene shall have-offered to me the glory of slaying them both, do you rein in here these swift steeds." Hom. Od. i. 279 orot 8' avridXyv yeyovora iv dSiKiq/mrt \py<^'uTrj, | . . . yvpvhi 6vpa^ e^eTrecrov ev aKapei \p6voi = " ior if truly, on the one hand, I shall have-happened to enter the house of a niggard, straightway he buries me down under the earth ; and if truly some good fellow, his friend, shall have-called, he avers that he has never even seen me. But if truly, on the other hand, I shall have-happened to enter the house of a rake-hell, I am stripped and bundled out of it in the shortest of times." Plato (Elegiacus) Fr. 26. 2 yv vv^ys, iyepek = "ii truly you shall have-nudged him, you will wake him." Soph. JEl. 554 dX)i yv k<^yv eXdiDcriv, p^8(0)s oiv, A.Kapvavlav (r^ovTes, kol rrjs ZaKvvOov Koi Ke0aAA?jvtas KpaT-qa-ovcri ^'^"' = " telling them that if truly with ships and infantry at the same time they shall have-accompanied them (the speakers), they will truly easily, after getting possession of Acarnania, establish their hold upon Zacynthus and Cephallenia as well." Xen. Anah. iii. 2. 31 fjv Se rts d-n-eiOrj, rjv \f''r]ia"ij(T0€ Thv del vfjLtov ivTvy)(^dvovTa crvv Tuy ap)(0VTi KoXd^eiv, ovroii ot TToAeytttoi :rAe?trTov e\j/ev(rp.evoi eaovrai = " and if truly any one shall be for being disobedient, then if truly you shall have-passed an ordinance that any one of you who may happen to be present may, in company with his own proper commander, mete out punishment to that man, in this way will the designs of the enemy most completely be frustrated." Auctor de Mul. Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 651. F. =ii. p. 805. 16. K. rjv Se TotaiJTa KaOapOy, rrerravcrdti) = "if truly this shall have-been the nature of the purgations, let an end have been put to them." Theocr. xxiii. 25 dAAa icai rjv SXov avrh Aa^ui' TTOTi x^'^os dfikX^di, I oijSc K6 tws (r/3e(rcr(o ^'^^ rhv efihv iroOov = " but even if truly I shall have-taken the whole of it to my lips and drunk it, not even so shall I extinguish my desire." 74 GREEK AND LATIN § 55 56. (6) Present Bion ii. 14 rjv 8' dvepos h fi^rpov eWys, | . • ■ Ke^a.X.av time. 1:ri o-ao /cae6^ei;= "but if truly you shall have-come to man's estate, he will alight upon your head." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 373. 15 aeT Aio-X'Vi? raSaya ravra . . ., av Si iinjdeiav . . . A.eAi;/iacr/x£VOS <;6avi7. av /a6vtoi Sm TTOvTipiav . . ., Kal toCt €^eAeyx^i? crac^ws w avTwv Twv Treirpay/xevMV, ii,aXu7ra /X6V, €t otov re, airoKTetvare, €t 8c /iij, fujvra Tois AoiVots ■n-apa.Say fia. TTOiijo-are = "remit in favour of Aeschines these extremities, if truly through guilelessness he shall have-been shown to have behaved so outrageously. If, however, truly through wickedness, and this shall have-been brought home to him clearly by the very facts of the case themselves, then and above all things, if it is possible, make an end of him ; but failing that, at least make him in life an example to the rest of mankind." See also Soph. Oed. Col. 861, 862; Ar. Nuh. \i?,^ ; Adi. 324; Thuc. vi. 33. 4; Plat. Gorg. p. 469 D; Gratyl. p. 432 k; Rep. v. p. 473 C. Leophanes (?) de Swperfoetat. in Hippocr. i. p. 263. F. = i. p. 470. 16. K. rjv Tivi av 17 p^rprj efiwvo'i ykvqrai, . . . ^viJ,4>ep€(. = " if truly the womb shall in some case have- become affected with abscess, it is advisable ..." Auctor Praeception. in Hippocr. i. p. 28. F. = i. p. 84. 6. K. ^1/ 8' av ^■^*' yivqrai n e^trijAoi; Iovtos, TreipacrdaL l^ojuoiovv rrj vTroKeip^evr) = " and if truly there shall have-happened something of a defective nature, we must try and render it like the ideal state of things." (C) d with the 56. (C) Past tenses of the Indicative Mood, adapted to past indicative denote, not actual, but conditional facts, (conditional). 57. (a) Past time. i. Conditional facts of past time. i. Past facts. ci with the past (a) Perfect: indicative, adapt- , , , onn > ^' i- n / p,aTOp,aTi = " but if he If — had -ed, — had been done to death, as most reports were, in very would have -ed. sooth with triple body a second Geryon he would have been boasting, having taken upon him a great and triple § 57 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 75 cloak of earth from above (for I speak not of the earth 57. (a) Past time, beneath him), dying once in each shape." ^^-^ Isaeus de Pyrrh. haered. p. 43. 27 et juij kviyeyvr)ro irapa Tov EvSioi; d)S 6^ Iraipas o^crav ttjv yvvaiKa . . ., fwvTt av T(j) EvSi([) ri[ji,i,(T^riTrjfT€V inrep Trj'S ■yvijcrtas ^ajyaxjobs Tcuv Trarpt^iov ^^^^ = " if Xenocles had not accepted the betrothal of the lady to himself from Endius upon the footing of her being illegitimate, he would in Endius' lifetime have instituted proceedings against him on behalf of the legitimate daughter to recover her father's inheritance." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. tS72. 16 et yap rj piv elprjvrj kyeyovn, p,rjSlv 8 v(TT€pov e^ijTTCiTijcr^e vp^ti, /uijS diroAwAet toov (rvp,p,d)(0}v /iijSeis, Ttv dvOpdnoiv kXvwrjcrev av 17 ^^p^vj' 6^0) TOV aSo^o'S yeyevTJcrOaL ; KaiTot kol tovtov o"DvatTtos oStos crwetirwv ^iXoKpaTei. dXXa dvij/tecrrov y ovSev dv ■^v yeyovo's = " for if it had been the case that on the one hand the peace had come about, and that on the other no further deceit had been practised upon you, and no destruction had come upon any one of the allies, whom of mortals would the peace have hurt — beyond the fact of his having become of ill repute ? And yet even of this the defendant would have been partly the occasion by making common cause with Philocrates. Still of an irreparable nature there would have been no result." (/8) Imperfect: Horn. II. xxiv. 713 Kai vv k£ Si) ;rpoirav ■^pap | "EKTOpa SaK/ovxeovTes oSvpovTO . . ., \ el prj dp ^k 8i(j>poio yipiov XaoTa-i p£Tqv8a = " and now, you see, for the whole day long would they have been wailing and lamenting for Hector, unless (as happened) the old man had proceeded to address the multitude from his chariot." Soph. El. 604 KoX ToS', etVep eo-(9evov, | eS/jwv av="and this, if at least I had been able, I would have been doing." Herod, iii. 25 et pAv vw padmv ravra 6 Ka/x^utrijs eyvwcrt- fidx^e . . ., ^v av o-os fieydXa d8iKo{jVTOS ' el Se TIS aiJT^s Trjs TrdXecos ev kivSvvo) ovcrris X'lttoi tijv TroXtv avrriv, ovk av apa eTedrj. 0"(^dS/Da y av, el Tts i)Orj Tiva Twv iroXiTwv dpapTyftreddai ti toiovtov irore = " for what orator would ever have conceived, or lawgiver expected, that any one of the citizens would commit so grievous a crime ? For, if he had, surely never would it have been the case that, whereas if a man were to desert his post, 1 57 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 77 the state itself being in no danger, but merely putting 57. (a) Past time. others into the gap, the law was enacted as having to do with a great wrongdoer ; yet if a man, the state itself being in danger, were to desert that state itself, no law should after all have been enacted. Nay assuredly a law would have been enacted, if any one had imagined that any one of the citizens would ever be guilty of anything like such a crime." Xen. Anab. iv. 1. 11 et jucvtoi totc TrAetovs (rvveXey-qa-av, eKivSvv€viTev av Siafjidapr^vai ttoXv tov (rTpareij/iaTos = " if however at that time more had assembled together, a great part of the army would have run the risk of being destroyed." "^ Plat. Apol. p. 31 D ei Jyo) iraAat kire')(^lprj(7a. Trpa.TT€iv to. TToXiTiKo, Trpajjjxna, iraXai av OiTroXdXr] Kal ovt av v/j.S.'S ix^eXrjKTj ovShi ovt av JfiavTov = " if I had in times gone by essayed to meddle with politics, of bygone times also would have been my break up, and neither you should I have benefited nor myself." Dem. Olynth. iii. p. 30. 6 el yap rore eKelae lf3orj9T^crap,ev, iknrep e^^«ra/ie6a, irpoOvp.ia's, ovk av rivui)(X€i vvv rjfLLv 6 '^IXunros (TioOels = " for if we had then carried aid thither, according to our decision, with energy, there would not have been giving us trouble now Philip preserved." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 378. 29 €6 yap iifntf^ta-aa-de pAvov Kal fiiKpav v7rerivaT IXiriSa ijvTtvovv avrots, l ctSdrcov = " for I should not have come to tell you, if I had not learnt the matter from those who clearly knew." Plat. Ale. Pr. p. 119 B d jiev ttov ^v awcj) ' ^■'■^ vvv Se . . . = "if' then . not being choragus I had suffered this treatment at the hands of Midias, insolence only would have been the charge one would have brought against his proceedings. But, as it is, . ." Dem. Mid. p. 556. 19 et' /xev . . ds J/te fwvov acreXy^s ovTU) Kal /3[aLos iyeydvet, . . . arvx^il av ipiavTov tovto riyovix7]v = " if against myself alone he had shown himself thus wanting in self-control and violent, — I should have been looking at that in the light of a misfortune personal to myself." Isocr. Philipp. p. 93. c. Aoot&v 8' civ ^v rjp,tv hi Trepl rrj's TToXeas SiaXexO^vaL rrjs rjp.e.Tipa's, ei p.fj . . . rrjv dp-qvrjv § 58 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 79 irmroii^To = " it would have remained to us still to speak 58. (a) Past time. about our state, if it had not made peace for itself." See also Plat. Charmid. p. 171 D; Cratyl. p. 384 B. (/S) Imperfect : Theognis 905 el fih yap xariSetv yStorov reAos ^v, oirotrov Tis I T^/xeAA,' JKTeAecras €« 'AtSao irepav,^^^ | eiKbs av '^v . . .■ I vvv S' ovK loTiv = " for if it had been possible to look upon the term of life, how much a man having spent is likely to pass to the realms of Hades, it would have been reasonable that . . . But, as it is, it is not so." Soph. El. 393 KaXbs yap ovfibs jiloToi wrre dav[j,d(rai. | X. dXX ■JJv av, €1 (TV y eS av€ti ttov ovtcs riSiKovv ttiv EXXdSa, SiSacrKaXLas av (is ovk dSocn irpocreSei ' ^^® vvv Se . . . = " and if, being people living in some obscure corner, they had been doing mischief to Greece, information would have been also necessary for you, as for people who were ignorant. But, as it is, . ." Lysias pro Gallia p. 102. 35 el ixev irepl aAAov nvos ij tov (T(i/MiTO's . . . KaXAtas ■^yoivi^eTO, e^pKei av p,oi Kal to, irapa tSv dXXbiv elprjjieva' vvv Sc . . . = "if indeed for anything else than his Hfe Callias had been on his trial, even what has been said on the part of the others would have been sufficing for me. But, as it is, ..." Xen. Anab. v. 1. 10 ti p-ev rj-n-undpeOa craioi on rj^ei irXoia li.eipuro(f)Oi ay(ov iKavd, ovSev av eSei ^^^ &v peXXo) Xeyeiv ' vvv Se . . . = " if we had been clearly knowing, that Chirisophus would come with adequate ships, there would have been no subsisting necessity for the words which I am about to utter. But, as it is, ..." Plat. Apol. p. 20 C kyia yoCv /cat aiJT&s eKaXXvvoprjv re /cat rjPpvvoprjv av, el rjTTUTTdprjv ravra' dXX ov ydp eTrurrapai = " why even I myself should have been thinking no small things of myself and pluming myself, if I had been in possession of this knowledge. But it is of no use, for I am not in possession of it." 80 GREEK AND LATIN § 58 58. («) Past time. Plat. Rej). i. 329 B £t yap ^v tovto aiTtov, K&v eyo) to avra TavTa eTreirovOiiv eVexa ye yijpdis = " for if tMs had been the cause, I myself too should have experienced those very same things in consequence of old age forsooth." Isocr. Areop. p. 151. C. el /lev irepl 7rpay/j,a,Twv dyvoov/J,evu}V . . . Toiis Xoyovi e-TTOiovfi-qv, Koi wepl tovtuiv eKeX.evov u/tas eXecrOaL CTweSpoi'S . . ., tiKOTCos oiv eT)(ov TavTqv Tr/v alrCav' vvv S' . . . = "if about matters as to which ignorance was rife I had been making my speech, and about them had been urging you to take to yourselves counsellors, justly should I have been lying open to this charge. But, as it is, ..." Dem. Aplioh. i. p. 813. 1 el [ilv efSovkero" A.<^oPo'i . . TO, SiKata TTOielv, . . . oijScv av eSeL 6t/c(2v ovSe Trpayfj,dTOiv. awef^pr] yap av rots vtt eKelvoiv yvv ^X.9ov I IlXovreo-s = " shedding tears I lament your fate. But if the power had been mine, like Orpheus ... I also perhaps would have come to the house of Pluto." See also Eur. Eipp. 493; Thuc. i. 143. 6, 7; Xen. Jmb. iii. 2. 24 ; Dem. ad Aphoh. p. 861. 22 ; Phorm. p. 921. 4. Hom. II. xxiv. 220 el pkv ydp Tts /*' dWos eTTLxOoviOiv eKeXevev, | . . . i^cCSds Kev aT/j,ev /cat voacjiiloi/j.eda p.d\kov I vvv S' . . . = " for if any other of the children of earth had been laying upon me the injunction, I should I have been proclaiming it a falsehood and putting it from me, rather. But, as it is, . . ." Dem. de Coi: p. 296. 24 el /jiiv rolvw toot ewexetpovv Xeyeiv, (Ls . . ., OVK eo-Q' orrns ovk dv et/coTcos eirLTiii-qa-eie px)L ■ vvv S . . . = " if then this had been what I was underta,king to prove, viz. — that . . ., the man does not exist who would not justly | have -blamed me. But, as it is, . . " (7) Indefinite : Soph. Oed. Tyr.^ 261 kolvZv re TralSav Koiv dv, el Keivoi yevos I pfj 'Sva-TvxrjO-ev, ^v av eKirecfiVKora = " from common § 58 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 81 children common issue would have been brought into 58. (a) Past time, existence, had not his race been unfortunate." Soph. El. 372 r^Qas elfii irtus | rwv TrjaSe jj.vO(av' ovS' av ifjiviqcrOriv irore, | el |U.ij KaKhv fiiyurrov eis aw^v Ibv | rJKovo-' = " I am, as it were, accustomed to my sister's language : nor should I have ever noticed it, if I had not heard of a very great evil, which is approaching her." Eur. Swppl. 458 KXaiuiv y av ■^A^es, €(.' ere (x/q ire/xi/'ev ttoAis, I TrepuTo-a cfitDvav = " in very truth to your mischief would you have come hither, if your state had not sent you — speaking, as you do, at inordinate length." Plat. Euthyphr. p. 14 C o et direKplvm, 'iKavm av rjSri irapa, a-ov TTjv oo-ioTTjTa e/ic/iaSijKr; =" which question if you had answered, I should have now been suflSciently instructed at your hands as to the nature of sanctity." Plat. Apol. p. 20 A et fiev trov to!) vlU TrdX-ui rj iJ,6(T\ta kyivicrOr^v, ei^ojiev av avrolv eirurrary^v Xa^eTv = "if your two sons had been two colts or calves, we should have been able to get them a keeper." Hom. It. ii. 80 el fikv ns rhv oveipov Axa«3v aAAos evunrev, \ tf/evSo? Kev cf>abfi,ev Kal voiT<^L^OLp.e6a jxaXXov' | vvv 8 . . . = "if indeed any one else of the Achaeans had told us the dream, we should | have been proclaiming it a falsehood, and putting it away from us, rather. But, as it is, ..." Eur. Bacch. 1341 el Se ao)4>poveiv I eyvwO' or ovk rjO'eXere, rbv Atbs yovov | ev5aip,ovoir av (rvp,p.a)(ov KeKTrj/jLevoi ^^^ = " but if you had recognised the path of prudence, when you would not, you would | have been rejoicing at having the son of Zeus as your ally." Hom. Od. i. 234 vvv S' Itc/ous I^oXovto deol . . ., | o? Keivov fiev auTTOV eirot-qa-av irepl Trdvroiv | dvdpoyTriDV, eTrel ov Ke OavovTL irep &S' aKaxoifJirjv, | el /^era oTs erdpouri, SdfJi,7j Tpuxov evl 6i7/*(}) | rje e^tAwv evl x^/OO"'!^ = "but, as it is, the gods have-willed otherwise . ., who have-made Mm to disappear from the midst of men : for I should not for him even dead | have-grieved thus, if with his comrades he had fallen amongst the Trojan people or in the hands of friends." Soph. El. 797 TToAAcDv av yikok, & ^ev, a^ios Tvxelv, \ el TT]vS' e-n-ava-as Trjs TroXvyXdocrcrov /3o7J? = " of much deserv- ing would. you I have come hither, stranger, if you had caused this lady to cease from her many-tongued cry." G 82 GREEK AND LATIN §69 (C) d with the past indicative (conditional) : &" omitted. 60. [a) Past time, i. Past facts. ei with the past indicative adapted to denote condi- tional facts, ac- companied by the past indicative. If — had -ed, — had -ed. 59. (C) Past tenses of the Indicative Mood, adapted to denote, not actual, but conditional facts. i. Conditional facts of past time. (a) Perfect : (;8) Imperfect ; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 255 oijS' d yap yv rh ■n-pS.yp.a p.r] de-qkarov, I aKOiOapTOV tijuas ci/cbs ^v ovtid'S eav = " for not, even if the matter had been otherwise than Heaven-impelled, had it been seemly for you to leave it thus without atonement." Ar. Pac. 1070 el yap pifj Nv/it^ai ye Oeal BaKW e^aird,T(WKOv, I . . . oira-CD Oecr^iaTov fjv Wip-qvrjS Secr/Jt dvaXwai = " for if the divine Nymphs indeed had not been deceiving Bacis, it had not yet been decreed to loose the bonds of Peace." Thuc. i. 37. 5 KaiVot el ^crav &a-irep povovcr eT'vyxavei = " for justice overtook him, not I alone ; and to her it had been your duty to give ( = you ought to have given) aid, if you had been actuated by a proper feeling." Eur. Med. 586 XPW^^^ '^ ^''^^P ^jarda [ifj KaKos,^^^ ireuravTa fi£ I ya/ieiv ydfiov tovS' . . . = " it had been your duty, — ^if at least you had been otherwise than a bad man, — when you had persuaded me to this marriage, to . . ( = you ought to have so acted)." Andoc. de Myst. p. 15. 22 ci yap i/SovXea-drjv fie diroAAwat TO! de6, exprjv ^^^ SrjTTov . . . = " f or if the two deities had been desiring to destroy me, it had been surely right. . . ."123a Dem. Mid. p. 576. 4 Kal el rovriav ^v irovrjpoTaTos, Kara TOW vofwv; eSei Trap e/JLOv Sikyjv Xap,pdveiv, ovk e<^ ofs eXeiTovpyovv vfipl^ew = " and if of these I had been the worst, yet according to law had it been right to punish me ; not to insult me in the course of the service which I was rendering to the state." Plat. Symp. p. 198 B w ato-xwrjs oXlyov aTToSjoas (px^M^' €(.' Trr] eTxov = " for very shame I had been within an ace of running off, had I had whither to go." (-y) Indefinite : Antipho Tetral. ii. 2. p. 121. 27 el pkv yap t6 aKovTiov e^m tZv opoiv Trjs avrov ■KOpeia's eir\ rbv TratSa e^evexOev erpiMTev avrov, o^Sets 17/iiv Adyos VTreXeiTrero fifj ^oveiis ^^^^ eXvai = " for if the weapon, carried aside beyond the limits of its proper line of flight on to the boy, had wounded him, no argument had been remaining for us, by which to exclude him from the category of murderers." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 354. 13 ravra toIvw Kal jrdAA 'irepa evrjv Trapaxprj^a tot evOhs e^eXeyxeiv Kal SiSdcrKeiv vfiai . . ., el p.fj Qea-TTLal Kal UXaTaial Kal t6 Qrj/Saiovi avriKa 8rj fidXa Suia-eiv Siktjv deiXeTO ttjv dXrjOeiav = " such topics as these, then, and many others it had been 84 GREEK AND LATIN § 60 60. (a) Past time. possible forthwith at that time without hesitation to adduce before you in proof, and remind you of, . . . if 'Thespiae and Plataea' and 'the necessity for the immediate punishment of the Thebans' had not re- legated the unvarnished truth to the background." Dem. Mid. p. 525. 2 oiiTa) TOiwv Kal l/ue d ixh kv ctAAats Turlv rjfiipai'i r/SiKTrjcre ri tovtidv MetSias ISuoTrjV ovra, iSij. Kal SiKTjv TTpoarJKev avTio SiSovai " et 8e . . . = SO in llKe manner in my case also, if in some other days Midias had done me any of these wrongs whilst I was acting in a private capacity, in a private suit also it had been right for him to pay the appropriate penalty. But if . . " Thuc. iii. 74. 2j kol rj n-oAts l/civSwevo-e Tracra Sia(l>daprjvai, el avefjio? hreytvero iiriipopos h avTiqv = " and the town too had run the risk of being entirely destroyed, if a wind had come up likely to bear the flame upon it." ^^ 61. (a) Past time. ii. ■ Conditional facts of present time, ii. Present facts. (a) Perfect: Eur. Hec. 1111 el Se p,rj ^pvyZv \ -Kvpyovs TrecrovTas j}(r/*ev EAA^vcuv hop'i, I (j}6j3ov Trapeo-f^ev ov fiecrio'S o8e KTVTTos = " but if we had not known that the Phrygian towers had fallen to the Grecian spear, fear had been caused in no moderate degree by this clatter." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 374. 16 eKelvov; tow Adyous e^-fjTow irapa. rovTOV, ehrep p,-q ireirpaKm airrhv ■^v = " that was the kind of language I had been expecting from him, if he had not sold himself." (/S) Imperfect : Aesch. Suppl. 244 koI roiAAa ttoAA' eireiKao-at StKaiov Jjv, | el firj irapovTt, (j^Ooyyo? -qv 6 a-rifiavHiv = " and the rest in great abundance it had been right to imagine, had there not been a voice belonging to one present which should declare the facts." Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1386 dAA' el ttJs dKovoiJcnjs eV ^v | jrijy^s 8t (OTWV ^pay/xds, ovk avecrx6p.rjv^^^ | rb jitij aTroKAeicrat TOiJ/xbv a^Atov Se/ias, | 'iv ij^^^ tv<^X6s re Kal Kkvoyv /LwjSev 127 = " but if there had yet been any mode of fencing out the source of hearing through my ears, I had not refrained from shutting off my wretched frame, so that I had been both blind and hearing nothing." § 61 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 85 Dem. Phil. iii. p. 112.6 et fAv oSv aTravres iijwXoyovfixv 61. {a) Past time. ^iXvmrov ry ttoXh iroXeyneiv . . ., oij8ev aXA,o eSei rbv irapiovTO. Aeyetv /cat (rv/i/8ouA£i;etv 17 oVftJS dtrtfiaXicrTaTa Kot pqxj-TO. avTciv afivvoifieda, ' eTretSi) Se . . . = " if then we had all been in agreement with each other that there was war between Philip and our state, there had been nothing else for one who came forward to say or to advise, but how most safely and most easily we should ward him off. But, inasmuch as . . ." Hyperides c. Demosth. col. 18. 1. 23 (ed. Blass: Lips. 1869) KatTOt eSet TovvavTiov v£X

poip,ioLi TToXvppodoi? = " for if things were to go right with us, the doing is of God. But if on the other hand, as may it not happen ! calamity were to befall us, Eteocles would — a multitude in one — ^be in the mouths of the citizens up and down the city in many-voiced exclama- tions." Aesch. Sv^l. 925 KXaloi6iOV a-Tpoyyv\ov, | Sxnrep KOTtyirrpov, k^to. Trjpoliiv 6Y(ov, I 2. Tt S^To. tovt' av (J^eAijcreKV a ; 2T. o tl; ei [iriKiT dvaTeXXoi d^Xrjvr] fi-qSafiov, \ ovk av diroSoiriv rovs TOKovs = " if, purchasing a Thessalian wise woman, I were to draw down the moon by night, and then con- iine her in a round crestcase, like a mirror, and then were to keep her down, S. How then would that benefit you ? St. How ? Why, if the moon were no longer rising anywhere, I should not pay my interest." Thuc. i. 120. 6 6' re yap 8ia rrjv rjSovrjV okvZv Tax^TT av dcjiaipeOeiT] ttjs p^icrTcuvTjs rb repTrvhv Si oirep OKvet, d ■^crvxdCoi, K.T.X. = " for both he who through his pleasure hesitates would most quickly be deprived of the charm of his easygoingness, by reason of which it is that he hesitates, if he were to remain pacific, and etc." Thuc. vi. 11. 1-4 KaiToi TOW p.€V KaTepyarrdfi^voL k&v KaTd(T)(OLfJiev ' tcuv S', el Kal Kparridaijxev, Sia ttoXXov ye Kal TToXXoJv ovTiKoiiJ,eda, eTreuTa Se Kal el Seifavres TrjV Sijva/itv St oXiyov direXdoLp,ev ' el 8e (T^aXeh^p^v ri, Ta^^ttTT av ii7re|Ot8dvTes p-era t5v ev0d8e eiriOeiVTO = "and yet, if we got the mastery over the one set, we should also get them down under us ; but as to the others, even if we were to get the sway over them, yet — at a distance as they are and being many in number — it would with difficulty remain feasible for us to rule over them. And the Sicilians seem to me likely to become even still less formidable to us, if the Syracusans were to get the rule over them. For as things are at present they would even come perhaps, each out of afi'ection for the Lacedaemonians ; but in the other case it would not be likely that one dominion should undertake an expedition against another. And as to ourselves, the Greeks there would most of all have-been impressed, if we were altogether to abstain from coming, and next if we were just to show our power, and then get us away after a brief interval. 64 § 64 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 89 But if we were to meet with any reverse, most quickly would they despise us and attack us in company with those here." Thuc. VI. 34. 4 ^LKeXtioTai yap ti Oekoifibev ^Vfiiravre's . . . aTravTrJcrat AOrjvaioi.'s es Tdpavra . . ., fjidXicrr av avrovi eKTrXri^aifiev, Kal Is XoyuTfihv KaTOHTTrjaaiiMV OTt . . ., Koi ■qiuv av ive.Tridf.TOpia eprjfjM, Kal rj [ievovTei TToXiopKoiVTO av, rj ireipiofjLevoi, TrapaTrXetv, T-qv re dXXr]v TrapacrKevrjv aTToXiTTOLev av, Kal to, twv iroXeov ovk av fSkPaia i^ovns, elivTToSe^oivTo, ddv/ioiev^^^ = " ioT if we Siceliots were willing in a body to go to meet the Athenians at Tarentum, we should by so doing most of all impress them, and set them to consider that . . . ; and their force would be easily open to our attack, coming on, as it would, slowly and few in numbers at a time. But if on the other hand they were to attack us with their swift vessels, if they were to betake themselves to their oars, we should set upon them when they were tired ; but if we did not care to do that, then it is possible also for us to retire to Tarentum, while they, having crossed over with a slender supply of necessaries, would be in difficulties, moving about, as would be the case, in desolate places; and would either remain and be blockaded by us, or if they [tried to sail by us, they would both lose what remained of their supplies, and as they would have no certainty of knowledge as to the disposition of the various states, whether they would receive them or not, would be in a state of dispirited- ness." Andoc. de Myst. p. 5. 10 ■ij ^iLvov y av ei'r/, d kfiol opyi^ourOe IttI Tots erepav apapT'qp.aa-i, Kal rfjv els i/Jie 8ia/3oA.7jv £tSoT£s OTi vTrh Twv k-)(Bpuiv tZv i/JLiov Xkyirai, Kptvnui rrjs dXriOeiai ■^y-^a-aurOe = "why, surely it would be a monstrous thing, if you were to be cherishing anger against me in respect of the wrong -doings of other people, and yet, as to the false accusation against my- self, while knowing it to be the language of my enemies, you were to consider it stronger than the truth itself." 90 GREEK AND LATIN § 64 Xen. Anal. v. 1. 11 d oSv aiTrja-dfjievoi Trapa TpaTre^ovvTianv juaKpa TrAota Karayoifiev koX (fjvXaTTOi-fiev avra ra irrjoaAta TrapaXvofuvoi eus av LKava ra a^ovra y^vryrai, icrws av ovk aTToprp-aip^v KopiSrJT, otas Se6px6a = " if then we were to beg ships of war of the Trapezuntians, and keep them beached and with rudders off, until we shall have-got together sufficient to carry us, perhaps we should not experience any deficiency in the means of transport, of which we are in need." Plat. Protag. p. 351 B ap oSv Soke? a-oi avdpunros av eS ffjv, el a,VLwp£v6s re kol 6Svvwp£vos CvV ' °^'^ ^4'V- '''' ^ ^' ijSews /8toi)S rbv fSiov TeXevrrjcrcuv, ovk ev av (rot Sokol^'^ ovTw ^6j8t(0K6vai ; = " do you then think that a man would be passing a happy life, if he were passing it in sorrow and pain ? No, said he. "Well then, if after having lived it with pleasure he were to come to an end of his life, would you not think him to have thus passed a happy life ? " Plat. Cratyl. p. 432 B S,p av Svo Trpdypara ettj to. TOtaSe, oiov KpaTuAos Kal JS.paTvXov eiKiiv, e! tis OeSiv p/r) p,6vov TO 0"bv \pZpM Kal (7)(r]pa dTreiKocreLev . . ., dAAd Kal . . . ; = " would then such things as these, for example Cratylus and Cratylus' image, be existing as distinct things, if one of the gods were not only to counterfeit your colouring and build, but also . .1" Isocr. Panath. p. 238. a. el ydp tovto ■qSrj ttoioitjv . . ., o^uotos av ctvat Sd^at/it tois . . . = "for if I were at length come to be doing this, I should seem to be like those . ." 65. (B) h ii. Hom. Od. XU. 348 el Se xoAwcraytievos Ti /Booiv opOoKpaipdiov \ vrj eOeXy okecrai, eirl S' eWeovrai deal dkXoi, \ /3ovX.ofi dira^ Trphs Kvpa xa^wv dirh Svphv oAecro-at, | f) Srj6a (TTpevyea-Oai ewv ev v-i^arb} eprip-g = " but if haply, angry somewhat over his straight -horned kine, the sun-god shall be desiring to destroy our ship, and the other gods shall have -followed his lead, I wish once for all, gaping towards the wave, to part company with life, rather than, forsooth, to waste away on a desert island." § 67 § 67 7 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 91 66. (B') I. Tnuc. vi. 33. 5 r)v re 8t awopiav rlav k-n-LTrfidaA(Scri, Tois iiriPovXevOeicnv 6Vo/ta, Kav Trcpt cr^lxnv avTois TO. TrXetO) irTaLWcriv, ofuos KaraXeiwova-iv = " and if truly by want of necessaries in a strange land ttey (sc. large expeditions) shall have-got into trouble, to those who concerted measures against them they are leaving behind a great reputation, even if truly it shall be, in more cases than not, that they themselves are the rock upon which they split." Xen. Hipparch. 7. 3 hnnts re yap (Tvv ^e(j) dfielvovs, rjv Tts aiiTcuv iiriixeXrjTai, cos Set, owAirai t6 ov [/.eiovs ecrovTai . . ., i^v opdZs da-KyjOwa-c = " for both the cavalry by God's help will be better, if truly one shall look after them, as ought to be done ; and the heavy-armed troops will be not less in number, if truly they shall have -been exercised properly." Isocr. Areop. p. 155. e. fjv fikv oiJtios oIkQikv t^v ttoXiv &(nrep vvv, ovK ecTTiv OTTios 0^ Kal PovXsva-OjxeOa /cat TroAE/tijo-o/iei' Koi . . . ' fjv Si\ ii.era^dXiiijj£v tt^v TroXireiav, S^Xov on . . . oiaTrep fjv rots TrpoyovoK to, Trpdyfiara, roiavT e(7Tai Kal Trepl -qfiSis = " if truly on the one hand we shall be organising our policy as at present, it is impossible, but that we shall both be for taking counsel and going to war and . . . : but if truly we shall have-changed our ways of going on in the state, it is plain that, as matters were with our forefathers, so they ■\viU be found to be with reference to us also." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 343. 3 ov Jav rts eKw Ka6v(j>y tois evavTioii Kal irpoSij), ovS av oriovv iroirj jraXiv otos t ecrrat a-mrat = " which (sc. opportunity) if truly a man shall have-put aside wittingly in his opponent's behoof and betrayed, not even if truly he shall be doing what he will, will he be able again to retrieve it." ^^^* See also Thuc. vi. 85. 1 ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 437. 23. 67. (C)a. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 124 ttus o^v 6 Ajjo-t'^s, d n. [ifj ^vv dpyvpt^ I iTrpdcraeT kvOivh', h ToS' av toXixtj? E|8ij; = "how then would the robber, unless some trafficking with gold had 92 GREEK AND LATIN § 67 been going on from this quarter, have advanced to this degree of daring ? " Herod, iii. 21 el yap ■^v St/catos, ovT av eTreOv/JLTjcre Xwpijs a,X.X.7]S rj Trji eiavTOV, ovt av Is SovXoa-vvrjv dvOporTTOVS ^ye, inr &v fiTjSev ■^SUrjrai = " for if he had been a just man neither would he have conceived the desire for territory beyond what was his own, nor would he have been seeking to enslave men, from whom he has received no injury." At. Eccl. 407 eywy av eTrrov, el irapibv krvy^avov = " I should have said, if I had happened to be standing by." Xen. Anab. vii. 6. 27 et ovv kv Toiavry avdyKy oVrav vp,Zv . . . ^evdyjv riv re Kal iraiSeiav, el p,fj ttoXv epyov ^v = " and I would have gone through with you the remaining articles in the nurture and training of the combatants, if it had not been a long story." Dem. 01. iii. p. 30. 6 el yap tots eKewre e/3orj9'q(Tap,ev . . . Trpodvfiws, ovK av ijvco^Xet vvv y^pHv 6 '^IXnnros crmOek = "for if then we had zealously carried assistance to that quarter, Philip — preserved — would not have been giving us trouble now." Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 23. 1. 23 kp-aivea-de yap av el aXXov Tiva TpOTTov Thv v6p,ov TovTov edea-Oe rj ovrois = " you would have been in a condition of madness, if you had passed this law in any other shape than this." See also Soph. Bl. 439 ; Ar. Ban. 1371 ; Xen. Mem. i. 4. , 5; Plat. Gorg. p. 447 D; Dem. Lept. p. 481. 4. Usage of construe- 68. The Constructions tions. to be used in any conditional sentence are also regulated by the exigencies of the idea to be expressed. This may be seen from the following examples, as also from some of those already given : — § 69 § 69 ) CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 93 69. (A) a with variants. Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morb. acid. i. p. 400. P. =ii. p. 77. 10. K. VTTO-f^ovhpiov fihi yap, el k-ir'arovov ijv r) eTryp/xevov ij ^XV ■''"'" (TKoXiOTriTa rj Kopov, f) irXevpov dXyrjSiiv evrj, koI . . . ' OTav Se Ti Tovrwv Trapy, Iv viro^ovSpo} p,ev pAXuna Xveiv Tijv KoiXiTjv KXvcrp,ouTi, K.T.X. = " for If the prae- cordia were oppressed or inflated, or if haply they shall have any obliquity or surfeit, or any pain of the side shall exist, and . . . : when truly any symptom of this sort shall be present, in the praecordium the best thing to do is to loosen the bowels with clysters, etc." Al. Plut. 329 Seivhv yap d rpioi^oXov pev oiiveKa | uxni^op^crd' eKooTOT €v TrjKKXrj(rtUTCixrde, tovs Se Trap vpiv avroh d8iKovvraiJ,o\6yr]Ka ^ efjbrivva-a Kara. Ttvos dvOpwTrtov . . ., dwoKTeivaTi fie' et 8e o^Sev^'*'' ■^fjApTTfat 1^01, . . . Seofmi vfjiMV avrh av£phv Tois "EAA-Tjo-t Tratrt TTOirjcrai, (is dStKws eis rovSe rhv ayatva KarecTTTjv. eav yap jXYj [LeraXafirj rh Trkprn-rov jiApos twv ^■)j<^U)V Kttt aTLpMOrj 6 evSei^as €//■£ Kyjcjiia-ioi ovto(tI, ovk efccTTtv avTtii ets rh tephv roiv deoiv eicrievat, r; airouaveiTai. et oSv ii/;(.rv SoKM iKavus ire/ot tovtwv aTroAeAoyijcr^at, STjAioo-are /iot = " if on the one hand I have been guilty of any impiety or have made any confession, or if I on any occasion denounced any mortal man, put an end to me. But if on the other hand I have been perfectly innocent, I ask you to make it clear to all Greece, that it is with injustice that I was brought into this present position. For if truly, he who indicted me, Cephisius here, shall have-failed to get the fifth part of your votes and shall have-been deprived of his franchise, he has no right to enter into the temple of the two deities, or he ivill be put to death. If, then, I seem to you to have made a satisfactory defence upon these points, signify the same to me." Plat. Phaedon p. 67 E et yap SiafiejSXyjVTai jxlv iravTa'XTJ TU) crcu/iaTi, avTrjv Se KaO avrrjv hriOvjxova-i -rqv il/v)(rjv eX*'"' TOVTOV 8e yiyvoptivov el oj3oivTO Ka\ a,yavaKTOL€V, ov iroXXrj av dXoyia etij, ei /iij aw/ievot tKeure totev of durr]arde, avrol Sc epeTai ; el yap to. Trvevfiara tovtov KivovpAvov vtto tov Oepjiov yiverai, ■iriepe reus XP°'<'V • • • GavaTiff eKoAafere tovi k.t.X. = "it would be a monstrous thing, if now forsooth you were to exhibit compassion towards those who steal, whereas in the time that is gone you used to punish with death those who etc." Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 24 otSa yap on koI M-uo-ots fiao-iXevs TToXXovs fiev ijy€/iOvas av Sot?;, ttoAAous S av ofjiT^povs Tov aSoAcos €K7re[j,tp€iv, /cat oSoTTonjcrete y av a^TOis Kal el criiv TedpiTTTTOK ySovAotvTO aTTievai. /cat ij/itv y av otS on TpLcrdcriJ^vos raiiT CTTOtet, el edpa ij/^as jxeveiv TrapacTKeva^o- fxevovi = " for I know that to the Mysians also the king would offer many a leader and many a hostage for their safe expedition, and that with freedom from treachery ; and that he would make the way for them easy, even if they were desiring to depart with four - horsed chariots. And for us too I know that he would have been thrice-gladly so acting, if he had been cognisant of the fact that we were preparing to remain." Plat. Phaedon p. 99 A el Se rts Xeyoi, on avev tov to. TOiavra e\eLV . . . ovk av otos re •^v iroieiv to, So^avra jMi, aX-qOrj av Xeyoi. m p.evT0L Sta Tavra Trotu, a iroila . . ., iroXXrj av /cat fiaKpa pc^dvfiCa e'irj toS Xoyov = "but if any one were to say that without having such things " as these I should not have been in a position to do what I thought right, he would be saying the truth : but to say that it is because of these things that I do what I do, would be much and great idleness of speech." Eur. Or. 508 et rdvS aTroKTetvetcv 6[j,6XeKrpos yvvv, I vco TovSe Trats av jXTfrep' avTairoKTevei, \ KairetO' 6 Kelvov yevo- fievoi ^ovo) <^dvov | Xvtrei, Trepan Si) :rot /ca/cwv 7rpo/3ij(reTat ; = " if he were to be slain by his wedded wife, and his child in turn shall slay his mother, and thereafter the child's child shall do away with slaughter by further slaughter, to what point will recede the end of evils 1 " ^7^ § 7^ § 74 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 97 73. (B) h ii. with variants. Euryphon (?) de Mori. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 470. F. = ii. p. 238. 8. K. d 8e ot otSrj[jux, eKcftvy koI olSuTKeTai, Trpbi to. a-rrjdea koi epvOphv ey Koi Kai-qrat, eXirtSes irX.eove's a-ayrripiTj's = " but if haply a swelling shall come out upon him, and he begins to be swollen about the breast, and haply the part shall be red and burning, the chances of a safe issue are greater." 73a. (A') a with variants. Dinarch. c. Dem. p. 96. 44 eh' ov Seivov . . . d Sti piv efs dvYjp itfjrjcre . . . dStKeiv p,€, . . . icrxva-ev av rb if/evSo'S TTJs dXTjOeiai paXXov, . . . iireiS^ Se TaXTjdh Trapa'^^^ iraxrrj^ T^s e^ Apetov irdyov ^ovA^s o/ioAoyeirat, . . . vvv TO. vop,i,fia rdKeWev kou to, SiKaca /cat rdX-qOi) dtrOw&rTepa. yeviqa-eTai rZv Ar]p,O(T0evovs Aoyv; = "then is it not monstrous, if on the one hand because one man averred that I was doing wrong, the lie would have prevailed against the truth : yet now, on the other hand, when the truth is admitted on the part of the whole of the Areopagitic council, their customs and justice and truth shall prove weaker than Demosthenes' assertions ? " 74. (B') a with variants. Dem. Lept. p. 475. 26 ovkovv al(T\p6y, d pceXXovre^ pkv ev 5racr^etv a-VKO(fidvTrjv dv rhv ravra Xiyovra ■qyoLCrOe, eirl tw S deXe(Tdai rds tSiv irporepoiv evepyeriov Swpeas ravra Xey6vTv OavaTwSeiov arrjfiemv irpo(TyLvoiTO, oXidpiov Kapra. d Se drep Ttov TOiovrtav crrjpeiwv rj oSvvq VTrepjSdXXoi eiKocriv •fjpJepas, 6 T£ TTvperh'S e'xo'j VTrocrKeTmcrOai ■)(firj a'ipaTO'S prj^iv Sid pivQv = " if, on the one hand, any one of the mortal symptoms should be added, the case is an extremely H 98 GREEK AND LATIN § 74 deadly one. But if, on the other hand, without any- such symptoms the pain were to last longer than twenty days, and the fever were to hold, you must expect a gush of blood through the nostrils." 75. (B') 6 with variants. Herod, ix. 48 tj Si) ov irph f/.h tZv 'EAAiJvwv vfiit's, ■ ■ ■ Trpb Se TMV ^apfSapav ■^/Jieis, i'lrot irphi icrovs apidphv p.axe(T6p,Sa ; Kcd r)V pkv SoKey kol Tois aXXovs jJ,dxe<76ai, oi S S>v jiiToreiTa fiaxeadoyv vmepot. el 8e Koi p,rj SoKeot, dWa ij/ieas p.ovvov's diroxpS-v, ^fieTs Sc Sta/iaxetro/xe&a = why then shall it not be, that for the Greeks you, and for the foreigners we, shall contend, equals in numbers against equals ? And if truly it shall seem good that the rest also shall fight, then let them fight afterwards in the end. But if it were not so to seem good, but rather that we alone are amply sufficient — (if it shall so be), then we will fight the matter out." Hippocr. de rat. vid. in morb. acut. i. p. 386. F. = ii. p. 35. 13. K. xpeecr^ftt Se irory, rjv fiev a\yrjp.d tl exy, o^vfieXiTC . . ., 7JV 8e iroXXrj SCif/a ei-q, p.eXiKprjfT(ji koI liSart = "and use as a drink, if truly the patient shall have any pain, oxymel : but if there should be great thirst, honey and water." Ar. Av. 1077 ■^v dTroKTeuvy Tts vp,Zv ^iXoKparrj . . \ Xr/il/erai rdXavTOv' ^jv 5e ^(avT ayy Tts, TCTTapa . . . j ravTa /SovXafieo'd dvenreiv' nei tis opviOa'S Tpeei | ctpy- irelOrjcrde, (rvXX7](pOevT£? vwh tZv 6pveo^ei fjte ^iXnnros, dv to, Trap vfiiov vyiaivr), dW il Trap v[i,iv dSeia yevtjcreTai TOts Trap' eKeivov p,L(r6apV£LV ^ovXopAvois ■ ■ . TavTa (fio^el p,e = " nor does Philip cause me any anxiety, if truly matters from your side shall be in a satisfactory con- dition ; but (rather) if with you there shall be impunity for those who desire to earn his ■(vages, this causes me anxiety." Eur. Med. 389 •^v fiev tw rjp-iv Trvpyoavri, | 6dA(j) |i€Tet/xi rovZi Kal a-iyg 6vov ' \ riv 8' e^fkavvy ^vp,o'S Aa^Sowa, Kel p,eXX(o davetv, | KT€v(o (Ti, ToA/iijs S' iLp,L TTphs xb, KapTepov = " if truly on the one hand some strong tower of strength shall have- appeared for me, in craft will I pursue this murder and in silence. But if truly, on the other hand, resource- destroying calamity shall be for driving me forth, 100 GREEK AND LATIN § 75 myself will take the sword, even if I must die for it, and will slay them, and I will advance to the extreme of daring." Hippocr. de rat. vicf. in morb. acuf. i. p. 391. F. =ii. p. 50. 8. K. fjv 6X.0V t5 (rm/j,a ava7raT;cr')jTa6 7roi)A.-i> Trapa rh eOos, OVK aVTiKa ippmraL [iaXXov. r)V Se Set /cat TrAewo )(p6vov SieAtvucras i^airtvrj's cs Tovs ttovovs e'ASjy, (f>Xavp6v ri irpijfetev JiriSi^Aws. ovt(o 8e koI tv eKouTTOv tov crco/iaros. Kal yap 7)v ol TroSei TOtdvSe Tt irprj^eiav kol to. aWa apOpa fMrj iWio'iJ.iva irovieiv, rjv Sia )(^povov IT/O&s to iroveTv iXdy. TavTO, 6 av Koi ot dSovTts Koi ol 6 vfiZv aiTiav e)(oiiJ,i Trepl . . .; = "if I praise him, or rather, if I were to praise him, you would justly both blame me and hate me. But if I am now of all men most at variance with him, how yet should ( = shall) I justly incur blame at your hands about . . .1" Plat. Protag. p. 340 E iroXXi) av, eri, dfiaOia eirj tov TToirp-ov, el ovTd) •ijbaijA.ov Tt tfyqcriv etvai rijv dpeTYjv eKTTjcrOab ^^^ = " great, said he, would be, nay is, the folly of the poet if he says it is so easy a matter to get possession of virtue." el with the future indicative, followed by the past indicative with av. 79. (A) c Protasis followed by the Past Indicative with dv. Eur. Orest. 564 e(f> oTs S' aTreiXeis . . ., I aKoviTov ws mra^av EAAaS diva-i'S ottXtj €ir], del 7) avrr) irpd^is rjSi(TTrj ecrrai = " for if any man's nature were to be, nay assume that it is, simple, the same mode of action will always be the most agreeable." See also Aristot. Eth. Nic. i. 10. 8. Hom. II. xi. 386 el jAv 8i) dvripLOV (Tvv Ttv^ecri ■ireip'qOel'q'S, I ovK dv TOL ')^auTiJjtjtTi fiibi Koi, Tap^££s lob= "if indeed face to face and with your arms you were to, or rather if you shall, try your strength against me, of no avail to you will be your bow and cloud of arrows." Hom. Od. xvii. 539 d 8' 'OSwo-eiJs eXdoi, Koi lkovt h ■jrarpiSa yaTav, \ atxpd Ke crvv (^ rraiSl ySi'as airoTUTerat ^ dvSpZv = " but if Odysseus were to return and visit his ancestral land, or rather, if he shall do so, straightway in concert with his son will he take vengeance for the insolence of men." Philemon Fr. Incert. 91 Su el Xdfioi rdXavra, xpucroils e^ e'xtoi' dirota-eTai = " if he were to receive, or rather if he shall receive, two talents, he will get off with six golden pieces in his pocket." ^^^ See also Hom. II. xxiv. 653. subjunctive,^ ^foi- 80a. (B) a ii. Protasis followed by the Past Imperfect lowed by the past Indicative, adapted to denote, not actual, but conditional imperfect mdica- „ tive with fo. lacts. §81 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 105 Xen. Gyr. ii. 1. 9 kyth fikv av . . ., d e)(oijj,i, MS Ta^urra OTrAa 6;rotoi5/;irjv 7rao-i UefxraLs Tots Trpoinovcriv, otaTrep . . . = " I indeed ... if I were able, or rather if I had been able, should have been for making, for my own purposes, as quickly as possible, arms for all the Persians who come to us, such as . . ." 81. (A) Apodosis followed by el with the Past Subjunctive. Soph. Oed. Col. 351 Sevrep ij-yeirat rot t^s | oikoi Siacrrj^, ei Trarfip Tpo(t>riv ex°' = " s^6 looks upon the joys of a life at home as secondary things, or rather she would do so, if her sire had food." Hippoor. ApJunism. ii. p. 1254. F. =iii. p. 743. 12. K. ■ywj) €V yacTTpl €)(ov(Ta (pX^PoTOfi/rfOeLcra iKTirpiicTKii, koI juaAAov 61 fiei(ov cLTj rh e/jb/Spvov = " a pregnant woman, if bled, is likely to miscarry, and all the more (would that be so) if the embryo were of some considerable size." Soph. £1. 369 (Ls tois A.oyois | eVecmv o,jx Kyafi.ifivovoi ArpiiSao, I o^S' el xpydely 'AcjipoSiry KaX-Xos epi^oi, \ epya, 8' 'Adrjvaiy yXavK(iiriSt, lcro Aeycu 86^ei dXrjdrj iTvai Trpodvp.'qfTOfiai, et /ti^ £(.17 Trdpepyov, dAA.' K.T.A. = "for not that to the bystanders what I say shall commend itself as true, will form any part of my solicitude, or rather would do so, except it were by the way ; but that etc." Horn. II. V. 212 ei Se Ke voaTycroi . . ., | avriK eVeiT air ejjLe.10 Kapr) rd/jLoi dWoTpws ^(os, | et p^rj lyo) TciSe To^a ^a6H'(j) Iv TTvpi deirjv \ X^f^'' 8iaK\d(Tcras = " if I shall have- returned . ., straightway thereupon may some other strike off my head, or rather might he do so, if I were not to place these arrows in the shining fire, breaking them across with my hands ! " Ar. Pac. 1072 I^uiXtj's diroXoi "^ ei prj Travcraio (SaKt^div = " may you perish utterly, or, I would say, might you so perish, unless you were to cease prating about Bacis." 82. It remains to gather together some examples of Modifications in Modification in detail of the forms of Conditional Sentences. Such are those which follow. (i.) in respect of 83. (i.) Modifications in respect of the Protasis. Protasis. 1. Protasis omit- 84. 1. .Protasis omitted. ted. 85. (B) a ii. Soph. Aj. 183 ov iroTe yap i^pevodev y iir' dpurrepa | . e/3as I . . . ■ yKoi yap av Oeia votros ^^ = " for never was it that from thy senses at any rate thou wentest astray, On the contrary. For (sc. if one were to inquire into the matter) some divine infliction would (be found to) i 85 § 85 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 107 I have come upon thee " = practically a Present Perfect Indicative — " some such has come." ^^ Thuc. 11. 102. 8 o 8 aTropQv, ws aa-i, judAis Karevorp-e rrjv TT/Doo-xcoo-tv TavTTjv Tov 'AxcAyou, KOL eSoKtt, aw(j) iKavij av Kexbia-dai Statra ^^ tcj) crw/iaTi d' ohrep /cretvas t^v fitf- Tepa ovK oAtyov xP°vov 67rAavaTO = " but he being at a loss, as they say, at length took note of this alluvial deposit of the Achelous; and it seemed to him that (sc. on inquiry) a suflScient place of abode would (be found to) I have been silted up, dating from the period when, after slaying his mother, he had been wandering about for no short time " = practically " that sufficient had been silted up." Thuc. viii. 1. 1 « Se ra.'s ' AOrjva.^ eTretSij riyyk\d-q, hrl iroAv /iev rprixTTOvv Kou rots iravv Toiv CTTpaTWOTUv If aiSroi) tov kpyov SLaire5 irevTTjKovTa tTt] d/iri) ycveas ' i^ip)(0VTai Se rrjviKavTa ets Tovi yepaurepovs ovrai T£ Kal KaAouytievovs = " but when they shall have completed their five-and-twenty years, they would (sc. on investigation be found to) | have developed into something more than fifty years from their birth ; and they pass out then into the ranks of those who are in fact, and are called, the ' Elders ' " = practically " they have developed." Plat. Fhaedr. p. 262 D iirtos Se Kal ol rJiv Mova-Zv irpo- m Koi wapa tovtov av elpTjKm €LT] rhv vojxov = " it is clear that he would ( = will) I have made his ordinance contrary to this enactment also." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 351. 9 8ta rovi ireirovrjpevfjLevovs, ws eoiKe, rois eTTieiKea-i crvp,l3e/3riKh'S av elrj ravTrji T^s aTt/*jas p.i.reo-xqKeva.i = " through those who have disgraced them- selves, as it appears, it would (sc. on inquiry be found to) I have come about that the respectable people have fallen in for a share of this disgrace " = practically "it has come about." Dem. Onetor. i. p. 866. 27 oiire yap St diroptav oTov T elireiv ais ovk evOv'i direSocrav ' TifJiOKpaTei, re yap eaTiv ovcrta irXiov ij ScKa TaXdvTCOv, Ovi^Topi re irXeov rj rpiaKOVTa, uutt ovk av Stoi toCto y ekv ovk evdvi &e&(>>K6T€'s ■ otire . . . = " f or neither is it possible for them to say that it was by reason of poverty that they did not immediately pay the portion ; for not only has Timocrates a fortune of more than ten talents, but Onetor has more than thirty, so that it is not for this reason, at any rate, that they would (sc. on inquiry be found) not (to) | have paid up at once : nor . . ." = practically "it is not for this reason that they have not paid up." Soph. El. 1304 Ko^S av ere XvTrrjcraa-a ySouXotjuijv^*^ f3pay(y I aiJT^ /xey' evpeiv KepSos = " nor indeed should I (sc. on inquiry be found to) be in a condition of willingness, by giving you even a slight annoyance, myself to reap a great advantage" = practically a Present Imperfect Indicative — " I do not wish " • "I am not in a condition of willingness." Soph. El. 1450 TTov drrjT av etiv oi ^evot ; = " where then (sc. on inquiry) would the strangers (be found to) be ? " = practically " where are they ? " Ar. Vesp. 348 rts av oSv €['?;; = "what should it be?" = practically " what is it ? " "8" Soph. Ant. 685 eyw 8' ottus (tv fjbTj Xeyets opOm TciSe | oiV § 85 § 85 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 109 S.V Swaifir/v,^^'' (jt-qT eiruna.iij.-qv Xiyew ^^'''^ = " but as for me, that you are not saying this rightly I could not (sc. on inquiry be found to), nor may I learn to, say " = practically " I cannot say." Herod, i. 2 EAAijvuv nvas (oij yap f-xovcri Tovvofia airri- y-jcracrdai) povqa-ews = "we were inquiring with reference to the second position, whether it would (sc. on inquiry be found to) belong to pleasure or to wisdom" = practically "we were inquiring whether it belonged " : " does it belong 1" 110 GREEK AND LATIN § 85 Plat. Phileb. p. 39 D at ye Sia ttJs ij/vxrj^ avrrj's 'qSovai . . . kXk-)(d'rjiTa.v kv TOis TrpocrOev (Jis ■Trph twv StoL rov o-iufiaro^ ijSovwv . . . TTpoyiyvoivr av = " the pleasures which are proper to the soul alone were said above to be such that they would (sc. on inquiry be found to) be pre- ferable to those which are proper to the body " = practically " they are preferable." Plat. Protag. p. 310 B |«.ij n vewrepov dyyeAAeis ; ovSiv y , fj 8 OS, £t p-rj a.ya9d ye. ev av Xeyois, rjv S €yfc)="do you bring any news ? None, said he, except what is good. You would (sc. on inquiry be found to) say well, said I" = practically "you say well." Aesch. Ag. 838 etSois Xeyoifi civ =" knowing, as I do, I would be speaking (sc. if I were permitted) " = practically a Future Imperfect Indicative — •" I will be speaking." Eur. Swppl. 465 Aeyot// av -qSr] = " I would at length be speaking (sc. if I were permitted) " = practically " I will at length be speaking." Eur. Suppl. 569 Kd,p,ov vvv avraKOvcrov, el fiovXei,, irdXiv. | K. kXvoijx av = "to me also now attend in turn, if you please. H. 1 would be listening to you (sc. if I were permitted) " = practically " I will be listening." "^ Ar. Ecd. 132 Aeyots av = "you would say on (sc. if you were to attend to my wishes) " = practically an Impera- tive — " say on." "^ Plat. Phileb. p. 37 A crKeTrreov, (lis y eyi) (jiairjv av = " we must consider, as at least I should say (sc. if my opinion were asked)." In such a case as the following we get without protasis au apodosis consisting of the Past Imperfect Subjunctive without dv, as denoting mere possibility : — Theognis 689 ov XP^I ■KTjp.alveiv o ti p.rj Trr]p,avTeov eii], \ ov8' epSeLv o Ti p.fj X.WLOV y reAecrat ^*^ = " it is wrong to injure what might (sc. on inquiry be found to) be" [ = practically "is] not open to injury, or to do what it may be better not to do." Herod, vii. 180 rdxa S' av n Kal tov oi5vo/naTos eTravpoiTO = " perhaps, indeed, he would (sc. on examination be found to) I have-reaped something of ill luck even from his very name " = practically a Past Indefinite Indicative — " perhaps he reaped." 5 86 § 86 36 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 111 Ar. Eqq. 414 im-epfSaXwdal. cr oio/xat tovtoutiv, tj [iixtt^v y av I . . . Too-oijTos eKTpav 7] fuv TvcjiXo's = " better had you been (sc. if there had been the choice) no longer in life, than living in blindness." Eur. Here. Fur. 467 a-v S' r^o-da Q-rj/SHiv rZv tftLXapp-draiv ava£=" and you had been (sc. if his intentions had been carried into effect) the king of chariot -loving Thebes." Ar. Heel. 145 VTf] rhv At, ■iy //,oi [/.rj yevetav KpebTTOV ^v = " by Zeus, truly it had been better for me to remain a beardless youth (sc. if I had had the choice)." Thuc. iv. 92 XPW M^ ■ ■ ■ f-V^' ^s iTrivoidv nva rjfj,oiv iXddv ..." vvvl S' . . . = " it had been right that no one of us should entertain the idea that . . . But, as things are ..." Plat. Protag. p. 319 A eyw yap toxJto . . . OVK wjj/nv 88 38 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 113 SiSttKTov eTvai ^^^°' = " for I, indeed, as to this, had not been thinking it teachable (sc. if the matter had been put to me)." Plat. Syw/p. p. 190 C oxJre yap otto)? airoKTslvaiev ei)^ov . . . — al Ti/xal yap aiuT0?9 Koi, to. le/ao. to. irapa, twv avOpummv ^(^avt^ero — , ovO ottws cuev dcreAyatvctv = " for neither could the gods put an end to men — for (sc. if they had done so) their honours and offerings from men had been vanishing — nor could they allow them to go on in impiety." Isaeus de Aristarch. haered. p. 79. 1 e^ouXd/nTjv /tev,^^^ aive(rde S . . . = " and the will on the one hand you have made away with — the will, I say, from which it had been possible (sc. if need had been) to know the truth about every point, and you are proved on the other hand ..." Soph. El. 1021 €iO' &eXes ToidSe TrjV yvdyfLT^v Trar/J&s | dvrp-KOVTOs elvai ' iravTa yap Kwreipydxni ^^* = " would that thou hadst been such as this in spirit, when our father's life was being taken from him ! For (sc. if thou hadst been such) thou hadst accomplished everything." Eur. El. 824 daa-a-ov 8e fSvpcrav e^eSeipev r] Spoixevs j StWow SiavXovs HTxios Sirjvva-e = " he stripped off the hide more quickly than a swift horseman (sc. if he had essayed) had accomplished twice a double course." 88. 2. Protasis (virtual) in the form of an independent sentence.^'*^ 2. Protasis (vir- tual) in form of independent sen- tence. (i.) Actual Facts. Aesch. Eum. 893 Sexov Se a-v. | X. Kal 8ri SeSeyfiau rk 6c lU GREEK AND LATIN § 88 fxoL TLfiT] fiivii ; = " and do you receive it. Ch. Well, then, I have received it, say. And what honour awaits me ? " Eur. Med. 386 £?ev . . . | Kat 8^ TtOvaa-i-'^^^ t'ks ij.€ Se- veral 5roAts ; = " be it so . . . And, then, they are dead, let us suppose. What city will receive me ? " Eur. Andr. 334 redvrjKa ry o-y dvyar pi Kai ft airuAco-e" | fiiaitjiovov fiev ovKer av cf>vyoi iiva-oi, | iv to?s 6e TToAXois . . . = " I am dead, for your daughter, say, and she put an end to me. The pollution of un- righteous slaughter she would ( = will) no longer escape, and among the many . . ." Dem. Mid. p. 563. 24 i^'Aio/cev rjSij /cat KaTeiprjtfiUTTai,' Ttvos Tiyit^o-eiv avro) tt/joctSok^s t& SiKatTT^ptov ; = " he has at length been found guilty and convicted, it is true. What penalty do you think the court will inflict upon him ? " Eur. Orest. 646 dSiKoi' kafSeiv \prj /j, avrl TOvSe Tov KaKov | dSiKov Ti Trapa crov = " I am a wrongdoer, you say. I ought in return for this wrong to receive something wrongful from you." Alexis IcrooTao". Ft. 1. 7 sqq. Tvy)(av€i p^iKpa, Tts o&'a, tj>eX\b'; iv rats fiavKvcriv | JyKe/caTTirrat ' fiaKpa Tts, 8id/3a6pov XeTrrhv <^ope.i | tijv re KeKpaX-Qv lirt rbv S/iov KaTafSaXova- i^ip)(€Tai,' | tovto tov p.'qKov? d W^v 8e . . . = " but let US with one accord oppose ourselves to the common foe. You will not do this; then we shall either leave the country or enter into relations with the enemy : and for you ..." (ii.) Facts of frequent recurrence. Ar. Nub. 1076 ^/ta/ores, rjpda-Orji, Jjuot'xevo-as ti, kSt eXri(j>9rjS' \ diroA,(oA.as' dSwaros yap eT Xeyew = — « . 38 § 88 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 115 occasion arose, you went wrong : fell in love : committed a little faux pas : and then were found out. It is all up with you in such a case: for you have no rhetoric wherewith to defend yourself." Dem. de Cor. p. 317. 16 aSt/ce? ns iKtav' opyrj Kot TifjiMpia Kara, tovtov. I^ij/iapre rts o.kiov' crvyyvwfj/r] dvrl rijs Tifiiopia^ TOTjTcj) = " as occasion arises a man will go wrong wittingly. Wrath and punishment are directed against such an one. As occasion arose, a man would do amiss unwittingly. For him indulgence takes the place of punishment." Dem. Olynth. iii. p. 33. 13 koI vvv ov Xeya ns ra /SeXruTra' a,va(TTa.s otAAos etTraro), fjir] tovtov aLTidcrOo). eVepos Aeyei Tis Pe\TL(o' Tavra Troictre dyaOrj TV)(rj. dX\ o^x ij^ea Ta{)Ta • ovKiTi ToC^ 6 Xiywv dSt/cef, TrXrjv el ... = " but now, as occasion arises, one man will be giving not the best advice in the world. Let some one else get up and give you his, and not criticise his predecessor. The other man will be giving you better advice. Act upon it, with Heaven's favour. But the advice given will not be pleasant, perhaps. The man who so says is no longer a wrongdoer, unless . . ." Dem. de Cor. p. 294. 19 wpaTTtTai xt tu>v v/uv Sokovvtwv a-vfjujjepew' a.vos Aicr)(iv7js. dvTeKpovcre ti koX ykyovtv otov ovK eScL' wdpea-Tiv Aca-x'vijs ^^^ =" something, as occasion arises, will be going on of a kind which seems to be of advantage to you : Aeschines has not a word to say. Something will have-gone, as occasion arises, askew, and have happened, such as should not have happened : Aeschines is to the front." Hyperid. pro Euxen. col. 21.1. 14 (ed. Babington) ha toCto yap ifKii W^P dirdvTbiv tZv dSiKrffidTdiv, orra e'trriv Iv rg TToXei, vojMVi edecrOe xwpls Trepl eKoa-Tov avTW. otre/Jei Tts irepl Tct lepd' ypa(f>al d(re^etas Trpb's rbv jSaxriXia. opa Seovrai, ei Se fi-q, OTt ye ovk eiri(/iixia = " it is right that they should make it clear, chiefly — ^that the request which they make is also advantageous, or, if not, that it is at any rate not prejudicial." Hyperid. pro Ewxenipp. col. 26. 1. 28 (ed. Babington) eha croi fiev e^emi koa. pha rkpire ' Svo-i^Xeyetav Se TToAtTMv I dX.Xos Tts ere Ko.KW'S, ciAAos a-jxiiyvov epei = "delight your own souls, and (sc. if you do so), out of the ruthless citizens, one will speak of you in your disfavour, another better." Theognis 37 ravra fiadiov dyadoia-iv oftikee, KaC irore ^9jo-ets . . . = " understand this and company with those who are good : and (sc. if you do so) the time will come when you shall say . . ." Soph. Aj. 550 S Trat, yevoLo TraTpbs euTV)(ea-Tepos, | ra S' aXX.' ofwio's ' Kal yivoi dv ov /ca/cos = " my boy, mayst thou be than thy father more happy, but in other respects like him • and (sc. if so) thou wouldst be no mean person." Eur. Orest. 548 aTreXdiTUi Si) rofs Aoyotcrtv . eKiroSiiiv \ rh yfjpas rjjxiv rh i\ri fioi Kal KaXov TI crot Set^w | Trprjyp,', oTov ov)( (oprqKa's 1^ otov fcoets = "follow me, dear, and I wiU show you a beautiful thing, such as you have never seen in the whole course of your life." 91. 5. Protasis in Participial Form. 5. Protasis in participial form. Ar. Plwt. 104 ov yap £vprj(Tm e/ioij | ^tjtZv er avSpa tous TpoTTov? fSeXriova = " for you will not find than myself, even seeking ( = if you shall seek) longer for him, a man better in his disposition." Thuc. iii. 3. 3 MurtAijvatow clTreiv . . ■' p.rj TreidopAviav 8e TToAejueiv = " tell the Mytilenaeans . . . ; but they not being ( = if they are not) in a mood for compljring, to prepare themselves for war." Solon Fr. vi. SiJ/ios S' SS' civ apuxra (Tvv rjyefiovea-criv eiroiTO, I /iiyre A.mjv dveOels p^-qre 7rt«fo/ievos = " but the people would thus best follow along with its rulers, being ( = if it were) neither unduly left free nor unduly kept restrained." Hyperid. Orat Fvmbr. col. 9. 1. 1 Kat rl av cru/i./S'iji'at vo/tt- ^oifiev, fjurj Kara Tpmov tovt(mv dyoivurafievwv = " and what should we imagine would have happened, these men not having acted ( = if they had not acted) as they did?" Lysias Eratosih. p. 91. 1 irepl iroXXov av Trovrja-aiiL-qv . . . rb roLOVTOVi VfiSis ifj,ol St/cocrTas Trepl tovtov to5 Trpdyjj,aTOv Kal /iij Starpex""' = " f Or he would not have been 91 § 91 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 121 hit, remaining quiet and not running across the line of fire " = " if he had so acted." Eur. Hipp. 1331 (ra,<^ i(rdi, Zijva jui) v, ovt av vvv €Tr€)(eiprj(Tav eXOeiv /j/rj virb Twv avriav otdjuevot a"a)^ijo"eo"pat, 01 . . . = " considering that neither so could they act, the others not acting ( = if the others did not act) in concert with them, nor would they have now essayed to come, not thinking ( = if they had not thought) that by those same persons they would be brought safely off, who ..." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 395. 7 d firj Sia rh tovtovs PovX&rdaL a-wa-ai, e^wXijs d7roXot)u.ijv Kal TrpowXrjs, et TrpocrXalSuiv y av dpyvptov irdvv iroXv yticra Toirreoi' eirpka-ptvo-a'^^ = "except for my wish to preserve them, may I perish utterly and before my time, if, even after accepting ( = if I had accepted) of money great store, I would have joined in an embassy with these men." Plat, de Bep. v. p. 450 D ■n-uTTevovTO'S fiev yap ep,ov i[iol elSivai a Xkyu), KaXw dx^v rj irapap.vOl.a = " for I having faith ( = had I had faith) in myself, that I knew what I was talking about, the consolation had been satis- factory." Ar. Eecl. 771 rl yap dXXo y r) epuv Trapea-Kevaxrfievoi | ra XPW<^r' euTiv, B. dXX' ISwv €7r£i6ld/i9jv i«* = " for what else are they prepared to do than carry away the money?" The other. "Well, seeing ( = if I had seen) it, I had been believing it." Thuc. iii. 57. 3 Js tovto yap Srj ^vfiopds ■jrpoKcx'^P^Kap.ev, oiVives MijSwv re KpaT-qa-avrav dirii>XXvp,e.da, . . - = " for to such a pass of calamity, you must know, have we advanced, we, who, the Medes getting ( = if the Medes had got) the upper hand, were standing for destruction, ..." Dem. Mid. p. 554. 3 oi5 yap ^v juoi Sijirov ^larhv to£to :rot7^o-avTt=" for indeed life had not been worth living for me, after doing ( = had I done) this." 122 GREEK AND LATIN § 91 Compound sen- In instances such as those which follow, we have the ne"tion° ^''°^' conditional sentence framed with its protasis in participial form, appended to the conditional particle el, and the compound protasis so produced, prefixed to a new apodosis : — Isocr. ArcMdam. p. 120. e. el Se /xijSek av vfuQv d^idkreie fijv ttTToa-Tepoijjuevos t^s Trar/atSos, irpocrrjKii koa, Trepl eKeivrjs Trjv avTYjv Uyu.as yvtafiTjv 'd)(eLV = " hut a no One of yOU would think life worth having, being deprived ( = if he were to be deprived) of his country, then it is right for you to have with respect to that state also the same views." Dem. Mid. p. 582. 24 el 8' oStoo )(^p-^fiaT ey^ovre's fifj TrpooiVT av, TTWS vp.iv KaXbv T&v opKov TrpoecrOai ; = " but if they, having money ( = if they had money), would not play havoc with it, how is it honourable for you to play havoc with your oath ? " Dem. Apat. p. 903. 20 el 8e o li.a.pp.iviav ek Aoyovs KaraxTTas SiKaioTep av (j>aivoiTO Aeycov tovtov, ttuJs civ opdws epov KaTayiyvma-KOLTe ; = " but if Parmeno, coming to argument ( = if he were to come to argument), would be proved to have spoken to better effect than the defendant, how would you be rightly for deciding against me ? " We have already seen (§§ 53, 54) instances of a com- pound protasis, such as those here referred to, without the subordinate protasis — even in a participial form. ei /ii7 with a Occasionally we find el u-n, instead of an, with a participle as a j.- • i i j? t,. , . . conditional pro- participle used tor a conditional protasis : as in tasis. Eur. Med. 368 SoKeh yap av p.e TovSe Obmeva-ai ttot av, \ ei firj Ti KepSaivovcrav r) Texvovfievrjv ; = " do you think that I would ever have played up to him, if not on the way to some advantage or about some design " = " if I had not been on the way, etc." 6. Protasis im- 92. 6. Protasis impKed in the form of the sentence, plied in form of sentence. Dem. C. Philipp. i. p. 44. 11 oiirio yh.p ovKen tov XoLttov § 9 93 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 123 TToo-xot/iEv av KaKcos="for thus ( = if he did so) we should avoid any longer any suffering for the future." Soph. Ant. 240 oxiS' av St/catO)? Is KaKhv Trecrot/it rt = " nor should I, with justice ( = if I were treated justly), fall into any trouble concerning it." Soph. Phil. 41 TTws yap av vocrwv dvfjp | kwAov iraAatcj) Krjpl Trpoa-paiT) /MKpdv ; = " for how ( = under what circum- stances) should a sick man advance far his leg with an old-standing disease ? " Dem. de Cor. p. 242. 10 Sid ye i/^Ss avrov^ Trdkai &v dTToXwXeire = " so far at least as you yourselves were to be looked to ( = if you alone had had to be looked to), you would long ago have found it all up with you." Ar. Ach. 211 ovk dv tw e/*^s ye viOTriTos, • • • I ... SSe avXw^ dv 6 I a-TTOvSoiftopos oBros vtt' ifiov Tore SioiKOfjKVOS I e^evy€v ov8' dv l\a(f>p(os dv dire?rAt^aTO = " never would, in the days of my youth at least ( = if I had been young, at least), thus lightly have escaped this truce-bearer from my chace in those days, nor would he have easily stepped off." Isocr. Faneg. p. 70. b. rb /jih Itt' ^Kdvo} TroXXaKK dv SieXv- drjo-av . . . = " so far as he was concerned ( = if he alone had been concerned) they would have been broken up over and over again ..." Thuc. viii. 86. 4 cSo/cei 'AAKt^taSijs trpmrov TOTe koi ovSevh's eXax7(70v TTjv ttoAh/ to^eA^trat ' wpp/rjfievoyv yap tSjv kv SayiMj) A6rjvat(ov ttXuv eirl (T(j>ds avrovi, tv ^ ^^ tra^co-Tara iiaviav Kai EAAiyoTTOVTOV evBvs eT)(ov ot iroXifiiioi, KtoAirrijs yevea-Oai = " Alcibiades then for the first time and in a degree inferior to no one stood forth as the benefactor of the State ; in that he became the hinderer of the Athenians in Samos, when they were all for sailing home — in which event ( = if they had done which) most clearly Ionia and the Hellespont had been straightway falling into the hands of the enemy." 93. 7. Protasis implied, and the whole sentence associ- 7. Protasis im- ated with an Independent Protasis. Sted'^^^th XT jir • n no ./ wv \ -o / c/ r. ' / independent pro- Xen. Mem. l. 2. 28 ovro) oe /cat ZtoKjoariyv SiKaiov tjv Kpiveiv' tasis. el fji,ev avThi kiroiti, Tt fj>avXov, eiKOTtus av eSoKei Trovrjphs eivai ' et 8 avrhs a(0(f>pov(i)v SiereXei, ttQs dv SiKauas T'ijs OVK evovcrqs avT(j} KaKias aiTiav e-)(oi ; = " and in like 124 GREEK AND LATIN § 93 manner it was {or, had been) just to judge Socrates also. If on the one hand he himself was doing any- thing disgraceful, he would have reasonably appeared (sc. if any one had considered the matter) a base man. But if on the other hand he himself passed his life in propriety, how should he justly (sc. if one inquired into it) bear the blame of a worthlessness which was not in him ? " Dem. de Cor. p. 302. 25 Kairoi rore rhv Ari[/.oiJi,eX,7] . . ., eiirep d\rj9rj fxov vvv KaTT^yopei, [j,aXXov av €t/coT(os t] tovS iSioiKev = " and yet, it would have been more reasonable (sc. if any count had been taken of reason) then to indict Demomeles, if at least the accusation now brought against me is justifiable, than the present defendant." Dem. Aphoh. i. p. 833. 17 et ya^o KaTeXeip' eS elSys I oWov cfxprepi] etp! = " but if you are desirous of becoming learned in war, (come on^^^)j so that you may be convinced how superior am I." § 102 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 125 97. (A) c. Horn. Od. ii. 115 et 8' It' dviijcrti ye ttoXvv )(p6vov was 'Axai(3v= "but if indeed she shall yet for a long time grieve the sons of the Achaeans (well, so let it be)." 98. (B) a ii. Xen. Andb. ii. 5. 19 ei 8' kv iraa-i tovtoh rjTTipfieOa, dWa, to ye Toi TTvp KpiiTTov T01J KapKov kcTTiv = " and if we wepe in aU these respects to be getting the worst of it, yet (you would be no better off; for) you must remember that fire is stronger than corn." Plat. LyS. p. 217 A ei yovv BiXoifiiv ivvorjcrai, t6 vyiaivov a-Zfia ouSev taT/OiKijs Seirat ov8l tl^cAetas = " if at any rate we were willing to consider the matter (what should we find 1 Why, that) the healthy body requires no physicianry or even assistance." 99. (B') h. Hom. II. i. 580 e? inp jap K kOkXrjariv OXvjj,Trios dcTTepo- Trr/T^s I e^ eSiwv (nvt^eXi^ai ' 6 yap trokv (fiepraTOi ecrnv = " for if indeed truly the lightning-darting one of Olympus shall be desirous of thrusting us from our habitations, (thrust us he will) ; for he is by far the most powerful." 100. (C) a. Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 379. 9 d yap kv rjfiepf ttoXiv ypu, Sro Kal eiKoa-iv e'uriv dpiOfju^ = " for if he had been taking a city a day, (what then ?) They are two and twenty in number." i6» 101 Especially — but by no means universally i™ — do we Especially! in J.V/J.. j-iojjv- J , „ , - 1 . 1 J first member of find the apodosis omitted m the first member of bimembered bimembered sen- sentences, which express alternative opposing suppositions ; *f "f'^rnXTop! such as the following, viz. — posing supposi- tions. 102. (A)&. At. Thesm. 536 d p^v oSv tk ecrnv ■ d Se p.ri, ■r)p.m I avrai ye . . . = " if then there is any one who will do it for us, (well) : but if not, then we ourselves will . . ." 126 GEEEK AND LATIN § 102 Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 24 d fj^v ovv eyo) v/^as t/cavus StSao-KO) otovs xpi) Trph's aXXrjXovs elvai ' ii 6e /i»j, Kai irajoa Ttuv Trpoyeyevrj/ievoyv /jLavOdvere = " if then I teach you suffi- ciently -what manner of men it behoves you to be to each other, (well) : but if not, learn even from those who have gone before you." 103. (A) c. Horn. II. i. 135 dAA' el fiev Suktovcti yipas iJ,eyd6v[jLoi 'AxaLoi I . . ' \ el Se Ke firj Scoioo-tv, lyo) 8e Kev awbs eXio/Mai | rj rehv rj AtavTos loiv yepa'i, fj 'OSvcrrjos \ a^(o "^ eXdv = " but if the high-souled Achaeans shall offer me a prize, (well). But if in very truth they shall not offer it, then I myself in very truth will go and take for myself either your or Ajax' prize, or that of Odysseus I will take and bring away." Carmen Populare xxix. 13 ct p^v n Swo-eis • el Se prj, ovk eda-opev = " if you will offer us largess, (well) : but if not, we will not put up with your refusal." Plato (Comicus) EA.X. 3 el p,ev ovv crh TTjv OdXarrav a^urbs diroSuicrei's Ikiov ' | £( Se prj ye, TaijTa irdvra crvvTpiaivwv aTTokecru) ^"^^ = " if, then, you (sc. the people of Attica) will yourselves give up the sea with a good grace, (well and good) : but if not, then all of this will I (sc. Poseidon) shatter together with my trident and destroy." 104. (A') c. Leophanes (?) de Superfoetat. in Hippocr. i. p. 260. F. = i. p. 461. 16. K. KOI, rjv pev dirh T^s Trvptijcrtos diro)(Cop-^ei " el Se /iiy, . . . uSiva ep-jroieeiv = " and if truly as a result of the vapour bath process the child shall come away, (well) : but if it does not, . . . you must induce labour." 105. (B') 6. Hippocr. de ration, vid. in mm-b. acut. i. p. 403. F. = ii. p. 87. 5. (cf. 9) K. Kot T^v eiriSiSm tj crot cirt rh ^'eXriov ' el Ze p-q, . . . iriveiv SiSov . . . = " and if truly it shall in any way improve, (well) : but if not, then give to drink ..." Hippocr. de ration, vid. in morb. acut. i. p. 406. F.- = ii. p. 98. 2. K. KYJv pev LKavlas exg ' ■^v 8e p-q,^''^ el eWeiTrrj, § 106 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 127 oTTuro) TToiUiv TO, avTo, = "and if truly these proceedings shall suffice, (well) : but if truly not, then, if haply there shall be a shortcoming anywhere, you must repeat the process behind." Hippocr. de capit. miner, i. p. 901. F. =iii. p. 356. 9. K. Koi fjv [j,lv Kara^avts y toutiv 60aXiJ,ouTi rb ocrTeov d/iXov ' el Se [j,ri, tq /uijAg a-KiTTTecrOat = " and if truly the bone in its denuded state shall be open to the eyes to see, (well) : but if not, you must examine with the probe." Thuc. iv. 13. 3 ry 8' •uo-repaifi 7rapa(r Kivaxrdfievoi (is eirt vavfjux^iav dvijyovTO, :^v [J,ev avreKTrXeiv eBikwri crcjiuTiv « TTjV evpv)(ii}piav, d Se fj.^, cLs avTol eTre(nr\ev(Tovfi,€voi = "and on the following day, preparing as for a naval engagement, they weighed anchor — if truly on the one hand the foe shall be willing to sail out into the open to meet them, (well) : but if not, as being about them- selves to sail in to attack them." Plat. Sym/p. p. 185 D Jv ({) 8" av lyai Xkyia, kav jAv croi edeXrj aTTveuo-Tt e)(OVTi. 5roA.t)v \p6vov irama-Oa.i rj Xvy^' el 8e [itj, vSaTt dvaKoyxvXicwov = " and while soever I am speaking, if truly your hiccough shall be so obliging as to cease, you holding your breath for a long while, (well) : but if not, gargle your throat with water." At. Plut. 468 kov fiev a7ro<^^vto jMvrjv \ dyaOlav airaVTiov o^crav alriav kjA | vim/ Si' efie re ffivras ri/*as' el Se firj, | TToieiTov ^Sij Tovd' 6 T6 av vfuv SoKYj = " and if truly I shall have-proved to you that I alone am the cause of all your blessings, and that it is owing to me that you can be said to live, (well) : but if not, then do you, both of you, whatsoever shall seem good to you." Thuc. iii. 3. 3 koI yv fiev ^Vfi^y rj ireipa' el 8e p,r), MvTiXrjvaioii elireiv vavs re Trapa8ovvai koi, Te[)(T} KaOeXeiv, p,ri ■n-eiOopAvwv 8e TroXe/Miv = " and if truly the attempt shall have-succeeded, (so much the better) : but if not, tell the Mytilenaeans both to hand over their ships and to pull down their walls ; but, if they are not in a mood for complying, to prepare them for war." 106. The omission of the apodosis in single-membered Omission in C6r1/3iiii sinffls- sentences belonging to the groups (B) a ii. and (C) a has membered sen- freq_uently the effect of causing the unattended protasis to tads^t^g^'^/gg"^ express a wish.^'* Thus wish. 128 GREEK AND LATIN § 107 107. (B) a ii. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 863 e? juoi ^welrj <^ipovri I /xoipa Tav evcreTr- Tov ayveiav Xoyiav | ipyu>v re TrdvToiv = " if Only there were to be with me Fortune, as I uphold the much- reverenced purity of all words and deeds ! " Plat. Protag. p. 310 D el yap, rf S os, <3 Zev KoX 6eoi, ev TovTiff e'bT)' (is ovT av Twv kfiiav €7riA.i7roi/it ov8ev ovre tZv cjilXav = " if only, said he, Zeus and ye gods, the matter lay in this ! For (if it did), neither anything of my own would I spare nor of my friends'." Theocr. xii. 17 el yap tovto, irdrep KpoviSrj, ireAot, el yap, dyrip(f | dddvaroi' yevears 8e SiijKocrtj^criv etreiTa | dyye'i)i^iev ep,oi Tts dve^oSov eh A)(epovTa, . . . = " if only this were to be. Father Cronides ! if only, ye unaging immortals ! and that after a lapse of two hundred generations one were to bring me to Acheron, 'from whose bourn no traveller returns,' the tidings . . . ! " Hom. II. XV. 571 ei nvd ttov Tpdwv e^dXp,evos dvSpa pdXoKrda = " if only you were to leap forward and lay low some one of the Trojans ! " Hom. II. XVI. 558 Ke'hai dv-qp OS irpunos ea-qXaro rei-)(0'i 'A.')(aiCdV, I ^apTrrjSiiv, dXX' et fxiv deiKurcraip^ff eXovres, I Tev^ed t' wfiouv deXotp,e9a, Kai tlv eraipinv I avTOV dpA}voix,evii>v Sap,ao-aip,eOa vr)Xei )(aXK((i = " low lies the man who first leapt into the rampart of the Achaeans, Sarpedon. But if only we were to seize and insult his body, and take the arms from his two shoulders, and subdue some one of his friends, who would defend him, with the cruel sword ! " Hom. Od. iii. 205 al yap'^''^ ep.oi Tocro-ijvSe deoi Svvafjuv ■n-apaOeiev, | . . . = " if only to me such power the gods were to accord, as that I might . . . ! " Eur. Orest. 1100 el yap rovro KaTddvoip! tS(o)/ = " if only I were to die after seeing this ! " Xen. Cyr. vi. 1. 38 el yap yevoiro . . . OTi eyix) (roi ev Kaipif dv yevotjxTjv aS ■)(prj(Ti,p.o's = " if only it were to come about, that I to you should seasonably become again useful ! " 108. (C) a. Hom. II. iii. 180 8arjp aZr e/x&s ea-Ke KvviSnriSos, e'l ttot erjv ye = " and he was the brother-in-law of me, the shame- less one. If only he had been still among the living ! " 112 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 129 Eur. Ale. 1072 d yap Tocravrrjv 8vvafji,iv eT)(ov, &o-re . . . = " if only I had had so great power, as that . . . ! " Ar. Ecd. 380 rh Tpi6j3oXov ^T' lAa/Jes ; X. 66' ykp &iXov = "the three -obol piece, then, — did you receive it? Ch. If only it had been destined for me ! " 109. The unattended protasis in such cases as the above The protasis (a) lay further (a) either lose its own verb : as in — occasionally los- 110. (B) a ii. Horn. Od. vii. 311 at yap, Zev T€ Trdrep Kal 'KO-qvair) /cat KirokXov, I TOios kuiv otos ecro-i, to. re (f>povi(av a r iydt irep, I iraiSd t kp/qv ex^p^^ Kal J/tbs yap0pb's KaXkerdai = "if only. Father Zeus and Athene and Apollo, being such as you are and like-minded with myself, (you were willing) to take my daughter to wife and to be called my son-in-law, remaining here ! " Soph. El. 1415 K. &poi. TrkirXrjypM.1.. H. Trai(Tov, et a-QkvsLS, StTrAijv. I K. &poL pdX' aWiS. H. d yap AlyitrOot 6' opov = "Cl. Ah me, I have been struck. El. Lay on, if you have the strength, a double stroke. CI. Ah me again. El. If only (it were) for Aegisthus too at the same time ! " 111. {G)a. Horn. Od. xxiv. 376 at yap, Zev re Trdrep /cat 'A6r]vairj Kal AttoXXov, I oios NijptKoi/ etXov, . . . | . . . rotos kdv toi ;^^tf&s kv rjpeTkpouri Sopouriv, \ rev^e' e)(b)v apounv, kfjiecrrdpevai Kal dpvveiv | dvSpa^ pvrj<7T^pas. to} ke (reiav yovvaT eXva-a | TroXXHjv kv peydpouri, (rv Se pkva'S evSov ldv0r)s = " if only. Father Zeus and Athene and Apollo, such as I was when I took Nericum, such being yesterday in our house, with arms upon my back (it had been mine) to attack and take vengeance upon the suitors ! In which case I should have loosened their knees, many though they were in the palace, and you would have been delighted in your inmost heart." 112. (/S) or — as indeed in the instance last quoted — or (jS) having ve appended to it an independent consequence : which consequence" ^"* lows pended to it. ap- 130 GREEK AND LATIN § 112 (1) sometimes without express connecting link: but as an apodosis to a protasis either expressed or implied and expressive of the truth in fact, of that which has been previously formulated as a wish only ; (2) sometimes — as also in the instance referred to — with a connecting link in the shape of a relative particle. The following are examples : — 113. (1) (B) a ii. Horn. Od. XX. 236 at yap tovto, ^eive, cttos TeAecrfte Kpoviuiv' •yvoirj's \ o'ir] €[ji,rj Suva/its Kal ^eipes 'eirovrai = ' if Only this word, stranger, the son of Cronus were to accom- plish ! You would then recognise of what quality are my strength and my arms, which follow you." 114. (2) (B) a ii. Hom. Od. xix. 309 at yap tovto, ^etv£, evros TCTeAeo-ztei/ov etij" I TO) Ke Ta,)(a, yvoirj's (juXoTrjTa. re ;roAA.a re S(Dpa \ e^ kfixv, ill av Tis ere (rvvavTOfievo'S fiaKapi^oi = " if only this word, my guest, were to have become accomplished ! So would you quickly acknowledge goodwill and many a gift from me, with the result that a man meeting you would felicitate you." Hom. II. ii. 371 at ydp, Zev re Tra/rep Kal A.d'qvaiq Kal AttoAXov, I TOLOVTOi ScKa p,0L crv/A(^/)a8|itoves ilev Ai^atwv" I T({) K£ rax' ij^njcete TroAts Ti.pLdp,oio avaKTOs, | )(e/3(rtv v<^ riiJLeTeprjcriv aXovad t£ ir€p6oiJ,kvri t6 = " if only, Father Zeus and Athene and Apollo, ten such of the Achaeans were of like mind with myself ! in which case quickly would the city of Priam the king nod to its fall, taken and destroyed beneath our hands." Hom. 11. xvii. 561 'I'otvt^, arra yepate 7raAaty£V£S, et yap 'Adrjvrj I SotTj KapTos iy.ol, ySeActov 8' direpijKot epcoijv" .| t({) Kev 'iytay ISeAot/it 7rapecrTap,6vdt Kat djxvveiv | TlarpoKXiff = " Phoenix, reverend father full of years, if only Athene were to offer me strength and ward off the rush of arrows ! Then should I myself be willing to take my stand by and defend Patroclus." 11 116a conditional sentences 131 Eur. Hec. 836 «!,' jmi ykvoiro 66yyoi kv Ppaxtocn \ Koi X«/xrt Kot KoimuTi Kot ^roScov fiatrei, | . . . ws rrdvO' ofMpTrj o-ui/ e'xotTo yovvaTOiv = " if only there were mine a voice in my arms and hands and tresses and in the tread of my feet ! So that everything in concert might cling to your knees." Eur. Su^pl. 621 Troravav e'l /j,e rts dewv Krurai, | Snrorafiov tVa TToXtv fx,6Xo) = " if only winged some one of the gods were to make me ! so that I may come to the two- rivered city." 115. (C) a. Aesch. Prom. 152 et ydp /j,' iirh yrjv vepOev t 'AiSov | tov veKpoSey/jMvo's eis dirkpavTov \ Tdprapov ^Kev, | (os f-'^Te Oebs [L-ffre rts aAAos | toutS eTreyjOei = " if only he had sent me to the nethermost parts of the earth and below the dead-receiving Hades into the impermeable Tartarus ! so that neither god nor any one else had gloated over these my sufferings." Plat. Cnf. p. 44 D ei yap ui€Xov, & KptTwv, oToi re eTvai ol TToXXol Tot fjbeyuTra Ka/cot e^epryd^ecrOa.i, Iva oToi T€ ■^crav aS Kol dyada toL piyuna ' kou KaXw a.v eiye ^^' = " if Only, Crito, the multitude had had it in their power to work the greatest evils ! so that they had been able on the other hand to work the greatest blessings. And it would have been well." 116. 2. Apodosis with verb omitted. 2. Apodosiswith verb omitted. 116a. (B) a ii. Solon Fr. 20. 1 dXX e'd fj,oi, k3.v vvv, eVi Treicreai, e^eXe TOVTO = Kal — av vvv [sc. et cro^bs e'''JS, Treuraioj = " but if you will any longer pay any attention to me — even now, if you were ivise, you would do so — take out this phrase." Soph. Fl. 1482 dXXd fMoi TrdpK I KOLV a-p-iKphv eiTretv = Kal — av [/SovXoip.rjv'] = "but give me leave to say but a small word, — I should wish to do so." Ar. Fluf. 126 iav dva^Xixpys crv kS.v fJUKphv xpovov = Kal — ay [dvaySAei/'etas, SC el cro^bs et'ijs] = " if truly you shall have-looked up even — you would | have-looked up, if you were wise — a little moment." 132 GREEK AND LATIN § 116a Ar. Ach. 1021 //.eTprjcrov elprjV'q's ri jxoi Kav irevT krri = Kai — av [fieTp-i^(T€ias, SC. d €U/tevi)s ei'fjs] = "mete out to me some small measure of peace, even five years would you mete out, (sc. if you were kind)." Aristot. Hist. Animqil. viii. 21 Kal o-iOev ka-OUi, orav ap^rirai T& TTcidoS, Kav OtTOVOVV = KOi 6(T0V0VV oiv [IcT^tOt] = " aud it eats nothing, whensoever the attack shall have-come on, even not a morsel would it eat (sc. if it had the opportunity)." ^^^ Aristot. Problem, x. 65 Sia tI to, pAv ytverat rwv fpeda, dvayKaiov av (sc. Icttlv or «irj) = " even if we do not make use of the names in every individual case, still it truly is [or, still it would turn out to be, sc. if you investigated the matter] necessary that every- where in fact it must so be." Aristot. Eth. Nic. vii. 8 (7). 1 ptra^v 8' fj twv TrXeunm e^tSj Kav ei peirovcri p,aX.Xov irphs ras j^eipow = (ccTTtv Or eir/) av, Kal 66 peirova-i = " but midway truly is [or, would turn out on investigation to be] the disposition of most men, even if they incline rather to the lower desires." Plat. Legg. i. p. 646 B irois 8' ovk dKova-6p,e6a ; Kav €1 pTjSevb'i aAAoD xapiv, dAAa tov Oavpaxrrov re /cat droTTOv, d . . . = aKOvcropeda av, [or dKovoipev av], Kal el . . .= " how shall we not listen t Truly will we [m- should we, if we reflected] listen, even if for no other reason, yet for the marvellous and unwonted fact which it is, if . . ." Ar. Lys. Ill kOikon' dv o^v, d prj-xavrjv dipoip,' eyd, \ per epov KaTaXva-aL rhv TroXepov ; M. vr) TO) 6e(a- | iyi> Se y dv [sc. kdeXoip.i\ K&v [sc. k6kXoi.p,i\ d pe xP^ltj 1™ roiiyKVKXov I ToiiTi KaraOdo-av eKiridv avdTjpxpov. \ K. l-yo) Be y dv [sc. kQ'eXoip\\ Kav ( = Kal edv) uio-irepel ^^rrav SoKW | 8ovv- 16a § 116a 6a conditional SENTENCES 133 av iiJ,avT7]S Trapra/xovcra Or^iiicrv.^"' j A. lyw 8e Kai ko, TTOTrh TaiiyeToy y avw \ iXcroi/j, [ = kcu 'iXdoLji, av], OTra fji,i\Xoifji,i y elpdvav ISslv = " would you be willing then, if I were to find the means, to join with me in putting an end to the war 1 M. Yes, by the two deities. And I indeed should (sc. be so willing), yes, I should (sc. be so willing), even if it were necessary for me to lay aside this cloak, and this very day to — drink off a full draught. C. And I indeed should (sc. be so willing) " [ = practically, " I shall be so willing "), " even if truly I shall seem to be so conditioned as that I would cut ofi' half of myself and give it, as I would a turbot. L. And I would even go aloft up to Taygetus, if indeed by going thither I should have any likelihood of looking upon peace." '^^^ Eur. Sel. 1043 ri S', el Kpvdeis SofiOLi I KTavotp, civaKTa ; = "but what (sc. would you say), if hidden in the house I were to slay the king 1 " Ar. Nub. 154 rt Sjjt' av, erepov el ttvOolo 'ZwKpdrovs \ p6vTUTixa ; = " what then would (sc. you say), if you were to learn another imagination of Socrates' divining ? " See also Ar. Nub. 769. At. Ach. 962 rpiOtv Spa\p,(iiv 8' eKeXeve Ku)ir(fS' €y)(eX.vv \ ... A. ovK av jUa At', el Soit] ye p.oi r-qv d(nrtSa = " and against three drachmae he asked you for an eel from Lake Copais. D. He should not (sc. have it), even if he were to offer me his shield." See also Ar. Nub. 107, 108. Eur. Ale. 181 (parodied — with the same idiom — by Aris- tophanes, Eqq. 1251) o-e 8' aWrj rts yvvrj KeKTi^aerai, \ <7(a(j>p(i)v [xev OVK av /iaXAov, evrvxrj'S S i'o-us = " but thee some other will possess, more self -controlled indeed she could not (sc. be than I), but more fortunate perhaps." Thuc. vi. 89. 6 e-n-el Srj[Ji.0KpaTMV ye Kal £ytyvcoo-KO/*ev ot (fjpovovvTes Tt, Kal avrhi ovSevh'S av x^V°^' °W '''" Xoi.Soprio-aip-i="ior as to a democracy, forsooth, we both appreciated it — those of us who have any wits — and I at any rate should (sc. appreciate it) worse than no one else, just in proportion as it is in my power also to revile it." 1S4 GREEK AND LATIN § HBa Soph. Phil. 493 ov 8i) TraXai' av i^oTov SeSoiK lyo) | /iij ^oi pi^rjKe 181 = " as to whom indeed it would (sc. be) a long while since I have nourished the fear of his having — for me — departed." Eur. Med. 1153 ^tXous vofj-t^ovo-' oiWep &v Tr6(TiscreOcv^^^^ = " accepting as your friends those whom your husband would (sc. so accept)." Hippocr. Aphorism, ii. p. 1250. F. =iii. p. 730. 13. K. lijv VTTo 8tiO"€vrepHjs ixoiJi,iv(p oKOtai av crapKes viro)(p/qv a7ro(j)aLVOfji£vov, pbera ravra 8 d)S ayvoowras 6i8a(rK0VT0S, TeAewoivTos Se (os av 1°^* Trphs TreTr/oaKOTas aiiToiis Kal dvoa-MTaTovs dvdpum-ovs oijScv VTrouTeXXojMvov = "although I spoke much, and was ever talking about it, in the first instance as a man would (sc. do), who was express- ing his opinion in ordinary conversation, afterwards as .16a § 116a 6a conditional sentences 135 one teaching those who were ignorant, and ultimately as a man would (sc. do) who was declining to give way before men who had sold themselves and were of the most shameless character." Plat. Apol. p. 27 D ofioM^ yap av aroirov €t?j, &tr7rep av et Tts . . . 17701x0 . . . = " for it would be equally absurd, as it would (sc. be absurd), if a man were to think that . . ."183 Plat. Gorg. p. 479 A a-)(iSbv yap irov ovTOi . . . Tc> avTh 8ia7reTrpayp,iVoi elalv &crirep av et Tts rots p-eyuTTOLi vocr- rip,acri. crwMTXOjuevos Sia;rpa^atTO pt] StSovat Slktjv twv ttcjoi t5 (Tbipa apaprrfpAnav rots larpot's prjSe^"^^ lajpevio-dai, (^O/Sovjucvos, mnrep av el irais, t6 Kiiea-Oai Kai rh npv&jdai, oTi dAyetvov =" why, these men would seem to have managed in the same way as would (sc. be the manage- ment of a man), if, being held bound by the direst diseases he were to manage not to give an account of his bodily infirmities to the physicians, — I mean, not to be doctored, fearing, just as if (sc. he were) a child, being cauterised or cut, because it was painful." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 411. 21 &a-irep av irapea-TTiKOTOS avTOV = " as would (be the case), were he standing by." Aristot. de Gaelo, c. 14. med. Set Se vorja-ai rh Ae-yo/x£vov &(nrep av el yiyvopivrji (sc. T'^s yrjs) Tpoirov ov Kal twv va-iok6yii)v Xeyova-i rives yevea-Oai = " but we must con- ceive of the proposition, just as we should (sc. conceive of it), if (sc. we were to conceive of it) on the assumption of its (the earth's) being produced after the fashion in which some even of the naturalists say it was produced." Plat. Rep. vi. p. 493 A otoV Trep av el . . . ris . . . rdvay- Kaia 8iKaia KaXoi Kal KaXd, Trjv Se Tov dvayKaiov Kal dyaOov (pva-iv, oarov 8ia(f>epeL T(j) ovri, pyjre eoipaKias eilrj p.r)Te aXXif Svvaros Se?^ai="iust as would (sc. be the case), if a man were to call the necessary just and honourable, and yet as to the nature of the necessary and the good, how different it is in fact, were neither to have-seen nor able to demonstrate to any one else." Aristot. de Caelo, C. 5 eTreir ck towov crWTi6ep.evov 6Spa 'ifiXaiTTOV, kolv iX.o^ &v iKavus (i<^eAo4rjv="if, being an enemy, I was doing you grievous harm, then as a friend I should ( = shall) be giving you adequate assistance." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 415. 8 et roivw fi-rjSev ifmv riSUei /ijjSeis, ov\ ij/xets xdpLv Vjuv o^Sevos, aXX vfieT'i rjfuv SiKams av exoire tovtwv = " if then in no respect was any one of you going wrong, it is not we who should ( = shall) justly be obliged to you for anything, but you to us for these things." Soph. El. 772 [wrnr^v ap rjfiei's, ois eotKEV, rjKofJtev. | K. ovroi fia.Trjv ye. ttcos yap av fiaTrjV Aeyots ; | et fioi davovro's TTUTT e'xcov T£Kp,ripia I TrpocTijAfe = " to no purpose, then, as it seems, am I come. CI. Certainly not to no purpose. For how should ( = shall) you say to no purpose ? if you are-arrived bringing me trustworthy reports of his death." Thuc. iii. 40. 6 el yap ovTOL opdtas 6.7recrT'rjvyoK av = " for it is not the case that if ever anything was done contrary to the laws, and you were the imitator of it merely, you would ( = will) on this account get off now." See also Thuc. ii. 60. 7. 120. (A) b. Hom. II. vi. 128 el Se rts d^avaTOJV ye Kar ovpavov dXr/Xov- Oas, I OVK av eytaye Oeouriv hrovpavlowri. /iaxoiy«.ijv= "but if, being one of the immortals, thou art come down from heaven, it is not I at any rate who would ( = will) be for contending with heavenly denizens." Plat. Sophist, p. 247 D rdx ovv ib-eos av aTTopoiev, el Stj Tt ToiovTov 7re7rov^ao-i = " perhaps then they would ( = will) 138 GKEEK AND LATIN § 120 be in a difficulty, if (you see) they have got into a position like this." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 415. 12 £t Se S^ Kal iv avroh ois eTL/J-SiO-de ijSt/ojKe tis vfi.(ov . . ., ttocto) /iaAAov av [iurourOe SiKaiws 5J o-(u^o«r0£ ; = " and if then even in the very honours which you enjoyed any one of you has done wrong, how much the more would ( = will) you be becoming the objects of hatred than of protection ?" Find. Nem. vii. 86 el Se yEi'erat I avSpos dvrjp Ti, (^latukv Kc . . . = " if any one man has any advantage from any other man, we should ( = shall) say ..." Soph. El. 799 ovKovv awoarelxoifi av, et raS eS Kvpei = "then I would ( = will) take myself away, if matters here are in a good way." Herod, ii. 15 ei Sv (iovkoiJ^da yviaiiya-i ttjctl Iwvodv )(pacr6ai TO. Trepl AiyvTTTOv . . ., a,TroSeiKvvoLixev av . . . = "if then we are willing to make use of the opinions of the lonians in matters relating to Egypt, we should ( = shall) show ..." Xen. Mem. ii. 2. 3 ei ye oiStws ex^'' toijto, elXiKpivq'S Tts civ eirj dSiKba 17 dxapuTTia = " if indeed this is so, a palpable kind of wrongdoing would ( = will) ingratitude turn out to be." Plat. Gffrg. p. 492 E o^ ydp toi Oav/JLa^oip, dv, el KvpnriSrjs dX.r]9rj ev TOurSe Xeyev . . = " f Or I should ( = shall) not be at all surprised, if Euripides speaks the truth in the following verses ..." Hom. II. xxiv. 660 el jxev Siy // eOeXei^ reXecrac Td(f)OV EKTopt 8t(j), I &Se Ke [ioi pe^wv, 'A^i-Xev, Kexapurfieva Oeirj's = " if then you are willing for me to finish a tomb to the divine Hector, so doing, Achilles, would ( = will) you do what is acceptable to me." ^^^ Soph. Aj. 1130 eyi) yap dv \j/e^aip,i Sai/ioviov vopxivs ; i T. el rovi OavovTa'S ovk Jjis ^^^ Odirreiv irapmv = " why, should ( = shall) I show disrespect to the institutions of the gods ? T. Yes, if by your presence you prevent me from burying the dead." Soph. El. 314 ■q S' av^^^ t-ycb dapcrova-a p,dXXov es X6yovvobTO kcu fi\rifj,rj Trepl €/j,ov, xara 7roA,Xa ovk av etKOTWS d/couotre avTov="ii indeed truly he shall in some matter outside the embassy be speaking ill of me, for many reasons you would ( = will) not be justified in giving him a hearing." See also Xen. Anab. v. 1. 9. Hesiod Tkeog. 164 ai.' k lOeXrjre I TreiOecrOai, iraTpo'S Ke KaKrjV Tuj-aLfj,eOa A(o^9jv="if truly you shall be willing to accede, we should ( = shall) avenge the disgraceful insult to our father." Soph. Oed. Tyr. 216 ra/*' kav OkX-gs hnq | kXv(j)V Zkx^aOai . . ., I dXKfjv Xd/Soii av="my words if truly you shall be willing to hear and receive, you would ( = will) receive strength." Ar. Heel. 415 ■^v yap Trap€-)(acri Tofs Sco/ievots ol Kvac^ijs | xXaivas . . ., I irXevpiTil rjjjMV ov^kv av Xd/3oi ■irori = " for if truly the fullers shall provide blankets for those 142 GEEEK AND LATIN § 123 who want them, pleurisy would ( = will) never lay hold upon any one of us." Plato Phileh. p. 55 E Trao-tDv irou re^viov av tls dpidfJirjTiKrjv X'^P^Cv '^"■^ ■ • ■' 4"^^^°^ '^^ KaraXenrofji^vov EKatrTijs av yevotTo = " for surely, if truly from all the arts one shall take away the art of number and . . ., good for nothing would ( = will) be the resulting residue of each." ^^^ Hom. II. iv. 97 tov kev Syj Trd/j/Trpwra Trap dyXaa Smpa cf^epoLO, I at icev iSri MevlXaov • • • | 0"¥ /3eA.el' 8jj,r)6kvra = "from him indeed would ( = will) you in the first place bear away notable gifts, if truly he shall have-seen Menelaus slain by your steel." Plat. Phileh. p. 46 B avev tovtu>v . . . twv ijSovioi/ Koi tQv TaiJTats eiropevoiv, dv pfj KarocftdScri, cr^eSbv ovk dv Trore 8vvaip.e6a SiaKpivarrOai rh vvv ^rjrovjj^vov = " apart from these pleasures and those which are consequent upon them, if truly they shall not have-been considered, scarcely ever should ( = shall) we be able to form a judgment about the object of our present search." Hom. Od. i. 287 el p,kv kev jrarpbs jSloTOV /cat vocrToi/ aKoixrjjSj I ^ T av rpv)(6p,ev6'S Trep eVt xAatiys evtatn-ov ^ " if truly you shall have-heard of your father as aHve and on his return, then truly you would ( = will), even though being worn out, still endure for a year." Soph. El. 554 dXX rjv (•f'V^ /"■°'> ■ • • I Xe^ai/j,' av = "but if truly you shall have-permitted me, I would ( = wiU) speak." Ar. Plut. 52 T^v S' rjfjuv (j'pda-rj | . . ., ■KvdoipjeO' dv = "but if truly he shall have-told us, we should ( = shall) learn." Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 35 rjv o^v e'A^eojuev Itt' avrov^ TTplv . . ., pdXuTTa dv Aa/3oj/iev Koi dvOpunrovs Koi ^^pij/tara = " if then truly we shall have-come upon them before . . ., so most of all should ( = shall) we capture both men and treasure." See also Ar. Lys. 140. 124. In passages like the following, we have this form of apodosis side by side with the normal form with the verb in the Future Indicative : — Plat. Bep. iv. p. 423 A ais lav p\v ws p.i/j. Trpoa-tpepr], Travrhs dv diJ,dpTOLS, eav Se cos iroAAais . . ., ^vp,p,dxoii p,ev del § 126 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 143 iroXXoL'S ;^jOrjo-ei, TroXe/^tois S oAtyois = " to which if truly, on the one hand, you shall advance as to an individual, you would ( = will) go entirely wrong, but if truly, on the other hand, as to a multitude, you will ever have many allies and but few enemies." Theocr. (?) xxix. 21 ai yap S8e Trotjjs, dyadb'i /mv aKovcreat I €^ darruv' 6 Se rot k'"E/)os ov xaA,eir(3s e)(oi,= "ii haply you shall be acting thus, you will be hearing your praises from the side of the citizens : and Eros would ( = will) not be badly disposed towards you." So, the protasis being omitted, Herod, iv. 97 oijtSs juevrot 'i\poiiai toi, koX ovk av Xr/KJiOeirfv = " I myself however will follow you and would ( = will) not be left behind." 125. So much for Conditional Sentences in Greek, as they appear in the Direct Speech. The following additional examples wiU show the forms they assume in the InDIKECT Speech indirect speech. 126. Speaking broadly, and irregularities apart, it will be found that — 144 GREEK AND LATIN S126 (i.) The introductory verb being in the present tense : IN THE PEOTASIS (a) used { There is no change, or (/?) not used { There is no change. (■y) In either case, however, the verb in the protasis may be in the (ii.) The introductory verb being in the past, or an on or u)s or other 'Forms (A) a, h either retain their verb unchanged or^ cliange it into the corresponding Past Subjunctive. Form (A) c either retains its verb unchanged or 1- changes it into the corresponding Future Sub- 1 junctive (in so-called optatival form i^^). J . Forms (B) a, (B') a, (C) a and (C) a retain their verb un-\ (a) used \ changed. J Forms (B) 6, (B') h either retain their verb unchanged] or change it into the corresponding Past Sub- [ junctive. 1^^°' Forms (A') a, h, c eitber retain their verb unchanged"! or change it into the corresponding Past Sub-> ^ junctive. or Forms (A) a, b, c either remain unchanged or change into d with the corresponding Subjunctives, Past or Future (in so-called optatival form). (/3) not used ^ Forms (B) a, (B') ctj (0) »> (C) a retain their verb unchanged. Forms (B) b, (B') b either retain their verb unchanged or turn it into the corresponding Past Sub- junctive.i^^* (7) In either case, again, however, the verb in the protasis may be in CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 145 re, according as on or ws or other relatival particle is IN THE APODOSIS here is no change idicatives become the corresponding infinitives : unless for any reason, e.g. the precedence of a verb like ivpuTKuv, or of an expression like StSicvat /u,^, a participle or a subjunctive present is required : or unless a participle is used. initive Mood. livalent to a past ^^* tense : there, according as itival particle is ^^^ idicatives Present either remain unchanged or become the corresponding Indicatives or Subjunctives Past. idicatives Past remain unchanged. idicatives Future become the corresponding Futures Subjunctive (in so-called optatival form). he verb remains unchanged, unless for any reason, e.g. the pre- cedence of tva etc., a Subjunctive Past is required. he verb remains unchanged, or becomes the corresponding Sub- junctive Past. lere is no change. le verb goes into the corresponding Infinitive ; unless a participle is used. Infinitive Mood. 146 GREEK AND LATIN- § 127 Indirect speech. 127. i. Indirect speech after an introductory verb in i. Introductory t^g Present tense. verb — Present. 128. (A) a. (fi) Thuc. i. 136. 5 ovk d^wi, et tl apa avrbi avrelirev ai)T(f) ' AOTjvaidiv Seofiiviii, (fievyovTa TLfj,(apeia-6ai = " he claims from him, if perchance in any matter he himself has- opposed him in his suit to the Athenians, not to avenge himself upon an exile." 129. (A) h. (a) Plat. Hep. vi. p. 488 D /irjS hratovTas on dvdyK-q avTii) rr/v 67rt;u.eAeiav ■TTOieurdai iviavrov kcu (opGiv koI axrTpwv Kai irvevpAroiv Kot iravrcov Twv ttj te^vi; TrpotrrjKovTtDV, el jxeWei T(j) ovTt vcus d.p)(^iKb's 'ia-icrOai = " and not having the slightest conception that it is necessary for him to direct his care to the year and the seasons and the heaven and the stars and the winds and everything that appertains to his art, if he desires in reality to be a person fit to take the charge of a ship." (/3) Soph. Oed. Tyr. 690 urdi. Si Trapa(l)p6vifM)v ■ ■ ■ | Tre(j>dvdai, p.' oiv,!'"' d o-e vo(T4>L^op.ai, = " know that I should ( = shall) have shown myself bereft of my senses, if I forsake thee." Eur. Suppl. 467 cyoi S' d,TravSS . I "ASpaa-Tov h yiji/ rrjvSe prj irapievai' | et 8' ecTTiv ev yy, . . . | TijcrS' c^eAaiji/etv = " but I forbid you to allow Adrastus to pass into this land : and bid you, if he is in the land, to send him forth from it." Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 20 6 iBlevocfiCiv Setrai toiis 6p,ripovs tc avToi irapaSovvai,, /cat Itti rh opos, el f^ov^-erai, (Tva-Tparev- eo-dai • tl 8e pr), avrhv edcrai = " Xenophon asks him both to hand over the hostages to him and — if he is willing — to accompany him against the mountain : but if he is not willing, to let him go." Isocr. Areop. p. 152. c. /SovXopaL 8' . . . Srjkuo-ai . . ., iva prjSeh oirjTai pe to. dpapT'jpaTa toC Srjpov Mav dK/)ij8(3s e^erafciv, ei 86 Tt KaXhv rj a-epvbv StaireTrpaKTat, ravTa 8e irapaAetirciv = " but I wish to show, — in order that no n n n ^ § 131 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 147 one may think that while I am over-keen in searching out the wrongdoings of the sovereign people, yet that, if something of an honorable and respectable nature has been brought to a conclusion, this I pass over." (y) Herod, ii. 64 ei Sv dvai ti^ 6e<^ TOVTO f^T] (ftikov, ovK av ov8e TO. KTijvea iroteeiv="that if therefore such conduct is otherwise than pleasing in the eyes of the god, neither would the brute beasts so act." 130. (A) c. (^) Eur. Heracl. 494 icayuot Aeyei fiev ov o-a<^(3s, Aeyet 6e ttws, | et f^rj Ti TOVT(av efajU,iy;(av^o-o/iei', | 17/ias fj^ev aAAr;v yatav €vpio-Kei,v Tivd, I avrhs Se a-aicraL rijvSe /iovXerai x^dva = " and he tells me, not clearly, but still in a way, that if we shall not find a path out of these troubles somehow, we are likely to find some other land to live in, but he is desirous of acting the saviour of this territory." Lysias c. Alcib. ii. p. 144. 25 rjyovjj^voi &uvhv eivai, il ol TidevTK rhv aywva kol tyjv ^7)<^ov SiSovres irapaKeAertrovrai Ijcrj KaTa\l/TjaHjs = " if then I were to say what I have to say, I know well that you would say I was making a declamation." {/3) Soph. Aj. 1344 dvSpa 8' ov SiKaiov, el ddvot, | ^Xdineiv rhv ea-OXov, ot55' lav /muj-Zv Kvprj's = " but it is not just to wrong the good man, even if he were to die, — no, not even if truly you shall happen to be at enmity with him." Thuc. i. 80. 2 evpoure S' av TOi/Se . . . ovk av iX.d)(UTTOV yevojxevov, el a-oxjjpovZs tis avrbv eKXoyi^oiTO^"noyf you 148 GREEK AND LATIN § 131 would find that this present war would be one not of the smallest, if one would calmly think it out." Thuc. vi. 18. 3 iv rc^Se Ka.ek' erepiav avroK ntvSvvov ilvai, d [)fq avTol ciAAwv apxoi/j^v = " we are in this position, because there would be danger of ourselves coming under the control of the rest, if we did not ourselves control others." Dem. Olynth. i. p. 16. 8 XoyiioiiAvovs, d ^iAittttos Xafioi Kad' rjixiHv tolovtov Kaipbv Kal Tr6X€p,o? yevoiTO irpo's ry X'^Pfj ""'i'S "•' aiJrbv o'ie(j-6e erot/tms £^ v/xai eXoetv = " considering that if Philip were to get against us such an opportimity, and war were to break out against the land, with what willingness do you think he would come against you ? " Thuc. vi. 33. 2 &pp,-qvTa,i . . . yjyovpevoi, el Tavrrjv (rxotev, p^Sto)? Koi TaWa e^etv="they have started on their way, thinking that, if they were to get possession (of this land of ours), or — I should rather say — if they shall get possession of it, they will easily get the rest also." Dem. de Foils. Leg. p. 361. 29 tIv av ovv oiea-Oe . . . rois ■irpoyovovs v/ioJv, et Xafioiev aitrO-qaiv, ypy^r^ov r) yviup/rjv decrOai irepl tmv alriiav tov twv ^(okciov oXidpov ; eyo) p,iv yap oTp,ai Kav KaraXevcravTas avTOVi rais eavrtov X^P"^' KaOapovs ea-ea-Oai. vop.i^etv = " of what kind then do you think that your forefathers, if they recovered conscious- ness, would give a vote or an opinion about those who were the cause of the destruction of the Phocians ? For my part I think that even if they went so far as to stone them with their own hands, they would so and so only consider that they were on the way to absolution." i^^a Theophrastus irepl dSoXccrx^s : Kal el TTot^tretev o Zeiis vSu>p, TO, iv TTj yy fieXriio ecrev, fiaOoVTes 8i(0K0vcri' eivat, Se TaxvTrjra ovSevl kriptf ofiolov, ovrta uxttc d pir] TrpoXap.^dvew^^^ ttjs oSoC TOW Ii/Sons ev 1^ Tovs p,vppr]Kas crvXXeyea-dai, ovScva av (rffieoiv aTrotraJfecr^ai = " f or in a trice the ants, by the scent, as indeed is professed by the Persians, perceiving § §§132 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 149 them, give chase; being in the matter of speed like to no other creature; insomuch that if the Indians were not to get well on their ways whilst the ants are assembling, not one of them would get safely off." 131a. (B) 6 i. (jS) Soph. Jnt. 710 dAA,' S.vSpa «£? rts rj tT06?,^^^'= rh fjLavddveiv I TToAX' aio-xpbv o^Sev Kal rh /*^ reiveiv a7av="but that a man, even if soever he is wise, learn much is no disgrace, and that he be not obstinate." 132. (B') b. (a) Thuc. iii. 102. 7 TreWova-iv . . ., Aeyoi/TES on rjv rovriav KpaTTjo-wcri, Trav to npreipuiTLKhv AaKfSaifiovioi? ^vfiiMi,)(ov Ka^eo-Tij^et= "they try to persuade them, saying that if truly they shall have-got the mastery here, the whole of the continent will have been settled in alliance with the Lacedaemonians." Plat, de Legg. iii. p. 683 B et yovv . . . rts rjfuv {nroo'xoiTo Oehi (US, eav em-)(eiprjfi^v . . ., twv vvv elprjfi.kv(i>v Aoyojv ov )(€cpovi . . , aKOvaop^da, pxiKpav av eX6oip,L 'iyayye, . . . = " if for example any god were to promise us, that if truly we shall have-set to work . . ., we shall hear arguments no worse than those we have just heard, I at least would go a long way ..." (jS) Herod, vi. 57 rot Se aA.Aa to. elprjvaia Kara rdSe (r(j>L SeSorai' rjv dvcrirjv Tts Srj/ju)Te\Tf iroieqTai, irpdrovs £7rt rh SeHTVOv 'i(eiv Tovs ySoo-iA^as = " but in the other matters, those which occur in times of peace, their privileges have been thus allotted to them ; viz. — that if truly a man shaU give a public sacrifice, the kings advance to the principal seat at the feast." Xen. Oyr. i. 4. 28 Aeyerat . . . Ivravda Srj tov Kupov ■yeAoo-at re Ik twv efiTvpocrdev SaKpvwv Kai ecireiv auro) Oappeiv a/TriovTi, oVt 7rapedyoi k'KiXaOtap.iOa T^s o'lKaoe ooou = " but I fear lest, if truly we shall once have-learnt to live idle and to pass our time in plenty, and to associate with the handsome and strapping women and maidens of the Medes and Persians, lest (I say) like the lotus- eaters we shall forget the way home." Aristot. Rhet. ii. 21. 11 -j^prjo-dat, Se Set Kal rais TeOpyXr]- pAvai^ Kal Kotvais yvd/J-ais, edv T]Ka, XeXoiirivai fiev . . . tk)v tov StKatoi; rd^iv, (f>ovov ^ av eiKOTtos efiavr(p Xa)^eiv' ov yap ^v [mol St^ov piMTOV TovTo TToi-qa-avTi ^"^ = " but I again, on the contrary, think that, if I had let this man go, I had finally abandoned the post of right action, and should have laid myself open with justice to an indictment for murder. For never had life, surely, been liveable for me, had I done such a thing." 135. ii. Indirect speech after an introductory verb in the Past, or an equivalent to a Past, tense. 136. (A)&. (a) Soph. Phil. 610 TO. T aXK avroia-i iravr Wi(nruT€v | koX TaiTL Tpoiif Trepya/j, ws ov jx-ffroTe | iripcronv, el [J.fj TOvSe TreKravTes Aoyy | dyoiVTO vr/a-ov TrjcrS' — " all else he rehearsed to them and also the bulwarks of Troy, how that they should never destroy them, unless they persuaded this hermit and brought him away for themselves from this island." Plat. Gwg. p. 461 A iKiivovs eTirov roiis Xdyoi'S, OTt el /xev KepSos fiyoTo etvai t6 e\ey)(e(Tda.i, Sxnrep eyta, a^iov etij SiaAeyeo-^at, ei 8e /ii;, eS.v )(aipei,v ^ " 1 said what I did, viz. — that if you thought it an advantage to be con- futed, as I did, it was worth whUe to argue : but if not, then it was better to leave it alone." (J3) Thuc. i. 72. 4 ecJMO-av /iovXea-Oai Koi aVTol es to irkyjOoi ehreLv, e'i tl /jurj kwXvoi = " they said that they wished themselves to address the assembly, if there was no objection." Thuc. iii. 10. 6 Kal Trtcrrovs ovKeri ei!)(op£v ■^yeptovas 'AOrj- vatous, irapaSeiyiJbaxTi rots ■irpoyiyvop.evoK XP^f^^°'-' °^ yap et/cbs ^v avTOiis oijs p-ev pjed' r/puav evoTrovSors lirotij- cravTO KaTaxTTpe^oxrdai, Tors Se v?roXotirovs, ei ttotc apa e8vvqdr](rav,^^^ prj Spao-ai Tavra = "and trustworthy leaders we no longer had in the Athenians, using at least as precedents what had just before been happening. For it was not likely in their case, that whereas they sub- jected to their own sway those whom along with us they had-taken into relations with themselves, yet by us, who were left unsubjected, they would act differ- ently, if in truth they ever got the chance." 137 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 153 Xen. Anab. i. 3. 14 eis Se 6^ ctire . . . o-rpaTriyovs /i£V e\e(r6ai aWovs us ra^^icrTa, ei /i'^ /JoijAcTai KAeapxos aTrayetv' . . . ekdovra^ Se KCpov atTCtv TrAoia, ois aTTO- TrAeotev ' eav Se /*'>j 8t8(^ Taura, rj-ye^ova ainiv KCpoi/, oVtis K.T.A. = " SO one individual said that they ought to choose other leaders as quickly as possible, if Clearchus was unwilling to lead them away : and that they ought to go to Cyrus, and ask him for ships, so that they might sail away : and if truly he should be for declining that, ask of him a leader, who etc." Xen. Jtnab. vii. 4. 23 ovk etfir) arTrsuTcurOai, el Sevoc^cov fiovXoiTO Tifjuap-^aacrdat aiJTOW Trjs iTriOicrews = " he said he made no treaty with them, if Xenophon desired to punish them for their attack." Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 491 A v(tlv . . . Travra e'xovcrai/ ocra trpoderd^ajxev vvv Sri, el TeX.ew'S jj-eWoL (^tXoa"o<^os yeve(r6(xi = " a nature having all those gifts which we have- rehearsed just now as necessary, if a man would be an accomplished philosopher." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 443. 13 et fuv yap irpocrSe^aLTo $ci)K£as crvfifmxovs koi p^6' vp,(av tovs OjOkovs avTois diroSofrj, tow Trpbs 9eTTaAoiis Koi Qrjiiaiovi opKOVi Trapafiaiveiv evdvi avajKoiov -qv . . .' el Se fifj TrpotrSeypno ^"^ . . ., ovk edtreiv v/ms TrapeXOeiv avrhv rjyeiTO, dAAo. PorjOrjcreiv eis IIuAas, OTTep, el p-tj TrapeKpovcrdrjT, eiToiyfTO.T av' ei Se TOVTO yevoLTO, ovk eveivaL TrapeXdetv eXoy i^ero = " for 11 he received the Phocians as allies and along with you made good his oaths to them, it was necessary for him straightway to give the go-by to his oaths to the Thessalians and Thebans : but if he was loth to receive them, he thought that you would not permit him to pass, but would take assistance to Pylae : a thing which, if you had not been hoodwinked, you would have done : and if this happened, he considered that it was impossible for him to pass." See also Thuc. v. 38. 4. 137. (A) c. (a) Xen. Cyr. viii. 1.10 ySei yap on e'i Tt /xax^?? tot£ Sei^o-oi, etc TouTuiv avr(i Kal TrapaxTraTas Kal eirto-Taras XtjTTTeov etp . . . el Seoi Se Kal orTpaTrjySv ■ttov avev avTov, ySec oVt Ik TO-iritiv Trepm-reov ei-rj . . . el S' ovtoi etev oiovs Seoi, iravra iv6piC^ KaAoJs ^o-ea-eaL=" for he knew that if at any time 154 GREEK AND LATIN § 137 there should be any need of fighting, it was of these that he must take both his council and his lieutenants. And that should there be need of generals anywhere apart from himself, he knew it was out of these that he must despatch them . . . But if these were such as they ought to be, he considered that all things would be well." Plat. Apol. p. 29 C OS e<^77 • ■ •, Aeywv w/obs u/uas, ws d Sia<^6ii^0i)u,rjv, r/8'? o.v ^"^ ti/iwv ot iiteiS eirtT^jSevovres a 2cDK/3aT^S 6i8ao"Kei Travres TravTaTracri SiaKJiOafnjcrovTai = " who said ., urging upon you, that if I should escape, your sons, practising Socrates' teaching, would all of them utterly be of a certainty already ruined." {/3) Soph. Aj. 312 exeiT £/iOt TO. SetV eJTTjTretAijcr eVij, | £t p) (pavoirjv^^ irav to avvTv)(hv Trddo's = "and then he threatened me in terrible language, if I should not declare to him everything which had taken place." Soph. Phil. 352 eireira //.iVTOi ^O) Adyos KaA.&s trpocrijv, \ el rdirl Tpol(i. Trepyajj. alpyjtroiij, Idv = " then, however, there was also before me the reputation in its excellence, if by going I should capture the bulwarks of Troy." Ar. Eqq. 774 ^^pij/iara ■n-Xiio'T aTreSet^a \ . . ., ov (ppovrt^wv Tuv ISidjriav o-uSevds, el crol ^aptot)uijv= "I brought to the front much money, caring nought for any individual, if ^°* I should do good service to you." Xen. Symp. i. 7 oi oSv a/i^t rhv ^mKpdrr^v . . . ovx VTrur\vovvTO crvvSeurvi^creiv ' a)s Se irdvv dx^96p,evo^ aveph's ^v, el firj eipoivTO, o-uv?jKoAoi;^?;o-ai/ =" those then who were of Socrates' party were for declining to breakfast with him (Callias). But as he was plainly much pained, if they would not come, they went with him." Plat. Theaet. p. 163 E 0. dAAa Seti/dv, & EwKpares, tovto ye cj)avai. 2. Set ye ixevroi ' el (TiMTOip.ev rhv Trpocrde Xoyov, — • et Se ij.-q, oj'xeTat 204a _ « y/^ Why, it would be a shock- ing thing to say that, Socrates. S. Yet we must needs s^y that: that, if we should preserve our preceding argument, [we must say that, your own intelligence must have-admitted]. And if we do not say that, the argument is gone." Plat, de Bep. v. p. 450 A exaipov, dyairwv et rts caa-06 Tavra = "I was rejoicing, being satisfied if one should lay down these subjects." Isoer. Trapezit. p. 360. a. vo/xtfwv el, p.ev avrov p.eveiv § § 138 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 155 eTTixeipoirjv, e/cSoSijcrea-^ai /x' VTrh tijs TrdXews 2aTij/D(j), et 6' aAAoo-e iroi TpaTroifji,7jv, ovSev ixek'^qcreiv aiJT(^ twv e/xwv Aoywv, 6t 8 eL(nrXevcroifj.rjV, dirodaveurdai yue /xera tov Trarpos^"^ — ravra Aoyifd/xei/os Sievoeir' airoa-repdv fjie t<3v XprjiMTw = " thinking that if I essayed to remain upon the spot, I should be given up by the state to Satyrus, but that if I turned elsewhither, he would have no need to care for my arguments, while again, if I should sail in, I should be put to death along with my father — turning these ideas in his mind, he schemed how to deprive me of my property." Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 443. 6 ^v 8' ovSkv fiaXXov fiey' avrw KaO viJ,(ov ovS ovTO) TTpa^ai, el [lit] $a)Keas aTTO Aei = " but it was not possible for him to do anything of importance against you any the more even so, unless he should ruin the Phocians." See also Dem. Mid. p. 557. 27 ; Onet. ii. p. 876. 14. 138. (B) a ii. (a) Xen. AnOih. l. 6. 2 oStos T^vpi^ era-ev, et aVTtf Soirj iTTTreas )(^i,Xiovi, oTi rovi(narov yevecrdai av Tovrov e<^a/iev, et TroXefiiiov ets t'^v \iopav lovroiv, StaKaptcros Tts Toiis yewpyovs koX rovaiprjO-6fjKvoi re rrjv a.p)(rjv KOI povTi8a, d k(os SvvaiTO, irplv /j,eyd\ovi yevecrdai Tors IlejOfras, KaraXa/Sdv avTiov av^avo- aevrjv T)jv Svvafji,iv . . . SieirejUTre Se Treipeiip^vos reov p,avTrjt(ov o rt poveoi£V' (os d ^poviovra t^v dXtjdTjtrjv evptOdr], eTretpr)Tai^^ a-ea Sevrepa wepiruiv, d sTTixeipeoi eVi Uepa-as a-T/)aT£ij€o-^ai = " but he took it into his consideration, if haply in any way he should be able so to do, before the Persians became important to over- master cheir power in its growth. And he sent in different directions, making trial of the oracles, to see what they thought: since, if haply they should have-been 158 6EEEK AND LATIN § 139 found thinking the truth, he made further inquiries of them, sending a second time, as to whether he should attempt to make an expedition against the Persians." Thuc. ii. 5. 4 efiovXovTO yap o-(j>ia-tv, it riva Xa/3o6ev, V7rdp\civ avTi Twv evSov, ■ijv apa rv^tixri rtves e^iay prjfjbivoi = "for they wished that if haply they should have- caught any one, he should be in their hands as a set-off against those of their own men who were imprisoned — if truly it should turn out that any had been taken alive." 208 Thuc. ii. 67. 1 iropevop.ivoi h TYjv Acrt'av (us jSacriXea, et ttcus Trettreiav avrhv y^prjfiaTO, t€ Trapiyeiv koX ^vp.TroXffJ.e'iv, dffiLKvovvrai (os StraXfojv Trpwrov ... Is Qpt^K-qv, fSovXo/Jievoi Treural T€ avrhv el SvvaivTO, p^rao-ravra rrji Adrjvaluiv ^v/i/ia^tas (TTparevcrai iirl ttjv UoTiSaiav . . ., /cat . . . = " going on their way into Asia to the Great King, if haply in any way they should have-persuaded him both to subsidise them and make war in their company, they arrive first at the house of Sitalces in Thrace, wishing both to persuade him, if haply they should be able to do so, to revolt from alliance with the Athenians and make an advance upon Potidaea, and ..." Thuc. ii. 77. 2 TrSia-av yap Srj iScav firivoovv, ei' irojs (T(ji!xriv avev Sairavjjs Kal TroAio/j/ctas irpocra^Oeirj = " for as you may be well assured they imagined every possible device, if haply in any way without expense and a siege it should have-been brought over to them." Thuc. vi. 29. 1 erot/ios ^v Kpivecrdai, e'i ti tovtiuv ilpyacr- jiivoi Jjv' . . . Koi d p.€v TOVTiov TL eipyacTTO, SiKTjv Sovvai, €1 S' aTToXvOdr], dp^eiv = " he was ready to take his trial, whether he had so acted or not : and if he had, to take the consequences ; but if haply he should have -been acquitted to take up his command." Andoc. de Myst. p. 3. 11 ^x^to MeyapaSe vire^eXOdv, iKitOev Se CTrayyeWeTai tyj /JotjAjj, €i ol aStiav Soiev, jjLTjvva-eiv . . . = " he went off stealthily to Megara, and thence sent a message to the council that if haply they should have -offered him a free pardon, he would give in- formation . . " Xen. Ages. 1. 10 Tiaa-atfiipvrj'S /xev (li/xocrcv 'AyijcrtAaio, d cnriurauTO eius eXdocev oi5s Trejxtj/eLev Trpb'S /ScuriXea dyyiXovi, SiaTrpa^ecrdai, avT(ji dcjiedfjvai, avrovofiovs Tcis ev rn 'Axrta irdAets EAAijvtSas = " Tissaphernes swore to Agesilaus, that if haply he should have-made a truce, until the § 1 § 1140 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 159 return of such messengers as he should haply have- sent to the king, he would bring matters about for him, so that the Greek cities in Asia should be let go independent." Plat. Phaedm, p. 58 B T(^ oSr 'AttoAAwvi eiSfavro . . . tote, €t a-oiOeUv, eKacrrov €T0D9 Oewpiav dm-d^eiv eh Arj\ov = " SO they vowed to Apollo then, that if haply they should have-been preserved, they would send away in each year a solemn procession to Delos." Isocr. Trapezit. p. 359. C. r^yovinriv 8', d fiev TrpoeZ/iijv airavTa TO. T^pi^/iara, KivSweva-eiv, ei' tl trddoi- eKetvos, (rreprjOeh Kal TiHv evOdSe Kal twv l/cet, Travrtov evSeijs yevqcrea-dai' el 8' 6/i,oAoya)v eivai hruTTeiXavTOS rov ^aTvpov /*ij 7rapaSoii)v, el's Ttts /ieyKTTas SiafioXas e/xavThv koI rhv iraTepa Kara- crrijcreLv irpbs Sarupov = " and I thought, that if haply I should have-given up all my money, I should run the risk, if anything happened to him, of being deprived of everything both here and there, and so becoming in want of everything : but that, if haply — while admitting that I had money — on the bidding of Satyrus I should not have-handed it over, I should expose both myself and my father to the greatest obloquy with Satyrus." (y) Thuc. iv. 98. 3 {et^axrav . . .) /cat aiJToi el p,ev eirl irAeov ^vv-qdrfvai, rijs eKeivtav Kparrp-aL, tovt av e)(eiv'^''^ vvv 81 . . . = " (they said . . •) and that, as to themselves, if haply they should have-been able to get possession to any further extent of their opponents' territory, that they would stick to : but, as things actually were, ." 140. (B') h. (a) Andoc. de Myst. p. 6. 32 etVetv 81 ■qfiS.'s on 8e8oyp,evov rj/juv em 8vo fiev rdXavTa dpyvpiov SiSdvat ol . . ., lav Se KaTOO-YiOjiiev ij/*ets a (3ovX.6[ji,e9a, eva avThv rjpMv eivai^ " he averred also that we said that we had determined to give him two talents of silver, and if truly we should have-gained our ends, he should be one of us." Xen. Anal), ii. 3. 6 eXeyov 8e on elKora SoKotev Aeyttv fiaa-iXel, koX rfKoiev rjyefwvas exovres ol avrovs, eav cnrovSat yeviDvrai, d^ova-iv evOev e^ovcri to, cirtTijSEta = " and they said that their report seemed reasonable to the king, and that they were come bringing guides who would, if truly an arrangement should have-been come to, lead 160 GREEK AND LATIN § UO them to quarters, whence they would get the necessaries of life." (/3) Plat. Prolog, p. 345 E i^yen-o yap . . . Tovs /U€V o5v TTovTjpovs . . . uimrep dcr/jAvovs opoiv . . .' tow S dyadovs eTriKpvTma- dai re koI hraiviLV dvayKoi^ecrOai, Kot edv n opyuTdwri rots yovev Xidiff KaT€(j)dTL^ov dvaOrjfreiv dvBpidvTa ^piKrovi' idv Tiva irapaf^loQ-i TuJv vopMv = " and the nine archons, taking an oath at the stone, condemned themselves to oflFer up a golden image, if truly they should have- transgressed any of the laws." Thuc. V. 46. 2 eTreure re TTifuj/ai Trpecr/Sei^ . . . KeXevcrovTas AaKeSatjUOVio'us, «t ti SiKaiov Siavoovvrai, TldvaKTov re opffbv aTToStSdvat koI A/i(^nroA.tv, h'ai r-qv twv BdtcoTWV ^vp,iia^iav avefvat, ^v p.rj « Tois OTrovScis f(rids TTipiyevio-dai Koi Kara Trdvra dv avrov^ eKfftofSrjcrai, TTj re oipeL (irAetcrTot yap dv vvv (pavrjvai) Kal tij TrpocrSoKta &v TreuTOVTai, /juxkurra S dv T(f avriKa kivSvvc^ tks udym . . . etxbs Se elvai . . . rqv a-rparidv ovk aTropqcreiv XprrfpAriav, ffv irpbs Tjj TToAei Kparovcra Kade^-rjrai = " but § § § 141 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 161 Lamachus' advice was that they should make straight for Syracuse. For it was at first that every armament was most formidable . . . But if truly they should have-fallen upon the enemy suddenly they would most of all themselves succeed, and in every respect frighten their foe : both by the very sight of them (for it was at the present time that they would appear most numerous) and by the anticipation of what he was about to suffer, and above all would this be the case from the immediate danger of the engagement. And it was likely that their expedition would be in no want of means, if, victorious, it took up its position at the gates of the city." Hom. II. vii. 386 i^vwyet Ilpia/ids T€ Kol aXkoi T/)(3£s ayavol \ tlirelv, a'i Kt irep Vjj,[ji,i cjiiXov koi, rjSv yevoiTO, I [j,v6ov 'AXe^dvSpoio = "both Priam and the other lordly Trojans bade me tell to you, if truly it should be acceptable to you and agreeable, the tale of Alexander." Hom. II. ii. 597 o-tcvto yap ev)(6fJi.€voi VLKrjO-efiev, et Trep av avTOi I /Mvaai, deiSoiev, Kovpai Atbs alyi6)(oio = " for he went along boasting that he would gain the prize, even if truly the very Muses, daughters of aegis -bearing Zeus, should be singing against him." Thuc. viii. 27. 4 cos Ta.)(^UTTa Se 6KeAev£ TOiJS re Tpav/iariai dvoAa/JdvTas . . ., a 6 e/c t^s iroXep.tas elX.ij(f>aa-i /cara- AtTTOi/Tas, . . dTTOTrkciv cs ^dfwv, KdKitdev, . . . tovs eTrhrXovi, rjv ttov Kaiphs eirj,^^ iroimrOai = " but he bade them as quickly as possible both to pick up the wounded, and to leave behind what they had taken from the enemy's country, and so to sail away to Samos, and thence, if truly there should be an opportunity, to make their attacks." And, with a protasis in participial form, vi^e have Lysias C. Eratosth. p. 121. 4 &fi.oda(rav Sr] avToi Kara to p/qvyfia ^vXXajSovTK roiis ai/Spas, TrpoSoOrivai av r] 7rdAts = "they thought therefore that this force had come by Alcibiades' contrivance, and without Boeotians having had anything to say to it, and according to arrangement ; and that, if indeed they themselves had not got the start in arresting the men in accordance "with the information received, the city would have been betrayed." 141a. (C) a. ((8) Xen. Mem. i. 3. 3 oiire yap tois fleois etf>rj KaXojs e'x^"'' ^'^ TaU /JLcydXais 6vfTiai's p.aXXov rj Ta6S p.iKpal's 'iy^aipov . . oi3t av TOLS dvOpiairois a^iov efvat ^rjv, et to. Trapa, t(uv ■n-ov-qpoiv /.laAAov fjv Ki-)(ci.picrp.kva rots ^eots fj to, Trapa twv Xpijo-Tftiv = " f or he affirmed that neither had it been well with the gods, if they had been delighting in great sacrifices rather than in small ones, nor would life have been worth living for men, if offerings from evil people had been more acceptable to the gods than those from good people." § 142 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 163 142. Before we finally part with Conditional Sentences in Greek, it may be found useful if we append, by way of summary and finger-post, and with the appropriate English equivalents, the following table of the forms used to express the Pkotasis in the Direct Speech. dir^ect°sp'eJch. '" 164 GREEK AND LATIN §142 Forms of pro- tasis in direct speech. GrKEEK (A) a, b, c. el with the Indicative For example- el Tvirrei (et (i.) , (B) a Vet with the Suhjunctive Past (iiO 'followed, in Case (ii.), by the Subjunc- tive Past with av, etc. {followed, Case (ii.), 1 TOVTO yi votTO av, e (B) 6 Ui with the Subjunctive Present (ii.)j ■ £1 TVTTTrj (i.) rel with the Indicative Past with av (A') a J. lav with the Indicative Past (ii.) Uav with the Indicative Past with av ei eTVTTTev av iav erviTTev eav eTVTTTCv i (i.) rel with the Indicative Present with av (A') 6 -! edv with the Indicative Present (ii.) Uav with the Indicative Present with av eav TVTrrei eav TViTTU a\ (A')c it -! cai I ' ' lea with the Indicative Future with av eav with the Indicative Future eav with the Indicative Future with av et irara^et oil eav Trara^et eav Trara^et (B> -J eai lea: 61 with the Subjunctive Past with av lav with the Subjunctive Past eav with the Subjunctive Past with av et TinTTot av eav TVTTTOt eav TmrToi c §142 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 165 English i does {did, shall do) For example— If he is striking (etc.) i.) soever he did (Indefinite frequency : Eecurrence) ii.) he were , {this would , etc.) ((i.) soever he was strik- ing (ii.) he were striking [i.) soever he does (Indefinite fre- ^(i.) soever he is striking quency : Eecurrence) If- rshall^ (ii.) haply hei or > I will) (shalh (ii.) haply hei or Ue striking Vwill) (i.) he would (Indefinite fre- quency : Eecurrence) = In cases where he did ■ rshould^ (ii.) he\ or ihme l would} I (i.) he would he striking = In cases where he struck lii rsnouba\ (ii.) he\ or Vhame been I would] striking (i.) he vdll (Indefinite fre- qiiency : Recurrence) = In cases where he does (ii.) truly he does If (i.) he will be striking = In cases where he (ii.) truly he is striking fshall^ '.ruly he\ or j-- l will I If truly he\ or Vbe striking I mllJ (should^ e\ or j— I would' {should^ or would) If he\ or \be striki'. i) 166 GREEK AND LATIN §142 Greek d with the Subjunctive Present with av (B') 6-^ edv with the Subjunctive Present edv with the Subjunctive Present with av .„. Jet with the Indicative Past el irvTrnv ^ ' \ — followed by the Indicative Past with dv ( — tovto lyiyvero av) For example^- r rvTTTri 1 d\ or \dv \.TraTd^rj) C TVTTTy \ 'n °% \ KiraTa^y I r rvTTTrj "I eavs or [av KTraTa^vJ 3')«r fd with the Indicative Past (C')a-{ — followed by the Indicative Past only, without dv \ £t £' eTVTTTeV TOVTO iylyveTo) § 142 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 167 English For example- — (shalh fshalh fbe striMng\ ily hei or V - — — If truly heA or >- -! or j- \ will J ^ will J [have-struckJ I Jiad If he had been striking {this would have -) {this would have been houpfening) g /lad If he had been striking {this had ) {this had been happening) C— THE LATIN LANGUAGE 143. Conditional Sentences in Latin are far simpler in form than are those in Greek, albeit that the parallelism in the two languages is great. The less imaginative, graver, and more practical character of the Latin peoples found its expression in a speech, which as it was older, so also was more simple, more broad, more massive than that of the dwellers in Greece. The language of the latter marvellously reflected the equally marvellous play of the emotions, with which those who used it were themselves instinct; and by its side the Latin walks heavily, if not without a certain rugged strength of its own. 144. Among the marks of its greater simplicity is one, especially germane to the subject before us, namely the absence from it of anything akin to the Greek particle av. 145. By consequence, there is no correlative in Latin to sentences falling under either of the divisions respectively designated above (A') and (B'), nor to those under division (C), or (except so far as hereinafter appears) under division (C). 146. Nor again are there any distinct means of expressing, without resort to periphrasis, the would have -ed, would have been -ing of an English apodosis, as contrasted with would possibly have -ed, would possibly have been -ing. All that the speaker can do is to use his past sub- junctive mood — which consequently is best translated by the general expression would | have -ed ; would I have been -ing — to express all the degrees of possibility, ranging § 146 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 169 from the assertion of positive certainty at the one end to the assertion of absolute negation at the other ; and to leave the context to decide in each particular case what particular degree of possibility is there intended to be represented. As for instance — (i.) Positive certainty : Cic. de Fin. ii. 18. 58 idem tu certe fecisses = " the same thing you certainly would | have done." Verg. Aen. ii. 292 etiam hac defensa fuissent = "even by this right hand its defence would | have been assured." Tac. Agric. 45 excepissemus certe mandata vocesque = "we certainly should | have received." Plin. Epp. i. 12. 8 fecisset quod optabat="he would | have done what he desired to do." Ov. Trist. ii. 13 doctas odissem jure sorores = " rightly should I I have hated." Cic. de Off. iii. 19. 75 in foro saltaret= "he would | have been for dancing." Cic. p-o Caecin. 2. 4 facile honestissumis testibus in re perspicua tenerentur = " easily they would | have been confuted." Cic. de Nat. Dear. ii. 18. 49 quae . . . certe non diceret = " which . . . Epicurus would certainly not | have been laying down." (ii.) Possibility : Cic. pro Caelio 26. 62 fortasse non reciperentur = " they would perhaps | have found obstacles being placed in the way of their reception." Cic. de Fin. ii. 18. 58 ipse Epicurus fortasse redderet = "he would perhaps | have been for restoring it." Caes. Bell. Civ. iii. 51 quae res tamen fortasse aliquem reciperet casum = " would | have been tending to bring disaster upon itself" (iii.) Absolute negation : Cic. p-o Plane. 22. 53 neque enim umquam majores nostri sortitionem constituissent aedilitiam = " nor indeed ever would they | have established." Mart. V. 20. 5 nee nos atria, nee domos potentum | . nossemus= "we should not | have known." Ennius Med. Exul 212 ( = 258 Midler) nam niimquam era 170 GREEK AND LATIN §146 errans m& domo ecferret ^i* pedem = " never -would she I have been carrying off." 147. On the other hand, the Latin has its correspondent to the Greek el in the particle si,^" and its finite sentences of the divisions (A) and (B) respectively, to v?hich to prefix it, with the view of making those sentences express the condition of the happening of some other event. The results of so doing are as follow : — 148. (A) Tenses of the Indicative Mood, which denote actual facts. (a) Perfect (J3) Imperfect si- (y) Indefinite posuerat ponebat If he posuit had placed : the effects remaining had been plad.ng\ was placing j had-placed^ . , , V, Vsinale acts placed j ° (a) Perfect Cposuit (yS) Imperfect si- ponit (y) Indefinite [ponit fhas placed : the effects remaining I has been placing'y If he- is placing / has-placed^ . , , ^ j-smele acts places j ° (a) Perfect (/?) Imperfect si (y) Indefinite 'posuerit ponet 216 If he ponet 'shall fhave placed : the effects remaining have been placing^ or -( be placing j Imve-vlaced) . , .„ , ^ Vsmsle acts mil \ place j ° 149. (B) Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood, which (a) Past time '(a) Perfect (fi) Imperfect si (y) Indefinite posuisset poneret If he might = posuisset §149 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 171 denote possible as opposed to actual facts. [ (had placed : the effects remain- ing ... , 1. I had been placinq'X (i.) ever and anon, soever, he } , t " \ ^ ' ' was placing j If- {should^ or J- possibly = he were. wouldj had-placed\ . , , J i-sinsle acts placed J ° Ho have placed : the effects re- maining to have been placing ^^^ to ha/ue^laced — single act 172 GREEK AND LATIN §149 (h) Present time- [{a) Perfect (j8) Imperfect (y) Indefinite posuerit ponat ponat If he may = §150 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 173 If- (i.) ever and anon, soever, he fshain (ii.) he-J or J- possibly, [will J acts (shall he-j or , \will has placed: the effects re- maining has been placing\ is placing ) has-placed "\ . , , ^ Vsmsle 1 ^places j ° liave placed : the effects re- maining have been placing\ be placing j have-placed^ . , , , ^ Vsmgle acts place j ° 150. If now we append to these various sentences, as protases, appropriate apodoses, we arrive at the following results : — 174 GREEK AND LATIN §151 (A) si with the indicative, fol- lowed by the in- dicative ; or the imperative ; or the subjunctive used for an imperative ; or the subjunctive as expressive of a wish, etc. If— rdid -^does IshaU fdo- -^let— (_may- etc. rdid — [ does [shaU ^(a) Perfect g -j (jS) Imperfect ^(•y) Indefinite § [(a) Perfect g i (/3) Imperfect o ^_^ 1^ (y) Indefinite 151. (A) Tenses of the Indicative SI posuerat fhad placed I had been placing^ ponebat If hei was placing j }uid-placed\ \plaeed j hoc- posuit fposuit acciderat Sg accidebat ^ ■§ accidit S" sir si-j ponit If he Iponit has placed has been placing\ is placing f has-placed\ places j hoc accidit (pert) accidit (impf.) accidit (indef.) SS (B) si with the past subjunc- tive — (i. ) Expressive of indefinite fre- quency, recur- rence: followed by the past subjunc- tive expressive of indefinite fre- quency, recur- lence ; or the past indicative. If soever — did, then as often would (sole- bat)— Or, then — did. (ii.) Followed by the past sub- junctive ; or the past indicative with a participle in -turus ; or the past indicative or subjunctive with a participle in -endus. If — were to have — , would I have Or, was about to — Or, was bound to — 8 I (a) Perfect j posuerit (p) Imperfect si-^ ponet If he- I: ^ (y) Indefinite [ponet shall or ■ will have placed have beenplacing\ he placing j hoc have-placed^ place j o 'o o a o 'accident a S (futperf.)^! accidet ^ "i °^ ^accidet a >2 O Q} ".a ^ -p o [a) Past time (o) Perfect (/3) Imperfect si (7) Indefinite 152. (B) Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood, which [had placed I had been placing \ posulsset I (i. ) soever he-i was placing I I hod-placed \ poneret IfJ. {placed j I rto have placed posuisset I (ii. ) he were J to have been placing ^ \to have-placed §152 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 175 Mood, which denote actual facts. thiS' had happened had been happening^ was happening j had-happened\ happened j or hoc acciderit accidat \ accidito/ acciderit or may have happened have been happenmg\ he happening j have-happened\ happen f has happened « has been happening^ ^ this-! is happening j | has-happened\ _g happened j "^ or hoc acciderit accidat \ accidito/ acciderit let 'have happened have been happening^ be happening / have-happened\ happen j this shall or will have happened have been happening'\ be happening j have-happened\ happen ) [acciderit accidat \ or hoc- accidito/ acciderit 'have happen,ed have been happening\ be happening / have-happened\ happen j denote possible as opposed to actual facts. hoc (accidisset accideret accidisset (accidisset accideret accidisset I have happened racciderat this then asj ' tTirlt?^^"'"^ „J accidebat often would^ I have-happened ] f or fhad happened had been happening \ was happening \ I hod-happened \ (should "8 I this-j or (_ would have been happening ^ I have-happened I acciderat laccidit (a Past Indicative with a participle in -turus or -endus ^-" ' (the latter also being found with the Subjunctive). 176 GREEK AND LATIN §152 with the it subjunc- Expressive definite fre- !y, recur- : followed e present in- ive. jever — does, Lsn as often iU (solet)— ) Followed bhe present notive ex- Lve of future bility ; the e indica- or the pre- indicative a participle -turus or ss ; or the rative ; or the motive ex- ive of a wish vice ; etc. laply — shall, lall possibly, lall in fact, about to — bound to — ay! t. lould, etc. (6) Present time '(a) Perfect (j3) Imperfect si- (y) Indefinite posuerit ponat If- ponat {has placed- has been placing 1 is placing j has-placed \ places f (ii.) he ;'lMve placed have been plat be placing liave-placed \ place / 153. Of the forms tabulated above the following matters of remark occur with reference to those in division (B), viz. — 154. (i.) The forms tabulated under the division (B) a ii., and being respectively fposuisset \ raccidisset si-]poneret k hoc-! accideret [posuisset j [accidisset correspond to the English [to have placed \ ( i have happened If he 'were\ to have been placing k this wouldi i have been Iiappening [to have-placed j [ i liave-happened But in these English sentences we are looking from a present point of view upon facts which are — (1) past — in the ordinary sense of the word, or (2) present — in fact, but looked at as the outcome of the • 221 And in dealing with such facts, our habit in English is rather to seize upon the leading notion of the facts being §154 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 177 accidit (perf.) accidit (impf.) accidit (Indef.) accident (prea. pf. subj.) )-{ accidat rhave happened I have been happemmg \ this then as often viilli he happening ] ({shall or will as a con- sequent this-[P°^^'^^^^*y = ) shall or mil perhaps, or I accidat perchance JiMve-happened j (have happened i-accideri have been happening 1 I (fut. pf. i be happening J" ^^^^i^Bt. home-happened \ happen f •accident shaWX ind.) or iaccidet -:« K lacoidet faot)j !e >e been >e- open. o o ^ CO '"*' S g =3 e fc. fe c acciderit (pft. subj.) accidat \ 1 accidito J accidat 1 [accidito / ma/y! or let or should (have :" have- happen thus connected with the past, and to at once look upon them from a ^as^ point of view : thus using, preferentially to the sentences already mentioned, the following, viz. — [placed \ (happened If he had\ been placing I, this would have} been happening [placed j [happened and the statement is constantly made — even by Mr. Key in his Latin Ghammar and Zatin Dictionary ^^^ — that these latter sentences are really the English representatives of Latin sentences of the (B) a ii. type : that, in a word, si with the past subjmctive, followed by the past subjwndive in Latin, corresponds to the English jf Jiad , would have It is not so, in strictness ; and although the statement is not substantially untrue— if regard be had only to the idea to be conveyed, and if the nuaTbce, with which it is conveyed, be left entirely aside, — and although it is often not practically inconvenient, still it is without philosophical 178 GREEK AND LATIN § 154 or philological foundation in fact, and its nse — like the use of all other general but inexact expressions — may occasion- ally lead to trouble in matters of detail. 155. Indeed, in the absence from the Latin language of any particle equivalent to the av, which enabled the Greeks to evolve their sentences of the (C) a type, no means exist whereby directly to represent in Latin the last mentioned English sentences, and the Latins are driven to express such sentences, and the Greek sentences of the (C) a type, by their own sentences of the (B) a ii. type. Thus — as actual examples — Cicero (I'tmaewsc. 6) translates Plato's {Timaeus p. 34 C) ov yap fiv apxea-Oai Trpetr/Byrepov vTTo v€(aTepov ^vvip^a.'s iiaxrev by neque enim esset rectum minori parere minorem : and again (c. 14) Plato's (p. 47 A) oTt Tujv vvv Aoyiuv Trepl rov iravTO's Aeyo/ievcov ovSeli av TTOTe epp-qOn] fj,-qTe arrrpa /xi^Te ■qkiov p/qre ovpavov ISovTwv by nam haec quae est habita de universitate oratio a nobis, baud umquam esset inventa, si neque sidera neque sol neque caelum sub oculorum adspectum cadere potuissent. While Virgil can get no nearer than {Aen. vi. 535) hac vice sermonum roseis Aurora quad- rigis I jam medium aetherio cursu trajecerat axem : | et fors omne datum traherent per talia tempus ; | sed comes admonuit, breviterque adfata Sibylla est : | ' Nox ruit, Aenea ; nos flendo ducimus horas ' — when he seeks to reproduce the {Od. xvi. 219) &s apa Toi y eAeecvoi' vtt' 6ij)pvcri SaKpvov et^ov. I /cat vv K oSvpofiivouTLV eSv <^aos r/eXiOio, I et //.^ TrfXeixa^O'S 7rpoa-e- placing (1 f | pemng [hod-happened I I placing Iposuisset [to have-placed) l^acciderat J 157. (ii.) Those of the forms tabulated under the division (B) a i., which are instances of si with the past subjunctive followed by the past indicative in Latin, normally have the English significations there attributed to them. The forms of (C") just tabulated are practically the same. But it will be noticed that in the case of (C"), the protasis — si with the past subjunctive — is that of (B) a ii. and not that of (B) a i. It should be noticed, also, that the subjunctival forms of (B) a i. and (B) a ii. are identical, as well in the protasis as \in the apodosis, and that the same subjunctive represents both the perfect — where the effects of the action denoted by /the verb remain — and the indefinite, where aU that is denoted is a single act. 158. (iii.) The forms tabulated under the division (B) 6 i. which are instances of si with the present subjunctive followed by the present indicative in Latin — normally have the English significations there attributed to them. But they also form one of the groups of sentences of irregular type, which are produced by the recognition on the part of a speaker who has started his sentence with a protasis or an apodosis belonging to one form of conditional sentence, that the exigency of his idea — for the correction 180 GREEE AND LATIN §158 of an exaggeration, it may be, or for any other reason, and even at the cost of rendering his sentence elliptical — requires him to finish it with an apodosis or a protasis belonging to another form ; and by the change on his part of the form of his sentence accordingly. Instances of such use of the forms in question we shall see hereafter in ^ 193 sqq. It will be noticed that in such use the protasis — si with the present subjunctive — is that of (B) h ii. and not that of (B)& i. 159. (iv.) Those of the forms tabulated under the division (B) h ii., which are respectively sii posuerit \ ponat h hoc- ponat 'accident (pres. pf. subj.) accidat accidat correspond, as has been said, and as is evidenced, as well by the analogy of the Greek language as by the actual usage in Latin, to the English If haply he shall 'have placed have been placing\ be placing j have-placed\ place ) , this will perchance- have happened have been happening \ be happening ) have-happened\ happen j In these English sentences we are looking from a present point of view upon facts which are either (1) present — in fact, but looked at as the starting-point of the future, ^^^ or (2) future. It is not very material to distinguish with minuteness of which nature — as between these alternatives — such facts in reality are. What is material to note is, that in dealing with them our habit in English has been, and is, to make use, preferentially, of modes of speech — which, indeed, in part § 160 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 181 belong to sentences of the (B) a ii. type (see above, §§ 152, 154), — and to say — to have placed "\ to have been placing^ If he werel to be placing j I, this would- to have-placed to place '} [ I have happened I have been hMppening'y be happening ) I have-happened\ happen j and the statement is constantly made — even by Mr. Key in his latin Grammar and in his Latin Dictionary ^^* — that si with the present subjunctive, followed by the present subjunctive in Latin, corresponds to the English form If were, would Such a statement may be more or less substantially true. It may be more or less practically not inconvenient. Accurate, however, philosophically and philologically, it is certainly not; and its use leads at once in practice to positive trouble, when approach is made to details.^^^ 160. Still, si with the present subjunctive as a protasis, accompanied by an apodosis with the present subjunctive, is the nearest approach which can be made in Latin to the English idea " If — were, — -would — " ; and by consequence to its correspondent in Greek, el with the past subjunctive accompanied by an apodosis with the past subjunctive with av. We find, accordingly, these respective Latin and Greek collocations used as practical equivalents. Thus Homer's {II. X. 243) 7r& av eireir 'OSva-rjos eyw Oeioio XaOoifirjV ; becomes in the hands of Accius {Nyctegresia 488) dn ego Ulixem obliscar^^*' umquam aut qu6mquam praeponi velim ? Eur. Med. 250 iis rph &v Trap da-TriSa | (TTrjvai ^fAoi/^ti 182 GREEK AND LATIN § 160 appears in Ennius as {Medea Exul 222 = 268 Miiller) nam t6r sub armis mdlim vitam c6rnere, | quam semel modo pdrere : and Eur. Stheneb. Fr. 670 in Nauck's Trag. Ch: Fragm. ( = Belleroph. Fr. 12 ed. Dind.) & TvayKaKia-rq kcu yvvq. Ti yap Aeywv | fxei^ov (re toCS' ovetSos e^eCiroi Tts &v ; as (Ennius Com. Incert. 390 = 415M.) miUierem : quid p6tius dicam aut v6rius quam millierem ? While with Cicero, Plato's (TimaeUS p. 41 C) Si' e/ioG Se ravra yev6fj.eva Koi f3iov fi,iTa(r-)(6vTa. 6€0i-- will J If (i.) soever lie is striking shalh (ii.) haply he-l or ybe rsmU^ ei or Vb I will J If he were to have , {this had ) If he were to have been striking, {this had been happening) D.— CONCLUSION 245. Such then, it is conceived, is the theory of the construction of Conditional Sentences in Greek and Latin : a subject requiring, no doubt, careful thought and consider- able attention on the part of one who would master it, but still not, in itself, so difficult or abstruse as the confused and vague explanations of most grammarians and teachers tend to make it. "And albeit," as Lord Coke^*^ — into the society of whose aquilae, however, the present writer would not for a moment presume to intrude his own passercuU et columluU 5*® — says of his own work, " albeit the reader shall not at any one day (do what he can) reach to the meaning ... of our commentaries, yet let him no way discourage himself, but proceed : for on some other day, in some other place, that doubt will be cleared." 246. If by the present essay and arrangement any step has been taken towards dispelling the mists which surround the subject with which they have to do, and towards the advancement of the philosophical study of the Greek and Latin languages, the main object of the writer will have been accomplished. NOTES A.— TO THE INTEODUCTION 1. 1. It seems unnecessary to prove by examples — which indeed are of everyday occurrence — the positions in paragraphs 3, 4, and 5 of the text. As to the various tenses, however, the J- Tenses. following remarks may be useful. 2. (a) Past time. (a) Past. (a) Perfect : Ajistot. 'AOrjv. iroXir. c. 4 a-m^kSoTO = " had been given," not (as Mr. Kenyon) "was given." Mr. Kenyon's note also, appended to c. 22, on the meaning of k^ui(Trpa.KUT[xkva's in Herod, viii. 79, equally wants correction. (/3) Imperfect : Thuc. iii. 1 7. 1 Kara rhv \p6vov ov at vijes eVAeov = " were sailing about," " were on their cruise," not (as Arnold) " when the ships sailed." ' (•y) Indefinite: Aristot. 'A^ryv. ttoXlt. c. 14 KaTecr;^£ = " got and kept." See the reason in Mr. Shilleto's note on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 388. 7 with reference to Thuc. vi. 11. 1 ; and compare Karkcrx^v in c. 15, and KaracrxovTes in c. 19, of Aristotle's treatise jtist mentioned. 3. (b) Present time. (J) Present. (a) Perfect : Cic. ad Fam. xii. 6. 2 qui si conservatus erit, vioimus = " we have already won the victory." Cf. vicistis in Livy xxi. 44. So in English : Quarterly Beview, vol. 176, p. 576 "If all Unionists . . . would only remember that our country is one worth fighting for, the battle would be won." ■ For a good example of the use In French of the imperfect tense to denote that which in the view of the speaker was likely to happen see Balzac, La Cousine Bette {(Eumes, Paris, 1869, x. 266), "Lisbeth triomphait done," etc. 286 GREEK AND LATIN i S—n-v (/3) Imperfect: Thuc. i. 121. 4 dAtcr/covTai = " they are on the way to be, are, will be, getting the worst of it." " Plat. Phaedr. p. 241 E rhv irorafjibv tovtov Sia^ds, d'irip)(^o[/,ai, irpiv wrb (tov ti jxei^ov dvay KaaOrjvai, = " I am on the go." ™ Thuc. vi. 20. 3 Itti as fj-dXiara irXeofJtev = " we are thinking of sailing "= the fjAXXoii-ev irXefv of o. 21. 2. Id. vi. 34 iiTToSei^cTai = " is ready to receive us." Ter. Eun. iv. 7. 41 quid nunc agimus ? = " what are we for doing?" "what shall we do?"— See Mr. Key's Latin Dictionary — a very mine of linguistic and philological wealth — s.v. Ago, 35. — Andr. ii. 1. 21 hodie uxorem ducis = "you are for marrying, intend- ing to marry." '^ Past indefinite. 4. Nor again does it seem necessary to gather together examples, equally of everyday occurrence, of the past indefinite, when it is used in closely approximated meaning to a present tense,^ by virtue of such an employment of the former, "ut" — to quote the words of Madvig, Opusc. Acad. Alt. pp. 113 sqq. " Almost as much of a future as the ,iieXeT-^cro/iei' which follows. So in i. 143. 6 7rpo(ra7r6XXuTai= " is on the way to be, will be, lost as well." So Marlowe says {Jew of Malta v. p. 174 b) " Whilst you give assault unto the walls, I I'U . . . I open the gates for you to enter in ; | and by this means the city is your own" ; Dekker (i. Honest Whore ad iin. p. 81, ed. Lond. 1873) "If you step one foot furder, you'll be overshoes . . ., and if you fall into this whirl- pool, where I am, -fare drowned " ; Suckling (Aglaura iv. 1) ",Your brother and myself, | . . . with some few chosen more, betimes will wait | the prince's passing through the vault ; if he | comes first, he's dead : and if it be yourself, | we will conduct you . ." ; Dryden (lAmberham iii. 1) "You shall read it .' . . he'll know my hand, and I am ruined " ; De Foe [Roxana p. 81, ed. Oxon. 1840) " Be easy, child ; I hope you shall not die, and all you have is your own, to do what with it you please." So, in French, we have Moliire [L' Amour Medecin ii. 4) "Si vous ne faites saigner tout-i-1'heure votre fllle, c'est une personne morte. D. Si vous la faites saigner, elle ne sera pas en vie dans un quart d'heure " ; Beaumarchais {Baa-Mer de Semite ii. 15) " Si vous m'approchez, je m!enfuis de cette maison, et je demands retraite au premier venu. B. Qui ne vous recevra point," Of. also infra, notes 47, 50. "i See Mr. Shilleto's note on Thuc. i. 127. 1. Add to the examples cited by him Plant. Mostell. 17 (ed. Ritschl) = i. 1. 17 in pistrinum hau sois aotiitum trAdier = " you do not realise that you are on the way to be, are being, will forthwith be, handed over." Compare in English, Shadwell, Bury Fair, iii. 1 "G. Then will I leave the Park. W. So will I and follow you to the Mall . . . (?. I'll soon shake you off and go to the Drawing-Room. ' W. No sooner there but I am with you." The past imperfect is correspondingly used. See Text' § 38 and note. " So in Turpil. Boethunt. 3 ' ' Eum d^repente diicere uxorem audio." Cf. Moli^re, Tartuffe, v. 3 " Je lui donne ma fiUe et tout le bien que j'ai." ' So closely, indeed, as (a) now, to be accompanied by it ; as in Hes. Op. 240 sq^. ; Aesch. Ag. 1191 ;,Simonid. Amorg. Fr. i. 18 : (6) now, to be followed, in a subordinate sentence, by a subjunctive belonging to present time ; as in Hom. II. iv. 485 sqq. 1 7— vi CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 287 See below, note 8, 2 — " ex re facta efficiatur sententia generalis, quum concludatur idem alias quoque fieri." 5. Of the present oblique moods of the same tense — as to which Madvig I.e. (p. 109) says: "Aoristus Graecorum indica- tivo modo praeteriti temporis est, extra indicativum et parti- cipium, omnino non magis praeteriti temporis quam praesentis propria forma est " — we have such examples as Hom. n. iii. 414 /u.ij . . . ere nedeiw | tws Se cr' d7rex^'^P*' = " lest I give you up and begin to hate you as much, etc." ; Thuc. vi. 63. 2 y vco/;i6v = " let us consider"; Plat. Protag. p. 333 B iJ,rj d7roKdjj,(j}/j.iv = "let us not begin to flag." Add iTTiav Ka/xy in Herod, iv. 68, ijv rts opyicry in Ar. Vesp. 223, and eiruSav . . . vTrepa-xy in Dem. c. Phil. iii. p. 128. 25, following on 6ws av (ru>^rjTai in line 22. 6. On the imitative usage by the Latins of their past indefinite tense as closely approximating in meaning to the present, see Madvig ubi supra, epitomised below, note 8, 2. 7. Of (c) the Future tenses we have : of the (c) Future. (a) Perfect : In Active form — Kexa-prjO-efiev in Hom. II. xv. 98. Tedvrj^w in various forms : as in Aesch. Agam. 1279 ; Ar. Nvh. 1436, Ach. 325, Vesp. 654 ; Plat. Gwg. p. 469 D. On these forms see Elmsl. ad Ar. 4cfc. 59*7 = 590 Dind. and Buttmann Irreg. 6h. Vbs. by Pishlake s.v. dv-qa-Km. IcTTrj^io in various forms : as in Eur. Iph. Aul. 675 ; At. Lys. 634 ; Thuc. iii. 37. 3.; 102. 7 ; Xen. Arvah. ii. 4. 5 ; Plat. Omviv. p. 220 D ; de Pep. ix. p. 587 B ; Dem. Lept. p. 468. 21. On these forms see Elmsl. ubi supra; John Wordsworth in Philol. Museum i. 233 sqq. ; and Buttmann I.e., s.v. ta-TrjiJi,i. In Middle form — Hom. II. V. 238 SeSe^oynai ; Ar. Ban. 258. 264 KeKpa^ofiecrOa . . . Ke/CjOa^o/tat ; Plat. Bep. iv. p. 421 E StSa^erat, etc. In Passive form, or meaning — Hom. II. viii. 353 KeKaSTja-ofieOa [fut. pf. pass, in meaning, as from KeKr]Sa = a present (cf. Tyrtae. 13. 28) "I am concerned for." See Buttmann ubi supra, s.v. K^So/tat] ; Od. xxiii. 266 Kexaprqa-erai ; Anacreon Fr. 77 dvap.iii.l^ovra.L ; Ar. Plvt. 1027 "^pafe koi Treirpd^irai. " (Add Id. il. 1200 ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. " " Speak and your desire shall have hecome an accomplished fact." I. Stronger still, perhaps, is Fletcher's "Say, 'tis done, boy" {Beggar's Bush, V. 1). ^. Less strong are St. Matthew viii. 8 "Speak but the word only, and 288 GREEK AND LATIN i 7 p. 364. 17 ; Soph. Oed. Col. 861.) Again Horn. II. xii. 345, xxi. 332. 585 TeTev^erai. ; Soph. Aj. 1141 reddif/iTai, 1368 KeKX-ja-erai. ; Id. Track. 587 Treirav- a-erai ; Ai. Lys. 1072 KeKXela-irai ; Id. Eqq. 1371 iyyeypd^eTai, (add Hippocr. rfe rai. ?)irt. in morh. acut. i. p. 391. ed. Foes. =ii. p. 50. 6. ed. Kuhn. For the mode generally adopted by the present writer in citing from the collection of writings usually printed together as forming the works of Hippocrates, see below, note 41a); Antipho de Herod. Caed. p. 138. 15 KeKtvSvvev(r£Tai (add Thuc. iii. 39. 9) ; Thuc. iii. 53. 5 AcAe^erat ; Xen. Anah. ii. 4. 5 XeXeitperai ; Plat. Bep. ix. p. 591 A KeKT^crerai ; Qorg. -p. 469 D Tedvri^eTaL . . . Kareayois cWat . . . SLe(T\urfj.evov 'iaraL ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 432. 17 ■^TifiuKrerai ; Auctor de Morh. Mul. in Hippocr. i. p. 607. F. = ii. p. 668. 1. K. KiKpvipiTai ; and so on. In Latin — Plant. Mostell. 590 R. = iii. 1. 62 Edddite argentum : abiero ; Verg. Georg. iv. 28 Si . . . sparserit, aut immerserit ; and so on. (fi) Imperfect (as to which tense in Latin see below, note I o) : Cic. in Gaecil. i. 1 probabit . . . putabit ; Verg. Georg. iii. 328 rumpent ; Ov. Fast. i. 123 misoebitur. (y) Indefinite: Ar. Fqq. 807 yvajo-erat; Dem. 01. i. p. 13. 12 (Ty^iqcrei,. 8. Again in other parts of the verbs, we find expressions like Imperative. 9. Imperative. (a) Perfect : Eur. Or. 489 ; Im, Fr. 7. 1, ed. Dind. = 421. 1 Nauck. KeKrrjcro. (/?) Imperfect : Ar. Plut. 113 7rp6o-e)(e Thv vovv= "give your continued attention." (y) Indefinite: Aesch. Ag. 1247 ei)<^7j^ov . . . Koifir^aov o-To/^a = " Ml it to silence"; Soph. El. 1011. 1013 KaTao-xe9 opy-qv . . . vovv (rxk = " put a restraint upon your anger, come to your senses " ; Proverb ap. Plat. Protag. p. 343 B (and see Phaedr. p. 229 E); my servant shall be healed " ; Herrick Ilesperides ii. p. 268 (ed. Grosart), To Anthea, "Speak thou the word, they'll kindle by and by" ; Henry Taylor Isaac Oomnenus ii. 2 "Speak but the word at once, the blow shall follow." Or again, Cent Nouvelles noimelles xx. " Dictes, pour Dieu, dit I'aultre et on luyfera" ; Laolos Les liaisons dangereuses xyi. "Dites un mot et ma felicity sera votre ouvrage." I 11 — vii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 289 Ar. Bhet. ii. 21. 13 ; Juvenal xi. 27 yvw^t acavrov = " examine yourself." And see below, note i, 15, /3, y. 10. Infinitive. (a) Perfect:^ Plat. Grito p. 46 A fte/iovXeda-eac . . . TreirpaxOaL ; Gmtyl. p. 384 B TrcTratSeCcr^at ; Protag. p. 351 B ySe^SiUKevai. Verg. Aen. x. 625 indulsisse ; Ov. Her. xiv. 4 sqq. fuisse . . . plactiisse ; Juv. iv. 36 dixisse. (/3) Imperfect : Thuo. i. 142. 3 Kal . . . rats vava-iv dij,vveo-6ac™ = "to continue our repelling them by sea." (y) Indefinite: Eur. JlfeA251 cnr^vai . . . reKetv = " to take my stand ... to bring fortb " ; Thue. i. 9. 2, vi. 14, and (in company with /3Aa^at = "to do an injury to ") vi. 69. 3 ; Plat. Timaeus, p. 46 E trxeiv = " to get, acquire " ; Thuc. vi. 9. 3 Karno-xeti' = " to establish a mastery over " ; vi. 40. 1 fxeracrxetv = " to get a share of" ; ii. 77. 3 iTrwrxe'v = " to reach to"; ii. 60. 5 yvtovac re to, Seovra Kal epfi,T)vevtrai ravra = " to recognise what is wanting, and to make that clear " ; vi. 37. 2 K/DttT'iJo-at = " to get the mastery over" ; Xen. Anah. vii. 7. 27, 28 KaraTrpaxd^vai = "to be done for you "... yevecrdat. = " to become yours "... Karao-xetv = "to get and keep the mastery" . . . Xa^eiv = " to take "... yevecrdai, = " to become " . . . TrAouT^o-at = " to get rich" . . . t^avijvat = " to appear before the world" . . . ftatriXeva-ai = "to become king." 11. Participle. (a) Perfect: Ar, Eqq. 1167 /xe/xay nevrjv . . . i/,ep,v(rTiXrj- /xevas, "kneaded . . . hollowed out"; Thuc. iii. 74. 3 Tov 8rinov KEKpaTTjKOTos = " haviug won the day " ; Plat. Apol. p. 39 E tov yeyovdros tovtovi Trpay/xaros = " which has happened" ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 343. 13 av . . . Sei^tti . . . Alcrx^vTjv . . . dTrrjyyeXKOTa . . . KeKiaXvKOTa . . . (TVjJbliefiovXevKOTa . . . TreiroiTjKOTa . . . dvrjXixiKOTa . . . elXyjcfioTa = " of having " — done all these things; p. 378. 12 ovS' 6 tl ixdXXov eV avTOcjiap(f SeSiopoSoKrjKor' oijtov /cat TmrpaKOTa TrdvT iAeXey^ei = "of having received bribes, of having betrayed"; p. 442. 7 o-e/xv&s ylyoi/as = " you have become "... yeypap.p,arevKivai, = " that he had ^" So Mr. Shilleto, with the remark — "far better than reading of the Venetian MS. i/xivao'Sai." U Infinitive. Participle. 290 GREEK AND LATIN > 11-viii-ix been a clerk" . . . dvecnraKi = " he has drawn up" . . . o yiypafi[j.aT£VKibs Akrx^vrjS = " Mr. Ex - clerk Aeschines"'™ . . . KaKus . . . d/c'ijKoevat = " that he has been slandered." (/3) Imperfect: Soph. Oed. Tyr. 323 aTroo-repwv = " trying to withhold" (of. Dem. de Fals. Leg. p.^ 442. 1); Ar. Eqq. 462 Te/cTaii/o/ieva . . . yoiJL(f>oviJ.ev . . . KoXXii- /ieva = "as they were being framed, nailed together, glued"; which words are followed hy^(v. 468) /cat ravT €' oio-i'v ecm (Tvjj,4'vcr(j>jx€va | cyfjiS • ewi yap rots SeSe/itvots x"'"^" ^''^•^"•' = " ^^7 ^^^ *^i^ i® ^'^^'^S welded together . . . this is being forged . . . those who have been put into prison"; 479 raK BomtQv TavTa a-vvTvpoviJ,eva = " all this which is being churned together"; 863 ^wto-Ta/t€i/ov =" which is getting up" ; Ach. 547 fiUrOov SLSofievov, HaXXaSiwy XjOiJcoii- fieviov, I (TToia'S cn€va.)(OvcTriiJ.ev t5 (iv7] = " they exist . . . whence they came " ; Xen. Oeconom. x. 8 tj yap . . . aXicr- KOVTai . . ., rj . . . eXkyxovrai, rj . . . (iaa-avi^ovTai, ri . . . KaroiirTevdrjarav — " their case is one of being either caught or proved or tortured, or they are discovered." 294 GREEK AND LATIN ' l^- Imperative. 15. Imperative. {j8) Imperfect: Sopt. Aj. 371 wei/cc = " yield " (continued act), Koi p6vr)iTov ev = " come to jour senses " (single act) ; Eur. Hipp. 473 Xrjye = "he ceasing," /tcv kukQv ^peviav, I X^£ov S' v/Spi^ovcr' = "put a stop to your haughty temper"; Lysias c. Eratosth. p. 129. 35 Trava-ofiai KartjyopCiv. dxij/cdaTe, kiapaKan, imrov- Oare, ^X^Te, SiKa^ere = " I will cease in my accusation. You have heard, you have seen, you have suffered, you have caught him. Judge him"''; Dem. de Fals.Leg. p. 343. 22 av Se p.r] Sei^cu . . ., jyeicrOe, . . . ac^ere = "if I shall not have-shown (single act) look upon me (continued act) ... let him go free (single act) " ; Lept. p. 483. 17 a-KoireiTe . . . Aoyio-aa-^£ = " revolve in your minds (continued act) . . . form an opinion^' (single act) ; p. 494. 17 jui) Toivvv . . . Ikcivovs aKJiaipov, St,' a 8' . . ., Tovo-Se . . . TOVT 4<^cA»; = "do not go in for depriving them (continued act) ; once for all (single act) deprive these men of this." (y) Indefinite : Aesoh. Prom. F. 783 deXrjcrov p.r]8' a,Tift.afTrii koyov = " come to a willingness : do not leave un- heeded"; of. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 649 tviBov 6leA7jo-as povrj(Ta) (iovXeTaL ovTia KaKws (^povrjuai = " to entertain such foolish ideas," /cat woxctptous riixiv yeve(r6aL = "to hecome," evOdSe eX66vTas = "coming," ■!) SetAds Icttiv rj ry TroXei ovk eiVovs. Infinitive. le. Infinitive. (p) Imperfect : Thuc. vi. 23. 3 on eXaxtcrTa rfj rvxy irapaSov's ijiavThv povXa/jLai (KTrXeiv = " to pursue my voyage," irapaa-Kevy Se d:ro twv e'lKoriav dcr^aXijs eKirXevcrai = " to leave harbour." C£ vi. 18. 4 d 86^ojj,€v -iiTTc/DiSovTCS rijv 6V Tij) TTapovTi rjcrvx^o,'" Kit lirl "SiKeXiav iKTrXevcrai ; vii. 67. 4 tV rj jiiacrdfievoi Alfieri: his " Compare, for the sentiment, with this passage of Lysias the fine passage in terseness. Alfieri Filippo ii. 5 " F. Udisti? G. Udii. F. Vedesti? G. lo vidi. F. Oh rabbia ! | Dunqne il sospetto ? . . . 6. il omai certezza . , . F. 'E inulto | Filippo k ancor ! G. Pensa . . . F. Pensai. — Mi segui. " And for a further example of Alfieri's use of a corresponding terseness of expression, his Antigone iv. 1 " C. Scegliesti? A. Ho soelto. 0. Emon? A. Morte. C L'avrai." I 16— xi-xii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 295 cKTrAeTJo-ioo-iV rj . . . ; Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 29 aTreTrXeva-e = "set sail for," trap Evayopav eis KvTrpov; et e contra ii. 2. 1 ewXei iirl to BufavTiov = " sailed on his way to'""; Xen. Mem. ii. 2. 3 eM/at . . . i8e?v . . . fj.£T(w)^elv . . . Tra,pk\ovai. = " to .exist . . . look upon . . . acquire a share in . . . are in the habit of supplying." (y) Indefinite : Soph. Oed. Tyr. 622 rt Sijra xraf^'s J ^ /"^ yijs e^d) /3a\eTv = " to cast me forth " (single act), 0. ■i]KUTTa. ^vijo-KEiv = " to be now dying" (continued act),"" oi5 vy€Lv o-e = "to betake yourself to exile" ^^ The imperfects denote the continuance of the voyage after its first com- mencement ; the indefinites the commencement itself. Query, therefore, Mr. Shilleto's (ad Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 443. 13) translation of the passage from Thuc. vi. 23. 3 here cited, viz. "to commence the voyage ... to finish the voyage," with the explanatory addition, "the secmity could only be attested hy tl[is result or completion of the act." In Thuc. viii. 46. 3, on the other hand — koI oi)/c ekds etfat AaKeSai/ioHovs aTi /iev (rwv tQiv 'EXX'^I'Ui' i'KevBepoSv vvv toi>s "BXXijcas, iirb S' iKelvoiv ruv ^app&poiv . . . p,'^ i'KevbepQicra.i — he in the same note well translates, "to be constantly engaged in the liberation, and not to apply the principle in liberating " ; and in Dem. de Fals. Leg. 443. 13 (on which his note is written) el jxh yhp TTpoad^^aLTo ^WK^as aufifidxovs . . ., el d^ fj.Tj irpoffS^xoiro = " in case he should receive the Phocians into alliance . . . but if he were loth to receive them." ^i I. SctJo'/cu = " I am dying : am yielding up the ghost" — a continued act. Sv^itku and its Examples in addition to that given above are to be found in Simonides Ceus tenses. Fr. 95 ; Find. 01. ix. 35 ; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 118 ; PhU. 1084 (dXXd /ioi | Kal Bvri(rKOVTi. crvvoiirei. = "even in the throes of death." Schafer (on Theocr. Epigr. vii. 2 and Bion i. 14) is in error in seeking to malie Bvi}aKovTi, here = Bavbyn, and Bv6,(TKovT in the passage of Bion — dXX' oix olSev "ASavis 8 /uv Buda-Kovr' i(pl\a ^an reBviivai xp("'Oi, | t'^l^ev S' dpie/M? traOpa [ical] KaKus Irea. (^) T^BvriKa = practically #Sacoy : Plat. Crito p. 43 C t6 irXoTov diKo/j.^i'ov TeBvi-vai. ij.e ; cf. Buttm. Irreg. Gk. Vbs., s.v. SviiffKa. Stallbaum ad I. refers to Plat. Apol. p. 30 C, and on that passage, again, to Plat. Crito, p. 52 C (a passage as to which, as Buttmann {I.e. ) says, " it is clear that we must not force" redvivai "to mean to ie dead") ; Apol. pp. 38 E, 39 E, 41 A ; Dem. de Reb. Gliersones. p. 102. 5 ; repeated c. Phil. iv. p. 138. 7. He also compares Dem. de Cor. p. 301. 2 ; and he would have in such passages TeSiidvaL considered as used for BvriaKeiv, instead of, as Buttmann says, for 6aveZv. But query ? 6. In Eur. Oresphont. Fr. 13. 3, Dind., we have the two tenses side by side— rbv d' a5 BaubpTO. Koi irbvuv we-n-a.vii.iv on. Cf. Soph. El. 554. 932 toO TcdprjKSTOs ; and, in point of fact, ridv-qKa generally has its own proper perfect meaning. See for examples the Scolion in Bergk's Poet. Lyr. Gr. p. 1020, ed. 2, Fr 10 • Soph. PMl. 1030 ; Eur. Cresphont. Fr. 10, Diud. ; Plat. Apol. p. 28 D ■ Dem' Mid. p. 573. 12. j^ e , 7. In Simonides Ceus Fr. 96. 3 either tense has its proper meaning— oiiS^ Teevani, BavbvTes, iwel (T dper't} KaOiirepSai \ KvSalvom' dvdyei. dii/iaros i^ 'AiSeui = " nor are they in a state of death though they have-passed through death." ' 18 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 297 p. 99 B Ttt Sd^avTa yuot = " what seems good to me " ; Herod, vi. 129 Karexfov . . . €7r«rxdivT , Pind. Nem. xi. 30 ; i'0(r(l>UTSel5, Hom. Od. xi. 73 ; (^Stj, Lys. c. Philon. p. 189. 8 ; Arist. Eth. Nic. ill. 2 (= 1. 17) ; KaTifKrluBiiv, Eur. Iph. Aul. 686 ; iTro\i.TeiB-riv, Thuo. vi. 92. 3 ; Arist. 'ABt/v. ttoXit. oc. 23. 33 (but in c. 40 we have Tro\iTei(Tav. (y) /ivpiot : Eur. Cresphont. Fr. 1 0. 2 Dind. iMvpiat. \ rhv avrhv i^-qvTXrjirav (1)9 cyw fSlov. (S) TrXcfcTTOt : Thuc. ii. 38. 1 tuv irdvwv TrAeio-ras dva- TraijAas ry yvd/J.^ hropuTap,(.da. (e) o^Seis : Hyperid. Orat. Fwmbr. ooL 9, 1. 34 ovSefiia yap crrpaTeia rrjv crTpaTevopAvuiv ap^Trjv ivecfxivLcyev fiaX- Xov TTj'S vvv yeyevyjjxevrj^. (f) General expressions of time : Soph. El. 783 ■^p^p'^ yap rfjS' dirrjXXdyrjv s TijorS' Ikclvov 6' ; Eur. Antiop. Fr. 45 Dind. = 212 Nauck Ik KaX- Atdvmv I AeKTpots ev alarxpok etSoi' eKTrewXriypevovs, I Satrbs Se TrXrjpaiOeis tis atr/ievos TrdXiv | cjiavXrj SiaiTTj irpoo-paXiiv rjcrdrj (XTopa ; Anaxilas "i^eoTT. Fr. i. 1 0(rT69 dvOpwirmv kraipav ■^yaTrrjO'e Tranrore. {rj) iroXXd, TToXXaKi? : S6ph. El. 603 ov iroXXa Sij /xe crot rpe^jyeiv pidcTTopa | jTrgrtacru ; Id. i6. 520. Hesiod, Op. 240 7roAA,aKt Kat ^v/JLiracra ttoXis /caKou dvS/3&s aTfi^vpa (past imperfect in past indefinite mear^ing) ; Theogn. 855 ; Simmias Thebanus Fr. i. 3; Isocr. Panegyr. p. 41 a (jroXXdKcs i6avpMa-a = "l often have-wondered." Cf. Ben Jonson Volpone i. 1 " I oft have heard him say, how he admired | men of your large profession," etc.) ; Thuc. vi. 38. 4. {&) ■qSrj, etc. : Eur. Med. 92 tjStj yap eiSov ; Lys. Or. xxx. p. 183. 4; Plat. Thmet. p. 149 A; Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 35, L 14 Sis rjSTj . . . i^rjXey^a. Horn. II. i. 260 rjSij yap ttot iyw . • . | ojpiXrjcra . . . I ov yap TTO) TOiovi iSov dvepa's, k.t.X. ; Xen. Mem. iv. 3. 3 ; Amphis TvvaLKop. Fr. i. 1. Plat. Rep. vi. p. 493 D -rjErj TruiroTe tozi ^KO-ucras ; See others in the note of Blmsley just referred to, and see also the notes of Poppo on Thuc. i. 123. 1, and Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. ii. 34. 10. In Herod, vii. 144 ixprjudTjtrav = "were not used"; XPV^^V i^ Dem. Mid. p. 520. 1 = "is in use" ; and t6 SLa.voT)0iv in Plato Legg. ii. p. 654 C = "what Is conceived of." 4. See generally on the subject Archdeacon Hare, On certain Tenses attributed to the Greek Verb, in Philol. Museum ii. pp. 221. 222. I 21— XV CONDITIOKAL SENTENCES 301 (i) irioTTOTE : Plat. Theaet. -p. 1 44 A &v Srj irioiroTe iviTvxov — Kai -jravu TroXAots TreTrXrjo-iaKa (note the change of tense) — oiiSeva ttco ycrOo/irjv ovTOi Oavfiao'TZ's eS irefjiVKOTa ; Hyperid. c. Philipp. 11. 116 sqq. (k) o-uttote, etc. : Eur. Tro. 4 e^ oB yap . . . | . . ., ovTror Eupolis IIoA.. Fr. 26 rjv oi5k dvecjj^a ttcuttot' a.vdpdiroL's €y(u ; Alexis Qpdcrwv Fr. i. 1. Andoc. (ie Myst. p. 4. 21 Xdyov dvoa-Lun-epov . . . ouSevas irunroT eyo) etVovras ojSa (of. in Latin Naevius Fr. Inc. {Trag.) 61 n^minem vidi qui numero sciret quique scito opust) ; Dem. Mid. p. 534. 21 ; Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 38, 1. 17 ; Orat. Funeir. col. 8, 1. 32. (A.) 17(0, etc. : Ar. Thesm. 434 ovtto} raijTijs y^Kovcra | iroXv- irXoKUnkpa^ yvvaLKOs. ThvLC. iii. 45. 1, 2 o-uSeis ttu . . . ^Xdev. iroAts re dfjacTTapAvri tis ttcu . . . towtij) iTre)(eipricre ; 21. But this, by no means to the total exclusion of other ■ But other tenses tenses ; as e.g. a™ also used. (a) The present imperfect : Tragious Incertus Fr. 57 :roAAots 6 Sat/iojv ... I p-eydka StSwcrtv ^vTvxf^p-o-r' ; Theognis 972 TToAAaKi roi vlk^ Kal kukos dvSp' dyaOov ; Plat. Meno p. 89 E ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 343. 1 ; Hom. Od. ii. 118 ol' ov TTU) Thv aKovopev ovSe TraAatSv. In Latin Accius Diomed. 278 multa Amittuntur tarditie et soc6rdia. (J3) The past imperfect : Theocr. xxvii. 22 ttoAAoj p' epvwoVTO.^^ (y) The present perfect : Eur. Med. 349 alSovpevos Se TroAAa Srj Ste9opa ; Plat. Apol. p. 28 A ; Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 47, 1. 1. Aeschin. c. Timarch. p. 13. 12 ttoAAoiis yap rJSrj eywy' eVayxos TedeiLpyjKa . . . dAovras ; Xen. Anab. iii. 1. 38 ; Plat. Phaedon p. 61 C. Hippocr. de rat. vict. in morh. acut. i. p. 403. F. = ii. p. 88. 8. K. TToAAdiKis yap pepadr/Ke ; Auotor de Garnib. in Hippocr. i. p. 253. F. = i. p. 439. 5. K. ; Plat. Apol. p. 31 C; Theaet. p. 158 B; Dem. Androt. p. 595. 13; Theophrast. wepl irepbepyCa?. X' "On ^ade, Theocr. 27. 22" — in the words vSof d' ifiiv ofris ?a5e, whioh Theoor. 27. 22. immediately follow those cited above — "suspected as to tense, quantity, and accent, I can," says Buttmann, Irreg. Ok. Vbs. s.v. ii.vSi.vo>, "come to no decision." The aorist is ?a5oc with the a short ; the present perfect iaSa with the a long. Each has the initial aspirate. 302 GREEK AND LATIN i 21— xvi-xix Plat. Cratyl. p. 403 B iroWaxq e/^otye SoKova-iv qi avOptowoi Stij/iapnjKcvai. Theognis 647 rjSrj vvv atSois jJ-hi hi avdpwTroicrbv oXtoAcv, I avrap k.t.X. ; Plato (Comicus) Aa.Ka>v. Ft. i. 1 ; Thuo. ii. 35. 1 (ubi vid. SHUeto) ; ii. 46 ; Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 31 ; Plat. Bep. i. p. 329 B ; Cratyl. p. 384 B ; Protag. pp. 313 B, 350 B. Alexis Fr. Inc. 3 kopaKas ituttote | ijvvcrTpov ccrKevaa-- /ievov;^" Hyperid. pro Lycophr. col. 14 tZv TnairoO' iTrTrapyr^KOTiiiV. Plat. Protag. p. 313 B ov oiVe yiyvuo-Kets . . . oiiTe StetAe^at oijSe 7ra>7roT£ ; Symp. p. 220 A liaKpariq fiedvovra ovSeh TTunroTe eoipOLKei, dvdpwTruiv ; Protag. p. 310 E ; Xen. Mem. ii, 1. 31 ; Dem. Mid. p. 535._^ 17. ^ ^ Plat. Gorg. p. 448 A ovSel's /xe ttw rjpaiTrjKe Kaivov ovdilv ■KoXkuiV 6TMV. Theophrast. Tnpl [x.ep.xpi.p.oipia'i : dW ov Orja-avphv evprjKa OvSiTTOTe. 22. Mixtures of tenses we have in such passages as Eur. Med. 293 ov vvv fie Trpwrov, dXXa irokXaKii, Kpeov, \ ej3Xaxj/e So^a jj,iydXa -r (.Ipyasnai ku.k6, ; Theophrast. iripi XoyoTTOitas : ■koXXo.ki^ yap avrZv ol /xev . . . dirqfiepXrj- Koo'iV ot 8e . . . to0Ai)Kao"U' ■ elo'l S' o? Kai . . . -rrapeSei- Trv-qdrjorav. Soph. Aj. 1142 sqq. ■tjSrj ttot etSov dvSp' . . . | T. Jyo) 81 y' avSp' OTrwTra . . . Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 405. 20 ovhlv yap ttwttot' ovt' ■^viox- Xr](Ta ovre p,rj l3ovXojji,ivovs vp-as ^e/JtacTjuat.^™ Aeschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 39. 44 1^ &v "'" avrovs dvyp-qKacn TtveSj ol Se Kal hy)po(ri(i, IreAeuTTjcrav. And again, in Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 400. SO,'^'' and Hyperid. p-o Euxenipp. col. 32, 11. 25 sqq., we have the present imperfect also taking its share in the variations. Latin. 23. In Latin the identity of form of the present perfect and the past indefinite (posui) renders discrimination between them ^"i The reading is somewhat uncertain in some respects (see Meineke ad I.), but not in those for which it is above cited. See Pors. Advers. p. 54 ; Dobree Advers. ii. 297. 3^™ There is some authority for the reading i^iaa-d/MTiv as that of the last word; but as Mr. Shilleto says (Annot, Grit, ad 1.), " i^Mad/irjv si in eadem clausula qua irtinroTe positum esset recte se haberet : quo autem ordine coUocatur verbum, ^e/3iacr/tat praeatat." See also his note on Thuc. ii. 62. 1. ="i'' On ^1 S;/ =" proceedings the result of which has ere now been that, etc.'' see note 75 (5) below. 5^'" The readings vary a little, but not importantly for the present purpose. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 303 for the present purpose impracticable. For example, wlien Plautus says {Mostell. 157. E. =i. 3. 1) "jam pridem ecastor frlgida non Mvi magis lub^nter," it is impossible to say whicli tense lavi is. 24. In English -we get similar variations. English. Thus while we have in 1 Kings X. 12 ("there came no such almug trees nor were seen unto this day ") ; Shaksp. Henry V. iv. 7 (" I was not angry ") ; Ant. and Cleop. i. 3 (" I did not see him ") ; Duke of Buckingham The Rehearsal iv. 2 ("this is that I never yet saw any one could write but myself") ; Shirley Hyde Park iii. 2 (" I never | did violate an oath in all my life") ; Sheridan The Duenna ii. 2 ("such as I never saw"); Wordsworth Westminster Bridge (" never ^aw I, never felt ") uses of the past indefinite tense, we have the more usual present perfect in Psalm xxxvii. 25 (Bible version) "I have been young and now am old, yet have I not seen the righteous forsaken " ; Sackville Ferrex and Porrex iv. 2 " how oft have I beheld . . ." ; Duke of Buckingham The Rehearsal i. 1 "I have ever observ'd that your grave lookers are the dullest of men '' ; Sedley Bellamira iii. 1 init. " I have observ'd it ever " ; Shirley Hyde Park ii. 3 " I have kissed ladies before now." But the Prayer Book version in the first of these last passages gives us the past indefinite, " yet saw I never." And Sedley in the same play as is already mentioned gives us (i. 1 init.), "I ever told you, this woman would be the ruin of you." 25. In French we have the past indefinite in passages like French. Cent Nouv. nouv. xx. "t'a il rien fait? . . . II ne me toucha oncques." Eeine de Navarre, Heptam. v. 47 " c'est la personne que je vis oncques . . . ou ma fantaisie s'adonneroit aussi peu." la. For example : " I ate my dinner '' is a single act la. Single acts marked as to the time of its occurrence by no reference to any ^^'^^^^ byTefer^ other event or circumstance ; " I ate my dinner yesterday, when euce to other he came in " is so marked. events. So— 2. "Have done"; "be " Have done " (Shaksp. Rape of Lucrece 640 sqq. ; Marston The gone" ; "bo Malcontent v. 3) ; "I ha' done then " (Middleton and Rowley ruled," etc. 304 GREEK AND LATIN 2 Tlie Changeling v. 1) ; " will you never have done ? " (Dryden Moch Astrologer iii. 1). Shaksp. Trail, and Cressid. iii. 3 " to have done, is to hang | quite out of fashion, like a rusty mail | in monumental mockery." " Be gone " (Marlowe Edward II. p. 202 a etc. ; Dekker Honest Whore pt. i. 1. 5; Sedley The GrumUer ii. 1 etc.); "we will be gone " {Return from Parnassus pt. ii. : v. 4 = line 2190) ; "HI be gone" (Marlowe Jew of Malta iv. p. 169 a) ; " to be gone " {Return from Parnassus pt. ii. : iv. 2 = line 1678). " Be ruled " (Shaksp. Hamlet i. 4 ; K. Lear ii. 3 ; Venus and Adonis 673 ; Marston The Malcontent v. 3 ; Day Humour out of Breath ii. 1 ; Barry Ram Alley v. 1, etc.) ; "you will | be ruled by me " (Shirley Hyde Park i. 1). '■ Be hanged " (Massinger and Dekker Virgin Martyr iv. 2 ; Middleton and Rowley The Changeling ii. 1). " Be lift up " (Psalm xxiv. 7, 9). "Be removed": "be cast" (St. Matth. xxi. 21; St. Mark xi. 23). " Be you joined " (Shirley Lady of Pleasure ii. 1) — all denote single acts. English trans- Face then Dr. Kennedy {Journal of Classical and Sacred lation of the past Philology i. p. 317 — if indeed that accorded with the fruits of his ripest scholarship: see his translation of Plat. Theaet. p. 163 E) and the Eevisers of the Authorised Version of the New Testa- ment (the magnificent English of which they have, in the present writer's judgment, so ruthlessly as well as so unnecessarily debased), English phrases such as "I had placed," "I have placed," when used as expressive of indefinites, are not only the proper representatives of, but are actually the same idiom as, the Greek eWiyo-tv, the past indefinite. Horn. II. V. 127. So the passage cited long ago by Dawes (Miscell. Crit. pp. 85. 86; see also Monk on Eur. Hipp. 1298—1293 ed. suae, and Mr. Tate in Mus. Crit. i. 524 sqq.) yiz. — Horn. II. v. 127 dx^-w 8' aS Toi dir 6da\ixS)V 'iXov, ■ . • | op eS yiy vwctkijs = " I have- taken away, in order that you may distinguish " ; while Plato's {Alcib. Secund. p. 150 D) reported form of the same sentence &s irep T Ato/x^jSet (f>T](j-l tyjv Adrjvav O/J^ripo? dirh tQv 6(j)6aXfiS)v depoi€v, I OLoi vvv /SpoToC dor' = "could possibly carry"^; Theognis 885 e;^ot . . . 6<^jOa . . . | Ki!ip.a.^oip,i = " may it possess, so that, if such were the case, I might possibly revel " ^^ ; Xenophanes Fr. 2 "^ So also II. XX. 285 sqq. So, too, Ctesias Indica c. 6. ed. Bahr /cdXo/Kos . . . , Trdxos fJi^v 6aof 5iio difSpe TrepLwpyvtojfJi^voL fi6\Ls TrepLKd^oLev * t6 5^ ii^os 6(7 ov K.T.\. E contra, and as showing the difference made by the insertion of &v, Horn. II. i. 271 Kelvoun S' &v oil Tis \ tuv ot vvv pporol elaiv iirix^ovioi /tax^oiTO = " would contend (so. if the necessity for fighting arose). " Cf. below in this note, extr. xxl E contra, Hom. Od. xviii. 202 aWe . . . irdpoi . . . \ . . .,iva . . \ . . . 0Sic()9(<)=" would that she would provide, so that I may." S 1— xxii-xxv CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 307 ol K€tfj,'jXLov dr) = " might possibly be " ; Find. 01. iii. 45 K£tv&s iir}v = " I might possibly be foolish (sc. if I did so) " ; Aesch. Ag. 348 kXvoi's = " you might possibly hear ^ (so. if you cared to listen)"; ih. 1049 -irddoi' av £1 TrdOoL [of. v. 1394 X'^^po'-^' «" «' x^'P"'^'] aTreidoirji 8 ' ftrws = " you would obey, if you were (wise enough) to obey, but possibly you might refuse " ; Cho. 594 aX\' wre/aToA/iOV dv- | Sphs (jipovrjfia rts A£yot;=''who could possibly tell ? " '"'" Soph. Oed. Tyr. 936 rb S' eiro5, ou^epfi Ta^a, | i^'Soto /ici/, ttcos S' ovK av, d TovvdevSe ye ;= " what could I possibly do ? " =™^ Eur. Iph. Aul. 1215 SaKpva irapk^m • ravra yap Svvaip,e6a = " this much I might possibly be able to contribute"^" ; Thuc. i. 143. 1 eire . . . TretpoivTO = " whether they might possibly attempt" ; Xen. Mem. iv. 3. 8 ev6a &v fidXixTTa ijjitas li^eAotT; = " he might possibly help us" ; Cyr. i. 4. 14 ottus cKao-ros KpaTurra SuvatTo = "as each might possibly be able to do " ; Plat. Gorg. p. 492 B ri . . . kAkiov eirj ; = " what could possibly be worse ? " Phaedon p. lOV A ovk otSa els ov rivd rts aWov Kaiphv dva/3dXXoiTo rj rbv vvv Trapovra = " could possibly be for putting oflf" ; Euthyd. p. 296 D ovk e'xft) . . . TMS dp,uTl3r)To'i,riv = " how I could possibly gainsay you." So in English — English. Psalm Ixiii. 3 " thus have I looked for thee in holiness, that I might behold thy power and glory" = "that I might possibly behold" ; cxviii. 13 "thou hast thrust sore at me that I might fall " = " might possibly fall" ; cxlv. 11 "they show the glory of thy kingdom ; and talk of thy power ; ^1 Porson {Advers. p. 160) inserted hv before &i>8p6s, correcting the strophe at the same time, with Heath. Quite unnecessarily, as Hermann (App. ad Viger. p. 767) pointed out. But why should the latter go on to doubt the same con- struction in* Herod, iii. 127 i/iiwv Si) S>v ris /xoi 'Opohea ^ fiiovra Ayiyoi. f) diroKTfivHe ? Translate " who might possibly bring or kill ? " xxiil Brunck alters rdxa into rdx ^"i " contra omnes codd. et Eustathium p. 737. 6," as Elmsley, who nevertheless follows him, admits. Dindorf retains rdxa, but, following the old editors, puts a full stop after it, and construes dffxdWoi-s with an dc, " quae ex parenthesi irfis d' oix &v ; est repetenda " ; as Blomfield would in like manner have spirited up an &v for direi6olr)S in Aesch. Ag. 1049 just cited " ex priore sententiae membro." This is all mere beating of the air. xxiv s^t' s,ii Schafer by mere conjecture. XXV Unnecessarily Porson Advers. p. 255 Swal^eB' dv. 308 GREEK AND LATIN 5 1 — xxvi-xxvii New Testament Revisers. that thy power, thy glory, and mightiness of thy kingdom might be known unto men"; St. Luke xvi. 27 "I pray thee . . . that thou wouldest send " = " wouldest possibly send " ; Acts ix. 2 " he hath seen . . . Ananias putting his hand upon him that he might receive his sight " ; 1 Pet. iii. 9 " ye are thereunto called, that ye should inherit a blessing " ; etc. The use is one of the " pet aversions " of our prosaic and purist New Testament Revisers, who, as a rule, wherever they can, abolish it, if they cannot get round it. Instances may be Hiatus. St. Luke X. 2 ; St. John v. 34 ; vi. 28 ; x. 10, 17 ; xiv. 29 ; xvi. 33; Acts xx. 24; xxii. 14; Eom. vi. 16; 1 Cor. ix. 23 ; Col. i. 9 ; ii. 2 ; iv. 3, 8 ; 1 Thess. iv. 1. Oddly enough, in 1 John iv. 9 they do exactly the reverse ; turning the Authorised Version's " in this was manifested the love of Grod toward us, because that God sent his only begotten Son into the world, that we might live through him," into "was . . . manifested . . . that God hath sent . . ., that we might live." (y) Indefinite : Find. 01. x. (xi.) 2 1 SiaXXd^acvro = "could possibly change"; Aesch. Prom. V. 292 vet/iatju,' = "I could possibly assign" ; Ag. 620 ki^a.ifjLi= "I could possibly call" ; ih. 1163 veoyvh's avOpiiyirbiv /^a^ot = " a child might under- stand it"; ib. 1374 ttus yap Tts . . . | (j)pd^iiev; = "could one possibly fence ? " Cho. 172 oijk eo-rtv ocrns 7rX.rjv €/j.ov KCipaiTO viv = " no one could possibly cut it but myself""" ; Suppl. 20 Ttva o-Si/'™™ x'"P'*'' e'i'^pova XXVI " But I did not out it ; therefore the person who did out it must have been Orestes " is the implied deduction. i/xoO is unohjectionable as the reading. xxvii go the MSS., notwithstanding the hiatus. See a similar hiatus — H oSv — in Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 704, Ar. Plut. 9i. 1155, Lys. 906 ; rl oi in Plato (Comicus) AdKw Fr. i. 2 ; H; iKclrovi in Eurip. Antiop. Fr. A (in Sermathena, no. xvii. p. 41); ri er' in Ar. Plut. 1161; ri i(TTi. in Herodas v. 10 ; H, c5 in Ar. Lys. 891, Eubul. AiSyi) Fr. i. 1 ; e5 olS' in Ar. Lys. 154, Menand. H\6k. Fr. ii. 7. In Eur. Ion 175, 176 we have the first line ending with 7rot8oi)p7ei, and the second beginning with ij, which Dr. VerraU thinks defensible on the ground of the break of continuity of the sentence between the two lines. Query, however, if reason were wanted, whether that alone would sufBce. In Ar. I^iA. 1347 i!)s oStos, d /iij ry TciroWa, oix &p ^v \ oStus &K6\aa-Tos is apparently the reading, even if not the meaning, of the Eavenna MS. But perhaps it ia better to read with Dawes (^Misc. Grit. p. 231) irewoWecv. See below, note 7, 5 {a). On a hiatus after a vocative, as in Soph. Oed. Col. 188, 189 Trai, \ tv li,v . . . ; Ar. iVJtZi. 1165 il ircu, e^e\8' ofeuc ; see Elmsl. ad Soph. I.e. On Ar. Lys. 945 i-yadiv • fo ailr' u Saiiwvla, see Elmsl. ad Soph. Oed. Ool. 1192. S]l— xxviii-xxx CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 309 ^aAXov 1^ T^o-S' a^MKOLfxsOa; = " could we possibly come ? " i6. 727 to-tos . . . /tdAot = " might possibly come"; Soph. Oed. Gol. 205 riva \ a-ov Trarpt'S' kKirv6oijj.av; = "could I possibly learn J'"^'™! ih. 1172 xj/e^aifii^"! could possibly blame" ; El. 799 dwoa-TeixoLfjt,' civ ... | K.JJKurr' • iireiwep ovt' ifwv Kara^ttos | irpd^eias ovre rov TTopevo-avTOi ^evov = "joTi would possibly act" — KaTa^tcos idly corrected into Kara^i' dv ; Ant. 604 reav, Zeu, SrvvaxTiv rk dvSpSiv \ v-inp/iaa-ta Karda-xoi ; = " could possibly get and keep under control"; Aj. 921 cus aK/taios, el J3ai7j, fwXoi = " how timely would he possibly come, if he were to come at all ! " (rather than with Elmsley Mus. Grit. i. p. 367 "if he comes at all, I wish that he may come in time," or with Mr. Shilleto " if it should turn out that he do come, that," etc. It is perhaps needless to add that the passage is a happy hunt- ing ground for the critics) ; Eur. Ale. 52 /ioAoi = " could possibly come"; ih. 114 TrapaXvo-ai = " one might possibly release " ; Iph.Tawr. 1055 t'o-ms . . . o-v/i/3at-)y = "might perhaps possibly turn out" ; El. &Q fiterepxafiai, I ... (OS v^piv Sei^cofiev Alytcrdov ^eots, | yootis t' a(f>eirjv ^^^ aWep' Is jxiyav TraTpi= " I frequent in order that I may show, and that possibly I might give vent to"^™; At. Eqq. 1057 dXX.' ovk av fiaxea-airo • ;^€o-aiTO ^^™" Hy &v Vauvilliers ; but, as Elmsley says, " particulam omittunt MSS. omnes, nt impressi." Vauvilliers had a strongly developed av mania in such cases. In Soph. Oed. Ool. 42 t&s Trdv8' opiiiras E^/teciSas S y h0&S' &v \ eliroi Xecis ^11/= "might possibly call," he suggested av for &v — this time, not only against all the MSS., but against also Suidas s.v, vlv and Eustathius, p. 763. 37, who in fact reads 8 y ivOdd' &v \ elirri \eiis. And in Soph. Oed. Col. 1418 ttws yap a^dis ad ttAXlv | (rrpdrevfi ayoifu rairbv elffdira^ Tpiffai; as aU the MSS. have it — "how could I possibly bring?" — Vauvilliers would again foist in his S,v, turning out oS in order to find room for it. In this instance he has companions in Toup, who would read dyoin' S,v ; Person, who {Advers, p. 315) preferred Ayoiiu TaiSr' &v, or else (in the previous line) a8Sis &v irdXiv ; Elmsley, who read ir& S' &v aSSis ai irdXiv. In Soph, Oed. Col. 70 Up' oiv (not &v) tis aircp iri/iTros If v/idv /u6\oi ; is the reading commended to us by all the best MSS., including Laur. A. — "would it be possible that a messenger should come?" xxix "Palmaria Seidleri emendatio" for the d^ilriv of the Books, says Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Feds. Leg. p. 363. 25 Amwt. Crit. ^^ I. Note the use in the final sentence of the present indefinite subjunctive, Present sub- 5eifw/tey, followed by the past subjunctive, d^elriv. junctive followed 2. So in Herod, i. 53 xal vvv ijxiai iireipuTq,, d oTpareiiijTat iirl llipaas, Kai by past subjunc- etnva ffrpariv dvSpwv irpoffBioiTO (TiiJ,iw.xov = " v\i.eV[ieiT he is to undertake" (the tive in final sen- deliberative subjunctive ; cf. Herod, i. 75, where the phrase is repeated after a past tences. imperfect (as is also the case in c. 53, just before the passage under citation) ; ii. 52 el &vi\wvTai (also after a poist imperfect), ) "and whether it might be possible for him " ; Thuc. viii. 87. 2 oiSi jifSiov dSivai, rlvi yvibfiji . . . • di&ri di oix fjXBov, ir^KKaxv elKdierai.. ol /iiv ykp 'Iva SiaTpl^ri . . . tcl tov TleKoirovvqalav, . . . ol Si 'Iva . . . iKxiyiP^TlaaiTO d8ivTei iv TiaXa/uvi, Soiev rlaiM = " in order that not even flight might be open to them, but that on the contrary they might possibly get out off and fall just victims to vengeance"; Thuc. vii. 17. 4 vavs re . , . ^TrX^pou*', Sttws vavfia- Xias re diroTr€Lpd(roj(n . . ., Kal tAs 6X/cd5as auTotv ^aaov ol . . . 'Adrjva'ioL KaXioiev diralpew = " thej manned, in order that they might both try their hands at a sea-flght, and also that by possibility the Athenians might be less able to prevent"; Bur. Sec. 1138 Ideura (!,■>]... 6 Trais | Tpoiav 6,6poiffxi Kal (vvoiKicrij TdXif, I yvdvres 6' 'Axatoi . . . | . . . dpcLav ardXov, \ K&ireira QpyKTjs iridta rpl^oiev rdde | 'KaiXaTovvres = " 1 feared lest the boy might gather together Troy and found it anew, and that the Achaeans might possibly organise an expedition, and then be for trampling on the plains of .Thrace"; Herod, ix. 51 i^oxiXeiaavTo /i.eTaaTiji'ai,, tva Kal iidan ^x""'' XpSirSai &!J>B6v(f, Kal ol itnrhs (T(p4ai /iii aivolaro = " they were minded to shift their quarters, in order that they might have the use of water in abundance, while at the same time the horsemen might possibly do them no harm"; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 357. 1 ^irio-roXis ^vefi.\j/ei/ . . . Ka\o6- a-as ifiSis, oix Iv' i%i\9-iyri, . . . dXX' IVa . . . /ii/S^i/ ivavTlov -^ijiplaausBe [\p7ii.crria6e Mr. Shilleto "quamqnam dubitanter"] airifi, /UtjS' dfiivowro firiS' dvTixoi-ev ol ^UKeis . . . , dXX' . . . kavTois iyx^tplffaiev = " he sent letters con- veying an invitation, not that you should take the field, but with the object that you might possibly" [or "might" with Mr. Shilleto's reading] "pass no decree, and that the Phocians might possibly not continue to offer any defence or resistance, but might possibly put themselves into his hands." 4. "Verissime . . . Hermannus . . .," says Mr. Shilleto in his ^mMoi. CW<. on the last - cited passage of Demosthenes, " ' antiques et diligentes scriptores optativum praesentibus jungere, ubi flnem indicant hunc esse, non ut quid fiat, sed ut quid possit fieri'"; and in his note on the same passage he professes his inability to " understand on what philosophical interpretation of the nature of the two moods" Arnold's (on Thuc. iii. 22. 9, already cited) distinction — "adopted also by Donaldson iVfiw Gratylus p. 486" — "depends," viz. — that "the subjunctive mood indicates the immediate, and the optative the remote, consequence of the action contained in the principal verb, the second being a consequence upon the first. " See Hermann on Vigor n. 350 cited by Arnold I.e. 5 1 — xxxi CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 311 service, if in very truth he shall have preserved " ; Aristot. de BepuU. iii. 13 = p. 1283. 14 So^aiev yap ovSev Aeyetv 66Kaiov = " would possibly seem"; Mh. Eudem. iii. 1. 30 <^avetei' = " would possibly appear"; Dem. Mid. p. 525. 19 sqq^. Trorepa firj 8(j) Sta tovto Siktjv, r} fi.ei^to Soir] SiKatws ; = " is he not to pay the penalty ? or a heavier one should he possibly pay ? " (cf. below, note 91); Theophrast. irepl Trepiepyias : a/ueXei Trepiepyta Sd^etev eivai = " might possibly be taken to be " ; Theocr. xxvii. 24 Ti . . . pe^aijut = " what could I possibly do ?" xxvii. 60 Ta.)(a S' vcmpov ovS' oiAa SotTjs = " perhaps later on you might possibly offer me not even a pinch of salt." In Plat. Theaet. p. 165 B ti ^ oSv diroKpivalfieda, and Cmtyl. p. 397 A Trdvv yap ijSetus to, hrLXonra irepl rZv ovofi/xTiav aKova-atfju, which as they stand are like instances to the foregoing, the true readings are, nevertheless, doubtless aTroKpivoviieOa and iraw yap av. In many of the passages above cited, editors and commen- tators have — as is to some extent shown above — moved heaven and earth to get rid of the obnoxious past subjunctive without av, and have foisted in the particle wherever they could ; hazard- ing, for the purpose, all sorts of unauthorised emendations of the various texts. Even Elmsley was at one time a sinner in this respect, correcting as he did (ad Eur. Med. 416, 7 note) Aesch. Agam. 1374 cited above. But he recanted five years later, when he edited the Oedipus Coloneus of Sophocles ; for then (ad Soph. Oed. Col. 1172 already cited) he admitted that, in such cases, "recte abesse av certissimum est"; although he covered his retreat with the expression, " Constructionis legem nondum mihi penitus perspectam esse fateor." Why, it may be asked, is a conspiracy on the part of — unassociated, be it observed — copyists to be presumed to alter ordinary into not, or at any rate less, ordinary forms ? And if there was no conspiracy, then the not, or less, ordinary forms are correct, and must be dealt with accordingly. The instances of the use of the past subjunctive to denote possibility wiU be found, it is suggested, to range themselves as a rule under one or other of the following heads, viz. — (1) Negative sentences ; (2) Interrogative sentences, including virtually negative ""^ ; even those which are Insertion of &v by way of un- authorised correc- tion. Classification of instances. ^2:i I. Interrogative sentences are occasionally found so absolutely equivalent Interrogative — to negatives as to have associated with them expressions suited only to negative negative sen- sentences. tences. 312 GREEK AND LATIN 5 1— xxxia-xxxii (3) Affirmative sentences ; and especially (4) those in which ib-ws or raxa is expressed.™"* (J) Present 2. (J) Present time. ™^' (j8) Imperfect : Aesch. Oho. 177 /xwv oSv 'O/jeo-tou Kpv^Ba Smpov y ToSe; = " can it possibly be ?" Hippocr. d« rai. ■wc«. in morb. acut. i. p. 399. F. =ii. p. 74. 1. K. oo-cuv TOtwvSe €OVTO)V, i^v rj koiXCtj vyp-q y koX arvvTyKy (qy. (TvvTaKy : see below, note loi), SoKey (1,01, k.t.X. = " I may possibly think it advisable " ; Theognis 296 oKTi Trapy = " those with whom he may be present " ; Eur. Med. 516 XP'"'^°'" . . • os ki^StjXos 1? = " which may happen to be debased" — "bastard metal,"' as Middleton and Rowley call it {The Changeling iii. 2) ; Theognis 1005 sqq. ^vvov 8' ia-OXbv tovto . . ., | Scttis . . . pivy = " when, as may happen, a man remains " ; Simonides Ceus Fr. xii. 19 iravras 8' eiraivypi Koi (j>t,Xim, I Ikwv ocTTis 'ipSy ^™^ /ii;8ev al(rxp6v = " the For example — (a) 7e : Soph. Phil. 441 Toiov ye roirov irK-fiv 7' 'OSvaaias ipeis ; = " of no one else, surely"; Eur. Med. 1367 X^x""' "'0^ 7' lyiiwcas oiveKa Kraveiv ; = " svaalj it was not tecaase of my marriage." So the hest MSS. ; so Person. Elmsley objects. (6) ye S^TTov : Plat. Symp. p. 200 C /col Toirov ye S?)7rou tU &v iiriBv/i'^jetev ; = ' ' surely no one would set his mind on. " ' (c) ol/ioi : Dem. pro Phorm. p. 958. 7 dXX', olixai, Trjs afji airKriirrla,^ KoX toO ffov rpimov Hs &v BOvairo i(piKi(r6ai ; = " but, I take it, no one could. " [Compare, for the sentiment, Shaksp. Macbeth iv. 3 "there's no bottom, none, I in my voluptuousness : your wives, your daughters, | your matrons, and your maids, could not fill up | the cistern of my lust."] 2. In Dera. de Feds. Leg. p. 441. 14 rls ydp ibSpa, fUffSv rqv irbXiv tV iiiieripav, Sa-ns et ns Ipocro, " eiiri lioi, . . ■" — oiS' &v ets eS oW Sti '^ffeiev, we get an interrogative which is a virtual negative, repeated for the sake of perspicuity after an interval, but repeated by a, negative. 3. In Cervantes Novdas B/'emplares iii. p. 16 (ed. Madrid 1803), Las dos doncellas, "ipero de qu^ me sirve alabar I ml enemigo, ni ir alargando con razones el suceso tan desgraciado mio, 6 por raejor decir, el principio de mi locura!" we have in the first member of the sentence a question, which is a virtual negative, followed in the second by a negative addition. xxxia "Wbere in such cases dv is present, full effect must be given to it ; as in Soph. Phil. 41 ir&s ydp dv voa&v dv^ip \ kuKop iroKai.q, KTipl irpoc^alt) naKpdv ; = "how would he advance?" Thuc. vi. 11. 3 vvp /ihi ydp Kdv i\6oi.ev ictus AaKeBai/JUivliap ^Koffros xi^piTi =" perhaps they would come"; Plat. Soph. p. 247 D tAx' oHv teas dv d-n-opotev = " Vae^ would perhaps be in a strait"; Apol. p. 31 A i/ieis S' laas rdx' dv d^S^/iej'oi, &(nrep oi vvcrdl^ovTes iyeip6ii,evoi,, Kpoicavres &v fie, . . ., pfdlus dv drro(cTci;/aiTe=" perhaps by chance you would easily go so far as to put me to death." Change between ^^u i. Note the change, in speaking of a class, from plural to singular : plural and singu- irdvTas to Sa-ns. lar, in speaking So in Simonides Ceus Fr. Iviii. 4 and Aesoh. Uum. 336, respectively cited of a class. below in this note (7). S 2— jomia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 313 man who, as may happen, willingly does nothing dis- graceful"; Eur. Ion 856 oo-rts ea-dXos ij = "who, as may happen, is a person of worth"; Theognis 1086, 1238 ToW epSeiv, o ti crot fjirj KaraOvfibiov j/ = " what- ever, as may happen, is not agreeable to you"; 694 OT ea-dXa Trapy = " when, as may happen, good things are at hand"; Eur. El. 972 oVov 8' 'AjtoAAuv crKaihi §, TtVes o-oi^ot ; = "in cases where Apollo is at fault." In Latin we have Plaut. Mostell. 1095. R. =v. 1. 44 ne enim illi hue confugere possint, qua&tioni qu6s dabit = "may possibly flee." (y) Indefinite : Horn. II. i. 262 ov . . . ttm . . . tSov . . ., ouSe i'Sio/iat = " I never have-seen, nor may I possibly ever see again" ; Eur. Iph. Aul. 1209 ttlOov. rh yap rot T6KVa ITV(T(TU)^iW KaXoV, | . . . • OvSctS TTphl TOlS' dvTearrj ^^^^^ fipormv = " no one by possibility may 2. The change is constantly, also, to be found the other way, viz. — from singular to plural. 3. Mr. Shilleto (on Thuc. i. 120. 5) cites as " remarkable instances of these changes" Ar. Vesp. 552 s^q.; Herod, iv. 65; 1 Tim. ii. [not iii.] 15; and refers " for a similar usage in Latin " to Madvig on Cic. de Fin. ii. 7. 22, a passage which is cited in the Text, § 235. See yet further instances in Aesch. 3mn. 337, cited below in this note ; Thuc. iv. 84. 2 ; and vii. 34. 2, respectiyely cited below, note 55, 11 ; and vi. 30. 2, cited below, note tp av yS.v VTreXdrj = "that in the case of those of mortals, about whose heads rash murders of kindred may have-gathered, we should keep company with them, until the sinner shall have-sunk beneath the earth "^'™"; Soph. Oed. Col. 395 yepovra 6' 6p6ovv (f>Xavpov os veos ireo-g = "it is useless to raise iip as an old man one who may have- ohanoed to fall as a young one"'''^^; Theognis 1013 ^por&v — due, it would seem, originally to Burges. Elmsley [Quarterly Remew xiv. p. 460) had long before proposed — "recte et acute" in the estimation of Blomfield {Museum Qriticum i. 190) — oiSels irpbs rdd' dprepet ^poruiv. But as Matthiae sensibly remarks — " hoc quidem mihi parum probabile videtur, operae pretium quemquam duxisse explioare dyrepet adscripto conjuuotivo ccvtsIw^," Bothe reads, wildly, oiSels TOicrd' kvavrlov \^yet. Eur.5'. i^. 1417. 2- In Eur. Here. Fu/r. 1417 the preponderance of authority is in favour of eiirris — ttSs oS;/ ^t cItttis &ti XpvTai ; Thuc. iv. 18. 4 oiTtves . . . edevro . . ., t6v re 7r6Xep,ov VOp,irTliXTL K.T.X. The present subjunctive without, and the present subjunctive with, av, side by side, we have in Theognis 405 Kal 01 edrjKe SoKetv, d pAv ■§ KaKa, TavT dydO' elvai I evpapeiDS, a 8' av ^ )(pri(Tipa, ravra KaKa = " what may chance to be bad " : " what shall be useful." Of. supra subnote xx. 6. . 'icrrqpi is chosen as the exemplar, because it possesses a 6. Choice of future perfect active : hrTrj^w. The only other instances of such '^"'^vi^ as ex- a tense are, the writer believes, xf^v^^w, and (in Horn. II. xv. ^ '^^' 98 — a corresponding future perfect passive from the same verb occurring in Od. xxiii. 266 — ) Ke)^aprjiTep£v from x*^'/""' See above note i. 7 (a). 7. 1. Or eio-TijKEi. 7- Augment in The augment is equally added or omitted in the past ^^^. V^^ perfect perfects indicative. 2. Of the omission, add as examples to those given by x^T Here, again, contrast the possibility of a maiden getting married, expressed by the use of the suhjunctive KkiiBy alone, with the certaimty of her reaching, if she lives, the time for marriage, expressed by the use of the subjunctive with &v, in Soph. Oed. Col. 1492, where Oedipus says to his daughters, dXV ^vIk' Sk 5-)) jrpds y&iiuiv iJKrrr' dK/ids, | tIs oBtos fffrai. k.t.X. =" when you shall have come." 316 GREEK AND LATIN 7 2— xxxvi Stallbaum on Plat. Apol. p. 36 A, and Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Pais. Leg. p. 359. 26— Ar. Nub. 962 vevoiiimo; Ach. 10 Kexv^V' Thuc. vii. Vl. 7 Treirovdea-av } Plat. Apol. p. 22 B ireTrotrJKearav ; p. 31 D diroXaXi] ; Protag. p. 335 D dvecrT-qKr] ; Gratyl. p. 384 B aKrjKori; Euthyd. p. 300 D Tra/oaKr^/cdet ; Symp. p. 219 E sqq. 8iaTrc^vy€i ; Dem. de Feds. Leg. p. 443. 16 sqq. ofm- jjioKei ; Mid. p. 567. 13 dvaircTrToJ/cet. In Ar. Thesm. 596 the books have el /x,i) Treir-ua-fJirjv. 'ireTrva-fnjv is merely Bentley's unnecessary correction. E contra, etcrTrJK€i is now restored from the Eavenna MS. in Ar. J.V. 513, and Tr/ootre/Se^SoTjSijKet stands in Thuc. ii. 25. 6 without variation, except in a solitary — modern — Paris MS. In Dem. Lepf. p. 481. 7 the MSS. vary between oTrokuiXei and diroiXwAet. Endings of such 3, As to the forms of the endings of the first and third tenses : persons respectively of the past perfects indicative active, we find as to inthe firstperson ; 4. (i.) The first person (the normal steps of progression of which were -e-a-a-ixi, e-cra-ix, e-cra, -e-a, -rj) (a) In actual use, -ea: Horn. II. viii. 366 ; xiv. 71 ySe and ySea ; and -rj : Soph. Oed. Ool. 944 tJi'Sij ^"; Dem. Aphoh. p. 844. 3 crvvyST], For other examples see above in this note, § 2. This was the most usual form in the older Attic writers. (6) As a dream of the grammarians, -ijv : see Eustath. on Horn. Od. xxiii. 220, and (cited by Dindorf on Ar. Ach. 10) Herodian Hort. Adon. fol. 198. If such a form ever had any foundation in fact, it must have arisen from some such false analogy as that which intro- duced ifv for •^ = " I was " — as to which see Elmsley ad Soph. Oed. Tyr.: Praefat. p. x. ; and Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 22. 2. (c) In the later language, -eiv : Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 395. 2 xxxvi 'WTiere there is no variation in the MSS. See too Soph. Ant. 18 ; Eur. Hipp. 405; Berad. 987; Ar. Av. 511. In Soph. Oed. Tyr. 433 the reading of the hest MSS. points to ^S-q (see Elmsley, Praefat. p. xxxi. ed. 3), which is "Valckenaer's (ad Eur. Hipp. 792) correction. And see Pors. Ad/oers. pp. 163, 210. 7 5-xxxvii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 317 bifioXoyriKeiv; p. 411. 9, Oonon p. 1258. 12 iyvuiKeiv; Mid. p. 530. 20 eTmrovdeiv; Oonon p. 1258. 22 diiOeiv; Hyperides^JTO Lycophr. col. 5, 1. 24 (ed. Babington) JSeStetv. Of. infra note 53. 9. This became the usual form in common life. It probably grew up gradually, side by side, with the legitimate form in -ij — the V getting added after the analogy of the ordinary past tenses imperfect and indefinite (e'Aeyov, eXa^ov, and the like), and the difference of pronuncia- tion between rj and ei lessening every day — and little by little supplanted it — "sub Aristophanis senescentis aetate," thought Kidd, on Dawes Misc. Orit. p. 232. An earlier date must, however, be assigned if the MSS. are right in giving us ySeLv or ySr]v in Soph. M. 1018; Ant. 448™'™ riKYjKoeiv in Ar. Vesp. 800 ; and in pointing to eyprjyopeLv in Ar. Eccl. 32. Plato constantly {e.g. in addition to the examples mentioned above in this note § 2, Theaet. p. 208 E dc^eo-njKij ; Apol. p. 36 A airoTre^evyyi ; etc.) uses the form in -ij : but we have lySeii/ with no variation in Phaedon p. 63 E ; ^vvySeiv in Symp. p. 193 E ; both words in Apol. p. 22 C ; nor is there practically any variation in the cases of ewpaKeiv Sep. i. p. 328 C ; i'lmrovOeiv ib. p. 329 B. 5. (ii.) The third person inthethirdperson. (the normal steps of progression of which were e-o-a^t, t-o-a-r, e-cre(v), £-e(v), ei(v) : the v being the vv ecjieXKva-TiKov in use before vowels) (a) In actual use, -ee(y) : Hom. II. ii. 832 ySee ; xviii. 404 yScev ; Herod, i. 11 eyeyovee. -ei : Hom. II. xi. 296 i^e^yKU ; Ar. Plut. 738 aveo-njicet ; Nub. 380 iXekridei (sic libri) ; Ach. 35 ySei ; Plat. Symp. p. 220 A empaKei. -£t(v) : Hom. II. xiv. 412 /3e/3X-qKeiv ; Od. xviii. 344 ea-TrjKeiv ; Eur. Ion 1187; Ar. Vesp. 558, 635; Pac. 1182 fjSuv ; Ar. Nub. 1347 (e corr. Dawes Misc. Orit. p. 231 q.v. ; pointed to (see Dind. ad Ar. I.e.), if, indeed, not actually ratified (see Kidd on Dawes, ed. 2. p. xxix. extr.), by the Eavenna MS. See above subnote xxvii) TreTTOiOeiv. ^^™ Dr. Eutherford {Sew Ph/rynichus p. 236), acknowledging the consensus of the MSS. in Soph. Ant. 448; M. 1185; Oed. Col. 948; Eur. Cycl. 649; Tro. 650, in giving the forms in -av, emphasises his discipleship of Cobet in his startling conclusion from the fact, viz, — "there is no question that jiSj) must he everywhere restored " ! 318 GREEK AND LATIN 7 5 — xxxviii (b) As a correction of Elmsley's, -r]v : Ar. Ach. 35. But there is neither metrical necessity, nor authority, for the form ; and, in fact, the pointing of the Ravenna MS. is against it. We also find in connection with the ending of the third person (c) -7] : Horn. II. v. 64 ySrj (specially avouched by Aristarchus). Other examples are in II. i. 70 ; ii. 38 ; Od. ii. 16. 108. 122. Dindorf gives us similar forms, but in both cases on probably insufficient grounds, in Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1525 (ace. tamen Elmsl.); Phil. 1010. In Ar. Eccl, 650 oitrT' ovy), Sios jm) ere cjiiX'qcry. B. Seivbv fJiiVTav iTreirovdrj the Ravenna MS. has — according to Kidd on Dawes ubi swpra = ed. 2. p. 428, col. 1, extr., and Dobree in Person's Aristo- phanica .■p. (143) — eimrovO-q : according to Dindorf ad I. iTreirovOeiv. The balance of authority is in favour of the former form, and that of probability in favour of that form being a first person. Cf. Ar. Ach. 323 ; Lys. 1098 (e corr. Elmsl. ad Ach. I.e.) From what has been said, however, it will be seen that, authority and probability apart, either form might be lawfully accepted ; and that, either as a first or as a third person : " I should have suffered an outrageous insult," or "he would have suffered pretty heavily for it." See further Dobree I.e., and ih. p. 202 ; and Person's Note (on Ar. Vesp. 633 = 635 Dind.) ih. p. 135.™™ 8. Present in- 8. 1. Both in Greek and in Latin the present indefinite definite indicative indicative is represented by the same form as the present im- — Its orm. perfect indicative, and is not represented by the form allotted to the past indefinite tense. 2. With reference to this last mentioned form, Madvig {Opusc. Acad. Alt. pp. 109 sg^s[.) points out the dangers which attend the course of those " qui tam facile in Grammatica Latina aoristi nomine utuntur.'' After premising that xxxviii See a minuter discussion of the endings of the persons of the past perfects active in Curtius Das Verbum der QriecUschen Sprache, o. 16 vii vn 259 sqq. ed. 2=pp. 237 sqq. ed. 1. "^' Latin past in- definite indicative — its use. ^ ^ CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 319 " aoristus Graecoruin indicativo modo praeteriti temporis est, extra indicativum et participium omnino non magis praeteriti temporis quam praesentis propria forma est: caret etiam, sed in participio quoque, parte ilia, quae est nota praeteriti, augmento," he draws the conclusion that "comparatio reliquorum modorum aoristi nihil prorsus ad Latinum sermonem pertinet, cujus nulla est ejusmodi verbi pars." "In indicativo autem," he goes on, "quum raro et intra certos fines praeteriti significatio obscuretur, nullus tamen est ejusmodi aoristi in praesens transitus, qualis hie in Latino sermone fingitur." Then, after laying down as a fact " et Grafici aoristi notionem primam, quod ad indicativum attineat, positam esse in simplicissima rei praeteritae significatione, in narrando, nee Graecos umquam, quum ingenium moremve aetatis alicujus com- memorent, aoristo uti, nisi ubi de praeterita aetate narrent," and " in re et saepe facta et fieri solita Graecos hoc posterius, fieri solere, signifioare ita, ut factam narrent," he proceeds — " Positus est . . . omnis usus in eo, ut ex re facta . . . efficiatur sententia generalis ; quum concludatur, idem alias quoque fieri : erit igitur pro ipsa hao sententia narratio idem exprimens, si addideris verbum aliquod (^saepe, multi, plerique), quo significetur res frequenter facta. Atque in hac omissione hujusmodi verborum posita est prima proprietas, etsi interdum iUo modo significatur etiam id, quod fieri semper et perpetuo solet, longius jam usu progrediente, eaque con- suetudo praesentis temporis describitur, quae non apte narrando exprimatur." Then, after disposing of cases where, these principles not applying, critics had yet attempted to foist the use of a so-called aorist into the Latin syntax after Greek usage, he winds up — "Apparet Graeci illius aoristi imitationem Latinam neque ad veteres prosae orationis scriptores pertinere . . . nee ad vetuatissimos poetas : nam nee Plautus nee Terentius ita locutus, nee, si memoria non fallit, Lucretius. Ac propter hoc ipsam imitationem dixi : cujus prima vestigia demonstrare possumus ap. Cic. in versibus ex Graeco translatis: nam de Dw. i. [8.] 14 pro Arati i^a^aTo est demersit : et [9.] § 15 similiter duxere : turn ap. Catull. Ixii. 53. 55 et Ixiv. 148 (Dicta nihil metuere, nihil perjuria curcmt). Deinde Virg. et Hor. sic locuti sunt : ille, Georg. i. 49 ; iv. 213 ; Aen. x. 726 ; xi. 810 sqq.; xii. 755 ; 320 GREEK AND LATIN 8 2— xxxviiia' hie, Od. i. 34. 16 ; Ep. i. 2. 47 ; A. P. 343 ; turn insecuti poetae, quorum exemplis supersederi potest, imitatique poeticum loquendi usum prosae orationis scriptores, primus, opinor, eorum quos habemus Seneca." Quiiitil.viii.3.30. As a consequence, lie then shows, the form aptaw^ in Quin- tilian viii. 3. 30 is a mere blunder of the scribes ; as also should Juv. iii. 168. the reading in Juvenal iii. 168 be "quod turpe negskbit (not negawi) | translatus subito ad Marsos mensamque Sabellam" ( = transfer : negabit) ; and he appends the following note : — " Duobus aliis ejusdem poetae locis, in quibus narratio est rei factae (ix. 80 et x. 7) abusus est Weber ad Pers. ii. 5, ubi itidem restituendum est, quod plures codices babent. At bona pars proceritm tacita KbaUt acerra. Prope aocedit ad conditionalem formam : libet, videas libantem." Pers. ii. 5. 3. So, long before, in Persius I.e. had Casaubon read ; remarking "libabit: hoc est libare solet: perperam alii libri libavit. Non enim sic Latini loquuntur, verum Graeci ... at Hebraei et Latini futuro plurimum utuntur," and citing in proof Hor. Serm. i. 4. 34 sqci. (parcet . . . gestiet) and Juvenal xiv. 185 (volet) ; so, later on, Jahn, with the note " libabit : futurum in sententia generali, cf. Juven. viii. 182 quae | turpia cerdoni Volesos Brutosque decebunt." Juv. ix. 79. So in Juvenal ix. 79 instabile et dirimi coeptum et jam paene solutum | conjugium in multis domibus servabit adulter (where there is no reason for reading, with Heinrich, servavit) ; B.oT.Epp.i.2.69. and (probably) Hor. Epji. i. 2. 69 quo semel est imbuta recens, servalsit odorem | testa diu. Compare the use of the English future in such cases. See below note 19. Hor. Od. iii. 23. 4. In Horace Od. iii. 23. 17 sqq. — immunis aram si tetigit 17 sqq. manus, | non sumptuosa blandior hostia | moUivit aversos Penates | farre pio et saliente mica — the tenses are presents perfect. An alternative reading moUibit is open to objection (1) on the score of requiring an antecedent tetigerit ; (2) in point of form, the Augustan age future being molUet.^''^™^ Latin futures xxxviiia The older language affected, on the other hand, the forms in ■iio as in -ibo. futures of verbs of this conjugation, e.g. — Audibo, Caeoil. Progam. 193 ; audibis, Plaut. Gapt. iii. 4. 86, Poemd. i. 2. 97, Enniua Pancrat. 4 = 387 (Mtiller), Caeoil. Naude,r. 113; esuribo, Novius Mort. et Vit. jvdio. 63 ; expedibo, Pacuvius Atalant. 66, Peril). 281, Acoius Nydegres. 490, Pomponius Vernion. 175; impertibis, Novius Decum. 11; invenibit, Pomponius Biicc. Adopt. 25 ; operibo, Pomponius Praefect. Mor. 147 ; 9 2-xxxviiib CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 321 5. E contra, the future of eo, " I go," is, alike in the older {e.g. Pompon. Fernion. 175), and the later, language, ibo: a fact which invalidates the reading of Orelli and others in Hor. Od. iv. 4. 65 merses profundo : pulcrior exiet,'^'''™'' Hor. Od. iv. 4. 65 and the various reading transiet in TibuU. i. 4. 27 at si tardus eris, errabis : transiit aetas | quam TibuU. i. 4. 27. cito ! 9. 1. The use of "shall" in such cases for "will," and the 9. "Shall": interchange of "shall "and "will," even in the same sentence, "'^^^■" were common in the older language. Thus we have 2, (1) Of the first— Shaksp. Merchant of Ven. i. 1 "if they but hear . . ., I you shall perceive them . "; Deut. vi. 25; Ps. xliv. 21 "if we have forgotten . . ., shall not God search it out?" Shaksp. Twelfth Night iii. 2 " if thou thou'st him some thrice, it shall not be amiss " ; 3 John 6 " whom if thou bring forward on their journey . . ., thou shalt do well " [where the Eevisers think it necessary to substitute " whom thou wilt do well to set forward " !] ; 1 Sam. xix. 1 1, xx. 7 ; Ps. cxxxix. 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; Homily for Whitiunda/y p. 386 (ed. Oxon. 1802) "before we come to the declaration of the great and manifold gifts of the Holy Ghost . . ., it shall first be needful briefly to expound unto you . . . You shall therefore imderstand, etc." ; Shaksp. Macbeth iv. 3 " when I shall tread upon the tyrant's head, | . . . yet my poor country | shall have more vices than it had before, | more sufifer and more sundry ways than ever, | by him that shall succeed " ; Johnson English Dictionary : Preface, extr. (ed. Oxon. vol. V. p. 50) ; Middleton and Eowley The Changeling iv. 3 " tread not him under foot, that shall appear . . ." ; Ps. V. 12 ; Lord Nottingham, G, in Gooh v. Fountain 3 Sw. 585. 589 "a case ... so elaborately pressed . . ., that a opperibere, Plaut. Bacch, 48. E. =i. 1. 14; ordibor, Aocius Amph. 95; perveni- bunt, Pomponius Pyth. Oorg. 159; quibo, Paouvius Dulorest. 154; reperibit, Caecilius Obolost. 120; scibo, kacms Alphedb. 74; scibis, Novius Maccus Cop. 47 ; venibo, Pomponius Macci Oem. 65. E contra, we have Audies, Accius Alphesib. 74; opperiar, Plaut. MU. Glor. 303. E. =ii. 3. 32. xxxviiib jdj. Key corrected the last word into evenet. Cf. evenai in Plaut. JSpid. ii. 2. 105; Trinum. 41. R.=i. 2. 3; Enn. Hec. 170 = 195 Miiller; Pompon. Cretul. 35 (e oorr. Ribbeok) : convenat in Plaut. Trinum. 582. B. = ii. 4. 181; and see Ritsohl Proleg. ad Plaut. Trinum. pp. 88. 162. 212. 322 GREEK AND LATIN 9 2 man wlio shall err in Ms judgment, shall do it at least very excusably " ; Kingsley Parson Lot ii. " a few months more and those way-worn features shall have crumbled to their dust, and that strong meek spirit shall be in the abyss of eternity " ; Shaksp. Ant. and Gleop. i. 3 " I see | in Fulvia's death how mine receiv'd shall be " ; St. Matth. viii. 8 ; Fletcher Bule a Wife and Have a Wife ii. 3 "come in and serve for witnesses. A. We shall, madam " ; Shaksp. Hamlet i. 3 extr., iii. 1 ; Gymb. i. 4 ; Shirley The Witty Fair One iii. 5 ; Shaksp. Miich Ado iii. 1 " run thee to the parlour ; | there shalt thou find my cousin Beatrice " ; Suckling The Ooblins iv. 1 "talk to her, she shall answer you " ; Dryden Spanish Friar iv. 2 " mark those who doat on arbitrary power | and you shall find them, etc." ; Herrick Hesperides i. p. 155 ; Lord Nottingham, C. in Grey v. Grey 2 Sw. 594. 599 ; Ps. ii. 8, also vv. 4, 5, 9 ; xli. 10. 3. (2) Of the second— Shaksp. Much Ado iv. 1 " what shall become of this ? What wlU this do t " Ps. V. 6 " thou shalt destroy them that speak leasing : the Lord will abhor both the bloodthirsty and deceitful man " — in fact the usage is common in the Psalms : see, for instance, xxiii. 6 ; xxv. 7, 8 ; Ivii. 1, 2,3; Ixxix. 14 ; Ixxxiv. 12 (where the Bible version has "will" for the " shall " of the Prayer Book) ; xci. 1, 2, 3 ; cxvi. 4 ; cxxxii. 15 sqq^.; cxlv. 4, 5, 6, 19, 21. So also St. John xvi. 2 " they shall put you out of the synagogues : yea the time cometh, that whosoeyer killeth you will think that he doeth God service." English future 4. Instances of the English future perfect we have in perfect. Sir Thomas Wyatt Poems: To his love whom he had hissed " revenge you then : the readiest way is this ; | another kiss, my life it shall have ended " ; St. Paul 1 Cor. xv. 54 " so when this corruptible shall have put on incorruption, and this mortality shall have put on immortality " ; St. John Bev. xi. 7 "when they shall have finished their testimony " ; Whately Peculiarities of the Ghristian Religion : Preface p. xv. ed. 3 " and yet, in every one of the points in respect of which all religions will have been thus indis- criminately thrown together, Christianity does, in fact, stand eminently distinguished from all the rest by strikingly peculiar features"; id. Bampton Lectures iii. p. 97 (ed. Oxon. 1822) "those who have been long accustomed to attentive observation and deep reflection will have often detected errors . . ., and will have been many times startled by " CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 323 unexpected objections"; Quarterly Bemew vol. clxvi. p. 285 "if to these two passages we add . . ., we shall have exhausted the whole of the testimony . . ., and shall have failed to discover . . ."; id. p. 307 "it will have been observed that hitherto all our references have been to . . ."; Mr. Lecky Letter to the Times Newspaper, 24th June 1892, p. 10, col. 2 "when the glamour of party rhetoric shall have passed away"; Times 7th Deo. 1893, first leading article "if this be so. Ministers will have delayed . . . till it is too late . . ." ; Id. 9th Dec. 1893, first leading article "it will have been seen from our telegraphic intelligence of yesterday, that . . ." lo. 1. Ps. XXXV. 28 "and as for my tongue it shall be talking of lo. Future im- thy righteousness, and of thy praise all the day long " ; perfect : in Eng- ciii. 9 "he will not always be chiding" ; cxlv. 5 "as for ' me, I will be talking of thy worship . . ., and I will also tell of thy greatness"; Isaiah xxviii. 28 "he will not ever be threshing it." 2. Mr. Key (Latin Grammar § 469) and Madvig (Latin in Latin. Grammar § 339, ed. 3, by Woods) concur in refusing this im- perfect sense to the Latin future active. But is this really so ? The present writer ventures to think not. See, in their respective contexts — Credemur, Ov. Fast. iiL 351 ; ecfodiam, licebit. Plant. Trinimi. 463. 465. R. =ii. 4. 62. 64 ; facies, Cic. de Fin. ii. 18. 58 ; habitabitur, Ov. Trist. i. 1. 127 ; leget. Martial xi. 16. 10 ; miscebitur, Ov. Fast. i. 123 ; numerabis, Ov. Trist. i. 9. 5 ; occidam, Novius Phoeniss. 79 ; placebunt, Plin. Epp. ix. 25. 3 ; probabit, putabit, Cic. in Gaecil. 1. 1 ; rumpent, Verg. Oeorg. iii. 328 ; suspicabere, Cic. ad Att. vii. 12. 1 ; valebit, Cicero Caecin. 21. 61. 1 1. Thus we see that — taking the verb et/it as the example — n. Subjimctive in Greek with- jj = « he may be " = " he possibly, haply, will be," out )( with &v. €17] = " he might be " = " he possibly, haply, would be " ; whilst, as we shall see hereafter, by the addition of av we get 2j av = " he truly will be," tt'ij av = " he truly would be." 324 GREEK AND LATIN 12 1 B.— TO THE GEEEK LANGUAGE 12. fie: its 12. 1. "The force of the particle av is always to refer an force ; action or event to its conditions, and to mark the connection between them." — Mr. Maiden, Philological Museum i. pp. 96. 101. 2. " Many German scholars seem to think that the introduction of the particle av always imports contingency or uncertainty into a sentence. This, I think, is a mistake. I believe that the force of av ' is always to connect the action of the verb to which it is joined, with certain conditions, and to indicate that it is dependent upon those conditions. Thus a verb in a past tense of the indicative mood, by itself, expresses an actual fact, something which happened. But if av be added to it, it no longer expresses an absolute fact, but an action which depended upon some condition. This construction presents itself in two shapes : one, when the condition is hypothetical and imaginary, not actual, as in et eiSov avrov, TrpomiTrov av ; the other, when the verb and av express the repetition of an action under given circumstances, and it is implied that when the antecedent condition was not present, the action was not repeated. " No doubt, therefore, a verb in the indicative mood is made to express contingency by the addition of av, and the av imports an element of uncertainty into the proposition. But, on the other hand, a verb in the optative mood expresses only a mere possibility, some- thing which Tnight^ happen under some or other conditions, as in etrr ovv oVfajs "AA/cijo-Tts et's yrjpas /noXot ; Then if av be added, the possibility is connected with certain conditions ; and it is affirmed that what might happen, would happen under those particular con- ditions. In this case the addition of civ makes the less certain more certain. "Notwithstanding the apparent and obvious arguments for con- necting av etymologically with kcv, I have often been strongly tempted to think that av is only a shortened form of o?v. The Herodotean Sv shows that the v is no elementary vowel in the word, but merely a mean for lengthening the 0. If I were quite satisfied that Dindorf is right in asserting that av was sometimes used as a long syllable, I should have less scruple in identifying it with oSv. " In accordance with this theory, I believe that when ws av and oTTUs av are joined as final particles with the subjunctive mood, they indicate that the object contemplated is to be attained more certainly by the means used than when ws and oVcos are used without the av. This is manifestly the effect when the particles are used with the optative mood, and I cannot understand why scholars should imagine 12 3— xxxix-xl CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 325 exactly the opposite effect to be produced when the particles are used with the subjunctive mood. Yet I believe that this is the common notion of Hermann's school." — Mr. Maiden, in a private letter, under date "Sept. 12, 1859," to the present writer, in which he acknowledges the authorship of the article in the Philological Museii/m, from which an extract has been made above, and gives permission to publish the fact.''™'' 3. Dindorf's " assertion that av was sometimes used as a its quantity, long syllable " is to be found in his note on Aesch. /Sfepi. c. Theb. 562. His proofs were drawn from no less than twelve sources, in what, it cannot be too often repeated, are the mere fragments of the classical authors which have come down to us, viz. — Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 562 ; Ag. 340 ; Soph. Ant. 747 ; Aj. 1339; El. 314; Eur. Med. 867; Bhes. 560; Tro. 409; Eel. 1045 ; Here. Fur. 186 ; 1254; Alexis 'SvvairoOv. Fr. i. 4. In some of these passages there is no manuscriptal varia- tion of readings at all. In all of them the best MSS. agree in so giving the av as that it must be a long syllable. The con- clusion is obvious — that, due respect being shown to the best MSS., and preconceived notions apart, av is sometimes used as a long syllable.''^ xxxix As the Clown in the Twelfth Night (v. 1) says, " The whirligig of time brings in his revenges " ; and now we have Mr. D. B. Monro, the present Provost of Oriel, writing in the Preface to his Qrammar of the Somerie Dialed (Oxford 1882, p. xii.): "Regarding the cognate question of the nses of av and Kiv, the main' principles have been laid down by DelbrUck. It is worth while to mention that they were clearly stated as long ago as 1832, in a paper- in the PhUological Museum (vol. i. p. 96), written in opposition to the then reigning method of Hermann." , ,. , , Jil I. Scant respect for the MSS. and preconceived notions have, however, been too strong for the critics, and tl^iey have left no stones unturned in order to get rid of the offender. t^ , , See for example, as specimens, Hermann (followed by Professor Kennedy and Mr a' Sidgwick) and Dr. Verrall on Aesch. Ag. -340 ; Lobeck, Elmsley (in Museum Criticwm i. p. 486), and Hermann on Soph. Aj. 1339 [see also Hermann's Opusc. iv. pp. 373 sqq., where he expressly controverts Dmdorfs position, and affirms that S,v is never used as a long syllable] ; Monk (in Museum Critievm i. p. 73) on Soph. El. 314 ; Person and Elmsley on Bur. Med. 867. , , „,„ 2 As to the particular passage of Aeschylus above referred to, viz. Agam. Aesch. Ag. 340. 340 the present writer is content to follow the guidance of Mr. Maiden, who (in his Lectures at University College, London, 1848-49) recalled the oB BAvai^v of the MSS which had been too hastily allowed by Dindorf to be superseded by Stanley's 'otiose i.vea\oiev; and, reading ote hv iUvres aCflis aB edj-oie;- &v, translated— "they would (=will) not, having-slain [^Uvt^s = KTavbnesl be slain {e&voi-iv) again in their turn." For a similar use of 0viiri . . ., Aeycov . . . (us C6 6ja0eii£ot/t)jv, ^Sij av . . . SiacjidapiqcrovTat, (see Text § 137 and note 202a) ; Symp. p. 222 A tSoiv av (sic libri : aS e corr. Bekk.) Tts . . . evprjorei; Rep. x. p. 615 D o-uS' av fj^eL (the reading rj^oi — mere correction as it is — • nevertheless involves the same construction. In Legg. iv. p. 719 D, where there is no question of indirect speech, Bekker correctly suggests av eTratvecrat as the true reading, instead of the common kiraivkcroL) ; Phaedon p. 61 C crxeobv . . . ov8' OTTiocrrLovv av crot Ikwv eCvac Tretcrerac (where note the peculiar appositeness of the av : " he certainly never will " ; and yet the edd. seek to turn it out !) ; Auotor Praeception. in Hippocr. i. p. 27. F. = i. p. 83. 4. K. av . . epea ; Auctor de Natur. Ptieri : ib. i. p. 235. F. = i. p. 383. 16. K. oKorav . . . xbtprjo-eL ; Auctor de Gorde : ib. i. p. 268. F. = i. p. 485. 12. K. av Stijcrti ; Theocr. xxvii. 38 k£v . . . evt^O). 7. In Thuc. vi. 82. 2 ; Isocr. Areop. p. 155. e; and Trapezit. p. 366. e, there is authority, but not probably the balance of authority, in favour of the same construction. A similar remark applies to the participial construction with av in Thuc. vi. 20. 2, and Isocr. Areop. p. 142. b. See Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. ii. 44. 3. 8. Correspondingly with its use with indicatives do we find av used with participles and infinitives. Ar. Nub. 1157. "'"" So all the test MSS., including the Ravenna and Venetian ; vulg., e corr., ipydffaipovoi to. Upacri'Sa, or Plat. Symp. p. 217 B tovt(dv 8' ov fidX.a lytyveTo o-uScv, dX.X', Sxrirep eidOei, StaA£)(^eis civ /not Kal (7Vvr]iJ,epevcras (j)'X€TO, the av does not belong to the participles (Trpoo-Ti^evres : SiaAex^ets), but to the verbs (to-etov : a)xeTo = "they would shake": "he would take himself off." Of. note i8a). And for passages where the av, although standing by the side of a participle, nevertheless does not belong to it, but is merely a repetition of another av in the sentence belonging to some other verb, see Ar. Ban. 96 yovt/xov Se woLrjTrjv av ovx evpoii eVt I fijTcov av cited in Text § 91, and others cited' in note 23. 4 below. Eur. Hipp. 519 av (po/Sridua-' 10-61 = "that you would conceive fright at" ; Thue. vi. 20. 2 sqq. ouVe Seop.iva's ixeTa/ioXyjs . . ., oij8' av TYjV dp)(7]v T^v riiJ,eT€pav cIkotois &vt' eXevdepcas ir/DocrSe^a/nevas = " not wanting, and not likely to accept " ; vi. 34. 6 sqq. dcr/ievou av irpocjiaaLv Aa^Sovros, el TV . . . 696Lrj = " who would be likely to catch at, if oppor- tunity were offered"; vi. 64. 1 elSores ovk av o/totws "'"" Svv7j9evTei Kol el . . . €KJ3i/3d^obev k.t.A. = " knowing that not under similar conditions would they be' able to do so, as ( = under better conditions, than) if they were to proceed to disembark their men"; Lys. c. Eratosth. p. 127. 23 SiKatus Dem. de F. L. ''^* "Equidem malim," says Mr. Shilleto ad I., "cum Marldando hv ante p 390. & sag. (i7;'OoO!/Tas, quod facile potuitexcidere,additiim"; translating accordingly — "then as one would do when instructing." oix bfioluys itl™' Note here oijx 6;Uoiu!="not under similar conditions," used, as is (Thue. vi. 64. 1) ; occasionally the case, in the sense of " under better conditions " — a notion of sim. Increase instead of diminution. So in Thue. vii. 28. 4 ; Aristot. Eth. Nic. iii. 5. 22. Similarly with cognate phrases : Thue. i. 143. 4 {oiKin (k toC ofiolov Sffrat.) ; iv. 106. 1 (ovk h bixolif (Tunv elvai). 141010 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 333 jucv €V oXi,yap-)([(i. Slkyjv Sovtos . . ., SiKalws B' av kv Sr]iJLOKpaTt<^ = " as he was punished, as he would be punished"; Xen. Anah. i. 1. 10 Tre/ji-yevo/xevos av = "he would get the upper hand" ; Plat. Gorg. p. 458 A tZv ijSeojs fiev av e\ey x^OevTOJV et Tt jxrj dkrjde? kiyio, ■qSito? S" av eXey^avTiiiV, ci tis Tt fj-fj dkrjOk's Aeyot, ovK drjSicrTepov fievTov iXiyxdiVTiav i^ ekey^dvTiav = " who would will- ingly be refuted, if I am saying : who would willingly refute, if a man were to say : yet who would not less willingly be refuted than refute " ; p. 460 D ovk dv Trore aStKijcras = " incapable of ever doing wrong " ; Dem. Olynth. iii. p. 30. 24 ^^oypli . . . ttjs TrepifTTda-rj's av ■^p.ds atcrx'uvijs, el KadvcjieLfjieda . . .= " which would attach to us, if we were to let matters drift" ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 366. 10 ToiJ fiovX-rjOivros av="who would have formed the wish (sc. if he had had the power) " (of. Mr. Shilleto ad I) ; p. 366. 14 sqq. otiovv av dpyvpiov tto tijcra vres = " who would have 'picked up any little bit of money they could" ; Mid. p. 530. 12 ei TOTJT aKO'vcraiev . . . ol fidp^apoi, ovk av OLecrOe . . . ii/ias Trpo^evovi airiJiv 7ronq(ra(rdai ; rbv tolvvv ov irapd Tots'EAA.rjo't p,6vov evSoKL/iovvra v6p,ov, dWd Kai Trapd TOiS jBap^dpois eS So^aVT av c'x^"'; CKOireLcrd' k.t.X. = " which is in good repute : which would have the reputation of being a good law" ("oaveant tirones," says Buttmann ad I. note 52, "ab isto dv perperam jungendo. Pertinet ad participium [os So^eiev av] ") ; Conmi p. 1269. 19 eyio . . . 6 SiKaioTepov crov ina-TevOeh av = "who would be more justly believed than yourself." (6) Infinitives: Eur. Ale. 1075 cra^' otSa (BovXecrdai povetv dv p.0L SoKeii (sic legend, cum E. V. Aid. Cf. Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 22. 1) = "I think you would be a sensible person"; Xen. Anab. i. 9. 29 vo/it^ovres . . . a^tturepas av Tip.r)s Tvy xa-vsLV = " that they would get a better guerdon " ; Dem. Phil. i. p. 40. 8 ijyoii/xai . . . et/coTtos dv . . . Tuyx'*"^"' = " t^**' I should meet with"; Aphob. p. 852. 18 W /irjScts . . . vo/xtfeTft) . . . ttot dv . . . kOiXeiv, ei arj . . . rjSei k.t.X. = " that she would ever have been willing, unless she had known." Soph. El. 1446 fxaXicTTd (tol p-kXeiv \ olp-ai, p.dXipd(TaL = " it most of all concerns you, and you best would give me information"; Soph. Aj. 1077 dvSpa Xpv . • • I SoKCiv Treaeiv av = "to remember that he is likely to fall" ; Thuc. vi. 34. 6 ■^yovp.ai . . . avTovs ovS' 334 GREEK AND LATIN H 10— xlix av airapat . ., aAA,' rj . . . k^uiardrjvai av . . ., rj . . . KaraXva-aL av tov ttAow = " that they would not even weigh anchor, but would either be pushed off, or would give up the expedition"; vi. 69. 1 ovk av olofxevot . . . eireXOiiv = " that they would come upon them" ; Xen. Anal). i. 9. 8 eTTia-Teve finjSev av irapa Tai crirovSas Tradeiv = " that he would experience no treatment contrary " ; Plat. Symp. p. 208 D otet . . . "AXKrja-TLV inrep 'ASfirjTOV dirodo.v€LV av, ■^ 'A)(tAA«a naT/30/a's future infinitives. lit^eAijo-eiv = "that it would certainly be for their advantage in the highest degree" ; Xen. Anab. ii. 3. 18 oijiai yap av ovk dxapio-T(i>s p-oi e^eiv = " I take it that the behaviour towards me will certainly not be " ; Plat. Oriton p. 53 C ovk otet a.a-xqjJ'OV av avei(r9ai . . . ; = "do you not think it would certainly appear?" (cf. Phaedr. p. 227 B ovk av o'iei, fie . . . Trotijo-ecr^at) ; Dem. de Cor. p. 276. 15 ov8kv av rjyetTO Trpoa-e^etv avn^ tov vovv = " in nothing certainly did he think that any one would attend to him." Add Thuc. ii. 80. 12 ; vi. 66. 1 ; viii. 25. 5 ; 71. 1 (respec- tively referred to above in this note, § 5) [vi. 50. 1 aTreKpivavTO TroAei fikv av ov Ss^acrdaL, dyopav 8' e^w irapi^eiv may or may not be an example] ; and Isocr. Antidos. p. 342. d., and Dem. Philipp. i. and v., and Lept. p. 467. 28 (respectively cited by the Grammarian in Bekker's Anecd. Gr. p. 127. 24 as mentioned in the same § of this note). 15. Is — even in the case of future time. Even in sucli 15. Addition of case, the condition is an existing present condition, although it iJ" to future tenses. may embody an idea not presently having, but only hereafter to have, an existence in fact. 1 6. In fact in 16. Effect of Plat, de Bepubl. ix. p. 579 D cWtv dpa rrj dX-ndda, k&v d f"^jj addition to / n«e«« / "J/ ^'^\ \ sucn, and to pre- IJ,ri T(p ooKy, o T(ff ovTi TVpavvoi T(p ovti oodAos k.t.A., a gent tenses. passage which, as explained elsewhere (note 180. 8 sqq. below), is equivalent to eo-Ttf av apa Trj dXrj&etiji, Kal el fir'j T^ SoKjy, we get an incidental confirmation of this, by the actual addition of the expression ry dAiy^et^ to the indicative with av : " so then it is in very truth in truth " = " it is in very very truth." Cf. the Irish phrases such as " I cannot understand at all at all " : for example — {Class. Rev. vi. 337). Of the same, too, was Jolin Wordsworth (Philol. Museum i. p. 236) ; while Dr. Rutherford [New Phrynichus p. 401), who has special a priori reasons, satisfactory to himself, for wishing to get rid of imeiaa itself as a form, scouts, as "absurd in Attic syntax," "the future participle with S.V." See, however, as to the form of the word, Heindorf ad Plat. Phaedon. p. 97 E ; Buttm. Irreg. Oh Vbs. s.v. Tm^a ; and, as to the construction of the futni'e with dv, Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Pals. Leg. p. 450. 27 (who cites in apposition Dem. de Cor. p. 276. 15 ; Leptin. p. 467. 28), and what is said in the Text and in this note. 336 GREEK AKD LATIN i6 Punoh, 29tli April 1893, p. 195 "devil a fish is there in it" — the stream — "at all at all, 'cept Wan, an' he's in my basket " ; and the Italian repetitions — " Or ora " Machiavelli {Mandrag. ii. 6 ; Parahosoo I Bvporti i. 9. p. 7. 4, ed. Torino 1853); "pian piano" (id. ib. i. 1. p. 18 extr. ; II Lasoa Le Oene i. 6) ; " intorno intorno " (Giovanni della Casa Sopra il Forno v. 106) ; "ben bene" (id. ih. vv. 3. 114); "allora allora " (id. del Martello v. 9; Berni a Messer Fracaatoro 113); "intero intero" (Giovanni della Casa del Baoio vv. 25, 85) ; "bel bello" (Nota II Filosofo Gelihe iii. 3) ; and the like. Of., too, the use of forte in Latin with the present subjunc- tive, which of itself denotes future possibility {infra note 22 a. 5), in such a phrase as Plaut. Mil. Glor. 1362. E. =iv. 8. 52 si forte liber fieri occ6perim, | mittam nuntium Ad t.e, cited in the Text § 179 (a). i6a. ilv with 1 6a. See, for example, Pind. 01 ix. 29 sqq. ; Mm. Ix. 34 sqq.; past indicative and the usage tabulated in the Text para. 21 (A') a i. tenses. ^ r \ / 17. Lucian 17. Cf. Lucian Pseudologist. Pseudologist § 2. 1743. 2 ; vol. iii. 655, ed. Eeitz 18. "would I have )( would have." 18. 1. The present- writer has, in placing first the case of indefinite frequency or recurrence, unconsciously reversed Mr. Maiden's order of stating the matter. See his remarks quoted above in note 1 2, 2 : "A verb in a past tense of the indicative mood, by itself, expresses an actual fact," etc. 2. Even in English the phrases "he vi^ould | have placed himself " ; " he would | have been placing " ; " he would | have- placed " = IcTT^Ket av, 'io-rrj av, ea-Trjo-ev av, as used in the sense of (A') a i. on the one hand ; and the phrases " he would have | placed himself " ; "he would have | been placing " ; "he would have I placed " = eo-TijKet av, 'uttt) av, ecrrrjcrev av, as used in the sense of (A') a ii. on the other hand ; are in fact, in result, the same, viz. — in either case "he would have placed himself"; "he would have been placing"; "he would have placed," there being no division marks or hyphens in use in actual life. Thus, as in Greek, so in English, the idea under considera- tion — to use Mr. Maiden's language — "presents itself in two" corresponding " shapes." l8al CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 337 i8a. 1. In the case of indefinite frequency or recurrence, in past time — corresponding to the use in Latin of solebam with an infinitive, — the idiomatic English use is that of the verb, in conjunction with (a) Occasionally (even in the third person) " should " : e.g. Aubrey (as quoted in the Olole newspaper, 24th Nov. 1883, p. 1) " when I was a boy our country people would talk much of elves. They swept up the hearth clean at night, and did set their shoes by the fire, and many times they should find three pence in one of them." (b) More usually " would " : e.g. Shaksp. Othello i. 3 "her father ... oft ...(.. . question'd me the story of my life : | . . . I ran it through . . . I . . . This to hear | would Desdemona seriously incline : | but still the house affairs would draw her thence : | which ever as she could with haste despatch | ahe'd come again and with a greedy ear | devour up my discourse " ; Spenser Faerie Queene ii. 2. 38. 3 "with equal measure she did moderate | the strong extremities of their outrage ; | that forward pair she ever would assuage, | when they would strive due reason to exceed " ; Bishop Fisher Sermon on the Lady Margaret " she was also of singular easiness to be spoken unto, and full courtayse answer she would make to all that came unto her"; Sheridan Bivals v. 1 "how often have I stole forth . . . and found him in the garden. . . . There would he kneel to me in the snow, etc."; Gray Elegy "there at the foot of yonder nodding beech, | . . . his listless length at noontide would he stretch " ; "Wolcot (Peter Pindar) Orson and Ellen c. ii. " many a lonely walk she took, I . . . ' Ah happy birds ' she oft would sigh . . . I . . . Thus in her soUtary walk | would Ellen say and sigh : I and then sweet ditties she would sing | of maids for life that die " ; Whately Kingdom of Christ, Essay ii. § 36 "as long as everything went on correctly in each church, and its doctrines and practices remained sound, there would be nothing to interrupt this orderly course of things. But whenever it happened that . . ., in any such case it became the duty of all those who perceived the inroads of such errors, to aim at the reformation of them " ; Dickens Pickwick vol. i. c. 6 (The Convict's Eeturn) " sometimes, when she stopped to exchange a few words with a neighbour at the conclusion of the service, . . . her care-worn face would lighten up with an expression of heartfelt gratitude ; and she would look, if not cheerful and happy, at least tranquil and contented " ; J. A. Z 1 8a. Idiomatic English expres- sion of indefinite frequency or re- currence. (i.) Past time. 338 GREEK AND LATIN i«a 1 Fronde Short Studies on Great Subjects ed. 2 (1867) p. 6 "and thus, consistently, Mr. Buckle cared little for individuals. ... As an illustration of the truth of his view, he would point to the new science of Political Economy"; Shorthouse Johri Inglesant vol. ii. c. 14 " cries of pain and terror were heard on all sides, and every now and then a maddened wretch would throw himself from a window, or would rush . . . from a house, and . . . would fling himself, etc." ; Walter Besant Bevolt of Man p. 112 (ed. 1882) "during these conversations the young man would clench his fist, etc." 2. This idiomatic English use should be remembered in translating Greek sentences of past time expressive of indefinite frequency or recurrence. Such are — to refer to only a few examples — (a) Past imperfect with ctv. Soph. Phil. 289 sqq. ("whatsoever it threw to me : I should be wriggling myself : I should be devising : there would be no fire: I should strike out"); Enr. Phoen. 401 ("I had : I should not have") ; Ar. Av. 520 (e corr. Porsoni ad Enr. Phoen. ic. = 412 ed. suae. And see below sub- note Ivc. Vulgo av omissum. "no one would swear"); Pac. 627 (cited by Pors. uhi sup: and see Codd. Eav. and Venet. '^ would eat up") ; Pac. 639 sqq. (" they would shake [see above, note 14. 10 {a) med.'\ : you would tear : whatsoever any one brought, it would gobble up : they would stop up : Greece would escape your atten- tion"); Eqq. 1348 ("your ears would be flapping open and shutting again "). (6) Past indefinite with av. > Ar. Nub. 1382 sqq. ("if soever you said: I would hold out to you : I would have come : you would no sooner say : I should be taking you out and hold you forth ") ; Lys. 510 sqq. ("we should hear: we should ask: so and so would say : I should not have been holding my peace : then we should say : he viould say to me "). 19. (ii.) Present 19. 1. Correspondingly to the idiomatic English use of the ti™6. verb in conjunction with " would " to express indefinite frequency or recurrence in the past, we have the use of the verb in con- junction with "shall" or "will," to express indefinite frequency or recurrence in the present — corresponding to the Latin soleo vrith an infinitive ; the future itself in Latin being occasionally used in the same way. See above note 8. 3. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 339 Thus— Dekker Shoemaker's Holiday p. 40 ed. Lond. 1873 "thou shalt never see a shoemaker want, though he have but three fingers on a hand." Ps. cxii. 5 (Prayer Book Version) " a good man is merciful and lendeth and will guide his words with discretion " ; Shaksp. Much Ado ii. 3 " she will sit you — you heard my daughter tell you how . . . She'ZZ be up twenty times a night, and there she will sit in her smock, till she have writ a sheet of paper"; Addison Spectator No. 112 "several other of the old knight's particularities break out upon these occasions. Sometimes he will be lengthening out a verse in the singing psalms half a minute after the rest of the congregation have done with it " ; id. ih. No. 224 " this is a weed that will grow in a barren soil " ; SheUey Revolt of Islam vii. 40 " the aea, like wind | which round some thymy cape wUl lag and hover, | though it can wake the still cloud, and unbind I the strength of tempest"; Keats Endymdon i. 209 "ye gentle girls who foster up | udderless lambs, and in a little cup I will put choice honey for a favour'd youth : | yea, every one attend " ; Mrs. Bury Palliser Brittany and its Byways p. Ill (ed. 1869) "the gardeners of Roscoflf will carry their produce above a hundred miles for sale." 2. " The same construction," says Professor Mariette (Half- hours of French Translation, Lond. 1863, pp. 54, 162), "is used in French, although but rarely, and we may therefore say " — ^in such a passage as that above cited from the Spectator No. 1 1 2 — " either il allonge parfois or U allongera parfois or il lui arrivera parfois d'allonger " ; but the construction of " would," in respect of past time, he says " does not exist in French, and the Imperfect of the Indicative should be used : il remarquait souvent que, etc." French usage in either case. 2o. Of the interchange of " shall " and " will " some instances have been given above in note 9, which see. Perhaps, without laying down any absolute rule, we might say that, when speaking of the second and third persons, we in English prefer to use " shall " in preference to " will," where we wish to express (1) Promise : Ps. i. 3 sqq. "he shall be like a tree planted by the waterside, etc." ; ih. xcii. 7 sqq. ; Jerem. xxviii. 9 ; Mrs. Manley's Secret Memoirs (ed. 1709) p. 131 "mark those curious images ! the carving, the whole architecture is admirable. As 'you enter, you shall pass through columns of marble pillars, numerous as the hours in a revolving year " ; Tennyson The Foresters iv. 1 " I have . . . | . . . 20. 'will. ' Shall ")( 340 GREEK AND LATIN 20 promised too, | . . . they shall be handled with all courteousness." (2) Threat: Shaksp. Macbeth v. 5 "if thou speak'st false, | upon the next tree shalt thou hang alive, | till famine cling thee " ; Ant. and Chop. ii. 5 " hence, | ... or I'll spurn thine eyes | like balls before me : I'll unhair thy head : | thou shalt be whipp'd with wire, and stew'd in brine." (3) Command: Exod. xxviii. 16 sqq. "foursc[uare it shall be . . . and thou shalt set in it settings of stones . . . they shall be set in gold in their inclosings " ; Fletcher Captain iv. 1 " I would not leave you. A. You must and shall." (4) Warning: St. Matth. xxiv. 24 "there shall arise false Ohrists, and false prophets : and shall shew great signs and wonders : insomuch that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very elect " ; — leaving " will " to express mere futurity. 21. "Should" 21. 1. Thus, as examples of "should," where more usually )(" would." we might have "would," take Shaksp. Rich. II. iii. 3 " but thou should'st please me better, would'st thou weep"; Ps. Ixxxi. 14 "if Israel had walked in my ways, I should soon have put down their enemies . . . The haters of the Lord should have been found liars, but their time should have endured for ever. He should have fed them with the finest wheat flour, and with honey out of the stony rock should I have satisfied thee " ; Middleton and Rowley The Changeling iv. 1 " well, if I'd thought upon the fear at first | man should have been unknown" ; Shirley Lady of Pleasure i. 1 " your master should | do well to send you back into the country " ; Whately Bampton Lectt. p. 180 "like men who should rashly venture to explore a strange land in utter darkness, they will be scattered into a thousand devious paths " ; J. C. Hare in Philol. Museum i. 207 " it is truly a blessed thing that we are not really possessed of Fortunatuses wishing- cap : one should never have a moment of calm and peaceful enjoyment." 2. We usually, in the English of the present day, use " would " where we wish merely to express that under such and such circumstances a man would do so and so. But we always retain " should " where a notion of duty or fittingness is also involved : e.g. 1 Sam. XV. 21 "the people took of the spoil ... the chief of the things which should have been utterly destroyed, to sacrifice unto the Lord thy God"; St. Matth. xviii. 33 " shouldest not thou also have had compassion . . . ? " 22 — 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 341 Shaksp. Macbeth v. 5 init. " were they not forc'd with those that should be ours, | we might have met them dareful, beard to beard, | and beat them backward home." A few lines later on in the same scene in Macbeth, we have an instance of both uses — "The queen, my lord, is dead. M. She should have died hereafter : 1 there would have been a time for such a word." (shouW) or Vhave been placing, 21a. would] Greek; (B') a In transla- tion. 22. The use of av with the present subjunctive as an equivalent in independent sentences to the future indicative is common enough in the old language. See Mr. Maiden in PUlol. Museum i. pp. 97 sqq. ; and also Elmsley on Ax. Ach. 733. The subsequent disuse of the form of expression, although general, was not universal; albeit that critics have done their best to correct it away from our texts. Thus we find it, even in what remains to us of classical literature, in Aesch. Ag. 1347 KoivoxraJyue^' av (where Porson would prefer Koi,v(Mraifj,€6' av) ; Lysias Eratosth. p. 127. 44 kireiStj . . . ovK av Svvriarde (where Bekker would give the palm to Svvaurde) ; Xen. Anah. ii. 5. 19 ; v. 6. 9 respectively cited in the Text § 80 and note 137 ; ' Hippocr. (?) de Articul. i. p. 1 Xenophon is an author, whose claims to rank as a "genuine Attic writer" have been more than challenged by Dr. Rutherford. Indeed that learned writer goes so far as, in point of language, to dismiss him altogether, summarily and contemptuously, as "past praying for." {Jfew Phrynichus, passim, and especially pp. 67, 109 sqq., 115 sqq., 160 sqq., 203.) Whatever opinion may be reasonably entertained upon the subject of the language of Xenophon, that language has to be dealt with as a fact. Moreover the purpose of the present writer is not so eclectic as that of the head-master of Westminster, the problem set before himself by whom is merely the investiga- tion of "the language of Mie Athenian people" (iVew Phrynichus p. viii. etc.) The task of the present writer is, in humble suit of those great ones, who, as Archdeacon Hare says (PhUol. Mus. i. 208), were "distrustful of all theoretical speculations, convinced that in language usage is all in all," to ascertain, in every case, what the .Greek writers, of all ages, and in all dialects, said, in point of fact ; and then to consider, whether what they said in point of fact is or is not " ungrammatioal, that is, unmeaning from the very nature of the language" (Mr. Maiden Philol. Mus. i. p. 97), or, in other words, is or is not good Greek. The use of av with the present subjunctive as an equivalent to the future indicative in independent sentences is to be tested in this way. It was not in fact an ungrammatical use. It was admittedly common in the older language. Grant that it gradually waned into obsoleteness, yet a later -wTiter might on occasion have availed himself of it without violation of grammatical propriety. Did later writers ever in fact do so ? The MSS. answer the question in the affirmative. What right have critics to say that their testimony is false ? 22. Sk with pre- sent subjunctive in independent sentences = future indicative. Xenophon : his Si2 GREEK AND LATIN 791. R = iii. p. 161. 6. K. ; ift. p. 813. F. = iii. p. 202. 7. K. av TToirja-Q ; Auctor Praedict. i. in Hippocr. i. p. 95. F. = i. p. 203. 16. K. iiSy av ; Aristot. Eth. Magn. i. 2. 2 av Bvv7]Tai. 22a. Connection between subjunc- tive and future indicative — in Greek ; 22a. 1. The connection in form, as well as in meaning, between the present indefinite subjunctive in aoristic form {ypd\ptD, -gs, -jj) and the future indicative (ypdipoi, -eis, -et) is noteworthy. 2. Hermann {ad Fig. App. p. 742) speaks of the future as seemingly "ex conjunctivo aoristi . . . ortum " ; whence, he adds, " factum est, ut usu etiam simillimum esset conjunctivo : recentiores saepe ipso futuro pro conjunctivo usi esse reperiuntur, e.g. Theocr. xxvii. 21." Compare the interchange of moods in Theognis 973 KaXv^ei (so the MSS. : KaXvxpy is a mere correction of Turnebus), and KaTafSy ; Thuc. vi. 18. 4: tVa (Tropk(r(iiii£v, and ap^ofxev, KaKhXTO/ieV. 3. Mr. Maiden's teaching was (on Xen. Anai. ii. 3. 18, Univ. Coll. Lond. 1849-50) to the effect, that in the earliest form of Greek there was probably no future tense, the latter having seemingly arisen from the subjunctive of the aorist; that in Homer the aorist subjunctive with av or ke was used as exactly equivalent to a future, e.g. ypd^xi av="he will write"; corresponding to the use, in all ages of Greek, of the past subjunctive vnth dv, e.g. ypdfeiev av="he would write"; that the subjunctive showing that something may happen, the addition of dv asserted that under certain conditions the same thing mil happen ; and that when the two sets of forms -crw, -ergs, -cry and -o-w, -erets, -crei both got into use, the former were restricted to the subjunctive and the latter to the indicative, and that, when the latter became used as in themselves denoting a future indicative, the addition of dv to them gradually fell into disuse. Cf. Archdeacon Hare's remarks {Philol. Museum ii. pp. 221, 222) upon the "instinct which in all languages is evermore silently at work in desynonymising words, as Coleridge terms it, and giving definiteness to the speech of a people in proportion as its thoughts become more definite." -in Latin. 4. Equally noticeable is, in Latin, the connection in form, as well as in meaning, between the present perfect subjunctive (scripserim, -is, -if) and the future perfect indicative (a -is. At), 22b 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 343 Not less worthy of notice, again, is, in Latin, the connection in form, as -well as in meaning, between the present imperfect or indefinite subjunctive (scribam, -as, -at) and the future imperfect or indefinite indicative (scribam, -es, -et). 5. Thus, to put the whole matter into a shape appealing to the eye, we have (a) In Greek — ypa.\j/ri = he will possibly, perhaps, write = ypa\pti ia-m. ypaxpyj av = he will write = ypa^ei. (yS) In Latin— scribam, -as, -at | J ^^ I possibly,) be writing, write scripserim, -is, -it j | j^^ ^.^j^ j perhaps, 1 have written _ , f scribam, -es, scribam, -es, -et \\ = jtVou'wiltlreally jj'^ "^'''^^S, write] ■'*) [he will J 'pave written J 6, See further. Text §§ 162 sqq.; and for Madvig's idea that scripserim is merely the subjunctive form of the indicative scripsero, note 242 below. 7. As will be there seen, the present writer does not agree with him in so thinking ; but it is interesting to recall the fact that Aulus G-elUus (xviii. 2 extr.) tells us that in his time, at a Aul. Gell. xviii. Roman literary banquet in Greece, one of the questions discussed ^ ^^*''- " haec fuit : scripserim, venerim, legerim, cujus temporis verba sint, praeteriti an futuri an utriusque." 22b. 1. Consider, for example, such a passage as Herod, iii. 22b. Usage in 36 cited in the Text § 71 ; where we have d p.lv pterap.eX'^a-ei ^^'^^^^^f\^ ^?S; followed by rjv Se jxri yuera/teX'^Tat = £t Sc p/fj p,eTap,eXfJTai av. Cf. present subiunc- Text § 29. tive = future in- Compare also such expressions as a Xe^ets and a civ Aeyijs, dicative. Ae^s = a Aeygs av, Ae^s av, etc. 2. So in Latin, where there is nothing corresponding to the Latin usage. Greek av, we have the future perfect indicative used as the correlative of the Greek present indefinite subjunctive in aoristic form, with av. Thus Cicero's (Tusc. i. 43. 103) si me assequi potueris aut sicubi naotus eris, represents Plato's (Phaedon p. 115 C) kav irkp ye 344 GREEK AND LATIN 22b 2 — li-lii Xd/SrjTi fj.£ Kal fifj eK(j)vy(i> v/ias ; and again Cicero's (Arat. 442 =rr. 32. 198 ed. Buhle) sin gravis incident vehementi flamine ventus, is the Latin reproduction of Aratus' {Phaenom. 442) el Se ke vrji | vipoOev IjUTrAij^g Seivlj dvefioio dveXXa \ avT(os aTTpOffiaTos. 23. Throwing 23. 1. On this use of an " anticipative av," even "in a back smd repeti- ynrong clause," and at the cost of repeating it once, and even ally ° ""2®°^^" twice, and even, yet again, occasionally thrice, and at the shortest of intervals, for the purpose of " showing as early as possible that a sentence is intended to be contingent," see Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 22. 1 and 76. 4 ; who cites as examples Aesch. Ag. 345 (reading av dfXTrXdKrjros : as to which, however, see note 68 below) ; 1048 ; Suppl. 271 ; Eur. Ak. 122 (need- lessly Monk accepts ^X.6' av for ^XOev. See too below note 124a). 2. The present writer has noted three examples of a thrice repeated av : viz. — Soph. Fr. Inc. 789 Dind. = 669 Nauck irai av ovk dv h SiKy I ddvoifi dv : Eur. Androm. 934 ovk dv eV y' i/j.oi'S So/x,ots I pXeirova-' dv avyd'S ra/i eKapirovr' dv Xi-)(y] : Tro. 1244 d^avets dv ovres ovk dv v/j,vrj6eliJLev dv | fMyvaaii. Of the commoner two-fold use, the following examples, out of — really — any number, may — if it be worth while — be added to those cited by Mr. Shilleto wbi supra : — Horn. II. xiii. 127; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 139. 602. 857. 862"; PMl. 290. 1037 ; El. 333. 439. 558 ; Ant. 69. 466 ; Aj. 525. 537. 1058. 1073 ; Track 21 ; Eur. Med. 250 ; Suppl. 417. 447 ; Iph. Taur. 1020 ; Ion 223 ; Hippocr. (?) de Prise. Medicin. i. p. 9. P. = i. p. 27. 12. K. ; Ar. Nub. 1056. 1383 ; Ach. 214; Av. 1147 ; Thesm. 830; Lys. 360'"; Thuc. ii. Soph. 0. T. 862. Confusion of ov and a. el 'vi] Ala : Jiercle : "if my honour. " li oiiS^v yap cLV irpd^aifi B.if &v 01) (xol (plXov. y^p oSv for yap &v was a need- less suggestion of the present writer (Journal of Sacred and Classical PMlology vol. i. p. 385). To the examples, however, there mentioned of the confusion of ov and a, add the double reading dTroXXiioi/irt and 6,iroWia(n in Thuc. iv. 25. 5 and vi. 51. 2 (ubi vid. Arnold) ; and the omission in one MS. of Dem. Onet. ii. p. 878. 16 tI fnaWov Ibv oHv k.t.X, of the av before oSv. And see below, subnote Ivc 2. ^^ el VT) Al' ijSii . . . Tis . . . I iKo^ev, . . . ij>oiv^v &v oiK &v elxov. "I do not despair," says Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 76. 4, "of finding what I am all but sure I have read in an English author, ' if on my honour — on my word — by Jove — you do so, I will . . . ' " Add to his Greek examples Ar. Vesp. 1404 el v^ Al' . . . \ irvpois irplaio, 23 2— liii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 345 94. 2 ; VL II. 4 ; Xen. Mem. iii. 9. 2 ; Oyr. i. 6. 22 ; Plat. Protag. p. 318 B ; Gorg. p. 514 D (where the anteplaced av coalesces with Kal and makes Kav ; as to which see further Text § 116a, and note i8o. 2 (2) below).!^" In passages such as the following, the av, which belongs to —so as to place it the principal verb, is thrown forward — sometimes repeated, beside an unallied sometimes not — in such a way as that it stands beside a ^ ^ ' participle, with which, however, it, of course, has no connection whatever : — Hippocr. (?) de Articul. i. p. 81 1. P. = iii. p. 197. 1 Y. K. o r eKTrrj- Sijtras a-TTOvSvXo's Tne^oi av tov vfartaiov, el [jo] koI aTropprq^m. irtei^^EJS 6' av Koi aTToXeXajxiJ^vo's TroXXoiv av Kal /jueyaXoyv Kal eiriKaipmv aTrovapKiocnv iroirjcreiev : Ar. Ach. 920 evSek av £S Tir]V ... I aij/ai av eunri/Mtf/eiev eh to veiiipiov : Thuc. vi. 18. 6 Kal voiJ,iavXov Kai rh pA(Tov Kal TO jravu aKpijih av ^vyKpadev paXuTT av uTX^ei'V (ubi vid. Arnold (citing Poppo) ; see also Mr. Shilleto on i. 76. 4): Xen. Cyr. i. 3. II o-toIs av . . ., Xeyoiji av : Mem. i. 4. 14 ovre yap /Sobs av 4'xwv a-Sp,a, avOpunrov Se yv(op,r]V, eSvvaT' av irpaTTeiv a e^ovXero, ovd' K.T.X.: Y\3,Xi. Phaedon p. 1 01 G atv Se SeStois civ . . . ti)v crauTou crKiav . . ., oiVios avoKpivaio av : Minos p. 321 D Tt av diroKpivdpevoi ovk av ala-xvvdeipev . . . ; Polit. p. 301 D ytvd/ievov y av olov Xeyopev, dyaTratrOal re av koX K.T.X. : Dem. Philvpp. i. p. 40. I sqq. eTria-xi>v av ecus ot TrXeicTTOi Ttov eliadoTWV yvmpajv aTreffj-qvavTO, . . . r]vyoi Tas etrra ij/iepas. Herod, ii. 174 ol S' av piv v ToXefduv. 24 3— Iv CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 347 Philon. p. 189. 36 '^j Isaeus de Pyrrh. Mered. pp. 41, 42 ; 43. 5; Plat. Ale. Pr. p. 105 A (ubi vid. Buttm.) ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 342. 12. We have instances of av unattracted under sucli circum- stances in such instances as the following : — (i.) oifjMLi : Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 345. 10 sqq. (ii.) -qyovfiai : Isocr. de Bigis p. 349. a. (ill.) SoKw : Soph. .4j. 1078 ; Dem. PUl. 1. p. 48. 22. Whilst in a passage such as Thuc. vi. 37. 1 we get attraction (and repetition) and non-attraction side by side : /^dAts S' av /iot 8oKODcriv . . . ovK av jravTaTraa-L SLadaprjvai . . ., rb Se ^vfJtTrav ov8 av KpaTrjcrai avTovs t^s yrj^ ■^yovfi.ai. 4. The desire on the part of the speaker to emphasise the —into a wrong fact that his sentence is conditional led also — in ordinary clause, sentences — to a constant repetition of av, subsequently to its first introduction, and even in a wrong clause. Thus Eur. Her. 721 9a,vois S' av ovk av (cf. Iph. Taur. 245 ; Ar. Feci. 118) ; Ar. San. 96 yovifiov Se TroiijTtjv av ov)(^ evpoLs eVi I fijTwv av (of. supra note 14. 10 (a) med., and infra note 162); ib. 914 o 8e )(op6'S y rjpuZev opp.aOov's av | /icAwv €(j!)c^ijs TETTajoas ^i;ve;(5s av. 24. 1. The English conjunction "so" is, probably, akin to 24. "So" in the relative, as also the Latin conjunction si [as to this, see English, below note 25. 4]. See Mr. Key The Origin of the Demonstrative Pronouns, etc. ; Philological Society's Transactions, vol. iii. no. 57, pp. 57 sqq. 2. The Latin adverb sic is, probably — see Mr. Key, ubi Sin, sic, si in supra — the very same word as regards the first two letters, the Latin. final c being the same appendage as that which appears at the end of hie, nunc, tunc, etc. 3. The original Latin word was — see largely for what follows in §§ 3 to 5, and 7 and 8 hereof, Mr. Key Lat. Diet. s.vv. 1^ ?Tt 5^ dvBv/J.'fiSriTe iroiuv &v vfuv SoKet oSros SpKUv (ppovrlaai, Ss k.t.\. Note ivSv/i-fiBriTe followed by, not an indirect, but a direct form of speech. Still more startling examples of the same thing are : Thuc. i. 121. 7 ? Setpov &v etq el ol /J^v . . . oiK direpoOcnv, ij/ieTs d' . . , oix dpa Sairav^ffo/Mev (ubi vid. Mr. Shilleto) ; Lys. de Eratosth. caed. p. 123. 25 oSkovv Seuidv d toi>s fi^v (TTparriyois . . . Bavdrifi ilyip.uliaaTe, . . ., roirovs 5^ St; . . . oix dpa xf"l . . . TOis ia-x^rais fij/iiais Ko\dfe '''''' '"'^ ivavrla /laprvpeX' i/ieh Si yvbvTes lis oiK direlXriip' iKeivot, oiK l from the second half of the sentence being thrown back from the side of the ^a-av to which it does belong to the foregoing half, in order to give early notice of its advent, and when there coalescing with the birbre with which it has no real affinity. But (1) S.V is not usually so thrown back, except to give timely warning that a sentence in appearance absolute is contingent only, which is not this case ; (2) if S.V belonged to ^jav, it is difficult to see why the surrounding verbs irepiijv, oris t' ?ii>, iKpdTct, are without it ; (3) the whole run of the passage seems to require the past imperfects without, rather than with", S,v. And there would seem little doubt that the right reading is birbre yoOk dvayKacrBeltijj.ev : "whensoever we were compelled, the rest were nowhere." 2. The scribe in turning birdre into oirbrav had his eye misled by the im- mediately succeeding combinations of letters, viz. — ovv in 7oCy — [for mishaps between ou and a, see for example Soph. Oed. Col. 980 oi yhp odv aiyijaoiMi, where the Vatican MS. has oiy&p &v, uiyilijoifmi : Eur. Med. 585, where what is probably the correct reading, Ip yhp iKTevel a' liros, appears in one of the Vatican MSS. (the same by the way as that of Sophocles just referred to ; see Elmsl. Praef. ad Soph. Oed. Col. p. iv.) in the shape of li> y&p oSc k. n t., 25 7 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 359 eTTEt . Theogn. 275 ; Xen. Gyr. i. 6. 40. £7retS^ : Ar. Ach. 637 ; Thuc. vii. 44. 8 ; Xen. Mem. i. 2. and in the Florentine MS. as iv yi,p &ii k. ov (v.l. iJKovTo — whence Arnold edits Xkovto — the last syllable being merely due to the following article rb : see Mr. Shilleto's note on Thuc. i. 99. 3). (6) Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1340, where what appears to the writer to be the real Soph.O.J'.1340. reading — see his reasons at large in Journal of Philology ix. pp. 71-74 — viz. — airayer' eKTOiriov oTt rdj^KTroi /le, airdyer ' w^eAetr' bKe0pi6v fiey^ TOv KarapaTOTtLTOv, ert 5e koX 9eoi^ txBporaTov Ppordv — — with the repetition of the verb in which cf. Soph. Aj. 394 lui o-k^tos, ipibv 0(ios, I Ipepos (I tpaivvbraTOv, lis ipAil, \ tKeaO' l\e viKpbs Beois — has, in the second line, been by a similar process of misreading corrupted, first, into the ungrammatical aTrayer', & iAoi, TOV o\e6pov fisyav [there is a similar grammatical blunder in Mr. Kenyon's edition of Aristotle's Ar. 'A6. voX. c. *A$7jv. TToX. c. 61 : iTTip^XovvTcu . . . &TUJS 6 iv dyopq, ffiTos dpybs &yios ^irrat 51. Sixalas. He admits that the reading is a little doubtful. 6 (tTtos dpybs cannot be right], and thence by a still further — pace Professor Jebb ad I. — drift away in the wrong direction into airayeT, 3i ^lAoi, rov fUy oAedpiov. (c) Plant. Pseud. 859. E. =iii. 2. 70 si quo hie gradietur, pdriter tu [omitted in Plaut. Ps. 859. the MSS., no doubt in consequence of the last preceding syllable of pariter, and E. =iii. 2. 70. inserted by Ritschl on comparison with J/3. 6lor. 610.E.=iii.l. 16] progrMimino. [d) Tao. Ann. xiii. 15 (as restored by Preinshemius) modo ipsius indolem, Tac. Ann. xiii. levi quidem experimento nuper oognitam (corrupted in the Medicean MS. into 15. indolem, ut quidam ; presumably through the steps indolS leui quidem : indole ui quidem : indole ut quidem : indole ut quidam). See further Ar. Av. 520, and Pac. 627, respectively cited in note i8a. 2 Ar. Av. 520; above ; in both of which &y disappeared, in consequence of a succeeding word Pac. 627. &v6ptlnrav in the first case, and of a succeeding word dvSpoiv in the second. See Pors. on Eur. Phoen. 401 (=412 ed. suae). And again Cic. ^o Mosc. Amer. 43. 124 venio nunc ad illud nomen aureum Cic. pro Rose. Chrysogoni, sub quo nomine tota societas statuitur ; where, says Madvig Opusc. Am. 43. 124. Acad, p.- 185, " colrupit hunc locum unius literulae duplicatio, quam alterius mutatio consecuta est : nam pro societasstatuit scribendum est societaslatuit. " 360 GREEK AND LATIN 25 7— Ivd 57 ; iii. 8. 9 ; Plat. Protag. p. 315 B; Phaedon p. 59 D ; Dem. Mid. p. 563. 20. oo-aKts : Plat. Theaet. p. 143 A ; and if we find, too, such collocations accompanied by a past indicative with civ, expressive of indefinite recurrence, as an apodosis ; as we do in the case of a past subjunctive with the relative ; : Soph. Phil. 289. OCTTtg : Ar. Nub. 854 ; Pac. 643. OTTOTC ; At. Av. 505. OTTWS : Herod, ii. 174 ; iv. 42. (is : Herod, i. 196. ItteiStj : At. Ban. 923 ; we find exactly the same collocations after ei, as will have been seen in the examples collected above in the Text § 47, under the heading (B) a i. 8. If, further, we find the present subjunctive, expressive of mere possibility, in attendance upon the relative; Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 257 ; Evm. 336 ; Eur. Med. 516. oTTOv : Eur. El. 972. ews : Soph. Track. 144 sjg.'^'l we have the same constructions with d shown to us above in the Text § 48, under the heading (B) b ii. 9. Again, if we find the tenses of the indicative mood with av, a construction denoting contingencies on their way from actual facts to possibilities, accompanying a relative or a relatival particle — the av, which goes with and belongs to the verb, never- theless thrown forward in the sentence from the side of the verb, to which it does belong, to that of the relative or relatival particle, to which it does not in any sense belong ; and — ^where it is possible for it under such circumstances so to do — coalescing Soph. Tr. 144 l"* The passage is tA yap ve&iov . . . | . . . ijSovais fi;[iox5oi' i^alpei jSiox sqq. I 4i ToSB', luis Tis ivrl irapShov ywii \ K\r]6y, \d^ri t ii> vvktI ippovTlSwv fi4pos = " irntil the time when one may have-assumed the name of matron instead of maiden, and taken up a share, etc.," which of course never may happen. 0. T. 1492, B contra Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1492 6XK' rivW Kv St] irpbs ydii,ai> ^jkjjt' dKfids= "when you shall have arrived at," hecause, their lives lasting, this time must come. See above subnote xxxv. Aesch. Biim. So we have, in Aesch. Hum. 336 just cited above, Bvarwv roinv airovpylai. 336. ^vinriaijinv /jArawi, \ rois onapreTv, 6(pp' &p 70)' ixAffj;. It is by no means a matter of course that men should commit murder ; but it is a certainty that they will die, and so go beneath the earth. ^S 10 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 361 with the relative or relatival particle ; if, for example, we find such sentences as (a) Thuc. i. 33. 2 ^v . . . civ . . . krii^craa-ee. Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 350. 3 ovtiv av . . . Karea-Trja-aTe Kai . . . eiroiija-are. Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 46 1. 20 orav . . . ■^v. Auotor de loc. in homin. in Hippocr. i. p. 415. P. = ii. p. 124. 15. K. eirrjv . . . ^vvia-TrjKCL (accompanied by e'xj?). Hesiod Op. et JDi. 121 eiret Kev [eTreiSrj Plat. Cratyl. p. 397 E ; who, generally, misquotes the passage] . . . KaXv^ev. Lys. Alcib. ii. p. 144. 42 Suvhv . . . toiis crrpaT'qyov's . . . fir] av ToX/iTjo-at wporepov v/xiav rjyria-(jiv rS /xe ju,aAA.ov av iroirj. Xen. Cyr. i. 1. 2 ^ av . . . evOvvoxriv. Soph. El. 946 ocrovTrep av crdevw ; Eur. Suppl. 460 ocr' av Ta^jj Tts. Xsn. i7e22. ii. 2. 20 oVot av '^ylavTai. Soph. Aj. 1369 (OS av 7roHjo-gs = " howsoever you shall have- acted"; 1117 (OS av ^s = " however you shall be," "pro- vided you shall be " ; PfeiJ. 1330 (osav . . . I . . . aipy, . . . Syvy = " as it shall." Hyperid. c. Athenog. col. 3. 1. 3 ore av a-oi SoKy. Soph. El. 386 orav Trep . . . lioXy ; 437 oVav Oavrj ; 1299 orav yap evTyxqa-w/iev ; Thuc. i. 121. 1 orav d,[ivvwp.e9a ; Xen. Mem. iv. 3. 8 orav . . . ytvijrat; Plat. Lys. p. 217 D orav . . . eTraydyri, Ar. Nub. 618 rjviK' av xl/eva-dwri. Aesch. Pers. 230 eSr' av . . . ixoXiaixtv ; Agam. 766 evr' av . . . p^Xy. Ar. Av. 489 OTrorav . . . any. Horn. n. xxiv. 77 hrifv dydywpi ; Moschus Epitaph. Bion. 106 eKav . . . 6X(ovrai. Aesch. Eum. 647 iireiSav alp dvaxnrdari Kovts''*; Thuc. ii. 72. 7 JireiSav fie TrapiXOy ; Xen. Mem. iv. 3. 8 eTretSav . . . TpdTrrjTai; 'Pint. Apol. p. 41 E eTretSav rj/iya-ioa-i ; Bep. i. p. 329 eTretSav . . . Travo-oiVTat . . . Kal \aXdcr(i)(Ti. Xen, Anab. v. 1. 4 ott' av cy(b tXdo) ; Mem. iii. 5. 6 etrr' av Se . . . Set(7"(o(rtv. Thuc. ii. 72. 6 eios av 6 TroXepo^ y ; Xea. Anab. y. 1. 11 e(os av . . . yevTjTat ; Mem. iv. 8. 2 e(os av . . . iiraveXdy ; Plat. Phaedon p. 77 E sj?. e«)s av k^iwjxrrfe. (c) Cases in which there is a repetition of the civ (or its equivalent) : — Theognis 723 orav Se /ce tZv diK7)Tai | &py. Solon Fr. 24. 5 (e conj. Hermanni) iiryv Kev ravT d(f)iKriTa<,; Theocr. xi. 78 xtxA-iVSovrt Se iraa'at, eir^v k avrais VTraKouro), corresponding uses with ct are put before us in the examples •'* The passage in full is: AvSpbs S' iveiSit,v al/i' ivaffirdari k6vis I &Ta^ Aesch. Eum. BavSvTos oins Icrr' dvAaraffis : witli the sentiment of which of. v. 261 of the same 261, 647. play : al/j-a fiijTpQov x"/"*' I SvaayKbiuarov, ttottoi, | t6 Siepii' iriSif x^l''^'">'' otxeroA.. And see below subnote cix. 5. 364 GREEK AND LATIN 25 10 " Soever," " ever " as the translation of 6k. relative etc. with present subjunct- ive -with dc. gathered together above in the Text §§ 53-55, and also note 95, under the respective headings (B') a and (B') &. 11. In sentences such as those in division (S) of the last section, English translators constantly bring in the phrase " soever," " ever '' ; translating, for instance, Agathon's (Fr. Inc. 5. 2) oo-cr O.V y TreTT pay [leva by "whatsoever, whatever shall have been done " ; and so on. Mr. Kenrick, indeed, in the letter already (para. 3 of this note) referred to, even goes so far as to suggest that " ever " may be the English " equivalent " of the " inherent force of av," and express the " modification which its use superinduces." The use of " soever,'' " ever," in such cases is not in itself in- correct ; but it is, in fact, as we have already seen, not so to be justified, but in the following way : — (Agathon uhi supra) iUra-' av y '7reTrpayfieva = as or oVus, to which it does not in any sense belong. We get thus an appearance, but only an appearance, of a use of (OS or oTTws with the present subjunctive as distinguished from a use of (lis av or ottios av with the present subjunctive. Examples of (6) are 26 4 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 365 (a') Aesch. Prom. V. 8 roiaaSe roi \ dfiaprias a-(f>e Set Oeoh Sovvai SUrjv, j^ (is av BiSaxOy ("so that he shall learn") tyjv Atos TvpavviSa I a-Tepyeiv; 651 sqq.; 706 ; Sii^pl. 492 sqq.; 518. 930 ("in order that you shall know") ; Agam. 911 ; Herod, viii. 7 ; Eur. Bacc/i. 510; Phoen. 92; Or. 1099; Ar. Av. 1454 ; 1509 ; 1549 ; Eccl. 57. 299 ; Thesm. 601 ; Thuc. vi. 91. 4 ("so that he shall organise" ; Arnold ad I. wrong). See Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 33. 1. We have a contrast of, subjunctive without, and subjunctive with, av in Aesch. Cho. 983 eKreivar avrov, Kal kvkXo) TrapaxrraShv \ a-Teyaarpov dvSpiov Sei^ad', ws 'iSy Trar-qp, | ovx ovfioi, dXk' 6 irdvT eTTOTTTevoiv rdSe | "HXios, dvayva p.tjTph'S epya Tijg c/t^S, I (US dv Traprj p,oi juaprns ev StKy 7roT€, | (Ss r6v8' lyo) iJLi-rijkdov evStKcos p,6pov \ tov pjtjrpo^ = " so that the Father may see " : " so that he shall be present " ; and compare Ar. Plut. 112 troi 8 cos av elS-gi Sera, Trap fjiuv fjv p^evys, | yevTJa-er' dyadd, Trp6cr£)(e tov vovv, 'iva irvOrj = " in order that you shall appreciate " : " so that you may learn." (6') Hom. Od. iv. 545 ireipa, ottcos kcv Sy crrjv irarpiSa yalav iKijai ("so that you shall come"); Soph. Oed. Gol. 575 ; Ar. Ran. 1361 sqq.; Av. 1457; Lys. 539 sqq.; Plat. Prolog, p. 326 A ; Gorg. p. 523 D ; Bep. iv. p. 423 D ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 437. 2 sqq. ^26. 1. Of course et can be used with the infinitive in the 26. ei— within- indirect speech, as in Herod, ii. 64 cited in Text § 129 (y) ; iii. finitive in indirect 105 cited ib. § 131 (y) ; and iii. 108 cited ib. § 133 (y) ; and 'P'^'^'' ' Thuc. iv. 98. 3 cited ib. § 139 (y). 2. It cannot be used with a participle. See Comm. ad Solon, —with participle. Fr. 4. 30 (int. al. Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 422. 25) ; Pind. 01. ii. 56 (int. al. Donaldson in Journal of Sacred and Classical Philology i. pp. 221, 222) ; Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 25. 3. In connection with rts, irov, and the like, where it is some- Soph. Aj. 886. times found in the company of a participle, as in Soph. Aj. 886, either the d is (with Elmsl. on Soph. Aj. 179 in Mus. Grit. i. p. 353) to be taken as pleonastic, or — perhaps better — (with Herm. ad Soph. Aj. ll.cc.) there is an ellipse of a finite verb, to be implied. 4. On Eur. Med. 368 SoKeis yap dv fic rovSe Oomeikrab ttot dv, Eur. Med. 368. I et p,y Tt KepSaivovcrav r) Texvutpivrjv (cited in Text § 91 extr.), Elmsley approves Reiske's statement that d is ex abvmdanti; adding "rarius el p.y" — sc. than [irj alone; of which he cites as 366 GREEK AND LATIN 26 4— Ivi examples Eur. Hipp. 1331; Alexis K.ovpk Fr. i. 6; add Dem. ad Boeot. p. 1001. 9, and Schaf. ad I. — "cum participio." Eur. M. 538. 5. In such a passage as Eur. HI. 538 d Koi yijv /cao-tyvijTos fwX(av, either supply otti, or, better, €)(ei ; so that /xoXuv exei = practically a perfect, "he is come." Cf. Oav/xda-a's e'xw, Soph. FMl. 1362; dn/iao-as e'xe', Eur. Med. 33; iprji/.iJkrai e)(e, id. ib. 90, etc. And see Valck. ad Eur. Phoen. 705 ( = 712 ed. suae) and Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 30. 1. 26a. Common 26a. The common assertion is just the reverse; making, as view of the collo- it does, the av belong to the et and not to the verb. Cf. Jelf Gr. l=]d°)^ '' *" ^- §§ *28, 828; Liddell and Scott s.v. S.v, C. (ed. ii.) As to the corresponding usage with the relative and relative particles, see above note 25. 10 sqq. 27. di> (with a 27. 1. av, with the u, long, in the sense of " if," can scarcely long) =" if." ^je gaid to be used by — at any rate — the older tragic writers, so far as they remain to us.'" Tragicus Incertus Fr. 55. 3 o-iS' av avayKoa-Oek rts du Spda-rj Tivd, I TTporrrjKov oTp,ai T(o8' 6(peiXep6cf>ov is almost admittedly a correction, without anything of authority offered in its favour. Soph. Oed. Tyr. ^^ Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1062 ai iikv ydp, odS' &v ix rplrrii iyCi | /iriTpbs avSi 1062. TplSovKos, iKtjiavei KaK^i — a much-vexed passage, thus appearing in Dindorf's text — is at any rate not ad rem in the present connection, as the &v is short and not long. One MS., Aug. C, has oi)S' ihv iK Tplrrjs, whence Hermann (ad Vig. note 304) proposed to read oiS' itiv Tplrris lyVTev6riTL iv Ty OaXdcrcrrj • koi, virrjKOVcrev av vfiiv = " if ye had possessed faith, ye would have been saying . . . and it would have obeyed you," wrongly the A. V. has " if ye had faith, ye might say . . and it should obey you." Wrongly the E. V. " if ye have faith, ye would say," but rightly " and it would have obeyed you." 39. Caesar re- 39- Cf., in Latin, the building up of such a sentence as diisse fertur. Gaesar rediisse fertw = {Caesar rediif)s fertur, the s being the symbol of the nominative case affixed to the idea Caesar rediii, which is the nominative to the verb fertur. See Key's Latin Grammar § 9 1 1 note. "Somebody Cf. also the English collocation {somebody else)s for somebody's else's." else. 40. Protases ex- 40. 1 . This must be remembered when — as presently men- pressive of actual tioned in the Text, and as occasionally happened — the apodosis facts''"" ""^ °^ ^^*^^ ^ sentence was omitted. In such a case, the remaining protasis bore upon its face nothing at all to show whether it expressed an actual or a conditional fact. 2. We find occasionally in modern languages, where there is no equivalent to the Greek av, sentences of the kind under mention in the Text; with their protases, although really ex- pressive of conditional facts only, yet in form expressive of actual facts; the apodoses alone showing that the facts dealt with in the whole sentences are but conditional. Thus we have (a) in English — Shaksp. Hamlet ii. 2 " who this had seen . . j 'gainst fortune's state would treason have pronounc'd : | but if the gods them- selves did see her then, | . . • the instant burst of clamour that she made, | . . . would have made milch the burning eyes of heaven, | and passion in the gods " ; Dekker i. Hon. TVh. i. 1 p. 6 " if the Duke had but so much mettle in him, as is in a cobbler's awl, he would ha' been a vext thing." (^) in Italian — Bibbiena La Calandrla v. 12 "se tu non eri, forse ucciso stato- sarei " ; Machiavelli Mandrag. ii. 5 " se io credevo non aver 41 1— Iviia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 377 figliuoli, io arei preso piuttosto per moglie una con- tadina " '™* ; iii. 9 " questo tristo di Ligurio ne venne a me con quella prima novella per tentarmi, acci6 se io non gliene consentiva, non mi arebbe detta questa " ; Discors. sopra Tit. Livio iii. o. 49 p. 307 (ed. Lond. = Leghorn 1772) "e se la (so. la congiura de' Baccanali) non si scopriva, sarebbe state pericolosa per quella Citt^ " ; Nota II nuovo ricco iii. 7 " se la signora zia non faceva partir D. Faustino cosi . . ., mi sarei fatto ritornare una mia scatola oh' egli ritiene " ; L'Armnal. per vmmag. iv. 6 " s' io non aocettava, non avrei avuto il piacer di vedervi." We have the conditional and actual forms of protasis side by side in Macbiav. Discord s. T. Liv. iii. 24 " che se mai i Romani non avessino prolungati i magistrati e gl' Imperi, se non venivano si tosto a tanta potenza, e se fussino stati piu tardi li acquisti loro, sarebbero ancora venuti piu tardi nella servitu." And in a sentence of the kind referred to in note 42. 4, we have the actual form of protasis in Aretino II Marescalco iv. 5 " non sai tu . . . che se tuo padre non toglieva moglie, che tu non saresti 1 " 41. 1. Or should have : e.g. 41- Further English uses. Shaksp. Othello iv. 2 "had it pleas'd heaven | to try me with affliction . . . | I should have found . . ." ; Ps. Ixxxi. 14 sqq. "if Israel had walked in my ways, I should soon have put down their enemies . . . The haters of the Lord should have been found liars ; but their time should have endured for ever. He should have fed them also with the finest wheat flour, and with honey out of the stony rock should I have satisfied thee"; St. Paul Gal. iv. 21; St. John viii. 19; xiv. Wia go says the heir to the throne in Beaumont and Fletcher's PhUaster iv. 2 ; a passage — from its beauty — worth reproducing : — " Oh ! that I had been nourish'd in these woods With milk of goats and acorns, and not Icnown The right of crowns nor the dissembling trains Of women's looks ; but digg'd myself a cave, Where I, my lire, my cattle, and my bed, Might have been shut together in one shed ; And then had taken me some mountain-girl, IBeaten with winds, chaste as the hardened rocks Whereon she dwelt, that might have strew'd my bed With leaves and reeds, and with the skins of beasts. Our neighbours, and have borne at her big breasts My large coarse issue I This had been a life Free from vexation." 378 GREEK AND LATIN 41 1 7 "if ye had known me, ye should have known my Father also." 2. Or could have : e.g. Ps. Iv. 12 "it is not an open enemy that hath done me this dishonour : for then I could have borne it." 3. Or might have .■ e.g. Dekker Shoemaker's Holiday p. 40 " if she had waited, she irdght have opened her case to me or my husband " ; Hooker Eccl. Pol. v. 60. 4 " had Christ only declared his will . . ., and not acquainted us with any cause why . . ., our ignorance . . . might perhaps have hindered . . ." ; Butler Anal. pt. ii. c. 1 p. 123 "for had it . . been said only, that . . ., even then . . . most justly might we have argued that . . ." ; Keats Lamia pt. ii. init. " had Lycius lived to hand his story down, | he mght ham given the moral a fresh frown " ; Dickens Pickwick c. 1 7 para. 9 " and so they irdght have gone on . ., if Kate had not looked slily back." 41a. The Hip- 41a. The collection of writings, which are usually printed pocratea. together as forming the works of Hippocrates, comprises, in addition to matter which is indubitably his, some which in- dubitably is not his ; some which may be his ; some which is earlier than, some which is of, some which is later than, his time — none, however, later in point of date than the time of Aristotle ; some, which can be assigned, with more or less probability, to some other vwiter, viz. — Polybus, Euryphon, or Leophanes ; some, the writers of which are uncertain ; and some, which are spurious, wittingly or not wittingly. For further information on these points the reader is referred to Dr. Greenhill's article on Hippocrates in Smith's Didimiary of Cheek and Roman Biography and Mythology. In citing from the Hippocratea the present writer has followed the guidance of the writer just mentioned, so far as assignment of authorship is concerned; and has cited by the pagination of Foes — denoted usually by the letter F. simply ; and the pagination of Kiihn in the Leipzig (1821-33) " Medicorum G-raecorum Opera " — usually denoted, in the same way, by the letter K. simply. 42. ei with past 42. 1. This being an excepted case — so far as the past plnkd'^'b/'' p^t imperfect subjunctive is concerned— from the general selection subj. with S.V. made by the Greeks, as is mentioned in the Text § 12. 42 4 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 379 2. Mr. Monro {Gramm. of Horn. Dialed pp. 218. 237) says that " this use of the optative is confined to Homer," from whom he cites numerous instances ; and that the past imperfect or indefinite indicative " is the only construction in later Greek ; so that this is one of the points in which the use of the indicative gained upon that of the optative." 3. The examples, however, cited in the Text §§ 57. 58. (/3), (y), show that these remarks are too sweeping. 4. Of those examples, such an one as Eur. Swppl. 764 c^awys Eva. Sujipl.TSi. av, et Traprja-O' ot ijyaira veKpovs might, indeed, at first sight seem to admit of the rendering " you would say so (now), if you had been present (then)," and so to be comparable to English sentences such as Greene Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay Tp. 154 a "hadst thou " Would (now), watched . . ., | and seen the secret beauties of the maid, | '^ had (then)." their courtly coyness were but foolery " ..." if thou hadst seen . . . | how beauty play'd the huswife, how . . ., I thou wouldst with Tarquin hazard Rome and all | to win the lovely maid " ; Marlowe Jew of Malta ii. p. 155 a ; Job ix. 16 "if I had called and he had answered me, yet would I not believe . . ." ; Etberege Sir Fopling Flutter iii. 2 " had you seen him use Mrs. Loveit as I have done, you would never endure him more " ; Lord Chester- field Letters to his Son 212 "had I really seen anything so very extraordinary as to be almost incredible, I would keep it to myself rather than by telling it give anybody room to doubt for one moment of my veracity " ; Shelley Queen Mob note 1 5 "had the Christian religion commenced and continued by . . ., the preceding analogy would be inadmissible " ; Triumph of Life 67 ; The Oenci i. 3 " had it been true there is a God in Heaven, | He would not live to boast of such a boon " ; Canon Cook Revised Version of the First Three Gospels ]3art iii. s. 7 " the ' recension ' of which Dr. Hort speaks, had it been executed at all in the manner which be intimates, would be a historical fact of signal, I may say unparalleled, importance in the development of textual criticism." Etherege She Would if She Could v. 1 "I should never merit the happiness to wait upon you again, had I so abused this extraordinary favour" ; M. G. Lewis The Monk ii. 6 p. 207 "had I not resolved . . ., I should be frequently sum- moned . . " ; Palmer Narrative of Events p. 181 "I should not speak thus, had I not ascertained . . ."; Beard Unitarian Christianity, § Jesus Christ, p. 147 "which we should all see to be wonderfiil, bad not long custom dulled our sense " ; Times newspaper, 12th Oct 1886, p. 7 col. 1 "if he had 380 GREEK AND LATIN 42 4— Iviib not devoted so many . . . chapters to . . , we should say- that . . ." Marlowe Edw. 11. p. 221 a "had you loVd him half so well as I, I you could not bear his death thus patiently." Shaksp. Hamlet ii. 2 " but what might you think, | . . . if I had play'd the desk or table book ?" Tvmes newspaper, 19th April 1892, first leading article "on the south coast of England something a little less Arctic might well be expected, if we had not been taught by long experiment the entire futility of all seasonable distinctions." ^™'' 5. But, to say nothing as to their not admitting of such treatment, of such cases as Horn. II. xvii. 70 ivda kc peta s . . -, ovk ead otrrts ovk av eiKOTOJS cTTiTt^ijcrete Wib i. This kind of construction we find in connection with the more normal one in passages such as Shaksp. K. John iii. 3 "if the midnight bell | did ... I sound on . . , I if this same were a churchyard . . . , | or if that surly spirit, melancholy, | had bak'd thy blood, ... | or if that thou couldst see me without eyes, | . • . then . . . | I would into thy bosom pour my thoughts " ; Keats Mndymion bk. iv. "were I but always borne | through dangerous winds, had but my footsteps worn | a path in hell, for ever would I bless | . . ." 2. The construction itself is not restricted to English. Thus in French we have Brantome Dam. GaZl. i. p. 248 a "si j'eusse voulu prendre d'elles ce qu'elles m'ont present^ . . ., je serois riche aujourd'huy"i; Moli^re Mid. malg. lui iii. 9 extr. " si tu avois acheve de couper notre bois, je prendrois quelque consolation"; id. Le Misanthrope iv. 3; Beaiimarchais Mwria^je de Figaro iii. 15 "si le ciel I'eut voulu, je serais le fils d'un prince." In Italian Bibbiena La Oalandria ii. 6 "se tu avessi navigate, il saperresti" ; Machiavelli Mandrag. i. 1 "se voi me ne avessi parlato a Parigi, io saprei che consigliarvi, ma ora non so io che ve ne dire " ; Discors. sqpra T. lAmo ii. c. 20 p. 185 " se io non avessi lungamente trattato in altra mia opera, quanto . . . , io mi distenderei in questo discorso assai piu che non far6 " ; p. 186 ; c. 21 p. 188 ; iii. c. 9 p. 243 " se fusse stato a lui (sc. Fabio), Annibale •sarebbe ancora in Italia " ; II Principe c. 13 p. 354 ; Aretino II Marescalco ii. 6 " che diresti tu, se te ne fosse data (sc. moglie) dl sessanta anni ? " id. La Talanta iii. 16. 17 ; La Gortigiana i. 7 ; Alfieri La Cong, dei Pazzi iv. 6 " non io 1' acciaro tratterei, se avvinti | fosser del Nume al simulacro entrambi." And so on. 43 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 381 //.ot • vvv Se K.T.X., he was using av . . . JjrtTi/^Hjo-ete in his apo- dosis as anything else than a practical synonym oi av . . . eirsTifji/rjcre. 6. The truer view seems to be that, although, as the language matured, the light of the older and original construction with the past subjunctive with av paled before the rising sun of that with the past indicative with av, it was, nevertheless, not absolutely extinguished; and that we are consequently bound to acknowledge its existence when we meet with it — even in post-Homeric times. 7. In Greek sentences, such as those cited in the Text § 47 ii. (a) init., and ii. (y) extr., we find the past subjunctives of the perfect and indefinite tenses in the protasis accompanied by the past indicative with av in the apodosis. See further as to these note 38 above. 43. 1. The following are actual examples of English modifica- 43. (C) « type : tions, such as are referred to in the Text : — modem usage. Greene Loohing-Glass for Land, and Engl. p. 121 a "if he had missed but one half hour, what a goodly farm had I gotten . . . ! " ; Shaksp. Much Ado iv. 1 " what a Hero hadst thou been, | if half thy outward graces had been placed I . ." ; Spenser F. Q. iv. 8. 41 ; Beaum. and Fletch. PMlast. V. 5 "all these jealousies | had flown to nothing, if thou hadst discovered | . " ; Hey wood Fair Maid of the Ex- change p. 58 " I had not thought the clod had had so nimble a spirit" ; Numbers xxii. 33 ; Ps. cxxiv. 1, 2; St. John xi. 21, 32; Etherege She Would if She Could iii. I "if you had made no ceremony . . ., we had escaped this mis- chief" ; Sir Fopling Flutter i. 1 "many a fool had been lost to the world, had their indulgent parents wisely bestow'd ." ; Mrs. Centlivre Busybody i. 1 "I knew . . ., or 1 had not parted with thee to her father " ; Dr. Johnson To Lord Oliesterfield "the notice, which you have been pleased to take of my labours, had it been early, had been kind " ; Fielding Tom Jones ix. 3 " the goodwife . . . had probably put an immediate end to the fray . . ., had not the descent of this broom been prevented . . ." ; Byron Giaour " yet did he but what I had done, | had she been false to more than one " ; Sir Walter Scott Quentin Durward c. 1 9 " had you kept my hire, I should have held that we were quit, and had left you to your own foolish guidance " ; Shelley Trivmvph of Life 89 sqq. ; Keats Hyperion i. init " by her in stature the tall Amazon | had stood a pigmy's height. She would have ta'en I . . " 382 GREEK AND LATIN 43 1 Isaiah xlviii. 1 8 " that thou hadst hearkened . . . ! then had thy peace been as a river . . . thy seed also had been as the sand . . . ; his name should not have been cut off." Milton P. L. ii. 934 " and to this hour | down had been falling, had not by ill chance | the strong rebuff . . . | . . . hurried him . . ." Shaksp. Bom. and Jul. iii. 2 " Tybalt's death | was woe enough, if it had ended there " ; Hey wood Woman Killed with Kind- ness p. 104 "had the news been better, | your will was to have brought it"; Herrick Hesp. ii. p. 237 "hadst thou wager'd twenty kine, | they were mine own " ; M. G. Lewis The Monk vol. iii. c. 9 "had I failed in my attempt to reveal the crime, had the domina but suspected that . . ., my ruin was inevitable " ; Byron Detached Thoughts " I liked Lewis : he was a jewel of a man, had he been better set " ; Disraeli Lothair i. c. 3 " Lothair . . . was so afraid of standing alone, or talldng only to men, that he was almost on the point of finding refuge in his dinner companions, had he not instinctively felt that this would have been a social blunder" ; Warren Diary of a Late Physician 1st series c. 4 "had I not felt myself very delicately situated . . ., 1 felt inclined to have asked him how . . ." ; Quarterly Review vol. 169 p. 362 "it seems as if a double first was easily within his reach, had he been steadier in application to the necessary studies." See for forms of sentences corresponding for present time to those here collected ior past time, note 139. 11. 12. below. 2. The modifications in question are common in other languages also; and Latin examples appear sufficiently in the Text. In modern languages take the following as a few instances : — 3. Octave Feuillet Hist, d'une Pa/risierme c. 7 " vous m'avez sauv(5e. Sans vous je me perdais"; Cent. Nouvelles nouvelles Ixxii. " le . . . mary . . . contrainct fut d'abandonner le mesnaige et aller aux affaires, qui tant luy touchoient, que sans y estre en personne il perdoit une grosse somme de deniers " ; Beaumarchais La Mire cqwpahle iv. 3 ; Provost Manon LescoAit i. p. 23 (ed. Paris 1884) "j'^tais heureux, pour toute ma vie, si Manon m'eftt ^t^ fid&le " ; Molifere Le Misantlvr. i. 1 " et ce choix plus conforme ^toit mieux votre affaire " ; Balzac La Gousine Bette p. 280 "si j'avais eu mon portefeuille, il [the money] 6tait i. vous " ; Jules Sandeau Sacs et Pa/roherwins c. 5 " J'avais triomph^ de tons ses scrupules. Mes bras s'ouvraient pour le recevoir : il allait m'appeler son beau-p&re. Trois mois encore, et j'dtais baron, je sidgeais k la chambre 43 3 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 383 haute"; Alplionse Daudet Sappho p. 43 (ed. Paris 1884) " la vie devenait intolerable. Non pas a elle : certes : avec Jean, le toit, la cave, mSme I'egout, tout lui 6tait bon pour nicher " ; Rabelais Pantagr. ii. c. 28 " et n'euat este sa merveilleuse hastivetd, il estoit fricass^ comme tin cochon " ; Montaigne Esscds ii. 4 " nous aultres ignorants estions perdus, si ce livre ne nous eust relev6 du bourbier " ; Montesquieu Arsace et IsmMe p. 606 ''un moment de plus, et Ardasire ne pouvait pas se ddfendre " ; Beaumarohais Barb, de S^v. ii. 2 " s'il n'eftt pas quittd brusquement Madrid, 11 pouvait y trouver quelque bonne place " ; Clar^tie M. le Minisire c. 7 " ftit-il ^trangld par la dette . ., Vaudrey pouvait il . . . ? C'dtait impossible " ; Brant6me Dames Oall. viii. p. 441 a " sans doute il avoit la teste tranchee, sans que sa soeur Margueritte se mit en armes et aux cbamps " ; Moliere Le Bourg. Oentilh. ii. 9 "je lui allais tout donner"; Le Sage Diahl. hoit. c. 4 ; Ernest Daudet Ume Femme du Monde p. 181 (ed. Paris 1883) "sans Valentine, sa colfere allait nous s^parer k jamais, et nous obliger k fuir " ; Crebillon Jne. Tanzai et Neadarn^ c. 6 "les ordres du Singe alloient etre mal executds, si la religieuse NeadarniS n'eftt arrets ses emportements " ; Louvet Fcmblas i. p. 42 (ed. Paris 1842) " un moment plus tot vous la surpreniez . . . Bon ! reprit le marquis. Je la surprenais. Eh bien ! je ne I'ai pas surprise " ; ii. p. 463 " si le baloon n'elit retenu le capitaine, il descendait par la fenetre" ; p. 562 "si je ne m'dtais aussitot soustrait k sa rage, si ses gardiens ne I'avaient empechd de me poursuivre, I'infortun^ tuait son pere " ; Laclos Les liais. dang. x. " s'il el!it dit un mot, il s'ensuivoit immanquablement une scene " ; Victor Hugo Les Mis&ahles : Fantine vii. 1 " Simplice de Sicile . . est cette sainte qui aima mieux . que de r^pondre, 6tant nie a Syracuse, qu'elle etait n^e a Segeste, mensonge qui la sauvait " ; Zola Pothouille c. 11 "on la depouillait, si je n'avais pas degringol6 I'escalier, k la premifere nouvelle"; c. 16 "si j'avais exigd cela, pourtant, vous commettiez un faux." And vi'itli the more normal construction and that presently under consideration side by side : — Moliere L'Am. MM. ii. 1 "il est bien heureux de ce qu'il n'y a point de chats mddecins, car ses affaires ^toient faites, et ils n'auroient pas manqu^ de le purger et de le saigner " ; Le Sage Twrcaret i. 8 "sans vous j'aurois viol6 la foi des joueurs : ma parole perdoit tout son credit, et je tombois dans le mdpris des honnetes gens '' ; Bossuet Oradsons Fwn. : Henr. de France p. 88 (ed. Paris 1825) "si la reine en eiit iti crue : si ... on elit raarchd droit k Londres, I'affaire 384 GREEK AND LATIN 43 3 etoit d^cid^e, et cette campagne eftt flni la guerre " ; Beau- marchais Lettre sur la critique du Barb, de S^v. para. 60 "si le hasard n'eut pas conduit ce jour-l& le barbier dans cet endroit, que devenait la pifece ? — EUe eftt commence . . . h. quelque autre epoque " ; Louvet Faublas i. p. 470 " I'instant approchait oti mes dessins allaient s'accomplir. Dans trois jours je d^cHrais le voile ...:... je me d^couvrais sans mystere. Je vous montrais la marquise de B. . . . Si men amant savait m'entendre, je lui gardais encore tin sort digne d'envie ! Si I'ingrat m'osait r^sister ....... je vous enlevais malgr^ vous : malgrd vous je vous conduisais . . . peut-etre au bout du monde ! Oui j'aurais mis I'immensit^ des mers entre mon perfide amant et ma rivale pr6fdrde " ; ii. p. 538 " je fis venir le capitaine ; il se hSta de solliciter k Versailles une lettre de cacbet . . . : madame de Lignolle allait etre arr^t^e . . . demain le capitaine recevait I'crdre de retourner k Brest et de s'y rembarquer : la comtesse perdait sa libertd pendant quelques jours seulement : on devait bientot lui donner pour prison la terre que sa tante possfede en Franclie Comt^. Rien . . . n'eftt iti n^gUg^ pour ddfendre cette malbeureuse enfant du ressentiment de ses deux families " ; Laolos Les liais. dang, xxvii. " sans vous, maman alloit s'en appercevoir, et qu'est-ce que je serois devenue?" Provost Manon Lescaut' ii. p. 257 "s'il m'eftt iti possible de me partager, j'aurais fondu sur ces deux objets de ma rage, je les ddvorais tons ensemble " ; Victor Hugo Les Mis^raUes: Gosette v. 10 "s'il ellt pdn^tr^ un peu plus avant dans le cul de sac Genrot, il I'efit fait probable- ment et il 4tait perdu." 4. Machiavelli Disc, sopra Tit. Liv. iii. c. 10 "tanto che la giornata fu fuggita cosi da Annibale come da Fabio : ma se uno di loro 1' avesse voluta fare in ogni modo, 1' altro non vi aveva se non uno de' tre rimedi, . . ." ; II Principe c. 25 " se fussero sopravventi tempi che fusse bisognato procedere con rispetti, ne seguiva la sua rovina " ; La Mandrag. v. 2 "quanti egli era meglio che senza tanti andirivenni ella avesse ceduta al primo " ; Aretino II Marescalco v. 3 " era molto meglio per me, e piu onore di M. Dominedio s' egli avesse posto la mano in una lettera, cbe . . ." ; Pulci Morg. Maggim: xviii. 103. 7 "e Frusberta di man gli era caduta, I se non che la catena 1' ha tenuta ; | e 1' elmetto pel colpo gli era uscito " ; Aretino La Talanta iii. 17 " se non che io so che il Biffa mi cerca, pigliava la copia del sonetto " ; II Marescalco i. 3 "se non era io, poco fa crucifiggea il suo ragazzo " ; La Gortigiana iii. 8 " se io studiava, diventava Filosofo o Berrettajo " ; Ariosto La Lena iv. 8 " un sospirar, un starnutire, un tossere | ne rovinava " ; Alfieri Filippo v. 43 7 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 385 3 " ed era | gia legittima un di : mia sposa ell' era, | mia sposa, il sai ; tu me la davi ; e darla | meglio potevi, clie ristorla" ; Mirra v. 4 "quand' io . . . tel . . . chiesi, . I darmi . . . allora . . , Euriclea, dovevi il ferro . . . : | io moriva . . . innooente ; . . . empia . . . ora muoio" ; Nota II nuovo rieco iv. 3 "eooo i padroni . . . oh s' io tardava un memento, nasceva un casa del diavolo ! " MacMavelli 1st. Fiorent. viii. p. 293 "la cui morte anoora miglior6 le condizioni de i Fiorentini, se la vittoria ohe da quella nacque si fusse saputa usare." And with, the more normal construction, and that presently under consideration side by side : — Bibbiena La Galandria iii. 3 " dissi a quel mode, perchfe tu non fusei portato in dogana. C. E cbe era, quando ben m' avessin portato 1&? F. Che era, eh? tu meritavi, che io vi t' avessi lasciato portare ; e arestilo veduto. 0. Che domin era ? F. E' par che tu ci nascessi pure oggi : eri colto in fredo, eri preso, e ti ariano poi venduto come 1' altre cose che son colte in fredo " ; Aretino La Cortigiana i. 1 " e s' io non ci veniva . . . S. II pan muffava. M. Dico che se io non ci veniva, non arei mai creduto ch' ella fosse stata pii\ beUa di Siena." 5. Cervantes La Galatea lib. vi. (vol. iii. p. 231, ed. Madrid 1805) "no OS canseis, senoras, ni fatigueis vuestros entendimientos en la declaracion de esta enigma, .porque podria ser que ninguna de vosotras en toda su vida hubiese visto la figura que la pregunta encubre, y asi no es mucho che no dels en ella ; que si de otra suerte fuera, bien seguros estabamos de vuestros entendimientos, que en m^nos espacio otras mas dificultosas hubidrades declarado" ; Nov. Ej. iii. p. 218 Los Perros de Mahudes " si no me avisaras, de manera se me iba calentando la boca, que . . ."; ib. p. 324 "aunque fuera mayor, no se igualaba d la mia." 6. Camoens Os Lus. ii. 42. 5 "as lagrimas Ihe alimpa, e acoendido I na face a beija, e abraga o coUo puro ; | da modo que dalli, se s6 se aohara, | outro novo Cupido se gerara" ; iv. 103. 5 "quanto melhor nos fora, . . . | . . . que . . .!" V. 23. 1 "se OS antiguos philosophos, . . . | as maravilhas que eu passei, passaram, | • . . que grandes escripturas que deixaram ! " Popxilar Song (Crawfurd Portugal Old and New p. 370) "se eu tivera papel de ouro, | comprava penna de prata, | apurava OS mens sentidos, , | escrevia te una carta." 7. Schiller Wilhelm Tell iii. 3 "mit diesem zweitem Pfeil durchschloss ich — euch, \ wenn ioh mein liebes Kind 2 c 386 GREEK AND LATIN 43 7 — Iviii-lx 43a- 44- tatic. al — epi- Thuc. vi. 89. 3. getroffen hatte, | unci eurer — wahrlicla, hatt' ich nioht gefehlt." '™ 43a. See examples in note 43. 1 extr. 44. 1. Kal here is to be taken — not, as the late Master of Balliol in his translation suggests, with d ; but — in its epitatic, its emphasis-giving, force ; often best translated by emphasising the word which it precedes. So here koI totc = " then," with a stress on the word. See Elmsl. ad Eur. Eeracl. 386 ( = 387 ed. suae); Mr. ShiUeto on Thuc. i. 15. 3, and Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 349. 13; Arnold onThuc. ii. 87. 11.'*^ These and the following passages will sufficiently illustrate its use. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 305 ei kuI /xrj KAijets = " if you have not heard it" ; Eur. Andr. 1079 ei kol o-ois cf>iXoi,s . . . = "if to your ovm friends" ; Heracl. 386 /cat /^aX' ov a-fitKphv povZv = "with certainly no mean ideas" (Elmsl. cites Bhes. 86 kol [idXa a-TTOvSrj ttoSos = " with exceeding speed of foot ") ; Heracl. 498 (e corr. Elmsl.) Kaxo/i£o-^a = " are we really hound ? " Thuc. ii. 49. 1 /cat irpoeKafjive ri = " was abeady somewhat ailing " ; 5 1 o 8e koI ykvoiTO = " whatsoever did happen" ; 87. 11 »jv Se Tts apa xai fiovX-qdy = "but if any one by chance sliall have chosen" (Arnold cites i. 97. 2 oWe/o KttJ fjxparo = " who did touch upon it," and iv. 92. 2 ci T(() Koi o.VTa.i = "\)\\t when they shall have^ereewerf " ; Plat, de Legg. ix. p. 869 B Kal rhv Ttarpo^ovov rj /uiyrpQ/CTOi/ov = '' certainly the parricide or slayer of a mother" ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 349. 11 which Arnold obelizes the word /j.'fi, saying of the whole phrase: "this is an unusual expression, instead of el /midh airdv. Yet the negative seems required by the sense, in opposition, as the Scholiast rightly observes, to el IpxovTai 'AdTjvatoL." ' 2. Of course the negative is required by the sense for the purpose mentioned ; Negative thrown and so urgently required that, as Mr. Shilleto used to teach, it is put in the forward to nega- very forefront of the sentence [as to which, see further notes 54, 210 below] to tive the sentence negative it, the sentence, and not the mere word which follows the liij. Trans- in Greek ; late "but if it is not the case that any of these reports are true, as I do not believe that they are, it will not be, etc," 3. Similar considerations serve to explain Thuc. i. 82. 1 ii-qre vSkejuiv &,iaM SrjXoSfTas iii)8 ' as iiriTpiyj/oiiev = ' ' neither war nor that we shall put up with matters as they stand" ; vi. 55. 3 sqq. oix m ddeX^bs veihrepos &v i^bjrqaev, iv if oi Trpirrepov ^vvexSis iiiu\i)Kei tJ ipxQ = " and it was not the case that as a younger brother he was perplexed what to do, because — from the fact that — he had not been in power before" (recte Arnold ad I. — "the whole sentence from lis dSeX06s down to t^ &p%v must be taken as one single proposition which the negative at the beginning denies altogether") ; vi. 60. 3 el iiri xal SiSpaKeii= "if 30 be that it was not the fact that he was the culprit "; viii. 45. 2 \iyet.v Ke\eib)v . . ., djs 'AdTjvatOL . . . Tpidj^oXov tois iavTuiv Siddatni', oi5 TOffovrov Tevlq, Strop Iva tdiriav fiTj ol vavTCU iK -jrepiovfflas i^pi^ovres, ol fih rb, (Tixi/MiTa xe^P^ ^^0*1, SaTavSiVTes is Totavra dtp* &v ^ dtrdiveta ^vp.^aivei, ol 8k rds vavs diroKelTuitriv iiro\nr6vTes is o/njpelav riv irpotro^ei\6fievov /uir66v="not so much from poverty, as in order that it may not be the case with them and their sailors — the latter running wild from having their pockets too full — that some of them shall damage their health : spending on things whence ill health results, and that others shall leave their ships : which they will not do, if they leave behind them as a pledge the instalments of pay yet accruing to them." 4. In the last cited passage — Thuc. viii. 45. 2 — iva, fiii controls everything which follows. Had, as tlie critic scribe of the Vatican MS. B. — followed by Bekker, of course, and also Goller, and by Poppo, but with hesitation — ^thought, any negative been required with vTTo\t,irbvTes, it would have been in the form of ixr/j, and not, as he has it, oix- In Thuc. iii. 49. 3 there is equally no necessity to alter the received reading Thuc. iii. 49. 3. Seuripas into irporipas, as Bekker and Goller and Arnold do. Read there Kcd rpi.-qpii eidis dXhriv dwdtrreWov Kwrk airovSiiv, iirias /iTJ 6a) iraBeiv uid\i.aTa diii/avrac iK ttjs iix.Trei.plas, Swdfievoi xpV'^Sai. toTs ifTrXois Kal TOiavTa Ixo'T^s owola dv etrj Kal vphs t6 Troi^o-ni Kal irpbs t6 /xi] iradetv KpdTiaTa. 44 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 389 this"; Lept. p. 461. 2 ov to XvcTiTiXia-raTov Trphi apyvpiov a-KOTTOvv, dWa ri koI KaXov Trpa^ai = "but what it is honorable to do." tion of this principle of the attraction of the nominative " of the relative, it seems better to read and punctuate, as did Mr. Shilleto, thus : Kal iveviituree TToWdKis Sn irepl iraTplSos ^ouXeiJecrSe, p fuas iripi. Kal is fdav ^ov\-/iv, -nixovaiv re KoL nil, KaTopdtiffaa-av Cffre, for which last word instead of Itrrai. there is soine slight authority. Translate "and consider over and over again that it is about your country that you are deliberating, your country, we say, which you know has-directed its affairs aright concerning its single self, and upon the result of this single deliberation, whether that succeeds or not. " 5. The attraction of the nominative of the relative is not unknown in the modem languages ; e.g. 6. Sir Walter Scott Ivanhoe ii. 5 "to bring ruin on whomsoever hath shown kindness to me" ; St. Eonan's Well i. 8 "I am to be found at the Old Town of St. Eonan's by whomsoever has any concern with me " ; Lord Chancellor Cotten- ham in Clark v. Oort, Or. and Ph. 15i. 159 "it provided that it should enure as a security to whomsoever should carry on the business " ; Lord Chief Baron Abinger in Bowker v. BurdeMn, 11 M. and W. 128. 144 " I think the property vested inmiediately upon the act of bankruptcy in whomsoever might be the lawful commissioner " ; Spence Uq. Jurisd. ii. p. 40 (e) " furniture left by the testator to trustees, to be enjoyed with the mansion house, by whomsoever should be entitled for the term to the freehold estate, will not pass to the assignees"; Sir W. Page Wood Continuity of Scriptv/re, ed. 1867, p. xli. "a patronising tone is assumed, which exhibits the critic as presuming to judge Him whom we believe will come to be our Judge." 7. Moliere Misanthrope i. 2 " autre part que chez mol cherchez qui vous eucense" ; Louvet FauUas ii. p. 314 "pour determiner une belle dame k tuer quiconque pourrait se glorifier d'avoir remport^ sur elle quelque avantage dont son petit orgueil se fflt trouvd bless^ " ; Montaigne Essais iii. 5 " I'usage pourtant souffroit q'une femme mariee se peust abandonner i qui luy presentoit un elephant " ; Crebillon Jne. ^ga/rements du Cceur et de VEsprit vol. i. p. 63 (ed. Maestricht 1779) "tout parait passion k qui n'en a point ^prouv6"; Louvet Fauhlas i. p. 426 " je briile la cervelle i quiconque ose entrer ifi " ; Laclos Les liais. dang, clxviii. " on ajoute que Danceny ... a livre ces lettres a qui a voulu les voir"; Beaumarchais Tarare iv. 2 "il y va des jours | de qui troublerait leurs amours"; Moliere Tartuffe iv. 1 "je feins pour qui m'accuse un zele charitable" ; Clardtie Le Prince Zilah c. 19 "centre qui attaquait ainsi, toutes les armes ^taient bonnes. " 8. Machiavelli 1st. Fiorent. I. v. p. 196 "nk furono mai tempi che laguerra, che si faceva ne' paesi d'altri, fusse meno pericolosa per chi la faceva che in quelli " Boccaccio La Fiammetta i. init. (p. 5, ed. Vineg. 1551) "bellezza, miserabile dono a chi virtuosamente di vivere desidera " ; Muratori Annal. dUItal. vol. iv. p. 336 (ed. Milan 1819) "si aggiunse in oltre la grave spinta che gli diedero gli emuli e nimici di Stilicone, i quali mai non mancano a chi siede in alto, e per lungo tempo vi siede." 8a. Cervantes Nm. Ej. i. p. 229 £Z avrmnte liberal " j es posible que no ha de haber ' quien castigue tn crueldad y tu grande insolencia ! " iii. p. 57 Las dos donceUas " no temais . . . que a vuestro lado teneis quien os hard esoudo con sii propia vida, por defender la vuestra " ; i. p. X^l El aimante liberal ' ' Dios perdone i quien fu6 causa de su muerte " ; i. p. 6 La Oitanilla " el cantar de Preoiosa fue para admirar i quantos la escuchaban " ; iii. p. 231 Los Perros de Mahudes " levauta la mano con muestras de querer vengarse de quien a su parecer le ofende" ; iii. p. 140 La SeHora Cornelia "llevAron tras si los ojos de quantos alii venian" ; iii. p. 21 Las dos doncellas "el apasionado que cuenta sus des- diohas a quien no las siente, biea es que causen en quien las escucha mas sueilo que Ustima" ; ib. p. 78 "envii luego por quien los desposase." 390 GREEK AND LATIN 442 Etiam, et ■ epitatic. Kal — epexegetic. So in Latin : Verg. Aen. ',.g. ii. 291 si Pergama J extra | defendi possent, etiam hac defensa fuissent = " even by this right hand " ; Juv. vi. 451 sed quaedam ex libris et non intelligat = "let there be some things which she does Tiot under- stand." 3. On the epexegetic use of Kai, as in Thuc. i. 80. 3 toiis Ilf Ao7rovvr;criovs koI axnvyeiTova's -- " the Peloponnesians, in other words, our borderers," see Mr. Shilleto ad I. [adding to Dem. Mid. p. 577. 1 cited by him as an example of Kal in this sense becoming in a negative sentence oijSe, or /ui^Se, as the case may be, Plat. Oorg. p. 479 A Mnrep av ei ns rot's /ieyto-Tois vocr^juacrt (TwuT^ofiiVO's Siairpd^aiTO fxjr) StSdvat Siktjv twv Trept to a'WfJM a/jiap- Trjp,a.T(i)v Tol's larpoii /irjSe laTpeve(rdaL], and on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 350. 3, where he refers to Horn. Od. iv. 684 p.rj p^vqa-Teva-avTis, p,rjS olA-XoS' o//,tA.ijo-avT£S, | k.t.A., and xi. 613 /i^ re^vqo'a.p^vo'i p,rjS aXko TL TE^v^craiTO, | os k.t.A,. So should be explained the New Testament phrase (St. Paul Eom. XV. 6 ; 2 Cor. i. 3 ; Ephes. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3) 6 O^h's koX TraTTjp ToiJ Kvpiov ■^pMv Irjo-ov X/omttov = " God, I mean the Father" : " God, even the Father," as the A. V. rightly translates in the first and second of the four passages referred to. So in St. James i. 27 Oprja-Keia Kadapa koI dptavTOS irapa rcii Qe(j) kol Trarpl avTT) ktTTLv — which the A. V. translates "before God and the Father " — is better rendered by the late Dean of Rochester's (Dr. Scott) paraphrase in the Speaker's Commentary {ad I.) "God who is our Father." Wrongly the E. V. gives "before our God and Father." On the other hand, in St. Paul Ephes. v. 20 tw 060) Kol irarpi the E. V. with its " God, even the Father " improves upon the "God and the Father" of the A. V. In Coloss. i. 3 it goes so far as to turn koI altogether out of its Greek text. Assumption of 9. Sometimes we find the antecedent assumed as it were into the relatival antecedent into clause, and attracted into the case of the relative : e.g. Aesch. Sept. 0. Theb. the relatival 400 koX viKja rair-qv 'tjv \iyu^ iir &a-irlSos \ firxT/joiai /lap/j.alpovirai' oipavoi clause. Kvpetv, | rax &.v yivoiro lidvris ij 'vvola rivl, for vii^ aiirr] k.t.\., which is in apposition with ■^ 'vnoia ; Eur. Ch: 1629 'EX^j/iji/ fitiv ^v crii SioXdcrai. wpdevfios Hiv I iifiapre!, . . . \ W idrlv (ubi vid. Person) ; Plat. Prolog, p. 342 B dXX' e^apfoSnTM Kal cxwaTL^ovTai li/iaee'ii dvai, ha fir) KardSriXoi Siaw Sn aotjilij. tuv 'BW^KUK ireplatnv, Sicnrep oOs Hpuray6pas iXeye roils . o^Sev -TrepiTTorepov runs together, as forming a single notion : Lat. nihil aliud, as Liddell and Scott say, s.v. irepixra-o's, extr. Otherwise we should have expected /i,!}. See note 54 below. Que — epexegetic. 45. Plat. . 20 c. Apol. 45a. Compare Spenser Epithal. 121 sqq. " fayrest Phoebus ! 453. Father of the Muse ! | if ever I did honour thee aright, | or sing the thing that mote thy mind delight, | doe not thy servant's simple boone refuse." 45b. o-re/j-yot/u.' ai/="I would, under certain circumstances, 45b. acquiesce " = a polite " I will acquiesce." See further Text § 85. The circumstances, thus hinted at, are generally only hinted at. Sometimes, however, we have them expressed : e.g. Soph. El. 582 et yoijO KTevod/xei/ aKXov dvT aX.kov, (rv TOt | TrpiuTij ^avots civ, et StKijs ye Tvy)(avots. 46. XPV^-XP^ (*-^- XP^'") i5v="you ought to have — ed." 46. xpv"- See Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 69. 3, and (esp.) Ar. Fac. 734. 1041 ; Thesm. 832 sqq. there cited. fXPV^ is merely due to false analogy. ^xp^"- 47. 1. On the construction of the words riov vees vevavy^Kao-t TerpaKoo-tat, see Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. ii. 44. 3. 2. On the use of the present tense ytVovrat, cf. sup-a note I. 3 (|8) and subnotes ii., iii. ; also note 50 infra. 48. On the ordinary usage of apa with the past tenses — - perfect, imperfect, indefinite — see Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Pais. Leg. p. 391. 13 ; Thuc. i. 69. 8, and at p. 181 of the fasciculus containing that book. It always expresses slight surprise, as at the happening of 47. Herod, vii. 236. 48. S,pa past tenses. with 392 GREEK AND LATIN 48 something not expected; so that "after all," "then," "so then," or the like, often serve to represent it in English. See further note i. 18 above. 49. 49. r]v a/Da = practically, d/jti. See the last cited note. 50. Tenses. 5°- With the usage of tense exemplified in d7ra)Ad/x,eo-(?' apa, compare Eur. IpJi. Taw. 985 (is ra/t oAu>A,e Travra Kal to. YleXoTTcSav, I ovpdvbov et fj.rj Xrixj/o/Jiea-Oa 6eas fipiras. So we have the present imperfect in ib. 999 aXX' el pAv ev ti TovO' opov yevijo-€Tat, | ayaXpa t otireis K&p, . . . | a^cts, to KLvSvvevpa yiyveTai KaA.dv. | tovtov Se ^tapurOiur , ky!a pev oWvpai, I cri) 8 av rh cravrov depevos eC vocttod tv)(01'S. Cf. in English Beaum. and Fletch. Philast. 1. 2 "if I shall have an answer no directlier, | I am gone " ; and in German, Heine Die Gh'enadiere st. 4 " auch ich mocht' mif dir sterben, I doch hab' ich Weib und Kind zu Haus, | die ohne mich verderben." And — in past time — in English : Warren Diwry of Late Physician series ii. p. 59 " her constitution had evidently been dreadfully shattered . . . The least shock, the least agitation of her exquisitely excitable feelings, might bring on a second fit of blood-spitting, and then all was over." Cf. supra note 47. 2 and refF. there. 51. 1 . Si te secundo liimine hie offendero, | mori^re is Ennius' translation: Medea Exul 224 = 274 Miiller. -e )( -is as ter- 2. Moriere, says Ennius, using, in the future tense, the minations of the ending in -e. So Plant. Mostell. 11 67 = v. 2. 45 verberibus, 1m- 'passive^''Mi(i lutiim, caedere pendens. And with Cicero, the form in -e in the deponentin Latin, future indicative is the normal one, while he prefers that in 4s for the present indicative. Thus pro Caedn. 29. 84 in iis ipsis intercluder« insidiis, quas mihi conar is opponere ; in Catil. i. 1 . 1 abutere ; ad Fam. ii. 7. 1 labere, etc. E contra, we have the form in -is in Ov. Am. i. 4. 57 agmine me invenies, aut invenieris, in illo. With the subjunctive Cicero prefers — it should seem — the form in -e. Thus ad Fam. xv. 16. 3 si enim stomachabere . . ., plura dicemus postulabimusque, ex qua alpea-u . . dejectus sis, in earn restituar«; pro Plane. 5. 13 consequar«j 24. 58 admirere; ad Fam. v. 12. 3 asperner« . . . la.Tgia,Te ; pro Quint. 26. 81 viderer«. 51' 52. Plat, p. 47 D. Grit. 52. The imperfects — eyiyveroy oTrmXXvTo — are to be ex- plained, as has, with reference to the difficulties of Buttmann Person. S3 5 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 393 {ad I.), been pointed out by Lange arid Stallbaum (also ad I.), on the ground that Socrates is referring to a former conversation with Crito on the same subject. Of. the opening words, p. 47 A ^epe 5ij, TTws aS to. roiavra kkiyero ; S3. 1. Porson, as is well known, laid down (Eur. Med. : 53; ■v){ -" as Prasf.) that the ending of the second person singular indicative th™™^ "persons of passive verbs — and the case is the same with middle verbs — singular indica- was, as well in the present as in the future tenses, in -ei and not tive passive and ,■_ „ middle in Greek. in -2?- An arbitrary canon this, and one based upon no authority, save that of a fancied analogy: "analogia nempe postulat, ut vocalis corripiatur in indicativo, producatur in subjunctivo." The argument is hardly one of importance; and better evidence of the facts is forthcoming. 2. The genesis of the indicatival and subjunctival forms respectively is Ind. TUTTT-e-irai, -e-ai, -rji, -tj Subj. rvTrr-rj-(rai, -yj-ai, -rji, -y Both sequences lead to the same result, viz. an ending in -y both for indicative and for subjunctive, and a flat contradiction of Porson's canon and demolition of its would-be basis. 3. Then, does manuscriptal authority help him on his way ? 4. Not at all. In fact, rather the reverse — " Apud Tragicos non raro diphthongum €6 pro jj ofFerunt MSS." But then, "in his . . rebus nulla est codicum auctoritas." Why not 1 one would ask. And if not, what is of authority ? Is it, for example, from sheer perversity on the part of the scribe that in Dem. Mid. pp. 577. 17, 22 ; 581. 9 all the MSS. give us eoTj, eXerjOya-g, iroXcTevrj ; whilst in p. 580. 10 the best of them give us aTroAei; or that in Hyperides pro Euxenipp. col. 25 line 3 the scribe gives us oj'et, and yet only six lines lower down in the same column he gives us TrapaKeXevy ; and again in col. 48 line 18 Tifmpy — in each case, no doubt, and as usual, without the i subscript, but in each case with a decided -y as opposed to the -ei of oiei; or again that in the same orator's speech against Philippides we have in line 33 Kof^i^ei, but in line l50Te^$y( = T€^$y)'i 5. Pressed, possibly, by considerations such as these, Porson fell back, five years later on, upon an argument still weaker, if it were possible, than that which had preceded it — " esto," he 394 GREEK AND LATIN 535 says, in his Supplemental Preface, " ut rwreat in rvn-ry ac rvrrTeb pari jure contrahere potuerint Attici; utram contractionem putas praelaturos ? Certe earn quae modos diversos distingueret." " Certe " in the Supplemental Preface has replaced the " Nempe " of the Preface ; but it has not advanced the strength of the position : for, as the late Master of the Eolls, Sir George Jessel, was never tired of reminding his Bar, " ' surely ' is no argument." 6. How then does the case really stand ? For Person, like Homer, occasionally "dormitat." (See Mr. Shilleto's note on Thuc. ii. 51. 4.) 7. The form in -y is the form which might be legitimately expected. It is the form which, as Porson admits, is all but " non raro " found in the MSS. of the Tragic writers. Mr. Maiden. Mr. Maiden therefore held that the form in -ei might be relegated to the Comic and prose writers ; subject nevertheless to the exception, which undoubtedly prevailed, in favour of terminations in -et in the cases of ottt, ySoiJAei, o^ei : to which Mr. Jelf {Gr. (?r. § 194. 2, Obs. 3) adds "the contracted futures of verbs in -ew, as reXet not reXy, and generally . . . the Attic forms ySaStet from /SaSifco, etc." And that this view has adherents even now appears from the fact that, in Dr. Wecklein's recent third edition of Euripides' Medea, "the second person singular of presents and futures middle and passive is given as y throughout" — teste Mr. E. B. England in the Classical Review vi. 365. true 8. The true view would seem to be, as so often happens in cases of conflicting opinions, midway between the opposing views of Porson on the one side and Mr. Maiden on the other. 9. There is no doubt that — as in the case (see above note 7. 4) of the degeneration into a form ending in -nv of the legitimate form ending in -y of the first person of the past perfect active — there grew up side by side with the legitimate forms ending in -y of the second person singular indicative of the passive and middle voices of the verb in the present and future tenses, forms ending in -ei. "Unleugbar ist," says Curtius {Das Ferbum ii. p. 234 ( = 212)), "das altere y in vielen Fallen im jungeren Atticismus dem €t gewichen : ^atriXcts fiir /Saa-iXys, ^Setv fur ^Siy " — read ySrj — " Xvei als 2 S. Med. fiir Xvy." It is possible that the cause of their introduction may have S4 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 395 to be sought in. the fact suggested by Mr. Jelf {ubi supra Obs. 2), that " this crasis eat = 3; must have been originally written by the Tragedians ei", as the Ionic tj was not known tUl the archon- ship of Euclides " ; and that Tmnei (for example) got then mis- read into TWT€t — no diaeresis being marked. Or it may have been that, as the language advanced, the diflference of pronunciation between y and et became so small as to lend itself to the supplanting of the former by the latter (cf. Curtius ubi supra ii. p. 263 ( = 240)). But whatever the reason for the form in -et, its existence as a fact is certain ; and, as time went on, it gradually supplanted the older form. 10. But it nattirally happened that there was a time when both forms were in vogue together, and this is exactly what is represented to us by the MSS. ; according to which it can scarcely be predicated of any one author that he, without exception, makes use of either form to the absolute exclusion of the other. It is only " satis constanter," according to Porson, that " ei pro g praebent Axistophanis editiones." Stallbaum (Praef. ad Platon. Opera, ed. Stereotyp. 1850, pp. ix.-xi.) would fain, and does in fact, expel the form in -g from the pages of Plato ; but he does so— as he admits — in the face of two passages in Bep. x. p. 596 D and E; where he reads ata-Odvei and epx^' respectively, " licet ibi codd. omnes aio-Odvy et epxo tueri videantur." "In the MSS. of Aiistoph., Plato, and Thucyd. ei is almost invariably found " is all that Mr. Jelf (ubi supra) can say. 11. The true course would, consequently, seem to be to admit, not only the existence, but the co-existence, at a certain time, of the two forms; to admit also that no writer was bound, as by a law of the Medes and Persians, to restrict himself con- sistently to the use of either the one form or the other ; and to decide, as to which form in fact any given writer did adopt in any given case, on the testimony of the best MSS. in that particular case. 12. Inasmuch, therefore, as in Soph. Fhil. 66 cited in the Text the reading of the MSS. is, apparently, epyda-ei, that read- ing has been here retained. =;4. 1. Note the order of words in such a sentence as et S' 54' Soph. PAiZ. , , ■. - 66. epyaxTii fi,r] ravra. The negative /jl-q is not to be taken as running in company 396 GREEK AND LATIN 54 1 with the £1 and administering a negative to the whole of the sentence which follows : as to which see subnote Ix. above, and note 2 10 below. Negative so On the contrary, it stands where it does in order to negative placed as to nega- -what immediately follows it; and the meaning is, not "but if raldiatlly follows J^^ ^^^^^ ^o* ^° this," but "but if you shall do not this" = it. "anything else than this," as Mr. Shilleto translates it in his note (which see) on Thuc. i. 136. 3, where we have the colloca- tion ovTa avTi^ ov v ovK dcTThs €t(r)8taf£Tat =" being other than a citizen." So too in Thuc. i. 137. 7 koi, tJjv tQv yn^vpZy, rjv xj/ivSoi'S irpocreTTOiiqcraTO, Tore Si avrhv ov SiaAutrtv = " the non-destruction." 2. Other examples may be found in (A) Soph. Oed. Tyr. 255 d . . . ^/v . . . /irj ^e?jAaTov = "if it had been otherwise than heaven-sent"; Oed. Ool. 600 60-Tii' Se /iot I . . . KareXdilv p.-ffroQ' = " open to me is to return never " ; Jil. 1340 vTrdp^et yap (re /xi) yviavai Tiva = " you begin with this advantage that no one knows you"; Herod, vii. 214 Kal Jwv firj Mr;Atejjs = "even though he was no Melian" ; Eur. Med. 586 eiTrep ^crOa firj Ka/cos = "if at least you had been otherwise than base" ; Hipp. 493 £j . . . t]v (roi p/q Vi a-vpipopai^ filos I ToiaftrSc = " if it had been otherwise than on the terms of suffering such as this"; Ar. Vesp. 1351 lav ykvrj . . . pfj KaKY] . . yvvrj = "not a bad little woman" ; Dem. Mid. p. 538. 15 Kal ravr eis o'lKiav iXdiiiv cttI SeiTvov, ol pr] /SaSi^eiv e^yjv avT(j} = " whither it was in his power not to go " [cf. Hyperid. c. iJemosth. col. 33 1. 20 (ed. Blass. Lips. 1869) &<77rep /cat o£ X-ga-ral ol eirl Tov Tpo\ov KAatovres, e^hv avTot'S pr] kppaiveiv eh TO ttXoiov] ; p. 549. 11 sqq. prjSe rafjiyjvai irpocr- VTrr^pX^v oiKOL poi = "-n.ot even to be buried at home would besides have been a privilege yet remaining to me " ; Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 30 1. 28 sqq. rhv . . KaTaKkidivra . . . pr/S' iv 'ArrtKy Set TeOd^Oai = " he must look to have been buried not even in Attica." Contrast with these, passages such as Eur. Hipp. 507 e? rot So/ctt croi, xprjv ptv ov or apaprdvciv ("right it-was not that you should go wrong") . . '. eWtv KWT oiKOV^ [X,Tpa ... I a tr' ... I wavo-ei, vocrov TrjoS', f)v (TV pfj yevrj KaK-q (" if truly you shall not have-shown yourself bad") ; Ak. 709 ov XPW <^' «'« «/«■' i^apaprdveiv (" right it was not that you should behave badly towards me "). 54 4— Ixia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 397 3. In the following passages we get a mixture of con- structions : — Soph. P/wJ. 1058 eyw 6', os oTfmi crov KaKLOv ovSh av | rovTiav KpaTvve.iv, fiTjS' eTTiOvveiv xepl ( = ovk otfiai cr. k. Kparuvetv, o?/iat Se [iij iTTidvveiv) ; Plat. Protag. p. 319 B oOev &€ avTO ■^yov/Jiai o-i SiSaKrhv eti/at /i7j8' vir' dvOpunruiv irapa- a-KevacTTOv dvdpiaTTOi's, SiKaids elp,i elireiv ( = ovx rjyovfiai SiSaKThv elvai, ijyoC/xat Se /ixjj Trapaa-Kevaa-rov. The ov negative precedes, the p,ri negative follows, the accompanying verb). 4. In Ar. Ach. 720 sqq. evraCS' dyopd^uv Traa-t UeXoirovvrjo-ioK Ar. Ach. 720 I e^ea-Ti Koi Meyapevcrt Koi BoiojTtois, | e(j> ^re TroiXiTv irpbs ifie, *?*• AafjiA)((f Se p,ri, the sense required evidently is " here it is open to all Peloponnesians and Megarians and Boeotians to trade, on condition that they offer their goods to me, but it is not open to Lamachus so to do '' ; and Walsh rightly translates the passage in this respect. Mitchell (who is followed by Frere) wrongly supposes that the prohibition is against Lamachus being "allowed to become a purchaser." They treat irphs kjA and Aa/iaxdovnv toTs Tr\r]js = "if he shall gather some idea other than this'' ; 138 el Se K . . . \ ^ . . 'AxiA'ij' io-)(WTi Kol OVK elSa-i /uax^" a-Oai = " if truly they shall restrain him and forbid him to fight" '"" ; xxiv. 296 d Se tol ov Saa-ei . . . = " if he shall refuse to give" ; Od. ii. 274 el S' ov Keivov y' ea-o-l ydvos kcu H-qvekoTreiris = " if you are the offspring of some other than him and Penelope"; xii. 382 ei Se juot ov Tio-ovo-i . . . "if they shall fail to pay " (so also xiii. 143 d irkp Tts . . . | oii rt rUi) ; Solon Fr. 32 el hi yrjs ecfteLO-dfji.'ijv \ TrarptSos, TVpavviSo? Se Kal ^irjs afieiXixov I ov K(x6rj\j/ajj.t^v, . . . ovSev alSevfJMi = " if I ai)stained from laying hold of" ; Simonid. Ceus Fr. 175 (j>riiu Tov OVK eOeXovra <^epeiv ... | . . • Su) rj[i,w ye . . . o^Sets ovSexore ap^erai = " if at least it is to be the case that no one at any time is to begin with us " ; Auctor de intern, affect, in Hippocr. i. p. 554. F. = ii. p. 502. 5. K. oivov Se Trtviru) XevKov, fjv ^viMJiepy • rjv B' ov ^vij,(j>eprj, jjiXava = " if truly it shall suit ; if truly it shaU be otherwise than suitable " ; Dem. de Ehod. Ubert. p. 197. 9 eir o^k aiaxpov . . . el rh piev 'Apyemv 7rA'^6'os ovk k^o^rjOr) Trjv A.aK£SaLfwvi(»v dpxfjv . . ., •uju.ets 8' . . . fSap/Sapov avOpwirov . . . (jjo^'^qa-ea-de '" = " if whereas the Argive people was fear- less as to the rule of Lacedaemonians, you shall be afraid . . ." ; de Fall. Leg. p. 364. 10 oij yap ws d fir] Slo. AaKeSatfioviovs, ovS' TdvTUS 5^ irov, i6,v re aii KoX "AvvTos oi ijrqTe i&v re (^^re : where see Stallbaum ; as also on p. 26 D koL oSt(i1 . ■ . ofa airoiis direlpovs ypaii/idTOiv elvai, Siare oix elSivai ("as to be ignorant"). In this latter note he recalls after a previous commentator Lysias Theomnest. i. p. 117. 26 iJ/uSs . . . dSiviu ■qyoD/iai. . . . tovtov . . . oih-a cKaibv Hvai. Siare oi Sivaadai ("to be unable") . . . and Lyourg. v. Leoar.^ p. 148. 11 vvv di irepiiffTTjKeii els tovto, !h(Tre tov ISlq. KoiSvpeiovTO. . . . oij ^CMiroKiv ("an enemy to the state ") dXXi ipiXoirp&yiwva. SoKetv etvai. In Plat. Apol. p. 29 B we have 'kv&rif dnffr^ffavres Ss iifyri f) t^v i.pXT)" oi SeTv . . ., ^ . . . oix o^^" '''^ ^^"""^ • • ■=^' o'Ji' ^V ^ ^etv ■^ oT6v re ehai. 1=" I. Note the difference between a bimembered sentence such as this, where the oix occurs in the first clause of it, and similar sentences, where the oi/c occurs in the second clause. Such a sentence is Thuc. i. 121. 7, ubi vid. Mr. Shilleto. „, „ 2. On the reading /JM^iaeaBe for which Bekker has 0o/37j9r;<76(ree, see note SS- 12. li'l So Mr. Shilleto translates the passage. See his note. 400 GREEK AND LATIN 54 5 SiKaia = " the wrong-doings in Dodona " ; Orat. Funehr. col. 11 1. 12 TTois . . . TOVTODS OVK evTV)(ils Kpiveiv SUaiov . . . ; = " as otherwise than happy " ; c. Athenog. col. 5 1. 12 rjpwTWfiev el ovk al(rx"voiTO xf/evSo/j^vos = " whether he gloried in his deceit." 6. See further Mr. Shilleto on Thuc. i. 3. 2. SS. The Greek 55- !• wixifievcreTai : passive =" shall be given in marriage.'' future in -(rofiai. 2. That " passive Futurum Medii apud Atticos usurpari in verbis quam pluribus, nemo hodie ignorat," was Spalding's (ad Dem. Mid. p. 524. 8) statement of the case, as to the use of the futures in -o-o/iat, as it stood in 1794. The text of his sermon was the expression rots dSiK-qa-ofievois used by Demosthenes in the passage in question in a passive sense ; and he cites, as other instances of the particular word dSiKYja-ea-Oai, or its parts so used, Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2. 18 ; Thuc. v. 56. 2; Plat. Gorg. p. 509 D. 3. That, of futures of this form, — " cui Futuri Medii titulum dederunt Grammatipi," — " usus passivus Atticis maxime placuit " — of which he collects some thirty examples from the Tragedians alone ; adding that such examples " apud ceteros Atticos fre- quentissima sunt: vid. Pierson ad Moerin pp. 13. 367. Prae- iverat Homerus in Odyss. A 123 x"'/*^ ^^'"^ " '^"■P "W (ftiX-qo-eat," was Monk's (ad Eur. Hipp. 1460 = 1458 ed. suae) verdict nineteen years later. 4, But "it was not"- — to use the language, twenty years younger still, of Archdeacon Hare ("On Certain Tenses attributed to the Greek Verb " Philol.-Mus. ii. pp. 203, 221, 222) — " that the Attic writers muUa futura media ponebant pro passivis, as Pierson says . . . ; but that form which in the later ages of the Greek language, in the ages when the Grammarians wrote, seems to have been used exclusively in a middle sense, had previously had a wider range legitimately belonging to it." " That instinct, which in all languages is ever silently at work in desynonymising words, as Coleridge terms it, and giving definiteness to the speech of a people in proportion as its thoughts become more definite, manifested itself in assigning one form of the future and aorist to the passive voice, another to the middle ; . . . Instances however remain to show that, at the time when the Greek language comes first into view, the line of demarcation was not deemed quite impassable ; and the passive voice would not unfrequently assert its rights to its cast-ofF future, and, now and then, though very rarely, even to the aorist." " The use of the future middle in a passive sense, which is so common in S5 8— Ixvii-lxviiia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 401 Attic writers, was not an arbitrary license, but was in perfect accord with the original force of that tense, a force which it had not yet entirely lost." 5. "Can any one persuade himself," wrote, again, in 1839 Dr. Arnold on Thuc. ii. 87. 11 rjv Se rts koI PovXtjOtJ, koAckt- ^ijcrerai . . ., oi Se dya^ot ri/jbrjcrovTai, "that there is really a difference intended to be expressed between KoXacrOria-eTai and Tt/x-ijtrovTat ? . . . Grenerally, it is very true, the Greek writers distinguish between the passive and middle forms of the future, but in the earliest state of the language n/Aijo-o^at like tijx5>[w.i must have performed' the double functions of a passive and middle verb, and it cannot be wondered at that it should occasionally do so even if another form existed which was especially appropriated to the passive voice." 6. And yet such is the inveteracy of prejudice, such the persistence of error, that, even as late as the year 1871, Mr. Shilleto found himself constrained to point out expressly that ^Xail/o/jLeda in Thuc. i. 81. 4, KwXva-ovTaL in 142. 1, iaa-6fievoL in 142. 6, were all passives ; nay more, to add to his note on the last passage the half-despairing, half-ironical cry, "I anticipate that shortly we shall cease calling such forms ' futures middle.' " '^" 7. The following may be taken, it is submitted, as a broad its usage. view of the usage in Greek of the future in -a-ofiai. 8. The future in -a-ofjai, except ''™'' where it is in use as the future of an active verb, e.g. aKova-oixai as the future of the active d/coijft),^™" is the future of the present in -ofiai, and is passive or middle according as that is. In the excepted cases, '^™* the future in -a-of^ai is never passive. ^"^ Dr. Rutherford, ten years later still, is certainly not wanting in courage in his views as to the use of the so-called " future middle " ; writing, as he does, in his Mw Phrynichus p. 189 "the form that is generally called future middle, and is constantly noted by lexicographers as a peculiarity when in a passive sense, is far the most common future for the passive voice." Ixviia At any rate, as a general rule ; for it must he admitted that in Xen. Xen. An. vii. Anab. vii. 2. 14 all the best MSS., apparently, have avKKi^j/erai., which, if 2. 14. correct, must have a passive sense attributed to it. IxvUi As to the possibility of iKoiu having also had a future in the active form, dxoiffd), as well as i,Koi, and is followed in so doing by Bekker, Goeller, and Arnold, is the correct one in the passage in question, viz. Kal ijv ^iBiawaiv airrol irpdrepov 8ui^9elpavTes t6 vapbv (TTpdrev/ia airrwv, diaToXef/.Tiffdfi.a'ov := " the matter mil be in the way of being fought out to a finish," passive. Arnold aptly quotes from Thuc. i. 68. 3 vvp di H Set imKpriyopav, 3>v Toiis fikv SeSovKw/iivovs opwre, rots S' iiripovKeiovras aiirois, Kal oix ijaa-ra rots ijii^TipoiS iviJ,iJ.6.x<»-h "ol iK toKKoO Trporape(rKeva6pb)v | (jjpvKTiopbZv Te Kal Trvpoi TrapaWayai : Soph. bed. Gol. 852 XP°^f y^Pi °'^' ^y'^> yvfio-ei, raSe. And yet Erfurdt (ad Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1499 ed. min.) would, according to Dindorf ad l, take da-eTai " signifioatione passiva, scietur " ! The phrase Kal Tax' etcrcTat occurs in the recently dis- covered Eur. Awtiop. Fr. A. 16 (in Hermathena No. xvii. p. 41), but the context is gone. Thuc. vi. 69. 3. 11. Thuc. vi. 69. 3 ot S' kxi'>povv, "ZvpaKocrioi /jiv irepi re waTpiBos fx,axovfX,e.voi Kal . . . ■ tSv Se evavTLiov 'AOr/vaioi p,ev irepi Te T5JS dA-AoT/jtas OLKeiav (r)(6tv, Kal . . ., 'Kpyeloi Se Kai Tu>v ^vp/mx'^v ol avTovofLOi ^vyKT^craa-dai Te eKeivoi'S k a rjXdov Kal . . . • TC) S' VTT'iqKOOV Tuiv ^vp.p.dx'^v p,eyuTTOV pev Trepl ttJi avTiKa dve\7ria-Tov (TU>Tr)pi,aii rairas ras aMas j^^ 'AOriv. ttoX. iirlaTevov 6 d^/ios T(fi 'KXeiaSivei. : — iirlcrevov is a correction, in the unique MS., f,_ 21.' for 4irlv pi) /ioi 6ipi,i. 404 GREEK AND LATIN 55 11 — Ixxia Camoens : Ms Thuoydideanism. The Fatherland. is that of the " bumptiousness " — if the expression may be pardoned — of the subject allies. " Athenians, forsooth ! who are they? they could do nothing without our help." So the Chinese warrior during the events of 1857, of whom the Times newspaper correspondent wrote (17th August 1857) : " Poor Wang ! all our officers pity Mm as a foeman worthy of their steel. He once went into action against some pirates on the paddle-box of an English steamer, and then wrote a letter to say that he had received some aid from the barbarians." Dobree {Adv. i. p. 90) takes a similar view of the passage : " Malim," he says, " ei tis tl olWo — avTO's viraKovareraL . . . Sed hoc quidem non opus est: intellige eVao-Tos. Eecte sensum explicat prior Hudsoni interpretatio"; viz. "illorum imperio minus premerentur, quod eos in aliis populis subigendis adjuvissent." Arnold's view of the construction of the passage, viz. that VTraKOva-erai is used "iu a passive and impersonal sense," and that " avTo'd is probably the dative of the agent and not of the object," so that " et p§.ov avrots viraKova-eTai is ' if they should have to obey on easier terms ' " is disposed of by the consideration that — pace illius — vTraKova-erai can- not, for the reasons given above, be used as a passive. Even if it could be so used, the dative of the agent after other tenses of the passive verb than the perfects is a thing to be remarked upon, when it does occur, and instances of it are not to be multiplied unnecessarily. See below note 75.4 (2). Before parting with this passage of Thucydides, attention may be called to the — conscious or unconscious — repetition of its opening passage in Camoens {Os Lusiadas iv. 30. 1) " comega-se a travar a incerta guerra ; | de ambas partes se move a primeira ala ; | huns leva a defensao da propria terra, | outros as esperangas de ganha-la." '^'"* 1="''^ I. Camoens elsewhere also reminds one very much of Thucydides, both in his ideas and in his mode of expressing them. Compare, for example, Ms Os Lus. vili. 63. 1 "se por ventura vindes desterrados, | como ji foram homems d'alta sorte, | em meu relno sereis agasalhados ; | que toda a terra he patria para o forte," with Pericles' well- known words, Thuc. ii. 43. 2, koikJ yap t& udi/uiTa SiSicres Idtg, rbv &jiipii>v lirauiov iXd/i^avov Kal rbv rdipov einarfiJ.bTa.TOV, oix iv $ Kelvrai /i-aWov, dXK' iv (p T) S6|a aiiTuv wapb, tQ ivTVxivn del Kal \byov Kal Ipyov KaipQ &dt/,vriv ykp iiri.avSiv iratra yq rdipos : although, indeed, a nearer parallel with Camoens' actual words may be found in Eur. Fr. Inc. 19 Bind. = 1034 Nauck ^Tras p.^v d.'^p aUrt^ 7repd(rLfj.os, j diraaa di y(^6d)v dvdpl yevvaiijj irarpts, or Ovid's copy. Fast, i. 493 omne solum forti patria est, ut piscibus aequor, | ut volucri vacuo quidquid in orbe patet. 2. Nobler sentiments these than those of Hermes in Ar. Plut. 1151 (hut taken no doubt from Euripides or some other Tragic original) irarpU ydp iim irau' tv' &v irpdrTTi tis eS, with which compare Lysias p. 872 Reiske, quoted by Bergler ad I., yvt^firj $^ XP^^"^^* '^^ Taira 7^ irarph aiiTots iffTiV^ iv rj Siv ri 55 12— Ixxii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 405 12. Dem. de Bhod. libert. p. 197. 9 efr' ovk altrxpov . . ., d to Dem. de Rhod. IJtiv 'Apyeuiov ttXtjOo^ ovk ecjio^'iqOrj ttjv AaKeSaL/Mviwv Lib- ?• 197. 9- a.pxr]V h eKeivois rots Katpojs oi5Se ttjv p^t^t^v, v/iets S' OVT6S 'Adrjvaioi fidp/iapov avOpiairov, koX ravra yvvoLKa, t^o^-qa-io-di ; = " would it not be a disgrace, if, while the populace of Argos was fearless in those days . ., you shall show fear ? " The best MS., S, has (jio/Sr^crea-dat ; the second best, F, <^oj8');- a-ecrOe. "Who can doubt that (pofi'^crecrde is the right read- ing, and that ^o^iqdrjcria-Oe, which is placed in his text by Bekker, is a mere correction ? '^''" iiriTTiSeia exaaiv : Teuoer in Trag. Incert. (qy. Pacuvius) Fr. Inc. 92 patria st, ubioumque st bene ; Sententia of Publ. Syrus 635 libi sis cum tuis et bene sis, p^triam non desfderes ; Chevalier des Grieux in Prevost Mcmon Lescaut (pt. ii. p. 264) " vivre en Europe, vivre en Am^rique, que m'importe en quel endroit vivre, si j'^tais sur d'y Stre heureux en vivant aveo ma maitresse ? Tout I'univers n'est-il pas la patrie de deux amauts fiddles ? Ne trouvent-ils pas I'un dans I'autre p^re, m^re, parents, amis, riohesses et fyicite?" 3. Another fine reference to "the Earth" may be added, as well in the The Earth, present connection as for the sake of the grammatical peculiarity involved in it, viz. Tao. Ann. xiii. 56 deesse nobis terra, ubi vivamus ; in qua moriamur non Tac. Awn. xiii. potest. 56. [The positive potest only must be supplied mentally vfith deesse, to Sentences, afSr- balance the negative non potest, which is expressed in the second half of the mative and nega- sentence. Cf. Hor. JBpod. 5. 87 venena magnum fas nefasque, non valent | con- tive interlaced, vertere humanam vicem= "poisons (can) turn aside right and wrong: they cannot turn aside the retribution which comes upon men " ; and also (after Doederlein ad Tac. I.e.) Tac. Ann. xii. 64 Agrippina, quae Alio dare imperium, tolerare imperitantem nequibat ; and (after Orelli and Eoth on this latter passage) Hist. i. 8 Cluvius Rufus, vir facundus et paois artibus, bellis in- expertus — where, however, Orelli suggests that so to construe the passage is "sane durins," and he prefers to take ^acis artibus as "ablativus qualitatis, ad quos olim supplebant &v, praeditus, instructus, abundaus." Cic. de Fin. i. 1. 2 (also cited by Doederlein ubi supr.) plura susoepi, veritus, ne movere hominum studia viderer, retinere non posse, is not, however, in point ; for, as Madvig ad I. points out, ' ' moverl . . . studia, apparebat tenebaturque ipsa res : de retinendi facultate et potestate dubitari poterat." In such passages as the following an expressly negative clause is followed, without break, by one which is to be taken as an aifirmative : Horn. II. v. 81 9 oO /i eiiis fmxdpeirffL 0eols AvriKpi /idxeffSai. | rots SXXois • S.Tep et xe Ai6s Svyi-Titp 'A0poS£tij I i\6ri(r' h TrSXc/iov, ttjv y oirinev 6^h x^'^'^V '■ Soph. Oed. Tyr. 255 0^5' el yap fjv rb irpayna /li) Be^Xarov, \ d,K6,BapTov i/ias eifcbs Jjv oifrws ^S;*, | . . . dXX' i^epewav : Hyperides c. FMlippid. 1. 165 oiicow oiiK &^ioi> to, roirov ASik-q- fMTa airois avaSixeudai, dXXct TL/iuipeia-Bac rbv i.SiKovvra.'] 4. Returning for a moment to Thucydides and his imitators, conscious or Tasso G. L. 18. unconscious, Arnold on Thuo. ii. 76. 4 calls attention to the correspondence 80. between the description of the siege of Plataea as there narrated with that of the siege of Jerusalem in Tasso Qerus. Lib. a. 18. s. 80. li^i Of course the form in -B'^a-o/j.ai is found, as in Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 30 0oj37;- e-flffovrai : Plat. Rep. v. p. 470 A 0;8i)5i7(r6/ieea [(j>o^ri6s ; [vid. L. Dindorf ad I. Ti/aiB'/ia-oVTai is used to express the passive in Tliuc. vi. 406 GREEK AND LATIN SS 13-lxxiii-lxxiv Dem. e. Gonon. 13. Dem. e. Oonon. p. 1269. 19 eyo) tolvvv 6 SiKaioTepov troy p. 1269. 19. TTia-Tivdeis av Kara iravra . . . ■^dekrjo-a ofiocrai ravrl, ovx VJT^P TOU iiJri Sovvai SUrjV &v -^SiKi/jKa, Kal oriovv TTOiZv, (SoTrep a-v, dX\' VTrep t^s dX-rjOeiK koI virep tov [J.fj irpocrvlSpicrOrjvai, ws ov KareinopK7](T6[ie.vos to 'irpayp,a = " on behalf of truth and in order that I might not receive additional outrage : as not being about ( = because I did not intend) to be defeated in the matter by false swearing (on your part)." So Mr. ShUleto, taking the word KareiriopKui, which is extant, apparently, in this passage only, to mean — ^not to " effect " or " gain " " by perjury," but — (after the analogy of Kara- ij/evSop^apTvpZ of. Plat. Gorg. p. 472 A) to "defeat a man by false swearing." Of which verb — without resorting to Dobree's {Adv. i. p. 514) correction, which Dindorf adopts, KaTeiriopKrjOrjcrofjtevos — KaTETTto/DKijcro/iEvos is the future participle passive, to irpay/xa being used as the accusative cognate. The suggestion that the word should mean to "effect" or " gain " " by perjury " simply grew out of the idea that KaT£irio/3/ojcrdyu.evos must be middle. It is noticeable, however, that, if that had been so, and if the meaning of the word had been that which, it was assumed, followed upon the admission of that hypothesis, viz. "as being about to win the matter by perjury," the sense of the passage would have reqiiired, not what it in fact has, but ov)(^ (OS KaTeTriopKTjcrop^vo's. 14. Additional examples of so-called futures middle used as passives may be found in Soph. j4;'. 1155 irrjfiavovp.evo's^^'^"^ ; Herod, viii. 49 Trokiop- KijcrovTai ; Eur. Suppl. 521 .kiriTa^op-eu-da.; Tro. 1139 vvjj.'^ivcreTa.i^^^^ ; Antipho p. 113. 28 <}>iXrj(rop,ivri ; Thuc. iii. 40. 11 ^rjfuworo/jLevov ; iv. 115. 2 irpoa-d^ecrdai ; vi. 64. 1 fiXdtpovTai • Xen. Anab. i. 4. 8 ineprp-ovTai (followed immediately by dvaX-q^ovrai in an active sense) ; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 B dp,cj)icrl3T]TiqvGiv i)v ■ ■ . ; and Plat. PoMi. p. 298 B Kar' iviavrbv Se ye ap)(^ovTa's KaBia-Tao-Oai tov ttAjj^ovs, etVe ck T(i>v 7rAox)(7i(ov eiTe Ik tov S-jfiov TravTos, os av KX-qpov/jiivoi X.ay)(dvy.) Dem. ilfi'd. p. 516. 19 aywvietrai (in company with K/3i^ijcr£Tat) ; p. 524. 8 rots dSLKrp-ojjxvoK as opposed to Tots dSiKijo-oixrtv (on which passage was written Spalding's note referred to above in this note § 2). S6. l3X.ail/6p.i6a, passive. See note 55 above. 5 6a. A splendid collection of examples of el with the past subjunctive as a protasis, and the past indicative with and without av as an apodosis — the whole expressive of indefinite frequency or recurrence — will be found in Ar. Nub. 961-983. See also Plut. 975-1024. 56. 56a. S6aa. Our forefathers in Charles the First's time occasionally shod their horses with gold. Thus we have in Venture's " song, made o' the horses " in Shirley's Hyde Park iv. 3 a reference to " Toby with his golden shoes " ; and in the same author's Lady of Pleasure i. 2 Celestina taunts her steward — " shall any juggling tradesman | be at charge to shoe his running-horse with gold, I and shall my coach-nails be but single-gilt ! " 56aa. Golden horse - shoes and coach-nails. 56b. Mr. Shilleto, ad l, says "el pjr) dSiKotvro puts the supposition more generally than ■^v /^ij aSiKuvrat, 'putting the case that they should not be wronged.' " This is hardly satisfactory. "Putting the case that they should not be wronged" = "if they should not be wronged " = either " if under certain circum- stances they should (or would) not be wronged," which would be in Greek el /ii) oSikoivto dv, or (less usually) ■^i' firj dSiKoivro ; or "if they shall not be wronged," which would be in Greek ■tjv fUTj dSt/cwvTat. The proper place wherein to classify the sentence would seem to be where it is placed in the Text. 57. On Sia Ttts XiTrapds, where we might have expected 8. t5 a. = "by reason of the epithet Xnrapds," cf. Dem. de Pais. Leg. p. 391. 6 and Mr. Shilleto ad I. In Ar. Av. 57 irai Trot. 11. tl Aeyeis, oStos ; rhv eiroira ■koi KaAeis ; I ovK dvrl tov TratSos cr' exp^iv hroiroi KaXetv ; Elmsley's proposed correction dvrl tov iraZ irai, was therefore needless. S6b. Thuc. 120. 5. 57. kr.Ach.UO. Av. 57, 58. 408 GREEK AND LATIN S8 1 S8. The Gram- marians on — the accentuation of d, *° prevent misconception, forsooth ! Credat Judaeus. Not so Elmsley, Mr. Maiden, or Mr. Shilleto; with whom the present writer is bold to agree. 2. Equally arbitrary was the Grammarians' way of writing eea-o-aro (Hom. Od. xiv. 295), from the word eta-a etc., meaning to "seat" or "place," with the smooth breathing; in order to distinguish it from lea-a-aro from evvvfjuL, to " clothe " ; adverted to by Buttmann Irreg. Qk. Fbs. s.v. 'Eil. 2. 59- 612. Eur. Bacch. Elmsley's note dl. 59. 1. The construction of this passage has given what seems to be unnecessary trouble to the interpreters. 2. The Chorus is expressing its delight at again seeing Dionysus safe and free ; whereupon the latter asks it, eh d6vfji,iav dvXa^ ■^f, d cni (rt)/ivXa^ ov ^v, el <7v a-vfivXa^ av e'lrj, el vX.o^ ^v, el (TV (TviJi,(l>opS.i Tvxo ts ; Quae verba ita " [ought, as has been said, to be translated in English, viz. " who was there — as a fact — in existence as a guardian to me, if soever you fell into trouble?" and] "Latine reddenda sunt" [as has been also said quis mihi custos erat, si quid tibi mali acciderat or accidisset? and not as Elmsley proceeds to say] "quis mihi dux futurus erat, si tibi aliquid mali accidisset? ifv enim pro e/jteWev ea-ecrOai accipiendum est." [One asks, why ? The answer given is] " Conferendus omnino noster Here. 462 a-ol iAv"Apyo^ evefi 6 Kwrdaviiiv Trarij/o, | 'EvpvuOkiO'i S' e/ieXAes oiKTjcreLv So/ious, | rrji KaXXiKap/Kov Kparos e'xwv IleAao-ytas. | uv S' '^crOa 6?j/3wv twv ^iXappAnov ava^, \ eyKXrjpa weSia rdpA yrjs KeKT7]fievo?." [That is, "you were about to dwell in, you were on your way to be lord over " — ^a-da, past imperfect tense.] "In superiori membro dixit efieWes oiKqa-eiv, in altero ^a-6a pro e/^eAAes ea-ea-Oai." [That is to say, in the particular sense each mode of speech was apt.] "Quo sensu ^v recte post se habet el crv a-vp-cfiopa's tvxok." [This is 410 GREEK AND LATIN 59 * simply assertion : but a kind of reason is attempted to be given in its favour ; for Elmsley adds] " Ita enim " [the italics are the present writer's] "Euripides Iph. A. 1405 'Aya/it^uvovos Trai, fj,aKdpi6v fii Tis 6e(ov | e/teXAe O-qa-eiv, el Tv-)(oiiJ.i (t5>v yd/uav. [But this — where e/ieXAe has an independent subject, and governs a transitive verb, which in its turn governs an independent object, and has a subordinate clause depending upon it; the whole sentence meaning "some god was about to make me happy, if haply I should have-entered into wedlock with you," being the reported form after the past verb, e/j^XXe, of what would in the direct speech have been Orjcrei or (jteWet Or/o-eiv fjte fj^aKapiov, r)v Tvx<» crwv ydfjtwv — ^is in no sense comparable with e/icAXcs oiK'qcreLv, where €/ieAAes has no independent subject and olK-qa-etv is an intransitive verb, and there is no subordinate or indirect clause depending upon it.] "Si de periculo adhuc pendente sermo esset, chori verba ita se habere deberent : n's /j-oi eTo. On Thuc. viii. 86. 4 he cites as an additional instance — wrongly saying, however, that " the use of the imperfect " is " to express what was going to happen, on such and such suppositions," when he should have said "what was going to happen m fact ; on the w;ay to happening " — Plat. Crito p. 47 D o t(j) /xev St/cajo) j3eXTL0v eyiyvero, T<^ Se dSiK(j} diruiXXvTo : as to which passage see Text § 45 (13) and the note there, viz. note 52 above. 6i 3 — Ixxiva CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 411 60. On Kai used with an epitatic force, see note 44 above. 60. 61. 1. So, as it seems to the present writer, should this 61. Alexis Aij- passage be read and translated. H-'krp- Fr. i. 2. IxOv's ovK kvy\v is the reading given to us by Athenaeus, who (viii. p. 338 d) preserves the passage. This would mean "fish it was not possible for any one to eat." Compare Turpilius' translation, in his Demetrius 21, antehdc si flabat dquilo aut auster, inopia | turn er^t piscati. Person {Adv. p. 102) altered this latter reading into I'x^Cs OVK av ^v — needlessly, as was observed by Elmsley (ad Eur. Bacch. 612), in fact, although, as we have seen (note 59. 4 ad Jin.), not exactly on grounds which can be accepted. 2. With the construction Ix&vs ovk hrjv \ ovSevl (jbayctv, com- pare that in Horn. Od. viiL 20 Trda-crova drJKev ISea-Oai (middle); xi. 75 oiSiv ianv iSeiv (TTjixu, ... I dvSp&s SvcrrrivoLo Koi imro/jhevoicri, TrvOitrOaL : sim. — in Greek ; Solon Fr. 13. 24 ve<^mv ovhev er' IcttIv ISetv : Parrhasius Fr. 3. 2 Toios oS' ottiv opav : Archiloohus Fr. 60. 3 dAAa fj,oi (r/jLLKpoi Tts €Lrj Kal irepl KVY/fia's iSetv | poLKos : Aesch. Pers. 419 OdXcurcra S' ovKer' ^v tSeiv''^™; Eur. Danae Fr. 3. (Dind. = 318 Nauck.) 4 dAA' oijSev ovna Xapm-phv ovK ISeiv KaXov, \-m K.T.X. : Erechih. Fr. 17. (D. = 362 N.) 4 cyd) hi SiacTb} TTjv kpirp/ TraiSa Kraveiv : Thuc. ii. 77. 5 ovk ?jv ireXda-ai : Lysias p. 111. 17 eT06/ios . . irapaSovvai /3aa-avi^eiv (the same phrase recurring in Dem. ad Aphob. p. 852. 11 sqq.); Aristot. Hist. Anim. iv. 10 = p. 537^ 6 aXuTKOVTai yap ot IxOv^^, ■ ■ ■ kS,v aurre ry X^V' Xafi^dveiv py.diavept)v /xiv ^7(07' ol/ioi ypSivai tovt' etvai iraaiv ofioim, the order of words seems to be ot/mi tovt' ehai cjiapepiv iran yviivat. in other Ian- 412 GREEK AND LATIN 6i 3 Hor. Sat. i. 2. 101 altera nil obstat : Oois tibi paene videre est I ut nudam. Aleman Guzman de Alfarache : Al vulgo " y si se buviessen de pintar al vivo las penalidades, y trato de un Infierno, pareceme, que til solo pudieras (verdaderamente) ser su retrato." Aretino La Talanta v. 10 "ma se le cose si avessero a far due volte, . . . vorrei . . ." ; II Lasca Le Gene i 2 "quanta gioja Amerigo ed il compagno avessero . ., non fe da domandare " ; Parabosco / Di/porti i. 1 " rade volte si lasoiava da Lodovica vedere" ; De Rossi GoTMtiedie vol. iv. Prolog, "il manoscritto . non fu potuto da me rivedere." Ceini Nouvelles nouvelles xxxix. " si oeste attente estoit souvent k faire"; BrantSme Dames Gall. v. p. 396 "et volontiers, si le choix fust est6 k faire, eust on laiss^ . . ." ; Zola Pot Bouille o. 2. p. 36 " ab ! si c'^tait k refaire, et si j'avais seulement connu votre famiUe ! " Cent Nouv. nouv. xcviii. extr. "et est k supposer qu'ilz ont est^ puniz selon I'exigence du cas piteux"; same phrase, id. c. ad fin. ; Rabelais Pantagruel : Prolog. "mais ilz ne sont pas a comparer k celuy dont nous parlons " ; Montaigne Essais iii. 5 " et ceulx, que nous craignons le moins, sont a I'adventure les plus k craindre"; same phrase, id. ih. ii. 37 ai init. ; Le Sage Bialle loiteux c. 4. p. 54 (ed. Paris 1821); c. 15. jjp. 233. 249 ; Laclos Les liais. dangereuses 167 ; Montaigne Essais ii. 37 orf init. "il est k croire que ie doibs a mon pere cette qualitd pierreuse " ; same phrase, Laclos Les liais. dangereuses 134 ; Brantome Dam. Gall. viii. p. 425 " de 1^ en avant il est k penser au monde ce qu'ils firent de leurs amours, et s'ils les mirent k execution"; i. p. 279 "il estoit k presumer que c'estoit pour s'en servir"; Marivaux Les Sinchres sc. 1 "il serait k souhaiter que vous aimassiez ailleurs " ; Brantome Dam. Gall. v. pp. 397. 398 " celles qui en produisent de beaux, braves, et genereux . . . sont k louer . . . Ceste reyne est k louer en toutes sortes de louanges"; same phrase, id. ib. vi. p. 418 ; Montesquieu Temple de Gnide p. 119 " J'entends louer Camille par tons ceux qui la connaissent " ; Le Sage Turca/ret i. 3 " hflas 1 je suis plus k plaindre qu'a blftmer"; same phrase, id. Les Oheminies i. p. 325; Marivaux Les Sincires sc. 11 ; Laclos Les liais. danger. 56 ; 105 ad init. ; Voltaire Oandide c. 19 ad fin. ; c. 27 med. (bis) ; Le Sage Twrcaret i. 3 " que vous etes facile k tromper!" Diable boiteux c. 8 "votre oflfre n'est pas k rejeter"; Laclos Les Uais. dangereuses 114 "cette espfece 6i 3 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 413 d'apathie subite n'esfc jamais k ndgliger"; 168 "cepen- dant, il est k remarq^uer, que depuis cette aventure, il ne s'eat pas flevd une seule voix ea faveur de Pr^van " ; Le Sage Siable boiteux c. 3 "je vois dans cette maison une grande et jeune fiUe faite k peindre " ; Alphonse Daudet Ta/rtarm sur lesAlpes c. 4 "le fait est que le Tarasconnais 6tait k peindre." Goethe Balladen : HochzeitUed st. 2. 5 " was ware zu thun in der herbstlichen Nacht V Keller Stilicho (ed. Berlin 1884) p. 10 "nocla giinstiger aber urteilt iiber Claudian Jeef, der in seinen Untersucbungen zu dem Scblusse kommt, dass daudian selbst da voUen Glauben verdiene, wo er Dinge erzable, welche anderswo nicbt zu iinden waren." Shakspeare Twelfth Night iii. 3 " wbat's to do ? | shall we go see ... ? " Macbeth v. 7 " little is to do " ; Dryden Mock Astrol. iv. 2 " but if it were to do again . . ., I would even plainly confess . . ." ; Defoe Boxana p. 49 " so all that work was to do over again " ; Shaksp. Sonnet 129. 2 "till action, lust | is perjur'd, murderous, bloody, full of blame, | savage, extreme, rude, cruel, not to trust" ; Lover's Complaint 101 "yet, if men mov'd him, was he such a storm | as oft 'twixt May and April is to see" ; Herrick Hesperides ii. p. 119 "Hunch has no money (he do's sweare or say) | about him, when the Tavern's shot's to pay " ; Head and Kirkman The English Rogue part ii. c. 8 extr. " notwithstanding dinner was to dress, yet locking the door, all the rhetorick, that could be used to her, could not prevail with her to quit her chamber all that day " ; Defoe Roxana p. 64 " he called his gentleman again to take away the table, who at first only took the cloth, and the remains of what was to eat, away " ; Dryden Mock Astrol. v. 1 " if I stay till after Lent, I shall be to marry when I have no love left " ; Folly in Print (in Brand's Popula/r Antiqmties ii. p. 93, ed. Lond. 1813) "but still the stockings are to throw, | some threw too high, and some too flow, | there's none could hit the mark " ; Lord Bsher, M.R., in Ghirm Com- pany v. Com/mercial Company 8 Q.B.D. 145 "the reasons for this are not far to seek"; same or similar phrase, Quarterly Review vol. 173 p. 26 extr. ; Times newspaper, 1 7th Aug. 1886, Telegraphic correspondence; ih. 10th October 1892, third leading article; ih. 15th June 1893, first leading article ; Pall Mall newspaper, 2nd Feb. 1893, leading article "to rehearse the various factors of this strange crew would not serve our purpose here. At St. Stephen's this day they are for the observer to reckon upon his fingers." 414 GREEK AND LATIN 62 62. A\:Av.505. 62. tot av. A happy correction by Porson [ad Eur. Phoen. 401 ( = 412 ed. suae)] of the manuscriptal readings, viz. tot in the Ravenna and Venice MSS., and tot av in one of the Paris and one of the Florence MSS. Dindorf, however, adopts Bentley's correction tote y. 63. Euenus Fr. ii. 6. Sleep and Death. 63. Compare Horn. II. xiv. 231 wi/y . ., Kao-iyvijTcj) ^avaToto : Sir Thomas Browne Urn Burial c. 5 "since the brother of death daily haunts us with dying mementos . . ., diu- turnity is a dream and folly of expectation " ; id. On Dreams " half our days we pass in the shadow of the earth ; and the brother of death exacteth a third part of our lives " ; Shelley Qiieen Mab i. 1 " how wonderful is Death, I Death and his brother Sleep ! " Dean Vaughan Uni- versity Sermons vii. p. 139 "waken a man from that sleep which is death's brother." Hom. II. xvi. 672. 682 {Sttvo) koI OavaTi^ SiSv[ji,docn,v : Hes. Theog. 757 vvktos iraiSes Ipe/xv^s . . ., | "Yttvos koi GavoTos, Seivol 6eoi : Webster The White Devil p. 40 h (ed. Dyce 1871) "0 thou soft natural death, that art joint-twin | to sweetest slumber ! " Tennyson In Mem. Ixvii. " Sleep, Death's twin-brother." Verg. Aen. vi. 278 consanguineus Leti Sopor ; Sackville Induction to the Mirour for Magistrates, st. 41 "by him lay heavy Sleep, the cousin of Death " ; Tennyson In Mem. Ixx. " sleep, kinsman thou to death and trance | and madness." Shakspeare Macbeth ii. 3 " shake off this downy sleep, death's counterfeit, | and look on death itself" ; Oymbeline ii. 2 " sleep, thou ape of death, lie dull upon her ! " Winter's Tale V. 3 " prepare | to see the life as lively mock'd as ever | still sleep mock'd death." Hesiod Op. 116 dvrjcrKov 8' ws vttvii) 8e8|U.7j/i6vot : Tennyson In Mem. xlii. " if Sleep and Death be truly one | . . ." 64. Herod, vii. 64. On the collocation emv jirj MrjXievs, see above note 54. 214. 65. Plat. Fhae- drus p. 251 A. dedteiri. 65. 1. SeSiiir] is Bekker's reading ; in which he is followed by Baiter, Orelli, and Winckelmann in their Zurich edition of 1841, and by Stallbaum in his Leipsic edition of 1850. 2. SeSieiri is the reading of three MSS. The Clarkian MS. has SeSUi 7), which is the same thing— if it be urged that the accentuation of StSict is against its being the same thing, it may 66 1— Ixxv CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 415 be replied that the non-accentuation of 17 proves that letter not to be an independent one ; and if not, then necessarily to belong to and form part of the preceding word, as it cannot belong to that which succeeds. Another MS., by correction, has SeSieir) : the rest (one by correction) have SeSUt. 3. It would seem clear that SeSiurj, however the form — as to which see Curtius' Bos Ferhim (ed. 2) i. p. 179, ii. p. 246 — may be explicable, is the right reading. 4; Buttmann (Irreg. Greek Verbs by Fishlake, ed. 2 p. 59 note t) says, quietly and simply, that he " cannot admit " such a form; adding "if the optative be there indispensable, analogy requires SeSiotrj like Tm^vyoi-q, eXrjXvOolrj, eSrjSoKOirj, ireiroiOo'vr). But the syntax of the common reading d ^vq ScSki (imperf.)," meaning presumably "pastperf." — SeSiet = cSeStet — " . Ovoi av . . . appears to me admissible." It may be so ; but the question is not whether such a con- struction is admissible, but what construction Plato actually used. 5. Cobet (as cited by Dr. Rutherford with approbation in his New Phrynichus p. 270) is good enough to agree, but only in his own high-handed way, with Buttmann : " Prudenter Butt- mannus judicat de Platonis loco in Phaedro p. 251 A, ubi ridiculam formam et prorsus barbaram SeStttij Bekkerus recepit." 66. 1. Cf. 66. ie/ioj.. Sopli. Oed. Tyr. 1242 'Ut' evdv jt/jos'^^ to, vviiv itvKwv tGiv irapd, tov Ntffov iirl rb iloffeiSdiviov, airh Si tou Iloo-eiSwciou eiBiis iirl t^v y4(fivpa.v tV is Mivcfiai' k.t.X. He would, however, probably say that the reading ' ' must at once be accepted as genuine," and that "this is one out of several examples which tend to prove that Attic prose as written by Thucydides was not yet matured " {New Phryn. pp. 218. 28). 5. In Plat. Ia/s. p. 203 A iroi 871 iropeia Kal wSSev ; ^f 'AKaSri/das, fiv S' eyd, iropeiop.ai eiSi AvKelov the bulic of the MSS. have eWtis : but eidi, which Heindorf restored by way of con'eotion — upon the authority of the dictum of the Grammarians — appears in two MSS., and also (although by correction) in the best, the Clarkian. On the other hand, in the opening words of the dialogue — iiropev6fi7iv fjiv i^ 'AKaSri/das eiSi AvKelov — there is no variation of reading in the MSS. Ar. Vesp. 422. ^^^' "Scribendum," says Dindorf ad I. "dXXa ttSs. Conf. ad Acharn. 282 " ; where, in place of the reading of the books Traie iraie, he rightly accepts the correction of Bergk — made in view of the passage which Aristophanes is copying, viz. Eur. Efies. 675 sqq., 685 — Traie ttSs. 66a— Ixxvii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 417 But there can be little doubt that the aspirated forms are the correct ones; and such passages as Ar. Vesp. 423, Eur. Phoen. 152, where the t is long, although there is no augment to make it so, may be taken to prove the fact. Uvto and 'kro : tea-o : Ufieva and cc/tievos : are respectively the middle or passive past imperfects, imperative, participles present, of i-qfj.!. : of which verb, in Attic Greek (subject perhaps to occasional exceptions [of which Ar. Plut 75 is not one (see Dindorf's edition)] — see Dobree ad Ar. FM. I.e. and p. (98), both in Porson's Aristo- phanica), if not also generally, and properly and etymologically (see Cur tins Das Verhum i. p. 157 = 153 '^''™), the i is long. 3. The unaspirated forms would have to be connected with But to say nothing of the difficulty of conceiving a middle or passive of this verb, the t of it when it appears as a separate syllable is as a rule short in Attic Greek. 4. See further Elmsl. ad Soph. Oed. Tyr. I.e. (who refers to Brunck ad Ar. Vesp. I.e.); Buttmann Irregular- Greek Verbs ed. 2 pp. 86, 87 {s.v. etfii) and 115 (s.v. 'Efi) ; Jelf Gr. 6r. § 277; Liddell and Scott s.w. eT/j-i and (.'ij/nt. 5. On the combination of the protasis with the past perfect subjunctive and the apodosis with a past indicative with av, see above note 38. 66a. "Vulgatum KaTepyd^oivro av," says Schneider ad I., 66a. Xen. de- " cum Leunclavii Wecheliana in Kar^pya^ovTo av mutavit Zeune, f^^'wt 12. 19 sqq. cum indicativum ab antecedente tcvro postulari putaret. Contra vulgatam olim scripturam revocavit Weiske . . . Omnino sermonis Graeci usus praesens in hac sententia repudiat et im- perfectum postulat." Even if it were so, such an imperfect would not be found, without an augment, in the shape of Karepyd^ovTo. But it is not so. et etSetev, Karepyd^ocvTo av is a most normal sentence, belong- ing to the division (B) a ii. el elSetev, 'kvTo av is a less usual form of sentence, but is equally normal ; being rendered so by the fact of the protasis Ixxvii "i.rj./u. Ueter den Ursprung des Verbvuns habe ioh Grundz.^ 373 ir)iu. gehandelt, wo iob mich der zuerst von Bopp gegebenen Herleitung a.-as ji-ja-mi angeschlossen habe . . . AUes erklart sich, wenn wir von einer W. ja gr. je ausgehen, die reduplicirt ji-je gibt. Der Hiatus vor Uiievo^ (oIk6.Sc Uiiivwv" [Horn. 7Z.] "B 154) reohtfertigt sich durch die Nachwirkung des anlautenden, die Lange des t duroh die des inlautenden Jod, eben daraus aiioh erklarten wir oben das syllabische Augment im Ao. ?9)Ke." 2 E 418 GREEK AND LATIN 66a — Ixxviii expressing perfectness. "If they were to have recognised" includes, together with its immediate reference to present time, a reference to past time, and so = practically "if they had recognised " ; and to a protasis such as that, 'Uvto av is a per- fectly normal apodosis. See above Text §§ 32-36, and note 38. The case is simply one of a mixture of constructions ; as to which see Text § 68 sqq. N. Tp4fpOlV, Cratinus Apair. It. 6. ajuctproip. 67. Eur. Fr. 67. 1. rpecftoLv i.e. Tpecjioifii. ; shorn of its final t, and then Inc. 152 D. = 895 ^ith its final yu, euphonically changed (cf. e'irjv, etc.): a regular form — face Dr. Rutherford (New Phrynichus p. 450) ; and not, as the old Grammarians imagined, d^rb tov TpeoiiJi.i, T/oe<^ois, Tpe0ot ■ Trkeovcwix(f tov H ArTtKoiJs, rpe^olr), Tperf)Oir)s, Tpecftotrjv' Koi avyKOTry tov H). Moreover, as Curtius says (Das Ferbum i. p. 46, ed. 2), "die vorausgesetzte Form Tpecjioitjv oder ihres gleichen nirgends vorliegt, und nur im Verbum contractum so wie im Perfect ahnliches sich findet (Sp(^7]v, iKTretjievyoirjv Soph. 0. B. 840, Matthiae i. 442 f)." 2. Of the form in question two indisputable examples, only, seem to survive, viz. — the passage of Euripides cited in the Text ( = Fr. Incert. 896 Nauck) ; and one in Cratinus, ApaTTCTtSts Fr. 6 TToSairas vfx.S.'s eivai (jxicTKOiv, & /ietpaKes, OVK av afidproiv;^""''^ 3. Given these two examples, we find, as Curtius (ubi swpr.) remarks, that — " durch mehr oder weniger wahrseheinliche Vermuthungen " — Xoi/3oi.v has been proposed, in place of the manuscriptal Xafiexv, by Hermann, in Eur. Hel. 271, and by Dindorf in Eur. Ereclith. Fr. 17. 6 ( = Fr. 362 Nauck). 4. As to the former of these two passages, however, the reading which Dindorf has adopted seems far preferable, viz. iW e^aX.€Le S6/j.(j)v kpvKii. 2. For the sentiment of the passage cited in the Text, and the notion of retribution for evils inflicted upon others, see Aesch. Agam. 461 tZv TroXvKTovtov yap ovk | oo-kottoi Oiol. 69. 1. There is considerable manuscriptal authority for the 69. Plat. The- reading given in the Text — ^/^ev. At the same time it is fair to "^t- P- 1*7 A. admit that the Clarkian, one of the Vatican, and perhaps one of the Venetian (albeit afterwards with a correction) manuscripts give the easier reading e'^cv. The usual remark applies, viz. — that it is not likely that an easy and usual reading should, if genuine, be corrupted into a more difficult and unusual one. 2. On the combination, of which this passage from Plato Ixxviiia i. There would seem to be something attractive in the "fatal Manufacture of facility " with which an H,v can be manufactured, by a process of dissection, out S,v by dissection, of a longer word commencing with the letters which go to its own formation. Here we have d,va/nr\dKTiTos corrected into &v i/iirXdKriTos. In Aesch. Ag. 1328, cited below in the Text, and see note 70, we have &vTpi\pei.ev corrected into &v Tpitpaev : in Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1387, cited in the Text § 61 (|3), and see note 125, iveaxI'M^ ™to ^^ ifi,rf/ : in Eur. Med. 1181, cited in note 154. 2, ivi\Ktiiv into iv IXkuv. In Solon Fr. 36 extr., but in the more coixect version pointed out to us by the recent discovery of Aristotle's 'A.8r)v. ttoXit. {q.v. t. 12) oiK &v Kariffxe Stj/mov oid' ivwliaaro, | trplv diirapd^as irOap i^eiXei/ ydXa, we have dvTapd^as corrected into S,v rapA^as. So in Hyperides Orat. Fwnebr. col. 9 11. 1 sqq. t( kv avfi^rivai. void^oiixev . . . ; &p' oiK ftc . . . rijn M.a.KeSbvav iirepri^avlav, Kal /iri T7ii> TOV 5tKalov Sivafuv IffX'^^i'V Top' iKdaroK, Hffre iiip-e ywai.Kuv ymjre rrapBivav ixriSi TraiSoiv tfipas dveKXelTTovs ^Kdirrois KaBsardvai ; we have dveKKd-wTovi corrected into tv eKXelirrovs. But as to this see Babington ad I. , and in Ms Postscript. 2. JS contra, in Aeschin. u. Ctesiph. p. 75. 35 " H ttot' hv ipet . . . ; " — the reading of all the MSS. except two, one of which gives us a correction of ipei, but leaves &v a separate word, and the other — "correctus n." of Bekker — runs the two words together — "should of course," as says Mr. Herbert Richards {Class. Rev. vi. 337), who is not fond of Hv with the future in Attic, " be rl tot dvepei" : as in fact Bekker edits it. 420 GREEK AND LATIN 69 2 and the examples which precede it in the Text are instances, of the protasis with the past indefinite subjunctive and the apodosis with a past indicative with av, see above note 38. 70. Aesch. Ag. 70. 1. Sc, because succeeding prosperity effaces the recollec- 1327 sqq. ^JQjj of antecedent ill fortune. (The "sponge.") 2. The idea of the "sponge" has recently been made use of by Mr. J. R Lowell, the late American minister, in some lines which were published in the Times newspaper, 17th August 1891, p. 7 col. 6 : — " our names, as what we write on frail, | Time sponges out like hopeless scores, | unless for mine it should prevail | to turn awhile the faltering scale | of memory, thus to make it yours." 3. The three lines of Aeschylus, which are here cited in the 1330. Text, are followed by the line — v. 1330 — which closes the scene : /cat ravr eK€iv(DV fjmXXov olKnipio ttoXv. The broad meaning of the whole, the present writer trusts Dr. Verrall {ad I.) will allow him to continue, with Mr. Maiden, to think, is that of Shakspeare's {As You lAhe /< ii. 1) " sweet are the uses of adversity." Cassandra utters a general sentiment, which at the same time covers a dark prophecy of the coming fate of Clytemnestra and Aegisthus. She has fallen from the height of prosperity into the depths of adversity. They on the other hand have emerged from darkness into light : " and the latter lot," she moralises, " I think more to be deplored than the former." 4. The lines as cited in the Text represent the passage quoted as it stands " vulgo " (as Dindorf says), and also rightly. Porson needlessly corrected avTpixj/mv into av Tpkxpenv, and dvo-rvxy into ^va-rvx^t The latter change was made, of course, in order to get rid of the construction of d vidth the present subjunctive. The former involved (1) the substitution of a verb implying a "turning out of a prescribed course" for a more appropriate verb signifying an " overturn " ; (2) the substitution of the notion of consequence (sc. by the introduction of av) for the more apt notion of possibility (expressed by the use of the past subjunctive without av — as to which see above note 5). Dobree {Adv. ii. 26) corrected avTpi\jjiiev into avrpexl/ei av, avoiding the first of the difficulties in Person's way, but not the second; and, independently, creating difficulties for himself of the nature pointed out by Elmsley ad Eur. Med. 416, 7. See below note 124a. 2. Schafer proposed, and Mr. Shilleto unnecessarily followed , him, rjv Se Sv(7TV)(rj. 73 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 421 71. On thiis, and several others of the passages referred to 71. Aesoh. and cited hereabouts in the Text, see Mr. Maiden in PUlol. Mm. ^'"'PP^- ^^' ^^''■ i. 99 sqq. 72. 1. This is the reading of the best MSS. 72. Herod, ii. Long, following Schweighauser and Gaisford, but apparently ^^■ on the authority of two MSS. only, reads rjv . . . dva^y. One of these very two MSS., however, joins the Medicean in reading m Herod, iii. 15 rZv, el Kal a-cj^eoiv dirotrTewcrt, o/icos TO?(ri ye Trauj-l avT(Dv airoSLSovm rijv dp^-qv. 2. On the other hand, in Eur. Or. 1533 el yap 'Apyelovs Eur. Or. 1533. l-ird^ei . . ., I ... Kajxe ixfj crwfetv 6eX.ei, | . . . Svo veKptii Karotperai, there is no necessity to interfere with the manu- scriptal reading OeXei. ; still less to read, with Brunck, Oekob, or with others OeXy — which latter reading, indeed, led Nauck to propose yet a further amendment, kS-v p,e /^.i) a-d^eiv deXy. 73. The collocation of el with the present subjunctive — as to 73- f^ with pre- which see notes 78, 130 below — is common in the Hippocratea. examples from the The following are some additional examples : — Hippocratea. Aiict. de loc. in horn. i. p. 418. F. =11. p. 134. 2. K. ; Hippocr. (?) de Haemorrhoid. i. p. 893. F. =iii. p. 343. 5. K. ; Hippocr. de Capit. Vulner. i. p. 907. F. = iii. p. 365. 7. K. el y : Auct. Praedict. ii. : i. p. 102. F. = i. p. 215. 5. K. el . . . Trapafievg : Auct. de Natur. puer. i. p. 246. F. =i. p. 416. 18. K. £t . . . iy : Leophanes (?) de Superfoetat. i. p. 204. F. = i. p. 473. 4. K. 61 TrapaSe)(71Tai : Auct. de Morh. iv. : i. p. 501. F. =ii. p. 336. 4. K. ei . . . SmOeLy . . . Kal ey^erj. Auct. de Morh. i. : i. p. 454. F. =ii. p. 191. 8. K. el yevyrai : Auct. de Mul. Mark ii. : i. p. 640. F. = ii. p. 770. 17. K. el . eyyevTjTai : Praedict. ii. : i. p. 91. F. = i. p. 200. 12. K. el . . . eTTcyevbiVTat : de Ca/rnib. i. p. 253. F. =i. p. 440. 16. K. el . . . (TvXXdj3y : de Oss. Natur. i. p. 279. F. =i. p. 520. 2 el TTovya-y ; de Vict. rat. i. : i. p. 346. F. = i. p. 643. 14. K. el . . . Troiya-y : de loc. m horn. i. p. 424. F. = ii. p. 153. 1. K. el . . diToo-rpa^y : de Morh. i. : i. p. 455. F. =ii. p. 188. 11. K. el . . . SiaxvOy Kal p,eT(UTTy. Euryphon (?) de Morh. iii. : i. p. 495. F. =ii. p. 317. 9. K. el . . . Xd^ys. Auct. de intern, affectionib. i. p. 556. F. = ii. p. 506. 8. K. el . . irapeXOy. Hippocr. (?) de Articulis i. p. 788. F. =iii. p. 153. 5. K. ei . . . erdpy^: id. ih. i. p. 799. F. =iii. p. 175. 3. K. el . (ev^y: id. Mochlic. i. p. 858. F. =iii. p. 293. 4. K. ei . . . eixTretry. Hippocr. de Ca/pii. Vulner. i. p. 898. F. =iii. p. 351. 8. K. el Tvxy. 422 GREEK AND LATIN 73 Auot. de affection, i. p. 524. F. =ii. p. 406. 6. K. et . . KaTcuTTrjpi^T) . . . KOI (TT^ KOI . . /Jir] e^eAavvifTac, 74. Theocr. (?) 74. There seem grounds for repudiating the ascription to XXV. and xxix. Theocritus of the Idylls numbered respectively xxv. and xxix., both here quoted from in the Text. 75. Theocr. (?) 75. 1. dyadhi fiev aKova-eai | e^ao-TCov="you will be listen- ^^^^- '■^^- ing to your praises for goodness from the side of, at the hands of, the citizens." aKova-eaL being in middle form, and in general use as the future of the active verb dKovoy—see above note 55. 8 — there is little temptation to seek to treat it in this passage as passive in meaning, and to look upon oo-twv as an agent after a passive verb, and, further, as an agent preceded by i^ instead of by vn-o. 2. In some cases, however, where the verb is indubitably passive, the temptation to look upon that as an agent, which is no agent, has been too strong for the equilibrium of translators. Agent after pas- 3. For what, in Attic prose, is the mode in which the agent denotldt-^r^e^k ^f^r passive verbs is denoted? prose. 4. In reply, it may be said that (1) After per- (1) After a perfect passive, the agent is usually expressed by the dative case, as in Isocr. Evag. p. 203. a. tSv Eijayopji TreTrpay/tevwv : same verb and construction Isaeus de Pyrrh. Haered. p. 43. 20 ; Dem. de Fals. Leg. pp. 378. 9; 416. 12; Mid. p. 530. 21; Aristocr. p. 623. 2 ; Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 27 1. 15 ; Oral. Funebr. col. 3 11. 5 sqq. ; col. 8 1. 29 ; Isaeus de Pyrrh. Haered. p. 43. 24 rot /le/juipTvpTjixeva NtKoS.^/*^ : Dem. Aristocr. p. 625. 4 rjT0iim.<7T0 8' avroi^ . . . Kal wpo- but not invariably, as in Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 344. 1 rots v' avrov Trejrpayp£voiva-€i, wphs Se K.T.A. : 87. 3 Ttov riix.lv iroiovp.kvwv. 7S 4— Ixxix CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 423 In such cases the dative usually precedes the verb, and may thus be considered as the " dative used on speculation " or the " dative of relation " ; as to which see Mr. Shilleto Thucydides or Grote? p. 30, and on Thuc. ii. 62. 3, and subnote xiii above. The passages cited above, therefore, are to be translated — not so much by "is naturally envied by the citizens": "what is being done by us " as — by " as to the citizens, is naturally an object of envy": "what, so far as we are concerned, is being done." And so on.''™* In Hjrperid. Orat. Fmiebi: col. 8 1. 7 (ed. Babington) edptav . ., (ScTTe TTpo 66a\fji,(tiv opio/jieva aiJTOig ra Setva ookvov 7rapetj(€ roXfiav eh to KivSvveveiv 7r/30}(eipft)S, avTots, although placed enclitically next to opdfieva, is really governed by Trapetx^. For the expression in Thuc. iv. 69. 3 p^ov airots vTraKova-eTai, see above note 55. 11. (3) With some verbs, in connection with which the notion (3) irapd. of transmission from one person to another clearly appears, the agent is expressed by Trapa with the genitive : e.g. uxjieXeia-dab : Plat. ATnator. p. 132 D. 6p.oX.oy€i' rip.wv 66eLri = " from our side." So again iii. 64. 2 Kol vvv d^iovTe, d<^' &v Si' erepovs iyeveaOe dyaOoi, drrh TovToiv ut(j>eXeT(rdai = " from them to receive benefits." So too in poetry, Theognis 957 e? ti TraOiav dir' efj,€v dyaObv ju,£ya [j,rj f^dpiv otSas, | k.t.A. = " at my hands." (5) ^K, irpds. (5) With no verb, probably, in Attic prose ^^™' — pace ixxx " There is a mixed meaning in the word 6.w6, partly expressive of deriva- tion and partly of agency, ' nothing great proceeded from them : nothing great was done by them.' " — Arnold ad I. " It is noticeaWe that this usage of d7r6 (for iJ7r6) of the agent after passive verbs is nearly limited to 'K^yo/iai. and 9rpd = "from my devices " ; 1141 oiK ix aiOsv \ (fiKTelpeB' oStos=" not from you did he obtain any pity " ; Eur. Antiop. Fr. 207 Nauck— not in Dindorf Fr. 43— ■^MeX^^i?" ft deSv = " at the hands of the gods. " 75 * CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 425 Heindorf ad Plat. Theaet. p. 171 B— is the agent after a passive verb expressed by U or irpds with the genitive. Apparent exceptions, in the case of ck, are not in fact excep- tions. Thus Thuc. i. 20. 3 iK ruiv ^iJvetSoTwv acfiLcrLV . . . f]Lefir)vv(rdai = "information had been conveyed from the body of their fellow - conspirators " (Mr. ShiUeto ad I.) ; 120. 2 €K irdvTiiiV irpoTLfilavTai. = " they are held in especial honour from all sides" ["well rendered by Poppo 'ex omnibus praecipue honorantur,' " says Mr. Shilleto ad 1} ; iii. 57. 4 7r€pL€(MTiJ,e9a ck ?ravT(ov = "we have been pushed round and back from all sides" ; 69. I €vyova-ai Sia tov TreXdyovs eK re twv 'Kdr)va.mv €7riStcox^e'0"a' koX tt/jos ry ^PV'''V X^'/*""'^^"''"' ''"'' "1"' aire's o-iro/ciaSts = " fleeing across the open sea both out of the reach of the Athenians — being pursued by them, — and being driven by a storm on Crete and thence being scattered " (so Mr. Shilleto took the passage) ; vi. 36. 2 Ik Se dvSpZv, o'lTrep del rdSe Kivovcri, ^vyKeivrai = " they are got up on the part of men, who . . ." ; viii. 48. 5 Tro/jta-ras ovras /cat eo-Tjyijras rav KaK(av tw &rip,(^, i^ &v TO, TrAeto) avTovs oxpeXeicrOaL = " proceedings the result of which was to give them the greater portion of the advantages which did fall to them " — similarly Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 343. 4 to . . .Ik rovTmv \afi,/3dveiv, e^ &v rj TToAts jSkaTTTerai = " the result of which is injury to the 3. Compare the use of the genitive alone, in various languages, to denote the Genitive alone source whence an action proceeds : e.g. Soph. Aj. 807 HyvwKa yap Sii tpwrds in various lan- ■/liraTTfit^i/r] : Eur. Or. 497 irXi/yeis Siiyarpbs T-ijs iii/qs iirip xdpa. Cent Nouvelles guages. nowveUes xx. "de sa m^re confortee"; xxxix. "de sa chambri^re accus4e"; Ixii. "trouve de son mary " ; 0. "visitte de son amoureux" ; Eeine de Navarre Heptam. v. 45 " servis d'elle " ; Brantfime Dam. Gall. ii. art. i. p. 289 a "ran9onne d'elle" ; Le Sage DiaM. Boit. a. 3 "ce hachelier ... est recherche de toutes les personnes . . . qui . . . ' ; Laclos Les liais. dang. 5 "connus d'elles"; 158 "aimfe de lui"; 162 "la preuve . . . fcrite de votre main." Boccaccio Decam. ix. 6 "dalla quale . . . fu lietamente raccolto." Chaucer Legend of Good Women 2314 "right as the lambe, that of the wolfe is bitten, | or as the culvet, that of the egle is smitten"; 'Key^ooi A Maidenhead Well Lost, Pref. " this . . . I presume may be freely read without distaste ; and of all in general, excepting such . . ."; Exodus xii. 16 "be done of you"; Deut. xxxiii. 13 "blessed of the Lord be his land"; Isaiah liii. 3, 4; Ps. xliv. 14, cxv. 15; St. Matth. ii. 22 ; iii. 13, 14 ; xiv. 8 ; xxv. 34 ; St. John x. 14 ; xiv. 21 ; Acts X. 42; xxvi. 6; 2 Cor. xii. 11; Herrick {Hesperid., translating Horace's Od. iii. 9. I "donee gratus eram tibi ") "while, Lydia, I was loved of thee" ; Shirley Lady of Pleas, i. 1 "beloved of all"; Martineau Loss and Gaim, m Recent Theology ed. 2 p. 17 "when we are called of God to plunge and float in His illimitable sea, what can be more miserable than forthwith to escape and land on some broken spar of mythology or dogma 1" Cf. too St. Matth. xvi. 21 "suffer many things of the Elders" (Gk. 6.irb) ; xvii. 12 "suffer of them" (Gk. iir'). So in Danish, Madvig (Opusc. Acad. Alt. p. 223) uses the expression "stod aabnet af C." — equivalent to the German " stand von C. geoffnet " — wherewith to express Propert. ii. 31. ( = iii. 23 Paley) 2 ' ' portions a magno Caesare aperta fuit." 426 GREEK AND LATIN 75 * commomveal" ; Aeschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 39. 41 el . . . fj,riSeh av . . . /3ovXoiTO, ^ irov . . . eXx>- /ievos, «^ Sv avTOVi avrjpn^Kcurl Ttves, ol Se /cat OTqjMXTKj. ercXciJTJja-av = " proceedings the result of which has been that . . ." ; J)- 52. 5 OepaTrevovrei, KaraXvovrK . ., v Kat Tciiv eXTTtSiov, as . = " if you should be persuaded as a result of the promises . . ." ; Aphob. i. p. 818. 22 irm ovk €k TToivTiov ofioXoyovfiivov Tov Trpdyjj.aTO's evpeO-qcrerai Trjv irpoiKa . KeKO/JLurfievoi ; = " from all sides " — so Aristot. 'A6r]v. iroXi/r. c. 5 u)S ck re twv aXXav o/ioXoyeiTai, Koi . . = " at the hands of every one else " ; see Mr. Shilleto (already referred to) on Thuc. ii. 49. 1 ; — Hyperid. Orat. Funebr. col. 8 1. 7 kiipiav . . . rijv . . . iroXtv rtav 0ijy8ato)v oiKTpZ's ■q(j)avi(rp,iV7]v i^ dvOpunruiv, TrjV Se d,Kp6iroXiv e^avTrjs povpovp,evqv iwh rwv MaKeSovoiv, k.t.X. = " blotted out from among men " : " guarded by the Macedonians." So in Herod, vii. 16. 3 tovtIojv I^ l/iev iTrtreAeu/ilvtoi' = " on my side." 7Sa. Aesch. 75a. The text represents the reading of the MSS., which Pers. 791. hag given much trouble to critics, who would not acknowledge the legitimacy of the use of el with the present subjunctive mood. See Scholefield and Paley ad I. ; Maiden in Philological Museum i. p. 105 ; John Wordsworth, ib. pp. 236 sqq. Even Mr. Shilleto read, with Scholefield, p,rj8' el a-TpdTevp.a TrXeiov ^v rh MtjSikov = " even if the Median host had been, as it in fact is not, more numerous." 76. Aor. sub- 76. That forms like vyria-iv should be spelt with an i j™*'^^,? • ^^ . subscript in the penultimate syllable is the apparently correct " ' ^"' conclusion — contrary to that of Gottling (ad Hesiod. Theog. 60) — of Curtius {Das Verhmi i. pp. 58, 59 ed. 2), founded on the authority of the best MSS., of Herodian, and of analogy ; whilst -■nada )( -7,(rfla. (id. ib. p. 55) subjunctives in -Tjo-^a — e.g. eiTrrp-Oa, eOkXrja-Oa — should be spelt without any t subscript in connection with the ij. ^i CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 427 77. Contrast this with Ar. Nvh. 1074 KaiVoi tl a-oi Cfjv a^wv, 77. Soph. 0. G. TovT(x>v eav o-re/j^^gs = " if truly you shall have-been deprived." 1*43. 78. See below note 130. 78. 79. So with the relatival particle Itt^v : e.g. 79. ^t^v with , . , , . , . „. past perfect in- Auot. de loc. m hom. in Hippoor. 1. p; 415. F. =ii. p. 124. dicative. 15. K. eTrrjv Sk irvov ^wectt^kei rJSij, o re irovos ofioib)^ ^X27) Pvi "^^ ylverai, koI . . = "when the purulent matter should have at last established itself, and the pain shall be subsisting nevertheless, both cough supervenes, and . ." 80. 1. The common reading is Kai/ /it /iij XvTTijs : the Eavenna 80. Ar. Lys. MS. having y' av and (apparently) Xi«r^s. And Mr. Shilleto l°25. accepted the common reading, supposing an aposiopesis at Xafiovcr, during which the insect is pushed into, instead of out of, the eye ; and taking the e^etXov S,v as a Trapa -irpoa-SoKiav for e^eA-u = " if truly you shall not worry me, — I would have taken it out." 2. The objection to this seems to be the throwing forward of the av into the former part of the sentence — kSv roSe rh dr/pLov K.T.X. — when as yet no ground of suspicion ought to be offered to the old men with respect to the speaker's intentions. 3. Dobree {Advers. ii. p. 248) would read kci fjn fir/ 'Aweis, — which, while smoothing the construction, is in fact mere conjec- ture, and moreover open, like the common reading, as explained by Mr. Shilleto, to the objection just above mentioned. 4. Nevertheless Dindorf is willing to accept Dobree's correc- tion, " nisi Kav pro kov el dictum sit." 5. The less usual protasis in the shape given in the Text, viz. Kav |te fjifi 'AvTreis, is said by Dindorf to be reproduced by Florens Christianus, who is not likely to have gone out of his way to introduce it motw proprio in place of the more usual kav with the subjunctive. 81. In Auctor de Vict, ration, i. in Hippocr. i. p. 348. F. =i. 81. Auct. de p. 651. 17. K., where a similar collocation occurs, one is very ^.'^- ''"'.• *• '° much tempted, by the joinder with it in the same sentence of j^lpi, p" g^{ 17' the aorist subjunctive, to suggest ^v 8' ^ as a correction : rjv S' K. ■nv T& uev OTrb tov avSpbs 6rjX.v, rh S' OTrh rrjs ywatK&s apa-ev, *" ^'' '' "■ KpaTrjcrg Se t& dT^Xv, av^erai rhv wvrhv Tpoirov: but there is no necessity for such a correction. Translate " if the male contribu- 428 GREEK AND LATIN ^^ tion should have been feminine, and the female contribution masculine, and the feminine shall have-got the upper hand, the groTTth is after the same fashion." Ryperid.p.Mix. Nor again in Hyperid. pro Eiimnipp. col. 46 1. 20 orav yap c. 46 1. 20. fjy (j)oj3ipov rh KToxrOai. Koi ipu>) ; i. p. 501. F. = ii. p. 333. 16. K.; de Mul. Morh. i.: i. p. 601. F.=ii. p. 648. 6. K. ; ib. ii. : i. p. 642. F. = ii. p. 775. 16. K. ; i. p. 671. F. =ii. p. 869. 7.'K. fjv . . . ka-rl: de Mul. Morh. i. : i. p. 617. F. =ii. p. 698. 4. K. ■^v . . . 'ivi: de Morb.ir.: i. p. 506. F. =ii. p. 351. 14. K. fjv p.e\cSaiverai : i. p. 508. F. =ii. p. 355. 12. K. i^v . . . drroKadalperai : de Affection.!, p. 516. F. = ii. p. 382. 6. K. ^v . . . efi-n-lirTei : i. p. 521. F. = ii. p. 398. 1. K.fjv .. . Slxcrat : i. p. 524. F. =ii. p. 407. 12. K. ■^v . . . eyKaraXeiTreTat, : de intern, affection, i. p. 543. F. =ii. p. 464. 7. K. ^v . . . ■^'Serai (accompanied by jSapvvono and /teTT;A,Xay/iev5j jj) ; i. p. 544. F. =ii. p. 470. 6. K. ■^v . . . d-KoBr^Xol : i. p. 546. F. = ii. p. 474. 11. K. ■^v . . . e^avla-TaTai (accompanied by SvvrjTat); de Haemorrh. i. p. 895. F. =iii. p. 344. 16. K. «v . . . KaduTrarai: de intern, affection, i. p. 554. F. =ii. p. 501. 12. K. fjv . . . diroiSLo-KeTai (accompanied by Oe\y) : i. p. 556. F. =ii. p. 506. \l. K. ■^v . . . XP^^'^"-''' de Mul. 430 GREEK AND LATIN 83 1 Morb. i.: i. p. 611. F. =ii. p. 682. 3. K. ■^v . . . 6ta- (jydeiperat . . . aTroirviyeTai . . . iTravoiSeei . . . aA.yeei . . Attju/Javei : de Mul. Morb. ii. : i. p. 648. 1". =ii. p. 794. 7. K.rjv . . KaOicnkovTai (accompanied by d^io-rciovTat) : i. p. 667. F. =ii. p. 855. 1. K. rjv . . . iKr)TaL | &pr] : in the passage of Solon corresponding to which (Fr. 24. 5) Hermann wotdd read eirriv Kev raCr' dCKrjTat. See above note 25. 10 (c). 85. lb. 85. On rjv . . . ovKiTi da-lv . . instead of firjKeri, see above note 54. 5. 86. Ar. Phit. 86. 1. Kav Set " plerique libri" (Elmsley ad Eur. Med. 392 21^- = 387 ed. suae, p. 146), including (Dobree ad Ar. Flut. I.e., in Person's Aristophanica) the Ravenna MS. ; and also (Dobree wbi supr. ; see also pp. (3) and (102)) the three first editions. 2. Ke'i Set " libri pauci " (Dind. ad Ar. Flut. I.e.) — two only, apparently (see Dobree ubi supr.) This reading, nevertheless, is accepted, after Brunck, by Porson, Elmsley {iM supr.), and Dobree ; Elmsley, indeed, going out of his way to amend his note (above referred to) for the purpose of stigmatising Kav Set as a solecism. "Plerique libri," he says (p. 298), "soloece Kav Sei, eodem scilicet errore quo Aldus " — not, apparently, without some (see Pors. Aristophanka p. 55 and Dobree ib. p. (53)), although, no doubt, contrary to the best (see Dind. ad l), manuscriptal authority — ''Nub. 1494" = 1492 Dind. "kAv (r-^dSp' da-' dAafo'ves." Reisig on Aristoph. i. p. 44, with the non-assent of Elmsley 87 1 — Ixxxii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 431 {I.e.), the contemptuous merriment of Dobree (lice.), but the more respectful consideration of Buttmann {Irreg. Gk. Vhs. by Fishlake, ed. 2. p. 65), even thinks that Set may be looked upon as a form of the subjunctive mood. Dindorf gets rid of the obnoxious collocation k&v M by reading xav Sg. Cobet turns it into Kav xn, in which Dr. Rutherford (Mw Fhrynichus p. 299) says he is followed by Meineke ; while Dr. Rutherford himself would seem to prefer ksI Set. Anything, in a word, to get rid of the collocation of edv with the indicative mood, even when supported by the best MSS. In the very next verse of the Pluius, the Ravenna and one of the Paris MSS. give us Kav (or k^v) /3ov\ei y iyw : which again goes through the fate of emendation into kuv ^ovXy y' iyw. 3. In At. San. 264, where Dindorf also replaces the sub- junctival form Sy — on the authority of the Ravenna and Venice MSS.'^'"' — KCKpa^ofiai yap, | Kav fie Sy Si ruiepas, there is yet some minor manuscriptal authority for the reading kSlv fie Set (see Dobree ubi supr. p. (56)). 4. In Eur. Med. 241 the best MSS. have kS.v fiev raS' ■qfitv eKTTOVOVfievauriv ed \ Jrocrts ^vvoiKeT, fifj /3iq, (j>ep(i)v fuyov, | ^r/Xwrhs a'uov' el Se fiy, davetv xp^'^v. In two of them, however, there is the superscription y over the last syllable of ^uvowcct, while ^vvoiKy itself is found in one MS. This latter word accordingly finds acceptance with Person, Elmsley, Scholefield, Dindorf, and — as the sentence is the expression of a general sentiment — may possibly be right. -217. San. 264. Eur. Med. 241. 87. 1. TotSrcj) TrapaSeiyfiari xP'^i"^''°' = "using this as an 87. Lysias ^Zc. example " : not " using this example," which would be the trans- '• P- 1^^- ^^ ''°'^^ lation of TovTco ru} irapaoeiyfiaTi xpiofj-evoi. bO Tapadelyfiari XP^' fievoL : sim. Theognis 717 xf") '"^avras yviafxrfv ravT-qv Kinadecrdai = " to lay this down as a maxim" ; Aesch. Eum. 334 tovto yap Xdxos I . ■ fioip' hreKXwo'ev e/iTreSioi ^'x^'" ~ " ^^^^ ^^ ^ Ixxxii Dindorf would seem to he^oace Dr. Rutherford, wlio {Jfew Phrynichus S?) as a subjunc- p. 299) is pressed to a denial by the strategical necessity of defending a rule tive = Si-g. enunciated by himself, but iu terms wide enough to comprehend a part only of the facts of the case— quite justified by the authority of these, the two best, MSS. of Aristophanes in restoring in this passage the monosyllabic form of the subjunctive 5-J. ' In defence of such contraction he cites the indubitable readings, Sljcev (for iSii]CFev) in Horn. II. xiii. 100, and Sr/aBe for SiticBe in Sophron QvvvoB-iipa Fr. 22 (in Museum Griticwm ii. p. 344) ; and points out the propriety of restoring the form SJ to Philetaerus 'kToKivrij Fr. 1. 1 ; Menander Frr. Incc. 28. 3 ; 39. 3, in each of which two passages he is followed by Meineke. That he should extend the reading also to Ar. Flut. 216 is, however, as has been already hinted, and as it is apprehended, a mistake. 432 GREEK AND LATIN 87 1 portion"; Thuc. vi. 12. 1 virep dvSpiov vya,S(av Tti)vSe = "exiles like these"; 54. 5 iTnTrjSevcrav iirl irXeia-Tov Si) Tvpavvoi oSrot aperr^v kol ^vvecriv = " these for tyrants " — cf. Arnold ad I. ; Xen. Mem. i. 2. 49 riKp.-qpl(^ tovti^ Xpdfievo's = " this is a proof" ; cf. i. 2. 56 tovtois fiapTvpion T^pw/xevov, and § 24 €Keiv(a \pii)/j.evti) (TVfjip,d)(^o) = " him as an ally"; Plat. Phileb. p. 16 C Tavrrjv i^^/xijv Trape8o(Tav = "this as a tradition" ; Symp. p. 196 E 0)VOVavep(0TdTr]V diroSei^iv ravTrjv ■qyovp.evot elvat, tov /3ovk€a-6ai = " thinking this to be the clearest demonstration of their desire." See Dobree Advers. i. pp. 193. 244; and Mr. ShiUeto on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 442. 2. 2. On the omission of the article in such passages as Ar. Eqq. 133 Svo TwSe 7r(«Aa = "here are two sellers"; Ach. 341 Tovs At^oiis vvv p,oi, X'^f'^'C^ TrpwTov e^epda-are. I X. ovTou (Toi x"/*"" = " here they are on the ground for you " ; 960 eKiXevcre Aa/xa;^os ere TavTrjcrl (so the Kavenna MS.) Spaxp-yll I « Tovs Xdas ax)T(y fieraSovvai riav KixXiov = " in return for a drachma, here it is"; 1049 eTrep.x//i rt's (tol vvij,(j>io's ravTL Kpka | ck twv ydpMv = " some meat : here it is"; Lys. 1027 Sokti; Aios o-uroo-t = " here is a ring" ; Plat. Theaet. p. 181 D Svo Sr] Acyeo tovto) eiSrj /cn/^(rea)S= "here then I say there are two kinds of motion " ; see Porson's Aristophanka pp. 120. 121 et ib. Dobree : Elmsl. ad Ar. Ach. 1049. 3. There is no necessity in Ar. 'ABnv. TToX. Aristot. 'AO-qv. iroXn. c. 29 to. filv xp^f^ara irpocnovTa p.rj c. 29. e^iivai dXXo(re SaTravrjo-ai ^ ei's rbv iroXepLov = " the money as it came in" to insert the article to. before Trpou-iovra, as Mr. Kenyon seems to think. «9 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 433 4. On the other hand, in Id. ib. c. 37 eyvuxrav tcuv [liv aXXtuv to, oirXa irapekea-Oai, o. 37. Qrjpafuvrjv Se &ia<^6(.lpai TOvSe Tpowov we ought doubtless to read rovSe t&v t/jottov, as in c. 42 e'xet 8' ij vi)v Karao-Tacrts t^s iroXtreias TovSe rbv Tpowov. 88. 1. There is absolutely no variation of reading here. 88. Lysias^fc. Note how Jav . . . KoAa^rjre : eciv . . . TipMprja-Oe are paral- i- P- 1*0- 3* sqq. leled by cav . . . KaTaif'-rjLeLa-6e. 2. In Thuc. vii. 8. 1 vofii^tav . . el p,rj us rai^MrTa rj cr<^as litiTaTrepAJ/ovcrw, ij aAXoiis /f^ dXiyous a7roo"T£Ao{!crtv, ovSeptiav iivai o-wrrjpiav, there is considerable manuscriptal authority for reading rjv in place of d. 3. In (the, no doubt, later Greek of) Lucian Dissert, c. Hesiod. C. 7 vcra.VTO's p-lv Oeov, evOaXrj icrraL to. Spdyptara' rjv 8e av)(^jxhs kiriXdprj, KOI Siip^croxriv at apovpai, o'uSc/ita fj.rj')(avrj pjrj ov)(l Xijibv iTraKoXovdrjo-ai, ry Sltj/ei aiJTaiv, One MS. reads Siiprjcrovcriv for 4. Additional examples of the use of rjv with the future ijv with future indicative, from the Hippocratea, are indicative ; ex- amples from the Leophanes (?) de Superfoetat. i. p. 260. F. = i. p. 461. 16. K. fjv Hippocratea. . . . a7rox(o/oijo"£t. Auctor de he. in horn. i. p. 419. F. = ii. p. 138. 4. K. ^v . . . irapaXXd^eTai : de Mid. Mori. i. : i. p. 612. F. =ii. p. 685. 3. K. ^v p,€XeSaivrjTai ws XP1> ^y^s ecrrat. rjv 6e pLrj, Kal 6 p6oaiveTai, Kal 8ia TravT&s tov \povov aid peiinrai Kar' oXiyov otov 'X'^/'' eirifj,eXeirjS 7rA,ejovos Seerat.. 88a. The common reading in this passage was eW' eJiys. 88a. Theognis But two of the three best MSS. (in company with eight ^^^^• others) read «i' k, whilst the third has ovk — certainly not a blunder from eW, and therefore pointing to ei' k. This leaves us with e'i K eir]^ as the right reading, as it is also a correct reading. Bergk, however, unnecessarily, alters ei'i/s into eigs and reads e'i K eiys = rjv ^s : with which protasis, indeed, kcv e'xots as an apodosis, although admissible, is less natural than would have been the simple e^eis. 89. Dindorf would, quite unnecessarily, read Trpda-a-oifjiev ; 89. Aesch. Ag. saying of irpaxra-oip.' av— the reading of all the MSS. — that it is ^^''• "lectio ab librariis interpolata, quos numerus pluralis cum singulari conjunctus offendisset." 2 F 434 GREEK AND LATIN 89 It is simply a question of what is the reading of the MSS., Eur. Ph. 724. as is also the case in Eur. Phoen. 724 (cited by him) d wkt^s avTol's irpoa-fia.koifiev e/c koxov : where, he says, " in libris quibusdam Trpoa-^dXoi/j,' av scriptum est soloece propter prae- cedentem singularem rpaTroifiai " — and also (he might have added, from Valckenaer ad I.) Kadk^w in v. 720, and Trpocr/BoiXia in V. 728. Dindorf's " soloece " is borrowed from Person's note on Eur. Phoen. I.e. ( = 733 ed. suae). If, in that passage, the reading should be 7rpoa-fidXoi.iJi,ev, trans- late " if we ( = I) were to attack " ; if Trpoa-^dXoip,' av, then translate "if I should — as the result of some particular set of circumstances — attack. '' 89a. 89a. 1. As Panurge says in Rabelais {Pantagruel 1. ii. c. 15): "je vous en diray non pas mon opinion, mais vraye certitude et assurance." 2. iKilvuiv Siv oiSa. On the attraction of the relative, see above subnote Ixi. 90. 90. Ktti crot. On the epitatic use of Kai, see above note 44. 91. Dem. Lept. gi- 1. " KaraSc^xdy S. Y. 0. r. vulg. KaTaSeix&eir]," says p. 492. 23. Bekker ad I. 2. The objection to KaraS^ix^d-q is that it denotes (see above note 5) a possibility only : " why might it possibly be exhibited ?" whereas the sense requires KaraSetx^ei'? civ, a probability : " why would it be exhibited ? " The delibera- 3. On the other hand, KaraSeLxOy is open to the remark that Greek ^"^^' ™ ^^^ deliberative subjunctive is usually found restricted to the first person : ttol ^ijyco ; = " whither am I to flee ? " rt yap Srj 4>Zp£v; "what, I should like to know, are we to say?" (Plat. Gorg. p. 480 B). 4. Query, if it is ever found in the second person ? John Wordsworth {Philol. Mus. i. 238) says that "ttoT vyris and TToi (j>vyri in the second and third person would be contrary to the idiom of the language." 5. Instances, however, are indubitably found of the use of the deliberative subjunctive in the third person : e.g. Dem. Mid. p. 525. 21 iroTepa p.r) 8(^ Stoi tovto SiKrjV rj p.d(ia Soirj SiKaim ; (where Buttmann, although unreconciled to Sott) without av, has no objection to make to 8(j>) ; de Fals. Leg. p. 383. 28 iireiSav 8' aKovy . . ., tl /cat Trovfjo-jj ; fjjT^ TTokk' dvakla-Kiiv, k^ov lAaTTO), koI jrai/ras OepaTreveiv 92 3 — Ixxxiii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 435 fiovX-qrai, Sv ^ T/oeis e^dv ; fxalvono /tcvTav ; (where see Mr. Shilleto's note, and the passages referred to by him). 6. KaraSeixSy in the passage in the Text is another such instance. Lucian Aiict. c. 11. 92. 1. Here again the Kai in each case is used epitatically. 92. Thuc. 2. The omission of the apodosis in the second member of the **• ^■ sentence, viz. the words enclosed in brackets, is rightly ex- plained by Arnold ad I. : "This is one of the cases . . ., where two opposite members of an alternative being given, and the consequence of one of them being stated, the consequence of the other follows so directly to every one's apprehension, according to the common law of contraries, that it may safely be omitted without any obscurity." 3, The legitimacy of the reading rji/ . . . eTev is attested, as well by the unanimity of the MSS. in its favour, as by the testimony of Thomas Magister,''"™" s.v. el ; who not only quotes it, but practically censures Lucian for copying (Ver. Hist. ii. 29 ; Fitar. Auctio c. 11) what he — wrongly — calls an aira^ p-qOev. "Videtur notare Lucianum," says Duker, "qui illud aira^ pqdiv, ut dicit, Thucydidis imitatus fuerit. Sed credo Lucianum peritiorem sermonis Graeci fuisse quam Thomam." The second of the two passages in Lucian, that from the Vitarwm Auctio, runs thus : koI raTjra, fjv lOeXi^a-eiev arroSocrOai ovTocrl rb fjiyuj-Tov 8v o/SoXwv, and is fairly on all fours with that from Thucydides. The first of them, that from the Vera Historia, is not. It is as follows : /^etvas 8 eKeivijv ttjv rjfikpav, ttjs iiriovcrr)? avr/yo/jtriv . . . (rvveTr£fji,\j/e Se /xoi 6 PaSa/iav^us rhv TTopOfiea Naun-A-iov, iv eav KaTa)^det7]fi£v is Tois vja-ovs, /ijjSets ij/^as cryXXd^oi, are /car iiWrjv efiTTopiav irXeovTas : where eav KaTaxOiir)[Lev is merely the reported form after the past verb o-vveKepAJ/e of kav Karo.xd!ap.ev ; as to which see below note 93. 4. However, in his Dissert, cum Hesiod. c. 7, Lucian gives us again, more simply, ov p,^v ov8 iKelvo prnvrelas Scirai, (OS 'qv pfj KaXvtjqis TO. cnrep/xaTa Kal OepaTrwv paKeXXrjv «xn)V lTriopoirj ttjs •y«s awots, KaTaiTT'qa-erai to. opvea, /cat TrpoKareSeiTaL ttjv airfujav Tov dipovs .tXjrtSa. Ixxxiii "Quamquam . . . Grammatious iste,'' says Porson ad Eur. Or. 1269 ( = 1263 ed. suae) of Thomas Magister — whom Dr. Rutherford (New Phrynidms p. 468) thinks of little value as an independent authority — "neque ah eruditione neque ab antiquitate commendabilis est, fatendum tamen iu loeis quibusdam, ubi codices dissident, veram leotionem conservasse." On the value of the Grammarians in general see Dr. Arnold's opinion, referred to above, subnote xli. See also his note on Thuc. iii. 84. Vit. Ver. Hist. ii. 29. Diss. c. Hes. c. Thomas Magister. 436 GREEK AND LATIN 92 4— Ixxxiv Isocr. de Pac. 4. In Isocrates de Pac. p. 168. c. — quoted by Arnold on Thuc. P- 168. c. l_Q — il\}^ ofioi^ ovTias avTOVS ayairw/iev, SxrO vTrep filv Tuv 7rai8cov T(3v riiJ.eT€p(DV, el irept Tivas i^afidproiev, ovk av eOeXn^craifMev StKas OToo-xeiv, vTTip Se k.t.X., Bekker so reads, with the Urbinate, the best, MS. But " ceteri ^v." Bern, de Cor. 5. In Dem. de Cor. p. 318. 3 cos eav TTpoTepoi rts ehry to. P- 318- ^- Trpocrovd' eavrif irepl aAAoiJ, Kal Sij ravO' ovtws e'xovTa, Kal ovKeri Tovs aKOVOVTas CTKeipofikvovi Tts ttot atiros ItrTtv o Tavra Aeywv, one of the Paris MSS. gives us ei'iroi ; although, as the following future (TKi-^op-ivovs seems to show, probably wrongly. 93. Horn. Od. 93. 1. Note the construction ?us k dwoSoOeir] : a dependent "■ ^8- clause, wherein is a relatival particle accompanied — not by a past subjunctive simpliciter, but — by a past subjunctive with /ce or. av. Relative, rela- 2. There are, apparently, three sets of circumstances under tival particle, or which, this, or the corresponding use of a relative or d with the wiX Ke^^or^'sv • P*^'' subjunctive with k£ or dv in a dependent clause, occurs, their usage in de- VIZ. — =._ pendent clauses. 3. (A)- Where the past subjunctive with ke or av in question cast subiunctive — *'^® particle usually, but not always, attracted away from the with Ke or &v = verb to which it belongs up to the side of, and — where possible — virtually a future coalescing with, the relative, relatival particle, or el — is virtually mdica ive. ^^ equivalent for a future indicative (as to which see Text § 85, and notes 45b above and 148 below). Instances of this may be found in Horn. Od. ii. 31 rjv ^' ij/xii/ cra<^a eiiroc { = rjv diroL Ke = rjv ipii) ; Thuc. ii. 43.' 1 rrjv w^eXtav,'^^'''^ rjv dv tjs . . . IxriKvvoi ( = ^v fiTjKvvoL dv = rjv p,rjKvveL) ; Plat. Grito p. 43 ayyeXiav . . ., rji/. . . . av evey/catjitt ( = r)v oicro)) ; Dem. Mid. p. 518. 11 sqq.-TTjv irapaa-Kev-qv, rjv av . . Tropl- o-atTo Tis ( = ijv TTopiQ-aiTO dv Tts = r)v tropielTai) ; Xen. Mem. i. 7. 1 8t' ■^s dv tis . . . yevoiTO ( = 86' ■^s tk yivono av = St' ■^s Tts yevijcreTat) ; Thuc. vi. 20. 2 p.era- ISoXrj?, y dv . . . res . . . j^copotTj ( = y tis X'^P°'-1 "" = y Ti$i^a-ri) ; Xen. Pyr. i. 6. 41 oijk oT8' 'iyiiyye e'i Tiva \'nroir;, ffl Trdrep, ai el ivop^s nva vbpov 9, 10. KoX iir' i/ioS &i> Tpoffyevi/ievov, (as (ti iv ij>Od<} iafUv, Xiye. ''Eptar^s, (<(>% ^ TOi, wov hi dirb (rov irbpos yivoiro ; = " ' But,' said he, ' father, do you, if you see in the matter any way, which should come even from ray aide, out of the difficulty, 438 GREEK AND LATIN 93* (B) Where it represents after an historic or quasi - historic tense what would after a present tense have been a present sub- junctive similarly circumstanced. Direct) (indirect questions. 4. (B) Where the past subjunctive with ke or av in question — the particle usually, if not always, attracted away from the verb to which it belongs up to the side of, and — where possible — coalescing with, the relative, relatival particle, or d — ^repre- sents, after a verb in (1) an historic tense (2) a quasi-historic tense, what would have been, after a verb in a present tense, a present subjunctive similarly circumstanced. Instances of this may be found in (1) Xen. Mem. i. 2. 6 avSpawoSunas iavrav aTrcKaXei, Sia, t& dvajKaiov avToti etvai SiaXeyecrOai Trap' Sv civ \dj3oiev rhv ixurmv (representing trap' &v [Xd/Suxriv av = ] av Aa^wtri). Herod, vi. 44 ev vd(f) €)(ovtk ocras av TrAeMrras SvvaivTO KaTa). Dem. Onet. i. p. 865. 23 ovk icrO' oWis ou^ 'JT'"'" ''"'i''' etSoTcov StKijv /ie Xiqif/etrOaL Trap' avTwv, 67r€t8av raxitrra avTjp etvat SoKi[jui(T6eirjv ( [eTreiSij SoKi{i,adapiVTe? €)(6pol vrjcrov iKcruy^olaTO, | KTCLVOiev ([o'^'E eKCrca- ^wvTai dv = ] orav cKcrco^covTat).'^™"'* ixxxTo £ contra, and — according to the construction whicli is more usual, in fact (Horn. Od. v. 386 ; etc.) — without the dv : Dem. Aphdb. i. p. 814. 18 KdKelv0Lev [cf. Ar. Pao. 1180], ews dv . . . irofqcreiav (l^aAei^oucrtv, kyypdxpovcriv, euys dv Trot-qcrwcn,. The reading is Bekker's. Stallbaum, with seven MSS., omits the av after ecus). Plat. TvnuM. p. 56 D ■yij . . . <^ipon' dv, . . . p-ixp'' ""V ^'' . . TO, yuepJj . . . yrj yivoiTO {olcrdria-eTai, jxe^pl dv yiv7]Ta.i. The reading is again that of Bekker ; and — curiously enough — now of Stallbaum also. One MS. alone gives the dv after jnexP' ""V)- Horn. II. xix. 205 rj r dv eyoiye | . . . dv(oyoi[j,i. . . . I . . . Tiv^€(rdai p,kya Sopirov, tTrrjv Ti(Taip,eda X.(a/3r]v {dvwya, Tev^ecrdaij c?rijv TLcrupeda). Plat. Alcib. ii. p. 146 A (ftairj's ye dv, . . oirSrav o/0(^ijs (tprjo-et'S, oTTorav op^i) ; Xen. Cyr. i. 3. 1 1 oTrorav rjKoi iirl rh SeiTTVOv, Xeyoip,' dv . . . iwei,8dv 8k Trdvv (nrov8d^oi cjiayelv, eiTroip.' dv . . ., ews Traparetvaip.i tovtov k.t.X. (oTTOTav rjKri, Xi^o) : iireuSdv t,Kea-6ai {jSovXexxna-Oi, el XoyieicrOe on s Myeis ; del ^x"" ^P^^" ^^i"-" "^^ ^^^ Txr/xdvoi (might not possibly always hit the mark), Saa-irep ipdli, So^d^oi ; (as long as he might possibly be thinking rightly), the old reading iaairep &v ipBb, Sofdfoi, which however has the support of only a single MS., and maybe treated as incorrect, must have been explained in the same way. 94a. Ar. Thesm. 842. 94b. lb. 95. el with past subjunctive with S.v=idv, -^v with past subjunctive : further exx. from the Hippocratea ; Plat. Hep. iii. p. 412 D. McTW p. 97 C. 442 GREEK AND LATIN 95 1— Ixxxvi-b Hippoor. Praenotion. i. p. 38. F. =i. p. 95. 11. K. ; i. p. 40. F. =i. p. 101. K. ; de rat. vict. in morh. acut. i. p. 386. F. = ii. p. 35. 15. K. (following on 17V with the present im- perfect subjunctive) ; i. p. 390. F. = ii. p. 47. 3. K. r^v e'irj : Praenotion. i. p. 41. F. =i. p. 104. 5. K. r)v airoTrrvoiro : ib. i. p. 43. F. =i. p. 111. 2. K. (accompanied by the present imperfect subjunctive) ^v Se /jt-qre . evSiSifr) i'"=''i" . . ., firJTe . . . /taXacrcrotTO : de rat. vict. in morh. acut. i. p. 385. F. =ii. p. 33. 9. K. rjv . . . S(fr] : i. p. 393. F. =ii. p. 57. 7. K. (followed shortly by et . . . rvyxdvoi) rjv Tvyxa.voi : i. p. 395. F. =ii. p. 62. 6. K. ■^v . . . Seoi: i. p. 395. F. = ii. p. 64. 4. K. (following upon et . . p(ot) ■qv . . . pkoi : \. p. 405. F. = ii. p. 94. 6. K. fjv 8e Tru/aerbs /tij e'xot Kai (rTp6oi. eWt : Aphorism, ii. p. 1242. F. = iii. p. 706. 12. K. (side by side with rjv KadaipiavTai) ■^v . . yiyvoiro : Praenotion. i. p. 44. F. =i. p. 113. 3. K. (followed by e.1 Sc iirepPaWoi) f^v juev ti . rrpoayivoiro. diSi^ri, Stfr) )( Ixxxvi i. Kiihu gives the reading ivSiSiirj here, and in the next example Siir; : SiSolii, dolri : Sim. but the 1 subscript must at least accompany the u in either case. The form S(^ri In place of the more usual 5olri appears in all the MSS. of Lysias in Andocid. p. 105. 5 ; and it similarly appears in all the MSS. of Plat. 6org. p. 481 A, although in this place its propriety — regard being had to the context — may be in question ; and, while Heindorf retains it, Bekker and Stallbaum, and also Baiter and Orelli in the Zurich edition of 1839, accept Pindeisen's correction 2. Dr. Eutherford, by whom an imputation of an overweening respect for raanuscriptal authority would be probably looked upon as but a doubtful compli- ment, waxes quite warm on the subject. For him {Jfew PlvrynichMS p. 466) SiSi^ri is an " absurdity " ; it and Si^ and its compounds " are of course wrong, and have been replaced by the forms in -01 by all editors who know their business " ; with more to the same effect, with reference to the forms o-vyyvipri (Aesch. Suppl. 215), dXcjii) (Dem. Timocr. p. 736. 12), and — " always misspelt in the same utterly ridiculous way" — iva^ufiriv (Ar. Ran. 177), iSi^i; (Plat. Phaedon p. 87 D ; Gorg. p. 512 E ; Tim. p. 89 C). (His reference to Plat. iLegg. v. p.] 730 C is, it would seem, an error, SiajSioi being there the word, and apparently without variant. ) 3. Nevertheless, pace tanti viri, the conclusions of Buttmann, which are given at length below,'' seem to the present writer at once more sober and more wise. 4. The question is, what do we find as facts ? not what we think shovld be the facts, nor what we think of the facts when found ; and exaggerated language in one direction or the other does no good, and simply tends to obscure the real •> Buttmann Irregular Gk. Vis. by Fishlake ed. 2 s.v. yiyyuairi: ib. i. p. 776. F.=iii. p. 126. 9. K. (followed on i. p. 776. F. = iii. p. 127. 5. K. by ^v . . . 6/i;8aAA.2j) rjv . . . ifji/SaXoi : i. p. 778. F. =iii. p. 130. 8. K. (followed by rjv 8e ddiTri) i^v fxev TrapaTvxoi^ : de Articulis i. p. 795. F.=iii. p. 167. 7. K. •^v . . . eK^airj : i.p. 825. F. =iii. p. 231. 6. K. ■^v . . . ifjiTrea-oi : i. p. 831. F. =iii. p. 246. 4. K. rjv . . . /Bkafjeirj. Leopbanes (?) de Swperfoetat. i. p. 261. F. =i. p. 465. 5. K. (following on fjv with, the present perfect subjunctive) ffv Se Euryphon(?) de Morb. iii. : i. p. 492. F. =ii. p. 307. 1. K. ; de Natur. Muliebr. i. p. 568. F. = ii. p. 545. 7. K. rjv etj;. De Morb. iii. : i. p. 494. F. =ii. p. 313. 3. K. (shortly followed by €t . . . yevoiTo) rjv . . . yivoiTO. Auctor de Genitwr. i. p. 235. F. = i. p. 382. 3. K. ; de loc. in horn. i. p. 414. F. =ii. p. 120. 11. K. (followed by rjv €(7eX9ri) ; de Morb. iv. . i. p. 503. F. =ii. p. 341. 18. K. ; i. p. 504. F. =ii. p. 345. 16. K. ; de Mul. Morb. i. : i. p. 616. F. =ii. p. 698. 2. K. ; i. p. 617. F. =ii. p. 698. 12. K. ; ib. ii. : i. p. 653. F. =ii. p. 812. 18. K. (preceded and followed by ■^v with the present imperfect subjunctive); i. p. 661. F. =ii. p. 835. 10. K. ; de his quae uter. non gerunt i. p. 676. F. =iii. p. 4. 17. K. ; i. p. 676. F. =iii. p. 6. 10. K. ; de Morb. mlg. ii. : ii. p. 1050. F. =iii. p. 463. 5. K. i^v et'ij : de loc. in horn. i. p. 415. F. =ii. p. 125. 1. K. (accompanied by the present imperfect subjunctive and preceded by rjv with the present perfect subjunctive) rjv . . . trpoo-tlr] : de dieb. judicat. i. p. 57. F. =i. p. 153. 15. K. rjv . . . fjieXaivoiTo : de Oarnib. i. p. 253. F. =i. p. 440. 1. K. fjv . . . apdpoi: de Septvmestr. partu i. p. 257. F. =i. p. 452. 2. K. rjv . . . crvyxpeoiTo : de Ms quae uter. non ger. i. p. 683. F. =iii. p. 28. 1. K. rjv /SovXaio: de Vict. rat. i. : i. p. 347. F. =i. p. 649. 2. K. ^v . . . jioiXoiTO : de Vict. rat. i.: i. p. 352. F. =i. p. 664. 15. K. ; de Mul. Morb. i. : i. p. 603. F. =ii. p. 655. 12. K. rjv Swatro : de Morb. 444 GREEK AND LATIN 95 1 i. : i. p. 448. P. =ii. p. 172. 2. K. (preceded by vjv with the present imperfect subjunctive and accompanied by the same tense) I'jv Seoi : de Affection, i. p. 530. F. = ii. p. 426. 11. K. 5JV . Trpo(Tcf>epoivTO : de Mul. Morb. i. : i. p. 602. F. = ii. p. 653. 5. K. y^v ye /x^ Tts . . . 8iaiT({nj : ib. p. 609. F. = ii. p. 673. i. K. rjv . . . i^ioi : de Mul. Morb. ii. : i. p. 662. F. =ii. p. 841. 6. K. rjv 8k iirifj.evoL : ib. i. p. 671. F. = ii. p. 867. 16. K. rjv . . . KcoAi'ot : de vidend. acie i. p. 689. F. = iii. p. 46. 6. K. ?jv . . . SiatjiOetpobev : de Natur. Pueri i. p. 244, F. =i. p. 410. 8. K. (accompanied by Troufjirrj^) rjV . . . almpoirj's : Praedict. ii. : i. p. 86. F. =i. p. 194. 1. K. ^v . . . dvi(^TO. De Gorde i. p. 268. F. =i. p. 485. 14. K. ; de Morb. l: i. p. 449. F. =ii. p. 176. 11. K. (accompanied by (rxy and diroXXvrai,) fjv . . . Sobrj : de Vict. rat. i. : i. p. 351. F. =i. p. 662. 3. K. ■^v . . . KpaTijdeirj : de Morb. iv. : i. p. 500. F. = ii. p. 330. 3. K. ^v . . . k^iXdoi: i. p. 515. F. =ii. p. 379. l.'K. f)v . . . /cAtVete . . . rj . . . T/oijcretev : de Mul. Morb. i. : i. p. 602. F. =ii. p. 652. 10. K. ■^v . . . irviyur): i. p. 606. F. =ii. p. 665. 5. K. (accompanied by Trapa- yaXacTwtTi) Tjv . . yevoiaro : i. p. 606. F. =ii. p. 665. 13. K. (accompanied by tIjUj;) »)v . . . jxaXBd^uiv: i. p. 612. F. =ii. p. 684. 6. K. (followed by »)v with the present imperfect subjunctive) fiv . . . ivcrrairi : de Mul. Morb. ii. : i. p. 653. F. =ii. p. 811. 9. K. ■^v . . . a-xoUv. and elsewhere. 2. " Non nego," says Schafer, in his Meletemata Critica p. 87, " rjv optative passim sic jungi, omnis ut corrigendi conatus, si critica temeritate abstineas, sufflaminetur . . . Antist. Epigr. ii. f)V 8e TrapeKfSalrjs es a /t^ Oijii'S, ov ri o" ovqcrei . rj Xdxvrj. Macedonius xii. (tv 8 rjv dir e/ieTo XvOeirj?, rh ^topoLrj rrjs yrj's avroii . . . : Hippocrates § 1. p. 9. 18 ed. Franco! 1595" ( = Hippocrates (?) ^e ^risc. medicin. i. p. 8. F. = iii. p. 23. 17. K. cited above in this present note) "rjv rts imxeipoirj Xeyeiv." 3. So with the relatives and relatival particles in conjunc- tion vrith av. See above note 25. 10. Ar. Phu. 119. 4. Finally, it may be added that we have not in Ar. PM. 1 1 9 an instance of d with the past subjunctive with av. The probable reading of that passage, in which we have the authority of the Ravenna MS. for oTS' ois, and for ep.' el, is — as Dindorf has seen — 99 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 445 o Zeus /J'lv oBv otS' (US TO. TOVT(ov fiSip' e/t' et ttvOoit' av eTnrpi\j/eie : «.e.— as he describes the "constructio verborum pauUo durius trajectorum — o Zeus /jav oSr o?Sa (is e/*' av eTTiTpi^eie, el ra toijtwv /iWjOa irvBoiTO. 96. 1. So Plato iZ«p. ii. p. 376 A on ov juei/ av i&Q ayvStra, 96. Plat. Itep. XaAexatver ouSev Si) Ka/cbv irpoTveirovddi's' ov S' ov jvu>pip,ov, "■ P- 376 A. o(rirafeTat, /cav /trjSev TrcuTrore vtt' avTOV ayaffbv TreirovOri. 2. As to the form of the last word here, Elmsley (on Soph. Hippocr. de Aj. 278 in Mus. Grit. i. p. 356), with the assent of Mr. ShHleto f^^ ^'^-jjV P- (on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 342. 11 ; see his Appendix A), says 371! 3.'k. "' ^' that " the orators generally, if not always, express " the present Present and perfect " subjunctive and its corresponding optative by the P^^* perfect sub- auxiliary verb and the participle," rather than by their normal therrforLs^"*'"" '' forms; that is, would rather say ^e^X-rjKOTe^ Strtv, eiev than pepX'qKiixTiv, -otev. 3. The rule is, however, not absolute — even in the Orators. . Mr. Shilleto quotes in its despite Dem. Lept. p. 476. 20 ecrTc3(ri : p. 482. 14 tcrr^Kiy : Lysias c. Pandeon. p. 166. 39 d)cf>XriKoi. : also from Thuc. ii. 48. 2 itrPefiXrjKOiiv : iv. 122. 3 ai^iCTTy)KOL£V : vii. 83. 1 TrapaSeSfOKOiev : viii. 108. 1 TreTroiTjKoi,. Further examples occur in some of the passages cited here and below in the Text. 97. 7jv fiif] irpoa-dev rja-KrjKOTe's Sort. So Louis Dindorf, with .97- Xen. Gyr. no note of any variation of reading in either MS. or edition. ■'"• ■ "*'• el jj.. IT. 1}., however, is the reading of the Grammarian in Bekker's Anecd. Gr. p. 144. 20 sqq., where the passage, so read, is, with others, cited in support of the use of el with the present subjunctive. 98. So Horn. II. i. 580 ei irep yap k WeXya-iv OXvfjbTrios 98. daTepoTrrjTrji \ e^ eSewv eX.i^ai' 6 yap iroXv epTaT6i ecrnv. 99. fjtaKpav is the reading of the bulk of the MSS., including _,99- Plat. Sep. the Clarkian, and is no doubt correct. Si quis autem diwtwTMm '"• P' ^''^ ^• illi mctus observationem praecipit, as Ficinus renders it. So Ast ad I. ; and Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 421. 22. 446 GREEK AND LATIN 99 The objection to the reading fiiKpav, which is given to us by seven MSS. — an eighth which had the same reading having it corrected into i^aKpav — is twofold, ^dz. — Slmra. (1) fiiKpav SoatTav would liave to be taken to mean "low diet" ; whereas Slaira, altbougb including what we call " diet," is a fuller word than that, and means " regimen." ff/uKpos not (2) The only form of the word which Plato would have used, had fuKpos in Plato. he used the word at all, would have been iLKrp-ai | (S/Mj. See above note 84. III. Aesch. ^S'. III. 1. el 8' tJv reOvrjKU,^. Cf. Shaksp. 2 iTew?/ FI. iv. 10 ^^^- " if I do not leave you all as dead as a door-nail, I pray God I may never eat grass more." 2. "eirX'^Ovov" [=" reports abounded "] "Porsonus. iirX^q- dvvov " [ = " reports multiplied his death "] " libri." Dindorf ad I. Why should not the reading of the books be retained? Cf. Shirley Hyde Park i. 2 " frequent intelligence hath reported him I lost, both to me, and his own life." 871. 3. Mr. Maiden considered v. 871 an interpolation, arisen out of V. 875 TToAAas avaiOev dprdvai c/iijs &ep7js. The late Dean of Wells, Dr. Plumptre, in his translation accepts it, with the remark : " Clytemnestra . . . pauses to make her language accurate to the very letter. She is speaking only of the earth which would have been laid over her husband's corpse, had he died as often as he was reported to have done. She will not utter anything so ominous as an allusion to the depths below him stretching down to Hades." el S oretTTi Ne^uecrts, ov \eyoi, as Aegisthus says.''"'"™ 872. 4. With the idea contained in x^ovSs Tpip.oipov X'^atvav, cf. Hom. II. iii. 56 and the other passages cited by Blomfield ad I. ; to which add Pind. Nem. xi. 15 ^vara p.ep.v6xrdr]v oStrav 112. ovK dv TToXXal i'irjcrav. See more on this and similar 112. Thuc. i. 9. passages Text § 85. 5- 112a. On the combination, of which this passage from 112a. Eur. Euripides and the examples of the same kind below are Suppl. 764. instances, of the protasis with the past tense indicative and the apodosis with the past subjunctive with dv, see above Text § 36 and note 42. 113. Contrast (unaccompanied by dv) Thuc. iii. 74. 2 (cited 113. in Text § 60 (y)) /cat -q ttoXk €Kiv8vvev(Te irSxra Siatjidaprjvai, €1 av£/ios OTeyevETO Tij <^Aoyt eirtcpopoi es a'UT')ji'= "had-run the risk of being ( = would have been) entirely destroyed, if a wind had come up upon the flame." 114. /iTjSe Tatfnjvai ■irpoo-\m-rjp)(ev olkol fiot. Cf. supra note 114. 54- 2. 115. We have the other form of apodosis, in similar 115. sentences, in Horn. II. iii. 373 Kai vv kcv tipva-crkv re Kal ao-^rexov rj/aaro KuSos, I el p-rj dp' o^v vorjcre Aios dvyarijp 'Ac^poSirrj : Od. xxiii. 241 Kai vv k' 6Svpop,evoia-i, (f>dvr] poSoSdKTvXoi ijws, I el p.rj dp' dW evo-qare Bed yXavKWTTis 'A6-qvrj. 116. Cf. supra note 23. 1 as to this passage. 116. Isxx"'' Had Fielding, when writing this passage, present to his memory the "Six feet." closing words of Sir Thomas Browne's Urn BuHall— "To live indeed, is to be again ourselves, which heing not only a hope, hut an evidence in nohle believers, 'tis all one to lie in St. Innocent's Churchyard, as in the sands of Egypt. Ready to be anything, in the ecstasy of being ever, and as content with six foot as with the moles of Adrianus. Tabeme cadavera solvat \ an rogus, Aaud refert, Luoan " vii. 809 ; or Hall's Satires ii. 2. 57 "fond fool ! six feet shall serve for all thy store ; | and he that cares for most shall find no more " ? 2 G 450 GREEK AND LATIN "6* ii6a.AT.Thesm. ii6a. So the books. Bentley unnecessarily corrected the 696. word to '■Keirva-ii.i)v. See ahove note 7. 2. 117. 117. rmv TveTrpajixiViov avrtf. See above note 75 (1). J 18. 118. Cf. Ps. xxxix. 5 "Lord, let me know mine end, and the number of my days : that I may be certified how long I have to live." iig. 119. So Dem. Mid. p. 525. 15 et toIwv aTrexpr] Tovs T019 Atovwrtois Ti TTOiovvTas T0VTb)v Kara rovrovs tovs vo/xovs SiKijr SiSovat, ovSiv av irpoa-eSei TOvSe Tov voixov. 120. 120. av eSei. So Plat. Alcib. Pr. p. 119 B d p.iv irov ^a-av ireirai^tviiJevoi, eSet av tov (.Tri^eipovvTa avroti dvTayiavi^ecrOai imdovra KOI doTKricravTa levat u>i eir' dOX.'qTa.'s' vvv 8 k.t.X. : Gorg. p. 514 A; Dem. c. PUlipp. i. p. 40. 10: c. Aphdb. i. p. 813. 3. 121. ^m-.Bacch. 121. See above Text § 36, and notes 42, 59. 4, 112a. 1341 sqq. ^ Spenser would have found no difficulty in translating evSaiixovoiT av by "you would be rejoicing" directly. Cf., for example. Faerie Queene i. 6. 42. 7 "but had be beene, wbere earst his armes were lent, | th' Enohaunter vaine his errour should not rew" — so perhaps i. 8. 18. 9 "what mortall wight could ever beare so monstrous blow ? " 2. So we have in Lyly Endymion v. 1 " tell what thou hast seen in thy sleep all this while . . For it is impossible but in so long time, thou shouldst see things strange " ; Congreve Old Bachelor v. 12 "Adam, sure, could with more ease abide | the bone when broken, than when made a bride " ; Scott Lady of the Lake vi. 18. 26 "where was Eoderick then! | one blast upon his bugle-horn | were worth a thousand men ! " 3. We have a kind of half-way between the two construc- tions in Head and Kirkman English Rogue pt. ii. c. 7 " he so buffeted the shopkeeper, that had not the smith interposed, I suppose he would go near to have killed him." 4. Shirley even goes so far as to give us such a collocation as the following, in his "4a 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 451 Hyde Park iii. 1 "if she had been half so wise as in | my conscience she is honest, you have missed | that excellent occasion, to show | your notable skill in dancing," where the meaning required is " you would have missed." 12 2. On xPV^i ^xn^' ®^® above note 46. 122. Pind. Scol. Ft. 100. 1 XPV^ Z*^'' ko-to, Katphv epurrtav SpeirecrOai, 6v[i.i, a-vv dAtKi^="you ought to have plucked." 123. On eiTrep ^aSa firj kukos see above note 54. 2. 123- 123a. Cf. Judges xiii. 23 "if the Lord were pleased to kill 123a. us, he would not have received a burnt offering and a meat oifering at our hand." 123b. " (f>ovevi libri omnes," says Bekker ad L; "Eeiskius 123b. Antipho .foveas. Praestiterit .^oveCo-iv. Conf. p. 122. 8." ^'*™'g "• 2- P- It would certainly seem so. 124. See above note 113; and Xen. Anah. iv. 1. 11, one 124. of the passages on which that note is written. 124a. 1. " 7ra/)co-X€V Aid. et MSS. Trapea-x a-v primus repo- 124a. Eur. .ffec. nendum monuit Heathius," Porson ad I. : who is followed by ^^l?,: . , HJ- 1 T -n Ji «^, / /^^^ n \ ' EllSlOU Of -£ Ul Monk ad Jbur. Ak. 901 ( = 926 ed. suae). verbs before dv. Again, in the passage just referred to — Eur. Ak. 897 rt p,' eKioXvcrai pi\f/ai Tvp,pov | Tacjypov es KOikrjv, Kal piT iKUvq'i \ "njs p^y' djOtCTTJjs Ksia-Oai (f>6ipiVov ; I Svo S' avrl piai " AiStjs ^v^ds | rds TruTTOTciTai •ye KpiTiav, otoi re etvat ot ttoXXoI to, p,eyi(na KaKO. i^epya^ecrOai, iva oioi T£ ^crav av Kal dyadd to. p,iyi(jTa' Kai KaAcos dv ei)(e. 3. In point of fact the passage from Eur. Ale. 897 above cited is equivalent to rt p,' «KwA,vcras pl^ai, 'Iva Svo K&r)m'' Aesoh. Ag. 1274; Ar. JVitb. 1363; Eqq. 412; Aeh. 709; iii]veaxl>ii,T\v Ar. Nub. 1373 (with no variation in the Ijooks on the point of the douhle augment) ; Tiviffx^TO Soph. Tr. 276 ; Ar. Eqq. 537 ; Plat. Chcmnid. p. 162 D (with a marginal variation in the Clarkian MS. o^i'^x^") > 'fivi(TXfpa, — " praefigebant indicativi temporibus, prout res postularet, imperfecto, aoristo, plus quam perfecto. . . . Exempla quaedam apponam, quibus haec syntaxis, Atticorum fere propria, melius percipiatur." He cites accordingly Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1386 (cited above in the Text); 1391 tj /i,' ov A.a/3u)V I iKTeivai ev9vs, ois eSec^a firprore | kfiavrhv avdpunrowLV evOev ij yeyws ; El. 1131 ois oJ^eAov . . . eKXnreiv fSlov, | . . • ottcos daviav skckto . . . : Aesch. So in the past imperfect : e.ff. ■/ivelx^To Soph. PhU. 411 ; Ar. Thesm. 593 ; and imperfect. ■^I'etxiS/"^'''^'' Aesch. Ag. 905. 2. In Soph. Ant. 466. 467 dXX' S,v, ei rbv i^ iiJ,rjs \ iJ,i}Tpbs BavkvT ABairrov Soph. Ant. 467. ^ read iiva-xi/J^V { = fl''^(rx^M^) ■ a form stigmatised — not unduly, one would think — by Porson (Eur. Hec. : Swppl. ad Praef. p. 15 Scholef. ) as a ' portentum.' A most ingenious correction of Semitelos — ytr)(yvav Kivei for kax^l'-ip' viKW, the Laurentian A MS. having Tila-xi/oi" — is adopted by Professor Jebb ad I., who, comparing Horn. II. xxii. 74 sqq., remarks -"if es of Kives had been obliterated, v^kvi/ would easily have arisen (esp. after v), and a change of v into would have taken ^axvpav far towards rilcxoMV." 3. In Ar. I/y^. 507, where the books give us either '/iveffxi/iecrBa or iipeix^- Ar. Lys. 507. fiea-da — both of which, however, the metre rejects — Kuster (after Plorens Christianus) replaces ^fexif^ea-Ba, which is accepted by Brunck and Invemizius, and praised as an "excellent emendation" by Buttmann {Irreg. Gk. Vts. s.v. #xw)i who defends it against "Porson and others" (see Pors. and Jebb ILcc.). Dindorf overlooking the various readings in Plat. Qharmid. p. 162 D, and Dem. Androt. p. 614. 17, respectively above referred to, speaks of Ttvex^/ieirBa as "forma praeteriti aliunde non cognita," and would reject aa an interpolation the whole line in which it occurs. 4. In Ar. Pac. 347, where the books give us iroWk ykp ■/iveaxiiai"! Brunck, Pac, 347. with the adhesion of Dindorf ad I., Buttmann vM supra, Dr. Eutherford Jfew Pfaymichus p. 85, corrected the reading into ToWd, yhp &vepov' dyyiX.ov Siktjv, | oVtos SitfipovTi's oixra fir] Kivvo'a-o- lir)v : Bur. Iph. Taur. 354 dAA.' ovre . . . ^jXde ■ • ■ | . . . iv' avTovi dvTeTiiJi.(i)p7j(Td[jLriv : Hipp. 925 Xf"l^ /3poToi(ri rZv iX.pevoiv, | octtis t' dAij^^s ItrTiv os re /H'^ ^lAos • I Stcrcrds t6 i^iovas JrdvTas di/6p(u7rovs «X*'>', | Trjv fitv StKatW, rijv 8' OTTO)? ervyxavev [on the euphemism see Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 428. 12], | ws rj povov(ra TaSiK* i^rjXeyx^TO | Trpbs t^s SiKaias, kovk av rjTra.Tiap.iOa, : 1078 et6' Jjv . . . \ . . ., m eSaKpva-' . . . : Ar. Pac. 135 iXPW cs • • • few^ixt . . ., I oVeos l(JMivov .... £cci. 151 ifBovXop/ijv fiev 'drepov av twv ij^aSo)!/ | Xeytiv Tcl PeXrurd', iv' exa^ij/iijv ■^crv;(os : divers passages — hy reference — from the Orators, after Valckenaer {Diatrib. p. 149 A, being in fact passages from the Androtion and other speeches of Demosthenes (so there cited as that the present writer cannot verify them), and also the fragment of Isaeus quoted below, § 3, in this note) ; and also (this also after Valck. I.e.) Eur. 'IttttoX. KaXinrr. Fr. 12 Dind. ( = 442 Nauck) €v, t6 p,rj ra Trpdy/iar' dvOpi&Trois tX^'" I (jiiovqv, iv' Tfrav /MrjSiv ol Scivol Aeyetv. 2. Similarly Elmsley, on the passage of Sophocles cited in the Text, writes thus : — " Quoties . . . prior sententiae pars non quid factum sit sed quid fieri oportuerit, designat, particulae iva, ws, ottojs indicativum post se adsciscunt, modo de re praesenti ant praeterita sermo sit. Nam de re futura adhibetur subjunctivus aut optativus. Exempla hujus structurae nonnulla post alios indicabo." This he, in his turn, accordingly does, citing Eur. Hipp. 645, and the passages thereon cited by Monk ; Eur. Ino Er. 14 XPW • ■ • °'''' irXeto-Tas ex^'" I yi'^'K^s . . ., I (is T^v KaK^pf fiev e^e^aXXe SiafmTwv, \ rijv 8' oSo-av iadXrjv rjSeiDS ecria^ero : Astydamas Fr. i. 1 eW iyio . . . y€v6p,7]v . . ., I 0)9 . . . eKpidrjv : Ar. Vesp. 959 KiOap'i^eiv yap ovk eirt' ffplv rbv Xoyov : Eccl. 422 el 8' eKetvd ye | Trpoa-eOrjKev, ovBeh dvTexeipoTovrja-ev av, \ . . . iva tovt' direXavcrav Navcri- KvSovs rdyadov : Menand. Me6?j Fr. i. 1 1 ey(t> . . . ovk eiacra . . ., | iva K.aXXip,eS(av dTredavev eh Ttov (rvyyevCiv : 127 5 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 455 Fr. Incert. 3. 1 tovtov ij/ias rhv rpoTrov yafietv eSet | . . ., And lie winds up by remarking: "Haec qui inspiciat, nemo, opinor, dubitabit quin apud Eur. Sec. 818" — Tt S'^Ttt dvTjTol TaXX.a fiev fiaOrj/jtaTa \' fioxSov/Ji^v, (OS XP^> ^^^- ^'"'- ^^®' iravTa, Kai fuwrevofiev, | Treidta Se, rf/v Tvpawov dvdpunrois /U0V7JV, I ovSev Ti fj,aXXov k tcXos tr7roi;Safo/iev, | fiurOovs StSoi/TCS, /iavSavetv, tV ■§ (so Porson) jtote | ■Kilduv a Tts PovkoiTO, rvyxdvetv 6' afia ; — " scribendum sit iv ^v ttotL" 3. To the examples given by Monk and Elmsley there may be added, by way of supplement, Lysias de Eratosth. coed. p. 95. 27 etra SokS av vfiXv rhv (rvvBii/TTVovvTa d^ets fiovoi KaTaX€L67]vai /cat 'iprjjj,oi yey&rOai, rj KiXevuv SKecvov pJkvsiv, iva p-er' ep,ov rhv /iotxov eTt/icope?To : de Vwlnere p. 101. 2 klBovX6p.r\v S' ov p,ri dTroXaxiiv avrbv KpiTrjV Aiovvcrioii, 'iv' vfuv (f>avtphs iyevero ip,oi SirjXXayp.evo's, Kpivas tjjv ip,fjv v, tTrirdp^ovs Trap vficov dp)(0VTas oiKciovs etvai, iv' ^v (is dXrjdlik rijs TroXews rj Svvap,K ; c. Timoc/r. p. 715. 23 /catroi XPl^ ere . . . ypdipa- (rdai . . . SiaXex^Tjvai, . . . ypdijieiv Kai vop,oOerciv wepi Tovrtov, . . . iva . . . el Kai ns eirexetpei . . ., p-rj oiv eTTi^ovXeveiv y' eSoKei'S dXXa . . . : pro Phorm. p. 958. 28 Tavra dvTi tov KOtrpeiv KaX irepuTTeXXeiv, iva Ka\ to?s Soucrtv (OS eia-xqp.ovecTTaTa eaiveTO Kal tojs Xafiovcnv vpXv, aycts £ts p,e(Tov: Dmarch. c. Dem. p. 91. 19 Svoiv yap Odrepov expfjv avTovs, rj Kal Trjv irporepav ^■qrrja'iv . . . ^rjTeiv, . . . iva tote . . . dTrr)XXdyp,e0a . . . ■ rj k.t.X. : Theocritus vii. 86 aW err' ep^v ^(uots evapidp.io'i w(j}eXei "^f-^v, \ (Ss rot kym evopevov . . . : xi. 54 w/tot ot' ovk ereKev p,' a paTrjp fipdyxi e'xovTa, | (os KareSuv ttotI tiv, Kal rav X^P" '''^s eepov Se TOi . . . 4. So much for the form of the locution. 5. As to its meaning and translation, Monk (ad Eur. Hipp. 645) says that " Haec sane structura ab usibus particularum (Ss, iva, etc., cum —by Monk ; subjunctive et optative prorsus distinguenda est. View of the construction taken 456 GREEK AND LATIN 127 5— Ixxxviu " Dixissent quidem, XPV T/jocnroA,ov ov irepav — 'iv' e'xwcri /iijTt K.T.X., i.e. 'that they may be able neither, etc' " Dixissent etiam ovk eiwv irpoo'Trokov irtpav — 'iv' k\oi,f.v firyn K.T.A.., 'that they might be able neither, etc' " Diversa autem ratio est sententiae xp^v irpocnroXov ov Trepav — iv' 6?x<"' M'''^ K.T.X., 'in which case they would be able neither, etc.'" 6. But, if there had really been the constitutional difference between the three formations which is here supposed, and if the particles had really been in the last case translateable by the English "in which case," we should have had in sentences, where the member following the particle is not aflBrmative but negative — for example (of those cited above) Aesch. Prom. V. 152; Gho. 195; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1391; Ar. Vesp. 959; Dem. c. Timocr. p. 715. 23 — that negative expressed by ov or one of its combinations, and not by /jlyj or any of its combinations. Thus we should have had in Aesch. Prom. V. 152 et yap p.' wb yyjv . . . | . . . ^kcv, | ... 0)9 ovTe 9ehi oiire Tts aA,Aos I ToitrS' tTreyqOei : Gho. 195 tW ei)(i <^(ov^v • • • I 6V(os SitjipovTK oStra ov'kivvit- trop/qv : and so on. Moreover " they would be able " would be in Greek — not etxov, but — e'xoiev av : and of such a sentence we have an actual example in Mosohus iii. 122 el Svvdp.av 8e, | uis 'Op<^evs . . . | . . . Kriyiy Ta}(' o.v Is S6p.ov ^\6ov | TlXovreos, wi kev iSoip,i, Kai, el nXouT^i.' /ieAterSets, | (Ss civ a.Kovi7a'ip,av, Ti p^eXia-Seai = " if I had had the power, I would have come, so that I should see, and — if you are singing — that I should hear." taxviii So also after an opening more distinctly expressive of present time, Hom. II. ii. 371 at yap . . . | toiovtoi Se/ca p.01 (rvp,pdS- p,oves eUv 'A)(ai66yyo \ / \ t f it It 3 3 \ 3 O f\ TO VOW/3 ejs TO ^(opiov TO rip^Tepov, w et fiev epovAero Trava-ourOat, fi-qSev v/juv Svarxeph irpoi dW-qXavs ^v, tl 8 ] Si(j>povTis o^cra /lij 'Kivv(rcro/jWjv = "would that it had had a voice, like a messenger, so that, [if it had had one,] I had not — ^tossed about in mind — been in a state of disturbance." In the sentence thus viewed, the negative in the second member in the shape of /x-j is seen to be strictly correct. So also is the past subjunctive (BovXoito in (cited by Elmsley — para. 2 of this note) Eur. Hec. 818 ts Sijra . | TreiOib . ■ ■ | oijSev Ti jxaXXov €S TeA.os a-irovSa^ofiev, | fiurOovs SiSdvres, fJ,av6dv€iv, iv', [et i(nrovSd^o/iev,l ^v 5roT€ | TreiOeiv d Tts fBoiXono, Tvy- Xaveiv 6' dfia = " why then do we not press forward to acquire it, so that, [if we had been pressing forward,] it had been in a man's power to make acceptable what he wished." 9. In a passage like Moschus Epigramimatis Fragmentum (ed. Weise, Lips. 1843, p. 158) aWe Trariyp jj,' iSiSa^e Saavrpixa /xijAa vo/ieveiv, | <3s Kev, VTTO wrcXeycTi, /ca^Tj/uevos, , rj {nrh Trex/oais, | (TvplcrSwv KaXdp,ouriv e/ms Tep7r£(TKOV dvtas = " would that he had taught me, so that [if he had taught me] I should have been soothing," we have the fuller, the (C) a division form, viz. — the past tense indicative with dv (kcv) used after m : and in Horn. Od. xxiv. 376 at ydp . . | Totos etoi' rot X^'C^s ev rip,eTepoi(Ti Sofiourcv, | TCv)(e' e)((ov &fi,owriv, k^endiiivai Kai dp/uveiv | dvSpas iJ,vr]povov(Ta T&SiK e^Xeyxero \ .. . ., kovk av ij7raTW/;i£^a = " they ought to have had, so that, [if they had had,] the ill- conditioned voice had been confuted, and we should not have been lying open to deception"; and (cited in full above in the Text § 115 and note 124a. 2) Plat. Grito p. 44 D et yap &v, and just below, iyKafudj^ovros. 3. The former of these two corrections also finds favour with Dr. Rutherford {New Phrynichus pp. xi. 92. 383. 390. 409) as being "unquestionably" correct. ' ' The innumerable well-authenticated instances of the future middle " d/coiiffO/uai "give," he says, "authority sufficient to alter this one passage." 4. Unfortunately Dr. Rutherford is in the Caudine Forks, having to defend a " cogent rule " of his own enunciation, which, the present writer would venture to suggest, is, like a previous rule of the same learned Head-master, which has already come under consideration, framed with a too narrow view of all the facts of the case. At any rate, it excludes aKoiaa as a future of amiu, and therefore one of the two, the form or the rule, must be in fault ; and the maker of the rule can scarcely be expected to find the fault in his own creation. 5. To his view of the effect of the existence of "the innumerable well- authenticated instances of the future middle," one would respectfully tender in reply an adaptation of Mr. Shilleto's remark — on Thuo. ii. 37. 3 (rbv ttAos) — with reference to Ehusley's (ad Eur. Med. 85) doubt as to the use of the singular toC irAo! in the passage of Euripides in question : "why the many examples which he" (Elmsley) "gives of the plural should eliminate the few instances of the singular might satisfy Prof. Cobet " — whose disciple Dr. Rutherford earnestly professes himself to be, — "but passes, I confess, my comprehension." 6. The "cogency" of Dr. Rutherford's "rule" will strike different minds, no doubt, with different force. Still, the present writer would suggest for con- sideration whether that can be called a "rule" at all — especially if by that term is meant, as Dr. Rutherford does in the present case mean (see him I.e. pp. 92. 138. 376. 387. 400. 411), an invariable rule — which depends for its actual formu- lation upon the exclusion from even decent hearing of all facts which militate against it. 7. Lastly, it may be added that the passage of Hyperides under discussion is not the "one passage" in which the future of aKoiw in active form appears in Attic Greek. We have it, whatever other correction the passage may need, in Ar. Aeh. 295 aov y &KoiaoiJ.ev ; &voKei' Kard a-e xc6 : and Dindorf followed him in accepting it. 8. To Dobree the active form of the future of the particular verb amia seems to have been peculiarly offensive. In Ar. Thesm. 1167, where the books have tjv oSc KOfi.ldi>ris," Dobree (in Pors. Aristoph. p. (147)) suggested as a correction, which was adopted by Nauck, dKOvaelecv. Dobree, yet once again, does not {I.e.) indeed openly attack, although he cites, Menander 'Avdpla Fr. 8 tI S17 irar' &Koiiru ; which Donatus on Ter. Andr. iii. 4. 13 reading " quidnam audio ? " — cites as authority for the proper (see Bentley ad I.) reading "quidnam audiam?" and Meineke adopts in Menander the reading without remark. Perhaps the reason for Dobree's silence in this particular case is one of those which Dr. Rutherford (iVfeu PhryrUehm p. 398) employs against aKovffu as a future active in- dicative of aKoia. Ar. Jch. 295. Thesm. 1167. Soph. Fr. Inc. 821 D.=897 N. Menand. 'AvSp. Fr. 8. 462 GREEK AND LATIN 128— bb or again, a word wMcli sins against his "cogent rule," and therefore requires elimination AlSv/ji. Fr. 1. at all hazards, viz. (TvnirepiTar^aeis in Menander Aldv/iai Pr. 1, viz. that the form "has no authority in a writer so late as Menander." If so, Valeat qvantum. Authority of 9. Faith has been placed in what has been said above in the readings of the MSS., MSS., as well of Hyperides (firat. Fimebr. col. 13. 1. 1) as of Aristophanes {Ach. 295) ; but it is, in fact, idle to appeal to the MSS. with Professor Cobet and his school. 10. "Alii," says the Hierophant (Recens. Orat. Hyperid. pro Buocenipp. in Mnemosyne, July 1853, p. 329, cited by Professor Churchill Babington in his edition of ^& Funeral Oration p. vii.), "alii formas Atticas subinde tantum revocarunt, si libri, tanquam aves, addicerent. Sed non minus futile est hoc auspioiorum genus, quam quae olim ex puUis capiebantur. Erit aliquando lUe dies quum istam quoque eruditam superstitionem mens sanior delebit ac desinent studia nostra impedire homunculi, qui quam sint in antiquis Graecis litteris et sermone plumbei in Hyperidis librario nunc satis ostendisse videor." "The texts were altered," says Dr. Rutherford {New Phrynichus p. 378), ' ' by copyists of an age in which Dionysius of Halicarnassus could use Siti^o/juu in a passive sense " ; again (pp. 378, 379) " The history of these two futures . . . teaches the valuable lesson that manuscripts are of no authority in establishing the true form of a future when it has survived only in the second person singular. In other cases in which the two forms were nearly alike, the copyists have blundered by using the oue for the other " ; again (p. 391) " Little more reliance can be placed upon the usage of Tragedians than upon the readings of manu- scripts " ; again (p. 412) "No faith can be put in such authorities, no reliance at a pinch " ; and passim. 11. The present writer, however, agrees with Professor Babington (in his remarks upon the passage of Cobet just above cited) in thinking " that our views of Attic forms and Attic constructions must be taken as much as possible from and inscriptions. MSS. and inscriptions, and as little as may be from preconceived opinions or the dicta of late and pedantic grammarians"''''; and that "Buttmanu's view" is " at least as judicious and sober as Cobet's. ' Ego cum in talibus nullam omnino normam praeter codicum auotoritatem, qualemoumque illam, uoverim ; formam minus Atticam ubique restitui, ubi olim vulgata lecta, neque e codd. ijiutata erat.' (In Demosth. ad Mid. § 8 [=p. 522. 9])." Mr. Babington, having given instances of alterations in support of a foregone thesis, adds — and the present writer regrets to be obliged [to agree with him " It would be easy enough to produce other instances of rash assertion on the part of M. Cobet, but this is a fair sample of his imperious method. " So too Curtius {Das Verbwm ii. p. 107), speaking of forms like KaByfajv, KaByro, KaB'ijiJieda, "welche fiir Arist. Lys. 149 ; Ran. 919; Xen. Oyr. f.'l. 8 nach den Spuren der Handsohrifteu vielleicht anznerkennen sind," says that they '>'' Similarly Blass in the Preface to his Hyperides (Lips. 1869) p. xvi. : "at non ideo statim Uecpaius pro eo quod in codice est Ilei/rai^us " — he is referring evidently to Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 19. 1. 21 — " cum Cobeto reposuerim, neque omnia ad normam severissimi Atticismi exegerim : quid enim ? Hyperidem vel in vocabulis ipsis neglegentiorem nnm scimus in declinandis eis tam diligentem fuisse? Eelinquitur igitur ut codices sequamur, non tamquam auctores fide dignos, sed tamquam solos qui suppeditent. " So, in earlier days, Wolf had written on Dem. Lept. p. 491. 25 " ^/SouX'^ei/o-oc scripsit Eeisk. ... Ac poterat non male rejioi vulgatum ipov\i)Bripovoi : Sep. iii. p. 412 D (where neither MS. nor edition projffers aught else than) Kal jtiijv rovTO y av fiakurra i.\oi: Hep. vi. p. 493 A oTov irep av el . . . Tis . . . KaXol: Prolog, p. 327 E &cnrep av £t fijTOts . . . 2. But that "forms like So/co?" should be "recognised as legitimate," in place of Sokoitj and the like, is, in the eyes of Dr. Rutherford, quite enough to condemn the MSS. which give it to us. Silently catching — with reference to Plat. Lys. p. 206 A just above mentioned — ^at the reason which Heindorf gives as one which would support the indicative Soku instead of Sokoi — or, rather, instead of 8oKy — his conclusion of the whole matter, in speaking of the past subjunctive active, is {New Phrynichus pp. 446-448) :— "While the shorter endings were in the singular not altogether avoided by the antiquated dialect of Tragedy, the longer were the only forms used in Comedy and prose, and even in Tragedy were decidedly preferred. The manuscripts of prose writers are on this question quite untrustworthy, and must be consistently corrected." 3. Is it indeed so 2 Cf. swpra subnote xei. 9 sqq. 4. Dr. Rutherford is, in effect, merely enlarging on his more careful master. Professor Cobet {Nov. Lect. p. 364) : " Tragicis licet vo(TOLp.i et SoKotfii et similia dicere, populo et Comicis et Oratori- i34a— xcvia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 467 bus non licet, sed Sokoitjv, voa-oirjv et sim. sola in usu sunt.'' The passage is cited by Curtius (Das Ferbwm ii. p. 110, note, q.v.) 5. Curtius (I.e.) supplies us with a calmer view of the facts; except, however, that in Ar. Pac. 1075 oi yap wio tovt' Ar. Pac. 1075. eoTt fftlXov imKap^cra-i. Oio'txriv, \ (jivkoiriSos Xrj^at, irplv Kev \vkos olv vfievaiot the concluding verb is not in the past, but in the present, subjunctive. _ 6. That in Ar. Fesp. 1405 Mr. Shilleto, while properly r«sp. 1405. objecting to the reading, saw no objection to the form, SoKok, see his note on Thuc. i. 22. 1. 7. Before leaving the subject one may perhaps express one's curiosity as to the reason of Dr. Eutherford's having finished his quotation of Plat. Lys. p. 206 A with the word ehai, and having left the manuscriptal dvau-o/3ot and ttoioi without remark. 133a. Compare Shaksp. Jul. Caes. iv. 3 "there is a tide in 133a. the affairs of men, | which taken at the flood leads on to fortune : I omitted, all the voyage of their life ( is bound in shallows and in miseries." 134. "Diversos modos jungit Euripides,'' says Person on 134. Eur. Ph. Eur. Phoen. 92 sqq. ( = 90 sqq. ed. suae) — eiria-xe^, ws av wpoi^e- ^^ ^i^- pewqa-o) arrifSov, | [irj Tts TroXirmv iv Tpi/3(ff i^avTa^erai, | Kafwl jAv iXOrj povovcnv, v/ieii 8 . . . Tovs l^iv (fivcrei TroXefiiovs fSovXecrde ii>cf)£Xeiv, tov^ Se en fiaXXov (fyvcru ^uyyevets . . . Sia 134b. 134b. tl Sk ouSei' riiJi.dfyTriTa[ fwi. Of. SUpra n6te 54. 5, 134c. Plat. 134c. Bekker reads 8ia/3e/3A?;vTo (see above note 7. 1). Fhaedon p. 67 E g^^ ^j^g ^jj^jj^ ^jj^ jjegt; of the MSS. are against him. sqq. I34d. I34e. 135. Ar. 146 sqq. i34d. Cf. siyara note in. 4. 1346. On the use of Trapct here, see above note 75 (3). Lyf. 135. A good example of changes of construction will be found in Ar. Lys. 146 sqq. ; where in v. 149 there is no reason to interfere with the common reading — evidently (see however above subnote xei. 11) that of the MSS. — KadrjiJiid' ("if we had taken up our places "). Nor does the change of av8/)es into avS/jes in v. 152 seem more necessary. i3Sa. Lys. dc i3Sa. Bekker reads this sentence affirmatively. But see Vuln. p. 101.' 39. Mr. Shilleto on Thucyd. i. 121. 7. 135b. Changes of idea. ' i3Sb. Compare such change of idea in passages like Defoe Moll Flanders p. 36 " ' you shall be my dear sister, as now you are my dear ,' and there he stopt. ' Your dear whore,' says I, ' you would have said, and you might as well have said it ' " ; Sheridan The Critic iii. 1 " and Whiskerandos quits this bustling scene | for all eter . B. — ^nity — he would have added, but stern death | cut short his being and the noun at once" ; Wordsworth Bob Roy's Grave st. 14 "so was it — would at least have been | but through untoward- ness of fate." Aretino Bagionamenti i. 1 "la havrei spinto . . . A. Tu facesti bene, cioe haresti fatto bene." 136. Plat. Pro- 136- Where see Heindorf, who, amongst other examples, of tag. p. 340 E. which that just cited above in the Text from Xenophon is one, refers to Plat. Apol. p. 25 B, itU vid. Stallbaum. See also Heindorf on Plat. Theaet. p. 171 B. 136a. 136a. For corresponding examples in English and other modern languages, see below note 139. Thuc. ii. 39. 5. In the passage cited in the Text three MSS. have kOiXofixv — evidently by correction, although Arnold — as also Bekker — adopts the reading. 138 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 469 Mr. Shilleto accepts ediXoifj^v : but adds " vere Poppo ' nihil nisi modestius dicendi genus est pro indie' " That is, the present writer supposes, he would translate el WeXoi/xev — "if we might possibly be willing," a somewhat unusual, but hardly impossible, use of the construction. "Dionysius," confesses Dr. Arnold, "read edeXoi/j^v, and criticised Thucydides accordingly for writing incorrectly." 137. av 8vv7](T6e, the reading of the MSS., apparently without 137. Xen. An. exception, is equivalent, as we have seen (supra Text § 24), to the ^^- ^- ^^• future indicative Swiqa-eo-Oe : and the sentence is consequently absolutely on all fours in point of construction with that from Thuc. i. 121. 5, just before cited in the Text here. So again we have in Xen. Anab. v. 6. 9 ei 8e Koi SwrjOeire to, v. 6. 9. T£ oprj KXetpai r] . . ., Sevrepov S . . ., TpiTov S' "AXdv . . . ov ovk av Svvfjo-de (so again the MSS. and again, apparently, without exception) aveo irAotuv Sia^ijvai. Porson (on the passage cited in the Text) needlessly branded the reading in either case as a solecism, and in either case suggested 8vvatcr6e as a correction ; and he has been hastily followed by the editors. In the same way he also, needlessly, altered the universal reading of the MSS. in the opening of the speech of Tissaphernes, from which the passage in the Text is taken, viz. Anab. ii. 5. ii. 5. 16. 16 i^Sofiai . . . aKovoiv (rov (jipovipiovs Xoyovs' TaSra yap yiyviaaKav ei Ti e/ioi KaKov l3ovXevoiit.iv, and not as (with Jelf I.e.) a future indicative. 470 GREEK AND LATIN 139 — xcvib 139. (B) a ii. protasis: followed, in modern lan- guages, by — the future indicative ; Marlowe Edw. II. p. 186 h. Omission of re- lative in English. 139. Compare 1. Greene LooUng-Glass for Lond. and Engl. p. 123 6 "were a goddess fairer . . ., | I'll scale the heavens . . ." [where Mr. Dyce compares, as another instance of a common usage in the early writers, Shaksp. Coriol. i. 9 "if I should tell thee . . ., | thou'lt not believe . . ." One would scarcely have imagined that he would have been ready in Marlowe Edftuard II. p. 186 h — "were all the earls and barons of my mind, | we'll hale him from the bosom of the king"— to correct the " weele" ( = " we'll") of the old editions into " we'd." Even only two pages further on in the play (p. 188 a) he might have found, to keep him straight, " were he a peasant, being my minion, I I'll make the proudest of you stoop to him " ; and, again, further on (p. 219 b), "thy heart, were it as Gurney's is, | . . . yet will it melt." Other examples of the use we have in] Dekker i. Honest Whore i. 12 (13) p. 70 "stood Bergamo | . . , rU to her" ; ii. ib. i. 1 p. 166 "I'll to her, stood armed fiends to guard the doors" ; p. 133 "I'll on, stood armed devils staring in my face" ; p. 130 "were it my father's father, . . . I'll kill him " ; Shoemaker's Holiday p. 23 "use thyself friendly . . .; if not, thou shalt be fought with, wert thou bigger than a giant " ; Heywood Fair Maid of the Exchange p. 19 " I'll court my love and will solicit thee, j were Ferdinand himself in company " ; Shirley Hyde Parle ii. 2 " he will save much in perfume for my chamber, | were he but constant here " ; Fletcher The CaptaAn iii. 1 " 'tis a way dangerous, and '"'"'* will deceive thee, | hadst thou the constancy of all men in thee " ; Dryden Indian Emperor ii. 4 " if you should die, my death shall yours pursue " ; Sir Martin Marall v. 1 " if he should prove a fool, ... I shaU be a miserable woman" ; Li/mberham iv. 1 "I will tear her limb from limb — if I could believe it"; v. 1 "he will easily mistake you for her, if he should look in upon you." xcvib Note the omission of the relative here : "and will deceive " = " and which will deceive." So Shaksp. Rom. and Jul, iv. 3 "I have a faint cold fear thrills through my veins " ; Ben Jonson Sejcmus i. 1 "'tis we are hase " ; i. 2 " this is a case | de- serves our fear " ; The Forest: To Sir Robert Wroth " how blest art thou canst love the country, . . . ! " Daniel To the Lady Margaret v. 5 "the storms . . . | appal not him, that . . . | . . . knows the worst can fall " ; Tennyson Ode on the Death of the Duke of Wellington vi. ' ' this is he | was great by land as thou by sea." The use is quite a mannerism with Shirley, e.g. Witty Fair One i. 3 " I . . . I . . . shall be happy to | convey him any knowledge may concern him " ; Hyde Park i. 2 "what is in your condition makes you weary?" Lady of Pleasure iv. 1 " 'twas I sent for thee " ; and passim. 139 " CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 471 2. Rabelais Gargantua i. 6 "si ce pendant vous survenoit quelque mal, je me tiendray pr6s " ; Le Sage Diable hoiteux c. 18 "cependant quand ils 1' (so. la porte) ^leveroient jusqu'aux nues, jamais elle ne sera digne des deux vers latins . . ." ; Balzac, Splendeurs et Misses des Courtisanes (CEuvres ix. p. 51) "duss4-je mourir en restant loin de mon bien-aimd, je mourrai purifi^e . ., et mon Sme deviendra . . .'' ; La Gousine Bette (x. p. 349) " eiit- il des enfans, C^lestine recueillera toujours la moiti6 de ce qu'U laissera." 3. Machiavelli Mandragola iii. 3 " se voi vi voleste confessare, io far6 . . ." ; Principe : Dedicaz. " questo piccolo dono . se da quella (sc. vostra magnificenza) fia diligente considerato e letto, vi conosceri dentro . . ." ; c. 13 "e se si considerasse la prima rovina . . ., si troverk essere stato . . ." ; Bibbiena La Galandria i. 7 "io l'ar6, se io dovessi andar nudo e scalzo " ; ii. 2 " ci starai, se crepassi " ; v. 2 " con man Io toccherb, se mi ammazzassi " ; Aretino La Cortigiana iv. 9 "io non ci verr6, se tu mi coprissi d'oro" ; iv. 11 "e le porterai, se tu crepassi"; Alfip.ri Filippo iii. 5 " se tanto pur la fulminante spada | di Dio tardasse, io nol vedr6." 4. Cervantes Novel. Ej. i. 1 8 La Oitanilla " si vinieren duros, ser^ yo blanda en recebirlos " ; i. 200 Ml amante liberal " si te pareciere darle indicios de mi deseo, harAslo por el mejor modo que pudieres " ; iii. 69 Las dos doncellas " si en algun tiempo Teodosia supiere mi muerte, sabr^ de vos . . ,, como . . ." ; iii. 209 Los Perros de Mahudes "yo la har4 asi, si pudiere " ; Tirso de Molina El burlador de Sevilla iii. 16 "j no comes tii? Don J. Corner^, | si me dieres Aspid, y Aspides ( cuantos el infierno tien." 5. Indeed we find in the apodosis of such sentences, not the future indicative only, but also (o) tbe present indicative and (jS) the past indicative. Thus we have the following as instances of apodoses containing 6. (a) The present indicative. S'catlyeT"'* '"" 7. Lyly Alex, and Gampasp. iii. 4 "were you as cunning as report saith you are, you may paint . . ." ; Marlowe Edw. JJ. p. 215 6 "how fares your grace ? | Q. "Well, if my lord your brother were enlarg'd " ; Heywood Fair Maid of the Exchange p. 42 " what lack you . . . ? G. Faith, nothing, had I thee " ; Beaum. and Fletcher 472 GREEK AND LATIN i39 7 Philaster ii. 2 " the strength of all the guard cannot hold it (sc. her wit), if they were tied to it " ; Fletcher The Captain i. 3 " were we saints, thus we are still rewarded " ; iv. 3 '' so is a resty jade, a horse of service, | if he would leave his nature " ; iv. 4 " if you would cry, I cannot let you in"; Nice Valour iii. 3 (song) "there's nought in this life sweet, | if man were wise to see't | but only melancholy " ; Massinger and Dekker Virgin Martyr iv. 2 " if I were to heat a buck, I can strike no harder " ; Acts viii. 30. Acts viii. 30 " understandest thou ...?... how can I, except some man should guide me ? " [where our purist Revisers substitute " except some one shall " ; marvel- lously, too, altering the eav /iij rts oSrjyija-rj ij,e of the Received Text into eav . . . oSiyyTjcrei] ; St. Paul 2 Cor. v. 1 ; Buckingham Rehearsal i. 1 "and then ... for a whole day together, I am not able to say you one good thing, if it were to save my life " ; iv. 1 " if you should not be a master of your own works, 'tis very hard " ; Sedley Bellamira iii. 1 "if he should discover . . ., I can prevail with him not to prosecute " ; Etherege She Would if She Gould iii. 2 " she's a mistress for Alexander, were he alive again " ; Dryden Mock Astrologer ii. 1 " you know the men, if their masking habits were off" ; Spcmish Friar v. 1 "if he were vanquished, I am still uncon- quer'd " ; Indian Emperor iii. 1 " Justice already does my right approve, | if him, who loves you most, you most should love " ; Lvmberham i. 1 " they are all of them too good for us, unless we had the grace to follow them " ; i. 1 " then if you were overtaken, and should offer violence, ... I am blameless " ; i. 1 " if he should know me, I am ruined"; Parnell A Night Piece on Death "fools ! if you less provok'd your fears, | no more my spectre form appears"; Philips Splendid Shilling v. 60 "if he his ample palm | should haply on ill-fated shoulder lay | of debtor, straight his body ... | to some enchanted castle is conveyed"; Disraeli Lothair ii. c. 17 "feifted beings like you) never will ( = are willing to) think they have done anything, even were they to save the world." See too above note 28, and below note 167. 8. Le Sage DiaMe boiteux c. 2 " il ne pense point k moi : et quand il y penseroit, il ne me fait jamais I'honneur de m'entretenir " ; Beaumarchais To/rare: Prol. sc. 2 "ce pouvoir absolu . . ., | I'exercez-vous aussi sur les in- dividus 1\ La N. Oui, si je descendais a quelques soins perdus ! " 9. Machiavelli Discord ii. 17 "se tu difendi una terra grande e che tu abbia comoditi di ritirarti, sono nondimeno senza 139 15 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 473 10. comparazione piti utili le artiglierie a chi fe di fuori che non a chi fe dentro . . . Perehfe se il nimico ti giunge addosso e abbia un poco di vantaggio del paese . . . e trovisi piii alto di te, o che nell' arrivar suo tu non abbi ancor fatti i tuoi argini e copertoti bene con quelli, subito e senza che tu abbi alcun rimedio ti disalloggia e sei forzato uscire delle fortezze tue e venire alia zuffa " ; ii. 28. Discord i. 4 "e se Eilcimo dicesse . . ., dico . . ." ; i. 58 "e se alcuno mi allegasse la ingratitudine che . . ., rispondo . . ." (and of. Prmcvpe c. 3 extr.) ; ii. 29 ; Principe c. 8 "perchfe se si considerasse la virtu d' Agatocle ... e la grandezza del animo suo . . ., non si vede perche egli abbia ad esser tenuto inferiore a qual si sia eccellentissimo Capitano"; c. 11 ; Bibbiena La Galcmdria iii. 7 " questa cosa non si sapri giammai, e se pur si dovesse sapere, egli fe meglio . . ." ; Aretino La Cortigioma: Prol. "se io credessi oreparci di disagio, la voglio udire"; i. 7 ; iii. 6 ; 7; Alfleri Filippo i. 2 "e s' anco I pur tu I'osassi, a te sconviensi " ; iii. 5 ; Conginira de' Pazzi i. 1 " ma, se pur nato da nuU' altro io fossi, | marito qui securamente e padre | uomo esser puo ? " V. I. Tirso de Molina El burlador de Sevilla ii. 4 " si di mi | algo hubiereis menester, | aqui espada y brazo estd." 11. (J3) The past indicative. 12. Greene Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay p. 178 6 "if but a third were added to these two, | they did surpass those gorgeous images, | that . . ." ; Shaksp. Taming of the Shrew iv. 1 "the meat was well, if you were so con- tented " ; Warren Biax'y of a Late Physician 2nd series p. 59 " her constitution had evidently been dreadfully shattered . . . The least shock, the least agitation of her exquisitely excitable feelings might bring on a second fit of blood-spitting, and then all was over." 13. Schiller Ma/ria Stuart ii. 9 "sie mag wohl vor der Zeit gealtert haben, | ja, und was ihre Krankung bittrer machte, | das ware dich als Braut zu sehn " ; iv. 6 "trotz eurer Spiirkunst war Maria Stuart | noch heute frei, wenn ich es nicht verhindert." 14. Occasionally too we find the apodosis in such sentences in the form of an imperative ; e.g. 15. Philips Gider bk. i. "but if ... | ... an happy soil should be withheld ; . • . think it not | beneath thy toil." — the past indica- tive : -the imperative; 474 GREEK AND LATIN 139 16 16. 17. Louvet Faublas ii. p. 485 " il doit . . . vous arriver . . . un paquet . . . qui changera probablement les dispositions de M. de Belcour. Si pourtant votre p^re s'obstinait toujours k vous emmener, mandez-le moi tout de suite." Aretino La Cortigiana: Prol. "se voi vedessi uscire i per- sonaggi piu di cinque volte in scena, non ve ne ridete." Macliiav. Disc. . 17. liedundant in- sertion of the negative ; — ^m various languages, e.g. -Italian. 18. The first passage cited above in para. 9 of this note, that from Machiavelli's Discorsi ii. 1 7 — '' se tu difendi una terra grande e che tu abbia comodit^ di ritirarti, sono nondimeno senza comparazione piti utili le artiglierie a chi k di fuori che non a chi h dentro " — invites a few remarks on its closing words. 19. Note, then, in such sentences, the insertion in Italian, where we in good English should omit it, of the negative. " If you have to defend," means Machiavelli, " a large tract of country, and it should so happen that you have the means of withdrawing, nevertheless vidthout comparison is artillery more useful to the party without than to the party within " ; but he says, as a Scotchman or a provincial Englishman or ill-educated Londoner might do, " more useful to the party without nm- to the party within." "A vulgar phrase," says Mr. Key, Lat. Gr. § 1286 note, "is generally an old one " ; and the Scotchman or in England the yokel or cockney who should use "nor" in such a case for "than" has at least a "method in his madness." If we say that "A is better than B," we mean that "Among good things A is in a prominent position and that B is not in one equally prominent." In other words, in the idea which follows the " than " a negative is implied. We in good English leave it so ; but the express insertion of the negative is not wrong, but only — with us — unconventional. Other languages are not so shy of the insertion. Thus 20. In Italian the express insertion of the negative in such cases is so common, that it would seem somewhat difficult to say which, as between its insertion and its omission, is the more normal use. Of its insertion, take as examples Petrarca In Vit. di Laura: Gamzon. 2 "piii devota che non sole"; id. ib. 12 "duolmene forte assai piti oh' i' non mostro " ; Boccaccio Becamerone iii. 9 " per che speriamo che molto piii lieta vita con lei avrete, che con una dama di ' piu alto legnaggio non avreste " ; Machiavelli Mandragola ii. 3 " un gran valentuomo. 8. Piti che voi non dite " : 1st. '39 20 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 475 Fiorent. iv. p. 143 "queste calunnie . . . mossero . . . 1' . . . animo suo piu che a un grave uomo non si oonveniva " ; iv. p. 145 ; vii. pp. 245 extr., 247 ; viii. pp. 286, 287 med., 288, 295 extr., 297, 298, 318 ; Principe c. 25 extr. "io giudico ben questo, ohe sia meglio essere impetuoso che non rispettivo, per chfe la fortuna k donna, ed fe necessario volendola tener sotto, batterla e urtarla; e si vede che la si lascia piu vincere da questi cbe non da quelli che freddamente procedono"; Discorsi i. 11 "quelli cittadini temevano piu assai rompere il giuramento che non le leggi, come coloro che stimavano piu la potenza di Dio che non queUa de li uomini"; ii. 20; iii. 9; Bibbiena La GaUnAria i. 2 " pill saviamente 1' ho consigUato io sempre, che tu fatto non hai"; i. 3 ; ii. 6 (bis); v. 12; Ariosto La Lena : Prolog. 12 "parle che, . . . | . . . abbia d'aver piii grazia, I che non ebbe I'altro anno " ; v. 1 ; Aretino II Marescalco i. 4 " egli ti tratta meglio, che tu non meriti " ; i. 6 ; ii. 5 ; 7 ; V. 2 ; La Gortigiana : Prolog. " si vive d' un' altra maniera a Roma, che non si vivea in Atene" : i. 17 ; 21 ; ii. 4; 10 ; 11 ; 14; iii. 7 ; 9 ; iv. 1 ; 13 ; ia Talanta i. 2 " Cupido perderia piii tempo in tentar di fermargli, che non gettano gli Alchimisti drieto a la congelazione d'esso " ; i. 14; ii. 10 ; 12 ; iv. 13 ; v. 1 ; Epilog.; II Lasca Le Gene (ed. Milan 1810) : Introduz. p. 64 "giu a terreno sono tante camere fornite, che molti Tpih. che voi non sete, vi allog- gerebbero agiamente"; i. 1 p. 77 ; 2 p. 87 ; 6 p. 135; 10 p. 175 ; Oasa Sopra il Fame v. 152 "gli ha piti mani- fattura che non pare" ; Goldoni II Bwrbero benefico i. 12 " ella m' ha creduto piu ricco che non Io era " ; Alfleri Filippo i. 3 " piu che non credi, il re sa il ver ; Io abborre I piii ch' ei nol sa " ; ii. 2 ; iv. 1 ; 5 ; Saul. i. 2 " m'ami, e piii che non merto " ; Gongiv/ra de' Pawi iv. 6 " presto, piu ch' io non 1' era, e a piu vendetta, | voi noi trovate " ; ii. 1 ; iii. 2 ; V. 1. Of its omission Bibbiena La Gaktndria : Prolog. " le cose moderns e nuove dilettano sempre e piacciono piu che le antiche e le vecchie" . . . "bene h di si inimico, chi 1' altrui lingua stima piii che la sua propria " ; i. 1 (bis) ; 2 (ter) ; ii. 1 ; 22 ; iv. 6 ; Aretino H Ma/rescalco iv. 3 "son piu facili le vie che gli fanno perdere, che quelle ohe gU fanno trovare " ; La Talanta i. 6 "non si dee stimar pi{i cinquanta scudi, ch' ella vi cost6, che la baja del perderia " ; ii. 7 (bis) ; iii. 10; 13; iv. 17; v. 8 ; 22. Of, at once, its insertion and omission, the following : — Bibbiena La Oalandria i. 2 " e' mi sforza ad amare questa nobil 476 GREEK AND LATIN '39 20 donna piti che me stesso . . . come in una donna fe grandissimo senno il guardarsi dall' amore di maggior uomo che ella non e, cosi h gran valore negli uomini di amare donne di piii alto lignaggio che essi non sono"; iii. 12 " ella mi fa piti carezze, e meglio mi bacia, che tu non fai. Ella mi place piti che la zuppa del vin dolce : e luce piti che la Stella Diana ; e ha piu magnificenza che la quinta- decima : ed h piii astuta che la Fata Morgana " ; Aietino La Oortigiana v. 15 "si mangia sopra una tovaglia di piii colori che non h U grembiale de i dipintori, e se non che non h onesto, direi che fosse di piii colori che le pezze che dipingono le donne, quando elle hanno il mal che Dio dia a' tineUi." -Spanish. 21. In Spanish we have, on the one hand, Cervantes Novel. Ej. i. 155 M amante liberal "me socorri6 la Ventura con un remedio, que fuera mejor haber dexado alii la vida, que no restaurandola por tan no pensado camino, venir A perderla cada hora mil y mil veces" ; 189 "tambien le conozco, respondi6 Leonisa, y podr^ decir mas por mi mal que no d Ricardo"; iii. 126 La Senora Gornelia "las infamias mejor es que se presuman y sospeohen, que no que se sepan de cierto y distintamente " ; 151 "alborot6se de nuevo D. Antonio, y mas quisiera que no hubiera parecido Cornelia (que sin duda pens6 que era la que el page tenia escondida), que no que la hallaran en tal lugar " ; and on the other, Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. Hi La Senora Gornelia "entregu^me de toda mi voluntad A la suya por intercesion de una criada mia, mas blanda d las dddivas y promesas del duque, que lo que debia & la confianza que de su fidelidad mi hermano hacia " ; iii. 303 Los Perros de Mahudes " digo que tienes razon, Cipion hermano, y que eres mas discreto de lo que pensaba" ; Sarmiento Ohras Posth. p. 323 (cited by Bouterwek Portuguese Literatwre bk. i.) " el cancionero Portuguez contiene muchisimos mas poetas que el Cas- tellano." -Portuguese. 22. In Portuguese we have no negative in Os livros de Linhagens iii. 21. 17. p. 189 (in PortugaKae Monument. Historic. Lisbon 1856-61) " desemperasti mens filhos que me escusauam nas fazendas que eram ii melhores que mim" ; iv. 21 p. 275 " nom me as tu amor pois daqui leuaste Artiga que mais pregas que mim"; p. 276 "este homem rrepemdido he de seu peccado, mais ey eu errado a elle que eUe a mym, gram torto faria em o matar pois se 139 23 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 477 pooem em meu poder" ; p. 276 "mataste aquelle mouro que era melhor que ti" ; Camoens Os Lus. v. 63. 1 "as mulheres queimadas vem em cima | dos vagarosos bois, alii sentadas, I animaes que elles tern em mais eatima, | que todo o outro gado das manadas " ; ix. 93. 7 " melhor he merece-los sem OS ter, I que possui-los sem os merecer." 23. In French we have a negative in —French. Gent Nouvelles nouvelles xx. p. 88 (ed. Paris 1885) "nostre Champenois . . . devint ung pou plus gentil compaignon qu'il n'estoit par avant"; Ixiii. p. 287; Ixxvii. p. 333; xcv. p. 388 ; Rabelais Pantagr. ii. : Prolog, "il y a plus de fruict que par adventure ne pensent un tas de gros talvassiers" . . . " il en a est^ plus vendu par les imprimeurs en deux mois, qu'il ne sera achet6 de Bibles de neuf ans " ; Beine de Navarre Heplam&on i. 10 p. 55 (ed. Paris, Stereot.) "il ^pousa celle dent il ^toit plus aim6 qu'il n'aimoit" . .• . "qu'elle aimoit plus que nuUe autre"; ii. 12 pp. 92, 96; v. 45 p. 339; Montaigne Essais ii. 8 p. 216 a (ed. Paris 1834) "je le hais un peu plus par complexion, que je ne I'accuse par disoours" ; iii. 5 pp. 504 a, 521 h ; Brantome Da/m. Gall. i. p. 274 a "si I'on ne s'asseure que d'une seule ancre en son navire, venant k se decrooher, aysement on le perd, et mesmes quand I'on est en pleine mer et en une tempeste, qui est plus subjecte aux orages et vagues tempes- tueuses que non en une caline ou en un port" ; ii. p. 290 a ; iv. p. 321 b ; vi. pp. 407 b, 417 b, 418 a; viii. p. 430 a, b ; Fontenay-Mareuil M^moires i. p. 46 (in Petitot Gollect. des M^., Paris 1819-26) "ce grand Roy, qui estoit en plus de consideration dans le monde que pas un de ses pr^deoesseurs n'avoit est6 depuis Charlesmagne, . . . trouva . . ." ; Racine B&irdce i. 4 " je pars plus amoureux que je ne fus jamais " ; Mithridate ii. 4 ; La Bruyfere Garact. iv. " I'on n'est pas plus mattre de toujours aimer qu'on ne I'a 6t& de ne pas aimer " ; Voltaire Oandide c. 19 "ils etaient encouragfe par I'id^e de se voir possesseurs de plus de tresors que I'Asie, I'Europe et I'Afriqiie n'en pouvaient rassembler" . . . "il nous reste enoor deux moutons avec plus de tr&or que n'en aura jamais . le Roi d'Espagne " ; Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. ix. " encore plus faux et dangereux, qu'il n'est aimable et s^duisant " ; X. ; Ii. extr. ; Ivii. ; Ixxiv. ; but no negative in Cent Nouvelles nowvelles c. p. 408 " il m'est trop plus conven- able vivre que morir " ; Rabelais Gargantua i. 6 " aime beaucoup mieulx ouir telz propos de I'Bvangile, et mieulx La vie de Sainte m'en trouve que de ouir la vie de Sainte Marguarite [as to Marguarite. 478 GREEK AND LATIN i39 23 which, by the way, see the Prologue to the 2nd book of Pantagruel] ou quelque autre capharderie " ; i. 1 ; 2; 36; 39 ; 45 ; Pomtagrml ii. 10 "en toutes compagnies il y a plus de folz que de sages, et la plus grande partie surmonte tousjours la meilleure" ; iL 34 ; Reine de Navarre Heptam. ii. 11 p. 87 "les bonnes gens de village . . . avoient tels prMicateurs en plus grande r^v&ence que ceux qui leur prechoient purement et simplement le saint Evangile " ; ii. 12. pp. 89, 93, 95 ; v. 45 p. 329 ; 47 pp. 339, 340 ; Montaigne Essais iii. 5 p. 497 h "je ne veois point de mariages qui faillent plus tost . . . que ceux qui s'ache- minent . . ."; p. 519 a; J. de la Jess6 (cited by Burgaud des Marets and Eathery on Rabelais, Pantagr. ii. Prol. supra cit.) " tenant ma boutique au palais, | en moins de neuf ou dix journees | j'ai vendu plus de Rabelais, | que de Bibles en vingt ann^es" ; Molifere Les Amants magnifiques ii. 1 "je ne crois pas qu'on puisae mieux danser qu'ils dansent" ; Tartuffe v. 4 " on n'en peut pas user mieux que je fais " ; Marivaux Les Sincires sc. 1 " voulez-vous qu'il parle de vous en meilleuies termes que de son ami ? " Voltaire Candide c. 17 "voili pourtant . . . un pays qui vaut mieux que la Westphalie" ; cc. 27. 28. We have both in Montaigne Essais iii. 5 (p. 504 b) "confessons le vray, il n'en est gueres d'entre nous, qui ne oraigne plus la honte qui luy vient des vices de sa femme, que des siens ; qui ne se soigne plus (charity esmerveillable !) de la conscience de sa bonne espouse, que de la sienne propre ; qui n'aimast mieulx estre voleur et sacrilege, et que sa femme feust meurtriere et heretique, que si elle n'estoit plus chaste que son mary : inique estimation de vices ! Nous et elles sommes capables de miUe corruptions plus dommageables et desnaturees, que n'est la lascifvete ; mais nous faisons et poisons les vices, non selon nature, mais selon nostre interest; par oh ils prennent tant de formes ineguales. L'aspret6 de nos decrets rend I'application des femmes k ce vice, plus aspre et vicieuse que ne porte sa condition, et I'engage k des suittes pires que n'est leur cause : elles offriront volontiers d'aller au palais querir du gain, et k la guerre, de la reputation, plustost que d'avoir, au milieu de l'oisifvet6 et des delices, k faire une si difficile garde " ; Scarron Roman Oomique i. 1 extr. " la mattresse du tripot, qui aimait la com^die plus que sermon ni vepres . . ." ; Voltaire Candide c. 23 " ces deux nations sont en guerre pour quelques arpens de neige vers le Canada et . . . eUes d^pensent pour cette beUe guerre plus que tout le Canada ne vaut. De vous dire precis^ment s'il y a 139 24 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 479 i) oil in plus de gens k lier dans un pays que dans un autre, c'est ce que mes faibles lumiferes ne me permettent pas." 24. The writer has failed to notice any instance of the — Portuguese, insertion of the negative in Portuguese. Nor — oddly enough^does it seem to have been ever inserted —Latin, in Latin, the very language to which all these southern languages owed so much. But fiRXXov fj ov is reasonably common in Greek : e.g. m" Greek. Thuc. ii. 62. 3 (a negative sentence) o^8' eiKoi x<''^E''''i'S 4>^p£tv avT(i)V //laAXov ■^ ov ktjttwv koI J-yKaAAwTrtcr/ia irXovTOV irphi ravrriv vofiicravTa^ oXiyuiprjcrai : iii. 36. 3 (an affirma- tive sentence) koX ry hrrepalq. p,iTa,voia, tls evdvi ■^v avrois Kot dvaXoyixr/xb's li/Mv rh ySouAevjua Kal fi,kya. kyviacrdai, TToXiv oXrjv Sia(j>6eipoiL p^iXXov rj ov Toiis alriovs. See the notes of Dr. Arnold and Mr. Shilleto on the former passage; also Buttmann Excurs. xi. ad Demosth. Mid. (pp. 142- 146 ed. 1833). Mr. Shilleto, in the course of his note, quotes two German So in German ; examples from the opening scene of Schiller's Don Carlos, which — more fully transcribed — ^run thus : (Schiller Ddn Gwrlos) i. 1 " doch hab' ich immer sagen horen, dass I Geberdenspaher und Geschichtentrager | des Uebels melir auf dieser Welt gethan, | als Gift und Dolch in Mbrder's Hand nicht konnten " ; ih. " ich weiss, dass . . I dass Konig PHlipp seinen einz'gen Sohn | an seiner Knechte schlechtesten verkaufte, | und jede von mir aufgefangene Sylbe | dem Hinterbringer furstlicher bezahlt, I als er noch keine gute That bezahlte." And we find the construction also in Scotch : e.g. — ScBtch ; NicoU Diary p. 13 (ed. Edinb. 1836 — Bannatyne Club) under date May 1650 "to be schoirt, nothing wes heir deficient to honour his pure careage, moir beseiming a brydegrome nor a criminal going to the gallowes " ; Epitaph on Sir John the Grahame (in Sir Walter Scott's Tales of a Oramdfather c. 7 note) "ane better knight not to the world was lent | nor was gude Grame of truth and hardiment " ; and in vulgar English : e.g. George Eliot Mill on the Floss i. c. 2 " he's had a fine sight more schoolin' nor / ever got" ; ib. " Lucy takes more after me nor my own child does " ; vi. c. 4 " I've got more brains nor I know what to do wi' " ; and passim. and vulgar English. 480 GREEK AND LATIN 13925 Express inser- tion of implied negative : after — (o) words ex- pressing "other," "otherwise" ; Dem. Mid. p. 537. 4. (|3) a superlative ; 25. Other instances of the express insertion of an implied negative are 26. (a) after words expressing "other," "otherwise": e.g. Greek — Dem. Mid. p. 537. 4 et to'ivvv tis vfiStv . . . aAAus Trtos «X" rijv o/jyijr hn MeiStav r\ us oi [so the MSS., other than the corrected MS. Par. S ; see Mr. Shilleto'a note ahove referred to, and also Ms Preface to his edition of Dem. ie Vols. Leg."] Seov awov r^dvdvai, ovk 6p6o}^ ^'x^'- Italian — Boccaccio Decam. ix. 2 "in tutta altra guisa che fatto non avea, cominci6 a parlare"; II Lasca Le Gene ii. 2 (p. 210) " pareva . . . aentire altra gioia e conforto che . . . non era usata sentire." Spanish — Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. 116 La Senora Cornelia "envolvi6 la criatura en otros panos, que no los que tiene la que d vuestra puerta echdron"; iii. 269 Los Perros de Mahtcdes " hacer otras monerias, tan agenas de poder aprenderlas otro perro que no fuera yo." (E contra, Id. ih. i. 21 La Gitanilla "los ingenios de las Gitanas van por otro norte que los de las demas gentes, siempre se adelantan & sus aiios.") And so in Portuguese — Camoens Os Lms. ix. 89. 1 "que as nymphas do Oceano tao formosas | . . . | outra cousa nao he, que as deleitosas | honras, que a vida fazem sublimada." French — Eeine de Navarre Heptam. ii. 12 (p. 96) "vraiment, dit Guebron, je vous pensoia autre que vous ne dites, et que la vertu vous flit plus plaisante que [affirmatively] le plaisir " ; iii. 30 (p. 241) "nature . . . lui apprint une autre lefon que son docteur ne faisait"; v. 45 "le tapissier ... lui baiUa lea innocents d'autre fagon qu'il n'avoit dit k sa femme." 27. (J3) After a superlative : e.g. Camoens Os Lus. v. 81. 1 "e foi que de doenga crua e feia, | a mais que eu nunca vi, deaampararam | muitos a vida." But the usual construction after the superlative is the affirmative one ; as in 139 29 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 481 Os Uvros de Linhagens iii. 21. IV p. 187 "pelos muy grandes golpes que se ali faziam"; iv. 21 p. 275 "fallou com ho iffamte que sse deitassem a sao as aruores o mais emcuberta- mente que o fazer podesse." Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. p. 103 La Senoi;a GorneUa "tengo debaxo de Have y en mi aposento la mayor belleza que humanos ojos han visto." Boccaccio Decwm. iii. 3 " disse la maggior villania die mai ad uomo fosse detto " ; MachiaveUi Mandrag. iv. 9 " egli fe il piil bel garzonaccio cbe voi vedeste mai"; Bibbiena La Calandria i. 7 " io credo che '1 fatto tuo sia la piii sollazevol cosa, che si trova in Maremma" ; ii 9 ; iii 17 ; Aretino La Talanta i. 3 " fe il piii bel tempio che mai si facesse " ; iii. 11. Eabelais Oargantua i. 52 "la plus vraie perte du temps qu'il sceust, estoit de compter les heures " ; Pantagr. iii. 2 "c'estoit le meilleur petit et grand bon hommet, que oncques ceignit esp^e " ; Eeine de Navarre Heptam. ii. 12 (p. 91) "aurois tu bien le coeur de me suivre en un lieu, oh je me veux venger du plus grand ennemi que j'aie en ce monde?" v. 45 (p. 329); 47 (pp. 337, 338); Montaigne Essais ii. 5 (p. 207 6) "c'est le seul esvanouissement que i' aye senty iusques k cette heure"; ii. 37 (p. 447 a); Brant6me Domi. Gall. vi. p. 412 a "un pasquin . . . le plus scandaleux que j'ai point vu " ; Laclos Les liads. dang. : Lett. 4 "je vais vous confier le plus grand projet que j'aie jamais formd." 28. (y) After expressions of (7) Expressio^is 29. (a) Fear. (a) Fear. Eur. Iph. Tav/r. 1379 Seivbs yap kAvSwv &KeiXe vavv ( Trpos jrjv, (fto/Bos S' ■ijv &crTe //.yj rey^ai ttoSo,. Machiav. Mandrag. ii. 6 " ho paura che non sia mai coperta"; iv. 4 " temendo che non nasca qualche cosa " ; Bibbiena La Calandria i. 1 "temendo che tal fiamma non si coprisse " ; Ariosto La Lena iii. 9 " sto in timor che non gli tolgano | una mia botte, di che, etc." Molifere Tartvffe iv. 1 "je crains | que tout ce bien ne tombe en de m^chantes mains ; | qu'il ne trouve des gens qui, I'ayant en partage, | en fassent dans le monde un criminel usage, I et ne s'en servent pas, ainsi que j'ai dessein, | pour la gloire du ciel et le bien du prochain " ; Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 113 "k present que vous vous enflammez si vite et si moralement, j'aurois peur que vous ne devinsaiez subitement amoureux de votre vieUle tante, et que vous ne vous enterrassiez avec elle dans le tombeau oil vous vivez d&jk depuis si long-temps"; 127 "je crains 2 I 482 GREEK AND LATIN '39 29 qu'il ne me faille beaucoup de temps . . . avant de changer de sentiment." E contra, Rabelais Gargantua i. 33 "j'ay grand peur que toute ceste entreprise sera semblable k la farce du pot au laict." (6) Anxiety. 30. (b) Anxiety. Eiir. Androm. 643 tovto S' . . . \ e^evXa/3ovvTai /iij iXois T^vx^iv epi'V : Tbuc. iv. 40. 2 oTrurTovvTh re /uij eivat Tovis irapaSovTas rots redv^wo'iv oyuoious . . . Montesqnieu Lettres Persanes 106 "je tremble tonjours qu'on ne parvienne S, la fin S, decoiivrir quelque secret qiii fournisse une voie plus abrdgte pour faire p6rir les hommes, detruire les peuples et les nations enti&res." (c) Prevention. 31. (c) Prevention. Herod, i. 158 'Apia-ToSiKO'S . . . ectt^e fj,ri Troiijcrat ra-ura Kvfiaiov^: Thuciii. 6. 2 r^s [lev daXdcrcrrji fipyov fifj )(^prj(rdai toiis M.VTiX.rjvaLov^, ttJs Se y^s . . . Macbiav. 1st. Fiorent. iv. p. 149 "come potreste voi mai . . . ovviare cbe non ci ritornasse?" Ariosto La Lena iv. 4 "vietarmi tu | vuoi cbe non si eseguisca la licenzia, | cbe bo di levargU i pegni " ; II Lasca Le Gene i. 2 " pure il meglio cbe seppero si sforzavano di racconsolarlo, non potendo qualcbe volta tenerse di non ridere " ; ii. 2 (p. 211) " guardate a non m'impregnar mogliama ! " {d) Denial. 32. (d) Denial. Hei'od. iii. 66 e^apvos ^v jifj /jbkv aTroKTetvai S/iepSiv, k.t.X.: 99 dira/ovedyiievds otti juij /iev vo(ree(.v k.t.X.: Dem. Aphoh. i. p. 818. 22 ttms ovk . . . evpeOrjO-erat, . . . Xiav dvatSois p-rj Xa^etv e^apvovpevo^ ; Aretino II Marescalco iv. 5 " non nego cbe non ci sieno de le cattive." Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. 38 Las dos doncellas "no quiero ni puedo negaros, . . ., que vuestra sospecba no baya side verdadera." Compare in English. Spenser i?". Q. i. 1. 22. 3 "bis forces faile, ne can no lenger figbt " ; Lord Darcy v. Askmth Hobart 234 " it is generally true, tbat tbe lessee batb no power to change tbe nature of tbe tbing demised ; be cannot turn meadow into arable, nor . . ., nor . . ., nor . . ., nor . . ., nor may be not destroy or drive av^ay tbe stock or breed of anything" ; Defoe iJoxana pp. 25 ; 163; 278 " tbis is not all neither " ; 139 33 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 483 302; 304 ; 314; Moll Flamders p. 15 "you don't know that neither" ; 91. 33. (e) Doubt. («) Doubt. (i) Machiav. 1st. Fiorent. viii. p. 301 "quel Re dubitava che i Fiorentini in tanta sua necessity non si spiccassero da lui"; Aretino La Talanta: Argomento "i nostri compagni di dentro dubitano che voi che sete di fuori non capiate la cosa, che essi vengono ad esporvi " ; II Marescalco i. 1 2 " dubito che la Gatta non abbia mangiato la pemice, che trafugaste istamattina del piatto del signore " ; iv. 1 " dubitando che ciascuna che parla non parli di lui " ; V. 6 " sai tu ci6 che io dubito ? A. No. M. Ph. Che non faccia venir il Signore in collera con la sua ostinazione, e che per ci6 non lo cacci a le forche." Cent Nouv. nowv. c. (p. 421) "je mettray, s'il vous plaist, la fiance en vous, que jamais n'ay oii mettre en fr&res ne amis que j'aye, doubtant que faulte ne feissent touchant la jeusne"; Laclos Les liais. dang.: Lett. 131 "je ne doute meme pas que nous ne saohions assez 1' [sc. la soiree] embellir pour ne la voir finir qn'k regret." {2) E contra, Aiiosto La Lena iiL 2 "almen non avr6 dubbio | che '1 giudice alle fosse me li scortichi." Molifere Le Tartuffe: Preface "je doute qu'une si grande perfection soit dans les forces de la nature humaine" ; Marivaux Les Sinchres sc. 4 "un fat se doute toujours un peu qu'il I'est"; Voltaire Candide c. 24 ad fin. "je Bouhaite . . . qu'elle fasse un jour votre bonheur ; mais c'est de quoi je doute fort." (3) It may be remarked of dubito in Latin and its corre- Dubito, and its spondents in English, and in the languages more directly correspondents m dependent upon the Latin, that the primary signification is guages. simply that of the halting between two alternatives. "Quid dubitas ?" says Iris to Turnus in Virgil {Aen. ix. 12) " Nunc tempus equos, nunc poscere currus. | Rumpe moras omnes et turbata arripe castra." Just as in English, "Why, master mayor," says Hastings to the Mayor of York in Shakespeare (3 Hen. VI. iv. 7), "why stand you in a doubt? | open the gates ; we are King Henry's friends "; and in the next scene of the same play, " The doubt is that he will seduce the rest " is Exeter's reply to the King's suggestion that Edward's power in the field would not be able to encounter his. So " I doubt," says Bruce in Sir Walter Scott {Tales of a Grandfather c. 8), 484 GREEK AND LATIN i39 33 "that I have slain the Eed Comyn"; to which Kirkpatrick answers " Do you leave such a matter in doubt ? I will make it sicker ! " So there is only the notion of halting in such passages as Ter. Adelph. iv. 5. 57 hade dum dubitas, m&ses abieriint decern. Cic. p. Bosc. Amer. 31. 88 restat . . . ut boo dubitemus, uter potius Sex. Roscium occiderit. Verg. Aen. ix. 190 percipe porro, | quid dubitem, et quae nunc animo sententia surgat. (4) But the conclusion of the halting between two alter- natives is a decision against or in favour of one or other of the propositions submitted. And the words in question are most generally used now to express dissent from the proposition which follows them : so that .}=> I doubt-! ., , , %■, !• = I think that be will not coma I tnat be will comej (s) But this was not always so, and the words are constantly found also used to express assent to, and not dissent from, the proposition which follows them. So that I doubt-l ^, ^ , ?,i > = I tbink that be will come. \tn&t he will comej and practically " I doubt " = " I think," " I imagine." (6) The following are a few examples of this : — " D u b t"= Sbaksp. Merry Wives i. 4 " I doubt be be not well, that he 'tbink.' comes not borne" ; Much Ado v. 1 "bad we fought, I doubt we should have been too young for tbem " ; Mac- beth iv. 2 " I doubt some danger does approach you nearly " ; Troilus and Cressida i. 2 "I doubt be be hurt " ; K. John V. 6 " I doubt be will be dead or ere I come " ; K. Rich. II. iii. 4 "depress'd he is already, and depos'd I 'tis doubt he wiU be " ; Hamlet i. 2 " all is not well : | I doubt some foul play " ; Dekker ii. Honest Whore i. 1 p. 157 "I doubt then you have all those stinking breaths, I you might be aU smelt out " ; Head and Kirkman Eng- lish Rogue pt. ii. c. 1 9 " but she, doubting that we would sit up a nights after she was gone to bed . . ., she called her son to watch " ; Shirley Hyde Park iv. 3 " she must I accept, or I shall doubt we are not friends " ; Defoe Roxana pp. 78. 109 "bonester than I doubt I should have been, if . . ."; 248 ; Sedley Mulb. Garden iii. 2 "I doubt we are a little too free with our servants " ; Dryden 139 33 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 485 Wild Gallant iv. 1 " faith, I doubt I am past that noble sin " ; Lvmberham ii. 2 ; v. 1 (bis) ; Swift OulUoer's Tramels pt. ii. c. 8 "my answer was, that ... I doubted some authors less consulted truth than their own vanity or interest or the diversion of ignorant readers " ; Chester- field Letters to his Son 218 "your exterior air and carriage ... I doubt, are not the genteelest in the world"; Sheridan The Duenna iii. 7 "he's mad, I doubt " ; School for Scandal i. 2 " the worst of it is, I doubt I love her, or I should never bear all this " ; ii. 2 "it has led me into so many cursed rogueries that I doubt I shall be exposed at last " ; ii. 3 " 'tis a long time since we met — fifteen years, I doubt. Sir Oliver " ; George Eliot Mill on the Floss i. c. 3 " it'll turn to trouble, I doubt." (7) In the old legal case of Tenant v. Goldwin, before the Teimntv.Gold- Court of Queen's Bench in the third year of Queen Anne, in ''^™ = which Chief-Justice Holt delivered the judgment of the Court, there occurs, in Lord Raymond's verbatim report (2 Eaym. 2 Raym. 1093 ; 1089. 1093), the following passage : — " But if he had sold the vacant piece of ground and kept the house without reserving the benefit of the lights, the vendee might build against his house." In the non-verbatim report of this same judgment in the Modern Eeports (6 Mod. 311. 314) this passage appears thus : — 6 Mod. 314. " But if in that case he had sold the vacant ground without reserving the benefit of the lights, the Court doubted, in that case, that the vendee might build so as to stop the lights of the vendor, because he parted with the ground without reserving the benefit of the lights " : where "doubted" obviously means "thought," as the present writer nevertheless had occasion to point out, when arguing the case of Wheeldon v. Bwrotos (12 Ch. D. 31. 39), as leading counsel for the plaintiff, before Vice-Chancellor Bacon in 1878. (8) It is this use of "doubt" as equivalent to "think" "Doubt but." which renders admissible the use of " but " in such sentences as Shaksp. Mids. NigMs Dr. iv. 2 " and, most dear actors, eat no onions nor garlic, for we are to utter sweet breath : and I do not doubt but to hear them say, it is a sweet comedy " ; 2 Hen. IV. iv. 4 " both which we doubt not but your majesty I shall soon enjoy " ; 1 Henry VI. ii. 5 " and for those wrongs, those bitter injuries | which Somerset hath ofiFer'd to my house, | I doubt not but with honour to redress" ; 486 GREEK AND LATIN i39 33 3 Henry VI. iv. 7 "but being enter'd, | I doubt not, I, but we shall soon persuade | both him and all his brothers unto reason" ; K. Richard III. v. 2 " I doubt not but his friends will turn to us " ; Jul. Caesar iv. 2 " your master ... I . . hath given me some worthy cause to wish | things done, undone : but if he be at hand, | I shall be satisfied. P. I do not doubt | but that my noble master wiU appear | such as he is, full of regard and honour. | B. He is not doubted " [where we have the word used in both its senses] ; Job xii. 2, 3 " no doubt but ye are the people, and wisdom shall die with you. But I have understanding as well as you ; I am not inferior to you." DuHto quill. (9) Compare with this the use in Latin of guin — = " how sim- not," by way of origin — in such cases : e.g. Plaut. Aulid. ii. 1. 40 p6st mediam aetatem, qui mediam ddcit uxor^m domum, | si eam senex arnim praegnantem fortuitu fdcerit, I quid dubitas quin sit paratum nomen puero P6stumus? Ter. Andr. i. 2. 1 non diibiumst quin ux6rem nolit fUius ; Oic. p. Leg. Manil. p. 23. 68 quare nolite dubitare, quin huic uni credatis omnia, qui . . .; p. Flacc. 17. 40 quum vero is, quem nemo vestrum vidit unquam : nemo, qui mortalis esset, audivit ; tantum dicit, " Dedi " : dubitatis, judices, quin ab hoc ignotissumo Phryge nobilissumum civem vindicetis ? de Sen. 10. 31 dux ille Graeciae nusquam optat ut Ajacis similes habeat decern, at ut Nestoris : quod si acciderit, non dubitat quin brevi sit Troja peritura ; Caes. Bell. Gall. i. 3 ilhs probat . . . non esse dubium quin totius Galliae plurimum Helvetii possent; Liv. xxiv. 26 si quis Zoippo nuntiet interfectum Hieronymum ac liberataa Syracusas, cui dubium esse quin extemplo conscensurus sit navem atque in patriam rediturus ? xl. 56 quum in Thracia Perseus abesset, circumire Macedoniae urbes, prin- cipibusque Antigonum commendare : et si vita longior suppetisset, hand dubium fuit quin eum in possessione regni reUcturus fuerit. "Se douter," (10) Again, in French, we have as examples of se douter, "douter" = douter, used, in the sense of think, imagine, have an idea of, or the "tMnk." ,■■. —in French. "^®' .„,,.„ .. , , , Rabelais Pantagr. 11. 15 "regarde que la plaie est grande . . . Je me doubte que la plaie soit vieille " ; Marivaux Les Sindres sc. i. " je me doutais bien que je ne lui dtais pas indiflfdrent " ; sc. xvi "je doutais meme que vous m'aimassiez, et je r&istais k mon penchant pour vous " ; Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 76 "vous vous doutez Men, sans que je vous le dise, que la petite a r^pondu k Danceny" ; 113 "je ne parle pas de son 142 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 487 cceur, dont je me doute bien que vous ne vous souciez guere"; 140 "elle ne s'en [ = de son dtat] doutoit pas"; Balzac La Oomine Bette p. 225 "te doutes-tu d'etre pfere pour la seconde fois 1 " " vraiment, tu serais grosse ? " Miscellaneous cases of express 34. (/) In miscellaneous cases such as the following ; — (i.) Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. 25 Las dos doncellas "y aai por insertion of im- esto como por parecerle que aiin no habia cerrado la plied negative, fortuna de todo en todo las puertas & su remedio, queria dntes procurdrsele por todas las vias posibles, que no tomar venganza del agravio que de su mucba liviandad en 61 redundaba." Os livros de Linhagens iv. 21 (p. 275) "fallou com ho iffamte que . . . per nenhuma guisa nom sse abalassem atda que ouuissem a uoz do seu como " . . . (p. 276) " de mda ventura he ho homem que sse fia per nenhuma molher " . . . " alii morrerom . . . todos os mouros e mouras que estauam no currall, e nom ficou em essa villa de Gaya pedra com pedra que todo nom fosse em terra " . . . " eu sey quem he rrey Eamiro, e sey de gerto se o saluas de morte que Ihe nom podes escapar que a nom premdas delle." (ii.) Cervantes Novel. Ej. i. 151 El amante liberal "qual ellos queddron con mi vista, no lo s6, de mi ai decir que qued^ tal con la suya, que perdi la de mis ojos, y me quedd como estatua sin voz ni movimiento alguno." MoUfere Le Tartuffe v. 4 " un ordre de vider d'ici, vous et les votres, | mettre vos meubles hors, et faire place k d'autres, | sans ddlai ni remise." (iii.) Cervantes Novel. Ej. i. 118 El amante liberal "dntes que otra cosa dixesen ni preguntasen, manddron al judlo que, etc." 140. fiu^rjo-o/iat = (Homeric subjunctive for) /Au0ijo-a)/Xat. See 140. Horn. II. note 138. "• ^««- 141. Of. Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 395. 7 i^iLXrjs diroAot/trjv Kal 141. TrpodXrjs, el . . .: et ih. Mr. Shilleto. 142. 1. In a sentence like Xen. Symp. 8. 22 koX a-Kowtiiv S' 142.Xej1.Symp. av Tis evpoL ... the protasis is — in participial form — expressed, 8. 22. ■which in sentences like those in the Text is to be mentally- supplied. 2. i^Kot — perfect in meaning, if not in form. "Erfurdt Soph. Aj. 186 justly remarks," says Elmsley (on Soph. Aj. 278 in Mus. Grit. i. *<"■ 355), "that fjKia does not signify venio but veni." 488 GREEK AND LATIN 142 3 7(ip=" verily.' Enihi, nam. 3. yap would certainly be as well, if not better, rendered here by "verily"; which, or "soothly," or "truly," or "of course," or the like, Mr. ShiUeto (on Thuc. i. 17. 1 ; 25. 4 ; 120. 2 ; and Index in the same volume s.v.) suggests was the primary meaning of it in Greek, and of nam in Latin. Ace. Mr. Key Lat. Did. s.w. Enim ("akin to nam . . . nam having lost the e ") and Nam : to the former of which words Mr. Key assigns, as the primary meaning, the English " indeed," and to the latter the English " thus," or " for example " ; in each case relegating the meaning " for " to a secondary place in the use of the respective words. These two really great men and independent thinkers are thus in agreement upon the point in question : which fact should practically settle it. A modern de- preciation of Mr. Shilleto. Yet one has arisen, in the shape of a writer, who — for his own sake — shall be nameless, in the Classical Eeiiew (vi. 303) to " push them from their stools," and proclaim aloud the incom- petence of at least the former : " So did ShiUeto, and he explained yap as 'in fact' in both places. But" — can the present writer, who knew Mr. ShiUeto in the flesh, who was his pupil, and knew to the full not his modesty only, but his worth, believe his very eyes 1 — "probably no one would admit this use of yap in Attic " ! Is it possible ? What an idle dreamer poor " ShiUeto " must have been ! Why did he obtrude his officious meddling into the domain of classical literature, and not remain, wherein he was called, and there meditate at large upon the lessons to be drawn from the 1 2th Chapter of the First Book of Kings ? 143. Conditio- 143- !• This use of a conditional form of expression as a nal = practically, practical equivalent to one of absolute type is common in other absolnte form of j gg t^an Greek, expression — m o & ...,-. various languages. 2. Of it in Latin, examples may be found in the Text in the proper place. And, so far as other languages are concerned, take the following citations as additional to those contained in notes 146, 148, and 149 below : — -English. 3. " You could. " : " — not come soon enough,'' Lyly Alex, and Gampasp. v. 4. " I'd " : " — have your opinion, gentlemen," Buckingham Rehearsal iv. 1. " I should " : " — look upon faithfulness or unfaithfulness to it '43 1 4 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 489 as indicating . . ." C. Beard Unitarian Ch/ristimity p. 150, ed. Lond. 1881. " It should " : « — seem, he was safe," Prof. Blunt Sermon on the Late Duke of Wellington p. 9. " I would " : " - — wish thee reconcile the lords," Marlowe Edw. II. p. 189 5; " — not have thee sell thy substance," Dekker ii. Hon. Whore i. 1 ; " — wish you," Pletcher Captain iii. 3 ; " — the devil in a storm would carry him," v. 1 ; " — give my hand to be washed from," Beaum. and Fletch. Philaster i. 1. " Thou wouldest " : " — have done," OoUect for 20th Sunday after Trinity. " She would " : " — request to know," Shaksp. Rape of Lucrece V. 1283. " It would " : " ■ — seem," J. LI. Davies Social Questions p. 362 ; " — appear," Edinburgh Rev. vol. 166 p. 137. " Who would " : " — ^fain leave the world a little better than they found it, and, if they might, would see before they go the gray dawn in the East of a brighter and a happier day," C. Beard Unita/rian Christianity p. 154. "Who might": " — that favored person be?" 0. Wendell Holmes Autocrat of the Breakfast Table i. p. 5. 4. "Aimerais": "moi. Monsieur, j'aimerois le chevalier," Le —French. Sage Twrcaret ii. 3. "Aurais": "je n'aurais pas besoin de t'interroger. II me suffit de te voir ainsi," Guy de Maupassant Une vie c. 7. " Aurait " : " quelle phis grande absurdity qu'une fatality aveugle qui aurait produit des etres intelligents ? " Montes- quieu Esp. des Lois i. 1 ; " le mariage aurait done de grands charmes pour vous ? " Marivaux Le Jen de V Amour et du hasard i. 1; add Balzac La Cousine Bette pp. 9. 9 — ; 14. 4 — . "Auriez": "la nuit pass^e, avec qui I'auriez-vous passteV Abbd Provost Manon L'Escaut ; " auriez-vous commis quel- qu'imprudence 1 " Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 65 ; Lett. 126 ; Le Sage DiaM. Boit. cc. 4. 5. 11 ; Gviy de Maupassant Une vie c. 8 med. " Connaitrais " : " est-ce que tu connoitrois ma comtesse ? " Le Sage Turca/ret v. 8. " Gagerais " : " je gagerois que c'est un original," Le Sage D. B. c. 17. " Plairait " : " le gargon nous plait. Te plairait-il . . . k toil" Guy de Maupassant Une vie c. 4. " Pourriez " : " vous pourriez vous fier k un mis&able qui . . ." Le Sage D. B. c. 15. " Saurais " : " ce sein que je ne saurais voir," Molifere Le Ta/rtwffe iii. 2 ; "je ne saurois disputer, si I'on ne m'inter- rompt," Festin de Pierre iii. 1 ; "je ne saurois le concevoir," 490 GREEK AND LATIN i43 * Lacks Les liais. dang. : Lett. 152 ; add Eabelais Pantagr. ii. 21 ; Balzac La Cousine Bette p. 5. 4. " Saurait" : " un sentiment inddpendant, que la prudence pent faire dviter, mais qu'elle ne sauroit vaincre," Laclos Les liais. daTig. : Lett. 126 ; add 164 ; Le Sage Turcaret i. 6. " Sauraient " : " ce miracle de la nature . . . conserve une tristesse morteUe, que le temps et mon amour ne sauroient dissiper," Le Sage D. B. c. 15. "Serais": "me serois-je nui par ma conflance'?" Laclos Les liais. dang.: Lett. 77: " vraiment, tu serais grosse ? " Balzac La Cousine Bette p. 225. " Serait " : " vous ne m'en parlez pas : seroit-ce que vous n'en partagez plus le ddsir 1 " Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 80 ; add ib. Lett. 125 ; Le Sage D. B. cc. 4. 5. 10. 13. "Seriez": "seriez-vous par hasard . . . le dtoon qu'on appelle Lucifer 1 " Le Sage D. B. c. I ; " seriez-vous rdeUe- ment gudri du mal . . .1" Th. Gautier Mlk. de Maupin c. 16. "Viendroit" : " il d'arriver quelque malheur?" Le Sage D. B. c. 3; add ib. c. 5. " Voudrais " : " vous avez un moyen . . . en le recompensant. Le G. Je le voudrais souvent," Beaumarchais La Mire Coupable ii. 23 ; add Le Sage D. B.C. 4; Turcaret v. 9 ; Guy de Maupassant Une vie c. 10 init. -Italian. 5. "Armerebbe": "adanno vostro | or si armerebbe Roma. . .1" Alfieri Gongiura d£ Pazzi iv. 4. " Avresti " : " Madonna tale, averesti voi un pooo di soarlatto % " Sacobetti Novell. 1 ; Nota II nuov. rice. ii. 11. "Aviebbe": " — | forse il mio amor — 1 Ma no," Alfieri Filippo iv. 4. "Avreste": " — veduto il giojelliere?" Aretino E Marescalco iii. 4 ; Nota II nuov. rice. iii. 9. "Devreste": "voi devereste andar ballando per la strada, e andate piangendo," Aretino U Marescalco iv. 8. " Doverebbe " : " — oorrompersi ne' veccbi nel giudicare i tempi . . .," Macbiavell. Discors. ii. : Pref. " Dubitereste " : " — forse della veracity de' miei detti 1 " Nota It nuov. rice. iii. 11. " Faresti " : " — il meglio starti a casa," Aretino La Gortigiana iv. 11. "Fia": "obciel! fiaver?" Al&eri Merope iy. 1. " Meritereste " : " siete un pazzo, e meritereste la sorte che vi sta preparata," Nota L'a/m/malato per Immaginazione ii. 7 extr. " Opporrebbe " : " e qual consiglio | si opporrebbe a un tal re?" Al&eii Filippo iv. 5. "Parebbe": '' cbe bestemmia. Vi parebbe zibetto," Aretino n Ma/rescalco iv. 3. 143 « 6 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 491 " Piacerebbe " : " che ti pare . . . ? i. Mi piacerebbe a dirvela," Nota II Fihsofo Celibe ii. 5. " Saprei " : " mio fratello dorme ancora ? D. Non saprei," Nota L'ammal. per vnvmag. i. 2 ; ii. 3 (bis) ; 5 ; v. b ; II nuov. rice. i. 5 ; iv. 8. " Sapreste " : " 0, o, Signore, saprestemi voi dire a che fine sia fatto un cosi pomposo apparato," Aretino La Gortigiana : Prol. " Saresti " : " — tu mai imbriaco 1 " Bibbiena La Calamdria v. 3 ; " — tu mai U guadagnator de la taglia ? " Aretino La Talanta v. 15; "tu, padre, | di cotant' opra or tu minor saresti?" Alfieri Gongiura de^ Pazzi iii. 2. " Sarebbe " : " meglio sarebbe | ritrarti, o re, nel padiglione," Alfieri Saul ii. 2 ; " come ? Sarebbe egli quel gioviue che e venuto con voi?" Nota // Filos. Gel. iii. 13 ; La Vedov. in solit. ii 1 ; 7Z nuov. rice. ii. 2. " Sareste " : '' — ^forse innamorato di madamigella Celestina,'' Nota n Filosqfo Celibe iii. 8. " Tenteresti " : "oimb! che parli ? | tenteresti tu forse . . ," Alfieri Gongiura de' Pazm i. 3. " Vorrei " : Nota L'ammal. per irnvmag. i. 1 (bis) ; 1 1 ; J7 nuov. rice. i. 6 (bis) ; iii. 2 ; iZ Filos. Gel. i. 3 ; " — cantar quel memorando sdegno | ch' . . .," Tassoni La Secchia Bapita i. 1. 1. [E contra, Ariosto Orl. Fwr. i. 1. 1 "le donne, i cavalier, I'arme, gli amori, | le cortesie, I'audaci imprese io canto, | che . . ." ; and Tasso Oerus. Lib. i. 1. 1 "canto I'arme pietose, e '1 Oapitano | che . . ."] " Vorrebbe " : " il cuore mi rimprovera, e non vorrebbe ch' . . .," Nota II nuov. rice. i. 10 ; L'am/mal. per immag. i. 5. "Vorreste": Nota II nuov. rice. iii. 2 ; "vorreste comandare in casa mia ? " ib. iv. 8. " Vorrebbero " : " — riverirla," Nota II nuov. rice. iv. 5. 6. " Habria " : " madre i por ventura habria | quien nos diese | —Spanish, pan por esto 1 " Cervantes Nwmaneia iii. 2. " Quisiera " : " — ^haberoa heoho tantas buenas obras, que os obligara d no negarme qualquiera cosa que pudiera 6 quisiera pediros " : followed at a short interval by the present in- dicative "quiero tambien que . . . sepais que . . .," Cer- vantes Nov. Fj. iii. p. 36 Las dos done. ; " — yo . . . apar- tarme de este pecado, y para ello he hecho mis diligencias," id. ib. p. 286 Los perros de Mah. ; add p. 288 (bis). " Seria " : " l dormis, senor ? y no seria malo que durmidsedes, porque . . .," id. ib. iii. p. 21 Las dos done.; "jluego casose vm ? ... si, senor, respondio Campuzano. Seria por amores, dixo Peralta," id. ib. p. 112 Fl easam. engam. " Serlan " : " quando Uegdron al puerto serian las ooho de la manana," id. ib. i. p. 235 Fl am. lib. 492 GREEK AND LATIK 1436 — German. " Tendria " : " resolvi^ron que tendria de diez y seis & diez y siete afios," id. ib. iii. p. 5 Las dos done. ; " tendria D. Antonio Itasta veinte y qiiatro anos, y D. Juan no pasaba de veinte y seis," id. ib. p. 90 La Sen. Gornelia. " Hattest " : " ich hab's gesagt . . . \ D. Bu hattest es gesagt ? Du bast mir niobts | gesagt," Scbiller Maria Stuart iv. 11. " Hattet " : " trotz eurer Spiirkunst war Maria Stuart | nocb beute frei, wenn icb es niobt verbindert. | B. Ibr hattet — L. Ich, my Lord," Schiller ubi supra iv. 6. 'Wird' " es wird doch nichts Boses dahinter steoken ! " Scbiller Wallemteln's Lager 11. Dem. Mid. p. 8. In such a passage as Dem. Mid. p. 575. 24 we have the 575. 24. conditional form and the absolute form, in Greek, side by side : iyui S' . . . oilre (^vyoijj, av ovt anrapvovfj-ai todto Tovvofia. 144. Thuc. 102. 8. diatra. 144. 1. This is, of course, a reported speech. Alcmaeon's own words would have been iKavrj av Ke^^axr/ieviy eorj 8tatTa = "on inquiry, sufficient would | have been"; "if I were to inquire, I should find that sufficient had been." 2. SCana = "place of abode," as in Ar. Eccl. 674. 145. 1. 1. Thuc.viii. 145. This again is a reported form of expression: rJTria-rovv . . . fj.r] oiSro) ye av TracrcrvSl SietfiOdpOai. The direct speech would have been ov^ ovtw ye av SiecjiOap- fieua th) = " not to this extent at any rate would utter destruction I have come upon us " ; " not to this extent wotdd it appear that it has-come, sc. if we were to inquire." Arnold takes the phrase to mean "'they did not believe that it could have been so utterly destroyed,' i.e. that it would have been so destroyed under any conceivable circumstances." This is equivalent to saying that the direct speech would have been ovx ovTU) ye av Ste(j)6apTo. But for such a meaning as Arnold evolves we should have rather expected to find Siecj>9a.pr] — there being no reason to insist upon the "remaining effect," which is latent in the use of the perfect tense ; and then the reported form would have been /xr) ovt(o ye av iraaa-vSl Si.a(f>6apTjvai. 146. Further examples of con- ditional = practi- cally, absolute form of expression — in various lan- -English. 146. So 1. /SovXaifji-qv av : — dXX' oppaSS, Plat. JSuthyphr. p. 3 A. av TrvdoLp.-qv : Kal p,rjv . . . ecrT6 y' a, ojSews av 7rv6oijj.r]v 'IiTTTiov &v vvv Srj e'Aeye, Hipp. Min. p. 363 A. 2. " Had" : " I bad rather than a thousand pound, | I had a heart but half so light as yours," Dekk. Shoemak HolidoA/ p. 43. 146 4 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 493 " Should " : "I know | the voice ill-boding and tlie solemn sound. I "What should I do? or whither turn?" Philips Splendid Shilling 40 ; "your plan ... is quite of a different kind ... I should think it ought to be very useful," F. D. Maurice Letter to Hare (Maurice's Life i. 309) ; " in him there is a logical rotundity, which I should wish for," Letter to Strachey {ib. i. 351). " It should not become us ... to suffer this time to pass forth without . . .," Homily for Good Friday p. 347 ; "it should seem a brother of our order," Dryden Spa/n. Friar iii. 1 ; "to aid thy mind's development . . ., | this, it should seem, was not reserved for me," Byron Ghilde Harold iii. 116. " Would " : " though I must confess, . . . | . . . yet I would have you | think . . ,," Fletcher Contain iii. 4 ; " I would not have thee sell thy substance | . . .," Dekker ii. Hon. Whore i. p. 1 1 3 ; " but yet I would not have you careless without watching," Homily on Matri- mony p. 426 ; " I would learn the cause why Torrismond I . . .," Dryden Span. Friar ii. 2 ; "and indeed I would hope that a small importunity would be sufficient to prevail with them, when they see . . .," Wheatley Common Prayer Book p. vii. (ed. Oxon. 1839). " My mistress would desire you, sir, to follow,'' Fletcher Captain v. 5 ; " madam, your mother would speak with you," Dryden Limberham iii. 1 (of. Dekker i. Hon. Whore sc. 10). "I would hope — ," Shirley Lady of PI. ii. 2 ; "We would willingly hope that several of Johnstone's other characters . . . are . . . considerably over-charged," Sir Walter Scott in Ballantyne's British Novelists iv. p. xxxv. "The men, who for this earthly life would claim | well nigh the whole . . ., | . . . might be driven | ... to profitable shame," Trench Poems : " At Brnneclcen." " Voudrois": "je voudrois couler sur une rivifere tranquiUe: je suis entraind par un torrent," Montesq. Esp. des Lois XX. 1. " Vorrei " : " nol vorrei dire, e non posso tacerlo," Aretino La Talanta iv. 6 (cf. II Marescalco v. 6) ; " anch' io pace vorrei ; | ma, con infamia, no . . . Ti acqueta ; anch' io vo' pace," Alfieri Congiura de' Pam i. 3; "per compiacervi far6 quel che volete ... ma non vorrei che mio nipote I'avesse a male," Nota II Filosofo Celibe iii. 3. " Vorresti " : " e che vorresti 1 " Aretino La Talanta iii. 5. " Vorebbono " : " la Lena h simile | all' altre donne, che tutte vorebbono | sentirsi dietro la coda, e disprezzano | . . -," Ariosto La Lena: Prol. 17. -French. — Italian. 494 GREEK AND LATIN 146a — xcvi o-xovii 146a. 146a. Compare Shirley The Lady of Pkamre iv. 2 extr. " what should this mean ? This is no jealousy, | or she believes I counter- feit." 147. "Could" 147 = practioally 1, •'can." So iu Italian. So, again, " Could" : " I could wish I had been anything | rather than what I am," Fletcher Captain ii. 1 ; " now could I kiss him. I. If you long for kicking, | you're best ^"^ ■= come kiss me : do not though, I'd wish you," iii. 3 ; " if you like it, I could make a shift, perhaps, to show you . . .," Buckingham Rehearsal ii. 2 ; " I could wish he would have declined . . .," Dryden Defence of Essay on^ Dram. Poesy: Works ii. 277, ed. (2) Edinb. 1821; "I cannot refuse the honour . . ., though I could wish . . ,," F. D. Maurice Letter to Trench {Life i. 192) ; "how much I feel your affectionate zeal in my cause . . ., I need and could not express," Letter to Hare (ih. i. 357); "I could say more : but it is wisest often to be most silent," Kingsley At Last : Dedication. '■ And who could dare to disavow his crime, | when . . .1" Dryden Span. Friar ii. 2. " ' I hate society ' . . . ' you could hardly have seen enough of society to speak with so much decision,' " Disraeli Lothair i. c. 5. "Potrei": " — resistere a una nuova gita . . .," Nota II nuov. rice. ii. 3 ; L'ammal. per immag. v. 7. " Potresti " : " ma s' io ti chieggio e bramo, | . . . | dura- mente negarmelo potresti ? " ™™ Alfieri Filippo i. 3. "Be better, best" Jiovio Note the use, in onr older writers, in sueb phrases, of the verb "tobe " )( "have better, in place of the — now more usual — verb " to have." best," in the older Instances are — writers. Dekker i. Bon. Wh. p. 72 " why, you're best go see " ; Return from, Par- nassus ii. : i. 2 = v. 300 "so slow an inventor that he were better betake himself to his old trade of bricklaying " ; Beaum. and Fletch. Philast. ii. 4 " if it be true, I that lady had been better have embrao'd | cureless diseases " ; Heywood Fair Maid of the Exch. p. 63 "thou hadst been better | run millions of miles bare- footed, than I thus by your coy disdain to have deluded me." We have both forms In Shirley : e.g. Witty Fair One ii. 2 "were I best to discover thus much, or reserve it to welcome home the old knight withal ? " Hyde Park i. 1 " I think we were best let him alone " ; Lady of Pleas, i. 2 "I were best | make you my governour." Lady of Pleas, i. 2 init. " you had best wrap all my chambers in wild Irish ! " Alfieri: his xcvil j. Note this last line — one of three words, like those in Aeschylus : Aeschyleanism. Prom. V. 207. 1005 ; Sept. c. Theb. 19. 29 ; Pers. 830 ; Oho. 275 ; Eum. 626; and even in Euripides : Iph. Aul. 492 ; Iph. Taur. 1375. 1389. 2. Alfieri's style is, indeed, often very Aeschylean. Witness such lines and phrases as the above, and others which will be found 148 2 — ^xoviia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 495 " Potrebbe " : " non si potrebbe dire," Aretino La Talanta iii. 12; "giS, il suo morir non nuooe | a te : potrebbe anzi la via del trono | ai figU . . . | sgombrar cosi," Alfieri F Hippo iv. 5. " Potreste " : " — ancora rivolger I'animo ad una villana . . A" Nota n nuov. rice. ii. 9. " Potria " : " non si potria dire," Aretino II Marescalco iii. 6. 147a. Gin-' av Svvat7*'?v =" neither could I"; firjT iiniaral[ir)V I47a. Soph. ^ni. (cf. Soph. Track. 582 KOKas Sc To'Ayiias jJ.rp-' kTn.o-TaiiJ.-qv lyu | /t^r' ^*^' iKfiAOonii) = " nor may I learn ! " Cf. Aeschin. c. Ctesiph. p. 71. 37 sqq. ttA^v ^ta? jroAews, ^s eyoj ovT av tovvojm. ei7rot/*t, /*5j6 al crvfjAf>opal TrapairXrjcrioi yivoivro avrri's /xijScvi t5v 'EA,Aijv(ov. And also Dem. de Chers. p. 106. 23 €yai Se dpatrvi /Jtev . . . ovt et/tt /iijre yevoiiJ.rjv, . . . 148. 1. The use of the past subjunctive with av as a 148. Past sub- practical substitute for the future indicative in Greek — as to junotdve with dv -which see also notes 4sb and 93. 3 above — ^is very common. fotare indicative.^ 2. Add as examples Aescb. Ag. 838; Eur. Sec. 1132 — with wHcb compare Or. 639, and contrast Ar. Nub. 143 (Xe^(o), both - being similar sentences — ; Eur. Suppl. 465 Xeyoifi av : Aesch. Ev/m. 887. 888 fi.ivoi.'S av .' . . av . . . kirippeTroi^ : Sopb. Aj. 88 fikvoip.' av: Dem. Mid. p. 576. 2 av etijv. Aescb. .^gi. 622 ircos S'ijr' av'. . . r-uxots;^"™* Swppl. 328 in his Filippo iii. 6 ; v. 1 ; Mirra iii. 2 ; Agam. i. 2 ; ii. 1 ; Or-esi. i. 2 ; iii. 5 ; iv. 2 ; 13 ; Merope ii. 1 ; iv. 3 ; v. 1 ; Gongimra de' Pazzi i. 1 ; iii. 3 ; iv. 2 ; iv. 6. 3. Lines of three words are not uncommon in Dante : e. g. Purgatorio canto ii. St. 23 ; xxvi. 46 ; Paradiso xiii. 20 ; xxiv. 51 ; xxviii. 40. 4. Nor in Camoens : e.g. Os iMdadas, i. 60. 1 ; 106. 4 ; iii. 96. 4 ; iv. 38. 4 ; 40. 4 ; 80. 1 ; 96. 3 ; v. 16. 3 ; 46. 2 ; 72. 3 ; vii. 43. 2 ; 49. 2 ; ix. 5. 5 ; 22. 7 ; 47. 6 ; 89. 5 ; 94. 7 ; 95. 5 ; a. 44. 4 ; 142. 1 ; 150. 3 ; to say nothing of lines which are practically of three words, such as i. 36. 8 ; 53. 6 ; 67. 5 ; 78. 2 ; 87. 2, 4 ; 90. 4 ; 92. 5 ; ii. 17. 1, 5 ; 30. 3 ; 34. 6 ; 44. 6 ; 46. 3 ; vi. 9. 4 ; ix. 4. 4. xcvila I. "How then would you succeed ?"=" how will you?" = "I wish that you could. " 2. With irfls S.V ; cf. the Latin uti-nam ; and qui ? in Plant. Cas. ii. 4. 1 qui ilium di omnes dea^que perdant ; Menaechm. 451=iii. 1. 6 qui ilium di omnes pdrdnint, qui . . . ; Ennius Teleph. 288 = 83 Miiller, qui illiim di deaeque mkgao mactassint malo (with which has been compared Bur. Teleph. Pr. 13 (Dind. =718 Nauok) KafcQs bXair' &v, which reading of the books Elmsley alters into dXohrjv and Dobree {Adv. ii. p. 186) into SKoiar'). 3. We have a practical wish expressed — By rCis dv ; with the past subjunctive, also in Soph. Oed. Tyr. 765 ; AJ. Three word lines in Dante : — in Camoens. irus Hi/ ; utina/in : qui : expressive of a wish. Soph. Aj. 387 496 GREEK AND LATIN 148 2 I'Sois av: Soph. Aj. 1051 av 6tVots : Ar-Nuh. 783 av 8i8a- ^aiij,-qv: 1467 av aSiK?jo-ai/ii : Thesm. 830 fiefJiAJ/aifieO' av : Aristot. 'A6rjv. iroA. c. 7 ov8' av eis tiiroi. And compare Guy de Maupassant Une vie c. 12 "faut que 5a soit comme 5a pourtant . . . Sans 5a dans quatre ans vous n'auriez plus un radis." Alfieri Filippo iv. 5 " e cM scoprirti | vorria ? — Chi sa ? fors' anco un di Filippo | . . il generoso ardire | . • • premiar potrebbe"; Congiura di^ Pazzi ii. 5 "iotutto | per la pace farei. Ma ..." The two forms 3. The two forms stand side by side in — for instance — side by side : j^^^ j^ ^^j^,_ gg^ ^^^_ . jjg^g^_ jj_ ^ ^ . j,^_ g^^^j_ ggg sqq.; Ar. Ach. 1196 sqq. ; Nub. 1416 sqq.; Thuc. iii. 38. 2 ; vi. 50. 1 ; Plat. Zegg. ii. p. 654 A sqq.; Bern, de Fals. Leg. p. 573. 10 sqq. And compare Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 83 " me ferez-vous un crime de ce nouvel amour ? blamerez-vous votre ouvrage ? vous reprocheriez-vous meme I'int^ret que vous pourriez y prendre 1" —and yet, on 4. On the other hand, the two forms retain each its own eachTt^'own pro^ proper and full signiiication, as they stand side by side, in in- per signification, direct form, in Ar. Rhet. ii. 5. Ar. Bhet. ii. 5. 18-22 avrol 6' oiirws e^ovTes dappaXioi ilfriv . . . orav In-ij^cipoijVTes, r] firjSev av iraOeiv fiyjSk Treicrea-Oai, ■)} Karopdwcreiv, otcovrat = " that they would not under any circumstances, nor wiU in fact, suffer." 149. Past sub- 149. 1. This use, again, of the past subjunctive with av as a junotive with fo practical substitute for the imperative in Greek is very common. = practically, the o a jj i imperative. 2. Add as an example Soph. El. 1491 \u>pOLS av ettro). 3. The two forms stand side by side in — for instance — Soph. Ant. 444 Kop.l^Ob's av . . .• \ 'iXoutiv ov8' Ipoi Tocroi/S a-)^o's, the av belongs to the following ^v — although thrown forward on the principles discussed above in note 23, and not (as Elmsley by placing a comma after Oavwv would seem to suggest) to Oaviiiv. Tr. 112 sqq. 4. Person's correction above referred to is in a note upon Soph. Trach. 112 SqC[. ttoXXo. yap &itt a.Kap.avro'S | ■^ Notou r) Bopia TiS I Kvp,aT iVpk'C TrovTif | fiavT iiriovra t iSoi, | ovto) . . .: where Porson proposed to fiU a deficient syllable by reading Kvpar av evp^'i — influenced possibly by a desire to get rid of iSoi unattended by av — which construction, however, we have seen to be legitimate: "one might possibly see." Erfurdt, who is followed by Dindorf, prefers to read Kvp-ar Jv evpk'C. iS2a. Plat. Pro- 15 2a. Perhaps, however, this is scarcely an example. See '^iintl is 2 ^- ^^ill^*°' ^^° Oil Thuc. ii. 35. 2 kp.ol 6' ^pKovv av IS^Kei etvai dvSjoSv ayadiav epyo) yevo/tevtov epyv vfitv SoKovvT(ji)v a-vfi4>epei,v, — TrpdrTerai is the apodosis belonging to an omitted protasis, which would have contained el with the present subjunctive, in the sense of " if soever so and so happens." And so on : and see further note 311 below, for the corresponding Latin usage, and generally. 4. Such a passage as that of Alexis cited in the Text is particularly valuable as showing to us that the usage in Greek — and by consequence in Latin also — is by no means — what it is so often described as being — the omission of the conditional particle from a protasis. 5. Had such been the case, we must have had in the words Soph. El. 914. 154a. Protasis (virtual) in form of independent sentence. Alexis 'laoiTT. Fr. i. 7 sqq. Ar. Nub. 1076. Dem. de Cor. p. 294. 19. The usage not one of the omis- sion of the con- ditional particle from a protasis. 504 GREEK AND LATIN "54^ 5 which follow those above cited — not what Alexis wrote, viz. ovK e'xe' Tts iVxia, but — fj.fl e'xet Tis iVx'a : that being the result of omitting el from d fifj e'xet rts tcrx'a- 6. A similar fact is taught us by the ovkwv in Herod, iv. 118; the oi5 in Dem. 01. iii. p. 33. 13; the ovk in Philemon 'ASeX4>. Fr. 1. 11 ; all respectively cited in the Text. 7. In Plat. Tlieaet.-p. Plat. Theaet. -p. 192 E ^oiKpaTrjS eTnyiyviLcTKei GedScopov Koi 192 E. QeaLTTjTOV, 6p^ Si firjEkrepov, firjSk aAAij a'i(r6-qcn^ avTi^ irapearri irepl awMV ovk av Trore Iv eavTO) So^acreiev us o QeaiTrjTos iavov 8' erretO' lKa.crT(j} \ Sdcroi ep(av tSv ^jj/^ttotcov. veoKpard ti.9 Troietro). | Kot 8fj KeKparab. t6v Xij3av(tiTov iTriTiOrjcriV fj Trafs (so Elmsley, EAinh. Bev. xix. p. 85 cited by Meineke ad I., corrects the last words). 2. In Xen. Gyr. iv. Xen. Gyr. iv. 3. 5 c'xo/icv . . . oVAa ots So/co{)/.iev rpkirerOai ^- 5- Toiis TToAe/xtoiis ofiotre lovres' Kat S'^ TpeTrofiivoi, ttolov? rj tTTTreas, 17 To^oras, rj . . . civcv 'iinriiiv ovres Svvai/xed' av (ftevyovTo.'s rj XajSeiv rj KaraKavelv ; = " well then, if we were to turn them, what should we be able to do in the way of . . ." we have the collocation Kal S-j with a participle ; and Tpeirofievoi = el TpeiroljxeOa. 156. Alexis 156. 1. This passage of Alexis — as does Timocles Atovuo-taf. 'iffoo-r. Fr. 1. 7 Fr. 1. 13 s^'j. — contains a whole string of examples of the usage ^Timocles Ami-. '^'^'^ Under mention; and the special value of the former passage, Fr. i. 13 sqq. as showing the nature of the usage, has been already pointed out in note 15 4a. 4 above. Embellishment 2. As a satire, too, upon " as humanas rosas," as Camoens of female beauty (j^^ ^g_ j^_ gg^ y) ^^^Ug ^^^ j^^^g^^ " Pazendo-se por arte mais formosas," and the Supercheries des femmes — dear to the readers of such a paper as the French Vie Paridenne, — it is worth reading through; iS6 6 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 505 and with it, in that connection, may be coupled the enumeration of yvvaiKeia. opLd^ovvas $aAij/)tKas' | rpi)(ii> xoix go Fortini [Novdl. xiv. ) ascrites to a yoimg person — ' ' tutta propor- zionata e ben fatta," but not indeed commendable for attention to the proprieties, ■ — amongst other charms, ' ' il ciglio negro, i capelli a modo di liioido e splendeute oro " ; and (Nm. xi.) to a " persona nobile, ancorchfe fusse cortigiaua " — " Taurato e crespo orine." So Aretino (Ragion. ii. 1 init.) of a like lady: "ella ha le treooie che paiano fila d'oro." See too Id. ib. i. 3. p. 120 extr. Fortini, however (Nov. xii. ), endows with " bionde e crespe chiome " a respect- able young country wife. I. UU Bekker iwiSoiKa ; . . . fipxo' j • ■ • ?/>?« 5 2. As to eira, see Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Feds. Leg. p. 349. 2 Annot. Crit. <=* UU Bekker hiiiv ; . . . &koiv ; <=" As does also Porson in Bur. Orest. 646 = 638 ed. suae ; and Babington in Hyperides ^TO Euxenijpp. col. 21 11. 14 sqg^. ; both cited in the Text. 157. Dem. de Cor. p. 294. 19 An interroga- tive sign out of place in the (virtual) protasis in Greek and Latin. 508 GEEEK AND LATIN 157 1 — cui-cv Usage in other languages. Ar. Av. 78. Plat. Theaet. p. 192 E. Aesch. p. 89. 2. c. Cies. V dc^ms eyi) Xa/iwv rb TpyfiXiov. \ €tvoi;s 6' eiriOvfKi, Sei re ™' TOpvvrji Kot xwpas • | Tpex<^ '1"' ropvvrjv, aut in hunc Platonis locum Theaet. p." 192 E "ScoKparijs 'eiriyLyvitXTK^i k.t.X." "" "Ac monuit dudum Heindorfius ad Hor. (Sferwi. i. 1. 45 interrogationem ab his formulis alienam esse, quern sequitur Matthiaeus ad Eur. Or. 635 " = 646 Dind. and cited in the Text " . . adde Ar. Nub. 1077" =1076 Dind. and cited in the Text "et Aeschin. c. Ctesiph. p. 89 § 246 ''^ ... Est schema G-raecis et Latinis paritur usitatum." This last remark is true, as may be seen in the Text § 88 and § 214; but the division of the examples of independent sentences between those which represent actual facts and those which represent facts of frequent occurrence has been over- looked. For example, the instances mentioned in Dissen's note and subnote eii do not all belong to the same category. Of them, Dem. de Cor. p. 266. 6 ; Eur. Or. 646 ; Hor. Sat. i. 1. 45 are independent sentences representing actual facts ; whilst Dem. de Cor. pp. 294. 19 ; 317. 6 ; Ar. Jv. 76 ; Nub. 1076, and Aeschin. c. Ctesiph. p. 89. 1 are like sentences representing facts of frequent occurrence. 2. The Latin usage may be seen in the Text § 214. 3. A similar usage is common in other languages also. But in them the distinction between shades of expression in the (usually) forerunning sentence is not so accurately preserved as in Greek and Latin ; and the (usually) forerunning sentence is («) at one time properly independent ; (6) at another inter- rogative ; (c) at a third in inverted form, the verb preceding the substantive. Thus we have passages such as 4. (a) Sedley Mulberry Garden ii. 1 "ask him to sup, he has business : or if he promise, 'tis ten to one he fails " ; "='" Dele this re. See Dind. ad I., who, moreover, adds in his Leipsio edition of 1822 " interrogandi signnm post xiirpas posuit Bruncldus, qui eodem mode erravit in Mod. 179 iTriTptij/a,s iripifi' ■ir\elov' In SpAffei KaKd." oi' Read, however, as Mr. ShUleto says (see above note iS4a. 7), el n yLyvthcyKU. "^ Bead § 247. The passage runs thus i^KTipiTTeTai ns in rif OeArp^ Sn (TTe^avovTai ApeTTJs ^veica Kal &vSpaya6ias Kal ei/volas AvdpwTos A(rx^/xwi' S)v t^ §Up Kal j35eXup6s ' 6 34 ye vedjrepos ravT lSii)y 5iet(rti/j.evos twv Ka\Qv Kal SlkoLuv 4Trave\9iijv olKaSe TratSeiiet rbv vl6v' 6 S4 ye elKbrws oi Trelderat. '5 '57 5 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 509 Ormnbler iii. 1 " Brillon serves your designs : you make me steal him away " ; Dry den Ind. Emp. iv. 1 " petition me, perhaps I may forgive." (6) Marlowe Edw. II. p. 185 b "fear'st thou thy person? thou shalt have a guard : | wantest thou gold ? go to my treasury : | wouldst thou be loved and fear'd ? receive my seal, I . . ." ; Dekker i. Hon. Wh. i. extr. p. 89 " is patience madness ? I'll be a madman still " ; Sedley Eella/mira ii. 1 " does my patron lose ? fortune favours fools . . ," ; Herrick Hesp. ii. p. 282 "does fortune rend thee? bear with thy hard fate | . . . say, does she frown ? still countermand her threats " j M. G. Lewis MonJc vol. iii. c. 10 "is such your resolution? I have no more to say" ; Chesterfield Lett, to Son 212 "has anything remarkable been said or done . . . ? they immediately present and declare themselves eye and ear witnesses of it " ; Channing The Perfect Life "The Universal Father" p. 14 6, ed. Lend. 1884 "do I speak to those who have escaped gross vice ? Bless God for your happiness " ; 0. Smart (in Whibley's In Cap and Gown p. 37) "dropt she her fan . . . ? | even stake- stuck Clarians strove to stoop." (c) Heywood Fai/r Maid of the Eoxhange p. 69 "comes there any more, here's two snights to a dish " ; Shaksp. Jul. Goes. iii. 1 " live a thousand years, | I shall not find myself so apt to die " ; Druinmond Sonnets " that fly, run, rest I, all doth prove but vain" ; Chesterfield Lett, to Son 195 "would he say that men differ . . ., he both supports and adorns that opinion by . . ." ; Channing The Perfect Life " The Perfect- ing Power of Religion" p. 38 a "am I asked . . ., I answer." 5. (fl) Montaigne Essaia ii. 12 p. 326 a "vous recitez simplement une cause k I'advocat : il vous y respond chancellant et doubteux: . . . I'avez- vous Men pay6 pour y mordre . . ., commence il d'en estre interess^ . . ." ; Beaumarohais Tarare v. 9 " enfans, vous m'y forcez, je garderai ces fers." (6) Id. Ba/rbier de SMlle iv. 1 " il y va de la vie ? Epousez." (c) Ernest Daudet Une femme du monde p. 145 " oonnaissait-elle ainsi quelque nouvelle importante encore ignor^e, elle la communiquait k Eaymond" ; Le Sage Liable boiteux c. 18 " implorez-vous sa protection, il vous I'accorde gdn&euse- ment " ; Beaumarchais Lettre sur la critique du Ba/rb. de Seville " tels sont les hommes : avez-vous du succes, ils vous accueillent . . . ; mais ..."..." les perdez - vous un instant de vue, on les retrouve . . . tralnants partout"; Jules Sandeau Sacs et Pcurchemins c. 12 " s'entretient-on de la nouvelle dynastie, c'est k qui donnera son coup de langue." 510 GREEK AND LATIN '57 6 6. (a) Aretino II Ma/rescalco iv. 7 " comandimi il Signore ch' . . ., a la fe non torr6 " ; Alfieri Gongiwa d^ Fazzi iii. 2 " due ae torrai : mancan tiranrii a scMavi ? " (b) Id. ib. ii. 1 " aperta | forza non han ? creder il vo' : ma il terzo I dal tradimento, or oM oel guarda ? " 7. (a) Uhland Gedichte: Ber Junker Bechberger st. 14 "vom Eoss ich steige, I es geht mit mir zur Neige." (c) Lesaing Laokoon c. 9 "macht man keinen solchen Unterschied, so werden der Kenner und der Antiquar bestandig mit einander in Streite liegen" ; c. 12 "giebt er sie ilim aber nicM, so liegt nicbt Mars zu Boden " ; Goethe Gedichte : Der Sanger st. 5 " doob darf icb bitten, bitt' icb eins " ; Der Erlkonig st. 7 v. 2 "und bist du nicbt willig, so brauoh' icb Gewalt" ; Scbiller Gedichte: Der Handsehuh st. 6 "ist eure Lieb so beiss, | wie . . . | ei, so hebt mir den Handscbub auf" ; Die Biirgschaft st. 17 "und ist es zu spat . . ., I so soil micb der Tod ibm vereinen"; Der Kampf St. 1 " kannst du des Herzens Plammentrieb nicbt dampfen, I so fordre, Tugend, dieses Opfer nicbt " ; id. Fiesco i. 2 " verliere icb diese, darf icb keine mebr boffen " ; Wilhelm Tell i. 3 "bediirft ibr meiner zu bestimmter That, | dann ruft den Tell . . ." ; id. Abfall der vereinigten Niederlande : Vorrede der Isten Ausgabe "flndet man daber diesen ersten Tbeil zu arm an wichtigen Begebenheiten, so erinnere man sioh, dass . . ." ; Burger Gedichte : Der Kaiser und der Abt " doch seid ibr in Ernst ... | so will icb mir bitten " ; Die Weiber von Weinsberg st. 1 "kommt mir einmabl das Freien ein, | so werd' icb eins aus Weinsberg frein" ; st. 3 "komm' icb 'nein, so wisst, | soil trangen all was mannlicb ist"; Goetbe Gedichte: Hochzeitlied st. 8 "und soUen wir singen was welter gesobeben, | so scbweige das Toben und Tosen." 8. It will be noticed that all the examples cited in the Text, and above at the beginning of this note, contain indicatives — • representing respectively actual facts and facts of frequent occurrence — in the independent sentences which form the quasi- protases of the compound sentence. And the writer has failed to note, in Greek, instances of the use of independent sentences in forms apt for the representation of conditional facts. But that conditional facts may be properly made the condi- tions of the happening of some further fact, may be seen, from the Latin use, in the Text § 214 (iii.) 9. The same thing is found also in other languages, and in- stances are here subjoined. It will be noticed that they are all in inverted form, the verb preceding the substantive, with '57 10 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 511 the exception of the Spanish example from Tirso de Molina in para. 13; and possibly — though hardly probably — the first Italian example from Alfieri in para. 12. 10. Lyly Alex, and Camp. 1. 1 " Alexander had never come so near the walls, had Epaminondas walt'd about the walls " ; Marlowe Jew of Malta iii. p. 161 a "hadst thou perish'd by the Turk, | wretched Ferneze might have 'venge^ thy death"; Edw. IZ". p. 185 6 "for which, had not his high- ness lov'd him well, | he should have lost his head " ; Shaksp. Macbeth ii. 2 "had he not resembled | my father, . . ., I had done 't " ; Beaum. and Fletch. Philaster v. 5 " could I but have liVd | in presence of you, I had had my end"; Cowley The Ghromde st. 5 "long . . . should I have been | . . ., had not Rebecca set me free " ; Etherege Sir Fopling Flutter ii. 2 "should I have set up my rest at the first inn I lodged at, I should never have arrived" ; v. 1 "had I not with a dear experience bought, you might have fooled me yet " ; She Would if She Could V. 1 "had not Sir Oliver and Sir Joseph come so luckily into the garden, the letters had been dis- covered " ; Dryden Ind. Emp. iii. 1 " had I not fought or durst not fight again, | I my suspected counsel should refrain" ; Span. Friar iv. 2 "had Caesar's body never been exposed, | Brutus had gain'd his cause " ; Byron Don Juan V. 112 "had she but been a Christian . . ., | we should have found . . ." ; M. Q. Lewis Monh vol. iii. c. 10 "had you resisted . . ., you had saved your body and soul"; Parnell The Hermit "but now had all his fortune felt a wrack, ] had that false servant sped in safety back " ; Junius Lett. 23 med. " there certainly was a moment at which he meant to have resisted, had not a fatal lethargy prevailed over his faculties . . ." ; Shelley Revolt of Islam i. 19 "then had no great aim recompensed my sorrow, | I must have sought dark respite from its stress " ; The Cenci : Dedication "had I known a person more . . ., I had solicited for this work the ornament of his name"; Prom. Unbound : Preface " had I framed my story on this model, I should have done no more than . . ." ; ib. i. " mighty God, I Almighty, had I deign'd . . ." ; Adonais 27 ; Disraeli Lothair vol. ii. c. 3 "had it not been for you, I should have remained what I was when . . ." Greene Loohing-Glass for Lond. ami Engl. p. 143 a "O had I tears, ... | or had I sighs, . . . | I then would tempt the heavens with my laments " ; Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay p. 160 a "were not my sword glued to my scabbard . . ., I would cut off his head " ; Marlowe Edw. II. 512 GREEK AND LATIN 157 10 — cvi p. 191 a "but were lie here, . . ., | how easily might some base slave be suborn'd | to . . ." ; Lyly AU%. and Camp. i. 2 "could I see but a cook's shop painted, I would make mine eyes fat as butter " ; Shaksp. Meas. for Meas. ii. 2 "could great men thunder | as Jove himself does, Jove would ne'er be quiet " ; ii. 4 " pleas'd you to do 't, at peril of your soul, | were eqtial poise of sin and charity. \ . . . I. Did I tell this, who would believe me ? " K. Hen. V. iv. 1 " there is some soul of goodness in things evil, I would men obsexvingly distil it out " ; Ben Jonson Sad Shepherd i. 2 "lived my Earine, you should have twenty " ; Beaum. and Fletch. Philaster iii. 1 " had she the lust of sparrows or of goats, | had she a sin that way, hid from the world, | beyond the name of lust, I would not aid I her base desires . . . | . . . were she as foul as hell, I and I did know it thus, the breath of kings, | the points of swords, tortures nor bulls of brass "" should draw it from me " ; Fletcher Captain iii. 1 " 'tis a way dangerous, and will deceive thee, | hadst thou the constancy of all men in thee. | I. Having her sins before me, I dare see her, | were she as catching as the plague " ; Massinger Fatal Dowry v. 2 " you much weaken | the strength of your Omission of one "='■ i. One might, perhaps, have expected "neither the breath of kings, the of two antitheti- points of swords, tortures, nor bulls of brass. " cal negatives. But the omission of the former negative is quite common in aU languages. Thus— 2. Greene Friar Bac. and Friar Bung. p. 165 5 "the dulcet tones of frolic ilercury, | nor all the wealth heaven's treasury affords, | should make me leave Lord Lacy or his love " ; p. 171 6 " the wealth combin'd within the English shelves, | Europe's commander, nor the English king | should not have mov'd the love of Peggy from her lord" ; Marlowe Bdw. II. p. 211 a "yet, gentle monks, for treasure, gold, nor fee | do you betray us and our company " ; Shaksp. K. Lear iv. 6 " the fitchew, nor the soiled horse, goes to 't | with a more ravenous appetite" ; Winter's Tale i. 2 ; Othello iv. 1 ; Sonnets cxli. 9 "but my five wits, nor my five senses can | dissuade one foolish heart from serving thee " ; Fletcher Beggcur's Bush iii. 2 " what would the knowledge do thee good . . . j . . . when aU my ways, | nor all the friends I have A. You do not know, sir, | what I can do " ; House of Commons, 1st Feb. 1809, Mrs. Clarke's re-examination, daring the investigation of the charges against the Duke of York, ed. Lond. 1809, p. 50 "Mr. Adam, nor any other person, can say that I acted incorrectly" ; Erskine in Whibley's In Gap and Gown p. 49 "club nor queue nor twisted tail, I nor e'en thy chattering barber shall avail " ; Byron Occasional Pieces : Epistle to a Friend " of one, whom love nor pity sways, | nor hope of fame, nor good men's praise"; Hints from Horace "nor church nor state escaped his public sneers, | arms nor the gown, priests, lawyers, volunteers " ; Shelley Lines written among the Euganean Hills 65 "what now moves nor murmurs not" ; Anon. An Englishman in Paris vol. ii. c. 10 (ed. i. Lond. 1892, p. 230) "she" (the Empress Eugenie), "no more than her surroundings, had the remotest idea that France was gradually undergoing a political change, that she was recovering her constitutional rights." 3. Oent Now), nouv. ii. "quelque chose qu'il allSgue ne remonstre, il ne pent finer d'aultre response que oeste presente " ; Eeine de Navarre Heptamiron IS7 10— d CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 513 good cause, should you but tliink | a man for doing well could entertain | a pardon were it olfer'd " ; Heywood Fair Maid of the Exchange p. 45 " sir, might I build upon your secrecy, | I would disclose a secret of import" ; Middleton i. 10 (p. 59) " ma conscience ue mon honueiir ne contreviennent point k votre demands" ; (p. 77) "quand Florinde vit que les pri^res, raison ne larmes ne lui servoient de rien, . . , s'aida du secours qu'elle craignoit autant que perdre sa vie, et . . . appela sa mfere"; ii. 11 (p. 87) "si quelque diSvotieuse orfature I'eut entendu par amphibologlque . . ., lui nl ses compagnons ne s'en fussent point mal trouvfa" ; ii. 12 (p. 90) "envers elle pri&res ne presents ne servoient de rien" ; iii. 22 (p. 186) "voiis ni autre u'y toucherez point" ; iii. 30 (p. 247) ' ' quand ils out mat^ leur chair jusque-la que pour parler ne pour baiser il n'ont point d'^motions, ils viennent, etc. " ; Brantfime Dam. Gall. ii. p. 305 a "la plus belle chose qu'il vid ny qu'il verra jamais " ; Voltaire Gontes en Vers : Ce qui plait aux Dames ad fin. ' ' une beauts, dont le pinoeau d'Apelle | ou de Vanlo, ni le ciseau fidMe | du bon Pigal, le moine, ou Phidias, | n'auraient jamais imitd les appas " ; Beauraarchais La Mire Coupable iii. 2 "un mot de moi ... a produit ... la religieuse horreur, dont votre flls ni vous ne pentoiez le motif " ; Tarare iii. 4 "mes fureurs, ni mes jalousies, | n'arr§tant point ses fantaisies, | j'etais chez moi comme un z^ro"; Laclos Les liais. dang. : Lett. 44 "uneb^gueule, scrupuleuse ou timide, que mon eloquence, ni mon argent ne purent vaincre " ; 147 " cette raison ni mille autres n'y firent rien." 4. Parabosco I Diporti ii. 12 "un giorno che il padre ne la raadre nella citta non si ritrovavano. " 5. Cervantes Ifovel. JSj. i. p. 178 M amante liberal "tan bien aderezada y compuesta, que no lo pudiera estar tan bien la mas rica mora de Fez ni de Marruecos " ; iii. 17 Las dos doncellas ' ' desapareoio del pueblo, sin que sus padres ni otra persona alguna supieron decir ni imaginar donde habia ido " ; iii. 144 La Senora Oornelia "el niiio ni Cornelia no parecen" ; iii. 280 Los Perros de Mahvdes " lo que me pesa es que yo ni tu madre . . . nunoa Uegamos i, saber tanto como ella. " 6. Juvenal iii. 309 qua fornace graves, qua non incude catenae ? 7. Find. Pyth. vi. 48 S,StKov oid' viripoTrKov ^^av Spiirinv: x. 29 vavcl S' oihe TTEfis ICiv B,v dipois | . . . : a. 41 v6s iqcrei, dvai, d p/fj d rts avToiv dpyvpwv iroid: Symp. p. 205 E oi5 yap rb eavriov, oip,ai, eKacrToi do-ird^ovrai d p,7] d tk rh fMV dyaOhv oIkelov KaXd Kal eavTOV, to Se KaKhv dXXoTpiov' u>s ovSev ye aXXo ecrxiv o5 ep&u-iv dvOpioiroi rj toC dyaOov] " and commentators. I think this usage of el (si) has sometimes been dealt with unfairly by modern editors. To Tacit. Ann. xiii. 57 " [ignes terra editi villas arva vicos passim corripiebant, ferebanturque in ipsa conditae nuper coloniae moenia. Neque extingui poterant,] "non si imbres caderent, non si fluvialibus aquis (i.e. si caderent)" [aut quo alio humore, donee inopia remedii et ira cladis agrestes quidam eminus saxa jacere, dein residentibus flammis propius suggressi ictu fustium aliisque verberibus ut feras absterrebant = "nor could the fires be quenched, not if soever rains fell, not if soever (they fell) with streams of water or any other kind of moisture"] "I find a parallel in Ar. T^esp. 352" [iravra irecjipaKTab KOVK ecniv oittJs] " oi5S' el a-ep4>(fi SiaSvvat " [ = " everything is as tight as wax, and of opening there is not even enough if (sc. it were) for a gnat to get through"], "where metre allows not ovSe i(TTaTa in the passage in the Text is, as Arnold suggests, quite unnecessary. See further note 59- 5 above. 167. Protasis implied and sen- tence associated with independent protasis. 168. 167. Compare in English J. A. Froude {Times newspaper, 2nd Nov. 1886, p. 8 col. 3) " had I chosen the subject for myself, I might be supposed " — sc. if one were to take up the matter for consideration — " to have some private interest to further ... I did not choose it. It was chosen for me." Similarly we find such sentences as Greene LooUng-Olass for Land, and Engl. p. 121 6 "why, sir, I hope you do but jest : why, 'tis but four, and will you for a minute take forfeit of my bond ? If it were so, sir, I was here before four" ; Shaksp. Wint. Tale iv. 3 "if I might die within this hour, I have lived | to die when I desire " ; Shirley Hyde Park v. 1 " and poets write enough of hell, if you I have read their story " ; Byron Don Juan xv. 5. 7 " there's music in all things, if men had ears " ; Occasional Pieces " To Lord Thurlow " " and were it lawfully thine own, I does Rogers want it most or thou ? " See further notes 28 and 139. 7 above. 168. Expressed in (cited above in Text § 89) Horn. II. ix. 42 el Se aol avT(^ dvixhi eirecro-DTat ois re ve&rdai, | '^pxeo. 169. Apodosis 169. Similarly we find the apodosis omitted in modern m i 1 1 e d' — i n languages. Thus modern guages. lan- 1. Shirley Wittij Fair One i. 3 " sir, if your engagement require no haste — " ; Hyde ParJc ii. 1 ; iv. 3 " my lord, if you'd speak to him — "; Lady of Pleasure iii. 2 "if I have a way | to employ your wit and secrecy? — | Soft. You'll honour us"; Dryden Limberham iii. 1 " if a man should listen to a fop ! " Mock Astrol. iv. 2 "if he shoxild find me under the table now ! " M. G. Lewis Monk i. init. " but as to beauty ! If I had only taken half the pains to set myself off, which she did ! But this is neither here nor there." 2. Eeine de Navarre Heptam. xliv. " hflas ! 6toit-ce pour cela que 170 4 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 527 vous m'aimiez ? Si je I'eusse pens^, mon Dieu ! " Louvet FauUas ii. p. 342 " Monsieur le Marquis, si nous tachions de nous d^barrasser de la foule ? " Le Sage Didble Boiteux c. 4 " si mon pfere venoit nous surprendre, reprit Leonor " ; Turcaret ii. 5 " aliens, ce billet au porteur, que je vous ai tantot envoyd, qu'on me le rende. La B. Que je vous le rende ? Et si je I'ai aussi donn^ au chevalier. T. All ! si je le croyois ! " Jules Sandeau Sacs et Parchemins c. 5 "Monsieur le Vicomte . . ., si, pour nous ^gayer un peu, novis parlions du chemin du diable." 3. Aretino II Marescalco v. 3 " se ben rinascesse madonna Bianca "; Alfieri Filippo i. 1 " oh ! se palese mai | fosse tal fiamma ad uom vivente ! Oh ! s'egli | ne sospettasse." 4. Cervantes Nov. Ej. iii. p. 161 La Senora Cornelia "j ay senor mio ! ^ Si se ha espantado el duque de verme 1 j Si me tiene aborrecida ? J Si le he parecido fea ? j Si se le han olvidado las obligaciones que me tiene 1 j No me hablara siquiera una palabra 1 " Lope de Vega El Perro del Hortelano i. 1 " huye, Tristan, por aqui. TV. Notable desdioha ha sido. Te. j, Si nos habra conocido 1 Tr. No s6 : presume que si." 5. Da Cunha Ode (quoted by Sismondi Hist, de la Litt. du Midi c. 40) " tu leve sopro, entendimento, | alma immortal, por onde andavas ? | . . . se a vida s6 vira extinguir — ! | ah, que he a vida e o mundo ? nada." 170. For example : — 1. (A)c. Plato Comicus $aa)v Fr. 2. 19 ct juev ovv rdSe | wpotToia-er. eixreXdoLT' av et Se jj,rj, fiar-qv \ e^e KaO'unarfxi, KaXSi av e'l^ot. rjv Se •••^ 170. Expression of apodosis in first member of bimembered sen- tences, expressive of alternative opposing supposi- tions. — in Greek. m-> (B') Hippocr. Praenotion. i. p. 44. F. = i. p. 113. 2. K. Ke(jiaXrjs Se oSvvai la-xvpal re Koi ^uvcx^S ^vv irvpeTi^, ^v iJ,ev ti Tu)V OavaTUiSkiav (rrjixeioiv irpotryivoiTO, oXedpiov Kapra' el Se arep rwv TOiovTiav (r-qjieltav rj oSvvrj mepfSdkXoi, eikoa-iv rifiepa?, o t£ Trvperos e'xot, inroa-Ken-Teo-Oai XPV aifiaros prj^iv S'a p'vwv, rj . . . (B')6. Auctor de Affection, in Hippocr. i. p. 517. F- =1^ p. 384. 5. K. 7]v iJ.ev Pe^pajxevos y Koi Kiveerai, e^aipeeiv rfv Se 528 GREEK AND LATIN 17° 4 jifj l3e/3paTai /tijSe Kivirjrai,, dSvvijv 8e wap^xxi, Kava-avra diro^ripr^vai : Euryplion (?) de Natur. Mulieb. : ib. i. p. 563. F. = ii. p. 530. 14. K. /cai 17V (jlcv 17 yaa-ryjp ytvrjTai XaTrapr] Kot, ot TTVperol weTra.vp.ivOL eWi Koi to, i-!rijj,i^via yivrjTai, T(j> avBpl ^vyKOip^airOtis' i)V Se /ii^, aS^ts ra avTci xoteeti'. Theognis 929 ijv p,lv yap TrXovrrj?, ttoAAoi (j>lXoi, rjv Se Trevrjat, | iravpoi : Hippocr. Aphorism, ii. p. 1242. F. = iii. p. 706. 9. K. ev Trjcri Tapa)(TJo-i ttjs KoiXirjS . . ., rjv fiev Ota Se? Ka6aLp€a-6ai KaOaipcavrai, ^vp,^kpci t£ Kat evcj>6p(a'S (pepova-iv rjv Se /x?;, T0iJvavT60v. oiiro) Se /cat K€veayyeiri, rjv p,hi otix Set yLyvetrdai ylyvoiro, ^vp,(j)epei re Kot ev^'opoi'S exovaiv riv 8e p.rj, rovvavriov : id. (?) de FistuUs i. p. 887. F. =iii. p. 335. 16. K. /cat ■^v /tev wphs TaCra (XTraAAacroTjTat tijS oStji/ijs, a/3/cetT(o ' ■ijv Se jutj, TTtcrat rb p,r)K evt epcftaivrjrai, irdXiv eiravtovTes eirt t?)v TrdAtv, /3ao"a- vtoC/iev : Auctor c^e Affection, in Hippocr. i. p. 516. F. = ii. p. 381. 17. K. Kat rjv pev Trpbs Tai/Ta d7raAAdo"0"»jTai T'ijs dSwrjs, d/3/cet TaiJTa* rjv Se prj dTraXXdv | ypXv re xaJ croi ^viifia-xpi^ t' eo-rai Sopos : Hippocr. de Aere etc. i. p. 287. F. = i. p. 543. 17. K. Kal rjv fj,ev eirl kuvos ewiToXy vSbyp emyevyTai koI xeiptiiv Kal ot eTycTMi TTveva-uxriv, eXrrls TravcraaOai Kal t& /jteTOiroypov vyiyphv yevecrdaL- rjv Se fiy, kivSvvos davaTOVi re yevecrdai, Toicri iraiSiouri . . ., TODS T£ wepLyevofjtevovs els TerapTaiovs dwoTeXevTav : Euryphon (?) de Natur. Muliebr. i. p. 584. P. = ii. p. 596. 9. K. Kal rjv p,h/ ecreXOy rb (jxipfiaKov, ;rai8iovcra yiveTaf rjv Se p.y, ov : Lysias Contra Frumentarios p. 164. 35 dv fjtev Toivvv drroSel^y, . . . ws eo-Ti vo/ios os KeXevei . . ., drroxj/rii^icracrOe' el Se [ly, StKaiov v/xas KaTaxj/yi^icraxTdai: Xen. Andb. v. 1. 10 yv filv yap eXOy, wap^ovTiov evddSe ev dOov(aTepoi's -irXeva-ovp.eda' edv Se p,y dyy, Tois evOdSe )(fiycr6[ji,e0a: Theophrastus TrepJ di/aio-^vvrias : Kal edv p,ev Xd/3y, e^ ^')(ei" el Se p,y, dpirda-a'S drrb tijs Tparre^ys XoXiklov, dfia yeXZv diraXXdrTecrdai. 5. So in {a) Latin and (6) English. Thus 6. (a) Plaut. Merc. iii. 4. 2 si domi sum, foris est animus : sin — in Latin. foris sum, animus domi st ; Ter. Andr. i. 3. 5 si illdm relinquo, ejus vitae timeo : sin opitulor, hujus minas : | cui virba dare difficile st; Cic. ad Fam. vii. 12. 2 quare si plane a nobis deficis, moleste fero : sin Pansae assentari commodum est, ignosco ; ib. xi. 14. 3 id si ita est, omnia faciliora : sin aliter, magnum negotium ; ad Att. ix. 15. 1 si mihi veniam quam peto dederit, utar conditione : sin, minus, impetrabo aliquid a me ipso; Verg. Georg. i. 427 luna ... I si nigrum obscuro comprenderit aera cornu, I maximus agricolis pelagoque parabitur imber. | at si virgineum suffuderit ore ruborem, | ventus erit ; Plaut. Cas. ii. 6. 24 p6stremo si illiio quod volumus dvenet, gaud^bimus : | sin seous, patidmur animis acquis ; Cic. ad Att. x. 7. 1 pulsus est . . . is, qui nisi vincit, 2 M 530 GREEK AND LATIN 17° 6 nomen populi Romani deleatur necesse est : sin autem vincit, Sullano more exemploque vincet. So in the common expression "sivos exercitusque valetis, bene est" (SVEQVBE). In Latin, indeed, the writer has failed to note an example of the apodosis omitted in the first member of bi-membered sentences, expressive of alternative opposing suppositions. -in English. 7. (V) Shaksp. Henry V. v. 2 " if thou can'st love me for this, take me ; if not, . . ." ; Saokville Ferrex and Porrex : The Printer's Letter " if she be -welcome among you . . ., her friends will thank yon for it. If not, . . ." ; Shirley Hyde Park iii. 1 "if it be honorable, there is no harm in 't : I if otherwise, you do not doubt my innocence." Si ii-fi )( d Si ixii. fjv fUii, ijn 8. It will be noticed that in the passage quoted above in « !°7v^i s/u^^" ^^ ^°*^' § 2' ^^- Hippocr. (1) de Haemorrhoid. i. p. 893. F.= iii. p. 344. 1 6. K., as well as in some of those which follow it, and in some of those in the Text, 7)v fiev in the protasis is answered hj rjv Se in the apodosis ; and in his note on one of such passages, viz. Thuc. i. 82. 2, Mr. Shilleto says " d Se jxri, if the verb is not repeated, or no other verb inserted, in the second clause is more common." 9. No doubt rjv {iav, av) fikv or riv (lav, av) followed by d 8c jaij is of constant occurrence. Add, if it be necessary, to the examples given in the Text and above, Herod, ix. 48 ; Eur. Iph. Aul. 915 ; Phaethon Fr. 2. 3 Dind. ( = 775. 3 Nauck.) ; Andoc. de Myst. p. 2. 34; Plat. Protag. p. 325 D ; Grito p. 48 C ; Euryphon (?) de Natur. Mulieh: in Hippocr. i. p. 565. F. = ii. p. 537. 6. K. ; Aristot. 'A^. IIoA. cc. 22. 49. 52. 54. So also we have in the very next page of Euryphon (?) just above cited, viz. — (Euryph. (?)) de Natur. Muliehr. in Hippocr. i. p. 566. F. =ii. p. 538. 16. K. ipifrOai oSv ^pij avTrjv rb peov, ^v SaKvy re Kai e^eXKor Koi rjv /ii) ^aKvrjTai, arrb tov eyKe(j>dXov a.vai dvai to pevfjia- d 5' odv, aTrh t»}s koiXltjs. So again we easily meet with ■^v (etc.) /ilv or ijv (etc.) followed by 171/ (etc.) Se /i^, in cases where either the verb is repeated, as in Auctor de intern, affection, in Hippocr. i. p. 534. F. = ii p. 438. 12. K. CTreiTa rji/ cyueros kireXdy avrm, e/j^eiv irpoOvp.ws' ijv Se p,r] eiriXOrj, /cara/iaTTevd/iei/os Trrepif eficerw, '7° 10 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 531 or another verb is inserted, as in Plat. Bep. ix. p. 575 D ovkovv lav /mv Ikovtes mreUbio-iv lav Se firi eTTiTpeTrri ij ttoAis, . . . ttjv iraTpiSa . . . Ko\d(rerai. Compare Herod, iv. 97 /cat ^v re Kara voov Trpri^wfiev evpovTe^s iKvOas, io-ri aTToSos ripZv • rfv re koX p.ri o-p.e6a, r) ■ye aTToSos rjp,iv acr^aXijs. 10. But rjv (etc.) piv or r/v (etc.) followed by ^v (etc.) Sc p,ri in the apodosis, without either repetition of the verb or insertion of another verb, is, none the less, not uncommon ; and indeed, in the Hippocratea, it is common. Thus Thuc. vii. 60. 2 (cited above in this note § 4) e/SovXevcravTO . . . SLavavp.ax'qa'a.VTes, rjv ph viKwcnv, es Kardvrjv Kopt^ecrOat, r)v Se p-q, c/iirpijcraVTes ras vavs, ire^y ^vvra- ^dpevoi dTroxtopejv : Plat. Protag. p. 328 B cTreiSav yap rts trap' ipov pdOrj, idv piv fiovXrjrai, d-TroSeScDKev 6 e-yoi Trpdrropai dpyvpiov idv 8e p-fj, kXOmv ets 'upov, o/iocras, oo-QV 0.V <^27 a^ta elvai to, paQ-qpara, toitovtov KarWrfKev : Hippocr. (?) de Fraelis i. p. 759. P. = iii. p. 82. 17. K. {lyiecs Se TeAeus oSrot yivovTai, tv recrcrapaKovTa 'qpepyo-L pdXurra, rjv TokpiuxTi KaTaKeicrdai. rjv 8k p-fj, Trao-^ovcri ravra d Kal wpoTepov Kal eirl puWov : de Fistulis i. p. 888. P. = iii. p. 336. 5. K. rjv pev oSv dpa tq vovcrtf TraiJTjTat . . .■ fjv 8\ p-f), SlSov T(uv ipappaKiav tZv (rrpayyovpiKSv : Eiiryphon (?) de Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 472. P. = ii. p. 246. 16. K. Kal rjv pkv (TOi SoKey Iv TavTycnv y XP^"? xeKaOdpOai CTTteiKUs • rjv Se py, Kal erepai rpti's ravra rroieero) : de Natur. Muliehr. : ib. i. p. 564. P. = ii. p. 533. 14. K. kol yv ph ovrcai kOiXuxriv elo'iivaL ■ rjv 8e py, . . . Kpoveiv k.t.X. : Anctor de affection. : ib. i. p. 522. P. = ii. p. 400. 9. K. Kal rjv pev ovv inrb tS)v appdKi.a-rdpi,ea-S' dei : (where see the note of Valokenaer, who — amongst other things, and in part after Burmanu— refers to) Ov. Met. iii. 336 (wrongly cited by him, and wrongly copied from him by Monk, as 236) neque enim licet Irrita cui- quam | facta dei fecisse deo ; xiv. 784 rescindere numquam | dis licet acta deum. s See, on li[X.ai, Mourat, I AdfnrpuTKe, T£/3irvov t^s foTjs t' kiravpia-Oai, | tovtov kot oi/iov Setpov . . . (6) In Latin, (1) sic: Hor. Epp. i. 7. 69 sic ignovisse putato | me tibi, si cenas hodie mecum ; Propert. i. 18. 11 sic mihi te referas levis, ut non altera nostro | limine formosos intulit ulla pedes ; Martial vii. 1 2. 1 sic me fronte legat dominus, Faustine, serena, | . . . ut mea nee juste quos odit pagina laesit, I et mihi de nullo fama rubore placet; vii. 28. 1 sic Tiburtinae crescat tibi silva Dianae I . . . : otia dum medius praestat tibi parva December, | exige, sed certa, quos legis, aure jocos ; vii. 99. 1 sic placidum videas semper, Orispine, tonantem, | . . . : oarmina Parrhasia si nostra legentur in aula, I . • . dicere de nobis, ut lector candidus, aude ; vii. 72. 1 gratus sic tibi, Paule, sit December | ... si quisquam mea dixerit malignus | atro carmina quae madent veneno, | ut vocem mibi commodes patronam [on wMch passage see note 252 below] ; Juv. viii. 74 sed te censeri laude tuorum, I Pontice, noluerim sic, ut nihil ipse futurae | laudis agas. (2) Ita: Cicero de Off. i. 9. 28 nam hoc ipsum ita justum est, quod recte fit, si est voluntarium ; Liv. xxi. 13 paeem affero ad vos magis neoessariam quam aequam. Cujus 4. Not dissimilar is the equal commonplace as to the impossibility of recalling — of recalling life once spent ; of which we have examples in Job xiv. 7 sqg^. " for there is hope life once spent. of a tree, if it be cut down, that it will sprout again, and that the tender branch thereof will not cease . . . But man dieth and wasteth away ; yea, man giveth up the ghost, and where is he ? As the waters fail from the sea, and the flood decayeth and drieth up : so man lieth down and riseth not : till the heavens be no more, they shall not awake, nor be raised out of their sleep " ; Herrick Hes- perides ii. p. 219 "time steals away like to a stream, | and we glide hence away with them. | No sound recalls the hours once fled, | or roses being withered : | nor us, my friend, when we are lost, | like to a dew or melted frost " ; ii. p. 227 " for, once dead and laid i' th' grave, | no return from thence we have." Theocritus xxiz. 28 vedrara S' Sx^" '"'('■^'■"^yp^Tov \ oix tan ■ irripvyas ykp iirwfiadlas tpopet' | Kd/M/Mes ^apdirepoi, tA, vin-i)ixeva crvKKa^elv : Moschus iil. 106 of, at, Tal /laXdxai. /J-h iirbA) KWri. k&ttov 6\(ovTai, \ ij rh x^wpoi ir^'Kiva, t6 t eiSaXii oBXo;' &vr]0ov, \ icrepov aS i^iiovn Kai els h-os fiXXo ipiovri " | &fji,fies d' ol fieyihoi Kal Kaprepol fj (ro0oi dvdpcs, | iirirdTe irpaTO. Bivajxes, iv&KOOi. h x^ovl KotXf I eS5ofi.€s et /iaXd /jtaKpiv dripixova v^yperov iiirvov. CatuUus V. 4 soles occidere et redire possunt : | nobis quum semel occidit brevis lux, | nox est perpetua una dormienda. Tasso Gerus. Lib. xvi. 15 " cosi trapassa al trapassar d'un giorno | della vita mortale il fiore e '1 verde : | ne, perchA faccia indietro April ritomo, | si rinflora ella mai nfe si rinverde. " Cervantes Nov. 1^. iii. p. 181 El casamiento m,ga%oso "pasdronse estos dias volando, como se pasan los anos que estan debaxo de la jurisdiccion del tiempo." 5. Compare too Aesch. Eum. 261 aXim jxrirpifov xa/««') I SmayK6fU(TT0v, wd- — of recalling irai, I t4 5tepbi> ir^S^j x^f-^""" oix^"''' '• ^^^ dvdpbs S' iireiSkv alp.' &va(Tir6.ir'ji nbvis the dead. I fin-al BavdvTOS, oiSns S(Tt' dydtrraffis. 536 GREEK AND LATIN 17° 15— ex ita aliqua spes est, si earn, quemadmodum ut victor fert Hannibal, si vos ut vioti audiatis."^ (c) In German, so : Goethe Beinelce Fuchs viii. " bringst du Qeld, so findest du Gnade" ; ix. "bin icli schuldig, so todtet mioli gleicb." (d) In Dutch, so or soo: Dordrecht Synod Bible 1618-19, St. Matth. xii, 26 " ende indien de Satan den Satan uytwerpt, soo is hy tegen hem selven verdeelt ; hoe sal dan sijn rijk bestaeni" St. Mark xi. 3 "ende indien yemandt tot u seght Waerom doet ghy dat ? soo seght, dat de Heere het selve van nooden heeft " ; St. John viii. 31 "indien ghylieden in mijn woort blijvet, soo zijt ghy waerlick mijne discipelen"; xv. 10 "indien ghy mijne geboden bewaert, soo suit ghy in mijne liefde blijven" ; xv. 18 "indien u de werelt haet, soo weet dat sy my eer dan u gehaet heeft. Indien ghy van de werelt waert, soo sonde de werelt het hare lief hebben"; St. Paul Philem. IV "indien ghy my dan houdt vooz een met-ghesel, soo neenit hem aen gelijck als my " ; 1 St. John i. 6 " indien wy seggen dat wy gemeynschap met hem hebben, ende wy in de duysternisse wandelen, soo liegen wij ende en doen de waerheyt niet, etc." ; 2. 29 "indien ghy weet dat hy rechtveerdigh is, so weet ghy dat een yegelick die de rechtveerdicheyt doet uyt hem geboren is" ; 5. 15 "ende indien wy weten dat hy ons verhoort, wat wy oock bidden, soo weten wy dat wy de beden verkrijghen die wy van hem gebeden hebben." Suggested view. It seems, nevertheless, to the vn-iter, that it may be v^orthy of consideration whether the words " so " and " why so " in English sentences of the nature under consideration are not a mere repetition of the protasis, the real apodosis being still omitted. So that the passage from Dekker's Shoemaker's Holiday, for instance, is equivalent to " if you will love me ; if the case is so, : if not, farewell " ; and so on. This view seems borne out by such a passage as Marlowe Jew of Malta iv. p. 169 6 "I charge thee send me three hundred by this bearer, and this shall be your warrant : if you do not, — no more, but so " — where the suppression of the apodosis is expressly notified by the use of the words "no more"; and yet, nevertheless, to intensify his caution, the writer repeats his protasis com- pendiously by using the word "so"; "but so"="but if you do not, — " i.e. "then look to it": an apodosis suppressed. Liv. xxi. 13. o'' So the MSS. Villgo sic vos. Cf. supra note 24. 4 171 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 637 Compare too such passages, wherein under like circum- stances the apodosis is not suppressed, as Butler Anal. pt. ii. c. 1 p. 119 "if mankind are corrupted . . ., and if the assistance of God's spirit be necessary . . . ; supposing that, is it possible . . . ? " Shelley The Genci iiL 1 "if I could find a word that might make known | the crime of my destroyer ; and that done, my tongue should, like a knife, tear out the secret which cankers my heart's core, . . . \ if this were done, which never shall be done, | think of the offender's gold." 16. (c) (1) Shaksp. Ant. and Chop. ii. 5 "but there's no goodness in thy face. If Antony | be free and healthful — so tart a favour 1 to trumpet such good tidings ! If not well, | thou shouldst come like a Fury crown'd with snakes, I not like a formal man " ; Dan. iii. 17 "if it be so, our God ... is able to deliver us . . ., and he will deliver us ... : but if not, be it known unto thee, . . ., that . . ." (2) Dan. iii. 15 " now if ye be ready that, at what time ye hear the sound of the cornet . . ., ye fall down and worship the image which I have made, weU ; but if ye worship not, ye shall be cast the same hour into the midst of a burning fiery furnace " ; St. Luke xiii. 9 (cited by Mr Shilleto) " if it bear fruit, well ; and if not, then after that thou shalt cut it down." (3) Lord Eldon, 0. in Baoiier v. Conolly 1 J. and W. 576. 580 , "the Court would say, go and make what you can of it at law : if you can recover, very well, we won't prevent you ; if you cannot, very well again, we won't assist you." Here we have the apodosis (1) Expressed. (2) Expressed compendiously (cf. the Greek ravra apuna : dpKet Tavra : KaXws e'x^' ■ ^aAms iroi-qcrecs (cf. 3 John 6), etc. See above §§ 2, 4 of this note). (3) Expressed compendiously to begin with, and immediately amplified. 171. 1. It seems impossible to say with certainty whether oi^o) here is the future indicative, or the indefinite (so-called aorist) subjunctive. If the latter, the kev which primarily accompanies 'dXw/xai is carried on to accompany it also. 2. As to the form, fj^a., as a past indefinite of ayw, see 171. Horn, i. 139. i5|a. II. 538 GREEK AND LATIN i7i 2-oxi Buttmann Irreg. Gk Verbs s.v., where it is mentioned as occurring in (amongst other places) Horn. II. viii. 505 {a^acr9e) ; 545 (a^avro) ; Batr. 115 (^^av) ; 119 (a^as); Antipho de Herod, caed. p. 134. 43 (a^at) ; Thuc. ii. 97. 3 {irpoa-rj^av) ; Xen. Hell. ii. 2. 20 ()caTa|avTas). Even Dr. Eutherford (New Fhnjnichus p. 217) admits the form in Homer, Antipho, and Thucydides, while he refuses it to Aristophanes — who was, if anything, senior to, and at any rate contemporary with, Thucydides, — Xenophon (!), and Lycurgus.'===' 3. In Ar. Han. i68. Ai. Ban. 468 os tov kvv' rjiiav J^tAao-as rov Kep/iepov \ aTTij^as a-y^o)!/ KairoSpa? &x°^ Xa^wv, \ ov eyu) (jivXaTTOV, " dirrj^ai," says Buttmann I.e., "is from aTraTTw; hence the latest editors " — among them Dindorf — " have distinguished it by the t: see dto-croi" ; under which latter word, Buttmann, after re- marking that it is "in the Attics a dissyllable, and even in the Tragedians ^o-m or ao-o-oj" — of. Pors. ad Eur. Sec. 31, — " com- Jfa. monly ^ttw or arTw, and so also y^a, ^^at, with or without the iota," adds, " most probably the iota subscript in the Attic forms may be ascribed to the accuracy of the Grammarians. See Hemst. ad" Ar. " Plu . 733; Valok. ad" Eur. " Phoeniss. 1388 " = 1379 Dind. " and compare the various readings of the passages there mentioned. In pronunciation it was naturally distinguished by lengthening the a." 172. Plat. (Com.) 172. 1. This passage is preserved to us, expressly as an 'Exx. Fr. 3. example of the omission of the apodosis in the first member of bimembered sentences, as well by Eustathius p. 66. 31 as by Floruermit of °^' i. According to Liddell and Scott's it's* 0/ .4 M&ors, the ^orwii of Antipho certain Greek was B.o. 440 ; of Pherecrates, 436 ; of Bupolis and Phrynichus, 429 ; of Plato writers. (the comic poet), 428 ; of Aristophanes, 427 ; of Thucydides, 423 ; of Andocides, 415 ; of Lysias, 404 ; of Xenophon, 401 ; of Lycurgus, 337. 2. And yet Dr. Rutherford is never tired of telling us that, while in Aristo- phanes we have the perfection of Attic Greek, the language was not mature in the mouth of his junior; Thucydides ! 3. Compare, on the other hand, Meineke's remark [Fragm. Qom. Or. ii. p. 622) on Aristophanes' senior, Plato — himself a writer of the Old Comedy : " In Platone tamen, cujiis oratio passim a severa Atticismi lege desciscit, ea forma" — so. 6,to- \4(r(ii in Plato 'BXX. Fr. 3, cited in the Text § 103 as a future of 6,ir6\\v/u : as to which see note 172 helow — "fortasse nihil offensionis habere dehet." 4. Is it not in fact somewhat too great a demand upon our credulity to ask us solemnly to helieve, as Cohet and his school would have us do, that the great writers of Attic fame hugged, in proportion to their devotion to the purity of their own language, the linguistic fetters which these great scholars have ta these later days forged for them ? 174 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 639 another scholiast {ap. Koen. ad Greg. Corinth, p. 48) in their comments on Horn. II. i. 135-139 just cited above in the Text. 2, The particular reading, given in the Text, of this passage from the Comic writer Plato is that of Bergk {Comm. de Bel. Comoed. Att. Antiq. p. 384). Other readings are proposed and recorded by Meineke in his Fragm. Com. Gr. i. p. 170; ii. p. 622. All of them, however, leave — as they could not indeed fail to do — the passage untouched as an example of the omission of apodosis in question. 3. One of the readings just referred to is devoted to the elimination of the form aTroAetro) as a future of 6.Tr6Xkv[i.i, and the substitution for it of the (so-called Attic) form aTroAoi. The form ajroAlcra) is however again found, as Meineke points out, in Plato's Zeiis Ka/coij^u,. Fr. 7 &crd Utt e^o) ravT €(tti' rapixovi aTToAco-o) : where the same hand again corrects in order to get rid of it ; and although Buttmann (Irreg. Gk Verbs, s.v. oAAvyitt, p. 187 ed. 2 by Fishlake) relegates the use of dAeo-co as a future to "writers of a very late period," his translator very properly adds "what can Buttmann mean by stating oAotco to be the usage of the later writers only ? We find it in " Hom. " Od." xiii. " 399; Hesiod" Op. etDL "178" [=180 ed. Gottling], "and oAeo-o-o)" Hom. "11." xii. "250"; to which last, Liddell and Scott add (s.v. oXXvfii) Hom. Od. ii. 49. There would appear to be no real reason for objecting to it in Plato. dTToWcrw future of as d7r6\- 173. On rjv Se /jL-q, and not d 5e /*ij, see above note 170. 8 sqq. 173. 174. Similarly in modern languages we have such passages i74- Omission , T ,, . _ of apodosis result- ,ne lOUowing : jjjg jjj expression .. of wish — in 1. Anon. The Eeturne from Pernassus ii. 5 "I am to request your modern Ian- good mediation . . . Am. good sir, if I had known your guages. mind before, for my father hath already given . . ."; St. Luke xix. 42 " if thou hadst known . . . the things which belong unto thy peace ! " Disraeli Lothair i. c. 9 " ' ah ! if he had been trained by your Eminence,' sighed Lady Jerome " ; Mrs. Oraik Jdhm Halifax, Gentleman ii. c. 12 "oh, if it had been a stranger, and not he ! If it had been any one in the world except my brother!" Anstey Vice Versd p. 136 " weary ? I tell you I 'm sick of it. If I had only known what was in store for me before I had made such a fool of myself." Marlowe Mw. II. p. 192 a " ah ! had some bloodless Fury rose 540 GREEK AND LATIN 174 1— oxia from Hell, | and -with my kingly sceptre struck me dead, | wken I was forced to leave my Gaveston ! " Quarles Emblems : Epigr. i. " unlucky parliament ! wherein at last I botk houses are agreed and firmly past | an act of death confirm'd by higher powers : | had it had but such success as ours ! " Goldsmith The JDouhle Transformation " had the archer ne'er come down | to ravage in a country town ! I or Flavia been content to stop | at triumphs in a Fleet Street shop ! | had her eyes forgot to blaze ! | or Jack had wanted eyes to gaze ! | O ! but let exclamations cease, | her presence banish'd all his peace " ; Shelley Cenci v. 1 " had I never | found in thy smooth and ready countenance | the mirror of my darkest thoughts : hadst thou | never with hints and questions made me look | upon the monster of my thought, until | it grew familiar to desire — ." Dryden Limherhmn iii. 2 "if I could but resolve to lose no time . . ." ; Etherege Sir Fopling Flutter iii. 3 " if your friend Mr. Dorimant were but here now " ; Disraeli Lothair i. c. 6 " if we could sign to-day : . . . time is important " ; ii. c. 39 "if we could only ascertain who she really is"; Tennyson The Foresters ii. 2 "my men say | the fairies haunt this glade ; — if we could catch | a glimpse of them and of their fairy Queen — " A. W. Hare (in Augustus Hare's Memorials of a Quiet Life ed. 3 vol. ii. p. 71) "oh . . if you knew how much I wish . . ."; Rossetti Poems .• Jenny " if but a woman's heart might see | such erring heart unerringly | for once ! " Marlowe Edw. II. p. 189 a "'tis true, sweet Gaveston. were it false !'"=='''' Jew of Malta v. p. 173 6 "had we but proof of this " ; Byron Occasional Pieces " the heart that gave itself with thee | is silent — ah, were mine as still ! " M. G. Lewis Monk i. c. 2 "after consuming the day in study, if you knew my pleasure at meeting my brethren in the evening!" Shelley Bevolt of Islam xi. 18 "0 could I win your ears to dare be now | glorious and great and calm ! " 2. Beaumarchais Mariage de Figaro ii. 24 "ah, madame, quand je suis rentree du cabinet, si vous aviez vu votre visage!" Claretie M. le Ministre c. 7 " ah, si je vous avals connue ! " Balzac La Gousine Bette p. 222 "ah! si ton p&re m'avait parle comme cela ! " Zola Po« Bouille c. 10 "si elle avait seulement connu les lois!" Alph. Daudet 8apho p. 136 " ah ! si nous nous (Stions rencontres plus tot." Molifere Misanthrope i. 2 " en eusses-tu fait une [sc. chute] k te "^^ On the same page in a similar sentence we have the apodosis expressed : " might I keep thee here as I do this, | happy were I ! hut now most miserable." 174 3— cxib CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 541 casser le nez!" Beaimiarch. Manage de Figaro v. 18 "y fussiez-vous un cent ! " Moli&re Tartiiffe iii. 7 "si vous pouviez savoir avec quel d^plaisir | je vois . . ." ; Festin de Pierre i. 4 " si le remords le pouvoit prendre ! " iii. 2 " si vous vouliez me secourir, monsieur, de quelque aum6ne ? " Montesquieu Lettres Persanes iii. " all ! mon cher Usbek, si tu savais etre heureux ! " Beaumarchais Eugenie v. 3 " s'il savait quel ooeur il a ddchir<5 " ; Earlier de Sdv. i. 4 " ah ! si Ton pouvait ^carter tons les surveillants ! " ii. 1 " si je pouvais I'entretenir un moment ! " Mariage de Figaro i. 1 " ah ! s'il J avait moyen d'attraper ce grand trompeur . . ." ; i. 8 "ah, si j'osais parler ! " iv. 10 "si cela se pouvait!" La Mh'e coupable iv. 9 "si tu savais a quel point tu m'es chfere ! " iv. 17 "si I'on pouvait la faire respirer ! " Louvet Faublas i. p. 357 "au moins . . . si je pouvais le voir !" ii. p. 584 "encore si son ombre me poursuivait seule!" La Fontaine Gontes : La Gourtisane Amoureuse " h^las ! si le pass6 I dans votre esprit pouvoit ^tre effac^ " ; Balzac La Cousine Bette p. 345 "ah ! si I'on pouvait payer mes dettes, demande le baron"; pp. 232, 255; Splendeurs et Mish'es des Couriisanes p. 29 "s'il ne dispensait que son argent ! " Octave Feuillet Hisloire d'une Parisienne c. 6 " ah ! si les femmes pouvaient voir ce qui se passe dans le coBur d'un malheureux fils . . ." ; Zola Pot Bouille c. 2 " ah ! si c'toit k refaire, et si j'avais seulement connu votre famille ! " Renan Drames Philosophiqv£s : L'Ahbesse de Jouarre v. 2 " ah ! maman, quand done viendras-tu voir mes tulipes ? si tu savais comme elles sont belles ! " ™'' 3. Alfieri Saul i. 2 " ah, se vista I'avessi ! " Nota II Filosofo celibe ii. 3 " se mi fosse dato d'incontrarla ! " Ariosto La Lena iii. 4 " I'avessi jer saputo, che assettatola | un po I'avrei." Aretino II Marescalco iv. 3 "la fortuna ha il crine dinanzi, . . . ff. Se ella lo avesse dietro " ; Goldoni II Ventaglio i. 4 " se potessi prevenirla " ; Bwhero Benefico ii. 9 " se sapeste il sacrifizio che h disposto di fare ! . . . ^. Se voi voleste prendervi questo incomodo ! " Alfieri Saul ii. 1 " ah ! s'io | padre non fossi . . . ! " Nota H Filosofo celibe ii. 1 " oh se tu sapessi come scrive bene ! " Petrarca In vita di Laura : Sestin i. 25 " prima ch' i' torni a voi, lucenti stelle, | ■ • . vedess' io in lei piet^ . . . : | con lei cxib In Beaumarchais Twrwre ii. 7 an apodosis, omitted in the first instance, is added as an afterthought : " ah s'il vous inspirait de nommer Altamort ! | I'^tat serait vainqueur, il vous devrait son sort 1 " 542 GREEK AND LATIN i74 3 foss' io da clie si parte il sole, | e non ci vedess' altri olie le stelle, I sol una notte, e mai non fosse I'alba ; | e non si trasformasse in verde selva | per uscirmi di bracoia, come il giorno | ohe Apollo la seguia quaggiii per terra " ; Strascino da Siena Belle hellezze della Dama 4 sqq. {Op. Burlesch. ed. 1760, ii. p. 216) "almanco foss' io un bel cantatore, | ch' io li potessi dir I'animo mio | a chi m'incaloppi6 col suo splendore.'' 4. Da Costa Sonnet (quoted by Bouterwek Hist. Portug. Lit. bk. iii. c. 2) "ah. se ao menos teu nome ouvir pud^ra | entre esta aura suave que respira ! " 5. Schiller Wilhelm Tell i. 3 " 0, hatt' iob nie gelebt, um das zu scbauen ! " Burger Oedichte : Lenore st. 9 v. 4 " 0, war' icb nie geboren ! " Goethe Balladen. Hochzeitlied at. 3 v. 4 "ja, wenn sie ein Broselein hatte ! " 175. Horn. Od. 175. Bekker, while properly omitting an accent on al, 111. 205. when it is used in its ordinary sense of "if," inserts one when al yap )( ai yap. . . , 1 m , ■ ■ , ■ ■ , 1 ^ the word is used, as in the iext, in conjunction with yap; writing the compound expression at yap : and Liddell and Scott draw a distinction between, not merely the usages of the words, but between the very words themselves; treating at as the "Ep. and Dor. for ei, if" and at as an "exclamation of strong desire that / would that ! Lat. utinam, in Hom. always at yap or at yap But they immediately add " Att. el ydp or ^ ydp " ; and there would seem to be no possible reason for the distinction, especi- ally when we find — as in the Text — d ydp or at ydp used in Homer without perceptible difference. 176. Horn. Od. 176. Note the dv attracted away from the verb imKapi^oi, to XIX. 311. which it belongs, up to the side of the relatival particle ws, to which it does not belong. 177. 177. See further notes 1243.2; 127. 178. Arist. ZT.^. 178. 1. Bonitz, in his Index Aristotelicm — in the great ^"k&^ Berlin edition (1831) of Bekker's Aristotle — s.v. dv, evidently takes Kav here as = Kal dv : that is, as though Kav was merely equivalent to an epitatic /cat : as to which see below. 2. In Soph. Aj. 1077 dXX dv8pa XPV^ i^^^ crw/xa yevv^crij p.iyo., I SoKetv Trecrctv av Kav diro (TfiiKpov KaKov, '78 3 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 643 the first Kav = Kal iav (as is the case also in Ar. Fesp. 92), and the av which forms part of the kS.v in the last branch of the sentence is merely a repetition of the preceding civ -which accompanies Trecretv. In Soph. Aj. 767 6eoU [i.h koLv 6 fj^rjSh iov o/xov \ k/jotos KaTaKTii]craiT', the av in the kS.v obviously belongs to the following verb ; as it does in Thuc. vi. 92. 4 Kav i\os S>v iKavws bxfieXoirjv : Plat. Gorg. p. 460 E Kav aSi/ccus XPV™ ■ P- 514 D k&v eyd, o?/tai, Trepl evyec-;, dXX' mroSe^ai, Koiv Toi poSa dvr efjiov ' certe rosas suscipe'; Epist. 64 p. 945 dXX' liret TereXecTTai to, Seivd, Kav fi^t^vva-ov Kal Ko/xas TTov Keivrai 'indica saltern ubi jaceat capillus.' Xenophon Ephes. ii. 1 1 8eo/iat a-ov, av airo/CTCi'vTjs, Kav oXiyov 9dij/ov fie ry yji ' saltern levi pulveris particula me conde.' " 4. With Solon Fr. 20. 1 cited in the Text, cf. Plat. Grito p. 44 B 6TI Koi vvv ifiov ireldov Koi crdOrjTL. 179. Ar. Lys. 179. In Kav e" fie xP^^V ^^^ ''"■' ^^ ''^'' i® ^°^ prevented, by 113. the insertion of dv into the unimportant part of the sentence, from playing its epitatic part in connection with the ei fie xpeir] — " I would, even if it were necessary." So in Xen. Mem. i. 2. 59 et^y) helv rovi firjre Ady^ firjr' epy(ff d)(l>eXLfiov'S ovTdS . . . iravra rpoirov KwXvetrdai, Kav Trdvv irXovcrioi rvy)(_dv(i>ys ^eXriai ea-ea-dab Kat ets Tt eTTtSdjtreiv ; eliroi dv avT<^ 6 Zev^nnro'i ort irpbs yparfiiK-qv Kciv et 'Opdayopi} . . . (Tvyyevofievo';, dKova-aepei,v T(j) y' avTif Tif a,Xr)6e<7T6,T(^ (the av in Kav belongs to the coming Staepeiv) ; Sophist, p. 247 D Xey(a Srj rh Kal oiroLavovv riva KeKT-qp,evov Svvap,i,v etV eli TO iroLetv erepov otlovv Tre(j>VKb'S eir' eis rh iradeiv koX (Tp-iKporarov virh tov (ftavXoToirov, k&v el p,6vov elcrd-rra^, irav TOVTo ovtojs tlvai (the av in Kav belongs to the coming etvai) ; de Bep. v. p. 473 A fj (pva-LV exei irpa^iv Xe^ewi rJTTOV dXrjOeca's edirTe(T6ai, Kav el prj T(fi SoK-ij (the av in Kav belongs to etpdirrea-Oai : " is it natural that action less than speech should have to do with truth, even if haply some one shall not think so ?") ; de Rep. vii. p. 515 D o-uk oi'ei aijT&v diropeiv re dv Kal . . . ; ttoXv y', e<^rj. ovkovv Kav el TTphi avrh rh t^oJs avayKafot avrhv ^Xeirew, dXyeiV t£ dv Ta 6p,paTa Kal k.t.X. (the av in kciv belongs to, and is repeated with, the coming dXyeiv) ; Dem. Mid. p. 530. 21 vCv Se pot SoKei, Kav da-efieiav el Karayiyvda-KOi, Tcl Trpocr^KOVTa irotciv (the av in Kav belongs to the coming Troietv) ; Ar. Eth. Nic. i. 10 (9). 3 tpaiverai Se Kav el p-q OeoTrepTTTOi ecTTiv . . ., Twv deioTdruiv eivai (the av in Kav belongs to the coming etvai.). Xen. Symp. 2. 19. dipxovprjv pev ov, {ov yap ■jruTroTe toot' epaOov) exeipovopovv Se- ravra yap rjTrundpjjV. vi) At", 'e<^ o ^iXiTTTTO^. Kat ydp oSv oiiro) Ta (TKeX-q TOts &pois aiVQ l6pa exeiv, Sxrre SoKeh epoi, Kav el Tofs dyopa- vd/iois drjiUTTi^rjs, &(nrep aprovs, rd Karoi Trpbs Tct dvio, dfij/itos av yeveo-dai (the av in Kav belongs to, and is repeated with, the coming ycveo-^ai). (6) So wliere the apodosis is in participial form : e.g. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 408 A ws tKavwv ovtcov toSv cfiappdKuv laa-acrdaL dv8paaveLTaL ( = Kal ei, . . . cjiaivrjrai, 'icTTai av : cJMveiTai av = "and even if haply it shall appear, it will in very truth be : it will in very truth appear "). 4. It will be noticed that in three of these lastly cited Accompanied passages— viz. Plat, de Rep. ix. p. 579 D and Aristot. Topic, v. 6 sometimes by the 7i ■ \ T ■ -r.1 . 7 T> iKni .,1 -1 . ,,_ present subiunc- (bis), as also in Plat, de Hep. v. p. 473 A, cited above m § 2 tive in the pro- (5) of this note — the verb in the protasis is in the present tasis. subjunctive. Other instances of this are Aristot. de Sophist. Eknch. 24 = p. 179''. 21 ware Kal et rts em-j^eLpolrj crvvdyeiv ws dSvvaTov, dpuxprdvei, k&v el pLvpiaKis ?j (TvXX.eX.oyKT/j.evo'S ( = dp-aprdvei dv, Kal el /x. y a:= " he goes wrong in very truth, even if haply he shall have ten thousand times drawn out his syllogism ") ; Meteorol. i. 6 = p. 343''. 33 ol yap da-repes Kav el fieL^ovs k&v eXdrrovs f^alviovTai, aXK bp,ia% dSiaipeTol ye Kad' eavrovs etvai SoKOWiv ( = Kal el cjiatvwvraL, SoKOvaiv dv = " even if haply they shall seem, yet in very truth appear ") ; de Rep. iii. 8= p. 1279''. 20 el yap eiev oi irAet'ovs ovres exnropoi Kvpioi Tjjs TToAecos, ^TjjxoKpaTLa S' eo-TLV orav rj Kvpiov to , 7rX,7Jdos, o/iottos Se Trdkiv Kav e! ttov iTvp,pabvrj toiis aTrdpoi;? JAdiTTOus /i£v eivai tCjv eviropoiv, KpeirTOVs 8' oVras Kvpiovs elvai Tiys TroAiretas, ottov 8' oXiyov Kvpiov ■TrXrjOos, 6\iy- apxlav elvat ^acnv, ovk dv /caAws So^eiev SitopLcrOai Trepl Toiv TToXiTeibiv ( = Kal e'i ttov crvfifiaivrj, ovk dv So^eiev : the dv in Kav belonging to, and being repeated with, the coming 6d^et£v); de Poet. i. l=p. 1447". 21 aTrao-at fiev Troiovvrat Triv uifiTjcnv ev pvOfii^ koI Xoyif Kal apfiovit}, rovTOts 8' 548 GREEK AND LATIN" i8o4 r] xmph rj jxefxiyfikvoi.'S, oiov apixovicji. jjiv Kal pv6iJ.<^ ■^piifievai p,6vov, 17 re avXrjTiKr] Kal rj KiOapurriKri, Kav ei! Tjves erepai Tvy)(av(ao-iv oScrai rrjv Svva/xiv, oTov ij tuv (Tvpiyyoyv ( = Kal av {^piapLivai), el Tvy)^dv(av. the Kai in Kav is simply the copula; the iSiapev is mentally repeated after it ; et' is used in the indirect sense of " whether " : as to which see note 196. 6 below ; and the dv in Kav belongs to the coming SwaL/xeda. So that the sentence is equivalent to iva ra re Xa^eiv = . . iSo}p,ev, Kal iSwfiev ei! t " that we may see both SwaifieOa dv and may see '^^ 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 549 whether we should under such circumstances be able to gain something." _i8i. 1. In this passage iraXaC av is the reading of La i8i. Soph. Ph. (which has TraAatav in the text, with -irdXai av, which must ^^^• be taken as iraXai' av, in the margin), Lb, Lc, and E. It has all the authority on its side; and there is no authority for anything else. One does not see, therefore, why it is not also the right reading. Nor can it be displaced as such merely by Dindorf's " Pro- babilior Triclinii lectio TraXaiov est " ; still less by Prof. Jebb's stigmatisation of the " TraXaiav of L " as " manifestly a mere blunder for iraXathv." See above note 53. 5. 2. Keeping, then, the reading iraXaC av, we have to supply dr], omitted, with it. Again Prof. Jebb objects : — " such an ellipse of d-r] is impossible." One respectfully asks, why 1 especially in view of other passages cited in this part of the Text. 3. fSefiriKri, the reading of Lc and B, is accepted by Dindorf in his Text, and also by Prof. Jebb. /Se^rjKoc is given in La, Lb, r, Aid., and /3e/3^K£t in E and T. The weight of authority is, therefore, with /3e/3riK€t, the correction of /3e/3riKoi : for which, however, a better correction is — in the judgment of the present writer — that of Elmsley (on Soph. A]. 278 in Museum Oriticum i. p. 356), ^^/S-qKc, as given in the Text. i8ia. E contra, the verb is expressed in i8ia. Plat. Griton p. 52 D Trpdrreis re a Trep av SovXos o (jiavXoTaTOs TTpd^sLev. irapd )( irepL 182. 1. Arnold finds a difficulty in the word Trapd here, 182. Thuo. vi. " irapd not often occurring with an accusative case, in the simple ^^- ^• sense of 'at' or 'near,' unless the idea of juxtaposition, being by the side of a thing, is intended to be insisted upon " ; adding "perhaps we should read here as in i. 20 [3] irepl rh Aeu/co/jtov" [sc. TO) ''linrdpx'f ire/OiTuxovres]. 2. But where the idea of motion alongside of a thing is involved, as in Find. 01. xi. (x.) 99 TratS' kparhv S' 'Apx^o-Tpdrov | a'ivrjo-a, 550 GREEK AND LATIN 182 2— oxic rhv ciSoi/ KpareovTa XV°5 d\K^ | /Jwjuov Trap' 'Okvfi- TTiov "^ ° : or that of extension alongside of a thing, as in the case of a string of men extended alongside, as opposed to a single man standing by the side, of a thing ; as for example in Herod, iv. 62 Kal hnira di/tvet/cai/Tes civo) eKi rhv ojkov rZv pvydv(jiiv Karaxkovm xb aijia tov aKivaKeos. avm p,lv Bfj opeovcri toSto" KaTto 8e irapa. rb Ipov ■Koie.vari xaoe : or in the present passage of Thucydides, where Hipparchus and Ms train might be said to have been Trapa rh AeoiKoptov, to have been "alongside of the Leocorium," there seems little objection to be made to the expression. 3. Of the passages cited by Arnold, Xen. Anab. iii. 4. 9 irapa ravrriv rijv ttoXiv ijv 7rvpap,i,s Xidivrf = "running alongside of this town was a stone pyramid " ; ib. i. 4. 3 ai Se v^cs u>pp,ovv Trapa. ttjv JS.vpov (TK-qv-qv = " the ships were moored, and, as moored, ran alongside of Cyrus' tent." 4. Since the foregoing paragraphs were written, we have the fortunate recovery of Aristotle's ' KOiqva'uav iroXiTda : in c. 18 of which we read rhv fx\v "iTTTrapyov ^iaK\opovr](rai OUTOS av Tbiv tt/OOS €[jL16 l]<^/3ovTtf€v = " relies upon his private agreement made with me, as he would (sc. rely upon it, if made) with a person who was persuaded that a man, if he had treated with contempt what was due to you, would nevertheless have been careful of what was due to me." The Wjo&s which goes with kpl must be continued on so as to accompany nva TTiva-Oivra also. Mr. Kenyon's "lays stress on the private covenant which he made with me, apparently expect- ing people to believe that a man who . . ." is a paraphrase rather than a translation of the language of Hyperides. 183. And see another example in Plat. Pliaedon p. 98 C. 1S3. ihavep h,v In such passages, as the following, we have the/wM phrases ^'' of this sort ; i.e. those in which the apodosis contains its verb : — Plat. Proto^r. p. 327 E eld' Sxrirep av el (rproli rts StSatr/caXos — with verb in rov eXXrjvi^eiv, oi5S' ai' els (JMveirj, ovSe y' av, oipai^ el apodosis ex- friTofs Tts civ rjpiv SiSd^eie tovs tui/ x^'P°'''^X'"^'' '^'^'^ Pi'^^^^"- avrrjV ravTrjv rr]v rexvrjv ■^v 87) Trapa tov irarphs pepa- dvKaa-i, . . . TovTovs en ( = Lat. inquam) tls av SiSd^eiev ov p(fStov oipai eti/ai . . . Tovrtav SiSdcrKaXov cjiavrjvai, twv 552 GREEK AND EATIN 183 Sk aTreipwv TravTairatri pJiSiov, ovTW Se aperrjs Kai ruv aXX(i)V wavTiDv: Gorg. p. 447 C ipov avrov. X. Tt €po)/j,ai; 2. oWts ecrri. X. ttus Xeyets ,' S. Sxnrep av el eTvy\a,vev &v v7roSrjfji.dT(i)V Srjfiiovpyo^, direKpivaTO av Si^ttov (70i, OTL O-KVTOTOflOS. 183a. Plat. 183a. /xijSe epexegetic. See above note 44. 3. Oorg. p. 479 A. 184. 184. Of. supra Text § 85, and note 148 ad I. 184a. 184a. So Plat. Syrrvpos. p. 208 rQv dvOpuiiriov el eOeXei^ eis T^v (juXoTi/iiav p\e\pai, davp.d^oi.'s av Tijs aXoytas- And with the future indicative in the protasis Plat. Aldb. Pr. p. 122 C el S' aS e^eAijcrets els po- (TVVT)V Te Kal Kocrp,t,6TrjTa diro^Xe\pai . . ., TraiSa av ■^yi^araio cravTov ttSo-l tois toiovtols. 185. Soph. Aj. 185. On the collocation el ovk I^s see above note 54. 5, and ^^^^- subnote Ixii. 186. Soph. El. 186. Note dv with the a long. See above note 12. 3. 314. 1S7. 187. Compare, in English, Miss A. E. Bayly (Edna Lyall) Donovan vol. i. p. 63, ed. Lond. 1882 "it would be the very best thing possible . . ., if you do not shrink from it too much." 188. "Would" 188. Compare as similarly constructed sentences ap'odosis for Heywood Woman Killed with Kindness p. 110 "because "will " etc. you are my master, and if I have a mistress, I would be glad like a good servant to do my duty to her " ; Dekker The Shoemaker's Holiday p. 29 "if I tarry now, I would my guts might be turned to shoe-thread " ; Job xxxi. 24 " if I have made gold my hope, or have said to the fine gold, thou art my confidence ; if I rejoiced because my wealth was great . . . ; if I be- held the sun when it shined, . . . and my heart hath been secretly enticed, or my mouth hath kissed my hand : this also were an iniquity to be punished by the judge : for I should have denied the God that is above " ; Butler Analogy pt. ii. c. 6 " but if the prince be supposed to regard only the action . . ., he would not always give his orders in such a plain manner " ; Locke Conduct of the Understanding 10 "if his opinion I 2 — cxii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 553 be settled upon a firm foundation, if the arguments . . . be clear, good, and convincing, wby should lie be shy to have it tried whether etc. " ; Byron Occasional Pieces: To Thyrm "if rest alone be in the tomb, I I would not wish thee here again " ; Shelley The Genci v. 1 " now if you | have any word of melancholy comfort I to speak to your pale wife, 'twere best to pass I out at the postern " ; id. Prometheus Unbound, ii. 3 " how glorious art thou, Earth ! and if thou be | the shadow of some spirit lovelier still, | though evil stain its work and it should be | like its creation, weak yet beautiful, ] I could fall down and worship that and thee " ; Disraeli Lothair vol. ii. c. 10 " ' has not the divine Theodora told you ? ' ' She has told me many things, but not that' ' How then could I know,' said the Princess, ' if she has not discovered it ? ' ' Perhaps she has discovered it,' said Lothair. ' Oh ! then she would tell me,' said the Princess, ' for she is the soul of truth.' " Compare also Etherege Sir Fopling Flutter ii. 1 " when we are in perfect health, 'twere an idle thing to fright ourselves with the thoughts of sudden death." Balzac La Gousine Bette p. 234 "si vous voulez rester, il faudrait vous faire votre lit de repos vous-m^me." So in French. 189. 1. Tis, the indefinite particle, = " some one," is here 189. Aesch. used in the sense of " you." So in ^^PP^- ,?2i. •' _ Tis (indefinite) Soph. Aj. 1138 tovt' eh dviav rowos 'ipx^Tai rivL ="yon." 2. In ="I-" Soph. Aj. 403 TToi Tts oSv <^iJy2J ; | toi noXiov /xevlo ; and Ar. Plut. 438 ai/a^ "AttoXAov Kal Oeoi, ttoi tis 4''"yV > the same particle is used in the sense of "I." In Soph. Ant. 750 ravT'qv ttot ovk ecrO' (bs eVt fucrav yaueis. I A. ^S' oSv"™ Oaveirai, Kal 6avov(r' 6\ei Tivd. I K. if KdwaireiXQv &S' eTre^ipx^i- Opacrvs ; by TLvd in v. 751 Haemon means himself. Creon's retort in V. 752 is founded on the assumption that the word in question ™i I ijd' oSi'. So Dindorf reads in Ms text ; adding, however, in his note Soph. Ant. 751. " ijd' V E. * S' oSv lemma scholii et soholiasta ad v. 1232." «S (etc.j oS^ )( 6 It would seem to be the proper Inference from this that the rest of the MSS. (etc.) S ovv. agree in the reading ^d' oSv. (Soph. 750.) Ant. 554 GREEK AND LATIN 189 2 refers to him — Creon. "Do you carry thus your boldness so far as even to threaten me ? " = "lie." 3. The third person — "him," "he" — is referred to in Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 402 rd\' av yevobTO /j-avTii ij 'vvoi'a Tivl : Ar. Ban. 552. 554 (cited by Brunck ad Soph. Aj. I.e.) KaKhv iJKei tivI . . . Smrei ns Siktjv. 190. 190. £7rtTa^d/iea-0a passive. See above note 55. 191. Lys. Urai. 191. 1. In point of construction, compare Tpith this p. 127. 42. Shelley Oend i. 2 extr. " I were a fool . . ^ | if she escape me." 2. Bekker wrongly adopts Eeiske's unnecessary correction, Srijieva-aire, for the universal reading Srnxevo-ere. Of. Heindorf ad Plat. Phaedon p. 107 C. 192. Eur. 192. 1. Prof. Conington (Journ. Glass, and Sacr. Philology i. = 300 N^ ■ p. 337) quotes this passage — in the shape OVK av yevoiTo TpavfLaT , e! Tts cy^^cj? | Od/J-vois lAeiots : 2. Were it not so, one would perhaps prefer the reading ■^ S' oiv : there being no substantial difference created by the use after a pronoun and 5' odv of the future indicative instead of the imperative ; as to which latter use see John Wordsworth in Philological Museum i. p. 243, and the examples given by him. 3. In Soph. Track. 329 t) 5' odv idcrdoj, Kal Tropev^uBia ar^yas \ oiirus 6iro)s ^5i(7Ta, /j.T]dk irpbs KaKoh \ rois odcri, Xitrriv irpbi 7' ^jUoD \iiTr(V [sic La.] Xd^ot (not cited by Wordsworth) Dindorf so edits, but it would seem from his note — " scribebatur f(S' odv " — that it is only by way of correction. But that is not un- commonly the case. In Soph. Aj. 961 (also not cited by Wordsworth)— ol S' odv yeXiJivTav KawixaipovTav kokois | tois tovS' — the MSS. have oXS' oSv ; and so Lobeok edits in his text, although he silently in his notes reads ol d' oSv. The Leyden MS. of Suidas, who s.v. jSX^iroi'Tes cites the passage, has however ol S' off, whence Her- mann — and see also Bergler ad Ar. Ach. 186 — reads ol S' oSv : and so Dindorf. 4. In reference to the passages cited by Wordsworth, the facts seem to be as follow : — Soph. Oed. Tyr. 669 6 5' odv 'hta, Kel xp^ iJ.e TravreXas Baveiv, | ■^ 71;$ Htljiov TTjird' diraa-eijvai. pig,. "Vulgo ifS'," says Dindorf. The Scholiast's lemma gives 6 d' ; which is accepted by Elmsley and Dindorf. Ar. Ach. 186 ol d' oS;/ podivTav, This would seem to be the universal reading. At. Lys. 491 ol d' oSv roOd' oiivexa Spiivrwv | S Ti ^oiXovTai,, The same re- mark applies here. In Aesch. Prom. 935 6 S' odv iroieWiii (on which Wordsworth s note is written), Dindorf remarks "6 S' odv Elmsleius, vidgo SS' odv." 5. The consensus of the MSS. in the two passages of Aristophanes just mentioned, and the analogy of the examples of ai S' oSz' followed by an impera- tive, of which Wordsworth gives several, e.g. Aesch. Eum. 226 i\ovs S' VTreKcrw^OKV kvaXiwv TTopbiv — wherein TTiixTrei virtually = ejrc/iTrc : Andoc. de Myst. p. 3. 11 4x"° Meya/oaSe vire^eXddv, eKetOev Se eirayyeXXeTai rfj fiovX-Q, d oi aSciav Soiev, firjvvcruv . . . — wherein eirayyeXXeTai virtually = c7r')7y)'eAAeTO. See further note 93. 4 (2). 195. In Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 401. 20 ctVcti/ Srj 4>aa-i rhv ^drvpov OTi, &v fJL€v ol aXXoi Seovrai, ovSevhs i>v ev Xpd ^"'^ i'l Oed. Gol. 945 '^''^ evpedrjo-av)." 3. In earlier times Dawes {Misc. Crit. p. 103) had written "observare libet, verba istius formae, cujus est deia-oi . . .°™ temporibus praeteritis significatione futura perpetuo subjici"; citing as examples Ar. Plut. 88 iyia yap &v /leipaKiov •qTreiX.rjO-' on, | (is tovs StKaiovs Kot arocf>ov's koI Kotr/itous | juovous /JaStoi/xijv : 997 VTrenrovcrrj^ 6' ori | £is ecnrepav ■tj^oiixi : Vesp. 800 rjKfjKor] yap ws 'AOrjvaioi ttote | StKacroiev ctti Tail oIkmutl ras StKas, I Kav TOis irpodvpoii kvoLKO&ofx/fjCroi iras avrfp, | avTi^ SiKaa-TrjpiSbov /xiKpov Travu."^™ 4. While, later than the others, Curtius (Das Ferbum der Gr. Sprach. ii. p. 344, ed. 2 ( = p. 318, ed. 1)) thus writes : — " Der Optativ des Futurums, welcher ja uberhaupt nur in einem von einem Prateritum abhangigen Satzgeschiebe seine Verwendung findet, ist . . . der homerischen Sprache fremd, wo sich kaum eine Gelegenheit zur Anwendung darbot. Vielleicht ist Pindar Pyth. 9. 11 6 crvv 8' aidXoi'S eKeXevcrev SiaKpii/ai trkdev °^™i | avTiva a-xqiroi Tts rjpwoiv das alteste Zeugniss fiir diesen Modus, der uns dann bie to this effect ; that they (his eyes) should not see either what evils he was endur- ing, or what he was doing, but in darkness henceforth should see those he would not, and not recognise those he would." oxv ^j,j 3' oSoifeK' dvSpa Kal irarpoKrivov \ K&vayvov oi Scholar', oid' Srifi Soph. 0. C. yd/ioi. I fwij/res eipiBi](Tav duSffioi. riKvav : where indeed Scholar' is a correction 944. of the Se^alar' — " quod tuentur omnes MSS." — of Elmsley's ; who adds : " simili modo confusa 5rj\diiroitiU. et S7J\di(Taiiu Oed. T. 792, ^ktIitovto et iKTiaatro Aj. 304, 4>a.voli\v et (pavelr/v ibid. 313 : iKSUuolaTo et ixiruaaiaTo apud Aesohylum Pers. 360." oxTi The words of Dawes here omitted and represented by . . ., are " nusquam vel notione optativa adhiberi "—which may be taken to be correct— "vel cum vocula Kev sive &v conjungi " — which is »■ prejudice which we have seen to be in- correct. See note 14. 6 ; — "sed." cxvii So Dindorf edits the lines ; but with the notes " tiktikSti Brunckius. Libri Ar. Vesp. 800 7iKTiK6eiv "—as to which see above note 7. 4— and " ^j/outo5o^i)(rei B.C.V.A. Aid. sqq. i.voiKoSoii.iiaa R. et Kusterus. ivoiKoSoniaoi Dawesius "=Misc. Cnt. p. 104 ; as to which, the reading of the Ravenna MS. is probably the right one. See Mr. Shilleto ad Dem. de Feds. Leg. p. 401. 20, cited above in note 195. oxviii i. Apparently a lapsus of the pen on the part of Curtius for iroSCiv ; for Pind. P. ix. which no variation of reading, it would seem, exists ; and with which Dissen com- 116. pares Pind. Nem. x. 48 ai.prp-6iJ£V0i (or iva dfj^aip^fieOa) rrjv a.pxqv, — et Svvd/Meda, — rjv Swdp^Oa. 2. Tut into indirect speech after a past, or quasi-past, verb, these sentences become — In English — " We said that we came to take away his kingdom, — if haply we should be able," " — if truly we should be able," corresponding to the Greek €(j>ap,ev fXOetv 6.aiprjcr6iJi,€V0L (or iva a.(j>aipoifie6a) rfjv apxqv, J / Svvw/jxda, \ SwaifieOa (Xen. Anab. vii. 1. 28), « ( SvviLp^da, ' I SwalfieOa. 3. It was the fashion, in the present writer's early days, to lay down that, under such circumstances — at any rate in Attic Greek — (1) The form ip')(6p,eda a<^aipr)<76fi,ivoi (or 'iva d(f)aip(o/j,eOa), — ei Svviiifj^da, was only tolerable : d with the present subjunctive being still regarded somewhat askance. (2) The direct epx6p,e6a d^aipr)(r6fi,£voi (or iva daip(afi,€da), — yjv Bvvuip.t6a, passed over, as a matter of course, into The indirect ec^a/^ev iXOeiv d(j)aiprj(T6iJ,evoi, (or tVa daipoip,e6a), — 1JV Svvaifj,c9a, was impossible : ^v with the past subjunctive being assumed to be quite out of the question. 560 GREEK AND LATIN 6a 4 4. He is thankful to have lived to be able to say, with Scanarelle (Moliere Midecin malgrd lui ii. 6), " nous avons chang6 tout cela." 5. It is, however, certainly remarkable that, whereas in the I direct speech, and also in the indirect speech where the intro- ductory verb is in the present tense, d with the present sub- junctive is rarer, in what remains to us of Greek literature, than is rjv with the present subjunctive — i.e., in strictness, d with the present subjunctive and av, — the contrary is the case in the in- direct speech, where the introductory verb is in the past, or in an equivalent to a past, tense. 6. In this latter case, d with the past subjunctive^ei Ewal- fjteOa, for example — which is the indirect form of d with the present subjunctive — d Syvw/ieOa — is much more common than rjv with the past subjunctive — rjv Swaifieda — i.e. in strictness d with the past subjunctive and av, which postulates, as its direct form, •^v with the present subjunctive — ■^v SwdfieOa — i.e. in strictness ei with the present subjunctive and av. 7. Instances, however, of this latter usage are given in the Text § 140 (/3) med. and above in note 93. 4 (1) extr. 197. Soph. 0. T. 197. irecjidvdai ji av — the reported form of the past perfect 691. subjunctive with av used as a practical equivalent to the future perfect indicative. See above Text §§118 sqq. 19S. Dem. p. 16. 8. 01. 198. See, on the construction of this sentence, above sub- note Iv. 19! F. L. la. Dem. de. 198a. The construction, of course, is Tiva o'Ua-Oe. . . . tj/yjtjjov p. 361. 29. ... Oea-dai, av ; oTfiai, Kal KaTaX.ixxravTa'S avTOvs, vofii^eiv av ecrecrOai KaOapov^. Note the sting of eVeo-^at. Even if they stoned them, they would consider them — not even so — actually absolved, but only on the way to absolution. 198b. Infinitive in protasis, in in- direct speech. 198b. "In Greek any dependent clause in an orafe'o obliqua may stand in the accus. and infin. depending on a verb of say- ing, etc., express or implied, instead of the verhum finitvm," Jelf Gh: Gr. § 889 ; who among other examples — to which may be added Hyperides pro Euxmipp. col. 48 1. 11, ed. Babington, vCv Se AOrjvaLOVS ^Tjtrtv eTvai, Trap &v ras Soipea'S dXrjcjiivat, avTov — cites this passage from Herodotus iii. 105, and also that from iii. 108 : and Thucyd. iv. 98. 3 respectively cited in the Text §§ 133 (y), 139 (y). 199 — oxx CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 561 198c. The same phrase — d aocj^hs § — occurs in Crates 198c. Soph. TetToves Fr. 7. Contrast both with Kav SovXo^ y ns in Eur. Oresi. ■^'''^t- 710. 1523, cited in the Text § 55 (^S), and Philemon 'E^ot/cif. Fr. 1. 199. Aristotle's advice has reference to the case of one, who 199. Ar. Rhet. is speaking Trtpi tmv ^u.^ TrapaSo^wv, a.S-qXiv to, rexva Kai, p,T]Sev dSiKovvTa ' " N-jjTTtos, os, Traripa KTeiva0ap-q(TOVTai. "Indicativum magna consensione," says Stallbaum ad I., "tuentur Bodl. Vat. Ven. b. Coisl. Vind. 1. 3. 4. 6. Florentini omnes, itemque Bekkeri libri praeter Ven. S et Vind. Y sive 2. Itaque servandum duximus quod codd. meliores omnes suppedi- tarunt." He proceeds, however, to deprecate the av being thought " cum ipso indicativo cohaerere," and suggests that the sentence is explicable, as though " scriptorem quum dicere.voluisset : t/Sij av vfioiv ot vUi^ eTriT7]S€voi.ev a ^uiKparrji SiSaxTKei, Kol irai/res TraVTairacrt Sia4>6ap-q(rovTai, mutato structurae tenore posuisse participium." 203 2— exxi-cxxv CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 563 A clear waste of energy on Ms part. See above note 14. 6. 203. 1. Hermann's note on this passage aptly summarises 203. Soph. Aj. the literature about it. 313. " Vulgo," he says, " (^aveujv. Quidam codd. t^avetij, quod (fxivohiv. male probat Porsonus ad Hecub. 848,°'°" (jyavocrjv contra linguam esse ratus, quod Piersonus ad Moer. p. 326 ex conjectura, Brunckius autem ex cod. E. reposuit. Futuri hunc optativum esse recte monuerat Buttmannus in Or. Gfr. § 93. 3,°'™' quern audire debebat Erfurdtius, quod nuper fecit. Elmsleius. Apte Erfurdtius comparavit Jntig. 414,'='°^ Fhilod. 376."==^^ Elmsleius autem Xenoph. Sym. i. T."'^^ " 2. Elmsley's note, to which Hermann refers, is to be found in Mus. Grit. i. p. 357, and is well worthy to be consulted. After citing Porson's note on Eur. Hec. 854, and remarking that Brunck, who first admitted (pavotrjv into the text, believed it to be the (so-called) optative of the second aorist ^avov, in which acceptation (jyavotrjv was certainly — as Person had affirmed it to be — contra linguam, the second aorist e^avov not existing [as to which see Pors. ad Eur. Or. 1266 ed. suae = 1272 Dind. and Buttm. Iireg. Gk. Vhs. s.v. c^atVu], and, assuming its existence, being only capable of having (jxivoi/ju as its optative, Elmsley proceeds : " But if we agree with Buttmann, as quoted by Erfurdt, in considering (^avonjv as the optative of the contracted future avo), it may be safely pronounced a legitimate Greek word. Mr. Elmsley in his note on Oed. T. 538 points out ipol-r] in Xenophon and Sia/iakolrjv in Plato." Then after quoting the passages cited by Erfurdt as to the construction, and adding, de suo, Xen. Sympos. i. 7 ; and after giving reasons for preferring 4>avo!.-qv as the proper reading in the passage of Sophocles in question to c^avet?? — citing in favour of the former, Soph. Ant. 306 €t fm rhv avroxupa rovSt tov tAi^ov | ev/jovres eK^aveiT Is 64>6aXiJbOVavo[r]v nor tfjaveLij, but rejects csxi The passage is Eur. Hec. 842 ed. Pors. = 854 ed. Dind. CX.XU And see Mm in Irreg. Gk. Vhs. s.v. ^alvu. oxxiii Soph. Ant. 411 sqq. KaS'fiixee' &Kpav iK iriyav liTriJ^/e/ioi, | . . . iycpri Kivdv &vdp' dvTjp imppbeoLS \ KaKoiv ivravBa, &irov di oi toXitm irXiov S^etv laeWov, eipdia-TCOs •wa.paTeTO.yii.ivos ■ vofdt;io^, eh fxh t6 TtXari, i^i&v ir^vToeev d.v mpiix^aBai, iv ii tois ffTecois koX iirepde^iois tottois ivofihai' rif v&vti. Kpareiv 566 GREEK AND LATIN 209a 209a. Thue. vii. 2oga. nv akv . . . rjv Se /jlt]. See above note 170.4. 60. 2. 210. Thuc. vi. 210. 1. avTiKpvs . . . irXdv must be taken together, the ^\^' r. ■ collocation of words in the sentence being for the sake of iimphasis. , . ° emphasis. 2. " Some have joined," says Mr. Shilleto on Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 373. 27 — where in Siapp-qSyjv aKovo-avTa -uTroo-xo/xevoD the collocation is in like manner between the first and third words — " avTLKpvi with e(ji7j, which is unquestionably correct in point of the language, but certainly not of the sense. The advice of Lamachus was not simply ' to sail to Syracuse ' (Alcibiades had expressed the same opinion, only he wished to try his talents for intrigue and negotiation first), but 'to sail directly,' while they were yet unprepared, and to strike at once a decisive blow." 3. Mr. Shilleto cites, as other instances of like collocations for the sake of emphasis, Thuc. ii. 5. 7 evOvs v7rocr)(€crdai, diroSuicreLV : iv. 98. 8 (rac^MS re iKeXevov (Tt^lcriv iiiretv \ Plat. Theaet. 178 E toCto •ye o-(j>6Spa viri(r\V€iro TrdvTwv Sia^epetv a-uros : Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 364. 13 ov)(^ o-utw Tore airijyyetAev, dXXa, TravTa ravd' V77epj3ds Siapp-qSrjv tjkciv TreTretKWS ((j>if) ^iXi/mrov $fc)Keas o"(ofeiv, . . . ■ ravTa Trerrpd^^crdai 8vo2v 7] TpiSiv rjjiepZv : Lept. p. 488. 27 irdw roivvv a-irovSy Tts aTT^yyetX^ p,oi irepl tov . . . toiovtov ti Xiyuv avTOvi ■?rapea-K€vdo-dai, ais dp' . . . (wliere in opposition to F. A. Wolf he would join irdw (TTrovSrj with 7rape . T, .. _ , , , , , me,teco,Ui,7ioi,voi, aocoaocio Vecam. u. 5 (a woman to her assumed brother) loro (feminines) " divero tu oenerai ccm esso meco " ; Parabosco I Diporti i. 2 —in Italian. p. 32. 38 "per6 e forza che tn, volendoti eon esso meco godere, faocia ... che ..." ; Fortini Nov. II" Caterina . . . disse : . . . venite con esso me " ; Cinthio Hecatommithi Introd. i. p. 21 a (ed. Ven. 1584) "venendo ad ambe vol gli amanti vostri di notte al buio, (come so, che vi vengono) credendosi Tito essere Caliene, si giacera con esso teco, e Talassio con Caliene, credendo ch' ella sia tu " ; Boccaccio Decam. ix. 6 " dalla quale, ancorachfe paurosamente il facesse, fu lietamente raccolto : e con esso lei, di quel piacere che piu disideravano, prendendo, si stette"; Parabosco I Diporti i. 3 p. 42. 36 " subito detto alia moglie che in modo facesse che 11 padre predicatore a dormire una notte eon esso lei se ne venisse"; Fortini (Nov. II) — a lady speaking to a man of herself and her woman servant — " starete questa sera con esso noi cosi domesticamente " ; 11 Lasca Le Gene i. 6 "con esso voi (a lady) mi portal un poco alia salvatlca e quasi villana- mente " ; Fortini Nov. xiv. " e cosi tutto contento mi accom- pagnai co^i esso loro " (two ladies)."^™'' cxxvib i. "Esso," it is said in the Vocdbolario degli Accademici della Crusca (by Manuzzl : Florence 1836), s.v. esso, "congiuugesi talora coUa preposizione con e sta adverbialmente, e non ha riguardo n& a genere, ne a numero, e vale Insieme, e in un medesimo tempo. Lat. cum, simvl." For which proposition examples are given, one of wMoh, however, — Boccaccio Decam. viii. 8 "Avvenne che Spinelloocio usando molto in casa del Zeppa e essendovi il Zeppa e non essendovi, per si fatta maniera con la moglie del Zeppa si dimestic6, che egli incomincii a giacersi con esso lei " — to which may be added II Lasca Le Cene i. 9 " onde spesso aocadeva che il detto Branoazio si giaceva con esso lei " — is very like some of those above cited,, and otherwise here explained. Still we do find instances like Dante Purgat. iv. 26 "montasi su Bismantova in caciime | con esso i pii" ; Parabosco I Diporti : i, Ragionam. p. 12 "essendo quivi ridutti una mattina per tempo, ed avendo con esso loro fatto arrecare vettovaglia . . ."; Id. ib. ii. 12 p. 89. 31 "io (a lady) ho desiderato parlare con esso i)oi (a man) per sapere ci6 che averra di me " ; ii. 12 p. 92. 36 ahim^ ! che con esso lei non hanno potuto le mie si amare lagrime . . . acquistarmi, non dird qualohe mercede, ma tanto di pieta ! " etc., where esso is used with scant regard to gender or number, and which do lend themselves to the explanation given by the Academicians. 2. But this is only " talora " ; and the case is not always so. Gender and number alUce are properly observed in the following examples, which, amongst other examples from other writers, the present writer has noted Esso — in Italian. 570 GREEK AND LATIN 210 15 15. Compare too Aesoh. Prom. V. 920 rotov iraXatarrriv vvv TrapeiTKCvd^erai I eir' avTos avT(^ : and also ib. 276 tt/dos aA.A,OT' aXAov 7rr]fj,ovrj Trpocri^dvei. And also Horn. 7Z. V. 219 Trpiv y' eirl via twS' dvS/oi . ; x. 224 Ka'i re Trpo o toC IvoTjcrev. 211. Thuc. viii. 211. So all the authorities. " Yulgo urj," sa.js Arnold ad I., 27 4 in merely the first thirteen novels of Parabosoo's / Dipm-ti ; from which several of the above cited passages have also been taken ; — (Parabosco / Diporti) i. 2 p. 30. 32 " credendo ohe essa padrona, con ordine di parlar con esso lui, quinci vemita ne fusse " ; i. i p. 48. 25 " il dottore arriv6 nella camera con un facchino, che con esso lui fatto venire aveva" ; i. 7 p. 59. 24 "Spinardo ... che qualche famigliariti aveva con esso lui . . ." ; i. 8 p. 65. 5 "molto sei grato al magnifico podesti, . . . per aver la servitu antica che tu liai con esso lui fin in Vinegia " ; i. 9 p. 70. 20 " i quali di suo avviso erano venuti in quel loco per ridersi con esso lui" ; ii. 11 p. 82. 21 "il persuadere la giovane a fuggirsene con esso lui in altra parte" (of. Nota II Filosofo Celibe iii. 3 (a woman speaking) " desidero soltanto che entriate bel bello in discorso con esso lui"). i. 2 p. 36. 9 "egli n' and6 con esso Lucio dove egli lo riohiese " (cf. Dante Infern. xxxii. 63 " non quelli, a, cui fa rotto il petto, e 1' ombra | con esso un colpo, per la man d' Artii"). i. 6 p. 56. 11 " assicuratane la moglie di non volere che per allora con esso seco se n' andasse " ; ii. 11 p. 85 extr. "fatto vela a Geneva, con esso seco la trasse." i. 2 p. 32. 38 " e forza che tu . . . faccia adesso . . . che Alessio . . . ne venga con essa meco " ; i. 9 p. 71. 4 " come . . . e questo ! che voi or ora . . . siete stato abbraoiato con essa meco, ed ora," etc. i. 1 (heading) p. 18 "dopo gran querela fatta con essa lei, se stesso avvelena." i. 1 p. 24 med. "oltre oid aveva saputo Fioretta essere stata a diporto con essa Lodomca" ; ih. p. 25. 4 "ma n4 di questo nfe d' altro le voile parlare prima che solo con essa sola . . non si ritirasse" ; i. 5 p. 52. 12 "tolta la fante con essa in compagnia." ii. 13 p. 99. 6 "e poscia di molti anni insieme con essi loro felicemente si visse." So Dante Purgat. xxiv. 97 " tal si parti da noi con maggior valchi : | ed io rimasi in via con essi due | ohe fur del mondo si gran maliscalchi. " 3. It would ill become a foreigner even to seem to suggest to Italian linguists how to explain the anomalies in their own language. The present writer, however, would respectfully venture to submit for their consideration, whether some at least of the apparent anomalies in the use of esso, in particular, — such as those in § 14 of the above note — are not in fact no anomalies at all, but merely a somewhat unusual placement of the word, for the purpose of emphasising it, in the manner treated of in that note. Parabosco I 4' A remarkable instance, not yet mentioned, may be added from Parabosco Diporti ii. 10. I Diporti ii. 10 p. 80, 34 " chiamata una delle guardie, disse per cose importan- tissime al signore voler parlare ; onde fu, senza saper alouno ohi ella si fusse, con- dotta avanti al padre di Gasparo, al quale disse voler di seoreto aloune cose troppo importanti appalesare ; ond' egli ancora non conoscendola, con esso lei solo si ritrasse in una stanza." Here solo can hardly be said not to belong to esso. Compare con essa sola cited above from i. 1 p. 25. 4 ; and add i. 7 p. 61. 1 "credendovi al usato . . . ritrovarvi sola essa Conscienza con qualche mammola." If solo belongs to esso, esso can hardly be said to be used adverbially in con- junction with con ; which in its turn must govern lei. And the doctrine of collocation for the sake of emphasis would seem to be the sole key to the construction ; which = esso solo con lei. 215 3 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 571 who nevertheless prefers to "follow Bekker and Dobree in reading y " ; adding in his Annot. Crit. " y B. Goell. Dobraeus " {Advers. i. p. 99) "Poppo in adnott. p. 666": i.e. by correction only. Of which there is no need. See further note 196a. 7 above. 212. " jSouXotvTo L.O.P.," says Arnold ; " male," says Dobree, 212. Thuc. v. Jdvers. i. pp. Ill, 112 ; rightly. 46. 3. The MSS. in question are only three of minor note, and stand by themselves in this particular case. There is, however, a mixture of constructions in the use of oTi and the infinitive ireiroiya-OaL. 213. The reported form of d &cnv. 213. Thuo. iv. 27. 5. C— TO THE LATIN LANGUAGE 214. 1. "Fabellas Latinas,'' says Cicero (de Fin. i. 2. 4), "ad verbum e Graecis expressas . . . quis . . . tam inimicus paene nomini Romano est, qui Ennii Medeam aut Antiopam Pacuvii spernat aut rejiciat ? " 2. The passage of Ennius before us is not, however, an instance of close translation, although it shows that Ennius knew how to use his own language. Numquam ecferret pedem, " never would | have been carry- ing her foot away" — a continuing act — is perfectly right in itself. It is, none the less, not a close translation of the Euripidean (Med. 6) ov yap av S^cnroiv kjj.y I M^Seia irvpyovi yrj's iirXevcr' 'I(i)AKias= "would have set sail," single act. 3. As to the later versions of Greek Comedies by the Latin Comic writers, see below note 235. 3. and el and their congeners, see above notes 215. 214. Greek plays in Latin versions. Ennius Med. Ex. 212 = 258 M. 215. 1. On 24 and 25. 2. The identity in use, which in the latter note, paras. Latin relative 6 sqq., has been mentioned as markedly existing in Greek ydes^x''™' ^t^w between the relative and the relatival particle on the one hand identity of' their and d on the other, has its parallel, in Latin, in the usage of the uses. like pronouns and particles on the one hand and si on the other. 3. Thus, examples are given in the Text § 1 75 of the use of the past subjunctive, expressive of recurrence, with si. 572 GREEK AND LATIN 215 3 Add the following as examples of a like use with relatival particles : — Plaut. Bacch. 431. E. = iii. 3. 27 inde de hippodromo ^t palaestra libi revenissds domum, | cincticulo praecinctus in sella aput magistrum adsideres ; Li v. i. 32 id ubi dixisset, hastam in fines eorum emittebat; xxiii. 19 postremo ad id ventum inopiae est, ut lora detractasque scutis pelles, ubi fervida mollissent aqua, mandere conarentur ; xxi. 42 ubi vero dimioarent, is habitus animorum non inter ejusdem modo condicionis homines erat, sed etiam inter speotantes vulgo. Liv. xxi. 28 nihil sane trepidabant, donee continenti velut ponte agerentur. Plin. Ep. i. 12. 7 habebat boo moris, quotiens intrasset fidelior amicus ; Tac. Ann. xiii. 3 nee in Claudio, quotiens meditata dissererentur, elegantiam requireres ; ib. xiii. 18 quotiens ipse illuo ventitaret, saeptus turba centurionum et post breve osoulum digrediens. 4. The authors, however, of the best period seem to have preferred to use the past indicative in such cases rather than the past subjunctive. Thus Cic. Verr. ii. : v. 10. 27 quum autem ver esse coeperat . . , dabat se labori atque itineribus. Caes. Bell. Gall. iv. 26 hostes vero, notis omnibus vadis, ubi ex littore aliquos singulares ex navi egredientes conspexerant, inoitatis equis impeditos adoriebantur. Liv. xxi. 42 ut cujusque sors exciderat, alacer inter gratulantes gaudio exsultans cum sui moris tripudiis arma raptim capiebat. 5. For the similar use, after si, of the indicative, in cases expressive of repeated action, see the examples in the Text, para. 171 passim. 6. Livy, as will have been seen, hovers between the two usages. 7. Again, examples are given in the Text § 179 of the use of the present subjunctive with si. Add the following as an example of a like use with the relatival particle ubi : — Plaut. Aulul. ii. 2. 52 ubi t^cum conjunctiis siem, | libi onus nequeam f^rre pariter, jdceam ego asinus in luto : | tii bos me magis liaiit respicias, gndtus quasi numquam siem : | et te utar iniquiore, et meiis me ordo irrideat : | neiitrubi habeam stdbile stabulum, si quid divorti fuat : | Asini me mordlcibus scindant, b6ves incursent c6rnibus = "when I shall haply have become your connection, I shall haply lie, etc." 2i8 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 573 2 1 6. As to the existence or otherwise of a future imperfect in Latin, see above note lo. 2. 2l6. 217. For the reason why not also ivere to placing, see above Text § 12. placing or were 217. 218. 1. On the use of "should" or "would" in such cases, see above note 2 1 ; and note what is there said about the pre- ferential use of "should" in cases where a notion of duty or fittingness is involved. 2. The past subjunctive is occasionally used in Latin in such nuance ; and, when so used, is aptly translated by " should," and not "would." The following are some instances : — Cic. Verr. ii. : i. 42. 107 testamentum P. Annius fecerat . . . Quodsi ita fecisset, tamen post illius mortem nihil de testa- mento illius novi juris constitui oporteret. Voconia lex te, videlicet, delectabat ? Imitatus esses ipsnm ilium Q. Vo- conium = " you should | have imitated (so. if you were to have been honorably disposed)." Cic. Verr. ii. : v. 65. 168 etiamne id magnum fuit, Panormum litteras mittere ? adservasses hominem . . ., olausum hahuisses, etc. = " you should | have kept the man in durance, had him in charge (sc. if you were to have wished to do right), etc." Cic. de Fin. ii. 12. 35 Epicurus autem quum in prima com- mendatione voluptatem dixisset, si earn, quam Aristippus, idem tenere debuit ultumum bonorum, quod ille ; sin earn, quam Hieronymus, fecisset idem, ut voluptatem illam [Aristippi] in prima commendatione poneret = " he should I have done the same (sc. if he were to have been consis- tent)." Cic. de Fin. iv. 20. 57 quid igitur voluit sibi, qui ilia mutave- rit ? Saltem aliquid de pondere detraxisset, et pauUo minoris aestumavisset ea, quam Peripatetici, ut sentire quoque aliud, non solum dioere videretur = " he should | have taken off a little should I have estimated (sc. if he were to have been 218. "Sliould' )( "would." Past subjunc- tive in Latin in former nuance, expressive of duty or fittingness. Cic. de Nat. Dear. i. 32. 89 quem tibi hoc daturum putas? Si enim ita esset, quid opus erat te gradatim istuc pervenire ? Sumpsisses tuo jure = "you should | have assumed the position as of right (sc. if you were properly to have con- ceived your position)." Propert. v. ( = iv.) 7. 29 si piguit portas ultra procedere, at illuc I jussisses lectum lentius ire meum = " you should | 574 GREEK AND LATIN 218 2 have given orders (so. if you were to have had any affection at all for me)." Plant. Psevd. 286. R. =i. 3. 52 [on which see below note 283] si amabas, invenires miituum. | Ad danistam d^venires, Ad- deres faeniisculum : | surruperes patrl = " if you were in love with the girl, at any rate if you were to have been in love with her, you should | have been for finding the money on loan. You should | have been for turning aside to the money-lender : for adding a little interest, for stealing the cash from your father." Ter. A7idr. iv. 4. 53 alio pacto haut poterat fieri, | ut sclret haec, quae v61uimus. M. Praediceres = " you should | have been keeping me posted up beforehand (so. if you were to have wished me to follow your drift)." Ter. Hecyr. ii. 1. 31 sola hie fuisti ; in te 6mnis haeret oiilpa sola, Sdstrata. | Quae hie erant curares = " what was here you should | have been looking to (sc. if you were to have been attending to your duty)." Gio. de Off. iii. 22. 88 male enim Curio, quum oaussam Transpa- danorum aequam esse dicebat, semper autem addebat : Vin- oat utilitas ! Potius diceret, non esse aequam, quia non esset utilis reipublioae, quam, quum titilem diceret non esse, aequam fateretur = " he should rather | have been for adding (so. if he were to have been desirous of being accurate)." Liv. xlv. 37 Servius ... si in L. PauUo aocusando . . . doou- mentum eloquentiae dare voluit, non triumphum impedire debuit, . . . sed . . . nomen def erret, uta. = " he should | have been for sending in Paulus' name (sc. if he were to have been using common sense)." Ter. Phorm. ii. 1. 67 dotdm daretis: qua&eret aliiim virum. | Qua ratione inopem p6tius ducebdt domum ? | G. Non ratio, verum arg^ntum deerat. D. S&meret | alioilnde = " you should I have been for finding her a dower : she should have been looking out for some one else as a husband (sc. if you were all to have been intent in doing what was right) . . . He should | have been for borrowing money from some quarter (sc. if — as before)." Madvig's view 3. This use of the past subjunctive in Latin is noticed, and of the usage : j.jjg passages above cited — with the exception of those from the Pseudulus and PJwrmio- — are referred to in its support, by Madvig in his notes on the sentences quoted from the De Finibws. 4. He would have — and rightly — the subjunctives in question to be " ex eo genere conjunctivorum, quod post condicionem (sive ea verbis expressa est sive intellegitur) ponitur ad signiiicandum non id, quod fieret factumve esset, sed quod fieri debuerit." Nor 2i8 6 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 575 — probably in- correct as to negative sen- tences. is there much serious ground for complaint, when he proceeds to style the said subjunctives " jussivus modus praeteriti temporis." ^ 5. But, when he goes further, and adds " itaque in negando dicitur me," and cites in proof aut ne poposcisses from Cic. ad Att. ii. 1. 3, and ne emisses from Cic. Ferr. ii. ; iii. 84. 195 (the latter being also similarly cited in his Latin Gh-ammar (by Woods ed. 3) s. 351 Obs. 4), it seems to the writer that he goes too far, and moreover that the passages he refers to do not support him. 6. They are as follow, and in the writer's judgment their respective meanings are such as are shown below : — (1) Cic. ad Att. ii. 1. 3 isdem ex libris perspioies et quae gesserim Cio. ad Att. ii. et quae dixissem : aut ne poposcisses : ego enim tibi me non !• 3. offerebam = "from the same books you will get a clear notion of both my doings and my sayings : or (if you do not like that prospect, 1 would | have begged you) not to have asked for them. For it was not I that was offering myself to you for your contemplation." Of. Key Lat. Diet. s.v. Ne 14 : — "with subj., some such verb as quaeso or obsecro understood." (2) Cic. Verr. ii. : iii. 84. 195 quum tibi senatus ex aerario yerr. ii. ; iii. pecuniam prompsisset et singulos tibi denarios adnumerasset, 84. 195! quos tu pro singulis modiis aratoribus solveres, quid faoere debuisti 1 si quod L. Piso ille Frugi, qui legem de pecuniis repetundis primus tulit, quum emisses, quanti esset, quod superaret pecuniae, rettulisses : si, ut ambitiosi homines aut benigni, quum pluris senatus aestumasset, quam quanti esset annona, ex senatus aestumatione, non ex annonae ratione solvisses : sin, ut plerique faciuut, in quo etiam erat aliquis quaestus, sed is honeatus et concessus, fnimentum, quoniam villus erat ne emisses : sumpsisses id nummorum, quod tibi senatus, celiac nomine, concesserat = " seeing that the senate had taken money for you out of the Treasury and counted out to you so many coins for you to pay to the farmers in return for so many bushels of corn, what was it your duty to do ? WeU ; if what L. Piso Frugiy of good renown, did, he who was the first to carry the law for the repayment of moneys, — after having bought, for whatsoever price it was, you would I have paid back to the Treasury the surplus money : if, as men currying favour or really kindhearted do, seeing that the senate had estimated the price of the corn as higher than it really was, you would | have paid for it at the senate's estimate rather than at the quotation for it in the market : but if, as most people do — a course of proceed- ing too in which lay a something of gain, but at the same time a gain honorable and permitted — even granting that you had not bought the corn, it being somewhat poor stuff, 576 GREEK AND LATIN 218 6 you would I have kept for yourself that sum of money, which the senate had given to you, as for the stocking of your own granary." Cf. Key Lat. Diet. s.v. iVe 21 : — " in concessions ' granted that.' " 219. lshould\ 219. For the reason why not also | or V be happening, see above Text § 12. ywmild] 220. Indicative with participle in -turus : Indicative subjunctive with that in of sentences of (B) a ii. type. Cic. de Div. ii. . 21. pro Mil. 18. 48. Indicative with participle in -turus as a pro- tasis. -eiidtis sum. 220. 1. The participle in -turus in such cases is properly- accompanied by the indicative mood ; because, as Madvig (Opusc. Acad. 199) correctly says, "Status . . . facturi aliquid, si quid fiat, a condicione non pendet, sed tantum ipsum facere." 2. But the case of the participle in -endus is otherwise, and- with it either the indicative or the subjunctive may be the adjunct. "Sejungendus est,'' says Madvig I.e., "... usus alterius participii passivi : nam in eo quum futuri notio non tam definita sit, potest indicativus poni, ut sejuncta verbi substanti-vi et participii notione significetur, statum eum fuisse, ut si condicio aliqua incideret, necessario aliquid fieret ; potest etiam conjunc- tivus." See further Madvig Opusc. Acad. : Praefat. vi. ; and Opusc. Acad. Alt. 227-230, 305. 3. On p. 230 of Madvig's second work, just referred to, he "winds up his dissertation on the thesis " In condicionali sententia semper dicitur facturus fui {cram), d scissem, numquam facturus fuissem,'' with the remark, " Patet opinor verum esse, quod initio posui, nee dubitabo in uno qui obstat Ciceronis loco (de Div. ii. 8. 21 aut si fato . . ., etiam si obtemperasset auspiciis . . . idem eventurum fuisset) librariorum temeritatem accusare scriptumque a Cicerone putare fuit." Adding in a note " non longe remotum est ab bac quaestione, quod in oratione Miloniana c. 1 8. 48 legitur in sententia condicionem continente si quidem exiturus . . . fuisset. Haec enim condicio contraria est non huic affirmationi sed edit, verum huic : sed exiturus fwit, et hoc significat si quidem non constitutum habuisset exire." 4. In Madvig's Opusc. Acad. Alt. p. 281 he places side by side the Greek and Latin phrases el /AXXeL rb irpayfia e^etv and si — haUtura est, referring to Cic. de Nat. Dear. i. 37. 103; de Legg. i. 21. 56; Tusc. v. 5. 13; Acad. ii. 8. 25; pro Rose. Am. 34. 68. 5. On the participle in -endus with sum, see Key Latin Gram. §§ 466, 1214; Max Muller on "Comparative Mythology" in Ozfm-d Essays (1856) p. 12. 221 2 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 577 22 1. 1. " The Eesultant of the past," as the writer's friend . 221. The past and former co-Fellow, Mr. Eoby, has happily phrased it, in his jSiye'in Lato reply {Classical Eeview i. p. 197) to the somewhat startling thesis conditional sen- maintained by Mr. E. A. Sonnenschein in the earlier part of the tenoes. same volume {ib. i. pp. 126 sqq.) that the past imperfect subjunc- ^^^[^ Sonnen- tive in the protasis of a Latin Conditional Sentence referred primarily not to past, but to present, time. " He appears to me," says Mr. Eoby, " to confound two very Mr. Roby. diiferent things — an equal number of instances and an equal legitimacy of use. I agree that in the majority of instances the " past "imperfect subjunctive in the protasis (and I add in the apodosis also) of Conditional Sentences refers to what he calls present time, but except in this statistical sense I do not think that it ' refers primarily ' to the present. " The fact is, present time is a mere limit between past and future (see my § 1455) and has no duration of itself. The grammarian may say with the moralist, fugit hora: hoc quod loquor inde est. The" past "imperfect subjunctive is used in these sentences, when you contemplate the present as the re- sultant of the past, and the present subjunctive is used when you contemplate the present as the starting-point of the future. But the " past " imperfect is also in conditional, as well as in other, sentences used of a continuous state, contemporaneous with some past action or time ; and this use is every bit as good Latin as its use of the present time. I never dreamt of implying . . . that ' I put the reference to the present and to the past on the same footing ' in point of frequency of use (I well knew the case to be otherwise), but I did mean to imply that they were both perfectly legitimate. And I can see nothing at all strange in Cicero's pointed expression mim quewadmodum audiar seniio, et tunc" — ^read at tvm — "si dicerem non avdirer (Cic. Glu. 29. § 80) ... I find . . . sufficient instances from one book of Cicero "to prove all that I want. See" ii. "Ferr. iii." 13 "§ 32 faceres . . .posset/' 26. " &5 Jieret" ie3.d fiereni " . . . concederes;" 48. "115 ageretur . . . postularent ; " 56. "129 perpeterere . . . pertinerent " read pertineret. " Where there is nothing illogical or unnatural in the use, a few instances from a writer like Cicero are sufficient to establish its correctness." 2. It will be seen from the Text above here, and from the examples cited below in it, paras. 176. 177, that upon the point thus at issue between Mr. Sonnenschein and Mr. Eoby the writer agrees with the latter; as does also the writer's friend and former private tutor, Prof. J. B. Mayor : from whose able 2 p 578 GREEK AND LATIN 221 2 summing up (Classical Beview i. pp. 239, 240) of the controversy between the champions, the writer extracts the following Prof. J. B. 3. " Both disputants . . . allow that the " past " imperfect Jlayor. subjunctive is used with reference both to present and to past time, and that it more often refers to the present than to the past ■; but while Mr. Sonnenschein speaks of the latter usage as exceptional in the writers of the best age, Mr. Roby treats this as the normal, and the other as the secondary use. The point is somewhat subtle, but the following reasons incline me to side with Mr. Eoby in his contention. There is a prima facie prob- ability that any special use of a tense will have its starting-point in the general meaning of the tense ; hence it is probable that the" past "imperfect subjunctive of the hypothetical sentence had, to begin with, a reference to a continued action or state in the past ; and this probability is confirmed by the fact mentioned by Mr. Sonnenschein, that in the oldest Latin ■n'ritings the reference to the past is more common than in Cicero and later authors. Mr. Eoby's excellent distinction that the " past " ' im- perfect subjunctive is used in these sentences when you contem- plate the present as the resultant of the past, and the present subjunctive used when you contemplate the present as the starting-point of the future,' enables us to see how naturally the tense, which properly denotes a continuous past, gets to include present time as well ; and this is illustrated by the use ... of our own ' would have ' in such a sentence as that quoted by Mr. Sonnenschein — ' If I had not been Alexander, I would fain have been Diogenes.' In what respect does this differ from ' If I were not Alexander, I would fain be Diogenes ' ? Surely only in the fact that while both refer to present time, the former views the present as the consequence of the past, the latter regards it in itself without looking back to the past; and thus the former comes to imply the impossibility of the hypothetical case, the contrary being supposed already fixed unchangeably. We may translate both si ego rex sim and si ego rex essem by the words ' if I were king ' ; but while the former simply implies ' as I am not,' the latter has the further implication 'as I never can be.' I do not think this implication can ever have been absent from the mind of a Eoman when he used the " past " imperfect subjunc- tive, because however far a word or a phrase may depart from its original use, yet until the old use has become entirely obsolete, it is impossible for the new use to be unafiiected by it ... It would seem, then, that we cannot accept Mr. Sonnenschein's symmetrical scheme of tenses. Not only is the " past " imper- tion. 222 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 579 feet used -witli reference both to past and to present time, but the present also is used both of a future which is already be- ginning, and, as Mr. Sonnenschein allows, of present time with- out reference to a future, as in JSf. D. iii. 79 nam si curent (di homines), bene bonis sit, male malis: quod nunc abest. I think therefore that the true scheme of hypothetical tenses would Allocation of give at least two to each time, /ami a,nd faceret to the present, L^tin conditioVa" faceret and fecisset to the past, facial and facturus sit to the future." sentences. 4. With this last remark, as will be seen from the Text, the present writer heartily agrees ; and he further ventures to think that the modes of translation which he has advocated in the — their transla- Text (of which see, especially, paras. 154 and 159) are more in accord with the real facts of the case than those which are in more common use, and into which even Mr. J. B. Mayor, in the passages just quoted, has somewhat allowed himself, hypotheti- cally, to slide. Thus si faoiat = i/ haply he shall he doing or do, sc. tww or in the future, si faceret = i/ he were to have 6ee»i doing, sc. now or in the past, si fecisset = if he were to have done, or to have-done, sc. m the past ; while in si facturus sit = if haply (sc. now or m the future) he shall he ahout to do, we have what is practically a case of the future. 2 2 2. Key Latin Grammar §§ 496-498: — "In hypothetical 222. Transla- sentences, the subjunctive which marks the condition is expressed t^ons in common by English past tenses ; as Mr. Key. si scribat, if he were writing or were to write, si scriberet, if he had heen writing, si scripserit, if he were to write, si scripsisset, if he had written. "With verbs of static meaning, the past indicative of the English is still used, but somewhat differently ; as si sciat, if lie hneio, si sciret, if he had known, si adsit, if he were present, si adesset, if he had heen present. " In hypothetical sentences, the subjunctive which marks the 680 GREEK AND LATIN 222 cmsequeivx is translated in the present by should or would ; in the past and past perfect by sJumld have or would have ; as soribat, he would write, scriberet, he would have written, scripserit, he would write, scripsisset, he would have written.'' See, to the same effect, Latin Grrammar §§ 1209 sqq. ; and (in some degree of greater precision) Latin Dictionary s.v. Si, iv. 15-20. 223. 223. The writer accepts Mr. Eoby's language (see above note 221) as aptly embodying his own views. 224. 224. See Key's Xaim Grammar &nd Latin Dictionary as, cited and referred to above in note 222. 225. Difficulties 225. For example, caused by the |_ Cicero refers in more than one place to the possibility of tion of the present ^^^ natural day being too short for the consummation of the subjunctive in purpose which he has in hand. Latin conditional 2. Thus — to pass over de Fin. ii. 19. 62 as not being a sentences. t, . 1 ^ 1 conditional sentence — he says (a) Verr. ii. : ii. 21. 52 nam me dies vox latera deficiant, si hoc nunc vooiferari velim, quam miserum indignumque sit . . . No variation in the MSS. (J3) Be Nat. Dear. iii. 32. 81 dies defioiat, si velim memorare, qixibus bonis male evenerit, nee minus, si commemorem, quibus improbis optume. Some slight manuscriptal authority for deficiet. But he also says (y) Pro Gael. 12. 29 facile est accusare luxuriem. Dies jam me deficiet si quae dici in earn sententiam possunt coner expromere. So the MSS. and all the editions before that of Ernesti. (8) Tusc. V. 35. 102 dies deficiet, si velim paupertatis eaussam defendere. So all the best MSS. 3. If these sentences are translated naturally, everything is normal and straightforward. Thus (a) and (fi) " The day will perchance fail me, if haply I shall desire." 226 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 581 (y) and (S) " The day will fail me, if haply I shall attempt," " desire." 4. But if we adopt the common mode of translation, we get, indeed, a not improper meaning for sentences (a) and (;S), but we are driven to deal with sentences (y) and (S) as heing of irregular type, and to explain them as is shown in the Text §193. Thus we shall have (a) and (y8) " The day would fail me, if I were to desire." (•y) and (8) " The day wiU fail me, or rather the day would fail me, if I were to attempt," " desire." 5. Is it even likely that the mere difference between an a and an e in the verb — actually the same verb — in the apodosis of sentences, which otherwise are, so far as the conditional parts go, all but identical, is to make all the difference between the first two sentences being normal, and the last two irregular ? 6. And it must be remembered that, if it were so, we should be obliged to predicate irregularity in every case — ^and they are numerous : several are cited or referred to in the Text § 179 — where we get a future indicative in the apodosis accom- panying a protasis with the present subjunctive. See too notes 276 and 287b below. 7. See further, as to the difference caused by the verb in the apodosis in such cases being in the present subjunctive or in the future indicative, Text §§ 162 sqq. 226. 1. Note obliscar, as Ribbeck spells it, for oUiviscar, 226. Accius which the MSS. of Nonius, who preserves the passage, have. If ■'^^^f.^: ^^^\ we are to retain the latter spelling, we must still pronounce the trisyllawr*^ word as a trisyllable. So in Accius Athamas 190 v^ritus sum arbitr6s, atque utinam mdmet possim obliscier ! where the bulk of the MSS. of Nonius, again the preserver of the passage, has oUmscier: which, if true, must be read as a quadrisyllable. In Plant. Mil. Glor. 1359. E.=iv. 8. 49 miiliebres mor6s discendi, obliviscendi strati6tici, Eitschl remarks "obliviscor verbum . . . nisi admittere in tres syllabas contractionem . . . existimabitur, Militis . . . versum non me habere fatebor qui expediam." In Plaut. Caj)t. v. 3. 8 one reading (others omit jam) is. Ph. C)ir ego te non n6vi 1 St. Quia jam m6s est oblivisci h6minibus : wherein, if the reading be correct, oblivisci must again be read as A trisyllable. 582 GREEK AND LATIN 2z6 2 — oxxvi Contractions in 2. Contractions are not unfrequent in the perfect tenses, perfect tenses. Thus we find Lucil. xxviii. 68i. Misse. = amisisti: Ter. Eun. ii. 2. 10. = olamaveris : Accius Tereus 649. = oognovisse : Lucret. i. 332. = direxisti : Verg. Aen. vi. 57. = illexisse : Aocius Atreus 205. = iiiteUexisti : Ter. Andr. iii. 2. 20.'=''™ " = optaverim : TibuU. 1. 6. 74. = peocaveram : Propert. iv. (iii.) 1 6. 9. = pigraveris: Lucret. i. 411. ^promisisti ) . Q^^^jj_ ^^ 3 g promisisse J = quieveris : Trag. Incert. 28. = c[uievisset : Lucret. i. 346. = servavisse : Pacuv. Arm. Jud. 40. = vixisset: Verg. Aen. xi. 118; as to wMch see note 242. 13 below. 3. In Lucil. xxviii. 683, S6cratem | quiddm tyranno misse Aristippum aiitumant is Laclimann's reading. If we keep the misisse of the editions of Nonius, we must pronounce it as a dissyllable. 4. On forms such as mactassint, capso, respexis, and the like, see below note 242. amisti ■- clamaris ■■ cognosse : direxti = illexe = intellexti ■■ optarim : peccaram ■ pigraris = promisti ) promisse / quieris = quiesset = servasse = vixet : 227. Arat. 564 sr[q. of Phaen. Cicero's lation. trans- IntelUxem, tellexe. 227. 1. The same equivalence underlies Cicero's translation Arat. Phaenom. 564 sqq. drap el ve<^eecrcrt jxeXaivac | yivoivT', ■^ opeos KeKpvfiii^vai avreXAotev, | crij/iar' kirep\ofi,kvoi(riv dpr/poTa TTOii^cracrdai, • | auTOS S' dv jxaXa TOt KepdoiV eKarepdi StSotT; | WKeavos. We should have expected to find this in Latin in the shape of si with the present subjunctive followed by the present subjunctive, i.e. " if haply — shall, — will perchance.'' In point of fact Cicero omits the notion of possibility from the protasis, and uses the future indicative — " shall " — there ; although he leaves the present subjunctive in the apodosis. His version is — Arat. 590 [ = rr. 32. 344 in Buhle's edition of Aratus] sqq- sin autem officiens signis mons obruet [al. obstruet] altus, | cxxvlo " Intellexem, intellexe," says Madvig Opusc. Acad. Alt. p. 68, "mani- festum est orta esse eadem syncopa, qua ex inteUexisU et intelUxistis frequen- tissimo exemplo fit intdlexli et intdlextis, extrita inter duas s vocali, et altera s in concursu consonantium elisa. " 228 — oxxvi oc CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 583 aut adiment lucem caeca caligine nubes : | certas ipse notaa caeli de tegmine sumens, | ortus atque obitus omnia cognoscere possis. 2. He does the same thing, although under not quite the same circumstances, in dealing with Arat. Phaenom. 431 sqq. u Se kcv icnrepiT]'; /ikv dAos Kevravpov Arat. Phaen. aTTur) I S^os, oo-ov TrpoTt/Oijs, dAty)j Se fiLV dXvoi ax^vi \ 431 sqq. avTOV, wrap ixerOTrurdev koiKora a-rjfjLaTa Teij^ot | Ni)^ etti Trafj,l\ov Tifi,^eviJ,' ; Pacuv. Iliona 198 surge et sepeli n4tum tuum prius quim ferae | volucrfeque ; Accius Atreus 226 (of the Thyestean ban- quet) natfa sepulcro ipse st parens ; Ov. Met. vi. 665 fiet modo, seque vocat bustum miserabile nati ; Massinger Fatal Dowry v. 2 "nor should the blood you challenged | and took to cure your honour, breed more scruple | in your soft conscience, than if your sword | had been sheath'd in a tiger or she-bear, | that in their bowels would have made your tomb." And we have the same idea in mock heroic surroundings in Eandolph (?) The 233 6— cxxviia CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 587 4. So also in the later Latin poetry : e.g. Alliteration of p : Persius Prolog. 1 sjj. s : Persius Prolog. 6, 7. t : Verg. Aen. iv. 18. V : Verg. Aen. vi. 834. 5. Even, too, in prose : e.g. Alliteration of a : Liv. xxiii. 16 ; xxx. 44. c ; Liv. xxiii. 18. d : Plin. Ep. iii. 6. 4. f : Liv. xxiii. 16. i : Cic. de Refuhl. i. 44. 68. : Liv. xxiii. 17. p : Cic. de EepuU. i. 44. 68 ; Plin. Ep. iii. 6. 4 pr : Cic. de Repuhl. i. 44. 68 ; Liv. xxiii. 18. r : Liv. xxiii. 16. t : Liv. xxiii. 16. v: Cic. pro Sest. 21. 48; 27. 59"=="™*; Plin. Ep. iii. 6. 4. 6. TMs usage should be remembered, and imitated in trans- lation into English ; in which language, also, especially in the — iu English. older poetical writers, it is rife. See, for a few examples only, Sir Philip Sidney Arcadia i. pp. 3, 7 (ed. 14, Lond. 1725) ; ii. pp. 203, 204 ; and passim. Chaucer Cant. Tales: Prol. 1. 6. 9. 13. 15. 18. 22. 29 sqq., 52 sqq. Piers Ploughman Vision 1 "in a somer seson, etc." Lydgate (?) Ghilde of Bristow (in the Camden Miscellany vol. iv.) ; i. 1 ; 5, 6 ; ii. 3 sqq. ; iii. 3 sqq. Spenser Faery Queene i. 1 ; st. i. vv. 1 sqq. ; ii. 1 sqq. ; iii. 2 sqq. ; iv. 1 sqq. ; v. 5 sqq. ; vi. 1 sqq. " Coleridge," says Mr. Hallam (Literature of Europe pt. ii. c. 5 p. 138 note t, ed. 3), "who had a very strong perception of the beauty of Spenser's poetry, has observed his alternate Combat of the Coehs "my body freely I bequeath to th' pot | decently to he hoil'd ; and for its tomb, | let it be buried in some hungry womb. " Hence, as Mr. Shilleto pointed out, is exphoable Soph. Ant. 1080 ^xdpal di Soph. Ant. iraiTcu s av, e(f>r], /SovXrjade, idv irep ye Xdfirjre fie Kal fir] (Kcfivydi vfias. 250. 250. On the form ulso, see above note 242. 8. 25i.Ter.'PAo)-m. 251. Si, which we have already seen to be connected with 11. 1. 18 SI = |.-[jg relative {suj>ra note 24), runs, in such cases as this passage of the Pharmio — to which Plaut. Mil. Glor. 859. R. = iii. 2. 45 peril: dxcruciabit md erus domum si vteerit is a parallel — closely into the meaning "when." Of. the German wenn (the congener of the English when) =¥■ So in the following examples, cited or referred to in Key Lat. Did. s.v. ii. 6 ; v. 25 : — Plant. Oapt. ii. 2. 1 jam i5go revertar fntro, si ex his quad volo exquisivero ; Serv. Sulpicius ap. Cic. ad Fam. iv. 5. 6 quare, si hoc unum proposuero, finem faoiam soribendi ; Plaut. 253 3 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 605 Pseud. 1229. E. =iv. 7. 131 si mi argentum dederis, te susp^ndito; Catull. xiv. 17 nam, si luxerit, ad librariorum I curiam sorinia ; Verg. Aen. v. 64 praeterea si nona diem mortalibus almum | Aurora extulerit . . . | prima citae Teuoris ponam certamina olassis ; Ter. Phorm. i. 2. 69 non, si redisset, ei pater venidm daret? Id. ih. ii. 1. 84 ut ne imparatus sim, si adveniat Ph6rmio. 252. Sic . . ., si. On this usage see above, notes 170. 15 (J) and 241. In this particular passage of Martial, note the construction : gratus sit, — si quisquam dixerit, ut commodes. Whence Mr. Shilleto defended the old reading in Plaut. Bacch. 111. E. =iv. 6. 8 tac^s ? per omnis deos adjuro, ut [Bentley on Ter. Andr. iv. 2. 1 1 omits the word, and Ritschl follows him in so doing : perhaps rightly] ne meum | gnatiim tarn amem atque ei fdcta cupiam quae Is velit, | ut tiia jam virgis Idtera lacerentiir probe, against Ritschl's suggestion that after v. 778 some such line had slipped out as — prof^cto non nunc m6 operae parsuriim meae. 252. vii. 72. Martial Plaut. Bacch. 777. R.=iv. 6. 8. 253. 1. Madvig (Opusc. Acad. Alt. p. 240; and see Key Lat. Gh: § 1165), after having remarked that Krarup had said, and rightly said, that there was no second person plural of the passive and deponent imperative ending in -minor, adds with reference to the present passage of the Psmdulus — "habent codices, quern sententia requirit, singularem progredimino." 2. Tu is an addition of Ritschl's to the manuscriptal reading. He compares, in proof of the shortness of the first i in progredi- mino. Mil. Glor. 610. R. =iii. 1. 16 ^vocabo : heus Periplecomene et Pleusicles, progr^dimini. The omission of the word tu is doubtless due to the immedi- ately preceding letters -ter at the end of pariter : these and the word tu being respectively so written as to resemble each other, and the scribe's eye being thus deceived — with the omission of the apparently merely repeated letters as tlie consequence. See further on that subject, subnote Iv e 3 above. 3. "With the language of Plautus in the passage cited compare Aretino Eagion. ii. 1 p. 209 (ed. Elzev. 1660) "s'ei ti favella, favellagli, s'ei ti bascia, bascialo, s'ei ti da, togli, et . . . " ; ii. 3 p. 367 "il corrivo ... mi tien drieto, e s'io camino, camina ; s'io vo adagio, va adagio ; e s'io mi fermo, si ferma ; etc." 253. Plaut. Pseud. 8S9. R. = iii. 2. 70. 606 GREEK AND LATIN 253a 253a. Plant. Pseud. 864. R. = iii. 2. 75. 253a. Ritschl, while in this line properly restoring the read- ing, alters — apparently, and if so, quite unnecessarily — the punctuation (given in the Text) of the Ambrosian MS. He reads " si conquinescet, Istic conquinlscito." On the word conguinisco, see Key Lat. Did. s.v. 254. Ennius 254. Madvig (Ojmsc. Acad. Alt. p. 86 note (a)) prefers to flee. 165 = 189 M. take /gxms in this passage "pro futuro dubitativo . ., non exacto." 254a. Tit in. 254^. Eibbeck ad I. quotes "Pauli Festus p. 370 M.," as Fr. _ Inc. 169 ; saying " mbrissare est vocem in cantando crispare," and as then vibrissare. ^j^-^^ ^j^^ passage of Titinius given in the Text. The advice is the exact opposite to that which would be given nowadays by competent musicians. 255. Gic. Fam. ii. 7. 1. ad 255. 1. Labere, not laberis, in Cicero: who prefers the ending in -S in the future, and that in -is in the present. See above note 5 i . 2. With the sentiment cf. — a passage as to the construction of which see above note 239. 6 — Persius i. 5 sqq. 256. Liv. xxi. 50. 257. Cat nil. Ixxxiv. 1. The Latin A. 256. That the writers of the best period seem to have preferred to use the past indicative rather than the past sub- junctive in sentences expressive of recurrence after si, or a relative or a relatival particle, and that Livy, in particular, hovers between the usages, see above note 2 15.. 4-6. 257. 1. CJiowmoda . . . Jiinsidias. " Cujus quidem ratio," says Quintilian Inst. Orat. i. 5. 20, in speaking of the- Latin H, " mutata cum temporibus est saepius. Parcissime ea veteres usi etiam in vocalibus, cum oedos ircosque dicebant ; diu deinde servatum, ne consonantibus aspiraretur, ut in Graccis et in triumpis. Erupit brevi tempore nimius usus ; ut choronae, chenturiones, praeclimies adhuc quibusdam inscriptionibus maneant : qua de re CatuUi nobile epigramma est"; meaning of course that of which the Text forms part. And yet the MSS. of Catullus show no sign. " Quid de iis censes," exclaims, in consequence, Dr. Postgate (Catullus (1889) p. ix.), "qui . . . ne Arrio quidem suam aspirationem relinquunt 1 " Quintilian's evidence seems sufficient to show that, MSS. or no MSS., the aspiration existed in fact, and that it was against 257 2 — oxxxic CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 607 it that Catullus' epigram was levelled; although the present writer prefers to follow Doering rather than Dr. Postgate as to the place of its insertion. It is curious to note, therefore, how widely spread the mis- use of the aspirate is among the nations, and to what a large ™^^^® family the modern 'Arrys of our own country belong. Widespread of the aspirate. 2. Not perhaps exactly parallel, but equally curious, is the The g sound, difficulty experienced in certain cases in pronouncing the g sound. 'OAtos Kara SiaAe/cTov, we find it said in the Etymologicum 6\los for 6X1705. Magnuin p. 621. 51; Tapavrlvoi yap rh oAtyos oAtos Aeyovtrtv iivev Tov y. iv AoijAcj) MeAeaypcj)' oAtotcriv ij/iiSv J/i7re<^i)K ev^vx^la' Koi oXiov iLicrOov ["Lege," says Gaisfordati! I., """Pivdiav iv SovX.ii) MeAea-y/jo) cum Herodiano ir. M-ov-qp. Ae^. p. 19. 26, qui mox ex Ei5vto/3aTats ? Rhinthonis citat XPSf'" y°-P O'^'O" [nifrdhv avrbs Xap-jiaveiv et deinde versus Platonis ex Hyperbolo apponit"]. IIAaTWV fiAvTOL o KoifxiKh? StaTTatfet rrjv Xe^iv ws /idpfiapov. A reference, this last, to Plato (Comicus) 'YTrep/3oAos Fr. i., (Plat. (Com.) which the present writer prefers to quote after the edition of Syperh. Fr. 1.) Mr. Shilleto (see his Annot. Grit, on Thuc. ii. 68. 5 : an improve- ment on Bergk's (de Reliq. Com. Alt. Ant. p. 313) 6-ijTco/i?;v, the MSS. having 6^ t(^ fi.7jv : see Meineke Hist. Crit. Com. Graec. [ = Fragm. Com. Gr. vol. i.] p. 191) : — 6 S' ov yap rjTTiKi^ev, S Moipat (f>iXai, \ dXX' ottotc [ilv XP^^V SiyT(ap,T]v Xkyeiv, | €cf>aa-Ke Sj/TCo/xijv, ottotc 8' ehrdv Scot | oAtyov, oAtoy cAeyev. " Sr/TW/iijv pro ScriTU>iJ.T]v," Says Mr. ShiUetO, " Ut crUTrao-o/iai. {STjTiiiJ.7iv pro o-ttoTTijo-o/iat, jSuxrea-de pro ^Hoo-eo-^e, ojTr^o-oo-^at ab adjectivo Sqir'in''-) ■tJTTLO^, ir'en-WKa pro eo quod dici oportuit Treir'uaKa." So also, as Meineke {uU supra j). 192) points out, "oAtojpos 6\lu>pos pro oXiycapos a minus attice loquentibus dictum fuisse docet ^^^T^P"'- glossa Photii Lex. p. 327. 22 dAiywpos : tvv tu> y." The present writer believes that he is right in saying that in certain dialects of the German of to-day, the sound of the English 2/ is largely given to the g : gegangen, for example, being pronounced yeyangen: ganz, yanz: gut, yut, and so on; whilst, in some parts of our own Yorkshire, a swing gate will be spoken of as a "clap yat"; and, in bygone times, the town of "Goole" was spelt, as well as pronounced, " Youll." °^^ "^ cxxxic We have, too, " Symond's Yat " hy the Wye near Eoss in Hereford- shire (if, indeed, " yat," in the sense of " gate," is the meaning in that compound ; and that it is so, compare the "Brtehe de Eoland" near Gayarnie in the for for 608 GREEK AND LATIN 257 3 — oxxxii Pronunciation of the Latin c. — in Latin itself ; (Plant. BaccJi. 943. K.=iv. 9. 19.) — in modern languages. 3. The mispronunciation chenturiones for centuriones; the temporary existence of which as a fact is avouched to us by Quintilian, as is stated above, is proof incidental of what indeed is well established, viz. — that c in Latin even before the vowel e, and the same is true of it when before the vowel i, was pro- nounced hard, like the letter k "0," says Mr. Key Lat. Did. s.v., "... at first = Gr, like third letter of Gr. alph. and Heb. gimel ; . . ■ always so pron. in Caius and Cnaeus . . . ; even before i and e pron. as k : hence the pun in Plaut. Bacch." 943. E. = "iv. 9. 19 atque hlo ecus non in dream verum in dream faciet impetum ; and note KtKcpoiv for Cicero, K-qva-wp for censor, Sckks for deciens : hence too the guttural 11 for m in anceps." 4. We in English pronounce the Latin c before the vowels e and i like the letter s. So also, of the northern nations, do the Dutch, the Danes, the Swedes ; while the Germans pronounce it with the sound of ts : a sound acquired, indeed, whilst the Latin language still existed as a language, but only " at a very late period, when " it " was on the verge of extinction " (Madvig Lat. Gr. by Woods, ed. 3, §8). When we come to the southern nations, whose languages were immediately derived from the Latin, we find a more remarkable divergence — not only from the true pronunciation of the Latin c circumstanced as supposed, but also — as between themselves on the same point. Thus— If we take a word, which is found in them all, viz. the . Latin celeber, which in the practically identical form of celebre — with or without accent — appears in all the southern languages, we find it approximately pronounced as follows, the vowels being pronounced, of course, as no doubt they were (Key Lat. Ch\ § 7), as they now are in Italian '''"""' : — Pyrenees) : tlie "New Yate " = " gate '' or "way,'' near Witney in Oxfordshire, leading from North Leigh to Hailey : and " yett "is an orthodox Scotch form of the English word ' ' gate. " For example, in Scott's Legend of Montrose a. 4 (p. 76 ed. Bdinh. 1865) we have " here's the fourth man coming clinking in at the yett e'en now from the stahles." Pronunciation cxxxii i. The dog is not likely to have changed his language, as the ages have of vowels ■^- in rolled on, in order to ease the lahours of the philologist ; and if his " Bow-wow " Greek ; of to-day is written in the Attic of Aristophanes {Vesp. 903) in the shape of a5 (The dog's aS, while his Ionian brother harked to the sound of ^ai /3ai) {Fragm. Adesp. 27 bark. ) in Bergk's Poetae Lyrici Graed), it is clear that the vowels in the Greek combi- nations of letters must have been so pronounced as to yield the words ' aa-00, aa-00": "baa-00, baa-00." 257 5 — cxxxiii CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 609 In Latin Frencli Portuguese Spanish Italian ^-dleber. s-elfebre. s-elebre.™""'" oiTa Orjpl Ioikus, | €t TTov (craOp-qcreuv 'AXe^avSpov 6eo£6Sea = " if haply anywhere he might set eyes upon " ; and (in the New Testament) St. Paul Philipp. iii. 11 et ;r(os; also (Acts xvii. 27) d apa ye. In passages like Hom. II. ii. 83 dXX ayer, at Kev jrus OwpT^^o/iev vtas 'Axaiiav = " come, if truly in any way we shall get the sons of the Greeks into harness," the addition of the kev to the at relegates them to a different category. 344. Plin.if.A''. 344. Emendaturo, si non esset interceptus. Pmef. 26. In form this resembles the passage from Tacitus {Ann. iii. 14) cited above in the Text § 239, viz. Non temperaturos, si evasisset. 349 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 643 But whereas the latter is the reported form of Non temperaturi sumus, 6i evaserit ; the former is the reported form of Emendaturus (eram or fui), si non essem. On the use of the indicative in the apodosis in such cases, see above Text § 152 and notes 220 and 336. See also below note 346. 345. 1. The modest usage of painters and statuaries, to 345- e-^oUi: of which Pliny refers, is acknowledged in the lately discovered ^tatmries^ ^'"^ Herodas iv. 21 n's ■^ pa tyjv Xidov Tavrrjv | tIktcuv erroiei koI TiS €0"Ttv o (TTijcras ; Pliny, however, mentions at least three exceptions to the general rule in such matters. 2. Similarly Aristophanes, speaking of a poem, says {Nuh. and poets. 1056) ei yap Trovrjphv ^v,"Ofiripos ovSeTroT av hroUi | rhv Ncctto/o' ayoprjT-qv av ovSc toiis (robot's airavras. 346. These two passages, and also that from xxi. 34, which 346- Livy xxiv. follows the second of them in the Text, are cited by Mr. Key in ^® ' ^^^- ^^■ his Latin Dictionary s.v. Sum 45, and he appends to his citation of them the remark that in them "fuit and fuerunt would have been required in or. dir." ; adding " Cicero in this construction has erat rather th.din.fuit, as in Verr. 2. 3. 121." This reference to the Verres is wrong. It should probably be Verr. ii. : iii. 52. 121, being the passage quoted in the Text § 176. (a). On the use of the indicative in such cases see above note 344, and the references there given. 347. The reported form of excitatwra fuit. See note 346 347. and references. D.— TO THE CONCLUSION" 348. Co. Litt. : Preface, ad fin. 348. 349. Cf. Plin. Epp. ix. 25 lusus et ineptias nostras legis, amas, 349. flagitas, meque ad similia condenda non mediocriter 644 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 349 incitas . . . Aliquid earundem Camenarum in istum benignissimum sinum mittam. Tu paaserculis et colum- bulis nostris inter aquilas vestras dabis pennas, si tamen et sibi et tibi placebunt : si tantum sibi, continendos cavea nidove ourabis. INDEX I AUTHORS CITED IN THE TEXT The references are to the sections in which the citations respectively appear. Acciug Arm. Jiid. 156, 161 Afranius Augur. 8, 210 Atreus 215, 178 (7) Compiial. 31, 179 (« 234, 172 (a) Divort. 62, 172 (i3) Brut. 30, 172 (^) Bmancipa . 95, 172 (/3) Epigon. 293, 173 (a) EpUtul. 123, 172 (0) Epinausim. 310, 235 129, 224 321, 210 Privign. 241, 211 326, 238 248, 177 (^) Erigon. 53, 222 Promus 279, 179 (^) Myrmidon. 13, 177 (|8) Simulans 308, 210 Neoptol. 464, 224 Vopisc. 354, 172 (|8) Nyctegreda 488, 160 . 378, 177 (;3) PUloct. 542, 179 (7) Alexis Ar]iJ.-fp-pi,os Fr i. 1, , 47 i. (7) 561, 177 ((3) 'laoaT&a. Fr. 1. 7, 88 (i.) Teleph. 613, 176 (/3) Kou/). Fr. 1. 5, 91 619, 172 (0) Andocides de My si. p . 3. 11, 139 (/3) Tereus 649, 173 (a) 4. 22, 64 (7) AesoUnes de F. L. p. 39.41, 54 (/3) 5. 10, 64 Aeschylus Ag. 345, 47ii. (7) 24, 70 838, 85 6. 32, 140 (a) 866, 43 (/3) 8. 12, 43 (a) 869, 57 (a) 12. 30, 57 (7) 930, 54 (,3) 15. 22, 60 (8) 933, 86 Antipho p. 112. 41, 70 1059, 45 (^) Tetral. ii. 2. p. 121. 27, 60 (7) 1252, 86 36, 91 1327, 48i.(^), Aquilius Boeot. 6, 172 (/3) 91 Ariphron Fr. 1. 3, 44(a) Ewm. 885, 78 Aristophanes Ach. 211, 92 893, 88 (i.) 324, 65(7) Pers. 788, 48ii.(S) 639, 47 i. (7) Prom. Vinct. 152, 115 918, 85 978, 89 962, 116a iSept. c. Theb. 4, 64 | 1021, 116a Suppl. 90, 48 i. (7) Av. 505, 47 i. (7) 244, 61 (i3) 1077, 76 329, 87 1490, 47 i. (7) 924, 121 Eccl. 132, 85 925, 64 145, 87 646 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Aristophanes Ecd. Eq_q. Lys. Niih. 162, 254, 380, 407, 415, 422, 650, 771, 414, 698, 774, 805, 1350, 111, 140, 235, 1025, 5, 107, 108, 154, 749, 759, 769, 1076, 1150, 1183, 1338, 1382, 1435, 450, 1070, 1072, 1198, 52, 104, 126, 216, 237, 329, 405, 468, 1010, 1027, Ran. 96, 1371, Thesm. 536, 595, 832, 839, 897, Vesp. 348, 581, Aristotle Analyt. Prior. 10, 20 init., 'AdTjv. ttoXlt. c. 4, 7, 22, 40, Pac. Plut. 121 55 (/3) 108 67 123 57(7) 86 91 85 48ii.(7) 137 ((3) 48ii.(7) 47 i. (/3) 116a 123 47ii. (7) 50ii. (;8) 117 116a 116a 64 131 (a) 116a 88 (ii.) 69 54(7) 44 (,3) 47 i. (7) 55(7) Mil. (7) 60 (ft 81 86 123 91 116a 51ii.(^) 55(7) 69 55(ffi 106 47 i. (7) 90 91 67 102 58(a) 47 i. (7) 54(7) 89 85 55 (^) 48 i. (7) 48ii.(|3) 47 i. (P) 140 (« 47 i. (/3) 132 (P) Aristotle 'Adriv. ttoXit. c. 60, 47 i. (7) de Caelo u. 5, 116a 14, 116a Eth. Eudem. ii. 1. 17, 48 i. (/3) Eth. Nic. i. 10. 8, 80 Tii. 8 (7). 1, 116a 14. 8, 80 X. 10. 17, 54 (7) Hist.Animal.yiii.il, 116a Poet. 25, 51 i. (a) Problem. 10. 65, 116a 25. 4, 70 26. 12, 89 Rhet. ii. 5. 18, 55 (a) 21. 11, 132 (/3) 25. 10, 50 ii. (7) iii. 7. 2, 54 (7) Atta Aedilic. 2, 173 (a.) Auotor de Artie, in Hippocr. i. p. 803. F. = iii. p. 182. 6. K. 51 ii. (o) de Corde in Hippocr. i. p. 269. F.=i. p. 489. 17. K. 52 (/3) de dieb. judicat. in Hippocr. i. p. 57. F. =i. p. 151. 15. K. 64 ((3) ■ de Flatib. in Hippocr. i. p. 296. F.=i. p. 573. 3. K. 54(7) ■ de Insomn. in Hippocr. i. p. 379. F. =ii. p. 14. 9. K. 54 (^) de Judication, in Hippocr. i. p. 53. F.=i. p. 140. 14. K. 61 i. (7) in Hippocr. i. p. 55. F. = i. p. 145. 1. K. 52 (/3) ■ de loe. in homin. in Hippocr. i. p. 412. F.=ii. p. 116. 16. K. 52 (/3) ■ ■ in Hippocr. i. p. 419. F. = ii. p. 137. 13. K. 55 (/3) in Hippocr. i. p. 419. F. = ii. p. 138. 7. K. 50ii. (^) in Hippocr. i. p. 423. F. = ii. p. 151. 4. K. 50 ii. (a), 55(a) • de Morb. iv. in Hippocr. i. p. 502. F. = ii. p. 338. 3. K. 52 ((3) . de Mul. Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 613. F.=ii. p. 687. 12. K. 55 (^) in Hippocr. i. p. 645. F. = ii. p. 786. 9. K. 52 (/3) in Hippocr. i. p. 651. F. = ii. p. 805. 16. K, 56 (7) in Hippocr. 1. p. 664. F. = ii. p. 846. 6. K. 54 (7) de Oss. Natw. in Hippocr. i. p. 278. F.=i, p. 515. K. 60 i. (7) Praeeeption. in Hippocr. i. p. 26. F.=i. p. 78. 4. K. 50 i. (/3) in Hippocr. i. p. 28. F.=i. p. 84. 6. K. 65 (7) de met. rat. in Hippocr. i. p. 341. F.=i. p. 628. 18. K. 50 ii. (/3) INDEX 647 Auctor de vict. rat. in Hippocr. i. p. 348. P. = i. p. 652. 13. K. 51 i. (a) Ben Jonson The Sad Shepherd i. 2, 6 Bion Volpone Caecilius Aetherio. Chrysion Epistathm. Fr. Inc. Inibr. Naucler. Obolost. Pausimach, Plocium Caesar BeU. Civ. BeU. Gall. 1. Callinus Fr. i Carmen Populare xvii. xxix, Catullus Cicero Acad. Pr. ii. de Amicit. ad Anton. 1: Att. xiv. ad Att. i. 55. 66. 84. 96. 102. 104. 32. i. 1, 6 ii. 14, 56 (7) V. 5, 61(7) 5, 214 (i.) 24, 172 (^) 33, 172 (^) 232, 211 241, 173 (/3) 254, 172 {§) 264, 178 (7) 96, 173 (a) 113, 179 (7) 126, 179 {§) 136, 177 (a) 173, 198 178, 179 (/3) 73, 175 (/3) 6, 171 (a) 44, 181 (/3) 51, 146 (ii.), 210 101, 241 13, 172 (a) 14, 238, 243' 32, 220 12, 171 (a) 29, 232, 241 35, 175 (^) 11, 179 (/3) 13, 172 {a) 34, 175 ((3) 32, 232 38, 172 (/3), 220 12, 48 i. (;8) 2, 48 ii. ((3) 13, 103 17, 55 (^) 2, Add. 23, Add. 33, 239 1, 175 (ft 1, 172 (7) 1, 172 (a) 3, 176 (« 105, 214 (iii.) 10, 179 (/3) 11, 191, 211 16. 20. 13, 210 1, 189 6, 173 (o) 7, 173 (a), 239 Cicero ad Att. ii. iii. vii. viii. xiii. xvi. Brut, in Caecil. pro Caecin. pro Caelio in Catil. i. ii. iv. 1. 13. 12. 4. 22. 49. 13b, 1. 6. 1. 4. 1. 2. 21. 16. 26. 10. 1. 10. pro Cluent. 6. de Consulat. (in de Divin, de Divin. i, ii. 1, 185 1, 220 1, 184 1, 210 4, 215 1, 220 2, 215 5, 220 25, 211 1, 189 14, 220 1, 177 4, 146 185 61, 220 37, 210 62, 146 176 19, 179 21, 172 2, 188 21, 214 18, 173 190 80, 176 ad Fam. i. 7. ii. 7. 16. vi. 14 vii. 1. 23. ix. 16. XI. xii. 29. U. 6 1. i.ll.l7)179 15. 26, 176 1. 1, 220 7. 19, 172 8. 20, 176 176 210, 21, 172 201 9. 22, 234 61. 127, 188 4, 236 (P) (i-), (ii-), ()3) (/3) (/3) (iii.) («)- (/3) (/3) (a) (^) 219 (^). XIV. XV. de Fato de Fin. i. ii. 7, 181 1, 173 7, 220 3, 171 6, 215 4, 172 2, 172 4, 231 5, 190 1, 218 1, 238 211 2, 215 1, 220 184 5, 178 20, 215 20, 173 62, 231 22, 235 (/3) (7) (/3) (^) (^) (7) (7) 648 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 3ro de Fin. ii. 17. 55, 210 Cicero pro Plane. 21. 18. 58, 146 (i.), 22 146 (ii.) 58, 59, 173 (a) 24. 59, 231 25. 26. 85, 172 OT in Pison. 7. iii. 10. 35, 212 ad Q. Fr. iii 2. iv. 20. 57, 210 ' pro Quinct. 26. de Legg. i. 16. 45, 215 de Rep. i. 6. proLeg.Manil. 15. 45, 176 (a) 19. 17. 50, 176 (|8) 38. jpro Mil. 7. 19, 220 11. 31, 195 pro Rose. A m. 6. 22. 58, 176 (a) 20. 38. 103, 211 32. pi'O Muren 25. 51, 212, 239 de Seneet. 8. delfat. Dear. i. 21. 57, 11. —22. 60, 214 (iii.) 19. 33. 93, 171 (a) 23. ii. 18. 49, 146 (i.) pro Sest. 13. iii. 3. 8, 220 32. 81, 179 (/3), 24. 213 29. Oeconom. Fr. 5, 173 (a) 38. 7, 172 (7) pro Sull. 9. 13, 215 18. 15, 179 (a) Timaeus 6, deOff. i. 7. 24, 235 11, 9. 28, 212 14, 28. 100, 173 (7) Tusc. i 14. 44. 157, 217 32. ii. 3. 12, 218 8. 29, 172 (a) 33. 19. 67, 181 (/3) 34. iii. 6. 30, 179 (0) 37. 19. 75, 146 (i.). 42. 214 (iu.), 43. 232 ii 7. 24. 93, 163, 190 18. 25. 94, 212 21. 95, 179 (a) 22. 26. 98, 234 iii 1. 31. 112, 239 24. 33. 118, 202 28. 119, 239 V 35. Orat. 45. 152, 198 Partit. Orai . 24. 84, 220 in Vatin. 1. Phil. ii. 27. 67, 210 i. Verr. 10. 38. 99, 181 (S) ii. Verr. i 4. xiii. 3. 5, 214(iii.) | 14. pro Plane. 1. 1, 238 27. 2. 4, 219, 238 ii. 1. 6, 172 (« 21. 3. 6, 219 60. 8. 20, 163, 67. 179 (^) 69. 18. 45, 216 iii. 19. 19. 48, 216 20. 52, 198 53, 146 (iii.), 186, 211 60, 236 60, 163 14, 234 2, 220 83, 185 10, 191 32, 173 (^) 59, 177 (;8) 17, 177 (a), 185 55, 211 91, 220 26, 215 36, 178 (y) 67, 172 (;8) 82, 177 (;8) 30, 176 (7) 31, 173 (;3) 54, 171 (/3) 63, 176 (|8) 81, 176 (a) 27, 232 51, 220 155 160 165 32, 176 (a) 77, 235 78, 179 (a) 81, 210 82, 231 90, 191 99, 211 , 103, 173 (a) 18, 224 42, 211 48, 173 (7) 52, 172 (a) 2, 181 (a) 57, 214 (i.) 69, 241 , 101, 210 102, 179 (;3) 2, 201 31, 176 (a) 9, 232 37, 214 (iii.) 70, 177 {§) 3, 176 (,3) 52, 179 (;8) 148, 218 162, 240 . 167, 179 (/S) 48, 220 51, 176 ((3) INDEX 649 Cicero ii. Verr. iii. 52. 121, 176 (a), 239 iv. 5. 10, 239 21. 47, 171 (o) 40. 87, 202 V. 27. 69, 215 49. 129, 181 (a) Comiciis Anonymus (firae- cus) i^r. 287, 6011.(7) (Latinus) Fr. Inc. 46, 172 (a) (Pcdl.) 51, 177 ((3) 100, 210 Cratimis ArjX. Fr. 8, 48 ii. (7) Demosthenes — Androt. p. Apat. p. Aphob. i. p. 11. p, ad Aphob. p, Aristocr. p. Conon. p, de Cor. p. Euiiilid. p. de F. L. p. 595. 903. 813. 814. 829. 833. 838. 860. 861. 649. 1258. 242. 294. 296. 302. 317. 1300. 341. 342. 343. 345. 351. 15, 69, 119 20, 91 1, 58 (J3) 23, 138 (;8) 14, 139 ifi) 17, 93 87 91 58 (^) 86 18 25; 22, 16, 26, 117 10, 92 19, 24, 25, 16, 1, H, 21, 354. 361. 363. 364. 372. 373. 374. 378. 379 389. 390, 395. 404, 407. 88 (ii.) 58 (/3) 93 88 (ii.) 54(7) 56 (a) 55 (« 3, 66 10, 133 (ft 6, 43 ((3) 8, 119 9, 85 13, 60 (7) 29, 131 (ft 19, 47ii. (7) 89 67 (a) 55 (/3) 56(7) 61 (a) 57(7) 36, 100 76 ,121 2, 139 (/3) 6, 116a 3, 87 7, 91 15, 67 (ft 17, 44(a) 15, 123 10, 16, 7, 15, 16, 29, , 9, 27, 20, Demostlienes — de F. L. p 407. 21, 133 ()3) 411. 9, 43(a) 13, 55(7) 21, 116a 415. 8, 119 12, 120 426. 26, 69 434. 8, 75 437. 23, 66 443. 6, 137 (^) 13, 136 (ft 449. 12, 65 (ft Lept. p 476. 26, 74 481. 4, 67 492. 21, 54 (ft Mid. p. 517. 16, 133 (ft 519. 10, 117 524. 9, 132 (ft 526, 2, 60(7) 530. 19, 58 (a) 549. 11, 67(7) 554. 2, 134 3, 91 556. 19, 68 (a) 557. 27, 137 (ft 563. 24, 88 (i.) 676, 4, 60 (ft 577. 23, 47ii.(ft 582. 24, 91 01. i. p. 13. 12, 45(0) 16. 8, 131 (ft iii, p. 30. 6, 67(7),67 11, 45(7) 33. 13, 88 (ii.) Onet. i. p. 866. 27, 85 ii. p. 876. 14, 137 (ft PhU. i. p. 44. 11, 92 29, 64(7) iii. p. 112. 6, 61 (ft . PhUipp. Fpist. p. 157. 13, 44(a) Phorm. p. 921. 4, 58 (ft Polycl. p. 1227. 2, 60 ii. (^) Timocr. p. 726, 27, 57(7) 748. 15, 64 (ft 1201. 9, 60ii.(ft Dinarohusc.Dem, p . 96. 44, 73a Ennius Ann. viii. 299, 175 (^) 321, 172 (7) xi. 386, 173 (a) xvi. 448, 172 {§) Com. Incert. 390 ^ 415 Miiller, 160 Cresphont. 115 = 338 „ 172 (ft Fr.Inc. 365 = 427 „ 173(7) 366 = 390 „ 220 Hecvli. 165 = 189 „ 173(7) Iphig. 185= 56 „ 215 650 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Ennius — Med.Exul 212=258 Miillerl46(iii.) 222 = 268 „ 160 Phoenix 261 = 371 „ 179(a) Sat. Epigramm. 73, 1T2 {y) Sat. iii. 20, 220 Tdamo 271 = 210 Miiller, 179 (^) Epicharmus Busir. Erinna Fr. Euenus Fr. Euripides Ale. iv. 3, ii. 5, 122. 181 708 1072 Atidr. 334 Antiop. Fr. B. 5. Bacch. 612, 1341, Bdleroph. Fr. 11 D. = 300 N. 12 = StheTieb. Fr. 670 N., El. 824, Fr. Incert. 152 D. = 895 N, Hec. Hel. Heracl. Sere. Fur, Hipp. Ion Iph. Aul. Iph. Taw. Med. Or. 788, 836 1111 1165, 1043. 494. 467, 459, 471, 480, 493 1331 961 485, 944. 1027. 1211 447. 78: 250 352 368. 386 1153 247, 508, 648, 564, 646. 1100. 1111, 1132. 1147 1523 54(7) 50 ii. (7) 47 i. (7) 58 (o) 116a 44 (/3) 108 88 (i.) 47 ii. (§) 47 i. (7) 58(7) 122 160 87 47 ii. {§) 44 (« 114 61 (a) 47 i. {§) 116a 130 87 45 (« 120 121 58 (/3) 91 35 44 (,3) 45 (ft 44 (a), 90 B8(« 43(7) 45 (^) 160 45 (/3) 91 88 (i.) 75 60 (ft 116a 76 72 90 79 88 (i.) 107 85 47 ii. (7) 65(7) 55 (ft Euripides — Stheneb. Fr. 670 N. -Belleroph. Fr. 12 D., 160 454, 45 (7) 458, 68 (7) 465, 85 467, 129 (ft 520, 121 569, 85 621, 114 764, 67 (ft Euryphon (?) de Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 465. F. = ii. p. 225. 1. K. 50 ii. (a) — ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 470. F. =ii. p. 238. 8. K. 73 iii. in Hippocr. i. p. 448. F. =ii. p. 293. 12. K. 54 (7) ' iii. in Hippocr. i. p. 494. F. = ii. p. 313. 16. K. 55 (a) de nat. mul. in Hippocr. i. p. 570. F. = ii. p. 650. 13. K. 65(a) Gallus Eleg. 31, 197 Hekodas iv. 39, 90 V. 16, 43(7) Herodotus i. 2, 85 32, 81 46, 139 (ft ii. 13, 48 i. (7), 51ii. (ft 15, 120 64, 129 (7) 173, 47 ii. (a) iii. 21, 67 25, 57 (ft 36, 71 105, 131 (7) 108, 133 (7) iv. 97, 124 118, 88 (i.) vi. 57, 132 (/3) vii. 101, 80 161, 121 180, 86 214, 47ii. (a) 235, 44 (ft, 55 (ft 236, 45 (ft 237, 91 viii. 19, 139 (a) 140(1), 55(7) ix. 13, 47 i. (ft 48, 75 Hesiod Fr. 217, 54(7) Op. 280, 65 (ft 349, 55 (ft 401, 55 (ft Tkeog. 164, 123 INDEX 651 Hippocrates £?e Aere i. p. 287. F.=l. p. 546. 19. K. 55 (/3) Aphorism, ii. p. 1250. F.=iii. p. 730. 13. K. 116a ii. p. 1251. F. = iii. p. 733. 12. K. 51 i. (;8) ii. p. 1254. F. = iii. p. 743. 12. K. 81 ii. p. 1259. F.=iii. p. 760. 13. K. 61 i. (^) de capit, mdner, i. p. 899. F. = iii. p. 353. 1. K. 44 (a) i. p. 900. F.=iii. p. 354. 13. K. 61 i. (;8) i. p. 901. F. = iii. p. 356. 9. K. 106 i. p. 910. F.=iii. p. 370. 4. K. 122 i. p. 911. P. = iii. p. 371. 3. K. 65 (a) de Morb. Vulg. i. : ii. p. 945. F. = iii. p. 392. 7. K. 47 i. (7) Praenotion. i. p. 36. P. = i. p. 88. 9. K. 86 i. p. 37. P. = i. p. 92. 5. K. 80 . i. p. 38. P.=i. p. 95. 11. K. 54 (/3) i. p. 39. F. = i. p. 98. 11. K. 64 (a) i. p. 40. F. = i. p. 100. 12. K. 47 i. (/3) i. p. 41. F.=i. p. 104. 16. K. 54 (ffl i. p. 42. F. = i. p. 107. 8. K. 61 i. (/3) i. p. 44. F. = i. p. 113. 3. K. 74 i. p. 45. F.=i. p. 115. 8. K. 64 (7) de rat. vict. in mi rb. aeut. i. p. 385. F. = ii. p. 33. 7. K. 55 (7) i. p. 386. P. = ii. p. 35. 13. K. 76 i. p. 387. F. = ii. p. 39. 6. IC. 56 (a) i. p. 388. F. = ii. p. 40. 9. K. 64 (^) i. p. 389. F. = ii. p. 44. 3. K. 48 i. (^) i. p. 389. F. = ii. p. 44. 10. K. 120 • i. p. 391. F. = ii. p. 50. 8. K. 51 i. (/3), 76 i. p. 392. F. = ii. p. 51. 17. K. 54 (7) . . i. p. 395. P. = ii. p. 64. 8. K. 47 ii. {§) Hippocrates de rat. met. in morb. aeut. i.p.399.F. = ii.p. 74.I.K. 65 (/3) i. p. 400. F. = ii. p. 77. 10. K. 69 i. p. 400. F. = ii. p. 79. 2. K. 48 i. (7) i. p. 403. (cf. 9. K.) K. K. p. 406. p. 406, P.=ii. p. 87. 5. 105 P. = ii. p. 95. 16. 51 i. (^) P.=ii. p. 98. 2. 106 Hippocrates (?) de Fractis i. p. 752. P. = iii. p. 70. 9. K. 54 (a) i. p. 761. r.=iii. p. 88. 6. K. 61 i. (a) de Prise. Mediein. i. p. 8. F. = i. p. 23. 9. K. 36, 47 ii. (7), 76 Homer II. i. 39, 43 (7) 135, 103 302, 89 324, 65 (7) 624, 89 573, 44 (fi) 680, 99 ii. 80, 68 (7) 371, 114 488, 81 597, 64 (/3), 140 (|3) iii. 180, 108 453, 47 i. (7) iv. 97, 123 V. 212, 81 224, 55(7) 231, 55 (^) 257, 48ii. (7) 260, 65(7) 273, 54(7) 311, 67(7) vi. 128, 120 150, 96 vii. 386, 140 (/3) ix. 42, 89 259, 89 388, 81 X. 221, 80 243, 160 xi. 386, 80 XV. 671, 107 xvi. 558, 107 xvii. 70, 67 (7) 557, 52 (/3) 561, 114 xxi. 487, 96 xxii. 220, 64 (7) 381, 89 xxiii. 71, 90 652 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Homer II. xxiii. 526, 50 ii. (7) Hyperides — xxiv. 220, 58 {(3) c. Demosth. col. 18. 1. 23, 61 0) 653, 80 pro Euxen. col. 21. 1. 14, 88 (ii. ) 660, 120 23.1.23, 67 713, 57 (|3) 26.1.28, 89 Od. i. 234, 58(7) 36. 1. 25, 55 (7) 279, 55 (7) Orat.Fwnebr.col. 9.1. 1, 91 287, 123 11.1. 8, 64 (/3) ii. 76, 54(7) ISAEUS — 115, 97 de Aristarch.Iiaered.ri. 79. 1, 87 lii. 205, 107 V. 221, 48ii. (|8) de Pyrrh. haered. p. 42. 6, 43 (a) 43.27, 57 (a) vii. 311, 110 Isocrates^rcAirfam.c.l20. e. 91 315, 54 ()3) ix. 37, 89 Areop. p. 151. vi, 58 (/3) 152. 0, 129 (;3) xii. 348, 65 155. e, 66 xvi. 219, 155 Busir. p. 225. b, 47 ii. (7) xvii. 539, 80 Panath. p. 238. a, 64 xviii. 318, 55 (/3) Paneg. p. 70. b, 92 xix. 309, 114 XX. 233, 55 {/3) 236, 113 PhUipp. p. 93. c, 68 (a) Trapezit. p. 3S8. a, 45(7), 121 xxiii. 241, 155 359. b, 132 (P) xxiv. 376, 111 359. c, 139 (S) Horace Art. Poet. 386, 173 (a) 360. a, 137 (/3) Carm. Sec. 34, 172 (;8) Epp. i. 1. 33, 214 (i.) JuvE:fAL i. 155, 216 65, 215 ii. 24, 186 6. 67, 215 iii. 78, 214 (i.) 7. 69, 172 (;8) 96, 211 10. 24. 214 (iu.) 100, 192, ii. 1. 3, 179 (/3) 214 (i.) 194, 177 (|8) 126, 224 Od. i. 1. 29, 172 (^) 147, 178 (7) 13. 13, 179 (;3) 221, 220 ii. 17. 27, 181 (7) 272, 179 (7) iii. 3. 7, 179 (7) iv. 11, 185 5. 13, 239 vi. 143, 198 16. 1, 181 (7) 144, 214 (iii.) 18. 3, 172 (ft 222, 214 (i.) 24. 27, 173 (7) 231, 214 (i.) 29. 57, 231 468, 178 (7) iv. 4. 65, 214 (iii.) vii. 39, 178 (7) Sat. i. 1. 45, 214 (i.) 69, 176 (/3) 3. 4, 175 (;8) 171, 173 (7) 15, 214 (ii.) A. 123, 201 .90, 214 (i.) 141, 178 (7) 94, 179 (a) 339, 179 (B) 6. 78, 176 (7) 365, 178 (7) 10. 64, 214 (iii.) xii. 58, 204 ii. 1. 6, 212 xiii. 96, 219 10, 172 (/3) 160, 216 20, 178 (7) xiv. 47, 172 t/S) 30, 171 (0) 210, 210 6. 8, 223 231, 178 (7) 7. 32, 214 (i.) 309, 173 (a) Hyperides — 315, 178 (7) c. Aihenog. col. 3. 11. 14 sc[C[., Add. 317, 179 (/3) INDEX 653 Juvenal xiv. 327, 172 (a) Livy xl. 9, 220 XV. 19, 211 xli. 24, 220 Juventius Fr. Inc. 2, 179 03) 8, 224 xlii. 34, 181 (/3) 57, 239 xliv. 22, 220 LABEKrns Fr. Inc. 114, 171 (ft 39, 195, 213 128, 163 Luoan vii. 144, 220 129, 163 Lucilius i. 10, 215 Leophanes (?) rfe Superfoetat. in Hippoor. iv. 140, 220 i.p.260.F.=i.p.461.16.JK. 104 V. 182, 181 (|3) in Hippoor. . p. 262. F.=i. vii. 254, 211 p. 467. 9. K. 55 ((3) xiii. 375, 224 in Hippoor. . p. 263. F. = i. xiv. 407, 214 (iii.) p. 469. 15. K. 51 i. (^) XV. 446, 214 (iii.) in Hippoor. .p. 263. P. = i. xvi. 461, 210 p. 470. 16. K. 55(7) 465, 173 (a) Livius Andronicus .Ac/iiH. 1,, 173 (7) xvii. 467, 172 (|8) Livy i. 26, 241 28, 171 (7) xxvi. 535, 224 536, 172 (a) ii. 10, 201 605, 179 (8) iii. 21, 219 xxviii (?) 812, 172 (7) 47, 211, 231 xxix. 752, 173 (a) iv. 3, 220 28, 205 XXX. 875, 178 (7) 887, 172 (/3) V. 4, 172 (/3) 5, 220 950, 214 (i.) 1045, 224 vi. 14, 179 (7) 1082, 211 vii. 18, 231 1090, 173 (7) viii. 8, 175 (^) 1179, 179 (a) ix. 19, 176 (a), Lucretius i. 336, 177 ((3) 217 357, 199 24, 211 379, 173 (a) xxi. 34, 241 42, 239 50, 175 (a) 392, 172 (7) 411, 173 (a) 571, 179 (/3) xxii. 60, 177 (^) ii. 1017, 198 177 (7), 183, 185, 239 1033, 191a xxiii. 13, 239 1042, 172 (/3) xxiv. 26, 241 1090, 178 (7) xxviii. 24, 241 28, 181 (^) 38, 220 iii. 657, 179 (a) 944, 198 iv. 603, 172 (/3) xxix. 28, 220 619, 220 XXX. 30, 171 (a), 212 1166, 202 V. 276, 199 xxxi. 1, 198, 220 vi. 760, 220 xxxii. 12, 201 1198, 171 (0) xxxiv. 29, 181 (7) Lycurgus c. Leocr .p. 150. 45, 61 ((3) xxxviii. 47, 177 m Lysias c. Agorat p. 137. 11, 47 i. (7) xxxix. 10, 239 Alcib. i p. 140. 33, 62 (|3) 12, 238 ii p. 144. 25, 130 15, 173 (0) 145. 3, 119 16, 176 (a). pro Gallia p. 102. 35, 58 (/3) 212 de Civit. p. 918, 46 (7) 17, 239 Mratosth. p. 91. 1, 91 18, 238 37, 179 (^) 40, 211 4, 47ii.(^) 92. 39, 117 93. 14, 66 (7) 654 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Lysias Enitosth. p. 121. 4, 140 (^) 122. 24, 139 (P) 127. 22, 117 42, 121 128. 4, 91 Ergocl. p. 179. 32, 72 c. PhOon. p. 189. 20, 133 (a) 23, 57(7) c. Theomnest. i. p. 116. 42, 47 ii. (7) tie FM?«e?-e p. 101. 39, 76 Machiavelli — Disc. s. T. Liv. i. 17, Principe c. 19, Marlowe Bdw. II. p. 210 b, Martial vu. xi. 21. 24. 38. 86. 20. 26. 29. 72. 16. xiv. 202. 2, Maximianus 1. 17, 41, 149, 215, 257, 2. 19, Meuander AeiiriSaf/iwc Fr. i. Fr. Inc. X. 6, xxii. MiiroiJ/i. Fr. xi. Mimnermus Fr. vii. Moschus iii. 122, 132, Add. Add. 6 181 (7) 179 (7) 214 (i.) 173 iP) 199 146 (iii.) 172 (a) 172 (7) 173 (o) 216 181 (/3) 178 (7) 171 (7) 211 211 211 213 61 (ft 90 52 (/3) 116a 90 58 (/3) 61 (/3) Naevius Agitator. 14, 172 (a) Bell. Poenic. 63, 163 Danae 8, 172 (a) Epigramm. p. 168, 177 (/3) Fr.Inc.{Com.)lZf), 224 Tripkall. 96, 173 (a) Novius i^r. Inc. 113, 224 116, 173 (7) 117, 214 (i.) Maccus 44, 173 (a) Phoeniss. 79, 216 Picus 80, 210 Tripertit. 91, 172 (j8) Ovid -1. ^-1. ii. 459, 216 647, 216 iii. 759, 179 (7) Am. i. 4. 29, 214 (iii.) Ovid Am. Fast. 11. iii. Met. 181 (ft 176 ip) 178 (7) 178 (7) 214 (i.) 202 179 (/3) 214 (i.) 214 (i.) 179 iP) 181 (« 214 (ii.) 186 214 (ii.) 177 (ft 173 (ft 216 172 (ft 202 212 200 214 (iii.) 181 iP) 232 181 (/3) 210 220 210 176 (a) 172 (ft 214 (iii.) 177 (ft 173 (a) 146 (i.), 186 Add. 224 179 (7) 177 (7) 7, 173 (a) 12, 179 (/3) 130, 179 (7) 391, 176 (|8) 407, 179 (7) 424, 163, 172 (7), 216 227, 172 (7) 277, 202 279, 172 (7) 26, 178 (7) 88, 179 (ft 10, 223 75, 216 81, 177 (ft 181, 206 Pherecrates (!) MerdXX. Fr. i. 22, 56(7) Pont. Rem. Am. Trist. i. 6. 34, 8. 34, 53, 96, ii. 4. 23, iii. 7. 61, i. 123, 315, 453, 351, 715, 487, v. 587, vi. 113, 366, 371, i. 613, ix. 463, 477, 478, 487, 490, 728, X. 618, 633, xiv. 783, XV. 331, iii. 5. 5, 21, 45, 745, i. 1. 125, 9. 5, ii. 13, 451, 497, V. 1. 41, 5. 41, Paouvius Antiop. Dnlor.est. Fr. Inc. Medtts Periboea, Persius Permgilium Veneris INDEX 655 Philemon 'Ade\. Fr. i. 11, 88 (ii.) Plato Pliaedo p. 67 E, 70 Fr. Incert. 91, 80 71 B, 116a 'K.OpLV$ Fr. i. 47 ii. (a) 91 A, 81 Pindar Isthm, v. (iv.) 12, 48 i. (7) 99 A, 72 Nem. vii. 86, 120 107 C, 121 89, 54 (/3) Phaedr, p. 224 B, 123 xi. 13, 45(7), 251 A, 47 ii. (0) 71 262 D, 85 01. vi. 11, 48 ii. (7) Phileh. p. 18 A, 80 Pyth. iv. 265, 48 i. (7) 21 A, 47 ii. (/3) 272, 48 ii. (7) 27 C, 85 vi. 263, 54 (7) 37 A, 85 viii. 73, 44 (a) 39 D, 85 Plato Ale. Pr. p. 104 E, 57 (;8) 46 B, 123 lllE, 47ii. (7) 55 E, 123 119 B, 58 (a) Protag. p. 309 B, 85 122 B, 67, 76, 310 B, 85 121 310 D, 55 (;3), Apol. p. 20 A, 58 (7) 107 20 c, 43 (^), 319 A, 87 58 (/3) 329 B, 64 (ft. 27 D, 116a 81 28 D, 47 ii. (7) 340 E, 78 29 C, 137 (a) 345 E, 140 (^) 31 D, 57 (7) 351 B, 64 40 E, 45 (7) £.ep. i. p. 329 B, 58 (/3) Charmid. p. 171 D, 58 (a) 350 D, 131 (a) Cratyl. p. 384 B, 58 (4) ii. p. 368 A, 44 (a) 398 E, 54 (/3) 368 D, 117 403 C, 133 (/3) iii. p. 406 D, 55 (ft 418 A, 85 408 C, 43 (ft 432 A, B5 (7) iv. p. 423 A, 124 432 B, 64 V. p. 450 A, 137 (ft Cnt. p. 44 D, 115 450 D, 91 47 D, 45 (;8) 473 C, 55 (7) 49 E, 44 (a) vi. p. 488 D, 129 (a) Euthyphr. p. 14 C, 58 (7) 491 A, 136 (/3) Oorg. p. 447 D, 67 493 A, 116a 461 A, 136 (a) ix. p. 581 C, 80 469 D, 55 (7) X. p. 615 A, 138 (a) 472 A, 85 Sophist. p. 247 D, 90, 120 479 A, 116a Symp. p. 185 D, 105 480 C, 55 (a) 190 C, 87 492 B, 120 196 C, 85 511 D, 55 (7) 197 A, 85 512 A, 44(7) 198 B, 60 (ft 514 B, 60 (/3) 220 B, 47 i. (;8) Hipp, Min. p. 363 B, 120 Theaet. p. 147 A, 47 ii. (7) Legg. i p. 646 B, 116a 149 B, 90 iii p. 683 B, 132 (a) 163 E, 137 (;8) 688 B, 89 Timaews p. 31 A, 45 (a) ix p. 869 A, 75 34 C, 155 Lys. p. 217 A, 98 41 C, 160 217 C, 80 41 E, 139 (a) Meno p. 94 E, 120 47 A, 155 97 D, 55 (a) Plato (ComicuB ) 'EXX. 3, 103 98 B, 54 (ft S/ceu. Fr. 1, 47 i. (S) ,Phaedo p. 58 B, 139 (ft Plato (Elegiacus) Fr. 26. 2, 55 (7) 656 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Plautus Amph. i. 1. 45, 220 Plautus Poenul. v. 2. 125, 179 (7) 163, Add. Pseud. 25. R.= i. 1. 23, 232 164, 173 (o) 285. R.= i. 3. 51, 194 277, 173 (a) 433. R.= i. 5. 18, 198 V. 1. 44, 220 462. R.= i. 5. 47, 215 Asin. ii. 4. 21, 220 792. R.=iii. 2. 3, 195 iii. 3. 130, 224 800. R. = iii. 2. 11, 171 (§) Aul. : Prol. 26, 239 859. R. = iii. 2. 70, 173 (|8) ii. 2. 51, 232 End. 159. = i. 2. 70, 198 iii. 2. 13, 171 (a) 329.= ii. 2. 23, 173 (a) 5. 49, 206 379. = iii. 3. 48, 194 Bacch. 420. R.=iii. 3. 16, 175 (7) 727. = iii. 4. 22, 173 (^) 440. R. = iii. 3. 36. 178 (7) 729. = iii. 4. 24, 216 447. E.=iii. 3. 43, 202 731. = iii. 4. 26, 166, Gapt. iii. 4. 67, 224 173 (a) iv. 2. 29, 173 (0) 834. = iii. 5. 54, 179 (/3) 44, Add. 1135. =iv. 4. 91, 173 (7) Casin. iv. 4. 10, 172 (|3) Stich. iv. 1. 6, 204a CisteZi. i. 1. 3, 236 Tnn. 409. R.= ii. 4. 8, 220 44, 212 463. R.= ii. 4. 62, 173 (^) 47, 163 468. R.= ii. 4. 67, 163, 184 Gun. i. 1. 51, 220 531. R.= ii. 4. 130, 202 ii. 2. 15, 202 538. R.= ii. 4. 137, 179 (a) Epid. iii. 3. 1, 213 754. R.=iii. 3. 25, 235 7, 220 Trucid. iv. 2. 29, 211 V. 2. 65, 202 35, 194 Menaechin. — Pliny Hist. Nat. : Praef 26, 241 966. E.= V. 6. 1, 220 ii. 63, 220 Mil. Glor.— VVl-hy Epp. i. 12. 8, 146 (i.), 170. R.= ii. 2. 15, 177 (^) 214 (iii.) 600.R. = iii. 1. 5, 172 (a) ix. 23. 5, 171 (7) 602. R.=iii. 1. 7, 172 (7) 25. 1, 220 631. R.=iii. 1. 37, 172 (« 3, 224 755. R. = iii. 1. 160, 212 28. 3, 177 (7), 908. R.=iii. 3. 34, 220 212 1356. R. = iv. 8. 46, 196 30. 3, 172 m 1362. R. = iv. 8. 52, 179 (a) ad Trajan. : Ep. 3. 6, 173 (a) Mostdl. 212. B,.= i. 3. 55, 173 (a) 11. 1, 173 (a) 222. R.= i. 3. 65, 173 (a) Pomponius — 228. R.= i. 3. 71, 173 (a) Agam. Suppos. 4, 177 (/3) 239. R.= i. 3. 74, 173 (/3) Bucc. Auctorat. 19, 172 (/3) 243. R.= i. 3. 88, 176 (a) Gondic. 34, 173 (a) 266. R.= i. 3. 109, 211 Gall. Transalp. 51, 232 351. R.= ii. 1. 4, 202 Maccus 63, 179 (a) 369. R.= ii. 1. 22, 172 (^) Maial. 80, 172 (7) 555. R. = iii. 1. 28, 179 (a) Patruus 108, 173 (/3) 690. E.=iii. 1. 62, 216 Pictm- 118, 224 711. R. = iii. 2. 22, 214 (i.) Pistor 123, 176 (/3) 772. R.=iii. 2. 85, 172 (/3) Prostih. 148, 175 (/3) 773. R.=iii. 2. 86, 173 (/3) Prior Soloinon ii. 967, 6 799. R.=iii. 2. 112, 176 (a) Propertius i. 17 15, 213 844. R. = iii. 2. 158, 177 ((3) 19, 176 (a) 922. R.=iii. 3. 19, 179 (a) 27, 172 (a) 923. R.=iii. 3. 20, 211 iii. 6. (ii. 15) 37, 179 (/3) 1084. R.= V. 1. 36, 238 41, 176 (^) 1093. R.= V. 1. 42, 224 14. (ii. 23) 12, 172 (/3) 1151. R.= V. 2. 29, 216 18. (ii. 26) ■ 13, 177 (7) Pers. V. 2. 55, 214 (iii.) 23, 179 (7) I INDEX 657 Propertius iv. (iii.) V. (iv.) 34, 211 43, 177 ((3) 22, 216 37, 214 (iii.) 9, 214 (iii.) 11, 210 31, 16S, 173 (a) 47, 179 (y) 49, 179 (7) 29, 219 Sallust Catil. Jug. 17, 43, 61, 27, 31, 50, 85, 111, Simonides Amorginus — Fr. 7. 16, Solon Fr. 6, 11. 1, 20. 1. 239 239 210 181 (a) 202 171 (o) 181 (/3) 239 Sopliocles Aj. Ant. El. 87, 183, 312, 496, 534, 550, 1067, 1130, 1344, 240, 686, 710, 1031, 244, 312, 314, 369, 372, 376, 393, 439, 528, 548, 554, 604, 608, 772, 797, 799, 1021, 1304, .(« 91 91 44 (a) 116a 116a 86 85 137 (i3) 48ii. (y) 86 90, 161 69 120 131 (/3) 92 86 131a 47 i 121 133 (ft 120 81 58(7) 121 58 (/3) 67 60 (/3) 47 ii. (7) 55 (7), 123 57 (ft 44 (a) 119 58(7) 120 87 85 Sophocles El. Oed. Got 1415, 110 1460, 85 1482, 116a 351, 81 Oed. Tyr. Phil. Track. Syrus (Publ.) Taoitus Agric. 2 U 861, 862, 55 (7) 1441, 48 ii. (7) 124, 67 216, 123 255, 60 (/3) 261, 58 (7) 317, 86 520, 45 (a) 620, 45 (p) 690, 129 (/3) 863, 107 874, 48 i. (7) 1368, 87 1386, 61 (/3) 41, 92 50, 55 (/3) 66, 45 (7) 352, 137 (/3) 493, 116a 610, 136 (a) 7 89 908i 47 i. (7) 8, 215 365, 178 (7) 2, 176 (/3) 13, 202 16, 201 ,45, 146 (i.), 210 46, 172 («, 211 Ann. iii. 14, 181 (a), 239 16, 211, 242 54, 179 (7) iv. 18, 241 60, 239 71, 181 (a) xi. 37, 181 (7) xii. 42, 201 xiii. 2, 181 (7) 3, 210 5, 201 18, 239 25, 175 {§) 39, 175 (/3) 40, 239 47, 220 57, 175 (^) Hist. i. 57, 210 ii. 76, 235 77, 234 de Mot. Q«rm. 5, 211 658 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Terence Ad. Andr. i. 2. 26, ii. 1. 11 17> Eiin. iii. 5. i. 2. ii. 1. iii. 2. 4. iv. 4. V. 4. Prol. ii. 2. V. 2. Haut. Tim. ii. 3. iii. 1. Hec. iv. 2. Phorm. i. 4. ii. 1. Theocritus i. Theocritus (?) Theognis 132 sqq^. ii. 118. V. 63! viii. 43, xi. 65 xii. 17 xxiii. 25 35 44, xxvii. 34, XXV. 45, xxix. 21 35, 3?: 121 321, 343 645 682, 905, 927 957 1089, 1177: TheophrastusTrepl dSoXeirx'as Tcpl KoXaKclas trepl \a\ia.s Thucydides i. 9. 5, 177 m 210 166 179 (a) 186 172 (/3) 232 179 (« 232 Ada 210 198 172 (a) 214 (ii.) 211 179 («) 232 202 179 (7) 211 203 214 (iii.) 177 (/3) 173 (a) 1 56 (t) 65 (/3) 161 60 li. (ft 48 li. (ft 55 W) 161 107 66 (7) 89 55 (/3) 65 (/3) 48ii. (^) 48ii.(^), 124 55 (/3) 90 48 i. (a) 48 i. (7) 47 ii. (7) 91 123 86 46 W) 58 (/3) 47 ii. (7) 44 (a) 47 ii. (7) 64 (0) 131 m 46 W 64 (7) 57 (ft. 85 Thucydides 17. 32. 34. 37. 72. 80. 81. 82. 84. 86. 120. 121. 136. 142. 143. 6, 60. 67. 77. 80. 102. iii. 3. 10. 40. 44. 57. 74. 102. iv. 13. 27. 92. 46. vi. 11. 1 18. 21. 29. 33. 34. 40. 49. 57. 61. 85. 89 89 65 (ft 60 (ft 60 (ft 58 (ft 136 (ft 2, 131 (ft " 45 (ft 46(7) 66 (ft 56 (ft 43(7) 47 i. (/3) 64 80 128 121 66(7) . 58 (ft 4, 139 (;8) 5, 80 7, 119 3, 2, 4, 1. 5, 6, 5, 6, 3, 6, 7. 139 (ft 139 (ft 57(7) 55(7) 85 91, 105 6, 136 (ft 6, 119 3, 54 (ft 3, 91 2, 60(7) 7, 132 (a) 3, 105 5, 141 (/3) 87 3, 139 (7) 4, 136 (^) 2, 140 (/3) 3, 141 (o) , 2, 86 -4, 64 4, 47ii. (7) 3, 131 (ft 1, 48ii. (7) 1, 139 (ft 2, 131 (^) 4, 55(7) 5, 66 4, 64 2, 44 (ft 1, 140 (ft 3, 116a, 139 (ft 2, 141 (^) 1, 66 INDEX 659 Thucydldes vi 89 3, 43 (/3) 6, 116a Virgil Aen. vi. 187, 223 535, 165 91 3, 46(7) 883, 179 (^) 92 4, 119 viii. 560, 223 vii. 44 5, 47 i. (/3) xi. 112, 201 60 2, 140 (/3) 115, 212 70 8, 47 i. (7) 116, 172 (ft 71 3, 47 i. (7) 118, 214 (iii. ) viii. 1 1, 85 164, 211 27 4, 140 (,3) 166, 171 (/3) 66 2, 47 i. (7) 415, 220 86 4, 92 xii. 40, 179 (a) TibuUus 1. 4 63, 199 Catalect. 9. 2, 172 (a) 6 25, 220 30, 211 33, 172 (^) 53, 214 (i.) 63, 214 (iii.) 73, 179 (a) Ed. i. 80, 212 ii. 14, 213 23, 171 (/3) 28, 161 iii. 15, 176 (a) iv. 3, 172 {§) 8 22, 206 13, 172 ((3) ii. 2 13, 211 vii. 36, 173 (a) 3 5, 218 viii. 52 sgq., 161 Titinius Fr. Incert. 169, 173 (7) ix. 44, 203 Fullon. 26, 179 (7) 30, 173 (a) Georg. ii. 127, 172 (a) 131, 181 (/3) Gemin. 43 sqq., 172 (a) 274, 173 (7) Tragicus Incertus (Latinus) — iii. 139, 211 28, 173 (a) iv. 116, 199 49, 202 Fr Inc 50, 231 Wordsworth Prelude 6 58, 176 (7) 120, 179 (7) Xenophon Ages. 1. 10, 139 (/3) Trajan ad Plin. . Ep. 18 . 1, 210 11. 3, 47 i. (/3) 3, 214 (iii.) Anab i. 3. 14, 136 (j3) 20, 235 5. 2, 47 i. (^) 24, 172 ((3) 6. 2, 138 (a) 30, 172 (a) 9. 7, 139 (a) Turpilius Ganeph. 10, 224 18, 47 i. (7) Demetr. 21, 171 {P) 26, 179 (a) ii. 3. 6, 140 (a) 11, 47 i. (§) Hetaer. 86, 172 (7) 4. 19, 123 Tyrtaeus Fr. 12 35, 48 i. (7) 5. 19, 80, 98 iii. 1. 17, 46 (/3) VmaiL Aen. ii. 54, 181 (a) 94, 239 104, 211 291, 185 292, 146 (i. ) 36, 75 2. 22, 48 i. (;8) 24, 68 (P), 72, 86 25, 132 (/3) iii. 186, 210 31, 66(7) iv. 18, 196 296, 211 311, 224 317, 172 (a) 327, 185 340, 186 668, 220 36, 47 ii. (7) iv. 1. 11, 67 (7) 7. 3, 46(7) V. 1. 9, 123 10, 68 (/3) 11, 64 vii. 1. 28, 139 (;8) V. 363, 172 ip) 2. 2, 138 (fi) vi. 30, 214 (iii.) 3. 35, 123 660 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Xenophon Anai. vii. 4. 20, 129 (j3) 23, 136 (/3) 6. 15, 78 21, 61(7) 27, 67 Cyr. i. 2. 13, 85 3. 3, 47i. (/3) 8, 116a 4. 28, 132 (|3) 6. 22, 47 ii. (7) 40, 47 i. (7) ii. 1. 9, 80a iii. 3. 50, 55 (a) 55, 54(7) iv. 2. 37, 54 (;8) V. 5. 21, 47 i. (7) vi. 1. 38. 107 viii. 1. 10, 137 (o) 2. 11, 47ii. (a) Xenophon Cyr. viii. 7. 24, 102 Hell. ii. 3. 17, 69 Hipparch. 1. 3, 66 4, 54 (7) Mem. i. 2. 28, 93 36, 55 (/3) 3. 3, 141a 4, 47 i. (7) 4. 5, 67 5. 2, 54(7) ii. 2. 3, 120 iii. 5. 7, 47 ii. (/3) 6. 16, 17, 90 18, 70 Oeconom. vi. 6, 138 (/3) Sy»ip. i. 7, 137 (/3) 8, 55 (a) de Fena^. 12. 19 .sj}., 47 ii. (a) INDEX II PRINCIPAL PASSAGES CITED OR REFERRED TO IN THE NOTES The references are to the notes, suinotes, and suisubnotes, in which the citations or references respectively appear Aooius Alcumeo 58 Ixi 10 Aeschylus ^wm. 334 ; 87 1 NyctegrA&9, 226 1 336 ; xxxiii ; Ivd Philoct. 542 27s 647 ; Ivf Tdeph. 620 236 Pers. 419 ; 61 2 Aesohines c. Otesiph. p .71. 37 sg?.; 147a 450 ; 93 4 (2) ; 194 74. 14; 210 4 452 ; 194 75. 35 ; Ixxviiia 791 ; 75a 2 Pr. V. 98 ; subsubnote c 2 89. 2 ; ov (p. 464) de F. L. p 39. 44 ; xviii ; 152 ; 127 1, 6 75 4 (5) 221 ; Ixxxia 2 43. 2 ; Add. 276 ; 210 IB 52. 5 ; 7S 4 (5) 920 ; 210 15 Aeschylus ^(jr. 340 Xl2 Sept. c. Theb. 400 ; Ixi 9 345 23 1; 68 402 ; 189 3 362 93 4 (1) Suppl. 20 ; xxvii 532 cvi 7 90; 71 869 jj?. ; III 792 ; xcviia 3 930 89 924; 189 1048 162 Afranius Epistula 123 ; 238 1049 S 1 0) ; xxiii Primgn. 248 ; 266 1252 150a Agathon Fr. Inc. 5 ; cix i 1327 !g^. ; Ixxviiia i ; Alexis A^MIi-p. Fr. i. 1, 2 ; 61 ; 232 70 161 1 'Itroo-rdiT. Fr. i. 7 ; 154a 3-5 ; 1347 22 156 1 1374 5 1 (7) Fr. Inc. 3 ; xvi 1448 xcviia 3 Alfieri Antig. iv. 1 ; x 1610 xcviia 3 FUippo ii. 5 ; X Oho. 172 xxvi passim ; xcvii 195 127 1, 6, 8 Amipsias 'Ato/cott. Fr. i ; 14 6 293, 4 ; subsubnote d Andooides in Ale. p. 31. 43 ; subsubnote (P- 513) c 2 (p. 464) 305 55 10 deMyst.p. 3.11; 194 482 xcviia 3 11.17; 93 4(1) 594 xxii Antipho — Mm. 261 Ivf ; cix 5 de Caed. Herod, p. 133. 27 ; 93 4 (1) 662 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Antipho — Tetral. i. p. 115. 9 ; subsubnote c 1 (p. 464) ii. p. 121. 29 sqq. ; 123b Antonius ad Cic. A. 3 (in Cic. ad Att. xiv. 13) ; 239 6 Aratus Phaen. 431 sqq. ; 227 564 sqq. ; 227 Aretino Ragion. ii. 1 p. 232 ; Add. 2 p. 274 ; subsub- note f (p. 614) 3 p. 339 ; Add. Aristophanes Ach. 35 ; 7 5 (6) 282 ; Ixxvi 295 ; xoi 7 342, 960 ; 87 2 640 ; S7 720 sqq. ; 54 4 Av. Bccles. Eqq. Lys. Ixxiii 14 3 178 3 872 13 541 27 2 57 ciii 62 72 i8a 2 ; Ivc 3 842 873 1021 1049 1200 32 53 57 78 505 513 520 (d) 627 ; 93 3 1017 ; liv ; 93 3 1225 ; 134 151 ; 127 1 422 ; 127 2 560 sqq. ; Ixia 650 ; 7 5 (c) ; 150 674; 144 772; 164 128 ; Ixxxvd 133 ; 87 2 776 ; 204 1108 ; 23 2 extr. ; 25 10 (ft 1252;. 14 10 113 ; 179 116 ; 179a 146 sqq. ; xci 11 ; 135 360 ; 23 2 ; and cf. lii 507 Nub. Ixxxvii 3 170 10 extr. 80 , 87 2 311 ; subsubnote 2 (p. 464) 1025 1027 Aristophanes — Nub. 760 ; 93 3 1056 ; 345 2 1076 ; iS4a 3 1157 ; xliii 1296 ; xci i 1347 ; xxvii; 7 6 (a) Pac. 135 ; 127 1 347 ; Ixxxvii 4 627 ; Iv c 3 (d) 639 ; 14 10 1075 ; 133 5 1155 ; 244 2. Plut. 75 ; 66 2 104; 162 119 ; 95 4 126, .481 ; 12 4 216 sqq. ; 86 1 329; 134 438 ; 189 2 489 ; Ixxiva 997 sqq. ; cxvii 1027 ; 160 1 Ran. 96 ; 14 10 ; 23 4 ; 162 264 ; 86 3 468; 171 3 552, 4 ; 189 3 585 ; 180 2 (1) 761 ; Ixxxvd 914 ; 23 4 919 ; xci II 1374; 164 Thesm. 504 ; subsubnote c 1 (p. 464) 596 ; 7 2; ii6a 842 ; 94a ; 94b 1167 ; xci 8 Vesp. 92 ; 178 2 228, 1231 ; 12 4 350 ; 93 3 352; 159a 2 422 ; Ixxvi 800 ; cxvii 903 ; cxxxii 959 ; 127 2, 6 1405 ; 14 10 (b) ; 133 6 Aristotle 'ASriv. ttoX. c. 4 ; i 2 (a) 5 ; 75 4 (5) 12,31,32; 87 1 14, 15, 19; I 2 (7) 18; 1824 21 ; Ixxi 2 ; Add. 29 ; 87 3 II INDEX Aristotle 'A^i/y. vroX. .;. 34 ; Ixx ; Ixxi 3 35 ; Add. 37 ; 87 4 40 ; 161 3 42; 874; i6i2 51 ; Iv 3 de Anima ii. 10 ; 180 2 (1) de Oaelo ii. 2 ; 180 2 (1) Mh. Magn. i. 2. 2 ; 22 Eth. Nic. i. 10 (9). 3 ; 180 2 (5) iii. 5. 22 ; xlviia S. A. iv. 10 ; 17B 2 viii. 21 ; 178 1 Meteorol. i. 6 ; 180 4 de Part. Animal, i. ; 180 2 (2) Poet. i. 1 ; 180 4 PoUt. i. 3 ; 180 6 Rep. ii. 1 ; 180 4 iii. 8 ; 180 4 Rhet. i. 5. 11 ; Ixi 2 ii. 5. 18-22 ; 148 4 21. 11 ; 199 25. 10 ; 82 iii. 2. 3 ; xxxiia Sophist. Elench. 24 ; 180 4 Topic. f. 6 ; 180 3, 4 Aristotle (?) de Plant, i. init. ; logb Astydamas Fr. i. 1 ; 127 2 Auctor de his quae ut. non ger. in Hippoor. i. p. 687. F. =iii. p. 39. 7. K. ; 170 4 med. de vict. rat. in Hippoor. i. p. 348. F.=l. p. 651. 17. K. ; 81 Praedict. in Hippoor. i. p. 95. F.=i. p. 203. 16. K. ; 22 Aulus Gellins xviii. 2 extr. ; 22a 7 Bbatjmaechais Ta/rare ii. 7 ; oxib Bion i. 14 ; xii I V. 1 sqq^. ; cxix 2 Byron Gorsair i. 17. 13 ; cxxxviiia Caecilius Fr. Inc. 255 ; 240 Caesar Bell. Gall. i. 3 ; 139 33 (9) iv. 26 ; 215 4 V. 29 ; 334 1 vii. 20 ; 333 Camoens Os Lusiadas ii. 38 ; 3 2 iv. 30. 1 ; SS 11 102. 1 ; 261 viii. 63. 1 ; txxia ix. 68. 7 ; 156 2 Carlyle Misc. ( Whs. iii. 98) ; ix Catullus X. 29 ; 328 5 Ivi. 6 ; 24 4 Ixi. 64 ; 306 Ixvi. 18 ; 246 1 Catullus Ixxxiv. 1 ; 257 Cervantes Novel. Ej. iii. p. 16 ; xxxi 3 281 ; 299 Chaucer Millere's Tale 3764 ; Ivb Chesteriield (Lord) To his Son 74, 195 ; 199 Cicero Acad. Prior, ii. 26. 85 ; Ixxxvb 2 Aral. 447; 227 2 590; 227 1 ; 230a ad Att. i. 20. 7 210 4 ; 341 ii. 1. 3 218 5, 6 vii. 3. 10 2351 p. Caecin 2. 6 1x5 p. Cael. 12. 29 225 2 in Catil. ii. 10. 21 332 de Div. ii. 8. 20 290; 297 21 220 3 ad Fam. i. 7. 4 244 ii. 7. 1 25s xii. 6. 2 I 2 ; 321 de Fat. 7. 13 282 de Fin. i. 1. 2 Ixxia 3 ii. 7. 22 339 8. 20 ; 290; 297 12. 35 ; 218 2 18. 68 ; Ixxxvb 2 iii. 10. 35 ; 310 iv. 20. 57 , 218 2 ; 289 21. 59 ; ixs p. Flacc. 17. 40 ; 139 33 (9) de Legg. iii. 4. 11 ; 160 2 p. Leg. Man. 23. 68 ; 139 33 (9) p. Ligar. 7. 23 ; 258 8. 24 ; 336 p. Mil. 18. 48 ; 220 3 de N. D. i. 32. 89 ; 218 2 iii. 32. 81 ; 225 2 deOff. i. 9. 28 ; 170 16 ii. 23. 81 ; 282 iii. 19. 75 ; 3" 3 22. 88 ; 2182 p. Plane. 7. 18 ; ix 21. 52 ; 285 25. 60 ; 228a p. Rose. Am. 6. 17 ; 263 31. 88 ; 139 33 (3) 43. 124 ; lvc3 de Sen. 10. 31 ; 139 33 (9) 19. 69 ; 269 1 p. Sest. 27. 59 ; cxxviia 38. 81 ; Ixxxvb 2 Tusc. i. 5. 10 ; Ixxxvb 2 37. 90 ; 282 43. 103 ; 249 ». 20. 60 ; 269 3 35. 102 ; 22s 2 Verr. ii : i. 14. 37 ; 3282 42. 107 ; 218 2 664 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Cicero Verr. ii. : ii. 21. 52 ; 225 2 iii. 52. 121 ; 346 84. 195 ; 218 5, 6 V. 10. 27 ; 215 4 65. 168 ; 218 2 Comicus Inc. Latinus Fr. Inc. {Pall.) 51 ; 26s Cratinus ApaTrir. Fr. 6 ; 67 2 Dekker The Shoemaker's Holiday p. 35 ; 170 15 Demostlienes — Aphob. i. p. 814. 18 ; Ixxxv c 818. 22 ; 75 * (5) ; 139 32 Aristocr. p. 623. 22 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) 625. 6 ; 75 4 (5) Gallid. p. 1273. 4 ; 127 8 Gherson. p. 106. 23 ; 147a Conon. p. 1258. 24 ; 182 B 1269. 19 ; SS 13 de Cor. p. 284. 16 ; 14 11 (a) 294. 19 ; 154a 3 ; 157 1 296. 24 ; 42 5 318. 3 ; 92 5 de F. L. p. 343. 4 ; 75 4 (5) 357. 1 ; XXX 3 361. 29 ; 198a 364. 10 ; S4 5 13; 210 3 366. 10 ; 14 10 (a) 367. 10 ; 14 10 (I) 373. 27 ; 210 2 383. 28 ; 91 5 390. 6 sqq. ; 14 10 (a) ; xlvii ; 182a 395. 7 ; 141 401. 20 ; 19s 405. 20 ; xvii 441. 14 ; xxxi 2 442. 2 ; 87 1 7 ; I 11 (a) 443. 13 ; xi ; 202 Lept. p. 488. 27 ; 210 3 492. 23 sqq. ; 91 Mid. p. 518. 11 sqq. ; 93 3 525. 21 ; 91 5 530. 12 ; 14 10 (a) 21;liii;i8o2(5) 537. 4 ; 139 26 540. 6 sqq. ; 93. 3 549. 4 ; ix 554. 2 ; 201 560. 4 ; 210 7 563. 17 ; Ixi 3 567. 11 ; I 13 (/3) Demosthenes — Mid. 575. 24 ; 143 8 Nausim. p. 989. 9 sqq. ; xoi i 01. i. p 16. 8 ; Iv ; 198 ii. p. 18. 20 sqq. ; 93 3 iii. p. 33. 13 ; 154a 6 36. 2 ; 14 10 (a) Onet. i. p. 865. 23 ; 93 4 (1) 866. 24 ; 210 3 Phil. i. p. 44. 6 ; 170 IB 47. 17 ; 127 3 48. 22 ; 93 e (1) Phorm. p. 921. 9 ; Iv 964. 29 ; Ixii 958. 7 ; xxxi i (c) 28 ; 127 3 de Rhod. lib. p. 197. 9 ; SS 12 Timocr. p. 715. 23 ; 127 3, 6 726. 24 ; Ixi 2 passim ; subsubnote bb (p. 462) Dinarolius c. Dem. p. 91. 19 ; 127 3 Ennius Annal. xi. 386 ; 246 1 388 ; 246 2 Fr. Incert. 378 = 422 M. ; cxxxia Hecvh. 165 = 189 M. ; 254 Med. Exul 212 = 258 M. ; 214 2 Phoenix 261 = 371 M. ; 270 Sat. 54 ; 246 6 Teleph. 288 = 83 M. ; xcviia2 Bueuus Fr. ii. 6 63 Euripides Alcest. 48 ; liv 72 ; xlvi 122 ; 23 1 181 ; 14 10 897 sqq.; 124a 1, 3 Androm, 643 ; 139 30 Antiop. Fr 207 N. ; Ixxxia ^ Bacch. 612; 59 ; 121 Bdleroph. 11; 192 Cresphont. 13. 3 ; xii 6 Mectr. 56 ; xxix ; xxx 538 ; 26 5 Erechth. Fr. 17. 6 ; 67 3, 4 Fr. Incert. 152 ; 67 1 Rec. 373 ; subsubnote d 1 (p. 513) 818; 1272, 8 836 ; 127 6 1113 ; 124a 1 Hel. 271 ; 67 3, 4 335, 6 ; Ixii Heracl. 498 ; 44 1 721 ; 23 4 Here. Fur. 1417 ; xxxiia 2 Ilippol. 561 ; Ixxiv . 645 sqq. ; 127 1 925 ; 127 1, 10 INDEX 665 Euripides JKp^oZ. 1078 1197 'lirirSX. KaXuTTT. Fr. 12 Ino Fr. Ion 1. A. I. T. Med. Orest. Phoeniss. Phoenix Fr. Polyid. Fr. Troad. Euryplion(?) in Hippocr. 1. p, =ii. p. 219. 15. K. ; 83 1 127 1 Ixxv 3 127 1 127 2 xxvii ix XX. Ixxi 4 Ixxi 4 xxxiia XXV 127 1 139 29 1 2*7 9 Ixiii xcTiia 3 86 i 1x1 3 26 4 iSS IVC 2 1x1 3 12 3 ; llv Ixxvilla I ; 1542 1367; xxxl i 497 ; Ixxxia 3 ; 124a 2 ; 127 9 1100 ; xcvUa 3 1509 ; xil 2 1533 ; 72 2 1629 ; 1x1 9 92 sqq. ; 134 ; xovia 720; 89 724 ; 89 728; 89 968 ; Ixxl 4 xlv I xil s (o) 42 4 ; 112a 108 ; xxxiia 464. F. 14 175 1291 1498 833 1141 1210 1215 354 1379 1 87 97 241 261 368 386 585 606 867 941 1181 151 2 1; 7; 764; Herodotus iii. 127 ; xxll iv. 62 ; 182 2 118 ; 124a 2 ; iS4a 6 vi. 44 ; 93 4 (1) vii. 16. 3 ; 7S 4 (5) 214; 64 236 ; 47 1 viii. 79 ; I 2 (a) Hesiod Fr. 217 ; 94 Op. et Di. 121 ; 25 9 Sout. 377 ; xlU i Hippocrates de cap. mdn. i. p. 911. F.=iii. p. 371. 3. K. ; 96 2 de rat. mot. in morb. acut. i. p. 399. F.=ii. p. 74. 1. K.; s 2 (fi); lOI Hippocrates (?) de Artie, i. p. 791. F. =iii. p. 161. 6. K. ; 22 i. p. 813. F. =iii. p. 202. 7. K. ; 22 Hipponax Fr. 19 ; xlU i Homer II. Od. Fielding Tom Jones ii. 8 ; 11 1 4 Geesset Yer Vert ii. ; ix Hbbodas iv. 21 ; 34s 1 Herodotus i. 46 ; 207 56 ; 93 3 158 ; 139 31 196 ; 93 4 (1) ii. 13 ; 72 1 173 ; 1.24a 2 ; 127 9 iii. 15 ; 72 1 66 ; 139 32 i. 139 ii. 83 371 488 597 783 iii. 56 449 V. 127 S83 819 vii. 386 xiv. 241 xvii. 51 xix. 205 xxii. 66 xxiii. 71 xxiv. 224 ii. 31 78 iii. 205 17 32, 20 347 540 IV. VI. viii. xii. xvii. xix. 311 xxiv. 80 87 Horace A. P. Epod. Mpp. Od. 5. i. 2. 7. 18. i. 2. 333 376 457 87 69 171 3433 127 6 138 ; 140 93 4 (1) cxxvicc III 4 343 3 2 Ixxxla 2 Ixxia 3 93 4 (1) xoiv 325 93 5 (1) 14 6 160 1 93 5 (2) 933 93 1, e (1) I7S 933 33 ; xlU 2 93 4 (1) 138 138 176 93 4 (1) xlil I 93 4 (1) 127 9 ; 239 7 ; Ixxla 3 ; 83 ; 170 15 ; 239 7 ; 444 666 GREEE AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES II Horace Od. i. 13. 13 ; 239 6 38. 3 ; 245 2 iii. 3. 7 ; 276 . 23. 19 ; 8 4 24. 5 ; 24 4 iv. 4. 65 ; 8 5 ; 316 Sat. i. 2. 101 ; 61 3 ii. 5. 90 ; 239 6 Hyperides — c. Athen. col. 7 11. 4 sqq. ; 75 4 (3) 14 extr. ; 182a 2 p. Euxen. 19 1. 21 ; subsubnote bb (p. 462) 37 1. 17 ; 93 3 38 1. 24 ; 128 42 1. 18 ; 128 46 1. 20 ; 81 p. I/ycopJir. 8 1. 3 ; 128 Orat. Fun. 7 1. 30 sqq. ; 87 1 8 1. 7 ; 7S 4 (2), (5) 9 1. 1 sqq. ; Ixxviiia i 11 1. 42 ; 128 13 1. 1 ; 128 ; xci c. Philippid. 1. 165 ; Ixxia 3 ISAETjs de Arist. Saered. p. 79. 1 ; 153 Fr. 3 ; 127 3 de Menecl. Haered. § 31 ; Ixi 2 d& Pyrrh. Hatred, p. 43. 39 ; 119a Isocrates de Pac. p. 168. c. ; 92 4 p. 360. a. ; 205 Juvenal i. 165 SJ2- ; 323 1 156 323 1 iii. 168 309 82 cvi 6 vi. 448 559 ; 2397 234 vii. 175 sqq. ; 323 3 ix. 80 8 2, 3 X. 7 147 8 2 3232 xiv. 48 239 Keats Isabella 27 ; ix Labeeius Fr. Inc. 114 ; 233 1 Leophanes (?) in Hippocr. i. p. 263. F. =i. p. 469. 15. K. ; 84 Livy iv. 43 ; 333 vii. 18 ; 334 1 xxi. 13 ; 170 15 ; ex 28 ; 215 3 34 ; 346 42 ; 21S 4 44 ; 239 8 50 ; 256 Livy xxii. 60 ; 267 xxiv. 26 ; 139 33 (9) ; 333 ; 346 xxvi. 32 ; 264 xxix. 25 ; cxix 3 xxxi. 1 ; 287 ; 328 2 xxxix. 37 ; 264 ; 273. xl. 56 ; cxix 3 xlv. 37 ; 218 2 Lucan vii. 144 ; 325 Lucian Dissert, c. Hesiod. 0. 7 ; 88 3 ; 92 3 Pseudolog. § 2 ; 17 Vera Hist. ii. 29 ; 92 3 Vilar. Auct. 0. 11 ; 92 3 Lucilius V. 182 ; 237 ; 280 1 vii. 242 ; 24 4 xxvi. 606 ; 24 4 ; 271 xxviii. 684 ; 226 3 710 ; 338 XXX. 864 ; 1x1 10 Lucretius i. 357 ; cxxxi 4 ii. 34 sqq. ; 287b 4-6 ; 7 1034 sqq. ; 282a; 327a 2 iii. 959 (946) sqq. ; 287b 13 iv. 260 ; 327a 1009 sqq. ; cvia V. 991 ; cxxvii 1004 (1006 M.); 2467(a) vi. 161 ; 327a 741 (740 M.); 2467 (b) Lyricus Anonymus — Fr. Adesp. 27 ; cxxxii 88 ; cvi 7 Lysias Alcih. i P- 140. 34 sqq. ; 88 1 37 ; 87 1 38; 88 1 Andoc. P- 103. 43 ; 87 1 105. 5 ; Ixxxvi i A97/X. Kard\. pp. 172. 23 ; 87 1 174. 13 ; 87 1 Eratosth. P- 92. 21 ; 87 1 93. 14 ; 107 1 16 ; 87 1 95. 27 ; 127 3 123. 25 ; Iv 127. 42 ; 191 44; 22 V. Frument. P- 165. 13 ; subsub- note c 5 (p. 464) p. Mantith. P- 147. 34 ; subsub- note c 1 (p. 464) c. Philon. P- 189. 36 ; Iv de Vuln. P- 101. 39 ; I3sa Machiavelli Disc. s. Tit. lAv. ii. 17 ; 139 9, 18 Marlowe Edward II. p. 186 b ; 139 1 INDEX 667 Marlowe Edward II. p. 189 ; cxia Jew of Malta iv. p. 169 b ; 170 16 Martial ii. 53. 3 ; 277 vii. 72. 1 ; 252 passim ; 277 Massinger Fatal Dowry v. 2 ; cxxvii Maupassant (Guy de) Une vie co. 1, 3 ; Add. Mauro (11) Op. Burl. i. p. 210 ; ix Maximianus i. 44 ; 234 Menander 'AvSpla Fr. 8 ; xci 8 Aidv/iai. Fr. 1 ; xei 8 Kaj')70. Fr. i ; 178 2 M^9i7 Fr. 1. 11 ; 127 2 Microti/ii. Fr. 11 ; 178 3 Fr. Incert. 3. 1 ; 127 2 Moschus iii. 122 ; 127 6 Epigram. Fr.; 127 9 Nabvius Fr. Inc. 113 ; 233 2 (^) New Testament (Greek) — St. Matth. V. 20 ; 325 Acts viii. 30 ; 139 7 xvii. 27 ; 343 3 XXV. 22 ; xoviii Col. i. 3 ; 44 3 Eph. V. 20 ; 44 3 Philipp. iii. 11 ; 343 3 Bom. ix. 3 ; xciz XV. 6 etc. ; 44 3 St. James i. 27 ; 44 3 Nicomachus 'I\iff. Fr. i. 7 ; 27 2 Novius Fr. Inc. 117 ; 312 Ovid A. A. ii. 103 ; cxxxi 4 469 ; 316 iii. 88 ; 239 5 115 ; 24s 2 129 ; 239 5 133 ; 239 7 Fast. i. 109 ; 234 vi. 113 ; 311 2 Met. ix. 728 ; 279 Pont. i. 2. 105 ; 239 5 Paeabosoo / Diporti ii. 10 ; cxxvib 4 Parmenio (Anth. Pal. 9. 114) ; 178 2 Peele Old Wives' Tale p. 449 6 ; 37 2 Persius i. 5 ; 239 6 110 ; oxxviii 3 ii. 5 ; 8 2 sqq. 9; 330 V. 19 ; cxxviii S 45 ; 239 7 ; cxxviii 2 157 ; 239 7 Pherecrates(?) MeraXX. Pr. 3 ; Ixxv 3 Philemon 'A5eX0. Fr. 1, 11 ; 154a 6 ILrepiy. Fr. 1 ; 12 4 Philippus {ap. Athen. viii. p. 359 B) ; Ixxiva rmdar Ditivyi •ami). Fr. 53. 8 ; xiv 2 Nem. xi. is; 114 4 01. xi. (x.) 99; 1822 Pyth. vi. 48 ; cvi 7 ix. 115 ; cxviii i. 29, 41 ; cvi 7 61 sqq. ; 162 Scot. Fr. 100. 1 ; 122 Plato (Comicus) 'EXXds Fr. 3 ; oxi 3 ; 172 Mkuiv Fr. 1. 7 ; 15S 1 "t:irip§. Fr. 1 ; 257 2 Plato Ale. i p. 119 D; 180 2 (2) 122 D; 13 ii p. 146 D ; 93 5 (1) Apol. p. 20 C ; 4S 29 C ; 202a Oratylus p. 397 A ; 5 1 (7) Crito p. 43 C ; xii s (^) ; 933 •44 D ; 124a 2 ; 127 10 45 D ; 93 3 47 D sqq. ; 52 52 C ; xii 5 (P) 53 E ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) Oorg. p. 460 E ; 178 2 479 A ; 44 3 ; 183a 481 A ; Ixxxvi i 492 E ; xii 5 (a) 514 D; 232; 1782; 180 2 (2) B; 137 Legg. iii p. 688 B; 159 iv. p. 719 D ; 14 6 Lysis p. 203 A ; Ixxv 5 206 A ; 133 1 209 E; 180 2(1) Meno p. 72 C ; 180 3 96 E ; liTYTT 97 C ; Ixxxve 2 Pa/rmeTiM p. 141 B ; 36 Phaedo p. 61 C ; 14 6 67 E ; xii 3 ; 134c 77 A, D ; xlii i 101 D sqq. ; 93 5 (1) Plmedmis p. 245 B ; 75 4 (6) 251 A; 6s 269 A ; 178 2 PMleb. p. 16 C ; 87 1 58 C; 180 2 (5) Protag. p. 310 D ; 10s 318 B; 1782; 1802 (1) 319 A ; iS2a 668 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Plato Prolog, p. Repuhl. ii. iii. Sophist. Sympos. Theaetet. vii. p. viii. p. ix. p. , p. p. 327 E ; 133 1 ; 183 328 A ; 180 2 (3) 335 C ; 127 3 340 E; 136 341 E ; 87 1 342 B ; Ixi 9 351 B sqq- ; I33 1 358 A : 210 4 376 A ; 96 1 406 D ; 99 E ; I 18 408 A; 180 2 (6) 412 D ; Ixxxve i ; 133 1 137 180 2 (5), 4 133 1 93 5 (1) SS 8 189 2 (5) Add. Ixii 16 ; 180 3, 4 14 6 ; 196 5 180 2 (5) iq. ; 210 12 133 1 87 1 xxxi I (b) 14 10 ; 93 3 422 B 473 A 493 A 501 B 607 C 515 D 520 D 553 D 579 D 615 D 247 D 178 A 196 C; 200 c \ 217 B; 219 E; Ivc 222 A ; 14 6 p. 147 A sqq. \ 69 1 156 D, E ; Ixx 158 B ; 210 4 163 E ; 204a 166 B 171 B 178 E; 210 3 181 D ; 87 2 192 E Si (7) 75 4 (5) iS4a 7 ; civ Tmrumus p. 26 B ; liv 56 D ; 93 5 (1) passim ; 103a Plato (?) Theages. p. 130 D ; 180 2 (4) E ; xoi II Plautus Amph. i. 1. 50 ; cxxx 2 ; cxxxi 4 ii. 1. 40 ; 139 33 (9) 2. 52 ; 215 7 431. R. =iii. 3. 27 ; 215 3 777. E. =iv. 6. 8; 252 943. R. = 9. 19 ; 257 3 i. 2. 65 ; cxxx ili. 4. 44 ; 242 8 6. 54 ; cxxxi 3, 4 ii. 4. 1 ; xcviia 2 iv. 2. 15 ; cxxxi 3, 4 Aulul. Bacch. Capt. Casin. Oistell. Plautus — Menaechm. 451. R. =iii, 1. 6; xcviia 2 M. G. 604. R.=iii. 1. 9; 109 618. R. = 24; 151 3 1362. R. = iv. 8. 52 ; 16 ; 269a Mostdl. 711. R. =iii. 2. 22 ; 313 Pseud. 286. R.= i. 3. 62; 218 2; 283 499. R. = 5. 84 ; cxxxi 859. R. =iii. 2. 70; Ivc 3 ; 253 1 864. R. = 75 ; ■2S3a 1213. R. = iv. 7. 115; 240 Rud. 329. S. = ii. 2. 23 ; 244 ; 245 iii. 4. 6 ; 151 4 Trin. 468. R. = ii. 4. 67 ; 281 474. R. = 73; iS9a3 691. R.=iii. 2. 65; 24 4 True. iii. 1. 3 ; 24 4 passim ; 244 1 Pliny H. N. : Praef. 26 ; 344 ii. 63 ; 329 Pliny Bpp. i. 12. 7 ; 215 3 ix. 19. 3 ; 338 21. 4 ; 338 Pomponius Oall. Transalp. 51 : 335 Prostib. 150 ; 24 4 Propertius i. 20. 4 ; 299 iii. 6. (ii. 16) 43 ; 261 1 iv. (iii. ) 7. 43 ; 263 12. 27 ; 44 4 v. (iv.) 5. 9 ; 311 3 11 ; 297 7. 29 ; 218 2 Psalms (English) xxxvii. 25 ; i 24 QiriNTiLlAN i. 1. 5 ; 239 7 viii. 3. 30 ; 8 2 ROAOS v. Garvan 1 Ves. Sen. 157, 160 ; cvi 8 Sallust B. J. 27 ; 278 31 ; 269 2 Shadwell The Virtuoso i. 1 ; xixb The Volunteers i. 1 ; xixb Shakspeare — As You lAke It iv. 3 ; xixb Coriol. V. 5 ; Ixi II 2 Hen. VI. iv. 10 ; 109 ; iii 1 V. 1 ; 24 14 ; Ivb Macbeth iv. 3 ; xxxi i (c) ; 9 2 ; Ixxxvia ; 280 2 Much Ado V. 3 ; xii 2 Simonides Ceus 96. 3 ; xii 7 Solon Fr. 10. 1 ; Ixxxia 2 INDEX 669 Solon Fr. 12. 1 ; Ixxxia 2 20. 1; 178 3 24. 5; 2510 36 extr ; Ixxviiia i ; s Sophocles Aj. 186 ; 142 2 313 203 314 ; 12 3 ; 186 387 xcviia 3 403 189 2 496 130 534 151 1 767 178 2 807 Ixxxia 3 886 26 3 921 5 1(7) 1077 178 2 1126 I 11 (7) ; ix 1131 S4 5 ; 185 1138 189 1 Ant. 467 Ixxxvii 2 685 147a 710 198c 750 189 2 751 cxii I 1081 cxxvii El. 526 Ixxxia 2 914 1543 1022 1541 1131 127 1 1141 Ixxxia 2 1467 Ixxxvia Oed. Col. 42 xxviii 70 xxviii 188 93 3 ; Ixxxva 205 xxviii 395 xxxiv 944 cxv 964 iSia 2 1418 xxviii 1443 77 1492 XXXV Oed. Tyr. 255 Ixxia 3 472 68 523 151a 1 691 197 765 xcviia 3 862 li 936 xxiii 1062 Ivi 1242 Ixxv 1270 oxiv 1334, 5 ; 152 1340 Ivc 3 1354, 5 ; 152 1368; 152 1387 Ixxviiia i ; is 1389 127 1, 8 1391 127 1, 6, 8 238 Oed. Tyr. 1438 ; 13 1492; Ivd Philoct. 66 ; 53 12 ; 54 1 441 ; xxxi I (a) 493, 4; 181 572; isia4 771 ; subsubnote d 1 (p. 513) 895 ; xxiv 1084 ; xii i Trachin. 73 ; xii 2 112; 1524 120 ; 68 1 (2) 144 sqq. ; xxxv ; Ivd 161 ; 93 4 (1) 684 ; 93 4 (1) 850 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) Fr. Inc. 724 ; Add. 821 ; xci 8 r F. Q. i. 6. 42. 7 ; 121 8. 18. 9 ; 121 Tacitus Annul, ili. xii. xiii. 15; 18; 40; Hist. 14; 344 64 ; Ixxia 3 3; 21S 3 Ivo 3 21S 3; 342 343 56 ; Ixxia 3 57 ; isga 2 8 ; Ixxia p ix 239 7 336; 337 49; 84; ii. 77 ; Tasso Ger. Lib. xviii. 80 ; Ixxia 4 Tenant v. Ooldwin (2 Eaym. 1089, 1093 : S.C. 6 Mod. 311, 314) ; 139 33(7) Terence Adelph. iv. 2. 20 ; 6. 67; 7. 34; Andr. Prol. 3 ; i. 2. iii. 4, iv. 4. Eun. ii. 2. iii. 3. Eecyr. ii. 1. iv. 2. Phorm. i. 4. ii. 1, 24s 139 33 (3) 343 3 Ixi 10 139 33 (9) xci 8 218 2 311 2 246 5 218 2 2S8 311 3 268 343 3 251 218 2 Iva cvii 670 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Terence Phorm. v. 4. 5 : 287b 4, 6 1 Thxicydides iii. 81. 6 ; 210 12 Theocritus i. 134 ; 228 82. 13 ; 74 4 (4) vii. 86 ; 127 3 83. 1 ; subsubnote a (p. xi. 54 ; 127 3 388) 77 ; 106 iv. 27. 5 ; 213 xxiii. 26 ; 109b 40. 2 ; 139 30 41 ; 178 2, 3 63. 2 sqq. ; 14 3 xxvii. 21 ; 22a 2 84. 2 ; 55 11 22; XV 92. 2 ; 44 1 Theocritus (?) xxv. xxix. ; 74 93. 3 ; 209 xxix 21 ; 75 1 8 ; 210 3 Theognis 689 ; 149a 106. 1 ; xlviia 717 ; 87 1 115. 2; 75 4(4) 723 ; 110 1 118. 3 ; Ixxv 4 957 ; 75 4(4) 120. 1 ; subsubnote c 1 973 ; 22a 2 (p. 464) 1177 ; 88a 121. 1 ; subsubnote c 1 Thucydides i. 9. 5 ; 112 (p. 464) 17. 1 ; 75 4 (4) ; 159a V. 40. 1; Ivc 3 20. 3; 75 4 (5); 46. 3; 212 xoTiia 3 111. 4 ; xiii 23. 2 cxxvia 6 ; Ixi 4 34. 1 102 vi. 11. 4 ; 131 50. 1 xlxa 12. 1 ; 87 1 68. 3 Ixviiia 16. 3 ; 75 4 (2) 80. 3 443 18. 4 ; 22a 82. 1 1X3 6 ; 23 2 ; 27 4 ; 2 170 4, 8 162 ; 210 8 120. 2 75 4 (5) 20. 2 ; 93 3 5 Ixxi 3 ; 56b 23. 3 ; I 16 (^) ; xi 121. 7 Iv, Ixv 28. 1 ; 74 4 (4) 136. 3 541 31. 3 ; xiv I 137. 7 541 34. 5 ; 14 10 ; 132 ; 138. 1 I 13 (7) 201 142. 3 I 10 6 ; 75 4 (4) 143. 4 xlvjia 36. 2 ; 75 4 (5) 6 log 3; 933 ii. 5. 1, 4 208 1-5 37. 1 ; 23 3 7 210 3 40. 2 ; Ix 24. 2 Ixia 49. 1 ; 210 25. 6 72 54. 5 ; 87 1 35. 2 152a 55. 3 sqq. ; Ix 3 39. 5 136a 67. 3 ; 182 1, 2 43. 1 93 3 60. 3 ; Ix 3 80. 1 14 6 : xliv ; 61. 1 ; 75 4 (4) 109a 64. 1 ; xlviii 102. 8 ; 144 1 69. 3 ; SS 11 iii. 6. 2 ; 139 31 79. 2 ; 134 10. 6 ; 20ia 82. 2 ; Ixx 16. 1 ; 133 1 ; cxi c 2, 3 87. 3 ; 75 4 (2) 17. 1; I 2 (/3); 210 89. 3 ; 44 1 9 sqq. 92. 4 ; 178 2 18. 1 ; cxi c 3 vii. 8. 1 ; 88 2 44 3; 92 18. 2 ; 2 ; xixa 49 3; 1X4 21. 5 ; iS9a 2 57 4 ; 75 4 (5) 25. 9 ; Ixviiia 64. 2 ; 75 4 (4) 28. 4 ; xlviia 69 1 ; 75 4 (5) 34. 2 ; SS 11 INDEX 671 Thuoydides vii. 60. 2 ; 170 4 ; 63. 4 ; 13 209a 65. 3; 67. 3; 388) 69. 3 ; ss 11 1. 1 27. 4 93 4 (1) subsubnote a (p. TibuUus i. 4. I4S 211 45. 2 ; Ix 3, 4 46. 3 ; xi 48. 5 ; 75 4 (5) 81. 3 ; Ixii 86. 4 ; 166 1 2 ; cxl c I 36 cxxxi 4 cxxxi 4 102 27; 63; 22; de Timocles Atovvtr. Fr. 1. 13 sqq.; 27 2 ; 1561 Tirso de Molina HI Burlador Sevilla iii. 15 ; 157 9, 13 Titinius FuUon. 30 ; 248 Fr. Inc. 169 ; 2543 Tragious Incertus — (Graecus) F ^55 .3: 27 1 ; Ixiii (Latinus) Fr. Inc. 59 ; 242 13 CXXXI 9 ; 262 90; 159a 3 Turpilius Demetr. 21 ; 232 Epider. 56 ; 308 VlBGlL Aen. i. 573 Ixi 10 604 342 iii. 702 246 7 (c) iv. 18 284 vi. 780 24s 2 ix. 12 139 33 (3) 151 246 6 190 139 33 (3) 716 cxxvicc xii. 76 239 7 Ed. iv. 52 2452 V. 6 2452 vi. 56 343 3 viii. 58 228 102 239 6 ix. 37 343 3 Oeorg. i. 66 2452 iii. 139 239 7 iv. 116 cxxxi 4 Virgil Georg. iv. 563 ; 260 Xenophon Agesil. 2. 24 Anab. i. 1. 6 4. 3 ■2. 6; 16, i. 1. 4. CXXVl 75 4 (5) 182 3 13 ; xci I 206 93 4 (2) 3. 18 ; 14 5 4. 25 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) 5. 7 ; 93 3 19 ; 22 19 ; 137 40 ; 93 3 9 ; 182 3 iv. 6. 22 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) V. 6. 9 ; 22 ; 137 vi. 1. 28 ; Iv c 2 Vii. 2. 6 ; 93 4 (2) 14 ; Ixvlia 3. 8, 36 ; Ive 57 ; 93 4 (1) 11 ; 93 5 (1) 6. 9, 10 ; Ixxxvb i 22 ; 93 5 (1) 41 ; liv ; 93 3 iii. 3. 50 ; 97 iv. 1. 1 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) 4 ; 93 3 7. 3. Hellen. ii. 5 ; 155 2 8 ; xci II 29 ; I 16 (|3) I 16 (/3) Mem. i. 2. 6 3. 13 ; 93 3 93 4(1) 24 ; 87 1 49 ; 87 1 56 ; 87 1 179 93 3 59; 1: 7. ii. 2. 4 ; 93 3 Rep. Ath. 2. 14 ; subsubnote c 2 (p. 464) Symp. 2. 19 ; 180 2 (5) 8. 22 ; 142 1 Venat. 12. \% sqq,.; 66 2; 66a passim ; 27 INDEX III GEEEK In this and the following Indices references to the Text are printed thus : 43 (^) „ ,, „ Notes „ 44 1 ,, ,, „ Subnotes ,, Ixi 2 „ „ „ Subsubnotes „ subsubnote a (p. 388) a and ou confused ; 11 ; Iv c 2 HeXov )( S.e\os ; xlii a't ydp )( al ydp ; 175 aKodfrofxai )( &KOV(r&i}(rofjiaL (Plat. Rep, ^ vi. p. 507 C) ; 55 8 dKo6(Tco (fut. ) (Hyperid. Or. Fun. col. 13 1. 1) ; 128. See alsolxviii fiWojs . . . ^ tiis ou (Dem. Mid. p. 537. 4) ; xovib 7 H,jxa vioL yepaLT^poLs (Thuc. vi. 18. 6) ; 210 8, 14 hfidproiv (Cratin. Apaw^r. Fr. 6) ; 6y H/m' ainots ^vepyoi /cctXXet (Thuc. iii. 17. 1) ; 210 9, 14 d^CKKyjdhTa (Eur. Phoenix Fr. 4. 1), rnn. , passive ; xiv i dv manufactured by dissecting a word beginning with those letters ; Ixxviila I ; 125 ; 154 unnecessarily inserted by correc- tion; 124; 152 ; 166 carelessly retained ; 93 7, 8 ; 209 with present subj.=fut. indie. ; 24 ; 22 ; 22a ; 137 ; 138 odx eiipocs ^Ti I ^tjtSjv &v (Ar. Ran. 96) ; 14 10 ; 23 4 ; 162 TrapejKdTreis (Aesch. Ag. 1262) ; iSoa with a long : in the ordinary use of the word ; 12 2 sqq. &v : = "if" — by whom used ; 27 d,va/xTr\dKijTos (Aesch. Ag. 345) ; 68 dve. Fr. i. 66 ; Herodas iii. 1) ; xciv SoKoi )( SoKohj ; 133 SpdfravT^s rt /cai KLvdvvei}(r(u (Thuc. i. 20. 3) ; xcviia 3 Stfri )( dolri ; Ixxxvi e, rarely elided before &v in Attic poetry ; 124a 2 laSe (Theocr. xxvii. 22) ; xv iiv, with a long, always : 12 4 idv, -tjv or &v (o), with the present indicative, instances from the Hip- pocratea ; 83 with the future indicative, like instances ; 88 with the past subjunctive, like iiLstances ; 95 ^dv re followed by 4dp re /ir) (Plat. Rep. vi. p. 488 D) ; 170 10 extr. iPov\riSri ij (Thuo. viii. 86. 4) ; i66 1 e|iiXi)s, 7rpo(i\i)S (Dem. de Fals. Leg. p. 395. 7) ; 141 iirdv not used in Xenophon ; 27 hrqv (and relatives or relatival particles with S.v) followed by — the present indicative ; 83 the future indicative ; 88 the past subjunctive ; 95 eir-qv K (TheocT. xi. 77) ; 106 iiriyiyvtbffKei )[ eif rt ytyviocTKei. (Plat. Theaet. p. 192 E) ; iS4a 3 eTTtStSot (Euryphon (?) de Morb. ii. in Hippocr. i. p. 464. F. =ii. p. 219. 15. K. etc.) ; 83 1 iiriBeivTo (Thuc. vi. 11. 4) )( iiridoivTO, sim. ; 131 eTTLiTxolris (Horn. II. xiv. 241) ; xciv iTr\rf}9uov )( iirX-^dwov (Aesch. Ag. 869); III 2 ^TToiei as used by the Greek painters and sculptors, and of poems ; Preface extr. ; 345 epiovijiv (Horn. II. xxii. 67) ; 14 6 lpxoiia.1., otherwise than in the present indicative in Attic ; subsubnote c (p. 464) (Tt=inquam (Plat. Protag. p. 328 A); 183 ev66j eW6s ; Ixxv ^X" with the past indefinite participle of another verb (ffau/xdtras ?xw, sim. ) ; 26 5 ^ degenerating into et in terminations, j3ao"iX^s, ^5?;, X&rj )( jSaaiXeis, ^Seij/, Xi/ei ; 7 3; 53 9 ^ )( ^;/="I was" ; 7 3 iiyyvriKeij iveyey&qrOy past perfect in- dicative from iyyvAtj] ; 56 ; ma TiyoifXTjVy (^ft-TiVj putabam — "I used to think" for "I should have- thought " ; 152a iJKoy t4 )( iJKOvTO (Thuc. v. 40. 1) ; Iv 3 (a) i^Kuj=veni, not venio ; 142 2 ijv (S;)a = practically etrri ; i 18 ijv : see under ^dv, i^v or &v [d] ^v fih or ijv followed by d 5^ /xij, el 5' o5c, ijv Sk ii-q : ijv 5i /J,ri )( el di /iij : in second half of bimembered sen- tences ; 104 ; 170 8 sqq. fiv re followed by ^j" re fir; (Ar. Lys. 939) ; 170 10 extr. ^fa (past indefinite of dyw) ; 171 2 ij^a )( ^^a (past indefiuite of ^Cffoj) (Ar. Ran. 469) ; 171 S -ijtrffa )( -T]ev(Tafj^vav (Eur. Hipp. 561), passive ; Ixxiv 6 S' odv, ^ S' oSv, ol 5' oiv ){ Sd' oHv, ■fjS' 0^, (XS' oiv ; cxii 6S0O, Trjs airijs — (Ar. Fac. 1155, etc. ) ; 2444 6X^(7M (future) ; cxi 3 ; 172 3 d\lot = 6Xiyos (Plat. 'Tirip^. Fr. i.); 2S7 2 iKiapos = dXiyupos ; 257 2 dTdrav dvayKacrdeiTjfiev (Plat. Symp, p. 219 E); Ivo ((fus, 6(j>pa, etc., with the past indica tive ; 124 3 ; 127 iiras (final particle) )( Stcuis S,v ; 12 2 2512 6 (TtTos apyds (Ar. 'A9. iroX. u. 51) Ivc 3 (6) dlTa;- Kc (Theognis 723) ; no OM and a confused ; li ; Iv c 2 oi, negative to what immediately follows ; 4S ; 54 5 pleonastic ; 139 24, 26, 29-32 oi )( iJ.il in bimembered sentences (Mr. Shilleto's note on Thuo. i. 121. 7) ; Iv; Ixv oiS' hi el Ti yhoiTo (Dem. de Cor. p. 284. 16 sqq. ) ; xlix i oiS^, /iTjW, epexegetic ; 44 3 ; 183a oiK iiav = Kf Xeiieix iJ.ii ; Ixii (otfre omitted) — oflre ; cvi 7 oSrojSf as in oiirtj ykp Trio'xot/Aei' &i' KOfcfis (Dem. Philipp. i. p. 44. 6) ; 170 15 oifrus li/tr; aTiffis Trpoix^PV"'^ (Thuo. iii. 81. 6) ; 210 (2) odx 6/io/ws (Thuc. vi. 64. 1 ; vii. 28. 4 ; Ar. Mh. Nic. iii. 5. 22), ofe ^K Tov ifiolov (Thuc. i. 143. 4), oix iv bfiolip (Thuc. iv. 106. 1), expressing a notion of increase instead of one of diminution ; xlviii ipa, Sttus with the past indicative ; 124a 3 ; 127 irapi, to express the agent after passive verbs ; 75 4 (3) vapk rb AewKbpiov irepUTVXO" Tip 'IirwdpxV (Thuc. vi. 57. 3, and of. Aristot. 'A0TIV. voKit. c. 18) ; 182 ndpis 74p oire ffWTeXijS riXis (Aesch. Ag. 532) ; cvi 7 JleipaiSis )( Heipaiiws (Hyperid. pro Euxenipp. col. 19 I. 21) ; subsub- note bb (p. 462) veirbvBf), -ol-q \ 96 2 irepiaffeiffxi ^ 5t,Ka.L0(rivri bfiuf tXcTov T&v ypaixixariuv (St. Matth. V. 20) ; 32s TTveiiffw (future) ; xlix irbBev dv ; Trfis dv ; Hs ILv ; and the like, expressive of a wish ; xcviia ToXefi.'/ia-oiJ.ai (Thuc. vii. 25. 9) ; Ixviiia TTopevBivT (Pind. Lithyrainh. Fr. 53. 8) ; siv 2 irpivov Jjv, with the genitive (Soph. Aj. 534) ; 151 3 vpoelvTO )( irpodivTo and the like ; 131 ; 206 irpbuXriffis eis §d' (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 13i0); lvC3(6) To^Tijj irapadeiyfiaTi xP^f^^^^ (Lysias Alcib. i. p. 140. 37), sim. ; 87 1 Tpioiv (Eur. Fr. Inc. 152) ; 67 Vowels, pronunciation of ; cxxxii i vTTaKoiaeTai. (Thuc. vi. 69. 3) ; 55 11 inrb, to express the agent after passive verbs ; 75 4 (1), (2) (pavoh)v (Soph. Aj. 313) ; 203 (f>8a,(T6,(rris rrjs Sevripas (Thuc. iii. 49. 3); 1X4 (po^'ricrecrSe (Dem. de Rhod. lib. p. 197. 9s!?2.); 55 12 Xaipa, its future perfect active ; 6 XPV"; 46 Xpn 26 difference between ireirpax^s Siv iarai and treirpax'i's Sc J ; 26 thrown back, and even repeated ; 27 ; 23 ; 176 ; especially with verbs of "knowing," "thinking," "seem- ing," etc. ; 23 3 its consequent coalescence with el, forming 4dv, ijv and &v (with a long) ; 29 ■ with the present subjunctive, in independent sentences, as equivalent to a future indicative ; 24 ; 22 ; 1 effect of its addition to a condi- tional sentence of past time denoting actual facts ; 33 a (S) with the past indie, (with or without fie) ; 30 (A') a ; 50 ; 62 with the pres. indie, (with or without dv) ; 30 (A') J ; 51 ; 62 ; 83 with the fut. indie, (with or without &v) ; 30 (A) c ; 52 ; 62 ; 88 with the past subj. (with or without &) ; 30 (B')a; 54; 62; 95 with the present snbj. (with or without dv) ; 30 (B') J ; 55 ; 62 "Earth," the ; Ixxia 3 el, its origin ; 25 its use ; 29 coalescence with it of dp belong- ing to the following verb, thus form- iug idv, ■fjv, dv (with a long) ; 29 with the present subjunctive ; 30 (B) 6 ; 48 ; 62 • with the past indicative with dv ; 30 (A') a; 50 ; 62 witli the present indicative with dv ; 30 (A') b ; 51 with the future indicative with dv; 30 (A) c; 52 with the past subjunctive with dv ; 30 (B') as ; 54 ; 62 with the present subjunctive with dv ; 30 (B') b ; 58 with infinitive in indirect speech ; 26 not with participle ; 26 2 never omitted from protasis ; iS4a4 Elmsley, his proneness to establish new canons ; xc on -rjv as the ending of the third person singular of past perfect ; 7 4 on forms like Siii^as ; xcl i on the forms of the perfect sub- junctives in the Greek orators ; 96 2 on the non-elision before dv, in Attic poetry, of the vowel e ; 124a 2 on Aesch. Ag. 1374 ; s 1 (7) Cho. 293, 4 ; subsubnote d (p. 513) Ar. Ach. 35 ; 7 5 (b) 295 ; xcl 7 VI INDEX 687 Elmsley ou Ar. Ach. 842 ; Ixxiii Av. 57 ; S7 Plut. 216 ; 86 2 Thesm. 1168 ; xci 8 Eur. Bacch. 61 2 ; 59 3 sqq. Hec. 818 ; 127 2 Herod. 498 ; 44 1 /. .1. 1210 ; xxxiia 1 Med. 87 ; Ixiii 867 ; xl I 1181 ; 154 2 1367 ; xxxi i Teleph. Fr. 13 ; xcviia) 2 Lys. c. Frum. p. 165. 13 ; subsubnote c 5 (p. 464) Sopt. Aj. 313 ; 203 2 921 ; 5 1 (7) 1126 ; ix 1339 ; xl I Oed. Col. 188 ; Ixxxva 395 ; xxxiv 944 ; oxv 964 ; isia 3 1354, 5 ; 152 3 1418 ; xxviii Oed. Tyr. 523 ; isia 3 936 ; xxiii 1389 ; 127 2, 7 PhU. 494 ; i8i 3 Thuc. iii. 16. 1 ; cxi c 2, 3 18. 1 ; cxi c 2, 3 Trag. Inc. (Graecus) Fr. 55. 3 ; 27 1 ; Ixiii Emphasis ; ix ; 210 ; 341 ETrdv not used in Xenophon ; 27 iireirpdxet &» )( 7re7r/)ax(is hv eh) ; 26 Erfurdt on Aesoh. Cho. 305 ; 55 10 Soph. Track. 112 sqq. ; 152 4 Ernesti on Tac. Ann. xiii. 40 ; 343 3 ■Euphemism ; iii 3 ; 127 1 Euryphon ; 41a Evans (Dr.), his epitaph on Sir John Vanbrugh ; 329 FiSHLAKE on SXiau ; 172 3 Floruerunt of various Greek writers ; cxi Forbiger on genitives (Latin) in -ii ; 246 3, 9 on Lucret. ii. 36 ; 287b 5 959 sqq. ( = 946 sqq. M.) ; 287b 1034 ; 282a Fragments, dangers in the way of emending ; 238 ; 275 Funeral, epithets applied to a ; 330 Future and subjunctive, their connec- tion ; 14 6 ; 22a ; 162 sqq. Future in -aoixai ; 55 — — imperfect in Latin ; 10 2 Pynes Clinton (Mr.) on Antiphanes "AcrWT. Fr. i. ; Ixi 3 G, mispronunciation of ; 257 2 Genitive singular of Latin nouns and adjectives in -ius, -ium ; 246 3 Gilbert (Walther) on Martial's love of the construction si with the present subjunctive accompanied by the future indicative ; 277 Gladstone (Mr. ) on the English race ; xxxii 3 Golden bits, bridles, horse-shoes, coaoh- nails ; 47 ; s6aa ; Add. hair ; 156 5 Gottling ou the termination -rjci )( -170-1 ; 76 Grammarians (the Greek), their value ; xli ; Ixxxiii ; xcv their accuracy ; 171 their arbitrariness ; 58 on the accentuation of i,(pvuv, XpniTTUv (genitives plural) ; 58 1 on the aspiration of e^trtraro ; 58 2 on the uses of diBi and ei8i$ ; Ixxv 2 on Tp4(f>otv ; 67 1 (Herodian) on the termination -T^cri ; 76 (Thomas Magister) on Thuc. iii. 44. 3 ; 92 3 (in Bekker An. Or.) on Anoiffoi )( dKoOaopLOL ; xci 8 Hair, yellow or golden ; 156 5 ; Add. Hallam (Mr.) on alliteration ; 233 6 Hare (Archdeacon), on content ; 280 1 on the forms of the passive and middle futures and aorists in Greek ; 55 4 ; Ixxiv Harrison (Miss) on Soph. Fr. Inc. 724 ; Add. Hartung on Aesch. Ag. 1252 ; isoa 3 ■ Headlam (Mr. J. W. ) on the irptiKK-rins els pdiravov in Attic Law ; 107 2 Heath on Eur. Sec. 1111 ; 124a 1 Heindorf on aiiris followed by iKewos ; on ^v lLpa=i, Suli^a, &To\ai(To, sim. ; xci ; xcii on 85 as a subjunctive of Set ; Ixxxii ■ on SoKoi )( SoKol-q, sim, ; 133 2 on SiSifn, Sifij, (TvyyvtfTi, ^li^r;, sim. ; Ixxxri 2 on Ipxofiai, only in indicative mood ; xcv and subsubnote c (p. 464) on eiBii )( eiSiis ; Ixxv 4 on ^8ei.v as a first person ; xxxvii on ^f a, as past indefinite of &yu ; 171 2 on K&v del (Ar. Plut. 216) ; 86 2 on neiaiii (future) ; xllx 2 2 692 GREEK AND LATIN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES Rutherford (Dr.) on vop^vBhiT (active or passive ?) ; xiv 2 on Tp4s, iirwi, Sippa) ; 124a ; 127 conditional used for absolute tenses ; 85 ; 4Sa ; 143 ; 146-148 Terence, his style ; 235 1 Testament (New) Revisers, their demerits ; 2 ; 5 1 (/3) ; xxxii 3 ; 9 2 (1); 2S 5; 38 4; 443; 1397; xcviii ; xcix ; 325 ; Add. (Old) Revisers ; 24 12 ; 170 14 Thomas Magister, his worth ; Ixxxiii his testimony as to Thuc. iii. 44. 3; 92 3 Thucydides imitated by Camoens and Tasso ; 55 11 ; Ixxia i, 4 Tomb, a living ; cxxvii Toup on Soph. Oed. Col. 1418 ; xxviii TyrreU (Prof. R. Y.) on Ar. Lys. 116 ; 179a Vahlen on K&v el; 180 4 Valckenaer on Euripides' non-innovat- ing habit in point of construction ; 192 6 on Bur. Hipp. 1328 ; cix 3 Vanbnigh (Sir John), Dr. Evans' epitaph upon him ; 329 Variety, Greek love of ; xlib Vauvilliers on Soph. Oed. Col. 42, 205, 1418 ; xxviii Verrall (Dr. ) on Aesch. Ag. 340 ; xl i 1267 ; xii 3 1327 sqq. ; 70 3 Eur. Ion 175, 6 ; xxrii Versification, lines of three words only ; xcvii I, 3, 4 Vie Parisienne newspaper ; 156 2 Virgil mistranslates Homer ; cxxri CO . Theocritus ; 228 his name in Latin form= Vergilius ; 257 16 ; 260 Voice, assertion by passive, of its right to a past indefinite in -(rdfoiv ; 55 14 Walker (Mr. F. W.) on monerwi; 242 12 Webster on the derivation of " an" = "if"; 24 14 Wecklein (i)r. ) gives -5 as the termina- tion of the second person singular of presents and futures middle and passive ; 53 7 Wilkins (Mr. A. S.) on the form foicere; cxxx 3 Wolf on the value of the MSS. ; sub- subnote bb (p. 462) Wordsworth (Dr. Christopher) on Verg. JEcl. viii. 58 ; 228 Wordsworth (John) on futures like S((6|ai : xci i on Trot '^y{is ; and toT ^iyo ; 91 4 on Dem. de Cor. p. 284. 16 sqq. ; xlix 2 Y )( g sounds in Germany and (in England) in Yorkshire, etc. ; 257 2 Yellow or golden hair ; 156 6 sqq. Printed by R. & R. Clark, Edinburgh By Rev. W. GUNION RUTHERFORD, M.A., LL.D., Head Master of Westminster School. THE NEW PHRYNICHUS. A Revised Text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phrynichus, with Introductions and Commentary. 8vo. i8s. BABRIUS. Text with Introductory Dissertations, Critical Notes, Com- mentary, and Lexicon. 8vo. 12s. 6d. THE FOURTH BOOK OF THUCYDIDES. A revision of the text illustrating the principal causes of corruption in the manuscripts of this Author. Svo. 7s. 6d. SCHOLIA ARISTOPHANICA. Being such Comments adscript to the text of Aristophanes as are preserved in the Codex Ravennas, arranged, emended, and translated by the Rev. W. G. Rutherford. Svo. [In the Press. By R. C. JEBB, Litt.D. Regius Professor of Greek, and Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and M.P. for the University. THE ATTIC ORATORS, from Antiphon to Isaeus. Second Edition. 2 vols. Svo. 253. THE GROWTH AND INFLUENCE OF CLASSICAL GREEK POETRY. Lectures delivered in 1S92 on the Percy Turnbull Memorial Foundation in the Johns Hopkins University. Crown Svo. 7 s. net. By S. H. BUTCHER, Litt.D., LL.D., Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh, formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and of University College, Oxford. SOME ASPECTS OF THE GREEK GENIUS. Second Edition, revised. Crown Svo. 7 s. net. * * In this edition the author has withdrawn the chapter on ' ' Aristotle's Art of Poetry," as he intends it to form fart of a volume of essays on the " Poetics." In its f lace is printed a study of" The Dawn of Romanticism in Greek Poetry" which appears for the first time. MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON. TEXTS AND TRANSLATIONS. THE PHAEDO OF PLATO. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, and Appendices, by R. D. Archer- Hind, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Second Edition. Printed in " Macmillan Greek." 8vo. 8s. 6d. net. ARISTOTLE'S CONSTITUTION OF ATHENS. A Revised Text, with an Introduction, Critical and Explanatory Notes, Testimonia, and Indices. By John Edwin Sandys, Litt.D., Fellow and Tutor of St. John's College, and Public Orator in the University of Cambridge. 8vo. 15 s. THE EIGHTH BOOK OF THUCYDIDES' HISTORY. Edited, with Notes and Introduction, by H. C. Goodhart, M.A., Professor of Humanity in Edinburgh University, formerly Fellow and Lecturer of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8vo. 9s. AESCHYLUS.— CHOEPHORI. With an Introduction, Commentary, and Translation. By A. W. Verrall, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cam- bridge. 8V0. I2S. HOMER.— THE ILIAD. Edited, with English Notes and Introduction, by Walter Leaf, Litt.D., late Fellow of Trjnity College, Cambridge. Vol. I. Books I.-XII. 8vo. 14s. Vol. IL Books XIII.-XXIV. 8vo. 14s. THE ILIAD OF HOMER. Done into English prose by Andrew Lang, M.A., late Fellow of Merton College, Oxford ; Walter Leaf, Litt.D., late Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge ; and Ernest Myers, M.A., Fellow of Wadham College, Oxford. Crown 8vo. I2S. 6d. THE ODYSSEY OF HOMER. Done into English Prose by S. H. Butcher, Litt.D., LL.D., Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh ; and A. Lang, M.A., late Fellow of Merton College, Oxford. With a Plate. Crown 8vo. 6s. THE ODYSSEY OF HOMER. Books I.-XII. Translated into English verse by the Earl of Carnarvon. With a coloured map. Globe 8vo. 7 s. 6d. MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON.